Operating Instructions SITRANS Probe LU (HART) 08/2017 Edition Ultrasonic Transmitters

SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION
INSTRUMENT LIST
INSTALLATION, OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
KHINGAN TIN
Sepro Contact Details: Sepro Mineral Systems Corp.

Unit 101A – 9850 201st Street
Langley, British Columbia
Canada, V1M 4A3
Telephone: (+1) (604) 888-5568
Fax: (+1) (604) 888-5521
Email: service@seprosystems.com
Support Documentation Instrument List
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INSTRUMENT LIST
a. Siemen’s Sitrans F M 5100 W Operating Instructions
b. Siemen’s Sitrans F M MAG 5100 W Data Sheet
c. Triac Controls Electric Actuators
d. Triac TDC-400 Installation & Maintenance Manual
e. Triac TMC3 Installation & Maintenance Manual
f. Sparling Tigermag EP Installation, Operation & Maintenance
Manual
g. Sparling Tigermag EP FM656 Obstructionless Electronic
Flowmeter Product Data Sheet
h. Rhosonics Model 9690 Ultrasonic Inline Density Analyzer
Manual
i. Rhosonics 9690 Series Data Sheet
j. Rhosonics UWC wafers & UMCS sensors For Rhosonics Density
Meters Installation Manual
k. Siemen’s Belt Scales Milltronics MSI and MMI Operating
Instructions
l. Siemen’s Belt Scales Milltronics MSI and MMI Data Sheet
m. Siemen’s Sitrans WS300 Speed Sensors Operating Instructions
n. Siemen’s Integrators Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L Operating
Instructions
o. Siemen’s Ultrasonic Transmitters Sitrans Probe LU (HART) Quick
Start Manual
p. Siemen’s Ultrasonic Transmitters Sitrans Probe LU (HART)
Operating Instructions
Sepro Mineral Systems Corp.

Electromagnetic flowmeters
SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W
Operating Instructions • 07/2010
SITRANS F
Introduction 1
Safety notes 2
Description 3
SITRANS F
Installing/Mounting 4
Electromagnetic Flowmeters
SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W Connecting 5
Service and maintenance 6

Troubleshooting/FAQs 7
Technical data 8
Appendix A
Electromagnetic sensor type SITRANS F M MAG

5100 W for use with transmitter types SITRANS F M
MAG 5000/6000/6000I
07/2010
A5E03063678-01
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the corresponding information is not taken into
account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation for the specific task, in particular its warning notices and
safety instructions. Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of
identifying risks and avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be adhered to. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this
publication may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the
owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG order number: A5E03063678 Copyright © Siemens AG 2010.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 09/2010 Technical data subject to change
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 Items supplied ................................................................................................................................5
1.2 History ............................................................................................................................................5
1.3 Further Information ........................................................................................................................6
2 Safety notes............................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 Laws and directives .......................................................................................................................7
2.2 Installation in hazardous area ........................................................................................................9
2.3 Certificates ...................................................................................................................................10
3 Description............................................................................................................................................... 11
3.1 System components ....................................................................................................................11
3.2 Theory of operation......................................................................................................................12
4 Installing/Mounting................................................................................................................................... 15
4.1 Installation safety precautions......................................................................................................15
4.2 Determining a location .................................................................................................................15
4.3 Orienting the sensor.....................................................................................................................18
4.4 Mounting ......................................................................................................................................19
4.5 Potential equalization...................................................................................................................21
5 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 23
5.1 Remote installation ......................................................................................................................24
5.2 Installation check .........................................................................................................................26
5.3 Potting ..........................................................................................................................................26
5.4 Direct burial ..................................................................................................................................28
6 Service and maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 29
6.1 Maintenance.................................................................................................................................29
6.2 Recalibration ................................................................................................................................29
6.3 Transportation/storage.................................................................................................................29
6.4 Unit repair.....................................................................................................................................30
6.5 Technical support.........................................................................................................................30
6.6 Return procedures .......................................................................................................................31
7 Troubleshooting/FAQs............................................................................................................................. 33
7.1 Sensor check ...............................................................................................................................33
7.2 Fluctuating process values ..........................................................................................................34

Operating Instructions, 07/2010, A5E03063678-01 3
Table of contents
8 Technical data ......................................................................................................................................... 37

8.1 MAG 5100 W............................................................................................................................... 37
8.2 Cable data ................................................................................................................................... 40
8.3 Effect of temperature on working pressure ................................................................................. 41
8.4 Process fluid conductivity............................................................................................................ 42
8.5 Liner selection ............................................................................................................................. 43
8.6 Electrode selection...................................................................................................................... 43
8.7 Sizing tables................................................................................................................................ 44
8.8 Dimensions and weight ............................................................................................................... 46
A Appendix.................................................................................................................................................. 51
A.1 Flange mating dimensions (metric)............................................................................................. 51
A.2 Factory settings........................................................................................................................... 53
A.3 Coil resistance............................................................................................................................. 55
A.4 Ordering ...................................................................................................................................... 57
Glossary .................................................................................................................................................. 59
Index........................................................................................................................................................ 61

4 Operating Instructions, 07/2010, A5E03063678-01
Introduction 1
These instructions contain all the information you need for using the device.
The instructions are aimed at persons mechanically installing the device, connecting it
electronically, configuring the parameters and commissioning it as well as service and
maintenance engineers.
Note
It is the responsibility of the customer that the instructions and directions provided in the
manual are read, understood and followed by the relevant personnel before installing the
device.
1.1 Items supplied
 SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

 Calibration report
 SITRANS F M literature CD
 Quick Start guide
1.2 History
The contents of these instructions are regularly reviewed and corrections are included in
subsequent editions. We welcome all suggestions for improvement.
The following table shows the most important changes in the documentation compared to
each previous edition.
Edition Remarks
01 First edition
07/2010 Replaces MAG 5100 W part of SITRANS F M Handbook (A5E02435647) and MAG 5100
W instruction (A5E00718677)

Introduction
1.3 Further Information
1.3 Further Information

The contents of these Operating Instructions shall not become part of or modify any prior or
existing agreement, commitment or legal relationship. All obligations on the part of Siemens
AG are contained in the respective sales contract which also contains the complete and
solely applicable warranty conditions. Any statements contained herein do not create new
warranties or modify the existing warranty.
Product information on the Internet

The Operating Instructions are available on the CD-ROM shipped with the device, and on
the Internet on the Siemens homepage, where further information on the range of SITRANS
F flowmeters may also be found:
Product information on the internet (http://www.siemens.com/flowdocumentation)
Worldwide contact person

If you need more information or have particular problems not covered sufficiently by the
operating instructions, please get in touch with your contact person. You can find contact
information for your local contact person on the Internet:
Local contact person (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner)
See also
Technical support (Page 30)

Safety notes 2
CAUTION
Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance. Only qualified personnel should
install or operate this instrument.
Note
Alterations to the product, including opening or improper repairs of the product, are not
permitted.
If this requirement is not observed, the CE mark and the manufacturer's warranty will expire.
2.1 Laws and directives
General requirements
Installation of the equipment must comply with national regulations.
Instrument safety standards

The device has been tested at the factory, based on the safety requirements. In order to
maintain this condition over the expected life of the device the requirements described in
these Operating Instructions must be observed.
CAUTION
Material compatibility
Siemens Flow Instruments can provide assistance with the selection of wetted sensor
parts. However, the full responsibility for the selection rests with the customer and Siemens
Flow Instruments can take no responsibility for any failure due to material incompatibility.

Safety notes
2.1 Laws and directives
CE marked equipment
All meters carry either a CE mark or a CE mark followed by eg.200
● CE200: This indicates that the product conforms to:
– PED 97/23/EC
– LVD 2006/95/EC
– EMC 2004/108/EC
● CE: This indicates that the product conforms to:
– LVD 2006/95/EC
– EMC 2004/108/EC
Compliance with PED directive

"Pressure Equipment Directive" (PED) is mandatory for all pressure equipment sold within
the EU and EFTA.
Siemens Flow Instruments products confirms to PED by following the tables below.
Table 2- 1 MAG 5100 W (7ME6580 only DN15 ... 600 (½" ... 24"))
Flange mm PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 150 lb 300 lb

15 N/A N/A SEP SEP N/A
50 N/A SEP N/A SEP N/A
100 SEP SEP N/A SEP N/A
125 N/A SEP N/A PED N/A
150 N/A PED N/A PED N/A
200 SEP PED N/A PED N/A
250 LVD PED N/A PED N/A
700 LVD PED* N/A N/A PED
750 N/A N/A N/A N/A PED

Safety notes
2.2 Installation in hazardous area

The key to the tables is as follows:
PED Product covered by PED and only available as fully PED-conforming

PED* Product covered by PED but available as either conforming or non-conforming to
PED
SEP Excluded from PED under Sound Engineering Practice
LVD Excluded from PED under the Low Voltage Directive
2.2 Installation in hazardous area
WARNING
Equipment used in hazardous areas must be approved for use in hazardous area and
marked accordingly. It is required that the special conditions for safe use provided in the
manual and in the FM / CSA certificates are followed!
Hazardous area approvals

The device is approved for use in hazardous area and has the following approvals:
● MAG 5100 W DN 15 ... 1200: FM / CSA Class I, Div. 2
WARNING
Make sure the hazardous area approval is suitable for the environment in which the
device will be installed.
WARNING
All approvals are based on non-flammable processes only!

Safety notes
2.3 Certificates
WARNING
Potential equalization
In operation, the output is earthed through the conductive medium being measured and
therefore potential equalisation is necessary throughout the hazardous area.
The apparatus housing shall be connected to the potential equalising conductor in the
hazardous area.
WARNING
Laying of cables
Cables for use in hazardous area must satisfy the requirements for having a proof
voltage < AC 500 V applied between the conductor/ground, conductor/shield and
shield/ground.
Connect the devices that are operated in hazardous areas as per the stipulations
applicable in the country of operation.
2.3 Certificates
Certificates are posted on the Internet and on the documentation CD-ROM shipped with the
device.
See also
Technical data (Page 37)
Certificates on the Internet (http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/certificates)

Description 3
The main applications of the SITRANS F M electromagnetic flow sensors can be found in the
following fields:
● Process industry
● Chemical industry
● Steel industry
● Mining
● Utility
● Power generation & distribution
● Oil & gas / HPI
● Water & waste water
● Pulp & paper
3.1 System components

The SITRANS F M USM II flowmeter system includes:
● Transmitter (types: SITRANS F M MAG 5000/6000 or MAG 6000 I)
● Sensor (types: SITRANS F M MAG 1100/1100F, MAG 3100/3100 P or MAG 5100 W)
● Communication module (optional) (types: HART, PROFIBUS PA/DP, MODBUS RTU RS
485, Foundation Fieldbus H1, Devicenet)
● SENSORPROM memory unit
Communication solutions
The SITRANS F USM II range of add on modules, presently including HART, Foundation
Fieldbus. MODBUS RTU RS 485, PROFIBUS PA / DP and Devicenet, are all applicable with
the SITRANS F M MAG 6000 transmitter.

Description
3.2 Theory of operation
The SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W sensor housing and flanges are designed in carbon steel
and terminal box in fibre glass reinforced polyamide. Measuring pipe is made of stainless
steel (AISI 304) and liners are available in NBR Hard Rubber, Ebonite Hard Rubber, or
EPDM, which makes the sensor highly resistant to a wide range of chemicals. Electrodes are
made of Hastelloy.
MAG 5100W DN15 ... 40 MAG 5100W DN50 ... 300 MAG 5100W DN350 ... 1200
(7ME6520)
MAG 5100W DN25 ... 2000
(7ME6580)
MAG 5100W compact MAG 5100W compact

installation with MAG installation with MAG 6000 I
5000/6000 IP67
The sensors carry a wide range of approvals, see Technical data (Page 37).

The flow measuring principle is based on Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
0DJQHWLF)LHOG
)ORZ

Description
Ui = When an electrical conductor of length L is moved at velocity v, perpendicular to the

lines of flux through a magnetic field of strength B, the voltage Ui is induced at the ends of
the conductor
Ui = L x B x v
● Ui = Induced voltage
● L = Conductor length = Inner pipe diameter = k1
● B = Magnetic field strength = k2
● v = Velocity of conductor (media)
● k = k1 x k2
Ui = k x v, the electrode signal is directly proportional to the fluid velocity
Sensorprom memory unit

All SITRANS F M electromagnetic flowmeters feature a unique SENSORPROM® memory
unit which stores sensor calibration data and transmitter settings for the lifetime of the
product.
At commissioning the flowmeter commences measurement without any initial programming.
The factory settings matching the sensor are stored in the SENSORPROM® unit. Also
customer- specified settings are downloaded to the SENSORPROM® unit. Should the
transmitter be replaced, the new transmitter will upload all previous settings and resume
measurement without any need for re-programming.
Furthermore, the "fingerprint" used in connection with the Siemens Flow Instruments
Verificator is stored during the sensor calibration.
USM II "Plug & Play" add-on communication modules

USM II - the Universal Signal Module with "Plug & Play" simplicity makes it easy to access
and integrate the flow measurement with almost any system. It ensures the flowmeter will be
easy to upgrade to new communication platforms in the future, too.

Description

SITRANS F flowmeters are suitable for in- and outdoor installations.
● Make sure that pressure and temperature specifications indicated on the device
nameplate / label will not be exceeded.
WARNING
Installation in hazardous location
Special requirements apply to the location and interconnection of sensor and
transmitter. See "Installation in hazardous area"
4.1 Installation safety precautions
WARNING
In applications with working pressures/media that can be dangerous to people,
surroundings, equipment or others in case of pipe fracture, we recommend that special
precautions such as special placement, shielding or installation of a security guard or a
security valve are taken when the sensor is mounted.
● Ensure that stresses and loading caused by e.g. earthquakes, traffic, high winds and fire
damage if appropriate are taken into account during installation.
● Ensure that the flowmeter is installed such that it does not act as a focus for pipeline
stresses. External loadings are not taken into account in the flowmeter design.
● Provide adequate protection to minimise any risk of contact with hot surfaces.
WARNING
Prevent personal injuries by assuring that operation below pressure guards cannot take
place, if working with vacuum or fluids boiling readily.
4.2 Determining a location
NOTICE
The sensor must always be completely filled with liquid.

Installing/Mounting
● Locate the the flowmeter in u-shaped pipes if pipes are only partially filled or have free
outlet
Figure 4-1 Correct installation in U-tube
● Avoid the following installations

– Installation at the highest point in the pipe system
– Installation in vertical pipes with free outlet
Figure 4-2 Correct installation with filled pipes
Figure 4-3 Correct installation at low point in system before outlet
Inlet and outlet conditions

To achieve accurate flow measurement it is essential to have straight lengths of inlet and
outlet pipes and a certain distance to pumps and valves.
It is also important to centre the flowmeter in relation to pipe flanges and gaskets.
Figure 4-4 Inlet and outlet conditions

Installing/Mounting
Installation in large pipes

The flowmeter can be installed between two reducers (e.g. DIN 28545). At 8° the following
pressure drop curves apply. The curves are applicable to water.
Example:
A flow of 3 m/s (V) in a sensor with a diameter reduction from DN 100 to DN 80 (d1/d2 = 0.8)
gives a pressure drop of 2.9 mbar.
For installation conditions for transmitters, see respective transmitter operating instructions.

Installing/Mounting
4.3 Orienting the sensor
4.3 Orienting the sensor

The sensor operates in all orientations, but Siemens has the following recommendations:
● Vertical installation with an upwards flow
Figure 4-5 Vertical orientation, upwards flow
CAUTION
Abrasive liquids / liquids containing solid particles
A vertical installation minimizes wear and deposits in the sensor
NOTICE
Gas/air bubbles in the liquid
A vertical installation minimizes any negative effect of gas/air bubbles in the liquid
● Horizontal installation, terminal box upwards or downwards
Figure 4-6 Horizontal installation, various terminal box positions
CAUTION
Do NOT mount the sensor with the terminal box sideways
This will position the electrodes at the top where there is possibility for air bubbles and
at the bottom where there is possibility for mud, sludge, sand etc.
NOTICE
Empty pipe detection
For applications with empty pipe detection, the sensor can be tilted 45°, as shown
above.

Installing/Mounting
4.4 Mounting
4.4 Mounting
● Install the sensor in rigid pipelines in order to support the weight of the meter.
● Center the connecting pipelines axially in order to avoid turbulent flow profiles.
● Use proper gaskets according to liner type
Figure 4-7 Correct installation with gaskets
Vibrations
Avoid strong vibrations.
Figure 4-8 Avoid vibrations
CAUTION
In applications with strong vibrations, Siemens recommend remote mounting of the
transmitter!

Installing/Mounting
4.4 Mounting
Torques
Fasten screws according to the torques values below
Figure 4-9 Torques values
NOTICE
Torque values are calculated on the basis of use of gaskets.
Table 4- 1 Maximum allowable torques
DN PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 AWWA

Mm Inch Nm F/lbs Nm F/lbs Nm F/lbs Nm F/lbs Nm F/lbs
15 ½ N/A N/A N/A N/A 10 7 6 5 N/A N/A
25 1" N/A N/A N/A N/A 10 7 7 5 N/A N/A
40 1½" N/A N/A N/A N/A 16 12 9 7 N/A N/A
50 2" N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 25 18 N/A N/A
65 2½" N/A N/A 25/25 18/18 N/A N/A 25 18 N/A N/A
80 3" N/A N/A 25/25 18/18 N/A N/A 34 25 N/A N/A
100 4" N/A N/A 25/25 18/18 N/A N/A 26 19 N/A N/A
125 5" N/A N/A 29/32 21/24 N/A N/A 42 31 N/A N/A
150 6" N/A N/A 50/50 37/37 N/A N/A 57 42 N/A N/A
200 8" 50/50 37/37 50/52 37/38 N/A N/A 88 65 N/A N/A
250 10" 50/50 37/37 82/88 61/65 N/A N/A 99 73 N/A N/A
300 12" 57/62 42/46 111/117 82/86 N/A N/A 132 97 N/A N/A
350 14" 60/60 44/44 120/120 89/89 N/A N/A 225 166 N/A N/A
400 16" 88/88 65/65 170/170 125/125 N/A N/A 210 155 N/A N/A
450 18" 92/92 68/68 170/170 125/125 N/A N/A 220 162 N/A N/A
500 20" 103/103 76/76 230/230 170/170 N/A N/A 200 148 N/A N/A
600 24" 161/161 119/119 350/350 258/258 N/A N/A 280 207 N/A N/A
700 28" 200/200 148/148 304/304 224/224 N/A N/A N/A N/A 200 148
750 30" N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 240 177

Installing/Mounting
4.5 Potential equalization
DN PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 AWWA

800 32" 274/274 202/202 386/380 285/285 N/A N/A N/A N/A 260 192
900 36" 288/288 213/213 408/408 301/301 N/A N/A N/A N/A 240 177
1000 40" 382/382 282/282 546/546 403/403 N/A N/A N/A N/A 280 207
1200 48" 395/395 292/292 731/731 539/538 N/A N/A N/A N/A 310 229
1400 54" -/503 -/317 -/736 -/543 N/A N/A N/A N/A 528 389
1600 66" -/684 -/505 -/913 -/674 N/A N/A N/A N/A 698 515
1800 72" -/771 -/569 -/937 -/692 N/A N/A N/A N/A 700 516
2000 78" -/867 -/640 -/1128 -/832 N/A N/A N/A N/A 890 656

To obtain optimum results from the measuring system, the sensor must have the same
electrical potential as the liquid being measured.
This is achieved by means of built-in grounding electrodes.
Figure 4-10 Potential equalization with earthing electrodes
Cathodic protected piping

Special attention must be paid to systems with cathodic protection
WARNING
Use in hazardous area!
Cathodic pipe protection is not allowed in hazardous areas

Installing/Mounting
Figure 4-11 Cathodic protection
● Isolate the sensor from cathodic protected pipes using insulated bolts.
● Use bypass strap between the mating flanges
NOTICE
Remote mounted sensor versions
If the above is not acceptable, remote mounted sensors can alternatively be connected
as follows:
 Connect coil current cable shield at sensor end via a 1.5 µF condensator
 Make sure that electrode cable shield is not connected at both ends

Connecting 5
The following contains a short description of how to connect a remote mounted sensor to a
transmitter type SITRANS F M MAG 5000 / 6000 or MAG 6000 I. For more information, e.g.
about wiring of power supply and outputs, refer to the Operating Instructions for the
respective transmitters.
Before connecting
● Check that serial numbers on sensor and SENSORPROM® unit are identical.
WARNING
The pertinent regulations must be observed for electrical installation.
 Never install the device with the mains voltage switched on!
 Danger of electric shock!
 The electrodes and magnetic current line may only be connected when the device is not
connected to the power supply.
 If the housing is under voltage (power supply), the cover may be unscrewed by qualified
personnel only.
WARNING
Mains supply from building installation Class II
A switch or circuit breaker (max. 15 A) must be installed in close proximity to the equipment
and within easy reach of the operator. It must be marked as the disconnecting device for
the equipment.
Cable specifications
● Only use cables with at least the same degree of protection as the sensor to install the
sensor.
● The line length from the cable gland to the terminals must be kept as short as possible.
Line loops in the terminal box must be avoided.

Connecting
5.1 Remote installation
● To guarantee the IP 67 degree of protection, use cables with the required specifications.
WARNING
Protective conductor terminal
The required cable is min. AGW16 or 1.5 Cu.
WARNING
Wire insulation
The insulation between the connected mains supply and 24 V AC/DC supply for the
flowmeter must at least be rated with double or reinforced insulation at mains voltage.
For field wiring installation: Ensure that the National Installation Code of the country in
which the flowmeters are installed is met.
See also
Cable data (Page 40)
NOTICE
Remote installation only
The following applies to remote installation of MAG 5000 / 6000 or MAG 6000 I.
1. Unscrew and remove terminal box lid.

Connecting
2. Remove SENSORPROM® unit from sensor and mount it on connection plate in

transmitter, see relevant transmitter operating instructions.
3. Fit the ½" NPT or M20 cable glands for supply and output cables.
4. Fit and connect electrode and coil cables as shown below.
6KLHOG
CAUTION
Unshielded cable ends
Keep unscreened cable ends as short as possible.
CAUTION
Prevent interference
Separate electrode and coil cables to prevent interference.

Connecting
5.2 Installation check
5. Tighten cable glands well to obtain optimum sealing.
WARNING
Mount terminal box lid before power up.
5.2 Installation check

The meter is now ready to go into normal operation - for commissioning and setting of
parameters refer to the relevant transmitter manual.
Before commissioning it must be checked that:
● The device has been installed and connected in accordance with the guidelines provided
in chapter 4 Installing/mounting (Page 15) and 5 Connecting (Page 23)
5.3 Potting
If sensor is buried or permanently submerged, terminal box must be encapsulated with
silicon dielectric gel (non-toxic, transparent and self-healing gel)
CAUTION
Do not pot meter before electrical connections have been made.
● Mix the two components of the potting kit well and pour into terminal box.
● Let cure for approximately 24 hours at approximately 25°C (77°F). Curing time increases
by 100% per -10°C (-18°F).

Connecting
5.3 Potting
Horizontal orientation Vertical orientation
NOTICE
Gel can be penetrated with test instruments or be removed in case of cable replacement.

Connecting
5.4 Direct burial
5.4 Direct burial

Recommendations for direct burial of remote sensor:
● Check for visible damages in paint finish !
● Use protection conduit !
● Protect sensor with pea gravel at least 3000 mm around sensor. This provides some
drainage and also avoids caking sensor with earth. It also helps to locate sensor in case
excavation takes place.
Figure 5-1 Direct burial of sensor
CAUTION
Sensor should not be subject to heavy vehicles applying excessive weight above sensor
or pipeline
CAUTION
SENSORPROM® memory unit
Remove the SENSORPROM® from terminal box on sensor and relocate in remote
transmitter prior to burying sensor.
All sensor data plate information and serial number should be recorded for each sensor
prior to burying. This will ensure correct matching with SENSORPROM® unit.
WARNING
Electrical cable identification
Use suitable coil and electrode cables
Lay electrical cable identification tape above pea gravel before it is covered with earth.

6.1 Maintenance
The device is maintenance-free, however, a periodic inspection according pertinent
directives and regulations must be carried out.
An inspection can include check of:
● Ambient conditions
● Seal integrity of the process connections, cable entries, and cover screws
● Reliability of power supply, lightning protection, and grounds
6.2 Recalibration
Siemens Flow Instruments offers to recalibrate the sensor. The following calibrations are
offered as standard:
● Standard matched pair calibration
● Customer specified matched pair calibration (up to 10 points)
● Accredited matched pair calibration
Note
For recalibration the memory unit must always be returned with the sensor
6.3 Transportation/storage
The sensor is a fragile piece of equipment. Impact and shock can

cause measuring inaccuracy. Therefore during transportation it must
be placed in the transportation box delivered by Siemens Flow
Instruments. If this is not possible, the alternative sensor packaging
must be able to withstand the hazards from transportation.

Service and maintenance
6.4 Unit repair
Handling
Figure 6-1 Handling of sensor
6.4 Unit repair
CAUTION
Repair and service must be carried out by Siemens authorized personnel only.
Note
Siemens Flow Instruments defines sensors as non-repairable products.
6.5 Technical support

If you have any technical questions about the device described in these Operating
Instructions and do not find the right answers, you can contact Technical Support:
● Via the Internet using the Support Request:
Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
● Via Phone:
– Europe: +49 (0)911 895 7222
– America: +1 423 262 5710
– Asia-Pacific: +86 10 6475 7575
Further information about our technical support is available in the Internet at
Technical support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16604318)

6.6 Return procedures
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the
Internet at:
Service and support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
There you will find:
● The latest product information, FAQs, downloads, tips and tricks.
● Our newsletter, providing you with the latest information about your products.
● A Knowledge Manager to find the right documents for you.
● Our bulletin board, where users and specialists share their knowledge worldwide.
● You can find your local contact partner for Industry Automation and Drives Technologies
in our partner database.
● Information about field service, repairs, spare parts and lots more under "Services."
Additional Support
Please contact your local Siemens representative and offices if you have additional
questions about the device
Find your contact partner at:
Local contact person (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner)

Enclose the delivery note, the cover note for return delivery together with the declaration of
decontamination form on the outside of the package in a well-fastened clear document
pouch.
Required forms
● Delivery Note
● Cover Note for Return Delivery with the following information
Return delivery form (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16604370)
– product (ordering number)
– number of devices or spare parts returned
– reason for the return
● Declaration of Decontamination
Decontamination declaration
(http://pia.khe.siemens.com/efiles/feldg/files/Service/declaration_of_decontamination_en.
pdf)

With this declaration you certify that the returned products/spare parts have been
carefully cleaned and are free from any residues.
If the device has been operated together with toxic, caustic, flammable or water-
damaging products, clean the device before return by rinsing or neutralizing. Ensure that
all cavities are free from dangerous substances. Then, double-check the device to ensure
the cleaning is completed.
We shall not service a device or spare part unless the declaration of decontamination
confirms proper decontamination of the device or spare part. Shipments without a
declaration of decontamination shall be cleaned professionally at your expense before
further proceeding.
You can find the forms on the Internet and on the CD delivered with the device.

Troubleshooting/FAQs 7
7.1 Sensor check
Requirement
To check the SITRANS F M sensors the following test instruments will be required:
● Digital Meter/Multimeter
● Megger
● (Moving Coil Meter)
Sensor check
Remove the transmitter from the sensor or remote position before making the following
checks.
Coil resistance check

● Measure the coil resistance between connection numbers 85 and 86 using a digital
meter.
Resistance should be around 100 ohms ±10 ohms. (See Coil resistence table)
A low reading may indicate moisture within the coil housing or shorted coil tums.
A high reading would indicate an open circuit coil.
NOTICE
In case of deviation from nominal coil values, the sensor is damaged and must be replaced
Coil insulation check
WARNING
Potential hazard!
Non-ex installations only!
● Megger between connection number 85 and the sensor body.

The resistance should be above 20 Megohms.
A low megger reading would indicate the coil insulation is braking down. This is normally due
to fluid ingress into the coil housing.

Troubleshooting/FAQs
7.2 Fluctuating process values
Sensors with an insulation resistance down to 1 Megohms may still work satisfactorily but
this is not guaranteed.
Electrode resistance check

● Measure the electrode resistance between connections 82 and Zero with a moving coil
meter.
With a sensor full of fluid the resistance should be between 5Kohms and 50Kohms.
If the sensor is empty the resistance will be infinite.
● Repeat the resistance measurements between connections 83 and Zero.
The results should be the same.
If the resistance is low there may be a short on the electrodes or wiring (in the case of a
remote mounted transmitter). Alternatively there may be water ingress or moisture in the
terminal box.
If the resistance is high and the pipe is completely full of fluid check the following:
1. The fluid is electrically conductive.
2. Electrodes are not coated with grease or any deposit.
3. Electrode circuit is not open
4. The remote mounted transmitter has a 3 core cable with an overall shield continuously
from the sensor to the transmitter, including junction boxes and terminal rails inside
panels.
5. The shield is connected to the Zero or to the earth terminal (PE) on the sensor.
NOTICE
Sensors removed from line
For sensors removed from line with dry bore, use megger between terminal 82 and
compression plate, and 83 and compression plate to show any water ingress behind
electrodes or within enclosure.
Question
Why do the displayed process values fluctuate when the electrode cable is moved?

Answer
There are several causes to the fluctuating process values:
● Deposits on electrodes
– Clean the electrodes.
● Defect electrode cable
– Replace the cable
● Incorrect cable connection
– Connect the electrode cable (82, 83, 0 and shield) according to the instructions in
chapter Connecting (Page 23)
NOTICE
Vibrating environments
It is recommended to use special low noise cables for sensor sizes DN 2 and 3
installed in vibrating environments.


Technical data 8
8.1 MAG 5100 W
Table 8- 1 Technical data
Version MAG 5100W (7ME6520) MAG 5100W (7ME6580)

Product characteristic Mainly for the European market Mainly for the non-European market
EPDM or NBR lining Ebonite lining
Design and nominal size Coned sensor: Full bore sensor:
 DN 15 ... 300 (½" ... 12")  DN 25 ... 2000 (1" ... 78")
Full bore sensor:
 DN 350 ... 1200 (14" ... 48")
Measuring principle Electromagnetic induction
Excitation frequency DN 15 ... 65 (½" ... 2½"): DN 25 ... 65 (1" ... 2½"):
(Mains supply: 50 Hz/60 Hz)  12.5 Hz / 15 Hz  12.5 Hz / 15 Hz
DN 80 ... 150 (3" ... 6"): DN 80 ... 150 (3" ... 6"):
 6.25 Hz / 7.5 Hz  6.25 Hz / 7.5 Hz
DN 200 ... 300 (8" ... 12"): DN 200 ... 1200 (8" ... 48"):
 3.125 Hz / 3.75 Hz  3.125 Hz / 3.75 Hz
DN 350 ... 1200 (14" ... 48"): DN 1400 ... 2000 (54" ... 78"):
 1.5625 Hz / 1.875 Hz  1.5625 Hz / 1.875 Hz
Table 8- 2 Process connections

EN 1092-1 PN 10 (145 psi): Raised face
 DN 200 ... 300 (8" ... 12") (EN 1092-1, DIN 3501 and BS4504
Flat face flanges have the same mating dimensions)
PN 10 (145 psi): PN 16 (87 psi):
 DN 350 ... 1200 (14" ... 48")  DN 1400 ... 2000 (54" ... 78")
Raised face flanges
PN 10 (145 psi):
PN 16 (232 psi):
 DN 200 ... 2000 (8" ... 78")
 DN 50 ... 300 (2" ... 12")
PN16 (232 psi):
Flat face flanges
 DN 65 ... 600 (2½" ... 24")
PN 16 (232 psi):
PN 40 (580 psi):
 DN 350 ... 1200 (14" ... 48")
Raised face flanges  DN 25 ... 50 (1" ... 2")
PN 40 (580 psi):
 DN 15 ... 40 (½" ... 1½")
Flat face flanges

Technical data
8.1 MAG 5100 W

ANSI B16.5 Class 150 lb: ½" ... 24" Class 150 lb: 1" ... 24"
AWWA C-207 Class D: Class D:
 28" ... 48", Flat face flanges  28" ... 78", Flat face flanges
AS4087 PN 16 (230 psi): PN 16 (230 psi):
 DN 50 ... 1200 (2" ... 48")  DN 50 ... 1200 (2" ... 48")
JIS B 2220:2004 - K10 (1" ... 24")
Table 8- 3 Rated operating conditions

Ambient temperature -40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F) -40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F)
 Sensor
 With compact transmitter
MAG 5000/6000 -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F) -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F)
MAG 6000 I -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F) -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F)
Operating pressure [abs. bar]1 DN 15 ... 40 (½" ... 1½") DN 25 ... 50 (1" ... 2")
0.01 ... 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi) 0.01 ... 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi)
DN 50 ... 300 (2" ... 12") DN 65 ... 1200 (2½" ... 48")
0.03 ... 20 bar (0.44 ... 290 psi) 0.01 ... 16 bar (0.15 ... 232 psi)
DN 350 ... 1200 (14" ... 48") DN 1400 ... 2000 (54" ... 78")
0.01 ... 16 bar (0.15 ... 232 psi) 0.01 ... 10 bar (0.15 ... 145 psi)
Enclosure rating
Standard IP67 to EN 60529 / NEMA 4X/6 (1 IP67 to EN 60529 / NEMA 4X/6 (1
mH2O for 30 minutes) mH2O for 30 minutes)
Option IP68 to EN 60529 / NEMA 6P (10 IP68 to EN 60529 / NEMA 6P (10
mH2O continuously) mH2O continuously)
Corrosive category C4 according to ISO 12944-2 C4 according to ISO 12944-2
Pressure drop DN 15 and 25 (½" and 1"): Insignificant
 Max. 20 mbar (0.29 psi) at 1 m/s (3
ft/s)
DN 40 ... 300 (1½" ... 12"):
 Max. 25 mbar (0.36 psi) at 3 m/s
(10ft/s)
DN 350 ... 1200 (14" ... 48"):
 Insginificant
Test pressure 1.5 x PN (where applicable) 1.5 x PN (where applicable)
Mechanical load (vibration) 18 ... 1000 Hz random in x,y, z 18 ... 1000 Hz random in x,y, z
directions for 2 hours according to EN directions for 2 hours according to EN
60068-2-36 60068-2-36
Sensor: 3.17 grms Sensor: 3.17 grms
Sensor with compact MAG 5000/6000 Sensor with compact MAG 5000/6000
transmittter mounted: 3.17 grms transmittter mounted: 3.17 grms
Sensor with compact MAG 6000 I Sensor with compact MAG 6000 I
transmitter mounted: 1.14 grms transmitter mounted: 1.14 grms

Technical data
8.1 MAG 5100 W

Process fluid temperature
NBR -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... 158 °F) -
EPDM -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... 158 °F) -
EPDM (MI-001) +0.1 ... +30 °C (32 ... 76 °C) -
Ebonite - -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... 158 °F)
EMC EMC 2004/108/EC EMC 2004/108/EC
Maximum operating pressure decreases with increasing operating temperature
Table 8- 4 Design

Housing and flange material Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant Carbon steel ASTM A 105, with
two-component epoxy coating (min. corrosion-resistant two-component
150 µm) epoxy coating (min. 150 µm)
Corrosive category C4, according to
ISO 12944-2
Measuring pipe AISI 304 (1.4301) AISI 304 (1.4301)
Electrodes Hastelloy Hastelloy
Grounding electrodes (standard Hastelloy Hastelloy
Terminal box Fibre glass reinforced polyamide Fibre glass reinforced polyamide
Table 8- 5 Certificates and approvals

Calibration DN 15 ... 300: Zero-point, 2 x 25 % and 2 x 90 %
Standard production calibration,  Zero-point, 2 x 25 % and 2 x 90 %
calibration report shipped with sensor DN 350 ... 1200:
 Zero-point, 1 x 25 % and 1 x 90 %
Custody transfer (only with MAG OIML R 49 pattern approval cold water -
5000/6000 CT) (Denmark and Germany):
 DN 50 ... 300 (2" ... 12")
MI 001 cold water (EU):
 DN 50 ... 300 (2" ... 12")

Technical data
8.2 Cable data

Drinking water approvals EPDM liner:
 ANSI/NSF 61 Standard (Cold water,  NSF/ANSI Standard 61 (Cold water,
US) US)
 WRAS (WRc, BS6920 cold water,  WRAS (WRc, BS6920 cold water,
GB) GB)
 ACS (F)
 DVGW W270 (D)
 Belgaqua (NBR)
NBR liner:
 ANSI/NSF 61 Standard (Cold water,
US), only ANSI and AWWA flanges)
Other approvals  MCERTS  PED - 97/23 EC1) (only < DN 600 (<
 PED - 97/23 EC1), CRN 24"))
 FM Class 1, Div 2  FM Class 1, Div 2
 CSA Class 1, Div 2  CSA Class 1, Div 2
1) : For sizes larger than 600 mm (24") in PN 16, PED conformity is available as cost-added option. The basic unit will
carry the LVD (Low Voltage Directive) and EMC approval.
8.2 Cable data
Description
Cable for standard electrode or coil
Electrode cable, double shielded
Cable kit with standard coil cable and electrode cable double
shielded (also available as low noise cable for MAG 1100
sensor )
Standard applications
Table 8- 6 Technical data, standard application cables
Coil cable Standard electrode

cable
Basic data No. of conductors 2 3
Min. sqr. area 0.5 mm2 0.2 mm2
Shield Yes Yes
Max. capacitance N/A 350 pF/m

Technical data
8.3 Effect of temperature on working pressure
Coil cable Standard electrode

cable
Max. cable loop resistance Media temperature:
< 100 °C 40 Ω N/A
> 200 °C 6Ω N/A
Cable glands on sensor M20x1.5 gland - Cable ø 5 ... 13 mm (0.20 ... 0.51 inches)
and transmitter ½ NPT gland - cable ø 5 ... 9 mm (0.20 ... 0.35 inches)
Special applications, e.g. low conductivity or electrical noise
Table 8- 7 Technical data, special application cables
Coil cable Special electrode cable

Basic data No. of conductors 3 3
Sqr. area 1.5 mm2 0.25 mm2
Shield Yes Double
Color code Brown, blue, black Brown, blue, black
Outside color Grey Grey
Ext. diameter 7.8 mm 8.1 mm
Conductor Flexible CU Flexible CU
Isolation material PVC PVC
Ambient temperature Flexible installation -5 ... +70°C -5 ... +70°C
(23 ... 158°F) (23 ... 158°F)
Non-flexible installtaion -30 ... +70°C -30 ... +70°C
(-22 ... 158°F) (-22 ... 158°F)
Cable parameter Capacity 161.50 pF/m N/A
Inductance 0.583 μH/m N/A
L/R 43.83 þH/Ω N/A
8.3 Effect of temperature on working pressure

Effect of temperature on working pressure.
Table 8- 8 Metric measures (pressure in bar)
Flange Flange rating Temperature (°C)

specifications -5 10 50 90
Sizes DN25 ... 2000
EN 1092-1 PN 10 10.0 10.0 9.7 9.4
PN 16 16.0 16.0 15.5 15.1
PN 40 40.0 40.0 38.7 37.7
ANSI B16.5 150 lb 19.7 19.7 19.3 18.0
AWWA C-207 Class D 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3

Technical data
8.4 Process fluid conductivity
Flange Flange rating Temperature (°C)

specifications -5 10 50 90
Sizes DN 15 ... 300 (order no. 7ME6520 only)
EN 1092-1 PN 10 10.0 10.0 10.0 8.2
PN 16 10.0 16.0 16.0 13.2
PN 40 40.0 40.0 38.7 37.7
ANSI B16.5 150 lb 10.0 19.7 19.7 16.2
Table 8- 9 Imperial measures (pressure in psi)
Flange Flange rating Temperature (°F)

specifications
23 50 120 200
Sizes 1" ... 78"
EN 1092-1 PN 10 145 145 141 136
PN 16 232 232 225 219
PN 40 580 580 561 547
ANSI B16.5 150 lb 286 286 280 261
AWWA C-207 Class D 150 150 150 150l
Sizes ½"... 12" (order no. 7ME6520 only)
EN 1092-1 PN 10 145 145 145 119
PN 16 145 232 232 191
ANSI B16.5 150 lb 145 286 286 235
8.4 Process fluid conductivity
Compact installation
Liquids with an electrical conductivity ≥ 5 μS/cm.
Remote installation
Standard cable
[µS/cm]
300
200
Conductivity
of medium
100
5
5 100 200 300 [m]
150 300 600 900 [ft]

Cabel length

Technical data
8.5 Liner selection
Special cable
[µS/cm]
50
40
Conductivity
30
of medium
20
10
5
50 100 200 300 400 500 [m]
150 300 600 900 1200 1500 [ft]

Cable length
WARNING
For detection of empty sensor the min. conductivity must always be >50 μS/cm and the
max. length of the electrode cable when remote mounted is 50 meters (164 ft). Special
cable must be used!
For remote MID installations the max. cable length is 3 meters (9.8 ft). For other CT
application standard requirements are applicable.
8.5 Liner selection
Liner Applications
EPDM Drinking water applications (not hydrocarbons)
Ebonite Drinking water applications wastewater applications and
certain chemicals applications
NBR General purpose. Drinking water, sea waters
8.6 Electrode selection
Electrodes
Hastelloy C The preferred choice for water and wastewater, chemicals,
food and beverage, and pharmaceutical industries

Technical data
8.7 Sizing tables
8.7 Sizing tables
Sizing table (DN 2 ... DN 2000)

Technical data
8.7 Sizing tables
Sizing table (DN 1/12" ... DN 78")
The tables show the relationship between flow velocity v, flow quantity Q and sensor
dimension DN.
Guidelines for selection of sensor
Min. measuring range: 0 ... 0.25 m/s (0 ... 0.8 ft/s)
Max. measuring range: 0 ... 10 m/s (0 ... ft/s)
Normally the sensor size is selected so that the nominal flow velocity v lies within the
measuring range 1 ... 3 m/s (1 ... 15 ft/s).

Technical data
8.8 Dimensions and weight
Flow velocity calculation formula:

(metric measures)
1273.24 x Q [l/s] 353.68 x Q [m3/h]

V = [m/s] or V = [m/s]
DN2 [mm] DN2 [mm]
(imperial measures)
0.408 x Q [GPM] 283.67 x Q [MGD]

V = [ft/s] or V = [ft/s]
(Pipe ID)2 [inch] (Pipe ID)2 [inch]

[0 [0 [0
0 0 0

ರ137 ರ137 ರ137
$
$
$
$
$
$
83N58.11
/
/ /
Figure 8-1 MAG 5100 W with MAG 6000 I / MAG 6000 I Ex d

0 0
0
ರ137 ರ137
ರ137
$
$
$
$
$
$
/ /
Figure 8-2 MAG 5100 W with MAG 5000 / 6000

Technical data
Dimensions
Nominal size A
Order no. Order no.
7ME6520 NBR or EPDM liner 7ME6580 Ebonite liner
mm inch mm inch mm inch
15 ½ 177 7 - -
25 1 187 7.4 187 7.4
40 1½ 202 8 197 7.8
50 2 188 7.4 205 8.1
65 2½ 194 7.6 212 8.3
80 3 200 7.9 222 8.7
100 4 207 8.1 242 9.5
125 5 217 8.5 255 10.0
150 6 232 9.1 276 10.9
200 8 257 10.1 304 12.0
250 10 284 11.2 332 13.1
300 12 310 12.2 357 14.1
350 14 382 15.0 362 14.3
400 16 407 16.0 387 15.2
450 18 438 17.2 418 16.5
500 20 463 18.2 443 17.4
600 24 514 20.2 494 19.4
700 28 564 22.2 544 21.4
750 30 591 23.3 571 22.5
800 32 616 24.3 606 23.9
900 36 663 26.1 653 25.7
1000 40 714 28.1 704 27.7
1050 42 714 28.1 704 27.7
1100 44 765 30.1 755 29.7
1200 48 820 32.3 810 31.9
1400 54 N/A N/A 925 36.4
1500 60 N/A N/A 972 38.2
1600 66 N/A N/A 1025 40.4
1800 72 N/A N/A 1123 44.2
2000 78 N/A N/A 1223 48.1

Technical data
Nominal size L
PN 10 PN 16 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 AS
non-PED AWWA
mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch
15 ½ N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
25 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
40 1½ N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
50 2 N/A N/A 200 7.9 N/A N/A N/A N/A 200 7.9 200 7.9
65 2½ N/A N/A 200 7.9 N/A N/A N/A N/A 200 7.9 200 7.9
80 3 N/A N/A 200 7.9 N/A N/A N/A N/A 200*) 9.8*) 200 7.9
100 4 N/A N/A 250 9.8 N/A N/A N/A N/A 250 9.8 250 9.8
125 5 N/A N/A 250 9.8 N/A N/A N/A N/A 250 11.8 250 9.8
150 6 N/A N/A 300 11.8 N/A N/A N/A N/A 300 13.8 300 11.8
200 8 350 13.8 350 13.8 N/A N/A N/A N/A 350 17.7 350 13.8
250 10 450 17.7 450 17.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A 450 19.7 450 17.7
300 12 500 19.7 500 19.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A 500 21.7 500 19.7
350 14 550 21.7 550 21.7 N/A N/A N/A N/A 550 23.6 550 21.7
400 16 600 23.6 600 23.6 N/A N/A N/A N/A 600 23.6 N/A 23.6
450 18 600 23.6 600 23.6 N/A N/A N/A N/A 600 23.6 600 23.6
500 20 600 23.6 600 23.6 N/A N/A N/A N/A 600 23.6 600 23.6
600 24 600 23.6 600 23.6 N/A N/A N/A N/A 600 23.6 600 23.6
700 28 700 27.6 700 27.6 N/A N/A N/A N/A 700 27.6 700 27.6
750 30 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 750 29.5 750 N/A
800 32 800 31.5 800 31.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A 800 31.5 800 31.5
900 36 900 35.4 900 35.4 N/A N/A N/A N/A 900 35.4 900 35.4
1000 40 1000 39.4 1000 39.4 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1000 39.4 1000 39.4
1050 42 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1000 39.4 N/A N/A
1100 44 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1100 43.3 N/A N/A
1200 48 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1200 47.2 1200 47.2
1400 54 1400 55.1 N/A N/A 1400 55.1 N/A N/A 1200 47.2 1200 47.2
1500 60 1500 59.1 N/A N/A 1500 59.1 N/A N/A 1200 47.2 1200 47.2
1600 66 1600 63.0 N/A N/A 1600 63.0 N/A N/A 1200 47.2 1200 47.2
1800 72 1800 70.9 N/A N/A 1800 70.9 N/A N/A 1200 47.2 1200 47.2
2000 78 2000 78.7 N/A N/A 2000 78.7 N/A N/A 1200 47.2 1200 47.2
*) Only valid for 7ME6520.
7ME6580 built-in length L: 272 mm (10.7 inch)

Technical data
Weight, Order no. 7ME6520 (NBR or EPDM liner)
Nominal size Order no.

7ME6580
PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 AWWA PN / ANSI /
AWWA / AS
mm inch kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs
15 ½ N/A N/A N/A N/A 4 9 4 9 N/A N/A - -
25 1 N/A N/A N/A N/A 6 12 5 11 N/A N/A 5 11
40 1½ N/A N/A N/A N/A 8 18 7 15 N/A N/A 8 17
50 2 N/A N/A 9 20 N/A N/A 8 20 N/A N/A 9 20
65 2½ N/A N/A 10.7 24 N/A N/A 11 24 N/A N/A 11 24
80 3 N/A N/A 11.6 26 N/A N/A 13 28 N/A N/A 12 24
100 4 N/A N/A 15.2 33 N/A N/A 19 41 N/A N/A 16 35
125 5 N/A N/A 20.4 45 N/A N/A 24 52 N/A N/A 19 42
150 6 N/A N/A 26 57 N/A N/A 29 64 N/A N/A 27 60
200 8 48 106 48 106 N/A N/A 56 124 N/A N/A 40 68
250 10 64 141 69 152 N/A N/A 79 174 N/A N/A 60 132
300 12 76 167 86 189 N/A N/A 110 243 N/A N/A 80 176
350 14 104 229 125 274 N/A N/A 139 307 N/A N/A 110 242
400 16 119 263 143 314 N/A N/A 159 351 N/A N/A 125 275
450 18 136 299 173 381 N/A N/A 182 400 N/A N/A 175 385
500 20 163 359 223 491 N/A N/A 225 495 N/A N/A 200 440
600 24 236 519 338 744 N/A N/A 320 704 N/A N/A 187 633
700 28 270 595 314 692 N/A N/A 273 602 320 70 330 728
750 30 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 329 725 N/A N/A 360 794
800 32 346 763 396 873 N/A N/A 365 804 428 944 450 992
900 36 432 951 474 1043 N/A N/A 495 1089 618 1362 53 1168
1000 40 513 1130 600 1321 N/A N/A 583 1282 636 1399 66 1455
1050 42 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 687 1512 N/A N/A N/A N/A
1100 44 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 763 1680 N/A N/A 1140 2513
1200 48 643 1415 885 1948 N/A N/A 861 1896 813 1789 1180 2601
1400 54 1592 3510 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 1600 3528
1500 60 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 2460 5423

Technical data
Table 8- 10 Built-in lengths
Nominal size Order no.

7ME6580
Ebonite liner
PN 16 ANSI 16.5 ANSI 16.5 AS 2129 E AWWA JIS K10
Class 150 Class 300 AS 4087 C-207
PN 16, 21,35 Class D
mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm
15 1 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200
25 1 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200
40 1½ 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 240
50 2 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 240
65 2½ 200 7.9 272 10.8 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 272
80 3 272 10.8 272 10.8 2005) 7.9 - - 200 7.9 272
100 4 250 9.9 310 12.2 250 9.9 - - 250 9.9 310
125 5 250 9.9 335 13.1 250 9.9 - - 250 9.9 335
150 6 300 11.8 300 11.9 300 11.9 - - 300 11.9 300
200 8 350 13.8 350 13.8 350 13.8 - - 350 13.8 350
250 10 450 17.7 450 17.8 450 17.8 - - 450 17.8 450
300 12 500 19.7 500 19.7 500 19.7 - - 500 19.7 500
350 14 550 21.7 550 21.7 550 21.7 - - 550 21.7 550
400 16 600 23.7 600 23.7 600 23.7 - - 600 23.7 600
450 18 600 23.7 640 23.7 600 23.7 - - 600 23.7 640
500 20 600 23.7 730 28.7 6006) 23.7 - - 600 23.7 680
600 24 600 23.7 860 33.8 6007) 23.7 - - 600 23.7 800
700 28 - - - - 7009) -27.6 700 27.6 - - -
750 30 - - - - 7509) - 750 29.6 - - -
800 32 - - - - 8009) 31.5 800 31.5 - - -
900 36 - - - - 9009) 35.5 900 35.5 - - -
1000 40 - - - - 10009) 39.4 1000 39.4 - - -
1050 42 - - - - - - 1050 39.4 - - -
1100 44 - - - - 11009) 43.4 1100 43.4 - - -
1200 48 - - - - 12009) 47.3 1200 47.3 - - -
1400 54 - - - - - - 1400 55.2 - - -
1500 60 - - - - - - 1500 59.1 - - -
1600 66 - - - - - - 1600 63.0 - - -
1800 72 - - - - - - 1800 70.9 - - -
2000 78 - - - - - - 2000 78.8 - - -
2) When earthing flanges are used, the thickness of the earthing flange must be added to the built-in length
5) PN 35 DN 80 = 272 mm
6) PN 35 DN 500 = 680 mm
7) PN 35 DN 600 = 750 mm
9) Not AS 4087 PN 21 or PN 35

Appendix A
A.1 Flange mating dimensions (metric)
Figure A-1 Flange mating dimensions
Table A- 1 Flange mating dimensions (metric)
Dimensions (mm) Bolting

mm D PCD T B Holes Bolts
PN10
200 340 295 24 22 8 M20
250 395 350 26 22 12 M20
300 445 400 26 22 12 M20
350 505 460 28 22 16 M20
400 565 515 32 26 16 M24
450 615 565 36 26 20 M24
500 670 620 38 26 20 M24
600 780 725 42 3 20 M27
700 895 840 30 30 24 M27
800 1015 950 32 33 24 M30
900 1115 1050 34 33 28 M30
1000 1230 1160 34 36 28 M33
1200 1455 1380 38 39 32 M36
PN16
50 165 125 19 18 4 M16
65 185 145 20 18 8 M16
80 200 160 20 18 8 M16
100 220 180 22 18 8 M16
125 250 210 22 18 8 M16
150 285 240 24 22 8 M20
200 340 295 26 22 12 M20
250 405 355 29 26 12 M24

Appendix
A.1 Flange mating dimensions (metric)

300 460 410 32 26 12 M24
350 520 470 35 26 16 M24
400 580 525 38 30 16 M27
450 640 585 42 30 20 M27
500 715 650 46 33 20 M30
600 840 770 52 36 20 M33
700 910 840 36 36 24 M33
800 1025 950 38 39 24 M36
900 1125 1050 40 39 28 M36
1000 1255 1170 42 42 28 M39
1200 1485 1390 48 48 32 M45
PN40
15 95 65 14 14 4 M12
25 115 85 16 14 4 M16
40 150 110 18 18 4 M16
150 lb
15 89 60 12 16 4 M12
25 108 79 16 16 4 M16
40 127 98 18 16 4 M16
50 152 121 19 19 4 M16
65 178 140 22 19 4 M16
80 190 152 24 19 4 M16
100 229 191 24 19 8 M16
125 254 216 24 22 8 M20
150 279 241 25 22 8 M20
200 343 298 29 22 8 M20
250 406 362 30 25 12 M24
300 483 432 32 25 12 M24
350 533 476 35 28 12 M27
400 597 540 36.5 28 16 M27
450 635 578 40 32 16 M30
500 699 635 43 32 20 M30
600 813 749 48 35 20 M33

Appendix
A.2 Factory settings

AWWA
700 927 864 33 35 28 M33
750 984 914 35 35 28 M33
800 1060 978 38 41 28 M39
900 1168 1068 41 41 32 M39
1000 1289 1200 41 41 36 M39
1050 1346 1257 44 41 36 M39
1200 1511 1422 48 41 44 M39
Dimension-dependent factory settings
Table A- 2 50 Hz version
DN Qmax Unit Volume/ Pulse Totalizer

pulse unit unit
Order no. 7ME6520 Order no. 7ME6580
mm Inch Fac Min. Max. Min. Max.
settings
15 ½ 2000 159 6361 - - l/h 1 l l
25 1 5000 441 17671 441 17671 l/h 10 l l
40 1½ 12 1.1 45 1.1 45 m3/h 10 l l
50 2 20 1.7 63 1.7 70 m3/h 10 l l
65 2½ 30 2.9 100 2.9 119 m3/h 100 l l
80 3 50 4.0 160 4.5 180 m3/h 100 l l
100 4 120 6.2 250 7 282 m3/h 100 l l
125 5 180 10.0 400 11 441 m3/h 100 l m3
150 6 250 15.7 629 15.9 636 m3/h 100 l m3
200 8 400 24.9 997 28.2 1130 m3/h 1 m3 m3
250 10 700 40.0 1600 44.1 1767 m3/h 1 m3 m3
300 12 1000 62.5 2500 63.6 2544 m3/h 1 m3 m3
350 14 1200 86.5 3463 86.5 3463 m3/h 1 m3 m3
400 16 1800 113 4523 113 4523 m3/h 1 m3 m3
450 18 2000 143.1 5725 143.1 5725 m3/h 1 m3 m3
500 20 3000 176.7 7068 176.7 7068 m3/h 1 m3 m3
600 24 4000 254.4 10178 254.4 10178 m3/h 10 m3 m3
700 28 5000 346.3 13854 346.3 13854 m3/h 10 m3 m3
750 30 6000 397.6 15904 397.6 15904 m3/h 10 m3 m3
800 32 7000 452.3 18095 452.3 18095 m3/h 10 m3 m3

Appendix

pulse unit unit
900 36 9000 572.5 22902 572.5 22902 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1000 40 12000 706.8 28274 706.8 28274 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1050 42 12000 706.8 28274 706.8 28274 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1100 44 14000 855.2 34211 855.2 34211 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1200 48 15000 1017.8 40715 1017.8 40715 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1400 54 25000 - - 1385.4 55417 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1500 60 30000 - - 1590.4 63617 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1600 66 35000 - - 1809.5 72382 m3/h 10 m3 m3
1800 72 40000 - - 2290.2 91608 m3/h 10 m3 m3
2000 78 45000 - - 2827.4 113097 m3/h 10 m3 m3
Table A- 3 60 Hz version

pulse unit unit
mm Inch Fac. Min. Max. Min. Max.
settings
15 ½ 9 0.7 28 - - US GPM 1 US G US G
25 1 22 1.9 77.8 1.9 77.8 US GPM 1 US G US G
40 1½ 52 4.9 199.1 4.9 199.1 US GPM 1 US G US G
50 2 88 6.9 277.2 7.7 311.2 US GPM 1 US G US G
65 2½ 132 11.0 440.2 13.1 525.9 US GPM 1 US G US G
80 3 220 17.6 705.1 19.9 796.7 US GPM 1 US G US MG
100 4 528 27.5 1101 31.1 1244.8 US GPM 1 US G US MG
125 5 793 44.0 1762.2 48.6 1945.1 US GPM 1 US G US MG
150 6 1101 69.3 2772.9 70 2800.9 US GPM 1 US G US MG
200 8 1761 109.7 4391.9 124.4 4979.5 US GPM 1 US G US MG
250 10 3082 176.1 7045.2 194.5 7780.5 US GPM 1 US G US MG
300 12 4402 275.1 11007.8 280 11203.9 US GPM 1 US G US MG
350 14 5283 381.2 15249.7 381.2 15249.7 US GPM 1 US G US MG
400 16 7925 497.9 19918.1 497.9 19918.1 US GPM 1 US G US MG
450 18 8806 630.2 25208.8 630.2 25208.8 US GPM 1 US G US MG
500 20 13209 778 31122 778 31122 US GPM 1 US G US MG
600 24 17611 1120.3 44815.7 1120.3 44815.7 US GPM 10 US G US MG
700 28 19812 1524.9 60999.1 1524.9 60999.1 US GPM 10 US G US MG
750 30 22014 1750.6 70024.5 1750.6 70024.5 US GPM 10 US G US MG
800 32 30820 1991.8 79672.4 1991.8 79672.4 US GPM 10 US G US MG
900 36 39626 2522.8 100835.3 2522.8 100835.3 US GPM 10 US G US MG
1000 40 52834 3112.2 124488.1 3112.2 124488.1 US GPM 10 US G US MG
1050 42 52834 3431.2 137248.1 3431.2 137248.1 US GPM 10 US G US MG
1100 44 61640 3765.7 150630.6 3765.7 150630.6 US GPM 10 US G US MG

Appendix
A.3 Coil resistance

pulse unit unit
1200 48 66043 4481 179262.9 4481 179262.9 US GPM 10 US G US MG
1400 54 110072 - - 6099.9 243993.7 US GPM 1000 US G US MG
1500 60 132086 - - 7002.4 280098.3 US GPM 1000 US G US MG
1600 66 154100 - - 7967.2 318689.6 US GPM 1000 US G US MG
1800 72 176115 - - 10083.5 403341.5 US GPM 1000 US G US MG
2000 78 198129 - - 12448.8 497952.5 US GPM 1000 US G US MG
A.3 Coil resistance
Table A- 4 Coil resistance
MAG 1100, MAG 1100F MAG 3100, MAG 3100P, MAG 5100 W
MAG 5100 W
(Order no. 7ME6580) (Order no. 7ME6520)
DN Inch Resistance Tolerance Resistance Tolerance Resistance Tolerance
2 1/12 104 Ω +/− 5 104
3 1/8 104 Ω +/− 5 104
6 1/4 99 Ω +/− 17 104
10 3/8 99 Ω +/− 17 104
151) 1/2 91 Ω +/− 9 104
25 1 91 Ω +/− 17 104 +/− 2 104 +/− 10
40 11/2 91 Ω +/− 9 92 +/− 2 92 +/− 10
50 2 91 Ω +/− 9 92 +/− 2 119.4 +/− 10
65 21/2 99 Ω +/− 17 100 +/− 2 127 +/− 10
80 3 91 Ω +/− 17 94 +/− 2 126 +/− 10
100 4 91 Ω +/− 9 92 +/− 2 125 +/− 10
125 5 92 +/− 2 126 +/− 10
150 6 94 +/− 2 116 +/− 10
200 8 90 +/− 2 109 +/− 10
250 10 92 +/− 2 104 +/− 10
300 12 100 +/− 2 108 +/− 10
350 14 112 +/− 2 100 +/− 6
400 16 100 +/− 4 100 +/− 6
450 18 108 +/− 4 100 +/− 6
500 20 122 +/− 4 100 +/− 6
600 24 115 +/− 4 98 +/− 6
700 28 128 +/− 4 98 +/− 6
750 30 133
800 32 128 +/− 4 98 +/− 6
900 36 131 +/− 4 98 +/− 6

Appendix
A.3 Coil resistance
MAG 1100, MAG 1100F MAG 3100, MAG 3100P, MAG 5100 W
MAG 5100 W
(Order no. 7ME6580) (Order no. 7ME6520)
1000 40 131 +/− 4 88 +/− 6
1100 44 126
1200 48 130 +/− 4 88 +/− 6
1400 54 130
1500 60 124
1600 66 133
1800 72 133
2000 78 147
1) On MAG 1100 DN 15 produced as from May 1999 the coil resistance must be 86 ohm, +8/−4 ohm.
NOTICE
Reference values
 All resistance values are at 20 °C
 The resistance changes proportionally 0.4% / °C
Spare parts
Description
Cable glands, 2 pcs.
M20
½" NPT
Sealing screws for sensor/transmitter, 2 pcs.
Terminal box, in polyamide, inclusive of lid

M20
½" NPT

Appendix
A.4 Ordering
Description
Terminal box lid, in polyamide
Terminal box, in stainless steel, inclusive of lid

M20
½" NPT
Potting kit for terminal box of MAG sensors for I

P68/NEMA 6P (not for EX)
A.4 Ordering
In order to ensure that the ordering data you are using is not outdated, the latest ordering
data is always available on the Internet: Catalog process instrumentation
(http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/catalogs)

Appendix
A.4 Ordering

Glossary
ASIC
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit is an integrated circuit (IC) customized for a particular
use, rather than intended for general-purpose use.
EMC
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the branch of electrical sciences which studies the
unintentional generation, propagation and reception of electromagnetic energy with
reference to the unwanted effects (Electromagnetic Interference, or EMI) that such energy
may induce. The goal of EMC is the correct operation, in the same electromagnetic
environment, of different equipment which use electromagnetic phenomena, and the
avoidance of any interference effects.
IP
An IP (Ingress Protection) number is used to specify the environmental protection of
enclosures around electronic equipment. These ratings are determined by specific tests. The
IP number is composed of two numbers, the first referring to the protection against solid
objects and the second against liquids. The higher the number, the better the protection. For
example, in IP67 the first Number (6) means that the device is totally protected against dust,
and the second (7) that it is protected against the effect of immersion between 15cm and 1m
PED
The Pressure Equipment Directive (97/23/EC) is the legislative framework on European level
for equipment subject to a pressure hazard. It was adopted by the European Parliament and
the European Council in May 1997 and has been obligatory throughout the European Union
since May 2002.
SENSORPROM
All sensor related settings/data saved on an EPROM. SENSORPROM technology
automatically configures the transmitter at start up providing calibration data, pipe size,
sensor type, and output settings. The SENSORPROM automatically stores values or
settings changed by users, and automatically re-programs any new transmitter without loss
of accuracy.
USM
USM II is a Communication Platform. The Siemens USM II concept enables fitting of add-on
bus modules without loss of functionality:
1. All modules can be fitted as true "plug & play"
2. Module and transmitter are automatically configured through the SENSORPROM

Glossary

Index
A H
Abrasive liquids, 20 Hazardous area
Add-on modules, (See Communication module) Approvals, 12
Applications, 13 Horizontal pipes
Installation in, 20
Hotline, 32
C
Cable specifications, 26, 42
I
Cathodic protection, 23
Coil insulation check, 35 Inlet / outlet conditions, 18
Coil resistance check, 35 Installation
Communication modules, 13, 15 in U-tube, 18
Compliance, 9 Indoor/outdoor, 17
Contact person, 8 Large pipes, 19
Customer Support Hotline, 32 Location in system, 17
Mounting of sensor, 21
Pipes with free outlet, 18
D Remote, 26
Safety instructions, 17
Decontamination, 33
Internet
Dimensions, 48
Contact person, 8, 33
Direct burial, 30
Flowdocumentation, 8
Document history, 7
Support, 33
Introduction, 7
Items supplied, 7
E
Electrical connection
Cable specifications, 26 L
Remote installations, 26
Laws and directives, 9
Electrode resistance check, 36
Empty pipe detection, 20
M
Mains supply, 25
F Maintenance, 31
Material compatibility, 9
FAQ
Measurement principle, 14
Fluctuating process values, 36
Mounting, (See Installation)
Flange mating dimensions, 53
P
G
Plug & Play, 15
Gas / Air bubbles, 20
Potential equalization, 23
Potting, 29
Pressure

Index
Pressure Equipment Directive, 10
Process fluid
Conductivity, 44
Protective conductor terminal, 26
Protective earth, 26
R
Recalibration, 31
Repair, 32
Return procedures, 33
S
Safety
Instrument safety standards, 9
Safety instructions
Electrical connection, 25
Installation, 17
Safety notes, 9
Sensor check, 35
Sensor orientation, 20
Sensorprom, 15
Service, 32, 33
Support, 33
System components, 13
T
Theory of operation, 14
Torques values, 22
Transportation, 31
V
Vertical pipes
Installation in, 20
Vibrations, 21
W
Weight, 50
Wire insulation, 26
Wiring, (See Electrical connection)

For more information
www.siemens.com/flow
Siemens
Siemens Flow
A/S Instruments A/S Subject to change without prior notice
*A5E03063678*
Nordborgvej 81
Flow Instruments Order No.: A5E03063678
DK-6430
DK-6430 Nordborg
Nordborg Literature No.: A5E03063678-01
Denmark Copyright Siemens AG 07.2010
All rights reserved
www.siemens.com/processautomation
© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F flowmeters
SITRANS F M
Flow sensor MAG 5100 W
■ Overview ■ Application
The main applications of the SITRANS F M electromagnetic flow
sensors can be found in the following fields:
• Water abstraction
• Water treatment
• Water distribution network (leak detection management)
• Custody transfer water meters
• Irrigation
• Waste water treatment
• Filtration plant (e.g. reverse osmosis and ultra filtration)
• Industrial water applications
■ Mode of operation
The flow measuring principle is based on Faradays law of elec-
4 tromagnetic induction were the sensor converts the flow into an
electrical voltage proportional to the velocity of the flow.
■ Integration
The complete flowmeter consists of a flow sensor and an asso-
ciated transmitter SITRANS F M MAG 5000, MAG 6000 or
MAG 6000 I.
The flexible communication concept USM II simplifies integra-
tion and update to a variety of fieldbus systems, e.g. HART, De-
viceNet, PROFIBUS DP and PA, FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1,
MODBUS RTU/RS485.
The SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W is an electromagnetic flow sen-
sor designed to meet ground water, drinking water, waste water,
sewage or sludge applications.
■ Benefits
• DN 25 to DN 1200 / 2000 (1” to 48" / 78”)
• Stock program of MAG 5100 W secures short delivery time
• Connection flanges EN 1092-1 (DIN 2501), ANSI, AWWA, AS
and JIS.
• NBR Hard Rubber and Ebonite Hard Rubber liner for all water
applications
• Drinking water EPDM liner with approvals
• Hastelloy integrated grounding and measuring electrodes
• Increased low flow accuracy for water leak detection, due to
coned liner design (Order No. 7ME6520, DN 50 to 300 mm
(2" to 12")).
• Drinking water approvals
• Suitable for direct burial and constant flooding
• Custody transfer approvals
• Build-in length according to ISO 13359
• Easy commissioning, SENSORPROM unit automatically up-
loads calibration values and settings.
• Designed so patented in-situ verification can be conducted.
Using SENSORPROM fingerprint.
• Custody Transfer option for water billing, with type approval af-
ter OIML R49 and verified according to MI-001 for DN 50 (2")
to DN 300 (12")
- Pattern approval OIML R 49 (Denmark, Germany)
- conforms to ISO 4064 and EN 14154
- MI-001 Custody Transfer approval for billing (EU)
• Meets EEC directives: PED, 97/23/EC pressure directive for
EN1092-1 flanges
• Simple onsite or factory upgrade to IP68/NEMA 6P of a stan-
dard sensor.
4/66 Siemens FI 01 · 2010

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
■ Technical specifications
Product characteristic Targeted towards the EU water markets and Targeted towards the Non-EU water markets
low-flow applications
EPDM or NBR lining (Order No. 7ME6520) Ebonite lining (Order No. 7ME6580)
Design and nominal size Full bore sensor: DN 25 ... 40 (1” ... 1½”) Full bore sensor: DN 25 ... 2000 (1” ... 78”)
Coned sensor: DN 50 ... 300 (2” ... 12”)
Full bore sensor: DN 350 ... 1200 (14” ... 48”)
Measuring principle Electromagnetic induction Electromagnetic induction
Excitation frequency (Mains supply: 50/60 Hz) DN 25 ... 65 (1” ... 2½”): 12.5 Hz/15 Hz DN 25 ... 65 (1” ... 2½”): 12.5 Hz/15 Hz
DN 80 ... 150 (3” ... 6”): 6.25 Hz/7.5 Hz DN 80 ... 150 (3” ... 6”): 6.25 Hz/7.5 Hz
DN 200 ... 300 (8” ... 12”): 3.125 Hz/3.75 Hz DN 200 ... 1200 (8” ... 48”): 3.125 Hz/3.75 Hz
DN 350 ... 1200 (14” ... 48”): 1.5625 Hz/1.875 Hz DN 1400 ... 2000 (54” ... 78”): 1.5625 Hz/1.875 Hz
Process connection
Flanges
• EN 1092-1 PN 10 (145 psi) : DN 200 ... 300 (8” ... 12”)
Flat face flanges
Raised face (EN 1092-1, DIN 2501 and BS 4504
have the same mating dimensions)
4
PN 10 (145 psi): DN 350 ... 1200 (14” ... 48”) PN 6 (87 psi): DN 1400 ... 2000 (54” ... 78”)
Raised face flanges PN 10 (145 psi): DN 200 ... 2000 (8” ... 78”)
PN 16 (232 psi): DN 50 ... 300 (2” ... 12”) PN 16 (232 psi): DN 65 ... 600 (2½” ... 24”)
Flat face flanges
PN 40 (580 psi): DN 25 ... 50 (1” ... 2”)
PN 16 (232 psi): DN 350 ... 1200 (14” ... 48”)
Raised face flanges
PN 40 (580 psi): DN 25 ... 40 (1” ... 1½”)
Raised face flanges
• ANSI B16.5 Class 150 lb: 1” ... 24” Class 150 lb: 1” ... 24”
• AWWA C-207 Class D: 28” ... 48”, flat face Class D: 28” ... 78”, flat face
• AS4087 PN 16 (DN 50 ... 1200), (2" ... 48") PN 16 (DN 50 ... 1200), (2" ... 48")
16 bar (232 psi) 16 bar (232 psi)
• JIS B 2220:2004 - K10 (1" ... 24")
Rated Operation conditions
Ambient temperature
• Sensor -40 ... +70 °C (-40 ... +158 °F) -20 ... +70 °C (-4 ... +158 °F)
• With compact transmitter MAG 5000/6000 -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F) -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F)
• With compact transmitter MAG 6000 I -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F) -20 ... +60 °C (-4 ... +140 °F)
Operating pressure (Abs) DN 25 ... 40 (1” ... 1½”): DN 25 ... 50 (1” ... 2”):
[abs. bar] (Maximum operating pressure 0.01 ... 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi) 0.01 ... 40 bar (0.15 ... 580 psi)
depending on flange standard, decreases with DN 50 ... 300 (2” ... 12”): DN 65 ... 1200 (2½” ... 48”):
increasing operating temperature) 0.03 ... 20 bar (0.44 ... 290 psi) 0.01 ... 16 bar (0.15 ... 232 psi)
DN 350 ... 1200 (14” ... 48”): DN 1400 ... 2000 (54” ... 78”):
0.01 ... 16 bar (0.15 ... 232 psi) 0.01 ... 10 bar (0.15 ... 145 psi)
Enclosure rating
• Standard IP67 to EN 60529 / NEMA 4X/6 IP67 to EN 60529 / NEMA 4X/6
(1 mH2O for 30 min) (1 mH2O for 30 min)
• Option IP68 to EN 60529 / NEMA 6P IP68 to EN 60529 / NEMA 6P
(10 mH2O continuously) (10 mH2O continuously)
Pressure drop at 3 m/s (10 ft/s) DN 25 ... 40 (1” ... 1½”): As straight pipe As straight pipe
DN 50 ... 300 (2” ... 12”): Max. 25 mbar (0.36 psi)
DN 350 ... 1200 (14” ... 48”): As straight pipe
Test pressure 1.5 x PN (where applicable) 1.5 x PN (where applicable)
Mechanical load 18 ... 1000 Hz random in x, y, z, directions for 2 18 ... 1000 Hz random in x, y, z, directions for 2
hours according to EN 60068-2-36 hours according to EN 60068-2-36
Sensor: 3.17 grms Sensor: 3.17 grms
Sensor with compact MAG 5000/6000 mounted Sensor with compact MAG 5000/6000 mounted
transmitter: 3.17 grms transmitter: 3.17 grms
Sensor with compact MAG 6000 I mounted Sensor with compact MAG 6000 I mounted
transmitter: 1.14 grms transmitter: 1.14 grms
Siemens FI 01 · 2010 4/67

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
Product characteristic Targeted towards the EU water markets and Targeted towards the Non-EU water markets
low-flow applications
EPDM or NBR lining (Order No. 7ME6520) Ebonite lining (Order No. 7ME6580)
Medium conditions
Temperature of medium
• NBR -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... 158 °F) -
• EPDM -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... 158 °F) -
• EPDM (MI-001) 0.1 ... 30 °C (32 ... 76 °F) -
• Ebonite - -10 ... +70 °C (14 ... 158 °F)
EMC 89/336 EEC 89/336 EEC
Design
Material
• Housing and flanges Carbon steel, with corrosion- Carbon steel ASTM A 105, with corrosion-
resistant two-component epoxy coating resistant two-component epoxy coating
(min. 150 µm) (min. 150 µm)
4 Corrosivity category C4, according to ISO
12944-2
Corrosivity category C4, according to ISO
12944-2
• Measuring pipe AISI 304 (1.4301) (DN 50 ... 300 (2“ ... 12") AISI 304 (1.4301)
Carbon steel)
• Electrode Hastelloy Hastelloy
• Grounding electrode Hastelloy Hastelloy
• Terminal box Fibre glass reinforced polyamide Fibre glass reinforced polyamide
Certificates and approvals
Custody Transfer (only together with OIML R 49 pattern approval cold water (Den-
MAG 6000 CT) mark and Germany): DN 50 ... 300 (2“ ... 12")
MI 001 cold water (EU): DN 50 ... 300 (2“ ... 12")
Drinking water approvals EPDM: NSF/ANSI Standard 61 (Cold water, US) (pend-
NSF/ANSI Standard 61 (Cold water, US) ing)
WRAS (WRc, BS6920 cold water, GB) WRAS (WRc, BS6920 cold water, GB)
ACS listed (F),
DVGW W270 (D)
Belgaqua (B)
MCERTS
NBR:
NSF/ANSI Standard 61 (Cold water, US, only
ANSI B16.5 flanges)
Pressure approvals PED conforming: All EN1092-1 flanges and PED (All EN1092-1 flanges conforms to PED)
ANSI Class 150 (< DN 300 (<12”)) – 97/23 EC1) – 97/23 EC1) (only ≤ DN 600 (≤ 24"))
CRN FM Class 1, Div 2 (pending)
FM Class 1, Div 2
1)
For sizes larger than 600 mm (24”) in PN 16 PED conformity is available as a cost-added option. The basic unit will carry the LVD (Low Voltage Directive) and
EMC approval.
All products sold outside of EU and EFTA are excluded from the directive, also products sold into certain market sectors are excluded. These include
1) Meters used in networks for the supply, distribution and discharge of water.
2) Meters used in pipelines for the conveyance of any fluid from offshore to onshore.
3) Meters used in the extraction of petroleum or gas, including christmas tree and manifold equipment.
4) Any meter mounted on a ship or mobile offshore platform.
MAG 5100 W with MAG 6000 CT (Revenue program) MI-001

MAG 5100 W CT program is type approved according to inter-
national water meter standard OIML R 49. Since the first No- ±E% MI 001 Verification tolerances
vember 2006 the MI-001 water meter directive is in force, which Cl. II = 5%
means that all water meters can be sold across the EU borders
if the water meters contain a MI-001 label.
The MAG 5100 W MI-001 verified and labeled products are a Cl. II = 2%
Class II aproval according to Directive 2004/22/EC of the
European Parliament and Council of March 31, 2004 on measur-
ing instruments (MID), Annex MI-001 in the sizes from DN 50 to
DN 300 (Order No. 7ME6520).
The MID certification is obtained as a modul B + D module ap- Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
proval according to the above mentioned directive.
Module B : Type approval according to OIML R 49
Module D : Quality insurance approval of production
4/68 Siemens FI 01 · 2010

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
MAG 5100 W MI-001 verified and labeled products at a given Q3 and Q3/Q4 = 1.25 and Q2/Q1 = 1.6 measuring ranges see table below:
DN 50 (2“) 65 (2½“) 80 (3“) 100 (4“) 125 (5“) 150 (6“) 200 (8“) 250 (10“) 300 (12“)
„R“ Q3/Q1 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Q4 [m3/h] 20 31.25 50 78.75 125 200 312.5 500 787.5
Q3 [m3/h] 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630
Q2 [m3/h] 1.02 1.6 2.6 4.03 6.4 10.24 16 25.6 40.32
Q1 [m3/h] 0.64 1.00 1.60 2.52 4.0 6.4 10.0 16.0 25.2
DN 50 (2“) 65 (2½“) 80 (3“) 100 (4“) 125 (5“) 150 (6“) 200 (8“) 250 (10“) 300 (12“)
„R“ Q3/Q1 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63
Q4 [m3/h] 20 31.25 50 78.75 125 200 312.5 500 787.5
Q3 [m3/h] 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630
Q2 [m3/h] 0.41 0.63 1.02 1.6 2.54 4.06 6.35 10.2 16.0
Q1 [m3/h] 0.25 0.40 0.63 1.00 1.59 2.54 3.97 6.35 10.0
DN 50 (2“) 65 (2½“) 80 (3“) 100 (4“) 125 (5“) 150 (6“) 200 (8“) 250 (10“) 300 (12“)
4
„R“ Q3/Q1 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80
Q4 [m3/h] 20 31.25 50 78.75 125 200 312.5 500 787.5
Q3 [m3/h] 16 25 40 63 100 160 250 400 630
Q2 [m3/h] 0.32 0.50 0.80 1.20 2.00 3.20 5.0 8.0 12.6
Q1 [m3/h] 0.20 0.31 0.50 0.75 1.25 2.00 3.13 5.0 7.90
DN 50 (2“) 65 (2½“) 80 (3“) 100 (4“) 125 (5“) 150 (6“) 200 (8“) 250 (10“) 300 (12“)
„R“ Q3/Q1 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160 160
Q4 [m3/h] 50 78.75 125 200 312.5 500 787.5 1250 2000
3
Q3 [m /h] 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600
Q2 [m3/h] 0.40 0.63 1.00 1.60 2.50 4.00 6.3 10.0 16.0
Q1 [m3/h] 0.25 0.39 0.63 1.00 1.56 2.50 3.94 6.3 10.0
DN 50 (2“) 65 (2½“) 80 (3“) 100 (4“) 125 (5“) 150 (6“) 200 (8“) 250 (10“) 300 (12“)
„R“ Q3/Q1 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200
Q4 [m3/h] 50 78.75 125 200 312.5 500 787.5 1250 2000
Q3 [m3/h] 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600
Q2 [m3/h] 0.32 0.50 0.80 1.28 2.00 3.20 5.0 8.0 12.8
Q1 [m3/h] 0.20 0.32 0.50 0.80 1.25 2.00 3.15 5.0 8.0
DN 50 (2“) 65 (2½“) 80 (3“) 100 (4“) 125 (5“) 150 (6“) 200 (8“) 250 (10“) 300 (12“)
„R“ Q3/Q1 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250
Q4 [m3/h] 50 78.75 125 200 312.5 500 787.5 1250 2000
Q3 [m3/h] 40 63 100 160 250 400 630 1000 1600
Q2 [m3/h] 0.26 0.40 0.64 1.02 1.60 2.56 4.0 6.4 10.24
Q1 [m3/h] 0.16 0.25 0.40 0.64 1.00 1.60 2.52 4.0 6.4
The Label is placed on the side of the encapsulation. An exam-

ple of the product label is shown below:
Siemens FI 01 · 2010 4/69

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
Selection and Ordering data Order No. Selection and Ordering data Order No.
Sensor SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W 7 ME 6 5 2 0 - Sensor SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W 7 ME 6 5 2 0 -
Hastelloy electrodes, carbon steel flanges, 777 1 7 - 2 777 Hastelloy electrodes, carbon steel flanges, 777 1 7 - 2 777
EU water markets and low flow applications EU water markets and low flow applications
Diameter Cable glands/terminal box
DN 25 (1“) ◆ 2D Metric/Polyamid terminal box or 6000 I compact ◆ 1
DN 40 (1½“) ◆ 2R ½" NPT/Polyamid terminal box or 6000 I compact ◆ 2
DN 50 (2“) ◆ 2Y ◆ Short lead time (details in PMD)
DN 65 (2½“) ◆ 3F
DN 80 (3“) ◆ 3M Selection and Ordering data Order code
DN 100 (4“) ◆ 3T Additional information
DN 125 (5“) ◆ 4B Please add “-Z“ to Order No. and specify Order
DN 150 (6“) ◆ 4H code(s) and plain text.
DN 200 (8“) ◆ 4P Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.2 C14
DN 250 (10“) ◆ 4V Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.1 C15
◆ 5D
4
DN 300 (12“) Approval/Verification
DN 350 (14“) ◆ 5K (MI-001 : DN 50-300, EPDM liner, EN 1092-1 PN10 &
DN 400 (16“) ◆ 5R PN16 flanges with MAG 6000 CT)
DN 450 (18“) ◆ 5Y • Without verification according to OIML 49 P10
DN 500 (20“) 6F • MI001 Q3/Q1 = 25 P11
DN 600 (24“) 6P • MI001 Q3/Q1 = 63 P12
DN 700 (28“) 6Y
• MI001 Q3/Q1 = 80 P13
DN 750 (30“) 7D
• MI001 Q3/Q1 = 160 P16
DN 800 (32“) 7H
DN 900 (36“) 7M • MI001 Q3/Q1 = 200 P17
DN 1000 (40“) 7R • MI001 Q3/Q1 = 250 P18
(42“) 7U Tag name plate, stainless steel fixed with SS wire Y17
(44“) 7V (add plain text)
DN 1200 (48“) 8B Tag name plate, plastic (self-adhesive) Y18
Flange norm and pressure rating Customer-specific converter setup Y20
to EN 1092-1
Sensor cables wired (specify cable order no.) Y40
PN 10 (DN 200 ... 1200/8“ ... 48“) ◆ B
PN 16 (DN 50 ... 1200/2“ ... 48“) ◆ C Sensor for remote transmitter's junction box potted to Y41
IP68 with wired cable (specify cable order no.)
PN 16, non PED (DN 700 ... 1200/28“ ... 48“) D
PN 40 (DN 25 ... 40/1“ ... 1½“) ◆ F Other postproduction requirements (add desired text) Y99
to ANSI B16.5 Additional Calibrations
class 150 (1“ ... 24“) ◆ J Matched pair - (Standard production calibration On request1)
to AWWA C-207 where sensor and transmitter are calibrated together)
Class D (28“ ... 48“) L Accredited Siemens Flow Instruments matched pair On request1)
to AS 4087 Calibration acc. to ISO/IEC 17025:2005
PN 16 (DN 50 ... 1200/2“ ... 48“) N Customer specified calibration up to 10 point On request1)
Liner material Customer witnessed calibration On request1)
EPDM ◆ 2 Any of above calibration
NBR Hard Rubber ◆ 3 1)
Ordering On request as dedicated information from the customer on the
Transmitter individual sensors is required. Please fill in the calibration form found on
pi.khe.siemens.de/index.aspx?Nr=17460 and send together with the order.
Sensor for remote transmitter (Order transmitter ◆ A (Size dependent restriction on maximum flow rates may apply)
separately) ,
MAG 6000 I, Aluminum, 18 ... 90 V DC, ◆ C Description Order No.

115 ... 230 V AC
Potting kit for terminal box ◆ FDK-085U0220
MAG 6000, Polyamid, 11 ... 30 V DC/11 ... 24V AC ◆ H of SITRANS F M sensors for
MAG 6000, Polyamid, 115 ... 230 V AC ◆ J IP68/NEMA 6P (Not for
MAG 5000, Polyamid, 11 ... 30 V DC/11 ... 24V AC ◆ K ATEX)
MAG 5000, Polyamid, 115 ... 230 V AC ◆ L
MAG 6000 CT, Polyamid, 115 ... 230 V AC ◆ M
◆ Short lead time (details in PMD)
Communication
None ◆ A MAG 5000/6000 transmitters and sensors are packed in sepa-
HART ◆ B rate boxes, the final assembly takes place during installation at
PROFIBUS PA Profile 3 (only MAG 6000/MAG 6000 I) ◆ F the customer's place. MAG 6000 I transmitters and sensors are
PROFIBUS DP Profile 3 (only MAG 6000/MAG 6000 I)◆ G
delivered compact mounted from factory.
Communication module will be pre-mounted in the transmitter.
MODBUS RTU/RS 485 (only MAG 6000/MAG 6000 I) ◆ E
FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 (only MAG 6000/ ◆ J Please use online Product selector to get latest updates.
MAG 6000 I) Product selector link:
This device is shipped with a Quick Start guide and the SITRANS F man- www.pia-selector.automation.siemens.com
ual CD containing the complete manual library. Printed Operating Please also see www.siemens.com/SITRANSFordering
Instructions are available for purchase via PMD for practical examples of ordering
4/70 Siemens FI 01 · 2010

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
Selection and Ordering data Order No. Selection and Ordering data Order No.
Sensor SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W 7 ME 6 5 8 0 - Sensor SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W 7 ME 6 5 8 0 -
Hastelloy electrodes, carbon steel flanges, 77777 - 7777 Hastelloy electrodes, carbon steel flanges, 77777 - 7777
Non EU water markets Non EU water markets
Diameter Transmitter with display
DN 25 (1“) ◆ 2D Sensor for remote transmitter (Order transmitter ◆ A
DN 40 (1½“) ◆ 2R separately)
DN 50 (2“) ◆ 2Y MAG 6000, Polyamid, 11 ... 30 V DC/11 ... 24V AC ◆ H
DN 65 (2½“) ◆ 3F MAG 6000, Polyamid, 115 ... 230 V AC ◆ J
DN 80 (3“) ◆ 3M MAG 5000, Polyamid, 11 ... 30 V DC/11 ... 24V AC ◆ K
DN 100 (4“) ◆ 3T MAG 5000, Polyamid, 115 ... 230 V AC ◆ L
DN 125 (5“) ◆ 4B Communication
DN 150 (6“) ◆ 4H
No communication, add-on possible ◆ A
DN 200 (8“) ◆ 4P
HART ◆ B
DN 250 (10“) ◆ 4V PROFIBUS PA Profile 3 (only MAG 6000/ ◆ F
4
DN 300 (12“) ◆ 5D MAG 6000 I)
DN 350 (14“) ◆ 5K PROFIBUS DP Profile 3 (only MAG 6000/ ◆ G
MAG 6000 I)
DN 400 (16“) ◆ 5R
MODBUS RTU/RS 485 (only MAG 6000/ ◆ E
DN 450 (18“) ◆ 5Y MAG 6000 I)
DN 500 (20“) 6F FOUNDATION Fieldbus H1 (only MAG 6000/ ◆ J
DN 600 (24“) 6P MAG 6000 I)
DN 700 (28“) 6Y Cable glands/terminal box
DN 750 (30“) 7D Metric ◆ 1
DN 800 (32“) 7H ½" NPT ◆ 2
DN 900 (36“) 7M ◆ Short lead time (details in PMD)
DN 1000 (40“) 7R
(42“) 7U
(44“) 7V Selection and Ordering data Order code
DN 1200 (48“) 8B Additional information
DN 1400 (54“) 8F Please add “-Z“ to Order No. and specify Order
DN 1500 (60“) 8K code(s) and plain text.
DN 1600 (66“) 8P Customer-specific converter setup
DN 1800 (72“) 8T • Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.2 C14
DN 2000 (78“) 8Y
• Factory certificate according to EN 10204-2.1 C15
Flange norm and pressure rating
Tag name plate, stainless steel fixed with SS wire Y17
to EN 1092-1
Tag name plate, plastic (self-adhesive) Y18
PN 6 (DN 1400 ... 2000 (54“ ... 78“)) A
PN 10 (DN 200 ... 2000 (8“ ... 78“)) ◆ B Customer-specific converter setup Y20
PN 16 (DN 65 ... 600 (2½“ ... 24“) ◆ C Sensor cables wired (specify cable order no.) Y40
PN 16, non PED (DN 700 ... 1200/28“ ... 48“) D Sensor for remote transmitter's junction box potted to Y41
(pending) IP68 with wired cable (specify cable order no.)
PN 40 (DN 25 ... 50 (1“ ... 2“)) ◆ F
Other postproduction requirements (add desired text) Y99
to ANSI B16.5
,
class 150 (1“ ... 24“) J

Description Order No.
to AWWA C-207
Potting kit for terminal box ◆ FDK-085U0220
Class D (28“ ... 78“) L of SITRANS F M sensors for
to AS 4087 IP68/NEMA 6P (Not for
ATEX)
PN 16 (DN 50 ... 1200 (2" ... 48")) N
to JIS
B 2220:2004 K10 (1" ... 24") R ◆ Short lead time (details in PMD)
Flange material
Carbon steel flanges ASTM A 105 1 MAG 5000/6000 transmitters and sensors are packed in separate
Liner material boxes, the final assembly takes place during installation at the
Ebonite Hard Rubber 4
customer's place. MAG 6000 I/MAG 6000 I ATEX 2G D transmit-
ters and sensors are delivered compact mounted from factory.
Electrode material Communication module will not be pre-mounted in the transmitter.
Hastelloy 2 Please use online Product selector to get latest updates.
This device is shipped with a Quick Start guide and the SITRANS F man-
ual CD containing the complete manual library. Printed Operating
Product selector link:
Instructions are available for purchase via PMD www.pia-selector.automation.siemens.com
Please also see www.siemens.com/SITRANSFordering
for practical examples of ordering
Siemens FI 01 · 2010 4/71

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
■ Dimensional drawings
153 (6.0)
153 (6.0)
M20 (½" NPT) M20 (½" NPT)
Order No. 7ME6520 Order No. 7ME6520
A
A
EPDM or NBR lining EPDM or NBR lining

DN 25 ... 40 (1“ ... 1½“) DN 50 ... 300
DN 350 ... 1200 (14“ ... 48“) (2“ ... 12“)
4 Order No. 7ME6580

Ebonite lining
DN 25 ... 2000 (1“ ... 78“)
L L
Nominal size A L
Order No. Order No. PN 61), PN PN 16 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 / JIS 10K AS
7ME6520 7ME6580 10 non PED AWWA
NBR or Ebonite liner
EPDM liner
[mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch]
15 ½ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200 7.9 - -
25 1 187 7.4 187 7.4 - - - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
40 1½ 197 7.8 197 7.8 - - - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
50 2 188 7.4 205 8.1 - - - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
65 2½ 194 7.6 212 8.3 - - 200 7.9 - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
80 3 200 7.9 222 8.7 - - 200 7.9 - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
100 4 207 8.1 242 9.5 - - 250 9.8 - - - - 250 9.8 250 9.8 250 9.8
125 5 217 8.5 255 10.0 - - 250 9.8 - - - - 250 9.8 250 9.8 250 9.8
150 6 232 9.1 276 10.9 - - 300 11.8 - - - - 300 11.8 300 11.8 300 11.8
200 8 257 10.1 304 12.0 350 13.8 350 13.8 - - - - 350 13.8 350 13.8 350 13.8
250 10 284 11.2 332 13.1 450 17.7 450 17.7 - - - - 450 17.7 450 17.7 450 17.7
300 12 310 12.2 357 14.1 500 19.7 500 19.7 - - - - 500 19.7 500 19.7 500 19.7
350 14 382 15.0 362 14.3 550 21.7 550 21.7 - - - - 550 21.7 550 21.7 550 21.6
400 16 407 16.0 387 15.2 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
450 18 438 17.2 418 16.5 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
500 20 463 18.2 443 17.4 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
600 24 514 20.2 494 19.4 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
700 28 564 22.2 544 21.4 700 27.6 700 27.6 700 27.6 - - 700 27.6 - - 700 27.6
750 30 591 23.3 571 22.5 - - - - - - - - 750 29.5 - - 750 -
800 32 616 24.3 606 23.9 800 31.5 800 31.5 800 31.5 - - 800 31.5 - - 800 31.5
900 36 663 26.1 653 25.7 900 35.4 900 35.4 900 35.4 - - 900 35.4 - - 900 35.4
1000 40 714 28.1 704 27.7 1000 39.4 1000 39.4 1000 39.4 - - 1000 39.4 - - 1000 39.4
42 714 28.1 704 27.7 - - - - - - - - 1000 39.4 - - - -
44 765 30.1 755 29.7 - - - - - - - - 1100 43.3 - - - -
1200 48 820 32.3 810 31.9 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 - - 1200 47.2 - - 1200 47.2
1400 54 - - 925 36.4 1400 55.1 - - 1400 55.1 - - 1400 55.1 - - - -
1500 60 - - 972 38.2 1500 59.1 - - 1500 59.1 - - 1500 59.1 - - - -
1600 66 - - 1025 40.4 1600 63.0 - - 1600 63.0 - - 1600 63.0 - - - -
1800 72 - - 1123 44.2 1800 70.9 - - 1800 70.9 - - 1800 70.9 - - - -
2000 78 - - 1223 48.1 2000 78.7 - - 2000 78.7 - - 2000 78.7 - - - -
- not available 1) PN 6 only in size DN 1400 ... DN 2000 (54" ... 78")
4/72 Siemens FI 01 · 2010

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
MAG 5100 W / 6000 I Compact
218 (8.58) 208 (8.19) 208 (8.19)
131 (5.16) 155 (6.10) 155 (6.10)

2 x M25 2 x M25
A1 M20 (½" NPT) M20 (½“ NPT)
A1
4
A
Order No. 7ME6520 Order No.
EPDMor NBR lining 7ME6520
DN25...40 (1" ... 1½") EPDM or
DN350...1200 (14"...48") NBR lining
DN50...300
Order No. 7ME6580 (2"...12")
Ebonite lining
L DN25...2000 (1" ... 78") L
Nominal A A1 L
size
Order No. Order No. Order No. Order No. PN 10 PN 16 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 JIS 10K AS
7ME6520 7ME6580 7ME6520 7ME6580 non PED / AWWA
NBR or Ebonite NBR or Ebonite
EPDM liner EPDM liner
liner liner
[mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch] [mm] [inch
]
15 ½ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 200 7.9 - -
25 1 187 7.4 187 7.4 340 13.4 338 13.3 - - - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
40 1½ 197 7.8 197 7.8 350 13.8 348 13.7 - - - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
50 2 188 7.4 205 8.1 341 13.4 356 14.0 - - - - - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
65 2½ 194 7.6 212 8.3 347 13.7 363 14.3 - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
80 3 200 7.9 222 8.7 353 13.9 373 14.7 - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 - - 200 7.9 200 7.9 200 7.9
100 4 207 8.1 242 9.5 360 14.2 393 15.5 - - 250 9.8 250 9.8 - - 250 9.8 250 9.8 250 9.8
125 5 217 8.5 255 10.0 370 14.6 406 16.0 - - 250 9.8 250 9.8 - - 250 9.8 250 9.8 250 9.8
150 6 232 9.1 276 10.9 385 15.2 427 16.8 - - 300 11.8 300 11.8 - - 300 11.8 300 11.8 300 11.8
200 8 257 10.1 304 12.0 410 16.1 455 17.9 350 13.8 350 13.8 350 13.8 - - 350 13.8 350 13.8 350 13.8
250 10 284 11.2 332 13.1 437 17.2 483 19.0 450 17.7 450 17.7 450 17.7 - - 450 17.7 450 17.7 450 17.7
300 12 310 12.2 357 14.1 463 18.2 508 20.0 500 19.7 500 19.7 500 19.7 - - 500 19.7 500 19.7 500 19.7
350 14 382 15.0 362 14.3 535 21.1 513 20.2 550 21.7 550 21.7 550 21.7 - - 550 21.7 550 21.7 550 21.7
400 16 407 16.0 387 15.2 560 22.1 538 21.2 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
450 18 438 17.2 418 16.5 591 23.3 569 22.4 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
500 20 463 18.2 443 17.4 616 24.3 594 23.4 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
600 24 514 20.2 494 19.4 667 26.3 645 25.4 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6 - - 600 23.6 600 23.6 600 23.6
700 28 564 22.2 544 21.4 717 28.2 695 27.4 700 27.6 700 27.6 700 27.6 - - 700 27.6 - - 700 27.6
750 30 591 23.3 571 22.5 744 29.3 722 28.4 - - - - - - - - 750 29.5 - - 750 -
800 32 616 24.3 606 23.9 779 30.7 757 29.8 800 31.5 800 31.5 800 31.5 - - 800 31.5 - - 800 31.5
900 36 663 26.1 653 25.7 826 32.5 804 31.7 900 35.4 900 35.4 900 35.4 - - 900 35.4 - - 900 35.4
1000 40 714 28.1 704 27.7 877 34.5 906 35.7 1000 39.4 1000 39.4 1000 39.4 - - 1000 39.4 - - 1000 39.4
42 714 28.1 704 27.7 877 34.5 - - - - - - - - - - 1000 39.4 - - - -
44 765 30.1 755 29.7 928 36.5 906 35.7 - - - - - - - - 1100 43.3 - - - -
1200 48 820 32.3 810 31.9 983 38.7 961 37.8 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 1200 47.2 - - 1200 47.2 - - 1200 47.2
1400 54 - - 925 36.4 - - 1076 42.4 1400 55.1 - - 1400 55.1 - - 1400 55.1 - - - -
1500 60 - - 972 38.2 - - 1123 44.2 1500 59.1 - - 1500 59.1 - - 1500 59.1 - - - -
1600 66 - - 1025 40.4 - - 1176 46.3 1600 63.0 - - 1600 63.0 - - 1600 63.0 - - - -
1800 72 - - 1123 44.2 - - 1274 50.2 1800 70.9 - - 1800 70.9 - - 1800 70.9 - - - -
2000 78 - - 1223 48.1 - - 1374 54.1 2000 78.7 - - 2000 78.7 - - 2000 78.7 - - - -
- not available
Siemens FI 01 · 2010 4/73

© Siemens AG 2009
SITRANS F M
Weight
Order No. 7ME6520 Order No. 7ME6580
NBR or EPDM liner Ebonite liner
Nominal size PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150/AWWA AS PN 16
[mm] [inch] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs] [kg] [lbs]
25 1 - - - - 4 9 4 9 4 9 5 11
40 1½ - - - - 7 15 6 13 7 15 8 17
50 2 - - 9 20 - - 8 20 9 20 9 20
65 2½ - - 10.7 24 - - 11 24 10.7 24 11 24
80 3 - - 11.6 26 - - 13 28 11.6 26 12 26
100 4 - - 15.2 33 - - 19 41 15.2 33 16 35
125 5 - - 20.4 45 - - 24 52 20.4 45 19 42
150 6 - - 26 57 - - 29 64 26 57 27 60
200 8 48 106 48 106 - - 56 124 48 106 40 88
4 250 10 64 141 69 152 - - 79 174 69 152 60 132
300 12 76 167 86 189 - - 110 243 86 189 80 176
350 14 104 229 125 274 - - 139 307 115 254 110 242
400 16 119 263 143 314 - - 159 351 125 277 125 275
450 18 136 299 173 381 - - 182 400 141 311 175 385
500 20 163 359 223 491 - - 225 495 189 418 200 440
600 24 236 519 338 744 - - 320 704 301 664 287 633
700 28 270 595 314 692 - - 273 602 320 704 330 728
750 30 - - - - - - 329 725 - - 360 794
800 32 346 763 396 873 - - 365 804 428 944 450 992
900 36 432 951 474 1043 - - 495 1089 619 1362 530 1168
1000 40 513 1130 600 1321 - - 583 1282 636 1399 660 1455
42 - - - - - - 687 1512 - - - -
44 - - - - - - 763 1680 - - 1140 2513
1200 48 643 1415 885 1948 - - 861 1896 813 1789 1180 2601
1400 54 1592 3510 - - - - - - - - 1600 3528
1500 60 - - - - - - - - - - 2460 5423
1600 66 2110 4652 - - - - - - - - 2525 5566
1800 72 2560 5644 - - - - - - - - 2930 6460
2000 78 3640 8025 - - - - - - - - 3665 8080
- not available
With transmitter MAG 5000 and MAG 6000 compact, weight is increased by approximately 0.8 kg (1.8 lbs), with MAG 6000 I, weight is increased by 5.5 kg
(12.1 lb).
4/74 Siemens FI 01 · 2010

®
Electric Actuators
A
W-93 WE Series Weatherproof
W
CSA Approved TYPE 4 & 4X IP67
0
A C5 4
201383
TYPE 4, 4X
KE Series
Weatherproof IP67 XE Series Explosion Proof
ATEX/IECEx Certified
Ex d IIB T4 Gb
IP67
ATEX II 2 G
Ex d IIB T4 Gb
XC Series 258948
CSA Explosion Proof TYPE 4, 4X, 6 & 7
CSA Approved TYPE 4, 4X, 6 & 7 IP67
®
XC Series
CSA Certification
Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D T4
258948
Ex d IIB T4 Gb
TYPE 4, 4X, 6 & 7 Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIB T4 Gb
TYPE 4, 4X, 6 & 7, IP66/IP67
Standard Features
• Visual position indicator
• Torque switches (XC-01350 – XC-25900)
• Anti-condensation heater and thermostat
• Two auxiliary limit switches
• Self-locking gear train
• Manual handwheel with torque from
690 in-lbs to 25900 in-lbs
• Available motor voltages: 12VDC, 24VDC,
24VAC, 120VAC & 220VAC
• Optional proportional control
• Various inputs with feedback available
See How To Order XC Series on page 4
Triac XC Series Actuators

The Triac XC Series Actuators are CSA Certified Type 4, 4X, 6 & 7 for
hazardous locations and meet UL 1203 standard. The actuators are rugged
and reliable with powder coated anodized aluminum housing for use in Oil,
Gas, Chemical & Power Gen applications. The XC Series is the perfect match
for resilient or high-performance butterfly valves and dampers because of
the self-locking, double reduction worm drive and torque switches. The XC
Series is also ideal for ball, plug or any rotary valve requiring automation in a
hazardous location.
Output Torque 90° Cycle Time (sec) Full Load Amps (FLA) Locked Rotor Amps (LRA) Duty Cycle*
Actuator
Model 60Hz/ 60Hz/ 60Hz/ Hand-
In-Lbs 60Hz 60Hz DC 60Hz 60Hz DC 60Hz 60Hz DC S4 (IEC 60034-1) wheel Lbs
DC DC DC
Turns
110 220 24V 12 110 220 24V 12 110 220 24V 12 110 220 24V 12 110 220 24V 12
XC
VAC VAC AC/DC VDC VAC VAC AC/DC VDC VAC VAC AC/DC VDC VAC VAC AC/DC VDC VAC VAC AC/DC VDC
-00690 690 690 620 350 20 20 17 11 1.2 0.6 5 13.5 1.4 0.7 12.8 21.7 40% 40% 30% 30% 10 16.4
-00860 860 790 700 440 20 20 20 11 1.2 0.6 6.3 13.5 1.4 0.7 12.8 21.7 40% 40% 30% 30% 10 16.4
-01350 1350 1350 1350 - 21 23 22 - 2 1 6 - 2.5 1.2 16.9 - 70% 35% 40% - 11 36.7
-01700 1700 1590 1410 - 21 23 22 - 2.3 1.1 7.4 - 2.5 1.2 16.9 - 70% 35% 40% - 11 36.7
-02640 2640 2300 2120 - 26 26 32 - 2.3 1.3 8.9 - 2.9 1.4 30.8 - 70% 40% 35% - 13.5 48.6
-04400 3980 3980 - - 29 29 - - 4.5 1.9 - - 5 2.4 - - 30% 30% - - 13.5 50.8
-06900 6900 6900 - - 31 34 - - 5.1 2.4 - - 7.3 3.8 - - 30% 30% - - 16.5 64
-10500 9600 8300 - - 31 34 - - 5.4 3.4 - - 7.3 3.8 - - 30% 30% - - 16.5 64
-17500 17500 17500 - - 93 93 - - 5.8 2.4 - - 7.3 3.8 - - 30% 30% - - 49.5 167
-25900 25900 25900 - - 93 93 - - 6.3 3.4 - - 7.3 3.8 - - 30% 30% - - 49.5 167
*DUTY CYCLE: FULL LOAD WITH 158°F AMBIENT TEMP
2
XC Series E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Dimensional Drawings
XC-00690, 00860, 01350, 01700, 02640, 04400, 06900, 10500
ØC
4-A*B
F07
F10
ØC
4-A*B X Y
H I J K L
D
3/4" NPT CONDUIT

CONNECTION
Q
(2) PLACES
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
CLOSE
Z
CL
EN
OS
OP
HAND
E
AUTO
G
N
LOCK HOLE
E O
F
XC-17500, 25900
X Y
4-A*B
H I J K L
Q
ØC
3/4" NPT CONDUIT
M
CONNECTION
D
(2) PLACES
Z
N
40 60
20 80
0 100
CLOSE % OPEN
P
3.07 R
S
G
F
ØE
XC SERIES Dimensions (IN)
Model ISO
A B C D sq E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S X Y Z
XC 5211
-00690 F07 M8 0.47 2.756 0.669 3.46 0.12 1.26 1.97 6.18 2.01 3.94 2.76 7.10 2.09 1.57 2.36 4.72 - - 10.16 6.69 9.78
-00860 F07 M8 0.47 2.756 0.669 3.46 0.12 1.26 1.97 6.18 2.01 3.94 2.76 7.10 2.09 1.57 2.36 4.72 - - 10.16 6.69 9.78
-01350 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 8.09 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 11.08
-01700 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 8.09 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 11.08
-02640 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 9.23 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.95
-04400 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 9.23 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 12.50
-06900 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 10.02 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 13.52
-10500 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 10.02 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 13.52
-17500 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 10.02 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.70
-25900 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 10.02 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.70
3
®
How to order XC Series

TRIAC® XC Series
CSA Approved Explosion Proof Actuators
Part Number Reference
Series
Explosion Proof, CSA Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; T4
Type 4, 4X, 6 & 7, IP66/IP67
XC Ex d IIB T4 Gb
Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIB T4Gb
Control
Blank (2) Position Control (Open / Close) 258948
D TDC Modulating Card (Provides 450 points of resolution) (Sizes 01350 - 25900) TYPE 4, 4X, 6 & 7
Actuator Output Torque

Size 110 VAC 220 VAC 24V AC/DC 12 VDC
-00690 690 690 620 350
-00860 860 790 700 440
-01350 1,350 1,350 1,350 -
-01700 1,700 1,590 1,410 -
-02640 2,640 2,300 2,120 -
-04400 3,980 3,980 - -
-06900 6,900 6,900 - -
-10500 9,600 8,300 - -
-17500 17,500 17,500 - - Motor
-25900 25,900 25,900 - - X 110VAC/1PH
A 24V AC/DC (Sizes 00690 - 02640)
B 12VDC (Sizes 00690 & 00860)
C 24VDC XCD models only (Sizes 00690 - 02640)
D 24VAC/1PH XCD models only (Sizes 00690 - 02640)
E 220VAC/1PH
Miscellaneous Options Note: Add all miscellaneous options to end of part number
Blank No options
T 4-20mA Transmitter
Y 180º Operation
Note: Class 1, Division 2 areas require a certified seal-off fitting during installation
Example
XC-01350X - Triac Explosion Proof Electric Actuator, 1350 In-Lbs (150Nm), 21 Second Operation, 110VAC/1PH, 50-60Hz, 2 FLA, Two Position Control,
ISO Mounting, 10 Watts Compartment Heater & Thermostat, (2) Auxiliary Limit Switches with Independent Cams, (2) Torque Switches, Diecast Anodized
Aluminum Polyester Coated Construction, Class F Extended Duty Fan Motor, Manual Override, (2) 3/4” NPT Conduit Connections, F07/F10 ISO Mounting
Pad, 19MM (0.748) Star Output Drive, cCSAus Approved Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D; T4, Ex d IIB Gb T4, Class I, Zone 1, AEx d IIB Gb T4, Type 4, 4X, 6
& 7, IP66, IP67, Ambient Temp = -20°C to +60°C
Color - Silver
A-T Controls reserves the right to change product designs and technical/dimensional specifications without notice. See website for updates.
4
KE Series E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Standard Features
• Convex lens visual position indicator
makes it easier to observe without water
collecting on the surface of the indicator
• Anti-condensation heater and thermostat
• Two auxiliary limit switches
• Self-locking gear train
• Manual override with wrench
• Available motor voltages: 12VDC, 24VDC,
120VAC & 220VAC
• Optional 4-20mA & 0-10 VDC proportional
control
• 8000 cycles @ 50% duty cycle
Triac KE Series Actuators
The Triac KE Series electric actuators are the perfect match for resilient or
high-performance butterfly valves and dampers because of the self-locking
worm drive. The KE Series actuators are used to control rotary valves, such
as butterfly valves, ball valves, plug valves, etc. Widely used in applications
such as petroleum, chemical, water treatment, ship, paper, power stations,
heating supply, building automation, light industry etc.
Unique low profile actuator,

ideal for tight spaces
5
®
KE Series
Dimensional Drawing
KE-440 to -3500
C 2.40
B
BC2 BOLT CIRCLE

OPTIONAL MODULATING
BC1 BOLT CIRCLE
CONTROL MODULE
T1 THREAD
D1 DEEP
E A T2 THREAD
D2 DEEP
D
KE SERIES Dimensions (IN) Mounting Pad
Model A B C D E ISO 5211 F G BC1 BC2 T1 D1 T2 D2
KE-440 5.14 6.46 2.76 5.47 3.11 F05/F07 0.551 x 0.67 Deep 0.76 1.969 2.756 M6 x 1 0.4 M8 x 1.25 0.5
KE-880 5.31 7.37 3.19 6.30 3.48 F05/F07 0.669 x 0.89 Deep 0.92 1.969 2.756 M6 x 1 0.4 M8 x 1.25 0.5
KE-1700 6.65 11.32 5.07 8.29 4.47 F10/F12 1.063 x 1.28 Deep 1.47 4.016 4.921 M10 x 1.5 0.6 M12 x 1.75 0.7
KE-3500 6.65 11.32 5.07 8.29 4.47 F10/F12 1.063 x 1.28 Deep 1.47 4.016 4.921 M10 x 1.5 0.6 M12 x 1.75 0.7
KE Motor Technical Data

Output 90° Cycle Time (sec) Rated Current
Actuator Torque AC DC DC 1 Phase Lbs
Model
In-Lbs Nm 50 Hz 60 Hz 12V 24V 12V 24V 110VAC 220VAC
KE-440 440 50 15 13 25 20 3.0 1.8 1.2 0.65 7.5
KE-880 880 100 15 13 25 20 5.3 2.8 1.3 0.9 12
KE-1700 1700 200 20 17 N/A 20 N/A 7.5 1.3 0.6 21
KE-3500 3500 400 20 17 N/A 30 N/A 7.5 2.5 1.2 21
6
KE Series E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
KE Series Actuators
sight glass sight glass cover

motor
indicator dial
rotor spindle
Convex lens visual position indicator
motor end cap body
terminal board
transmission gears
gear box cover worm
worm gear
output shaft
bearing 4-20mA/0-10 VDC Modulating Control Module
TRIAC® KE Series Electric Actuator Part Number Reference
Model
KE Weather-Proof IP67 Electric Actuator
Control
Blank (2) Position Control (Open / Close)
M Standard Modulating Control Module (4-20mA / 0-10 VDC Input/Output)
Actuator Sizes (KE)
Size Motor
440 440 In-Lbs X 110/120VAC/1PH Place holder - Omit when at end of part number
880 880 In-Lbs B 12VDC (440 & 880 models only)
1700 1700 In-Lbs C 24VDC
3500 3500 In-Lbs E 220VAC/1PH
Example
KEM-880
Triac Worm Drive Electric Actuator, Weather-Proof IP67, 880 In-Lbs Torque
Output, 13 Sec Cycle Speed, 110VAC/1PH, 0.75 Rated Amps, Modulating
Control, (2) Auxiliary Limit Switches, Heater & Thermostat, Diecast Aluminum
Powder Coated Construction, Manual Override with Wrench, (2) ½” NPT Conduit
Entries, F05, F07, F10 Mounting Pad, 0.669 (17MM) Star Output Drive
A-T Controls reserves the right to change product designs and technical/dimensional specifications
without notice.
7
®
WE Series
WE-350
The WE-350 Electric Actuator is speciﬁcally
designed to operate small size ball valves
(1” and less), dampers and other
quarter-turn devices.
Features
• Compact and light weight
• High resistance to corrosion due to hard
anodizing on inside and outside with
polyester powder coating on external
surface
• Multi-voltage (85-265VAC/1PH, 24VDC)
• Standard space heater (0.5W)
• Weather proof (IP67)
• Push Button and Manual lever
• Wide, easy mounting base standard to ISO 5211
(F03/F04/F05)
• Standard four limit switches - (2) aux limit switches
• Captive cover bolts
• Mechanical position indicator & LED lamp indicators
(Open/Close)
Construction
Manual Push Button
Full close lamp (blue)

Cable entry & Cable
24 AWG, 11 conductor 17mm dia. Full open lamp (red)
Standard Wire length: 47¼”w
PG11 CABLE GLAND Indicator
Main board
4 Limit Switches
Aux. Close Limit Switch (ACLS)-Black
Aux. Open Limit Switch (AOLS)-White
Close Limit Switch (CLS)-Green
Open Limit Switch (OLS)-Red 4 Captive cover bolts
Manual lever holder
Mounting base (ISO 5211)

F03, F04, F05
8
WE-350 E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Performance
Maximum Operating
Supply Power & Rated Current (A) Duty Cycle Manual
Type Output Time Mounting Size Weight
60/50Hz, 1 Phase IEC34-1 Level
Torque 60/50 Hz
(Model) Angle
In-Lbs. 90° ISO 5211 110VAC 220VAC 24VDC S4 Lbs.
WE-350 354 12 sec. .12 .06 .46
F03/F04/F05 70% 90° 2.65
WE-350HS 270 6.5 sec. .065 .033 .25
Dimensions
4.59”
3.53”
3.53”
Wire: 47-1/4”
M5 TAP D.P12 3.49”

4.89”
Ø42(DIN 3337 F04)
M5 TAP D.P12
Ø36(DIN 3337 F03)
4-M6TAP DP12
Ø50(DIN 3337 F05)
.39”
.87”
FEMALE OUTPUT DRIVE

M8 TAP 0.433 (11MM) x 0.47 (12MM) DEPTH
2.17”
Wiring Connection
MAIN POWER (AC or DC)
AC DC
85~265VAC 24 VDC/3A
- + COM
CLOSE OPEN COM CLOSE OPEN
YEL ORA BLA RED BLU SKY WHI BRO GREY PUR GRE
BLUE
SMPS
+24VDC
15mA
MAIN PCB
9
®
WE/XE Series
WE/XE-500
The WE-500 and XE-500 Electric Actuators have a compact
design ideal for use with small ball valves (2” and less),
dampers and other quarter-turn devices. Each actuator
includes a visual indicator, two auxiliary switches and a
compartment heater. A convenient wrench manual override
shaft is standard. This actuator is the clear choice when a
compact, efficient electric actuator is required!
Standard Features
• Compact and light due to high grade Standard Specifications
aluminum alloy housing.
• High resistance to corrosion due to hard Enclosure Weatherproof (IP67, Type 4, 4X)
anodizing on inside and outside with polyester or Explosion Proof (ATEX/IECEx Ex d IIB T4)
powder coating on external surface Power Supply 110/220V AC 1PH, 50/60Hz, ± 10%,
24V AC/DC
• Output torque: 530 In-lbs.
Duty cycle IEC 60034-1 S4, 70%
• Reversible, high torque and low current motor Motor Class F Reversible motor
• Enclosure: Weatherproof (IP67, Type 4, 4X) or Limit switches (2) Operational & (2) Auxillary,
Explosion Proof (ATEX/IECEx Ex d IIB T4) Open / Close, SPDT, 16A 1/2HP 125/250VAC,
• Captive cover bolts 0.6A 125VDC, 0.3A 250VDC
• Terminal block (11P) Space heater 2W (110/220V AC) Anti-condensation
Manual override Drive Nut (4mm hex)
Cable conduit Two 1/2” NPT
Movement angle 320º ±10º
Ambient temperature -4ºF - 158ºF (optional -40ºF Low Temp Kit)
External coating Polyester powder coating
Mounting ISO 5211 (F03/F05/F07)
Performance
Maximum Operating Full Load Amps Locked Rotor Amps Duty
Type Motor Number of
Output Time Cycle Weight
Size Handle Turns
Torque 60/50 Hz AC 1PH. 50/60Hz AC/DC AC 1PH. 50/60Hz AC/DC IEC 34-1
(Model)
In-Lbs. 90° Watts 110V 220V 24V 110V 220V 24V S4 N Lbs.
WE-500 6.61
530 12/14 10 0.4 0.2 0.8 0.5 0.25 2.5 70% 8
XE-500 9.90
Optional Configurations
Position Indication Unit (Potentiometer kit)
High resolution potentiometer with precisely machined gearing directly engaged with drive shaft
provides continuous monitoring of position of valve and actuator.
AC/DC 24V Control Unit

Dip Switch
Mode 1 2
DC ON OFF TMC3 Electronic Modulating Card
AC OFF ON • For WE Series only; See details on page 16
(setting shown here applies to WE/XE-500A only)
10
WE/XE-500 E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Dimensions
WE-500
CSA Approved,
Type 4 & 4X IP67
OPEN
CLOSE
CLOSE
OPEN
CONTROL BOX FOR

MODULATING CARD
XE-500
ATEX/IECEx Ex d IIB T4 Gb, IP67
11
®
WE/XE Series
Electric Actuators WE/XE Features
Window cover Actuator Cover
High corrosion-resistance due to anodizing on
the inside and outside and polyester powder
Window coating on the outside
Position indicator
Option: illuminated red (close),
Motor
green (open), yellow (over torque)
Available in 1 Phase / 3 Phase, all motors are
custom built for high-torque, low current draw
and the highest duty cycle ratings offered. Fan
Cooled Motor is standard on model WE/XE 690
and larger.
Limit Switch & Auxiliary Terminal Block

Switch Set (standard)
Capacitor
Close Cam
Open Cam
Actuator
Body Manual
Handwheel
Mechanical Stops
(rear side)
Heater and Thermostat

Dual Conduit Connection
(rear)
Torque Switch System Manual Override

(except WE/XE-690)
Easy Mounting Base Double reduction worm gear
ISO 5211 standard assembly is self-locking with
minimum blacklash.
12
WE/XE Series E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
WE/XE-690 thru WE/XE-25900

Terminal block
• Extra terminals for customer’s convenience

• Spring Loaded Terminal Strip provides secure connection
Heater
• Ceramic housing with thermostat to eliminate condensation

(7-10 watt Standard)
• Optional High Wattage Heater for Low Temp applications to -40°F
Captive cover bolt
• Cover bolts are specially designed to prevent loosening during

maintenance or installation
• All external bolts are stainless steel for rust prevention
Indicator sustained by spring
• Direction of visual indicator is set by factory

• To change its direction, simply grip the indicator plate and rotate
to the new position
• Spring beneath the indicator plate sustains the set position
• No need to loosen screw and tighten it again
Slot on window cover for draining water
• A drain slot is provided to eliminate water buildup on window
Removable Drive Bushing
• Easily change drive size
13
®
WE/XE Series
WE/XE Series
WE CSA Approved,
Type 4 & 4X,
IP67
XE
ATEX/IECEx SE Type 4,
Ex d IIB T4 Gb, IP67 4X & 6, IP68
Acutator Output 90° Cycle Motor Full Load Amps Locked Rotor Amps Duty Handwheel
Weight
Models Torque Time (sec) Size AC/DC 1 Phase 3 Phase AC/DC 1 Phase 3 Phase Cycle Turns
IEC 34-1
WE / XE In-Lbs. 60 / 50 Hz Watts 24V 110V/60Hz 220V/60Hz 380V 440V 24V 110V/60Hz 220V/60Hz 380V 440V N Lbs.
S4
-690 690 13 / 16 15 5 1.2 0.6 N/A N/A 12.8 1.4 0.7 N/A N/A 70% 10 16.4
-1350 1350 21 / 25 40 6 2 1 0.28 0.36 16.9 2.5 1.2 0.75 0.66 70% 11 36.7
-1700 1700 21 / 25 40 7.4 2.3 1.1 0.28 0.36 16.9 2.5 1.2 0.75 0.66 70% 11 36.7
-2640 2640 26 / 31 40 8.9 2.3 1.3 0.27 0.34 30.8 2.9 1.4 1 0.87 70% 13.5 48.6
-4400 4400 26 / 31 90 N/A 4.5 1.9 0.42 0.47 N/A 5 2.4 1.73 1.5 70% 13.5 50.8
-5200 5200 26 / 31 90 N/A 4.5 2 0.42 0.47 N/A 5 2.4 1.73 1.5 70% 13.5 50.8
-6900 6900 31 / 37 180 N/A 5.1 2.4 0.61 0.67 N/A 7.3 3.8 2.73 2.38 50% 16.5 64
-10500 10500 31 / 37 180 N/A 5.4 3.4 0.61 0.67 N/A 7.3 3.8 2.73 2.38 50% 16.5 64
-17500 17500 95 / 112 180 N/A 5.8 2.4 0.61 0.67 N/A 7.3 3.8 2.73 2.38 50% 49.5 167
-25900 25900 95 / 112 180 N/A 6.3 3.4 0.61 0.67 N/A 7.3 3.8 2.73 2.38 50% 49.5 167
Standard Specifications
Enclosure Series WE - Weatherproof, CSA Type 4, 4X, IP67
Series XE - Explosion(Flame) Proof, ATEX/IECEx Ex d IIB T4 Gb, IP67
Series SE - Submersible, Type 4, 4X, & 6, IP68, 10m for 72hr
AWWA Conforms to AWWA C540-93 requirements
Power supply 12/24VDC, 24/110/220VAC 1PH, 220/380/440/460/480VAC 3 PH, 50/60Hz, ±10%
Duty cycle 1800 start/hour at full load at 25°C (77°F)
Motor Class F Reversible Induction motor
Limit switches Open / Close, SPDT, 16A 1/2HP 125/250VAC, 0.6A 125VDC, 0.3A 250VDC; (2) Operational & (2) Auxillary
Torque switches Open / Close, SPDT, 16A 1/2HP 125/250VAC,
0.6A 125VDC, 0.3A 250VDC (except size -690)
Stall protection Built-in thermal protection, Open 302ºF (150ºC) / Close 207ºF (97ºC)
Travel angle 0 to 90º ± 10º / 0 to 270° ± 10º
Indicator Continuous position indicator
Manual override Declutching mechanism
Self locking Provided by double worm gearing
Mechanical stopper Open / Close (external adjustable screws)
Space heater 7-10W Anti-condensation
Cable Conduit Two 3/4” NPT
Lubrication Grease moly (EP type)
Terminal block Spring loaded lever push type
Materials Steel, Aluminium alloy, AI bronze, Polycarbonate
Ambient temperature Standard: -4ºF — 158ºF
Explosion Proof standard: -4ºF — 140ºF
Ambient humidity 90% RH Max. (non-condensing)
Anti-Vibration XYZ 10g, 0.2~34Hz, 30 minutes
External coating Anodizing treatment before dry powder, Polyester
14
WE & XE Series E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Options
Option WE XE SE Available Models

Explosion Proof Enclosure (ATEX/IECEx II 2 G, Ex d IIB T4 Gb, IP67) - X - -500 to -25900
Submersible Enclosure (Type 4, 4X & 6, IP68, 10m for 72hr) - - X -690 to -10500
Potentiometer Unit (1kΩ to 10kΩ) X X X -500 to -25900
(TMC3) Electronic Modulating Card; WE-500 to -25900
X X X
4-20mA, 1-5mA, 0-10VDC, 1-5VDC, 0-135Ω command signal XE/SE-1350 to -25900
(TDC) High Resolution Electronic Modulating Card; WE-500 to -25900
X X X
4-20mA, 1-5VDC, 0-5VDC, 0-10VDC command signal XE/SE-1350 to -25900
Local Control Unit (local/remote control) X - - -500 to -25900
Semi-Integral Control Unit (local/remote control with feedback) X - - -1350 to -25900
Intelligent Digital Control Unit
X - - -1350 to -80000
(local/remote control with feedback and digital LCD display)
Current Position Transmitter (4-20mA output) X X X -500 to -25900
Low Temp Kit (-40°F) X X X -500 to -25900
WE/XE-500A to -2640A
24V AC/DC Control X X X
SE-690A to -2640A
WE/XE-500C to -2640C
DC Motor (24VDC) X X X
SE-690C to -2640C
Rotation 120°, 180°, 270° turn X X X -690 to -10500
Visual LED Indicator (open, close, power, torque) X X X -1350 to -25900
Fire-Proof Covering (1050°C ± 5°C for 50 min) - - - Consult Factory for FE Series ATEX II 2 G
Ex d IIB T4 Gb
Fire-Proof Covering (250°C ± 5°C for 150 min) - - - Consult Factory for FE Series
XE Explosion Proof Enclosure

Enclosure Ratings • ATEX/IECEx Certification
Series WE - Weatherproof, CSA Type 4, 4X, IP67
Series XE - Explosion(Flame) Proof, ATEX/IECEx Signal LED Unit
Ex d IIB T4 Gb, IP67 Large indicator with
Series SE - Submersible, Type 4, 4X, & 6, IP68, monitoring lamps
10m for 72hr (Over torque, open
and close)
Wiring Diagram References High Speed Electric Actuators

Model Description Drawing Output Speed Torque Switch
WE-500 115 VAC/1 Phase, Two Position SE 1010 Model Torque (60Hz) Setting
WE-500A 24 VAC/24 VDC, Two Position SE 1168/SE 1130 (In-Lbs) (seconds) (In-Lbs)
115 VAC/1 Phase, Modulating WE-690*HS2 290 4.5 N/A
WEM-500 SE 1085
with TMC3 Servo Card WE-690*HS1 400 7.0 N/A
WE-690 115 VAC/1 Phase, Two Position SE 1032 WE-1350*HS2 840 7.0 1,350
115 VAC/1 Phase, Modulating WE-1350*HS1 1,200 10.5 1,350
WEM-690 SE 1235
with TMC3 Servo Card
WE-2640*HS2 1,390 8.5 2,640
WE/XE-1350 thru 25900 115 VAC/1 Phase, Two Position SE 1080
WE-2640*HS1 2,050 13.0 2,640
WE/XE-1350A thru 2640A 24 VAC/24 VDC, Two Position SE 1221/SE 1220
115 VAC/1 Phase, Modulating WE-4400*HS2 2,350 8.5 4,400
WEM/XEM-1350 thru 25900 SE 1052
with TMC3 Servo Card WE-4400*HS1 3,500 13.0 4,400
Digital Control Unit 3 Phase/Modulating SE 1222 WE-6900*HS2 4,500 10.5 6,900
Digital Control Unit 3 Phase/Two Position SE 1301 WE-10500*HS1 6,700 15.5 10,500
Semi-Integral Unit 1 Phase/Proportional SE 1176 WE-17500*HS2 12,000 31.0 17,500
Semi-Integral Unit 1 Phase/Two Position SE 1097 WE-25900*HS1 18,000 47.0 25,900
» See www.atcontrols.com to download specific wiring diagrams Motor specifications remain the same.
(Download > Sort by Document Type > Electric Schematic) *Must specify voltage - see part number matrix on pg 22
15
®
Options
Modulating Options for WE-500 thru 25900
Modulating Cards
TMC3 Electronic Modulating Card (120/220VAC)

• Auto Calibration for Easy Setup
• 10 Bit Microprocessor controller for precise positioning and control
• 4-20mA, 1-5mA, 0-10 VDC, 1-5 VDC, 0-135 Ohm or Command Signal
Potentiometer
• TMC3 Can be programmed to Fail in Place, Fail CW, or Fail CCW on loss of
command signal
• Characterized Control-Linear, quick opening (Square root), or Equal Percentage
(Square)
• OnBoard 4-20 mA transmitter (standard)
TDC Electronic Modulating Card (12/24VDC, 24/120/220 VAC)

• 450 Point Resolution, 16 Bit Micro Processor
• Auto Calibration
• Adaptive Control Feature (continuously adjusts for load and actuator conditions
and positions to ±0.1°)
• Dynamic Breaking
• 4-20mA, 1-5V, 0-5V, 0-10V
• Programmed to Fail in place, Fail CW, or Fail CCW on loss of command signal
• 4-20mA Feedback Transmitter (Optional)
EPC Electronic AS-i Network Card

• AS-i Version 2.1
• 120 VAC or 24VDC Power
• Emergency Override-Normal Operation is overridden when actuator is driven to
either CW or CCW position on command
• Built in Emergency Position Command (EPC) overrides normal operation and
automatically operates the valve into either the open or closed position (normally
this is the closed position) as defined in the user specifications
• Signal Sentinel continuously monitors the EPC system offering additional failsafe
backup in the event of an unexpected local event
Boiler Feedwater Application

• WEL Control signal 4-20mA, specify these parts: LRC-101, POT-102 & Extended
Bracket.
• WES Control signal 0-135 ohm, specify these parts: TDC-100, XMA-108, POT-102
& Extended Bracket
• Logarithmically averages rapidly changing signals to reduce unneccessary hunting
for position.
Other Network Cards Available Upon Request

16
Options E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Special Application
Intelligent Digital Control Unit

• Light, compact and integral design
• Wide range of electric power application (220VAC~480VAC/3 Phase)
• Built-in auto phase discriminator (easy and convenient wiring)
• Digital indicator with number, bar graph, menu and (3) LED lamps
• Separate terminal chamber (Reliable against water, vibration, temperature, etc.)
• Easy application for WE-Series Actuators
• Various options available
Semi-Integral Control Unit

• Light, compact and integrated design (IMS, Local/Remote control)
• Wide range of electric power application (115VAC~480VAC/1 Phase or 3 Phase)
• Phase protection monitoring by LED in case of reverse wiring
• Easy application for WE-Series Actuators
• Various options available
LED lamp signal

White :Power
Blue :Remote
Yellow :Fault
Red :Open/Opening
Green :Close/Closing
17
®
WE & XE Series
Dimensional Drawing
WE/XE-690, 1350, 1700, 2640, 4400, 5200, 6900, 10500
ØC
ØC
3.01
D Control Box for
Modulating Card
(Size -690 Only)
3/4" NPT CONDUIT
CONNECTION
(2) PLACES
WE/XE-17500, 25900
X Y
4-A*B
H I J K L
Q
ØC
3/4" NPT CONDUIT
M
CONNECTION
D
(2) PLACES
Z
N
40 60
20 80
0 100
CLOSE % OPEN
P
3.07
R
S
G
F
Dimensions (IN) ØE
Model ISO
WE/XE 5211
-690 F07 M8 0.47 2.756 0.669 3.46 0.12 1.26 1.97 6.18 2.01 3.94 2.76 6.57 2.09 1.57 2.36 4.72 - - 10.16 6.69 9.25
-1350 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 7.56 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 10.55
-1700 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 7.56 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 10.55
-2640 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.42
-4400 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.97
-5200 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.97
-6900 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 12.99
-10500 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 12.99
-17500 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.17
-25900 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.17
18
WE Series E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Dimensional Drawing
WE-1350, 1700, 2640, 4400, 5200, 6900, 10500 Intelligent Digital Control Unit
ØC
4-A*B
F10
F12
ØC 4-A*B X Y
6.06 H I J K L
D
Q
5.45
M
CLOSE
9.73
OPEN
Z
OPEN
CLOSE
P
CL
EN
OS
OP
HAND
E
AUTO
N
LOCK HOLE
3/4" NPT O
G
F
CONDUIT
CONNECTION E DIA.
(2) PLACES
WE-17500, 25900 Intelligent Digital Control Unit
4-A*B
X Y
6.06 H I J K L
Q
ØC
M
D
Z
N
5.45
3/4" NPT
40 60
CONDUIT
20 80 CONNECTION
(2) PLACES 3.07
9.73
0 100
CLOSE % OPEN
P
R
S
G
F
ØE
Dimensions (IN)
Model ISO
WE 5211
-1350 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 7.56 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 10.55
-1700 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 7.56 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 10.55
-2640 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.42
-4400 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.97
-5200 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.97
-6900 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 12.99
-10500 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 12.99
-17500 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.17
-25900 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.17
19
®
WE Series
Dimensional Drawing
WE-1350, 1700, 2640, 4400, 5200, 6900, 10500 Semi-integral Control Unit
ØC
4-A*B
F07
F10
ØC
S
T
4-A*B
O
P
X' Y
OPEN
CLOSE
Lo
Re
W H I J K L
D
3/4" NPT CONDUIT
VIEW U CONNECTION
Q
(2) PLACES
CLOSE
OPEN
OPEN
M
P
CLOSE
Z
CL
EN
OS
OP
HAND
E
AUTO
G
N
LOCK HOLE
E O
F
WE-17500, 25900 Semi-integral Control Unit
4-A*B
X' Y
W H I J K L
Q
S
T
O
P
OPEN
CLOSE
Lo
Re
ØC
VIEW U
3/4" NPT CONDUIT D
M
CONNECTION
(2) PLACES
Z
N
40 60
20 80
0 100
% OPEN
U
CLOSE
P
3.07
R
S
G
F
ØE
Dimensions (IN)
Model ISO
WE 5211
-690 F07 M8 0.47 2.756 0.669 3.46 0.12 1.26 1.97 6.18 2.01 3.94 2.76 6.57 2.09 1.57 2.36 4.72 - - 10.16 6.69 9.25
-1350 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 7.56 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 10.55
-1700 F07/F10 M8/M10 0.47/0.59 2.756/4.016 0.748 4.92 0.12 1.65 2.87 7.87 2.56 5.59 3.43 7.56 2.68 2.13 3.07 6.30 - - 13.31 9.02 10.55
-2640 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.42
-4400 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.97
-5200 F10/F12 M10/M12 0.59/0.71 4.016/4.921 1.063 5.83 0.12 1.93 3.23 8.70 2.56 6.30 3.90 8.70 2.72 2.56 3.07 7.09 - - 14.49 10.20 11.97
-6900 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 12.99
-10500 F14 M16 0.95 5.512 1.417 7.01 0.12 2.24 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 4.37 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 - - 16.14 11.69 12.99
-17500 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.17
-25900 F16 M20 1.18 6.496 1.417 9.65 0.20 3.54 4.06 9.53 2.56 7.32 5.24 9.49 2.91 3.07 4.33 8.27 9.17 5.24 16.14 12.56 22.17
See wiring drawings reference on page 15 or call factory for special requests.
20
WE-53000
& WE-80000 E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Technical Information
Output 90° Cycle Mounting Rated Current(A) 60Hz Motor Insulation Maximum Bore Size Duty
Torque Time Size Class (mm) Cycle Number of Weight
Acutator 1 Phase 3 Phase
Handwheel
Model AC 1PH
In-Lbs 60/50Hz ISO 5211 220V 380V 440V Key (ø) Square (¤) S2 Turns Lbs.
50/60Hz
WE-53000 53000 3.15 1.8 2.2
149 sec. F25/30* F 120 100 30% 39 335
WE-80000 80000 3.85 2.0 2.4
*Four mounting holes only
Standard Specifications
Enclosure Weatherproof enclosure IP67, Type 4, 4X & 6, Features
O-ring Sealed
Power Supply 220VAC/1PH/60Hz, 380/440/VAC/3Ph/60Hz ±
10%, 24VDC
Duty Cycle 30%
Motor Squirrel Cage induction motor
Aux. Limit Switches 2 each for Open/Close, SPDT, 250 VAC, 10A Rating
Torque Switches 1 each for Open/Close, SPDT, 250 VAC, 10A Rating
Space Heater 5W (220VAC) Anti-condensation
Manual Override Declutchable
Cable Conduit Two 3/4” NPT
Movement Angle 90º ± 5º
Ambient -4ºF to 158ºF (optional -40ºF Low Temp Kit)
Temperature
Ambient Humidity 90% RH Max (Non-Condensing)
Position Indicator Continuous mechanical indicator with arrow
Self Locking Provided by double worm gearing (no brake)
Mechanical Stopper 1 for each travel end (open/close), external & adjustable
Stall Protection / Built in thermal protection, Open 302ºF (150ºC) /
Set Temp Close 207ºF (97ºC)
Terminal Block Spring loaded lever push type
Eternal Coating Polyester powder coating
Lubrication EP type grease
Anti-Vibration XYZ 10g, 0.2~34Hz, 30 minutes
Dimensions
8.86”
21
®
How to order WE/XE Series

TRIAC® WE / XE Series Part Number Reference
Model
WE Weather Proof, CSA TYPE 4, 4X, IP67
XE Explosion Proof Design, ATEX & IECEx Ex d IIB T4 Gb, IP67
FE Fire Proof Unit (1050ºF for 50 Min)
SE Submersible unit (IP68, 10 meters for 72 Hours)
Control
Blank (2) Position Control (Open / Close)
M Standard Modulating Control Card (TMC3) with 4-20mA transmitter
D High Resolution Modulating Card (TDC)
(TDC-100 or TDC-400; see Misc. Options for transmitter)
P Profibus DP On/Off
R Modbus RTU (RS485) On/Off
L Boiler Feed (4-20mA) TSM extension recommended
S Boiler Feed (0-135ohm) TSM extension recommended
Actuator
Size Motor
-350 350 In-Lbs X 115VAC/1PH Place holder only - Omit when at end of part number
-350HS 270 In-Lbs A 24 VDC/VAC - On/Off (Sizes 350 - 2640)
-500 500 In-Lbs B 12VDC (XE-690 only)
-690 690 In-Lbs C 24VDC WED/XED/SED models only (Sizes 500 - 2640)
-1350 1350 In-Lbs C2 24VDC - 3 wire On/Off ((Sizes 500 - 2640)
-1700 1700 In-Lbs D 24VAC/1PH WED/XED/SED models only (Sizes 500 - 2640)
-2640 2640 In-Lbs E 220VAC/1PH
-4400 4400 In-Lbs F 220VAC/3PH (Sizes 1350 - 80000)
-5200 5200 In-Lbs G 380VAC/3PH (Sizes 1350 - 80000)
-6900 6900 In-Lbs H 440/460/480VAC/3PH (Sizes 1350 - 80000)
-10500 10500 In-Lbs
-17500 17500 In-Lbs
-25900 25900 In-Lbs Options
-53000 53000 In-Lbs X No options (Place holder only) Omit when at end of part number
-80000 80000 In-Lbs B Semi-integral Control Unit (1PH/3PH) (Sizes 13500 - 25900)
C Intelligent Digital Control Unit (3PH) (Sizes 13500 - 80000)
D Local / Remote Control Switches (Sizes 500 - 25900)
E RCT Electronic Speed Control Module - 115 VAC only (Sizes 500 - 25900)
F AMI 2-Wire Relay & Speed Control - 115 VAC only (Sizes 500 - 25900)
G End of travel time delay (same in both directions)
HS1/HS2 See High Speed Options
R 2 Wire Control, Relay - 115 VAC control voltage
S 2 Wire Control, Relay - 24 VAC control voltage
T 2 Wire Control, Relay - 24 VDC control voltage
Miscellaneous Options Note: Add all miscellaneous options to end of part number
Blank No options
T 0-10VDC / 4-20mA Transmitter (For modulating control option “D”)
N 1000 Ohm Potentiometer
O 5000 Ohm Potentiometer
P 10K Ohm Potentiometer
Y 180º Operation (Sizes 690 - 10500)
Y-3P 180º Operation, 3-Position Control (Sizes 690 - 10500)
L -40ºF Low Temp Kit (Sizes 500 - 25900)
I Visual LED Indicator (Open, Close, Power) (Sizes 690 - 10500)
S (4) Auxillaryl limit switches (6 total) (Sizes 690 - 25900)
Floor Drive Mounting Configuration - See Floor Drive Catalog
Examples
WEM-1350
(Weather Proof Housing, Modulating Control, model size 1350, 115VAC / 1PH)
WEM-1350XXT
(Weather Proof Housing, Modulating Control, model size 1350, 115VAC / 1PH, 4-20mA
Transmitter)
A-T Controls reserves the right to change product designs and technical/dimensional
specifications without notice.
22
Specials and
Applied
E L E C T R I C A C T U A T O R S
Solutions While you have come to know A-T Controls for

superior service in automated valves and
day-to-day automation and controls, we specialize
in offering solutions to your more unique and
difficult applications. Listed below are some of the
electric specials and solutions oriented products
and services we offer.
Butterfly Valve
Tee Assemblies
Electric Floor
Damper Drive
See these catalogs for

XEC Series
XEC Series Actuators
additional offerings included

12 VDC Electric Actuators for Choke Valves
in the TRIAC® Electric Actuator The Triac® XEC Series electric actuators
12 VDC Electric Actuators for Choke Valves
Electric
come complete with a choke valve
control circuit board. The circuit board
product line:
is equipped with a torque limiting feature
Fail-Safe Actuators to prevent damage to gear train. There is

an alarm circuit to indicate a “jammed”
MOMENTARY MAINTAINED choke. The motor is reversible. The motor
SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTOR SWITCH and torque limiting feature ensure long
operating life. Actuators include mechanical
travel stops and limit switches to indicate
fully opened or closed position.
The Triac® XEC Series electric actuators for

choke valves are the preferred choice when
long life 12VDC actuation is required.
• 12VDC power supply

• 70% Duty Cycle motor • Ambient temperatures: -4°F to 158°F
• Two ¾” conduit entries • Optional low temperature -40°F
• Class F motor insulation • Declutchable Manual Override (10 turns
• 4 Internal Switches (2-Indication; for 90°)
2-Motor Control) • External adjustable travel stops
• Electronic Over-torque Limiter • Self-locking, double reduction worm gear
Spring Return Battery Backup • Pulse control signal to relays assembly with minimal back lash
• Low power consumption when not in • Anodized & polyester powder coated
201383
Electric Fail-Safe Electric Fail-Safe operation enclosure
TYPE 4 & 4X
Mechanical Spring Torques Torques up to 2640 In-Lbs
up to 2300 In-Lbs Emergency shutdown applications The XEC Series is our standard recommendation for use with choke valves.
Please see our full product line of electric actuators for applications with other
requirements.
» XE Series 12 VDC should be used instead for cases where the customer is
using a valve controller (such as TotalFlow by ABB®).
» XC Series (size 690) is available for applications that are required to meet
CSA Approved Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D standards. Motor control board
C US
258948
is not available in CSA model.
262375
9955 International Blvd. PHONE (513) 247-5465

Cincinnati, Ohio 45246 FAX (513) 247-5462
1 www.atcontrols.com sales@atcontrols.com
23
®
9955 International Blvd. PHONE (513) 247-5465

Cincinnati, Ohio 45246 FAX (513) 247-5462
www.atcontrols.com sales@atcontrols.com
WE_XE_XC_KE-20170522
Copyright 2013 A-T Controls, Inc.
LIT0021

TDC-400
DC Digital High Resolution Controller
Installation & Maintenance Manual
The TRIAC TDC-400 is a high performance

digital positioner intended to control DC actuators,
providing 450 points of resolution with quarter turn
TDC-400
actuators ranging from 2 sec to 120 sec. The TDC-
DC Digital High-Resolution Controller
400 has many automatic advanced features that will
enhance any actuator while making it easy to install
and set up.
The simple three button control is used to
configure all parameters the unit needs for a wide
variety of applications, and allows the open and
closed positions to be easily set for direct or
reversing acting without any rewiring. The unit can
be configured for various command types (4-20mA,
1-5V, 0-5V, 0-10V, 2-10V, or a digital command) and
its default operation upon loss of command. The
multicolor LED Fault indication displays up to 15
different conditions (including "Low Battery
Voltage").
Various option modules are easily plugged
into the unit, providing other features such as a
position feedback signal, auxiliary switches, fault
relay contact, or digital communications. A wide
range of data is accessible through a digital
communications module, providing additional control
or information.
FEATURES
 10 to 30 VDC operating voltage range with motors rated up to 60A locked rotor or 10A running
current.
 Solid state motor driver with thermal and overcurrent protection provides reliable service
beyond the life of the actuator motor.
 Positions to ±0.1 with quarter-turn actuators ranging from 2 sec to 120 sec (with or without a
mechanical brake). Electronic Brake feature can eliminate mechanical brake.
 Adaptive Control feature continuously adjusts for load and actuator conditions and eliminates
calibration procedures and auto-cal operations.
 Polarity Detection feature allows direct or reverse acting operation without re-wiring.
 Stall Detection feature protects actuator motor from a stall condition.
 Adjustable Motor Current Trip (0-12A) setting limits actuator torque and battery/power supply
current requirements.
 Electronic Surge Limiting reduces wire size and battery/power supply requirements to 20%
of locked rotor current.
 Automatic Duty Cycle Control feature prevents motor damage due to overheating and
prevents shutdown of a process due to a thermal overload switch.
 Operating temperature range of 0 to 60C
1 October 17, 2012

www.a-tcontrols.com Engineering\documents\products\IOM\IOM8042.docx

TDC-400
OUTLINE
CONTROLS
Digital High Resolution
DIGITAL AUTO
ELECTRICAL
4-20mA MANUAL / FB POT CAL
CONNECTIONS
1-5VDC CLOSE LAST
0-5VDC OPEN (BOTH OFF)
0-10VDC AUX CLOSE OUTPUT MODE

to FeedbackPot
J1
2-10VDC AUX OPEN OUTPUT
+2.5V 1
COMMAND TYPE
WIPER 2
LOSS OF COMMAND
GND 3
POSITION OUT CAL
MOTOR 1 OUTPUT 4
FAULT MOTOR 2 OUTPUT 5
LIMIT COMMON 6
LIMIT SW1 7
LIMIT SW2 8
FRONT PANEL
to Motor
to DC Power
J2
J7 BAT POS 1
BAT NEG 2
EARTH 3
TRIP COMMAND ( ) 4
1.32" ADJUST
COMMAND (+) 5
+5V OUT 6
to Signal
J1 J2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 J3
OPTION MODULE
1.36" FUSE CONNECTOR
#6 clear hole
(2) places
J3 to Auto/ManualStation
J7
1.36" GND 1
OVERRIDE INPUT 2
0.25" 3.50" 0.25"
2 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
BLOCK DIAGRAM
+V J2 J1
BAT POS 1 1 +2.5V
10-30
see WIRE TABLE
VDC 2 WIPER FEEDBACK
BAT NEG 2 POT
EARTH 3 GND
EARTH 3
POWER / SIGNAL
ACTUATOR
NOTE: Battery nega-
tive must be connected 4 MOTOR 1
to earthgroundat pow-
er source.
5 MOTOR 2
4
COMMAND ( _ )
NOTE: Seeinput sig- 6 LIMIT COMMON
nal configurationsfor
more information. 5
COMMAND (+)
7 LIMIT SW1
8 LIMIT SW2
6
+5V OUT
J7 OVERRIDE
2 INPUT
OVERRIDE
AUTO/MANUAL
STATION
1 GND
TDC-400 SeeSpecialApplications
DESCRIPTION
The TDC-400 is rated for motors with up to The simple three button control (MODE, ▲,
60A locked rotor or 10A running currents and has an and ▼) allows the user to perform a complete
operating voltage range from 10VDC to 30VDC. The set-up from the unit itself without the need for any
unit is easily mounted with 2 screws and is equipped instrumentation. The adaptive control feature of the
with removable screw terminals that provide for easy TDC-400 eliminates the need for any calibration
field wiring. The unit's size and mounting allows the steps. In the simplest application, only the closed
TDC-400 to replace the DMC-100 series controllers in and open positions need to be set and the unit
most applications with minimal rewiring. automatically and continuously sets all other
parameters when placed in the AUTO mode.
3 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
Many actuators include limit switches that are
used to turn off the motor when the extreme ends of
POWER / SIGNAL (J2) travel have been reached. Limit switches should be
wired to pins 6, 7, and 8 as shown in the Block
The positive terminal of the DC power source Diagram. If limit switches are not used, pins 7 and 8
is connected to pin 1 while the negative terminal must be connected to pin 6 (note, if pins 7 and 8 are
connects to pin 2. When the TDC-400 is mounted to not connected to pin 6, the TDC-400 will not be able
a metal bracket or directly to the actuator case, pin 3 to control the motor outputs).
provides a terminal for an earth ground connection to When the ▲ and ▼ buttons are used to
the actuator body. In applications where the actuator control the actuator, the ▲ button will connect pin 4
body is non-metallic or is electrically isolated from (MOTOR 1) to BAT POS (J2-1) and pin 5 (MOTOR
earth ground, pin 3 must be connected to earth 2) to BAT NEG (J2-2) as long as pin 7 (LIMIT SW1)
ground to prevent static voltage buildups. is connected to pin 6 (LIMIT COMMON). Likewise,
Transferring DC power can be inefficient, the ▼ button will connect pin 5 to BAT POS and pin
therefore care should be taken to use appropriate wire 4 to BAT NEG as long as pin 8 (LIMIT SW2) is
sizes. The size wire required depends on the locked connected to LIMIT COMMON. Since pins 4 and 5
rotor motor current and the length of wire to be used. are alternately connected to BAT POS (J2-1) and
See the Wire Table for more information. BAT NEG (J2-2), care should be taken not to
An appropriate command signal, either 0-5V, connect the motor output pins to any other terminals.
0-10V, 1-5V, 2-10V, or 4-20mA, should be See MANUAL/FB POT CAL for more details.
connected to pin 5 (as shown in the Block Diagram) The TDC-400 provides a dynamic braking
while using pin 4 as the return signal ground. See feature that can eliminate the need for a separate
Wiring Diagrams, Input Configurations, for wiring brake. When the TDC-400 turns off the motor
details. The TDC-400 must be configured for the outputs, pins 4 and 5 are internally connected to the
type of command signal that is to be used (see BAT NEG pin (J2-2); this has the effect of shorting
COMMAND TYPE). the motor leads together, thus braking the motor
Pin 6 of J2 provides an auxiliary +5V output motion. When power is removed from the TDC-400,
which can be used to connect a command the electronic braking feature is disabled. In some
potentiometer. By connecting one end of a applications, a brake is required for mechanical
potentiometer to pin 6, the other end to pin 4, and reasons, such as avoiding back driving the motor; the
the wiper to pin 5, a local control knob can be TDC-400 is suitable for powering most brakes,
implemented. Pin 4 will also need to be connected however, consult the actuator manufacturer for more
to pin 2 (BAT NEG) for this application. information.
ACTUATOR (J1)
OVERRIDE (J7)
The actuator motor and feedback
potentiometer are connected to J1 as shown in the J7 provides a simple 2-wire connection that
Block Diagram. The feedback potentiometer wiper can override the TDC-400 to perform a variety of
must be connected to pin 5, while one end is external control functions. Using an appropriate
connected to pin 4 and the other end to pin 6. The interface module, commonly used auto/manual
Polarity Detection feature of the TDC-400 station switches are easily implemented with low
automatically determines which polarity to apply to voltage/low current switches. See Special
the motor based on where the open and closed Applications for more details. The factory installed
positions are set; this feature also eliminates the jumper between pins 1 and 2 enables normal
need to rewire the unit for direct or reverse acting operation of the TDC-400 and must be installed if the
applications. external override functions are not used.
4 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
pin 1 to pin 2 returns the unit to normal operation and
the previously selected mode.
MODE Controlling the TDC-400 from the Override
Input is accomplished by connecting a specific
The MODE button is used to select the resistance to select a specific operation. The table
desired function of operation. When the MODE below defines the operations and their associated
button is pressed, the unit will switch to the next resistance. See Special Applications for details on
function and the appropriate LED indicator will turn using the Override Input for an Auto/Manual Station.
on to let the user know which function is selected.
Except for the MANUAL/FB POT CAL mode, the RESISTANCE OPERATION
associated mode indicator will be steady on; for > 4.3K ohms OFF
some of the modes other indicators will flash to 3.3K ohms ±5% LATCH
indicate specific settings associated with the mode. 2K ohms ±5% OPEN
Each of the modes are described in more detail in 1.2K ohms ±5% CLOSE
the following sections. 510 ohms ±5% STOP
If a 0-5V or 0-10V command signal is used,
the LOSS OF COMMAND function cannot be used. The OPEN function will operate the motor in
The MODE button will skip over the LOSS OF the open direction as set by the OPEN mode, while
COMMAND mode when the unit is configured for a the CLOSE function operates the motor in the closed
0-5V or 0-10V command signal (see COMMAND direction as set by the CLOSE mode. The LATCH
TYPE). When the OVERRIDE mode is enabled (see function will maintain the previously selected
OVERRIDE MODE), the MODE button is disabled function; this allows momentary switches to be used
and the Manual/Pot Cal indicator will turn on steady. for the OPEN and CLOSE functions. The OFF and
STOP functions turn the motor off, which also
unlatches the OPEN or CLOSE functions.
Note that the OPEN and CLOSE functions
ADJUST UP (▲) and ADJUST DOWN (▼) may work in reverse until the open and closed
positions are set by the OPEN and CLOSE modes.
The adjust up (▲) and adjust down (▼) The TDC-400 will automatically turn the motor off
buttons are used to adjust the setting of any given when the open or closed positions are reached.
function. When a function is selected by the MODE However, if a feedback fault occurs (see FAULT
button, the adjust buttons will affect that function INDICATOR), the motor will be turned on for a period
only. Note, that the AUTO mode does not have any of 15 minutes in the selected direction. For this
adjustable settings, and therefore, the adjust up (▲) reason, limit switches should be used when using
and adjust down (▼) buttons have no effect. Also, the OVERRIDE mode, and should be set to a
the adjust buttons are disabled in the OVERRIDE position acceptable for the application. The 15
mode. minute period can also be terminated using the OFF
or STOP function.
The motor is also automatically turned off if
OVERRIDE MODE the TDC-400 detects a stall (see STALL
DETECTION). An OPEN or CLOSE operation can
The OVERRIDE mode is not selected by the be attempted again after switching to the OFF,
MODE button and can be enabled at anytime by LATCH, or STOP functions first.
connecting a resistance greater than 250 ohms to The motor is also turned off if a motor current
the Override Input (J7 pin 1 and pin 2). While the trip is detected (see TRIP SETTING). If the trip
OVERRIDE mode is enabled, the MODE button and occurred during an OPEN operation, the OPEN
adjust buttons are disabled, and the Manual/Pot Cal operation is disabled until the trip condition is
indicator will turn on steady to indicate that the unit is corrected. The CLOSE operation may be used to
being controlled by the Override Input. Shorting J7 attempt to clear the trip condition (by causing a
5 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
certain amount of motion in the closed direction). settings within the TDC-400. When the ▲ button is
Likewise, if a trip occurs during a CLOSE operation, pressed, the MOTOR 1 (J1-4) output is connected to
the OPEN operation can be used for clearing the trip. BAT POS (J2-1), and the MOTOR 2 (J1-5) output is
If a trip occurs in both directions (i.e., before the first connected to BAT NEG (J2-2). The ▼ button
trip can be cleared), the trip can only be cleared by a connects MOTOR 1 to BAT NEG and MOTOR 2 to
mechanical override mechanism, or by using the BAT POS. Whether the actuator moves toward the
MANUAL mode from the TDC-400 front panel, or by open or closed position depends on which motor
powering the TDC-400 down and back up. wire is connected to J1-4 and J1-5.
The POT CAL feature provides an indication
of the feedback potentiometer's setting. When the
AUTO MANUAL/POT CAL function is selected, the
Manual/Pot Cal indicator will turn on - it may flash or
The AUTO function is the normal mode of be on steady, depending on the actuator position.
operation for the TDC-400; all the other functions The indicator will be on steady whenever the TDC-
are used to set up the unit. While in AUTO, the unit 400 detects that the feedback potentiometer is at
can be controlled by various external signals, some midrange of its rotation. As the actuator moves,
of which can be selected by the COMMAND INPUT causing the feedback potentiometer to move away
function. When the unit is not in the AUTO mode, all from midrange, the indicator will begin to flash, and
external control signals described below will be the indicator will flash at a decreasingly slower rate
disabled. as the actuator moves further away from midrange.
Once the open and closed positions have By using the adjust buttons to position the
been set, the AUTO mode will control the position of actuator to midstroke (half way point between the
the actuator according to the command input signal. desired open and closed positions), the feedback
For an input signal of 0V (for 0-5V or 0-10V input), potentiometer can then be adjusted until a steady
1V (for 1-5V input), 2V (for 2-10V input), 4.0 mA (for light occurs. This insures that the feedback
4-20mA input), or 0% (for a digital input), the TDC- potentiometer has maximum range to reach the open
400 will position the actuator to the closed position and closed positions.
as set by the user. Conversely, an input of 5V, 10V,
20mA, or 100% will position the actuator to the
defined open position. CLOSE
When the TDC-400 is configured to use a 0-
5V, 0-10V, 1-5V, 2-10V, or 4-20mA command, the The CLOSE function is used to set the
command signal should be connected to the desired closed position; however, prior to doing this,
appropriate pins on J2. When the TDC-400 is the feedback potentiometer should be checked for
configured for a Digital command type, an optimum position (see MANUAL/POT CAL), and the
appropriate communications option module must be limit switches should be set outside of the operating
installed. A communications module may be range (see LIMIT SWITCHES). In the CLOSE
installed when using one of the analog command function, the adjust buttons are used to set the
types and can be used to override the analog actuator to any desired position, and upon pressing
command. The AUTO indicator will flash whenever the MODE button (to select the next function,
the unit is being controlled by the communications OPEN), the TDC-400 will retain the setting as the
module. defined closed position.
Upon selecting the CLOSE function, the
TDC-400 will begin moving the actuator to the
MANUAL/FB POT CAL previously set closed position; it is not necessary to
make an adjustment if the unit has been previously
The MANUAL/FB POT CAL function allows set to the desired position. A command signal input
manual operation of the actuator by using the adjust of 0V, 1V, 2V, 4mA, or 0% automatically
buttons (▲ and ▼) without affecting any other corresponds to the defined closed position.
6 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
be used to drive an alarm or merely act as an
auxiliary limit switch.
OPEN Upon selecting the AUX OPEN OUTPUT
function, the TDC-400 will begin moving the actuator
The OPEN function works the same way as to the previously set position. It is not necessary to
the CLOSE function with the exception that the make an adjustment if the unit has been previously
adjust buttons are used to set the desired open set to the desired position.
position. As with the CLOSE function, upon
selecting the OPEN function, the actuator will move
to the previously set open position. Once the COMMAND TYPE
desired position is set, the TDC-400 will auto-
matically associate a command signal input of 5V, The COMMAND TYPE function is used to
10V, 20mA, or 100% to the open position. configure the command signal input for either 4-
20mA, 1-5V, 0-5V, 0-10V, 2-10V, or digital so as to
match the type of command signal being used.
AUX CLOSE OUTPUT Upon selecting the COMMAND TYPE function, the
Command Input indicator will turn on steady, while
The AUX CLOSE OUTPUT function is used the indicator for the selected type will flash. Use the
to set an optional output setting that is associated adjust buttons (▲ or ▼) to select the desired input
with the closed position - an appropriate relay option type. The selection will be saved when the MODE
module is required to use this output. The adjust button is pressed, which will also advance the unit to
buttons are used to set the actuator to a desired the LOSS OF COMMAND function.
position. Whenever the actuator position falls
between the defined closed position and the Aux
Close position, the Aux Close Output indicator will LOSS OF COMMAND
flash. Additionally, the TDC-400 will turn on a relay
output on the optional relay module - the output can When using 1-5V, 2-10V, 4-20mA, or a Digital
be used to drive an alarm or merely act as an input type for the command signal, the TDC-400 will
auxiliary limit switch. detect when the command signal is lost or out of
Upon selecting the AUX CLOSE OUTPUT range. A loss of command condition is detected
function, the TDC-400 will begin moving the actuator whenever the input is disconnected, the input
to the previously set position. It is not necessary to becomes less than 0.75V (for 1-5V input), 1.5V (for
make an adjustment if the unit has been previously 2-10V input) or 3mA, or the input is connected
set to the desired position. backwards. An out of range condition is detected
whenever the input becomes greater than 5.25V (for
1-5V input), 10.5V (for 2-10V input), or 21mA. If the
AUX OPEN OUTPUT TDC-400 detects a loss of command, a fault will be
indicated (see FAULT INDICATORS), and the
The AUX OPEN OUTPUT function is used to actuator will be moved to one of three preset
set an optional output setting that is associated with positions: the open position, the closed position, or
the open position - an appropriate relay option the position last attained prior to losing the command
module is required to use this output. The adjust signal. The LOSS OF COMMAND function is used
buttons are used to set the actuator to a desired to set the desired default position.
position. Whenever the actuator position falls When the LOSS OF COMMAND function is
between the defined open position and the Aux selected, the adjust buttons are used to set the
Open position, the Aux Open Output indicator will default position. The TDC-400 indicates the selected
flash. Additionally, the TDC-400 will turn on a relay default setting by flashing the Open function indicator
output on the optional relay module - the output can for the open default position, or it will flash the Close
function indicator for the closed default position.
7 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
When neither indicator is on, then the "last position" detected fault. If an appropriate relay option module
default is selected. is installed, the Fault relay output on the option
When a 0-5V or 0-10V command signal is module will turn off (indicating a fault) when any of
used, a loss of command signal cannot be reliably the Fault indicators turn on or flash. A
detected. Therefore, if the unit is configured for a 0- communications option module can also read the
5V or 0-10V command signal (see COMMAND specific conditions causing a fault. Note that a fault
INPUT), the MODE button will not select the LOSS condition DOES NOT disable the motor outputs
OF COMMAND function. However, the TDC-400 when manually controlling the actuator with the
can detect when a 0-5V or 0-10V command signal is adjust buttons; while useful for troubleshooting, care
out of range (i.e., greater than 5.25V or greater than should be exercised when operating the motor under
10.5V) or connected backwards. When an out of a fault condition. The OVERRIDE mode can also
range condition is detected for a 0-5V or 0-10V input, operate the motor when a fault condition exists - see
the motor is turned off (leaving the actuator in its OVERRIDE MODE for details.
"last position") and a fault will be indicated (see Note that the indicators may not indicate all
FAULT INDICATORS). the fault conditions that may exist. This means that
when the indicated fault is corrected, the unit may
display another fault that has not been corrected.
The table below provides a summary of the Fault
POSITION OUT CAL indications which is followed by a description of each
fault.
The POSITION OUT CAL function is used to
calibrate an optional feedback transmitter output. An
appropriate transmitter option module is required to RED YEL GRN FAULT
use this feature. When the POSITION OUT CAL flash OFF OFF Low Battery Voltage
function is first selected (by pressing the MODE flash flash OFF Motor 1 Stall
button while in the LOSS OF COMMAND function), flash OFF flash Motor 2 Stall
the CLOSE indicator will flash, and the current flash flash flash Double Stall
associated with the closed position will appear at the flash ON OFF Motor 1 Current Trip
option module output. If desired, the output can be flash OFF ON Motor 2 Current Trip
adjusted (using the adjust buttons) to any value from flash ON ON Double Current Trip
4 to 20mA. The new setting is saved when the ON flash OFF Motor 1 No Motion
MODE button is pressed. ON OFF flash Motor 2 No Motion
Pressing the MODE button will leave the unit
ON flash flash Double No Motion
in the POSITION OUT CAL function except that the
OFF OFF flash Feedback Alarm
OPEN indicator will flash, and the output current
OFF flash OFF Loss of Command
associated with the open position will appear at the
OFF ON OFF Command Out of Range
option module output. Like the closed setting, the
output can be adjusted to any current from 4 to Feedback Alarm and
OFF flash flash
20mA. The new setting is saved when the MODE Loss of Command
button is pressed, which also selects the AUTO Feedback Alarm and
OFF ON flash
mode. Command Out of Range
FAULT INDICATORS Low Battery Voltage - When the TDC-400 detects

that the battery/power supply voltage connected to
The TDC-400 detects various fault conditions BAT POS (J2-1) and BAT NEG (J2-2) drops below
that prohibit the unit from controlling the actuator. A 10V, the motor outputs are turned off and the TDC-
combination of the three Fault indicators (red, yellow, 400 suspends all other operations until the voltage
and green) will turn on or flash to indicate a specific returns to 10V or more. However, the Low Battery
Voltage fault indication will maintain for 3 seconds
8 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
after voltage returns. Since DC motors present a setting (see TRIP SETTING) while the Motor 2
large load (from in-rush currents) when turned on, a output is turned on. The fault can be cleared in the
weak battery or insufficient power supply may same manner as previously described for a Motor 1
experience a short voltage drop below 10V until the Current Trip.
motor begins to move. Therefore, the Low Battery
Voltage indication provides warning of batteries in Double Current Trip - If the TDC-400 detects a
need of recharge or power supplies that have current trip fault in both directions, both motor
insufficient current for the application. outputs will be disabled. The fault can be cleared in
the same manner as previously described for a
Motor 1 Stall - A stall condition is detected when no Double Stall.
actuator motion is detected while the Motor 1 output
is turned on and drawing more than 0.5A of motor Motor 1 No Motion - A no motion fault is detected
current. The fault condition will disable the Motor 1 when no actuator motion is detected while the Motor
output only, and the fault is cleared when the TDC- 1 output is turned on and drawing less than 0.5A of
400 detects a motion greater than 1.5 in either motor current. The fault can be cleared in the same
direction. The fault can be cleared if 1) the manner as previously described for a Motor 1 Stall.
command signal commands a Motor 2 operation, 2) A stall usually indicates a heavy mechanical load or
manual operation with the adjust buttons results in a stall, while a no motion fault usually indicates a
motion greater than 1.5, or 3) a mechanical manual broken motor wire or disengaged feedback pot.
override forces the 1.5 motion, provided the Note that a stall cannot be detected in applications
mechanical motion is monitored by the feedback pot. using very small motors (locked rotor currents less
than 0.5A); only a no motion fault can be detected.
Motor 2 Stall - A stall is detected when no actuator
motion is detected while the Motor 2 output is turned Motor 2 No Motion - A no motion fault is detected
on and drawing more than 0.5A of motor current. when no actuator motion is detected while the Motor
The fault can be cleared in the same manner as 2 output is turned on and drawing less than 0.5A of
previously described for a Motor 1 Stall. motor current. The fault can be cleared in the same
manner as previously described for a Motor 1 Stall.
Double Stall - If the TDC-400 detects a stall A no motion fault differs from a stall as previously
condition in both directions, both motor outputs will describe for a Motor 1 No Motion fault.
be disabled. The command signal cannot clear this
condition; only manual operation or a mechanical Double No Motion - If the TDC-400 detects a no
override can clear the fault. Alternatively, the TDC- motion fault in both directions, both motor outputs
400 can be powered off and then on to temporarily will be disabled. The fault can be cleared in the
clear the fault; however, this practice should be same manner as previously described for a Double
avoided without permanently correcting the cause of Stall.
such a fault.
Feedback Alarm - A fault condition is detected
Motor 1 Current Trip - A current trip fault is detected whenever the feedback signal is out of range (that is,
when the motor current exceeds the current trip less than 5% of the potentiometer value or more than
setting (see TRIP SETTING) while the Motor 1 95% of the potentiometer value), or when any of the
output is turned on. The fault can be cleared in the potentiometer connections are broken. Normal
same manner as previously described for a Motor 1 operation resumes when the potentiometer is
Stall. NOTE: Successive attempts with manual reconnected or back in range.
operation using the adjust buttons can exceed the
torque limit set by the Trip Setting. Loss of Command - If the command signal is
disconnected, the fault indication will remain on until
Motor 2 Current Trip - A current trip fault is detected the signal is reconnected. See LOSS OF
when the motor current exceeds the current trip COMMAND for details.
9 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
battery/power supply would be needed to avoid
Command Out of Range - If the command signal collapse of the battery/power supply voltage. The
goes out of range, the fault indication will remain on combination of the trip setting and electronic surge
until the signal is back in range. See LOSS OF limiting allows the use of a more moderate
COMMAND for details. battery/power supply and smaller gauge wires for a
given length (see WIRE TABLE).
LIMIT SWITCHES 6A
The actuator's limit switches should be

connected to J1 as described in ACTUATOR (J1) -
also see OUTLINE and BLOCK DIAGRAM. The limit 3A 9A
switches must be closed throughout the operating
range from closed to open. When Limit Switch 1
opens, Motor 1 operations are disabled. Likewise,
when Limit Switch 2 opens, Motor 2 operations are
disabled.
Note that the actuator's limit switches should
be set outside of the operating range set by the
CLOSE and OPEN functions. Limit switches exhibit (full CCW) 0A 12A (full CW)
wide variations, and the TDC-400 can position the
actuator more precisely at closed and open than the The trip setting essentially performs the same
limit switches. A limit switch serves better as a fail function as commonly used torque switches.
safe device. However, it should be noted that the actuator and
After setting the open and closed positions, valve components (gears, couplings, seats, etc.) also
the TDC-400 automatically determines which limit place a load on the motor. These components will
switch is associated with open and closed. When a vary with temperature and age, and therefore the
limit switch is reached, the appropriate indicator light torque on the load will vary accordingly.
(CLOSE or OPEN) will flash. If an appropriate relay
option module is installed, the Fault relay output on
the option module will turn off (indicating a fault) STALL DETECTION FEATURE
when either of the limit switches is reached.
The Stall Detection feature of the TDC-400
TRIP SETTING detects when there is no motion after a certain
amount of time while the motor is turned on (see
The Trip Setting is used to limit the motor FAULT INDICATORS). This condition can arise if
current and is set using the TRIP ADJUST pot (see the motor's stall current is less than the current trip
OUTLINE) as shown below. The setting should be setting (see TRIP SETTING). If the motor current is
adjusted to a comfortable level above the running greater than 0.5A when no motion is detected, a stall
current expected for the actuator and its load. When fault is indicated.
the motor current exceeds the trip setting, the motor When one of the motor wires is disconnected,
is turned off and a fault condition is indicated (see no motion will be detected, but the motor current will
FAULT INDICATORS). be zero. Therefore, if the motor current is less than
0.5A when no motion is detected, a no motion fault is
While the Electronic Surge Limiting feature indicated.
of the TDC-400 reduces the high in-rush currents If the feedback pot is mechanically
during motor starts, the trip setting is used to reduce disengaged, no motion will be detected, but the
the current required from the battery/power supply motor current will be the normal running current.
when the motor stalls or encounters an excessive Therefore a stall or a no motion fault may be
load. Without the trip setting, a costly high capacity indicated, depending on whether the running current
is greater or less than 0.5A.
10 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
ELECTRONIC BRAKE FEATURE DUTY CYCLE CONTROL FEATURE
The Electronic Brake feature of the TDC- The Duty Cycle Control feature of the TDC-
400 provides highly reliable and accurate braking of 400 allows the actuator to be safely used when a
the motor, and it is a key element in achieving high process becomes unstable, a control loop is not
resolution. A mechanical brake can still be properly set, or when the motor is subjected to
implemented without interfering with the TDC-400 excessive loading. The TDC-400 accurately
operation. The Adaptive Control feature of the monitors the relative heating of the motor and
TDC-400 automatically compensates for changes in automatically duty cycles the unit at a safe level.
a mechanical brake's performance due to The Duty Cycle Control feature allows
temperature or age. continuous operation of the motor until it detects an
Mechanical brakes can be useful for excess heat buildup in the motor. At that time, duty
providing a holding brake in the event power to the cycle operation is automatically enabled and
actuator is lost. However, mechanical brakes require continues until the motor cools enough to resume
time to release on motor start up, and this may continuous operation. The duty cycle period is
cause an increased surge current that counteracts approximately 2 seconds with an on time that
the Electronic Surge Limiting feature. Also, a automatically varies depending on the heating of the
mechanical brake may not release at lower voltages, motor. While this operation slows down the
in which case a stall or current trip fault may occur. actuator's operation, it does not impact the resolution
The Electronic Brake feature remains on as performance of the TDC-400, and it allows control of
long as the TDC-400 is powered. This could make a the process to be maintained without damage to the
mechanical override mechanism difficult to turn. For motor.
this reason, the electronic brake is disabled when the
TDC-400 is placed in the Override Mode via J7 (see
Special Applications).
CAUTION! When using the TDC-400 with a spring

return actuator, the return spring can generate high
electrical energies while back driving the motor that
can damage the TDC-400 motor outputs. In this
application, the motor must be disconnected (usually
with a relay) from the TDC-400 during a spring return
operation.
11 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
OPTION MODULES
Various option modules can be plugged into the TDC-400 option module connector, J3. Option modules
provide additional features such as position feedback signals, auxiliary switch outputs, or digital
communications. Contact the factory for the latest available modules. Refer to the diagram below for
instructions on installing an option module.
Plug option moduleinto J3, Loosenfront panelscrewsand lift front panelup to

lock modulein front panel allow option moduleto plug in underneath.
slots,and retightenfront
panelscrews.
Option
Module
J3 TDC Series
Installing an Option Module
12 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
SPECIFICATIONS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Operating Voltage: 10 to 30 VDC
Operating Current, typical: 70mA (not including option module)
Fuse Type: 10A TR5 Time Lag 374 (replaceable)
COMMAND SIGNAL INPUT

Common Mode Voltage (both inputs): -9 to +30 VDC
Input Impedance
10.25K ohms (1-5 VDC, 0-5 VDC, 0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC Input)
250 ohms 1% (4-20 mA Input)
Loss of Command threshold
< 0.75V (1-5 VDC input)
< 1.5V (2-10 VDC input)
< 3mA (4-20mA input)
Command Out of Range threshold
> 5.25V (0-5 VDC, 1-5 VDC input)
> 10.5V (0-10 VDC, 2-10 VDC input)
> 21mA (4-20mA input)
FEEDBACK SIGNAL INPUT

Input Voltage: 0 to 2.5 VDC
External Feedback Potentiometer: 1K ohm
COMMAND POTENTIOMETER POWER OUTPUT (J2-6)

+5V OUT: 5mA maximum
NOTE: Do not connect this output to other power supplies.
DC MOTOR OUTPUTS
Maximum Running Current: 10 A
Motor Current Trip: 0 to 12 A (adjustable)
Motor Current Measurement Resolution: 85mA typical
ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating Temperature Range: 0 C to 60 C
Storage Temperature Range: -40 C to 85 C
Relative Humidity Range: 0 to 90 % (noncondensing)
13 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
WIRE TABLE
The table below shows the maximum recommended distance (in linear feet) between the power
source and the TDC-400 unit. The maximum distance is limited by the wire size used and the
locked rotor current of the motor. The surge limiting feature along with an appropriate motor
current trip setting can reduce wire size and power source requirements to a minimum (see
TRIP SETTING). The wire distance is calculated for a maximum voltage drop of 1VDC with
20% of the locked rotor current, and assumes that the full load running current is less than that.
All signal wires on the TDC-400 should be connected with wire sizes ranging from 22 to 18
AWG.
Wire
ft Size
Locked
18 16 14 12 10 8 6
Rotor
AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG AWG
Current (see Note 1) (see Note 1) (see Note 1)
(Amps)
1 333 529 842 1337 2119 3383 5376
2 167 264 421 668 1059 1692 2688
5 67 106 168 267 424 677 1075
10 33 53 84 138 212 338 538
15 22 35 56 89 141 226 358
20 17 26 42 67 106 169 269
30 11 18 28 45 71 113 179
40 8 13 21 33 53 85 134
50 7 11 17 27 42 68 108
60 6 9 14 22 35 56 90
NOTES
1) The TDC-400 terminal strip will not accept wire sizes larger than 12 AWG. Use a short run
of 12 AWG from the TDC-400 to an auxiliary terminal block when larger wire is needed.
2) If the motor is located some distance from the TDC-400, add this length to the overall wire
length; be sure to use an appropriate wire size to the motor.
3) When multiple actuators are powered by a common set of wires, use the sum of all the
motor currents when determining wire size.
14 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Output Configurations
J1-4 MOTOR 1
J1-5 MOTOR 2
THERMAL
SWITCH
TDC-400 J1-6 LIMIT COMMON
(optional) LIM SW 1 is associatedwith the
motor direction when MOTOR 1
LIMIT TORQUE is positive.
SWITCH SWITCH
J1-7 LIM SW 1 LIM SW 2 is associatedwith the
motor direction when MOTOR 2
(optional) is positive.
LIMIT TORQUE In MANUAL mode,the adjust

SWITCH SWITCH up button ( ) setsMOTOR 1
J1-8 LIM SW 2 positive,and the adjustdown
button ( ) setsMOTOR 2 pos-
(optional) itive.
DC Motor Control Output
15 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Input Signal Configurations
J2-1 J2-1
BAT POS BAT POS
J2-2 J2-2
BAT NEG BAT NEG
EARTH EARTH
J2-3 J2-3
EARTH EARTH
NOTE: Arrowed NOTE: Arrowed
connectionsmust be connectionsmust be
madeas closeto the
TDC-400 power sourceas TDC-400 madeas closeto the
power sourceas
possible. possible.
MLT-100A
J2-4
J2-4 CMD (-)
4-20mA
CMD (-) Sinking
4-20mA output
Sourcing
output
J2-5
CMD (+) J2-5
MLT-100A CMD (+)
4-20mA Sourcing Input

4-20mA Sinking Input
J2-1
J2-1
BAT POS
BAT POS
J2-3
J2-2
BAT NEG
EARTH
EARTH
J2-3
EARTH J2-2 BAT NEG
JUMPER
EARTH
NOTE: Arrowed POT-101

connectionsmust be Command Pot
TDC-400 madeas closeto the
power sourceas
TDC-400 J2-4 CMD(-)
possible.
3
J2-5 J2-5 2
CMD (+) 0-5V CMD (+)
1-5V CW
1
0-10V
or
J2-6
2-10V
J2-4 DAC +5V OUT
SHIELD
CMD (-)
Voltage Input using digital-to-analog card Command Pot using the 0-5V Input Signal
16 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Special Applications
XMA-108
J2-1
BAT POS Mechanical
Manual Override
Switch
OPEN Manual
4-20mA Override
J7-2
Transmitter
135 ohm Normal
Slide TDC Operation
TDC-400 Wire
J2-5 Series
CMD (+) J7-1
J2-4
JUMPER
CMD (-)
J2-2
BAT NEG
135 ohm Slide Wire

Connecting a mechanical manual override switch
using the 4-20mA Command Input Signal
MECHANICAL
MANUAL OVERRIDE
AMM-100 USING
TDC SWITCH MOMENTARY
1 S C O L
Series (optional)
STOP SWITCHES
(optional)
J7-1
AUTO
(optional)
J7-2
OPEN
CLOSE
OFF (optional) Connect for latching function.

STOP
MANUAL Note, one STOPswitch will

be required.
MECHANICAL
MANUAL OVERRIDE
AMM-100 USING
TDC SWITCH TOGGLE
1 S C O L
Series (optional) SWITCHES
J7-1
OFF
AUTO CLOSE OPEN
J7-2 OFF (optional)
MANUAL
Connecting an auto/manual station
17 October 17, 2012


TDC-400
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Special Applications (continued)
J2-1 BAT POS

Power
TDC-400 J2-2 BAT NEG Source
J2-3 EARTH
J3
Alternate Connection
Preferred Connection
OTX-101
(Option Module)
mA Feedback Monitor
Connecting a position feedback transmitter
A-T Controls product, when properly selected, is designed to perform its intended function safely during its useful life. However, the purchaser or user of A-T Controls
products should be aware that A-T Controls products might be used in numerous applications under a wide variety of industrial service conditions. Although A-T Controls can
provide general guidelines, it cannot provide specific data and warnings for all possible applications. The purchaser / user must therefore assume the ultimate responsibility
for the proper sizing and selection, installation, operation, and maintenance of A-T Controls products. The user should read and understand the installation operation
maintenance (IOM) instructions included with the product, and train its employees and contractors in the safe use of A-T Controls products in connection with the specific
application.
While the information and specifications contained in this literature are believed to be accurate, they are supplied for informative purposes only. Because A-T Controls is
continually improving and upgrading its product design, the specifications, dimensions and information contained in this literature are subject to change without notice. Should
any question arise concerning these specifications, the purchaser/user should contact A-T Controls.
For product specifications go to http://download.a-tcontrols.com/
A-T Controls, Inc. • 9955 International Boulevard, Cincinnati, OH 45246 • Phone: (513) 530-5175 • Fax: (513) 247-5462 • www.a-tcontrols.com
18 October 17, 2012


TMC3 SERVO CARD
For WEM/XEM Series Actuators
1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Triac TMC3 is a proportional AC Motor PLEASE NOTE:
Controller, intended for use with split phase AC The WEM/XEM series electric
actuator motors. The actuator is controlled by actuators come standard with the
comparing an external command signal to a TMC3 servo card already factory
feedback signal from a potentiometer linked to installed and calibrated. No
the actuator. Depending on the magnitude of additional settings need to be set
the two signals, the TMC3 controller will prior to standard operation. This
energize either the clockwise (cw) or the manual has been provided as a
counterclockwise (ccw) motor output. This resource for information on
drives the actuator in the direction that will calibration, maintenance and
reduce the difference between the two signals. troubleshooting the TMC3 servo card.
When the feedback signal equals the control
signal, the controller will turn off the drive to the
actuator. 2. MOUNTING
The TMC3 controller can be used with a 4 to In order to avoid electrical shock, it is important
20 mA command signal, a 1 to 5 mA command to install the TMC3 in an appropriate
signal, a 0 to 10V command signal, a 1 to 5V enclosure. When operating, high voltage is
command signal or a 0-135 Ohm command present on the controller, necessitating care
signal potentiometer. and caution during the installation process. In
The TMC3 controller provides actuator particular, all AC power wiring must be de-
calibration without the use of a command energized before connecting any wires to the
signal. Programming of the controller is TMC3.
accomplished by a combination of push button To take full advantage of the 3A output rating
switches and a seven position DIP-switch. of the controller, the unit must be mounted to a
The power line input is 115VAC for TMC3-115 suitable metal plate or bracket (aluminum is the
or 220VAC/1PH for TMC3-220 or 24VAC for preferred material) using 6-32 (or M3) screws
TMC3-24. Power line frequency may be either in all four mounting holes. The mounting
50 or 60 Hz. When properly mounted, the surface must be flat, without any burrs or
controller is capable of providing an output roughness. If the TMC3 controller is to be
motor running current of 3A @ 120VAC. used where condensation can be anticipated, a
heater and thermostat must be used.
1 April 7, 2014
www.atcontrols.com Engineering\documents\products\IOM\IOM8031.docx

TMC3 SERVO CARD
ACTUATOR FACTORY CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS

INTERNAL WIRING (STANDARD INPUTS)
TEMP TEMP
HEATER
MOTOR MOTOR
TEMP OPTIONAL MOTOR 1 TEMP
THERMOSTAT HEATER TEMP SENSOR 2

1
FB POT GND 10 FB POT GND
10
2 GND + 4-20 mA
FB POT WIPER 9 FB POT WIPER OPTIONAL
CW POWER 9
FB POT + - TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
POWER FB POT + 8 NEUTRAL 8
WIPER N SIGNAL
N XMIT +mA 7 XMIT +mA
7
L XMIT -mA -
L
XMIT -mA 6 LINE 6 0-10VDC
5
CW
SHIELD GND SH. +
TS2 LS2 CW
SHIELD GND
5
+5V CCW
INPUT
CCW
COM 4 COM
4 - 4-20mA
FEEDBACK N SIGNAL
N + 10VDC 3 + 10VDC
3 1-5mA
NEUTRAL + MA 2 POTENTIOMETER + MA
2 + 1-5VDC
- SW 1 Fig 1 - SW
1
SIGNAL SIGNAL
TS1 LS1 4
3 0 - 135 ohm
2 POTENTIOMETER
1
SIGNAL
CCW
3. WIRING The wiper of the feedback potentiometer is

All TMC3 wiring is connected using terminal connected to terminal 9 of “SIGNAL” terminal
blocks. Terminal block “POWER” is used for block. One end of the potentiometer is
connections to 24VAC, 115 VAC or 220VAC connected to terminal 8 and the other end is
power. Terminal block “SIGNAL” is used for connected to terminal 10. It is important to
signal connections. wire the potentiometer so that when the
actuator moves toward the ccw position, the
3.1. ACTUATOR WIRING potentiometer resistance between terminals 9
The actuator motor and feedback and 10 of “SIGNAL” terminal block will
potentiometer are connected to the controller increase.
as shown above. A potentiometer that is wired in the wrong
Terminal “CCW” of “POWER” is connected to direction will drive the actuator to either the
the motor winding that drives the actuator ccw. fully ccw or the fully cw position with no user
Terminal “CW” of “POWER” is connected to control.
the winding that drives the actuator cw. For proper operation, it is important to use a
Terminal “N” of “POWER” is connected to the linear taper potentiometer with a value
neutral motor wire. between 1000 ohms (1kohm) and 5000 ohms
In most applications, limit switches will be used (5kohm). To ensure a stable and reliable
to set the maximum allowable range of the feedback signal, the potentiometer must be
actuator. The switches should be wired to securely mounted.
break the ccw and the cw motor connections.
Set the switches so that motor power is
interrupted at maximum travel in each
direction.
2 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
3.2. AC POWER WIRING CUSTOMER CONNECTIONS
(STANDARD INPUTS)
Terminal block “POWER” is used for AC power
input to the TMC3 controller. HEATER
TEMP
MOTOR
TMC3-115 Connect 115 VAC, Line to terminal 1

2
TEMP
“L” and Neutral to terminal “N”. FB POT GND
FB POT WIPER
10
+ 4-20 mA OPTIONAL
POWER 9
- TRANSMITTER OUTPUT
TMC3-220 Connect 220 VAC to terminals “L” NEUTRAL
N
FB POT +
XMIT +mA
8 SIGNAL
7
L -
and “N”. LINE
CW
XMIT -mA
SHIELD GND
6
SH. +
0-10VDC
CCW
5
INPUT
TMC3-24 Connect 24VAC, Line to terminals N
COM
+ 10VDC
4 - 4-20mA
SIGNAL
3 1-5mA
“L” and Neutral to terminal “N”. + MA
- SW
2 + 1-5VDC
1
SIGNAL
4
3 0 - 135 ohm
3.3. SIGNAL WIRING 2 POTENTIOMETER
1
As shown in Figure 1, all signal wiring is SIGNAL
CCW
connected to terminal block “SIGNAL”.
When using a 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 mA or 1 to 5 V _____________________________________________
command signal, connect the positive signal to WARNING
terminal 2 and the common (negative) signal to Please note that the current output does not need an
external loop power supply and must not be connected
terminal 4.
to such a loop. The external load should be resistive
When using a 0 to 10 V command signal, without any excitation voltage present. An external
connect the positive signal to terminal 3 and voltage on terminals 6 and 7 will damage the transmitter
the common (ground) signal to terminal 4. and possible the circuit board.
It is also possible to use a 0-135 Ohm _____________________________________________
potentiometer for the command signal.

Connect the cw terminal of the potentiometer If a shielded cable is used for the signal input
to terminal 1 of “SIGNAL” terminal block, the wiring or the current output wiring, the shield
wiper to terminal 2 of “SIGNAL” terminal block can be connected to terminal 5. This terminal
and the ccw terminal of the potentiometer to is connected to the actuator enclosure through
terminal 4 of “SIGNAL” (ground). the mounting bracket.
Make sure “INPUT” jumper in on the 10V /
SW and “GAIN” jumper is moved to SW. No 4. PROGRAMMING JUMPER
transmitter option available with this Before using the TMC3 controller, it is
setting. important to set the on-board programming
jumper for the proper type of command signal.
The TMC3 controller can be equipped with an The type of command signal used is
on-board 4 to 20 mA transmitter. The positive programmed using the “INP CONF” jumper.
output signal will be available at terminal 7 and The jumper should be installed in the “4-20MA”
the common (negative) signal is connected to position when using a 4 to 20 mA command
terminal 6. signal. The jumper should be installed in the
“1-5MA” position when using a 1 to 5 mA
command signal. The jumper is installed in the
3 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
0-10V position when using a 0 to 10 V Near the 50% open position, the yellow LED
command signal or when using 0-135 Ohm will light. This indicates the center position of
command potentiometer. If a 1 to 5 V the feedback potentiometer and no further
command signal is used, the jumper must be actions are required. The indicator is very
removed from JP1. sensitive, so care is necessary in order not to
miss the center position of the potentiometer.
5. OUTPUT INDICATORS If the yellow light didn’t light near the 50% open
When power is present the Blue LED will be lit. position then loosen the set screw on the gear
The TMC3 controller also makes use of two located on the cam shaft that drives the
LED’s to indicate the status of the actuator feedback potentiometer. Slowly turn the
motor outputs. When the ccw output is on, the potentiometer while observing the PGM/Auto
green LED is active. The red LED indicates Cal LED . At some potentiometer position, the
an active cw output. yellow LED will light. This indicates the center
position of the feedback potentiometer. The
6. CALIBRATION MODE indicator is very sensitive, so care is necessary
Begin the calibration process by wiring the in order not to miss the center position of the
actuator as described in section 3.1. Next, potentiometer. Without moving the
wire the AC power input as described in potentiometer, re-tighten the set screw. Turn
section 3.2. Do not apply power at this stage. OFF DIP switch 7.
Push DIP Switch 1 to the ON position (this will
select the calibration mode). 6.2. FULLY CW/CCW POSITION
Setting the fully ccw and fully cw positions of
6.1. FEEDBACK SIGNAL the actuator can be accomplished with or
_____________________________________________ without a command signal. Both methods will
NOTE: This procedure is only required if the feedback be covered.
potentiometer is out of calibration or you suspect the First, make sure that all switches on the DIP
feedback potentiometer is out of calibration. switch are OFF except DIP switch 1 that
_____________________________________________
should be in the ON position. For information
Before proceeding with the calibration, it is very
regarding the use of the DIP-switches in the
important to center the travel of the feedback
run mode, please refer to the below diagram.
potentiometer. The following steps will ensure
Using caution, turn on AC power.
that the potentiometer is properly centered:
If using a command signal, proceed to section 6.2.2.
Push DIP Switch 7 to the ON position. Using OFF-ON OFF-ON OFF-ON
caution, turn on AC power. Position the 1
2
actuator half way between the desired travel 3
limits. To move the actuator in the ccw 4 FAIL CCW
FAIL IN PLACE
5 FAIL CW
direction, use CCW button. The green LED will 6
light. To move the actuator in the cw direction, 7
use CCW button. The red LED will light.

Note: DIP #4 & DIP #5 are not active when
input jumper is on 10V / SW
4 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
6.2.1. NO COMMAND SIGNAL the position saved is the ccw position (the
When using a 1 to 5 mA command signal, the position is on the ccw side of center).
basic accuracy of the controller is Proceed to section 6.3.
compromised if the fully ccw and cw positions
are set without a command signal present. 6.2.2. WITH COMMAND SIGNAL
The accuracy that can be achieved without a The fully ccw and fully cw positions can also be
command signal is approximately 1%. If the set with a command signal present. If a 1 to 5
input is a 1 to 5 mA signal and maximum mA command signal is used, calibration with a
accuracy is desired, please proceed to section signal is necessary to obtain the highest
6.3. accuracy.
The first step is to make sure that there is no Normally, there is no need to supply a
signal present on the command input. Any command signal (see section 6.2.1), but there
signal present may interfere with actuator are some situations when it may improve the
accuracy. actuator accuracy. This is particularly true if
Next, move the actuator to the desired fully cw the command signal source shows poor
position by using “CW” button (the cw output is accuracy, supplying a signal that is not exactly
active) or “CCW” button (the ccw output is 4mA to 20mA or 0V to 10V.
active). If the actuator stops short, check the The first step in the calibration-with-command
setting of the limit switch. It is very important signal procedure is to make sure that there is
that the fully cw position is located on the cw an appropriate low command signal present on
side of the actuator center position. the command input. If the controller is using a
When the actuator is properly positioned, push 4 to 20 mA or a 1 to 5 mA signal, the low signal
PGM (the red push button) to save the fully cw (typically 4 mA or 1 mA) must be present. If
position to memory. The red LED should light the controller is using a 0 to 10V signal, the low
for about one second indicating a successful signal (typically 0V) must be present.
save. The red LED indicates that the position Move the actuator to the desired fully cw
saved is the cw position (the position is on the position (see section 6.2.1). It is very important
cw side of center). that the fully cw position is located on the cw
Move the actuator to the desired fully ccw side of the actuator center position. When the
position by using “CCW” button (the ccw output actuator is properly positioned, push PGM to
is active). If the actuator stops short, check the store the fully cw position together with the low
setting of the limit switch. It is very important command signal in memory. The red LED
that the fully ccw position is located on the ccw should light for about one second indicating a
side of the actuator center position. successful save. The red LED indicates that
When the actuator is properly positioned, push the position saved is the cw position (the
PGM (the red push button) to save the fully position is on the cw side of center).
ccw position to memory. The green LED Change the command signal to 20mA/5mA or
should light for about one second indicating a 10V.
successful save. The green LED indicates that
5 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
Move the actuator to the desired fully ccw controller moves the actuator to a position
position (see section 6.2.1). It is very important which is calculated using the command input
that the fully ccw position is located on the ccw together with the stored fully ccw and cw
side of center. When the actuator is properly positions. When using a 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 mA
positioned, push PGM to store the fully ccw or 1 to 5 V command signal, it is also important
position together with the high command signal to configure the signal loss mode.
in memory. The green LED should light for
about one second indicating a successful save. 7.1. COMMAND SIGNAL LOSS
The green LED indicates that the position If a 4 to 20 mA, 1 to 5 mA or 1 to 5 V command
saved is the ccw position (the position is on the signal is lost, the TMC3 controller can be
ccw side of center). programmed to act in a predictable manner.
The TMC3 controller will use the stored values The setting of DIP switches #4 and #5 controls
for low and high command signals until re- the failure mode. The switches have no effect
calibrated (with or without a command signal). if jumper “INPUT” is configured for a 0 to 10 V
input. A lost command signal is defined as a
6.3. COMMAND SENSITIVITY signal that is less than 75% of the low signal
When in the run mode, the outputs of the level (nominally 3mA, 0.75mA or 0.75V).
TMC3 controller are activated by a change in If DIP switches #4 and #5 are both in the ON
the command signal. The magnitude of change position, the actuator will fail in place when the
necessary to activate the outputs is under user command signal is lost. If the actuator is
control and is set by potentiometer P2. The moving when the signal is lost, it will stop when
potentiometer setting is stored in memory and, the command signal falls below the signal loss
once stored, is not affected by the setting of threshold.
the potentiometer. If DIP #4 is in the ON position and DIP #5 is in
To calibrate the sensitivity, set DIP switch #1 the OFF position, the actuator will fail in the
and #4 to the ON position with all other fully ccw position. This is true whether the
switches set to the OFF position. Apply AC controller is set for direct acting or reverse
power. Adjust potentiometer “CAL POT” for acting.
the desired sensitivity . If “CAL POT” is set If DIP #5 is in the ON position and DIP #4 is in
fully ccw, the controller is set for maximum the OFF position, the actuator will fail in the
sensitivity (this is the factory setting). If set fully cw position. This is true whether the
fully cw, the controller is set for minimum controller is set for direct acting or reverse
sensitivity. Push PGM to store the sensitivity in acting.
memory. The yellow LED should light for If DIP switches #4 and #5 are both in the OFF
about one second indicating a successful save. position, the controller will use the low (below
4mA or 1V) command signal as is. If the
7. RUN MODE controller is set for direct acting drive, the
To enter the run mode, set DIP switch #1 to the actuator will move to the fully cw position. If
OFF position. When in this mode, the TMC3
6 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
the controller is set for reverse acting drive, the
actuator will move to the fully ccw position.
7.4. 4 TO 20 mA Optional Transmitter
7.2. DIRECT/REVERSE ACTING The 4 to 20 mA output (“SIGNAL”-6 and
Normally, the actuator will move to the fully cw “SIGNAL”-7) will track the position of the
position when the command signal is low (4 feedback potentiometer.
mA, 1 mA or 0 V). This mode of operation is When the controller is operating in the direct
referred to as direct acting. acting mode, the output will be 4 mA at the fully
Sometimes it is desirable to have the actuator cw position and 20 mA at the fully ccw position.
move to the fully cw position when the When the controller is operating in the reverse
command signal is high (20 mA, 5 mA or 10 V) acting mode, the output will be 20 mA at the
and to the fully ccw position when the fully cw position and 4 mA at the fully ccw
command signal is low (4 mA, 1 mA or 0 V). position.
This mode of operation is referred to as _____________________________________
reverse acting. WARNING
Please note that the current output does not need an
To set the controller to the direct acting mode,
external loop power supply and must not be connected
switch DIP #3 to the OFF position. To change to such a loop. The external load should be resistive
to the reverse acting mode, switch DIP #3 to without any excitation voltage present. An external
the ON position. No other changes are voltage on terminals 6 and 7 will damage the transmitter
necessary. and possible the circuit board.
Please note that the controller is wired exactly _____________________________________
the same for both direct and reverse acting
mode. The calibration procedure for the fully
ccw and fully cw positions is not affected by the
choice of direct or reverse acting mode.
7 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
7.5. Slide Wire Installation 2. The slow setting is activated by turning
Connect the slide-wire (135 ohm DIP-switches 6 and 7 off. This will yield
potentiometer) a first order filter response with a time
1. Connect the Low Water Level side of constant of about 16 seconds (to 63%).
the slide-wire to terminal 1. Connect the This is the default setting.
wiper of the slide-wire to terminal 2. 3. The medium setting is activated by
Connect the High Water Level side of turning on DIP-switch 6. This will yield a
the slide-wire to terminal 4. first order filter response with a time
2. Put the INPUT jumper in the 10V/SW constant of about 4 seconds (to 63%).
position. Put the GAIN jumper in the 4. The fast setting is activated by turning
SW position. on DIP-switch 7. This will yield a first
order filter response with a time
Calibrating the span with a slide-wire. (An constant of about 4 seconds (to 63%).
example of a slide-wire would be a McDonnell 5. The no-filter setting is activated by
& Miller water feeder) turning on DIP-switches 6 and 7. This
1. Move the actuator to the fully closed will yield a response with no filtering.
position (using the black push buttons). 6. When in the slide-wire mode, square
Set the wiper of the slide-wire to the and square root responses are not
High Water Level side. Push the red available (DIP-switches 6 and7 are used
PGM/AUTO CAL push button. The red for filtering options).
and yellow LEDs should flash.
2. Move the actuator to the fully open
position (using the black push buttons).
Set the wiper of the slide-wire to the
Low Water Level side. Push the red
PGM/AUTO CAL push button. The
green and yellow LEDs should flash.
3. Please note that for a somewhat less
accurate calibration it is possible to
perform the procedure without the slide-
wire connected.
Running the actuator with a slide-wire

1. Turn off DIP-switch 1 (run mode). In
slide-wire mode filtering can be applied
to the signal from the slide-wire. There
are four possible settings for the
filtering: slow, medium, fast and no-filter.
8 April 7, 2014

TMC3 SERVO CARD
8. SPECIFICATIONS 8.4. AC MOTOR OUTPUTS
When properly mounted, the outputs will
8.1. AC POWER supply a load current of 5A @ 120VAC with
TMC3-24 = 24VAC/1PH ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz. less than 5 mA of leakage current.
TMC3-115 = 115VAC/1PH ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz.
TMC3-220 = 220VAC/1PH ±10%, 50 or 60 Hz. 8.5. FUSING
The TMC3 AC power is fuse protected. The
8.2. SIGNAL INPUTS fuse should be tailored to the demands of the
The inputs have a basic 10 bit accuracy. actuator motor used. The rating of the fuse
should not exceed 5A.
0-10 VDC Command Input: 200 kohm input
impedance. 8.6. ENVIRONMENTAL
Operating temperature: 0ºC to 70ºC.
Command Potentiometer Input: 5.25 VDC Storage temperature: -40ºC to 85ºC.
nominal voltage. 100 kohm input impedance. Relative humidity: 0 to 90% non-condensing.
Use with 1 kohm potentiometer.
1-5 VDC Command Input: 100 kohm input

impedance. Loss of signal threshold is 75% of
low signal. A-T Controls product, when properly selected, is designed to perform
its intended function safely during its useful life. However, the
purchaser or user of A-T Controls products should be aware that A-T
4-20 mA Command Input: 250 ohm input Controls products might be used in numerous applications under a
wide variety of industrial service conditions. Although A-T Controls can
impedance. Loss of signal threshold is 75% of provide general guidelines, it cannot provide specific data and
low signal. warnings for all possible applications. The purchaser / user must
therefore assume the ultimate responsibility for the proper sizing and
selection, installation, operation, and maintenance of A-T Controls
1-5 mA Command Input: 1 kohm input products. The user should read and understand the installation
operation maintenance (IOM) instructions included with the product,
impedance. Loss of signal threshold is 75% of and train its employees and contractors in the safe use of A-T Controls
low signal. products in connection with the specific application.
While the information and specifications contained in this literature are

Feedback Input: 5.25 VDC excitation voltage believed to be accurate, they are supplied for informative purposes
only. Because A-T Controls is continually improving and upgrading its
(nominal value). Use with 1000 to 5000 ohm product design, the specifications, dimensions and information
potentiometer. contained in this literature are subject to change without notice.
Should any question arise concerning these specifications, the
purchaser/user should contact A-T Controls.
8.3. 4 TO 20 mA OUTPUT
For product specifications go to http://download.a-tcontrols.com/
500 ohm maximum load impedance. 8 bit (1 in
255) basic accuracy. A-T Controls, Inc. • 9955 International Boulevard, Cincinnati, OH
45246 • Phone: (513) 530-5175 • Fax: (513) 247-5462 •
www.atcontrols.com
9 April 7, 2014
TM
Issue Date: March 2002
FM657
FM656
FM626 Sanitary
FM627
FM626
TABLE OF Page Page
CONTENTS SECTION 1 - GENERAL .............................. 1 7.8 Electrode Circuit Insulation Test ................... 33
1.1 Measuring System ........................................ 1
1.2 Operating Principal ........................................ 1 SECTION 8 – REPLACEMENT PARTS
1.3 Application to Magnetic Flow
LIST ...................................................... 34
Measurement ................................................ 1
1.4 Interference ................................................... 2 APPENDIX 1- PROGRAMMING ......... 35
1.5 System Operation ......................................... 3
1.1 General ..................................................... 35
1.6 Construction .................................................. 4
1.2 Entering Data ............................................. 35
1.7 Specifications ................................................ 5
1.3 Batching Modes ........................................ 36
1.8 Interchangeability ........................................... 7
1.4 Show Meter Data ....................................... 36
1.9 Flow Rates, Dimensions & Weight ................. 7
1.5 Password Entry ......................................... 36
SECTION 2 - PRE-INSTALLATION ..... 10 1.6 Rescale Rate ............................................. 37

1.6.1 Select Rate Units ....................................... 37
2.1 Receiving and Inspection ............................ 10
1.6.2 Set Full Scale ............................................. 38
2.2 Storage ....................................................... 10
1.6.3 Select Rate as % of Full Scale ................... 38
2.3 Return of Equipment .................................... 10
1.7 Rescale Total ............................................. 38
SECTION 3 - INSTALLATION ............... 11 1.7.0 Lockout ..................................................... 38

1.7.1 Alarms ....................................................... 39
3.1 Application Considerations .......................... 11
1.7.2 Count Direction .......................................... 39
3.2 Site Selection ............................................... 11
1.7.3 Select Total Units ....................................... 39
3.3 Rotating the Transmitter Display .................. 12
1.7.4 Set Registration ......................................... 40
3.4 Removable Electrodes ................................ 13
1.7.5 Reset Totalizer .......................................... 40
3.5 Hot-Tap Removable Electrodes .................. 13
1.8 Set Outputs ............................................... 40
3.6 Pipe Connections ........................................ 15
1.8.1 Select Pulse Width ..................................... 40
3.7 Special Mounting Bolts & Gaskets ........... 16
1.8.2 Backlight ................................................... 41
3.8 Grounding ................................................... 20
1.8.3 Set Flow Direction ..................................... 41
3.9 Electrical Connections ................................. 21
1.8.4 Empty Pipe Detection ................................ 41
3.10 Remote Mounted Transmitter ...................... 24
1.8.5 Protocol .................................................... 41
3.11 Lightening Protection ................................... 28
1.9 Damping Adjustments .............................. 42
1.9.1 Display Damping ....................................... 42
SECTION 4 - START-UP ......................... 28
1.9.2 Current Damping ....................................... 42
4.1 Start-Up Procedure ..................................... 28
1.9.3 Low Flow Cutoff ........................................ 42
SECTION 5 - CALIBRATION .................. 28 2.0 Exit Programming ..................................... 42
2.1 Change Password ..................................... 42
5.1 Calibration ................................................... 28
2.2 Change Tag ............................................... 43
SECTION 6 - MAINTENANCE ............... 29 2.3 Diagnostics ............................................... 43
2.3.1 Check HART Transmission ....................... 43
SECTION 7 - TROUBLESHOOTING ... 29 Check Coil Current .................................... 43
7.1 General ........................................................ 29 2.3.2 Check Current Loop ................................. 44
7.2 Troubleshooting Chart ................................. 29 2.3.3 Calibrate 4-20mA Loop ............................. 44
7.3 Electronics Self Test ..................................... 31 2.3.4 Set Frequency ........................................... 44
7.4 Electronics Module Replacement ................ 31 2.3.5 Simulate 75% FS ....................................... 45
7.5 Sensor Testing ............................................ 32 2.3.6 Simulator Check ........................................ 45
7.6 Coil Continuity Testing ................................. 33
7.7 Coil Insulation Test ....................................... 33
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page i
TABLE OF
CONTENTS Page Page
cont'd. APPENDIX 2 – Batch Programming
and Operation ............................. 46 FIGURES cont'd.
1.1 General ..................................................... 46 3.15 TigermagEP Remote Conduit
1.2 Programming ............................................ 46 Connections .............................................. 24
1.2.0 Lockout ..................................................... 46 3.16 TigermagEP Standard
1.3 Rescale Total ............................................. 47 Motherboard ............................................. 25
1.3.1 Batch On/Off ............................................. 47 3.17 Remote Mounted Transmitter ................... 27
1.3.2 Alarms ....................................................... 47 4.1 Power Supply Voltage Ratings ................. 28
1.3.3 Count Direction .......................................... 47 7.1 Access to Electronics ................................ 31
1.3.4 Select Total Units ....................................... 48 7.2 Removing the Electronics Module ............ 31
1.3.5 User Defined Totalizer Units ...................... 48 7.3 Aligning Electronics Module
Conversion Factor .................................... 48 with Card Guides ....................................... 32
1.4.1 Description of Operating ........................... 49 7.4 Replacing the E2PROM Chip ..................... 32
7.5 Coil Resistance Testing ............................. 33
APPENDIX 3 - Communication .......... 7.6 Coil Insulation Testing ................................ 33
50 7.7 Electrode Circuit Insulation Test ................ 33
A1.1 TigermagEP Display ................................. 35
1.1 RS232 Sparling Protocol ............................. 50
A1.2 Main Program ........................................... 36
1.2 RS485 ......................................................... 51
A1.3 Rescale Rate Flow Chart ........................... 37
A1.4 Rescale Total Flow Chart ........................... 38
FIGURES A1.5 Set Outputs Flow Chart ............................. 40
1.1 Measuring Principal ..................................... 1 A1.6 Connecting HART Communicator ............. 41
1.2 Block Diagram ............................................ 3 A1.7 Set Damping Flow Chart ........................... 42
1.3 Dimensions ................................................. 8 A1.8 Change Tag ............................................... 43
3.1 Full Pipe Required ..................................... 11 A1.9 Diagnostics Flow Chart ............................. 43
3.2 Changing the Rotatable Display ................ 12 A2.0 Simulate Mode .......................................... 45
3.4 Hot Tap Electrode ..................................... 13 A2.1 Enclosure for TigermagEP
3.5 Removing the Electrode ........................... 14 with Batching ............................................. 46
3.6 FM626 Gasket Installation ......................... 18 A2.2 Rescale Rate w/Batcher
3.7 FM626 Sensor Position ............................. 18 Flowchart .................................................. 47
3.8 FM656 Gasket Installation ......................... 19
3.9 FM656 Sensor Position ............................. 19 TABLES
3.10 Grounding ................................................. 20 1. Nominal Flow Rates ...................................... 7
3.11 Conduit Connections ................................ 21 2. Weight ........................................................... 7
3.12 Electrical Connections I/O PCB ................. 22 3. Dimensions ................................................... 9
3.13 Installing Diode Across 4. Gasket Material ........................................... 15
Inductive Loads ......................................... 23 5. Meter I.D. .................................................... 16
3.14 TigermagEP Remote Display .................... 24 6. Torque, Flange & Bolt
Specifications .............................................. 17
Page ii TigermagEP™
1.0 General
1.1
Measuring
The Sparling TigermagEPTM Model FM-626, FM627, FM-656 and FM-657 flowmeters are
obstructionless devices for monitoring the volumetric flow of conductive liquids in full closed
pipes.
The flowmeter consists of a sensor (wafer or flanged) with a nonmagnetic liner, sensing
System electrodes and a measuring transmitter.
1.2 Operation is based on Faraday s Law of

Mag- netic Induction. An electrically
conductive liquid flowing through a magnetic
field induces a volt-
Operating age which is perpendicular to this field and to
the direction of the flow. This voltage is
Principle proportional to the average flow velocity. See
Figure 1.1.
The mathematical formula describing

Faraday s law reads:
E=B xL xV
E = Induced voltage
B = Magnetic field intensity (flux
density) L = Distance between the
electrodes
(pipe diameter)
V = Average flow velocity of
liquid
Measuring Principle
Figure 1.1
1.3
Application
In a magnetic flowmeter the liquid acts as a moving conductor as it flows through the pipe. The
induced voltage (E) in the liquid is measured by two sensing electrodes mounted opposite
each other in the meter sensing head.
The length of the conductor is equal to the distance between sensing electrodes and also
to Magnetic the internal diameter (D) of the pipe. The flux density is proportional to the coil current (I),
Flow times a constant (k). The above formula can be restated as follows:
E= I xkxDxV
Measurement
V=
flow 0
=
cross sectional area A
0xIx4xk
E= D2
Note that if I is held constant, E is proportional to 0 or the induced voltage is directly

proportional to the average flow rate (V).
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 1
1.4
Interference
1.4.1 Electrochemical Interference
The signal voltage is measured by two electrodes. Galvanic elements form on the surface
areas between the ion-conducting liquid and the metal electrodes. The polarization voltages
which result are dependent on temperature, pressure, and the chemical composition of the
electrodes and liquid. These are direct voltages which cannot be predicted and which can be
different at each electrode. The signal voltage must be separated from the interference
direct voltage. Proper grounding eliminates these unpredictable voltages from interfering
with the signal voltage.
1.4.2 Induction Interference (Quadrature)

Electrode cables connect the electrodes with the meter electronics. Because these cables
must run within the magnetic field, a voltage is induced which is proportional to the rate of
change of the magnetic field strength. The meter design minimizes the length of conductor
within the magnetic field in order to keep the value of this interference as low as possible.
1.4.3 Other Interference Voltages

Pipes and the liquids within them are often used as a conductor for electrical grounding. This
creates a voltage potential between electrodes which can be high relative to the signal
voltage. Proper grounding of the flowmeter to the liquid is necessary to achieve correct meter
operation. Grounding rings should be installed if the flowing medium has a voltage potential,
if piping is nonconductive (plastic or lined) or if conductivity is below 20 micromhos/cm. See
Section 3.8 - Grounding.
Page 2 TigermagEP™
1.5
System
The Sparling TigermagEP™ uses the autozeroing, bipolar, pulsed-DC measuring
technique. The circuitry (Fig. 1.2) energizes the coil with 300 mA typical current at a
frequency of up to 100 Hz. The signal generated at the electrodes is measured near the end of
each measuring cycle to eliminate the capacitive effects of coatings. The Hi-Z (1012 Ω) input
impedance eliminates the resistive effects of electrode coatings. The field current alternates
Operation to a positive and negative state and the two measured signals are averaged to eliminate the
effect of a zero offset-this is the auto-zeroing feature.
1. Measuring Sensor 6. Sample and Hold 11. Adjustable Empty Pipe 14. LCD Display with Hall-Effect
2. Electrode Cable PCB 7. Voltage to Frequency Converter Detection (in software) Switches
3. Input Amplifier 8. Nonvolatile E 2PROM 12. Watchdog Timer 15. Optocouplers
4. Summing Point 9. Coil Current Multiplexer 13. Microcontroller 16. Frequency to Current
5. Autozero Circuit 10. Built-in Simulator C Power
17. t Supply Section
Block Diagram
Figure 1.2
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 3
1.6
Construction
1.6.1 Sensor
The FM626 is a wafer style meter. It is available with either a ceramic or optional Tefzel ®
liner. The Tefzel® liner is rotamolded onto a stainless steel sensor tube. Both liners are press-
fit into a carbon steel housing. The FM627 is a wafer style meter. The flow sensor housing is
made of steel with a polyurethane liner. Sensor coils are completely encapsulated in
polyurethane. The FM656 flow sensor is a welded fabrication of 304 stainless steel, fitted
with two carbon steel flanges. The flow sensor contains a nonconductive liner of ceramic,
polyurethane, Tefzel®, hard rubber, soft rubber, or neoprene. The FM657 flow sensor
housing is made of steel with a polyurethane liner. Sensor coils are completely encapsulated
in polyurethane. All TigermagEP™ meters are rugged, waterproof assemblies capable of
handling a wide range of highly corrosive and abrasive liquids.
Fused platinum electrodes, standard on ceramic meters from 0.1" to 2", require no O-
rings, eliminating the possibility of leaking. Platinum is suitable for nearly all conductive
liquids. The electrodes in all other liners are self-sealing.
All internal cavities of the FM-626 sensor housing are filled with a high temperature silicone
potting compound to prevent the possibility of moisture damage and to avoid the possibility
of collection of explosive gases.
▼ WHEN PROPERLY CONNECTED WITH LIQUID-TIGHT CONDUIT, THE FM626 AND FM627
REMOTE FLOW SENSOR WILL WITHSTAND ACCIDENTAL SUBMERGENCE. (SEE FIG. 3.16 ON
PAGE 25).
1.6.2 Integral Transmitter

The transmitter is mounted on the meter body and housed in a NEMA-4X and NEMA-7 enclosure
that is approved by CSA and Factory Mutual. The power and signal electrical connections are made in
a separate section of the housing which is isolated from the electronics.
1.6.3 Remote Transmitter
The transmitter is housed in a NEMA-4X enclosure some distance away from the meter
body. Remote mounting is recommended where pipe vibration is excessive or when
flooding is
possible.
Remote mounting tor the FM626 and FM656 is REQUIRED when high process
temperatures exist at high ambient temperatures (above 212° F/100° C). The FM627
and FM657 should not be installed where process temperatures will exceed 180° F.
The optional remote mounting kit includes interconnecting cable between the sensor
and transmitter enclosure. The standard interconnecting cable length is 15 feet.
Shorter or longer cables should be specified when ordered from the factory. The cable
may be shortened in the field.
DO NOT MAKE CONNECTIONS WHILE

POWER IS APPLIED.
CAUTION Disconnect Power Before Proceeding
1.7
Specifications
Power Requirements See Nameplate
Fuses Slo-Blo (12-60 Vdc) ......................................................................... 2.0
amp Slo-Blo (77-265 Vac) .......................................................................
1.0 amp Spare fuse provided on connector PCB.
Wire Size Power ...................................................................... 16 AWG 14 AWG

Max
Signal ............................................................................................... 18
AWG
Ground Cable Third wire ground of power cable
Accuracy 0.1" - 0.5"

(Frequency Output) 0.5% of span (1-3 fps)
0.25% of span (≤ 50% of span) (3-33 fps)
0.5% of flow rate (≥ 50% of span) (3-33 fps)
1.0" - 48.0"
Reference Conditions 25° C, 6 fps full scale. Temperature effect, 0.025% Full Scale/°C.
Accuracy statement based on digital outputs
Repeatability Within ±0.1% full scale
Power Consumption Less than 20 VA
Output Signals Simultaneous isolated analog and digital

(all referenced to the same isolated ground) Analog:
0 to 20 or 4-20 mAdc into 800 ohms max. Digital:
Scaled pulse and frequency
a. Scaled, 24 Vdc pulse with 12.5/25/50/100 ms on-time,
0-60 Hz max into 150 ohm impedance min.
b. Scaled frequency. 15 Vdc square wave, 50/50 duty cycle,
0-1000 Hz max into 1000 ohms min.
c. Fault, with open collector
d. All open collectors are rated (100mA at 30 Vdc)
e. RS232 Communication
Input Signal Positive zero return (PZR). Connect to remote dry contact to drive analog
and digital outputs to zero when an empty pipe condition can occur.
Minimum Conductivity 5 micromhos/cm
Flow Direction Open collector (rating: 100 mA at 30 Vdc). Active in reverse flow.
Fault Alarm Open collector. Active on self test failure, empty pipe and during
programming, low/no coil drive and failure of external totalizer to keep up
1
with the flow (registration too small). Relay option available .
1
Two Flow Alarms Open collector. Relay option available in remote mounting only.
1
Please note that Tigermag EP can only be configured with either two Flow Alarm Relays or the
Fault Alarm Relay
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 5
1.7
Specifications
Full Scale
Velocity Ranges
Ambient Temp Limits

0-3 to 0-33 fps (0-1 to 0-10 mps)
-20° to 140°F (-30° to 60 °C) (Display may darken above 158 °F)
Process Temp Integral Mount

Cont'd.
Hard rubber, Soft rubber, Neoprene, Polyurethane ............. -40 - 180°F
Tefzel® , Ceramic: ................................................................. -40 - 212° F
Remote Mount (opt)

Hard rubber, Soft rubber, Neoprene, Polyurethane ............ -40 - 180° F
Tefzel® (to 300 psi), Ceramic: .............................................. -40 - 266° F
High Temp Coils (opt)

Tefzel® (to 100 psi): ............................................................. -40 - 300° F
Ceramic: .............................................................................. -40 - 420° F
Temperatures above 212°F (100° C) require mounting the electronics in a

remote location (max. distance 15 feet at liquid conductivity of 5 micro-
mhos and min. velocity of 1 fps).
Storage Temp Limits -20° to 140° F (-30° to 60° C)
Construction Metering Tube .......................................... Model 626 - Steel, epoxy coated

Model 656 - 0.5"-4" Steel, epoxy coated
Model 656 - 6" - 72" 304 SS welded, epoxy coated
Model 627 - 1" - 8" Cast Ductile Iron, epoxy coated
Model 657 - 2" - 48" Fabricated Steel, epoxy coated
Flanges Carbon steel ANSI compatible
Lining ................................... Model 626 - Aluminum Oxide 99.5% or Tefzel®

Model 656 - Polyurethane, Aluminum Oxide 99.5%
Tefzel®, Hard Rubber, Soft Rubber, Neoprene
Model 627 & 657 - Polyurethane
Electrodes .......................................................... 316 SS. Others as required
Integral Housing (XMTR) ................ Cast Aluminum, Hi-build Epoxy Coated

Remote Housing (XMTR) ............................................................. Fiberglass
Protection rating
Integral ................................................................... NEMA-4X, NEMA-7
Remote ................................................................................. NEMA-4X
Electrical rating
Remote Mount General Purpose
Integral Mount Hazardous Locations
FM Approved* for Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D
Class II Groups E, F, G
CE Approved (pending)
CSA Approved* for Class 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
*FM and CSA applies to integrally mounted transmitters up to 150 psi only.
1.8
The TigermagEP™ transmitter is designed to be used with any FM626, FM627, FM656 or FM657 sensor.
Electronics are completely interchangeable. Meter identification (tube ID, Serial Number, K, Offset, etc.)
is stored on an E2 PROM chip independent of transmitter electronics. This provides universal compatibility
between all Tigermag EP electronics modules, eliminating the need for reprogramming when switching
modules. FM656 (0.5"- 4"), FM627 (1"-4") and FM657 (2"-4") sizes have the same face-to-face
Interchange- dimensions as FM626 wafer-style meters (0.5"- 4"). See Figure 1.3
ability
Table 1 - Nominal Flow Rates (Full Scale GPM)
1.9
Flow Rates,
Nominal
Meter Size
Inches mm
* 0.1
*0.25
2.5
0
626 (Ceramic/Tefzel)**
±.5%
.22
Min
0.6 7.2
626 (Sanitary)
N/A N/A
627 (Poly)
Max ±.5% Min Max ±.5% Min Max ±.5%
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
626, 656, 657 (others)
1 fps 3 fps 33 fps 1 fps 3 fps 33 fps 1 fps 3 fps 33 fps 1 fps
0.04 0.1 1.3 N/A N/A N/A
N/A
Min Max
3 fps 33 fps
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
* 0.5 12 0.50 1.5 16 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 0. 1.7 18
Dimensions 1.0 25 1.62 4 53 1.3 4 42 1.6 4.8 53 2 6 66
1.5 40 4 13 145 3.7 11 120 5 15 174
& Weight 2.0 50 7 21 231 7.2 22 239
N/A
7
N/A
21
N/A
231 9 27 303
2.5 65 N/A N/A N/A 12 3 3 98 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
3.0 80 N/A N/A N/A 18 54 598 20 60 660 20 60 664
*On meters 4.0 100 N/A N/A N/A 33 99 1088 35 105 1155 35 107 1182
6.0 150 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 88 264 2910 85 254 2800
smaller than 1" 8.0 200 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 147 441 4851 145 43 4800
accuracy is 10.0 250 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 23 709 7800
12.0 300 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 333 1000 11000
±1% of rate* 14.0 350 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 409 1227 13500
**Ceramic liners are slightly smaller than Tefzel. Flow rates for Tefzel lined meters from .5" to 2" ID's are
slightly higher than shown in Table 1 (above). Refer to PDS-626 for actual numbers.
Table 2 - Weight
Nominal Meter Size 626 627 656 657
inches mm lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg lbs kg
0.1 2.5 15 7 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0.25 5 7 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
0.5 12 15 7 N/A N/A 18 8 N/A N/A
1.0 25 15 7 15 7 20 9 N/A N/A
1.5 40 20 9 N/A N/A 26 12 N/A N/A
2.0 50 20 9 20 9 30 14 30 14
2.5 65 20 9 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
3.0 80 30 14 30 14 48 22 48 22
4.0 100 35 1 35 1 55 25 55 25
6.0 150 N/A N/A 46 21 75 34 75 34
8.0 200 N/A N/A 49 22 105 77 105 77
10.0 250 N/A N/A N/A N/A 155 8 155 86
12.0 300 N/A N/A N/A N/A 235 117 235 117
14.0 350 N/A N/A N/A N/A 365 140 365 140
16.0 400 N/A N/A N/A N/A 460 182 460 182
18.0 450 N/A N/A N/A N/A 555 209 555 209
20.0 500 N/A N/A N/A N/A 625 250 625 250
24.0 600 N/A N/A N/A N/A 860 336 860 336
30.0 750 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1325 432 1325 432
36.0 900 N/A N/A N/A N/A 1800 648 1800 648
42.0 1050 N/A N/A N/A N/A 2280 818 2280 818
48.0 1200 N/A N/A N/A N/A 3500 977 3500 977
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 7
Page 8
cont'd.
& Weight
Dimensions
Flow Rates,
1.9
Integral
626 626-S 627 656 657
Remote
626 626-S 627 656 657
TigermagEP™
Dimensions
Figure1.3
IDS-626/627/656/657
Dimensions
Flow Rates,
1.9
& Weight
cont'd.
Table 3 - Dimensions
Nominal Dimensions (Inches)
Meter Size A B C D
Inches mm *All 626-S 627 626 626-S 627 656 657 626 626-S 627 656 657 626 626-S 627 656 657
0.1 2.5 4.00 N/A N/A 2.31 N/A N/A N/A N/A 8.75 N/A N/A N/A N/A 8.50 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0.25 4 .00 N/A N/A 2.31 N/A N/A N/A N/A 8.75 N/A N/A N/A N/A 8.50 N/A N/A N/A N/A
0.5 12 4.00 N/A N/A 2.31 N/A N/A 3.50 N/A 8.75 N/A N/A 9.50 N/A 8.50 N/A N/A 9.25 N/A
1.0 25 4.00 4.12 4.00 2.92 2.375 2.92 4.25 N/A 9.38 9.125 10.2 10.19 N/A 9.13 7.88 9.9 9.94 N/A
1.5 40 4.00 4.12 N/A 3.62 3.50 N/A 5.00 N/A 10.00 10.25 N/A 10.88 N/A 9.75 9.00 N/A 10.63 N/A
2.0 50 4.00 4.12 4.00 4.12 3.50 4.25 6.00 6.00 10.63 10.25 11.8 11.69 11.25 10.38 9.00 11.5 11.44 11.00
2.5 65 N/A 4.12 N/A N/A 4.00 N/A N/A N/A N/A 10.75 N/A N/A N/A N/A 9.50 N/A N/A N/A
3.0 80 6.00 8.00 6.00 5.70 4.50 5.40 7.50 7.50 11.75 11.25 13.4 13.00 13.00 11.50 10.00 13.1 12.75 12.75
4.0 100 6.00 8.00 6.00 6.60 6.625 6.60 9.00 9.00 13.00 13.375 14.9 14.38 14.38 12.75 12.12 14.6 14.13 14.13
6.0 150 13.38 N/A 8.00 N/A N/A 9.00 11.00 11.00 N/A N/A 17.3 17.00 16.25 N/A N/A 17.0 16.75 16.00
8.0 200 13.38 N/A 8.00 N/A N/A 10.70 13.50 13.50 N/A N/A 19.4 19.40 18.50 N/A N/A 19.1 19.15 18.25
10.0 250 18.15 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 16.00 16.00 N/A N/A N/A 22.56 20.75 N/A N/A N/A 22.31 20.50
54.0 1350 53.50 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 66.25 N/A N/A N/A N/A 69.88 N/A N/A N/A N/A 69.63 N/A
72.0 1800 72.75 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 86.50 N/A N/A N/A N/A 90.00 N/A N/A N/A NA 89.75 N/A
Page 9
Note 1: Dimensions and chart values for 150 lb. flanges (ANSI template).
Note 2: Allow 1/4" for 0.5 to 6" meters and 1/2" for 8" and larger meters for grounding rings and gaskets.
Note 3: "C" & "D" Dimensions ±0.125"
2.0 Pre-Installation
2.1
Receivingand
When the equipment is received, the outside of the package should be inspected for damage. If any
damage or shortage is found, notation to that effect should be made on the carrier s delivery receipt.
Visually inspect the sensor and transmitter for damage from rough handling or faulty packaging. If
concealed damage is discovered, notify the delivering carrier at once and request an inspection.
Confirm telephone conversations in writing. If inspection is not made, prepare an affidavit stating that
Inspection you notified the transportation company and that they failed to inspect. Save containers and
packaging material.
It is essential that the carrier be notified within 15 days from the date of delivery in order to be in a
position to present your claim. Make your claim promptly.
Unpacking and handling of TigermagEP™ Magnetic Flowmeters should be consistent with the
procedures used to handle field instruments.
2.2 Storage
This equipment should be stored in a clean, dry environment. Do not store outside in an unprotected
area. Observe the storage temperature requirements. Unpowered storage should not exceed two
years.
2.3
Returnof
Obtain an RGA (Returned Goods Authorization) number from the factory prior to returning
any materials. The RGA number should be marked on the outside of the package. Failure to
obtain authorization will unnecessarily delay any work to be performed at the factory.
When meter is returned to our factory, a

Equipment state· ment MUST be attached indicating
the liquid t h a t w a s f l o w i n g t h r o u g h
t h e me t e r, t h e concentration of the liquid
and that the meter has been
decontaminated and flushed clean.
CAUTION W E W I L L N O T H AN D L E T H E R E T U R N E D
EQU IPMENT U N L ES S THI S S TA T E M E NT
ACCOMPANIES THE METER.
This procedure is in accordance with the
Toxic
Substance Control Act
7.
3.0 Installation
3.1 The TigermagEPTM can be used to accurately measure the volumetric flow rate of liquids having a
conductivity of at least 5 micromhos/cm.
The presence of entrained air or gases in the process liquid will not prevent meter operation, but will
Application produce a positive (+) error equal to the % by volume gas entrainment.
Consider-
ations ▼ FULL SCALE FLOW RATES SHOULD BE SELECTED ABOVE 3 FEET PER SECOND (1 METER
PER SECOND ) FOR BEST ACCURACY .
3.2
Site Selection
Select a pipe location which will always be full of liquid. The equipment should be located where the
flowmeter will be accessible for adjustment. Provide a minimum of 18" clearance to the electronics
enclosure.
The meter may be located in any position from vertical to horizontal. Flow may be in either direction
through the meter. Vertical installation with the liquid flowing upwards, minimizes the possibility of
slurry separation and assures a full pipe condition.
Full Pipe
Required
Figure 3.1
Horizontal installation requires that the sensing electrodes be positioned in the horizontal plane. See
Figure 3.7.
Provide at least three pipe diameters of straight piping approach between an upstream elbow and
the midpoint of the meter. In small meters this can be achieved within the meter itself. More straight
approach should be provided after valves or multiple elbows. Provide at least 10 diameters after
expanders or laterals which are of smaller diameter than the line size.
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 11
3.3
Rotating the
Transmitter
Display
The Sparling TigermagEP's modular display is designed to allow you to rotate the display in four
different orientations. The display assembly can be rotated, at 90° intervals, by removing the two
screws circled in Figure 3.2 below, for ease of reading the display.
The display features long lasting LCD numerals. The display may darken if ambient temperatures
exceed its temperature rating of -4° to +158° F. Darkening usually occurs when the electronics are
installed in direct sunlight. To avoid this problem install a sun shield when the flowmeter is in direct
sunlight.
The display assembly can be replaced in the field without replacing the entire electronics, by following
the same procedures as utilized for rotating the display.
Removing the Rotatable

Display
Figure 3.2
3.4
Removable
The line must be depressurized and drained in order to check and replace the removable
electrodes.
3.4.1 How the Design Works

This design utilizes electrodes which are installed through accessible ports provided on the sensor
Electrodes body. Electrodes are sealed using two o-rings. One o-ring acts as a primary seal while the other is
(optional) a backup seal. This redundant sealing approach provides positive sealing.
To withdraw the electrodes, process line has to be depressurized and drained. The outer cover
must be removed by unscrewing cap bolts using an 11/32 nut driver to allow access to the elec-
trode cavity. Remove cables from electrodes by removing nuts and lock washers. Using a 3/4"
socket, unscrew and remove the electrode assembly.
3.4.2 The Need for Replacement

Sparling's flowmeter design utilizes High Impedance circuitry (Hi-Z) which is not affected by coating
buildup on the electrodes. Replacement of the electrode only becomes necessary when physical
damage due to erosion or corrosion has occurred.
3.5
Hot-Tap
Removable
Electrodes
(optional)
Hot-Tap Removable
Electrode
Figure 3.4
Sparling's optional hot-tap removable electrode design allows the inspection or replacement of
electrodes without stopping the flow or depressurizing the line. The electrode assembly is sealed
with multiple o-rings to maintain isolation from the pressurized medium. During removal of the
electrode, a stainless steel ball valve is closed to keep the process fluid from leaking out while the
electrodes are inspected or cleaned. The electrode housing, wired as a backup electrode, func-
tions as a redundant electrode assembly providing the flow signal to the electronics. In other
words, even when the electrode is withdrawn, the flowmeter keeps on providing important flow
information.
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 13
3.5
Hot-Tap
3.5.1
1.
Electrode Removal
Use a cross recessed (phillips) screwdriver
to remove the screw and lock washer from
the handle.
Removable 2. Gently remove the electrode cable (orange
wire) and place aside.
Electrodes 3. Secure cable then loosen the side knob.
(cont'd)
4. Using the handle on the electrode head, pull
electrode straight to the point that the valve
can be closed.
5. Close the ball valve clockwise.
6. Unscrew the hex plug from the valve coun-
terclockwise and remove the electrode
assembly.
3.5.2 Electrode Installation

1. Install hex plug clockwise. Seal tight into closed
valve assembly.
2. Open ball valve counterclockwise.
3. Push electrode assembly in, aligning the slot
in the cover with the screw, until firmly seated.
4. Tighten the side knob.
5. Place electrode cables on handle.
6. Install the lock washer and screw, tighten.
7. Replace gasket, cover, cover screws and
tighten securely.
Removing the Electrode

Figure 3.5
• Avoid scratching or damaging the

withdrawn electrode.
• Ball valve must be closed before the
hex·head electrode as s e mbly is
un s c r e w e d a n d removed.
CAUTION • Electrode hex·head assembly must be re·
placed and secured tightly before opening
the ball valve and reinserting the
electrode.
3.5.3 When to Replace

Sparling's flowmeter design utilizes High Impedance circuitry (Hi-Z) which is not affected by coating
buildup on the electrodes. Replacement of the electrode only becomes necessary when physical
damage due to erosion or corrosion has occurred.
3.6 Pipe
MODELS FM626 & FM627 FLANGELESS (WAFER) SENSOR
The flangeless sensor is installed between two process pipe flanges. The sensor contains a
nonconductive polyurethane, ceramic or Tefzel® liner. The integrity of this liner must be maintained
for the flowmeter to function. CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN DURING INSTALLATION TO
Connections INSURE THAT THIS LINER IS NOT DAMAGED. Depending upon meter size, four (4) or eight (8)
steel bolts are required for installation of the FM626 & FM627. These bolts are used to install the
meter between existing flanges. See Table 4. Gaskets are required between the meter and the
pipe flanges and between grounding rings and the mating surfaces.
Install the two bolts at the bottom of the meter. Place the meter temporarily between the flanges to
confirm correct positioning. The meter should rest directly on the bolts. Remove the meter.
▼ REINSTALL THE METER TAKING CARE TO KEEP THE GASKET

CENTERED. INSTALL ALL BOLTS AND TURN FINGER TIGHT. C OMPLETE
INSTALLATION WITH TORQUE WRENCH. I T IS IMPORTANT THAT THE BOLTS BE TIGHTENED
ALTERNATELY SO THAT EXCESSIVE FORCE IS NOT APPLIED TO A CONCENTRATED POINT. S EE
FIGURE 3.6. D O NOT EXCEED THE TORQUE LIMITS IN TABLE 6.
MODELS FM656 & FM657 FLANGED SENSORS

The flanged sensor is installed between two process pipe flanges. The sensing head tube interior is
covered with an electrically nonconductive liner which overlaps the flange seal surfaces. The integrity
of this liner must be maintained for the flowmeter to function CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN
DURING INSTALLATION TO INSURE THAT THIS LINER IS NOT DAMAGED. FLANGE
GASKETS MUST BE USED.
Gasket material should be selected which is compatible with the piping and
process conditions. Table 4 contains typical satisfactory gasket materials. Do not use spiral
wound metal gaskets as they may cause liner damage.
Table 4 - Gasket Material

▼ THE GASKETS , METER FLANGES , AND
LINER GASKET MATING PIPE FLANGES SHOULD BE DUSTED

MATERIAL MATERIAL WITH GASKET TALC PRIOR TO INSTALLA -
Ceramic Teflon® TION TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO THE LINER

®
Teflon Coated SHOULD IT BE NECESSARY TO REMOVE THE
Tefzel®
Asbestos METER FROM THE LINE .DO NOT USE
Hard or
Asbestos G R A P H I TE T O D U S T T H E
Neoprene GASKET. A CONDUCTIVE FILM
Soft Rubber
Rubber
WI L L C O AT T H E M E TE R
Asbestos
Neoprene Neoprene
I N T E R I O R A N D C AU S E A
Rubber MALFUNCTION.
Asbestos D O NOT EXCEED THE TORQUE LIMITS IN
Polyurethane Neoprene
Rubber T ABLE 6.
FM627 Armstrong
Polyurethane Syntheseal
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 15
3.7Special
Sparling provides carbon steel mounting hardware with wafer meter sizes 0.1"to 4", On flanged
meters, special mounting bolts are provided for meter sizes 0.5", 1.5" and 3" only. Gaskets are
provided for ceramic sensors only.
Mounting Optional 304SS mounting bolts for these sizes are available at extra cost.
Bolts &
Gaskets
Table 5 - Meter I.D.
Nominal Actual I.D.

I.D. Ceramic Other
in in mm in mm
0.10 0.125 3.17 N/A N/A
0.25 0.302 7.67 N/A N/A
0.50 0.452 11.48 0.48 12.24
1.0 0.812 20.62 0.91 23.09
1.5 1.34 34.04 1.47 37.34
2.0 1.69 42.93 1.94 49.20
2.5 N/A N/A 2.24 56.90
3.0 N/A N/A 2.87 72.85
4.0 N/A N/A 3.83 97.18
6.0 N/A N/A 6.00 152.40
8.0 N/A N/A 7.75 196.85
10.0 N/A N/A 10.00 254.00
12.0 N/A N/A 12.00 304.80
14.0 N/A N/A 13.00 330.20
16.0 N/A N/A 15.00 381.00
18.0 N/A N/A 17.00 431.80
20.0 N/A N/A 19.00 482.60
24.0 N/A N/A 22.90 581.66
30.0 N/A N/A 29.00 736.60
36.0 N/A N/A 34.60 878.84
42.0 N/A N/A 40.60 1031.24
48.0 N/A N/A 46.60 1183.64
54.0 N/A N/A 52.50 1333.50
60.0 N/A N/A 58.50 1485.90
66.0 N/A N/A 64.50 1638.30
72.0 N/A N/A 70.25 1790.70
IDS-626/627/656/657
Table 6 - Torque, Flange & Bolt Specifications

Nom. Maximum ANSI / AWWA Flange & Bolt Specs DIN Flange & Bolt Specs
Meter Torque Mating Pressure OD Bolt Hole Bolt Mating Pressure OD Bolt Hole Bolt
Size(in) ft-lbs kg-m Flange Rating Inch Circle Dia Size Flange Rating mm Circle Dia Size
0.1 17 2.3 0.5 150 3-1/2 2-3/8 4 @ 5/8 7/16-14 x 6-3/4 15 10 95 65 4 @ 14 M10 X 170
17 2.3 0.5 300 3-3/4 2-5/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4 15 25 95 65 4 @ 14 M12 X 170
17 0.5 600 3-3/4 2-5/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4
0.25 17 2.3 0.5 150 3-1/2 2-3/8 4 @ 5/8 7/16-14 x 6-3/4 15 10 95 65 4 @ 14 M10 X 170
17 2.3 0.5 300 3-3/4 2-5/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4 15 25 95 65 4 @ 14 M12 X 170
17 0.5 600 3-3/4 2-5/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4
0.5 17 2.3 0.5 150 3-1/2 2-3/8 4 @ 5/8 7/16-14 x 6-3/4 15 10 95 65 4 @ 14 M10 X 170
17 2.3 0.5 300 3-3/4 2-5/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4 15 25 95 65 4 @ 14 M12 X 170
17 0.5 600 3-3/4 2-5/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4
1.0 17 2.3 1 150 4-1/2 3-1/8 4 @ 5/8 7/16-14 x 6-3/4 25 10 115 85 4 @ 14 M12 X 170
17 2.3 1 300 4-7/8 3-1/2 4 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 7-1/2 25 25 115 85 4 @ 14 M12 X 170
17 1 600 4-7/8 3-1/2 4 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 7-1/2
1.5 17 2.3 1.5 150 5 3-7/8 4 @ 5/8 1/2-13 x 6-3/4 40 10 150 110 4 @ 18 M16 X 190
17 2.3 1.5 300 6-1/8 4-1/2 4 @ 7/8 3/4-10 x 7-1/2 40 25 150 110 4 @ 18 M16 X 190
17 1.5 600 6-1/8 4-1/2 4 @ 7/8 3/4-10 x 7-1/2
2.0 17 2.3 2 150 4 -3/4 4 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 7-1/2 50 10 165 125 4 @ 18 M16 X 190
17 2.3 2 300 6-1/2 5 8 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 7-1/2 50 25 165 125 4 @ 18 M16 X 190
17 2 600 6-1/2 5 8 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 7-1/2
3.0 24 3.3 3 150 7-1/2 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 9-1/2 80 10 200 160 8 @ 18 M16 X 240
24 3.3 3 300 8-1/4 6-5/8 8 @ 7/8 3/4-10 x 10-1/2 80 25 200 160 8 @ 18 M16 X 240
4.0 30 4 4 150 9 7-1/2 8 @ 3/4 5/8-11 x 9-1/2 100 10 220 180 8 @ 18 M12 X 240
30 4 4 300 10 7-7/8 8 @ 7/8 3/4-10 x 10-1/2 100 25 235 190 8 @ 22 M20 X 260
6.0 92 12.7
8.0 133 18.4
10.0 70 9.7
12.0 83 11.5
14.0 100 13.8
16.0 110 15.2 All specifications per customer requirements and
18.0 110 15.2 in compliance with recognized standards such as:
20.0 115 15.9 ANS/AWWA/DIN
24.0 135 18.7
30.0 140 19.4
36.0 140 19.4
42.0 140 19.4
Page 17
48.0 140 19.4

54.0 & 60.0 140 19.4
66.0 & 72.0 140 19.4
/ FM627 (Wafer Style)
Gasket Installation
Figure 3.6
Sensor
Position
Figure 3.7
(Flanged)
Gasket
Installation
Figure 3.8
Sensor
Position
Figure 3.9
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 19
3•8
Grounding
Mounting in Unlined Metal Pipelines
Flange Wafer
Type Sensors Type Sensors
Grounding
cables )
Mounting in Plastic or Lined Pipeline,

or where Conductivity < 20 micromhos/cm
Flange Wafer
Type Sensors Type Sensors
Grounding Rings Grounding Rings
Mounting in Pipes with Cathodic Protection
Connecting wire (not included).

Must be adequately rated to
carry cathodic currents
Flowmeter is
electrically isolated
from the piping
Insulating sleeve
(not provided)
Grounding
Figure 3.10
Page 20 TigermagEP
3.8
Grounding
DC and AC voltages can be transmitted through conductive fluids which can lead to magnetic flow
meter instrument errors. Adequate grounding between the liquid and the instrument is essential to
ensure correct flow measurement. Magnetic flow meters should always be grounded at four places:
1) Flowmeter tube, 2) Transmitter, 3) Receiving instrument, 4) the fluid.
Cont'd. ▼ EXTERNAL GROUNDING RINGS SHOULD BE INSTALLED ON ANY METER WHERE THERE IS LINED
OR NONCONDUCTIVE PIPE OR CONDUCTIVITY IS LESS THAN 20 MICROMHOS/CM. S EE FIGURE
3.10.
The grounding rings are in continuous contact with the process liquid providing a direct means for
grounding electrical noise in the liquid. The electrical noise potential in the process liquid is at a
similar level to the electrical ground plane to which the AC power supply ground is connected. This
grounding method stabilizes the electrical field within the sensor measuring section permitting
accurate flow detection. Grounding resistance must be less than 20 ohms.
▼ CONTACT OUR TECHNICAL SUPPORT GROUP IF PROCESS LIQUID NEEDS TO BE MAINTAINED

AT A POTENTIAL ABOVE OR OTHER THAN GROUND .
3.9
Electrical
Unscrew the small blind cover of the electronics enclosure to gain access to the I/O PCB.
Separate 3/4" NPT conduit entrances are provided for power and signal wiring. Conduit
connections should follow good practice and should be routed from below the meter. If
conduit cannot be routed from below, provide moisture traps and seals to prevent moisture
from entering the meter enclosure. See Figure 3.11. Be sure to tighten conduit
Connections connections.
Watertight conduit, NEMA·6P fittings and

seals are required to maintain the
moisture·free integ· rity of all enclosures
and electronics in the system. Entry of
moisture may void Sparling's warranty. All
CAUTION fittings must conform to NEMA·6P
Classifications.
Conduit
Connections
Figure 3.11
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 21
3.9
Electrical
Connections
cont'd.
Electrical Connections
I/O
PCB Figure 3.12
CONNECTING POWER LEADS

A connection diagram is located in the cover of the connection section and in Figure 3.12.
If Fault Alarm Relay option (AC681) is chosen, Figure 3.12a is the correct connection diagram.
Connect power leads to terminal block J402, terminals 14 (H), 13 (N), and 12 (G). Be sure to
connect a good ground to terminal 12.
The TigermagEP series is equipped with a switching power supply (standard) which accommodates power
sources of 77-265 Vac 50/60 Hz. An optional 12-60 Vdc power supply is available. No adjustments or
jumpers are required.
Figure 3.12a
Electrical Connection
I/O PCB with AC681
Fault Alarm Relay
See next page for output connections.

Disconnect power before proceeding.
3.9
Electrical
Do not make connections while
power is applied.
The TigermagEP provides voltage to drive the

4·20mA output to your device. Only 4·20mA
Connections devices without external power supplies may
Cont'd. be connected to the TigermagEP.
If devices with external power supplies are

CAUTION connected to the 4·20mA output terminals, it
will blow the power supply and void your
warranty.
CONNECTING OUTPUTS
Determine which of the outputs (4-20 mA, fault, flow direction, pulse or frequency) are to be used.
Connectors for available outputs are also located on terminal block J402.
After you have determined what outputs are required you need to verify that the external load on the outputs
is within the limits specified. Calculate the external load by summing the input resistance, including all
interconnecting cable. Signal cable of 18-22 gauge is normally adequate.
External load limits Analog output 800 Ω max. impedance

Pulse output 150 Ω min. impedance
Frequency 1000 Ω min. impedance
Connect the required outputs as shown in Figure 3.12. When driving inductive loads, install 1N4004
diodes across the load as shown in Figure 3.13. If required, connect the Positive Zero Return (PZR)
input. Note that meter outputs are forced to zero when terminals 1 and 2 (Terminal J402) are connected
together through normally closed relay contacts.
All outputs are floating and use the same isolated ground. If more than one output is used simultaneously,
only one of the common legs can be grounded. If both are grounded, a ground loop will occur causing
erroneous signals. Do not ground any part ot current loop it another output is already
ready.
Connecting Diode When Driving Inductive

Loads
Figure 3.13
Only one load may have a leg strapped

to ground unless the loads are isolated
from each other.
CAUTION
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 23
3.10 Remote
Remote mounting of the electronics is required
when process temperatures exceed 212°F(100° C),
when pipe vibration is excessive or when flooding
is possible. Remote mounting should be used
when high process temperatures exist at high
Mounted ambient temperatures.
A bracket for wall or pipe mounting is furnished
Transmitter as part of the optional remote mounting kit. Inter-
connecting cable is supplied between the sensor
and transmitter enclosure. Also supplied is a
sensor mounted NEMA-7 rated junction box and
a transmitter-mounted junction box in which coil
and electrode connections are made.
The standard interconnecting cable length is 15 feet.
Shorter or longer cables should be ordered from
the factory. The cable may be shortened in the field.
DO NOT SPLICE CABLE IN THE FIELD.
When installing provide moisture traps and seals to

prevent moisture from entering the meter
enclosure. See Figure 3.15. Be sure to tighten
conduit connections
Figure 3.14
Tigermag EP NEMA-4X
Enclosure
Remote Display
NEMA-4X
WATERTIGHT CONDUIT, NEMA-6P FITTINGS Enclosure
AND SEALS ARE REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN THE
MOISTURE -FREE INTEGRITY OF ALL ENCLOSURES
AND ELECTRONICS IN THE SYSTEM. ENTRY OF
MOISTURE MAY VOID SPARLING S WARRANTY.
ALL FITTINGS MUST CONFORM TO NEMA-
6P CLASSIFICATIONS.
NEMA-7
Junction
Box
Figure 3.15
Tigermag EP Remote Conduit
Connections
3.10 Remote
Mounted
Transmitter
cont'd.
Figure 3.16
Tigermag EP Standard
Motherboard
Disconnect power before proceeding.

Do not make connections while power
is applied.
CAUTION
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 25
If Fault Alarm Relay option (AC 682) is chosen, connectors J5 and J6 are wired as shown in figure
3.10
3.16a
Remote Figure 3.16a

Mounted Tigermag EP Standard
Transmitter Motherboard with
cont'd. AC682 Fault Alarm Relay
Open the NEMA-4X enclosure to gain access to the motherboard. Separate 3/4" NPT conduit entrances
are provided for power and signal wiring at the bottom of the enclosure. Connect the required outputs as
shown in Figure 3.17.
CONNECTING POWER LEADS

Connect power leads to Connector J1, terminals 1 (H) and 2 (N). Be sure to connect a good ground to
terminal 3 (G).
The TigermagEP series is equipped with a switching power supply (standard) which accommodates power
sources of 77-265 Vac 50/60 Hz. An optional 12-60 Vdc power supply is available. No adjustments or
jumpers are required.
Disconnect power before proceeding. Do not make

connections while power is applied.
CAUTION
CONNECTING OUTPUTS
Connectors for available outputs are on connectors J6 & J7 See Figure 3.16. After you have determined
what outputs are required you need to verify that the external load on the outputs are within the limits specified.
Calculate the external load by summing the input resistance, including all interconnecting cable. Signal cable
of 18-22 gauge is normally adequate.
External load limits Analog output 800 Ω max. impedance

Pulse output 150 Ω min. impedance
Frequency 1000 Ω min. impedance
All outputs are floating and use the same isolated ground. If more than one output is used simultaneously,
only one of the common legs can be grounded. If both are grounded, a ground loop will occur causing
erroneous signals. Do not ground any part ot current loop it another output is already ready.
Only one load may have a leg strapped to ground

unless the loads are isolated from each other.
CAUTION
3.10Remote
NEMA-4X
Enclosure
Mounted
Transmitter
Cont'd.
CK VIEW
Remote Mounted Transmitter

Figure 3.17
SIGNAL CONNECTIONS
Signal connections are made on the motherboard at connector J8, terminals 1 through 7 and ground (8)
to lug. Similar connections are made in the remote junction box on the Remote PCB. Connect terminals 1
through 7 and ground (8) as shown using the special cable provided.
Disconnect power before proceeding. Do not make

connections while power is applied.
CAUTION
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 27
3.11
Lightening &
Sparling's magnetic flowmeters utilize micro-processor based circuitry and are protected from noisy AC
power, however power line transients generated by inductive motors, power line regulators and power
load switching, commonly known as brown-outs, can cause memory loss, erroneous readout, blown
semi-conductors and integrated circuits. These problems can be eliminated by using proper AC power
Transient transient suppressors.
Protection It is also recommended that whenever the equipment is subjected to lightening, or high voltage transients,
lightning supressors be used to protect the flowmeters.
If you require assistance in proper selection of transient or lightening supressors, please contact Sparling.
4.0 Start-Up
4.1
Start-Up
Prior to applying power, the following
checks should be made:
a) Check the flowmeter nameplate to

i n s u r e t h a t th e po we r s u p pl y
Procedure voltage is correct.
b) Verify that all electrical connections
are correct. See Figures 3.12 and
3.17. The power supply voltage rat-
ing will be marked on the I/O PCB See
Figure 4.1.
c) Check the polarity of external loads
connected to the outputs.
d) Check to see that the two hall effect
switches on the front of the transmit-
ter are in place with the dark side of
the switch facing up towards the
LCD display. Do not remove
thes e switches unless authorized by
factory personnel. If you suspect
that one of the hall effect switches is
defective, contact the factory.
Power Supply Voltage Ratings
Figure 4.1
5.0 Calibration
5.1
Calibration
All flowmeters are calibrated before leaving the factory. No field recalibration is required. The 4 and 20 mA
current level may be checked if desired by following the procedure in Appendix I DIAGNOSTICS. The
meter can be used as a current calibrator to check connected equipment. See Appendix 1, para. 2.3.3.
6.0 Maintenance
No routine maintenance is required.
7.0 Troubleshooting
The following sections describe field tests and bench tests that can be performed on
Sparling s magnetic flow meters.
7.1
General
Each flowmeter is rigorously tested during production. The final test stage is a wet flow calibration
in a Sparling precision primary flow laboratory traceable to the National Institute of Standards and
Technology (NIST).
Before troubleshooting, carefully verify the operating conditions of the meter:
1. Verify the interconnecting wiring by using a local milliammeter connected to the current output
with no other load connected.
2. Verify that the sensor is completely filled with liquid. An empty or partially full sensor will continue
to send an erratic flow signal even with no flow.
3. Verify that any flow test comparison is valid before assuming that the meter is in error.
4. If in doubt, verify the conductivity of the liquid to see that it exceeds 5 micromhos/cm.
7.2
Trouble-
The following trouble shooting chart should assist in correcting meter malfunction. For additional
assistance, contact Technical Support (800)800-FLOW, (626)444-0571 in California.
a) "WARNING - EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION

shooting OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR
Chart CLASS 1, DIVISION 2";
"AVERTISSEMENT - RISQUE D'EXPLOSION- LA

SUBSTI- TUTION DE COMPOSANTS PEUT RENDRE CE
MATERIEL INACCEPTABLE POUR LES EMPLACEMENTS
WARNING DE CLASSE
1, DIVISION 2".
b) "THIS EQUIPMENT IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS 1,
DIVISION 2, GROUPS (AS APPLICABLE) OR
NONHAZARD- OUS LOCATIONS ONLY".
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 29
Troubleshooting Chart
SYMPTOM POSSIBLE CAUSE AND CURE
1. Erratic Reading 1. A. Installation

(Output Wandering) a. Is sensor properly grounded? A good liquid ground is required.
b. Empty pipe? Pipe must be full of liquid.
c. Air in pipe? De-aerate
d. Chemical being injected upstream of flowmeter? Change the
chemical dosage downstream of the flowmeter.
B. Electrical
a. Variable Frequency Drive? Need additional filtering and improved grounding.
b. Marginal Connection (particularly for remote units)? Rewire to
insure good contacts.
C. Moisture intrusion? Use leak tight fittings and keep the covers tight.
2. Inaccurate Reading 2. A. Run simulator test (47000/K) - Appendix 1, Section 2.3.6.

B. Coil drive blown? Electronic module has to be returned to factory for repair
C. Conductive coating? Clean sensor.
3. Output Incorrect 3. A. Disconnect wires and check circuit output with DVM. Reprogram current output.
(Pulse & Analog) If program is OK, there is a sensor failure, return to factory.
B. For pulse output need oscilloscope. If there is flow no pulse output, there is a
sensor failure, return to factory.
4. Analog Output Zero 4. A. No external power required, unit is not loop powered. If external voltage was
connected, electronics are damaged and should be returned to factory for
repair.
5. Display Readings Locked 5. A. Program errors? Cycle the power off and on, then reprogram if necessary.
6. Meter Reads Zero 6. Did it ever work?

A. Blown coil drive? Return for repair
B. Not properly wired (remote units)? Rewire correctly
C. Conductive coating? Clean sensor.
7. Blank Display 7. A. Blown fuse? Replace Fuse

B. Power supply damage? Return for repair.
a. Display is turning 8. Temperature is too high inside the enclosure. Relocate the meter or shield against the
black around heat source. Continuing to power the meter in this condition will permanently damage
edges the display.
9. Display is difficult to read 9. Improve the lighting conditions if ambient light is dim. Remove large cover and adjus
the pot directly above the display for best contrast while viewing from the intended
viewing angle.
If the above steps fail to correct the problem, try different flow rates and disconnecting loads temporarily and see if the
problem persists. Perform simulator check and call the factory. Please have the following information available
when you call:
• Meter serial number; G, I, Z values from • What are the flow rates, the orientation of the meter in the
"SHOW METER DATA?". pipeline, environmental conditions, output loads on the
• Description of the problem. (Display, current output, total- meter, pipe material and grounding technique?
izer/frequency, all of the above.) • How did you verify the discrepancy?
• When does the symptom occur or repeat?
Contact Technical Support 800/800-FLOW (in Calitornia 626/444-0571) tor additional assistance.
7.3
Electronics
Using the MAG-COMMAND™ magnetized screwdriver, enter programming mode by holding the
magnet to the "NO" switch for five seconds. See Appendix 1 for detailed instructions. Answer "NO"
to all prompts until the DIAGNOSTICS menu appears. Answer YES to the DIAGNOSTICS menu. Follow
the menu instructions. See Appendix 1, Section 2.3.
Self Test
7.4
Electronics
To remove the electronics module, first unscrew the larger enclosure cover and remove the screw
fastening the module bracket. Now unplug the coil cable converter. See Figures 7.1 and 7.2.
Grasp the module at each side and pull firmly while rocking the boards gently from side to side. Do not
pull the module out by the display See Figure 7.2.
Module
Replacement Do not remove Electronics Module while power is applied.
Disconnect Power before proceeding.
WARNING
Access to Electronics
Figure 7.1
Removing the Electronics Module

Figure 7.2
M ETER ELECTRONICS ARE CONTAINED IN A PLUG IN MODULE. THIS MODULE

▼ CONTAINS NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS.
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 31
7.4
Electronics
Module
Replacement
Cont'd.
Aligning Electronics Module with Card Guides

Figure 7.3
When reinstalling the electronics module, observe the connector located in the base of the electronics
enclosure. Line up the electronics module with housing card guides and the connector. See Figure 7.3.
Plug in the replacement module. Plug in coil connector. Be certain the plug wires are routed
properly and will not interfere with the housing cover. Don t forget to replace the screw
that fastens the module to the bracket. See Figure 7.2
Apply power and observe display. Now, reprogram any values which were modified from factory preset
levels. To obtain factory settings, look at calibration record shipped with meter. If sensor E2PROM chip
is damaged or has lost its data, call factory with the meter serial number and request another copy of the
E2PROM chip programmed with factory constants.
To replace the E2PROM chip, you must remove the

coil plug and the module. (See Figures 7.1 and 7.2).
The E2PROM is on the Coil PCB in the rear of the
electronics enclosure. Note the directional dot
on the chip. The new chip must be placed in
this orientation. Gently remove the old chip and
place the new factory-programmed chip in its'
place.
Replacing the E2PROM Chip

Figure 7.4
7.5 Sensor
The sensor consists of a measuring section with electrodes and coils in a steel enclosure. The
following paragraphs describe field tests that can be performed by the instrument technician.
Defective sensors should be returned to the factory for repair. OBTAIN A RETURNED GOODS
AUTHORIZATION (RGA) PRIOR TO RETURNING MATERIALS TO PREVENT DELAYS.
Testing
7.6 Coil
Disconnect power before proceeding. Do not
make or break coil connection while power
is applied.
Continuity WARNING
Testing Unplug coil cable plug. Using a short 22 gauge (or appropriate) test lead,
connect ohmmeter between coil wires and measure resistance. See
Figure 7.5.
▼ COIL RESISTANCE SHOULD MEASURE 110 OHMS

±10% AT ROOM TEMPERATURE. HOT COILS MAY
READ AS HIGH AS 150 OHMS.
If the coil resistance is too high or low (including open and short circuits) the Coil Resistance Testing
sensor must be returned to the factory for inspection and/or repair. Figure 7.5
7.7 Coil
Required test equipment: Insulation tester 1012 ohm.
Disconnect power and signal cables. Disconnect coil connector, Figure 7.6.
Connect insulation tester between coil wire and housing ground. Test the
insulation at 500 Vdc. A reading below 10,000 meg ohms indicates moisture
in the sensor. The sensor must be returned to the factory for inspection and/
Insulation or repair.
Test Connect insulation tester between coil wire and housing ground. Test the
insulation at 500 Vdc. A reading below 10,000 meg ohms indicates moisture
in the sensor. The sensor must be returned to the factory for inspection and/
or repair.
CoilInsulation Test
7.8
Figure 7.6
SENSOR MUST BE EMPTY AND DRY.

▼
Unplug coil and remove module from electronic enclosure.
Electrode Connect insulation tester three ways (see Figure 7.7.):
Circuit 1. Between top post labeled E1A and S1A (shield)
2. Between center post labeled E1B and S1B (shield).
Insulation 3. Between bottom post labeled E2 and S2 (shield).
Test Any leakage or fault indication indicates that the sensor should be returned to the factory for inspection and
repair.
ElectrodeCircuitInsulation Test
Figure7.7
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 33
8.0 Replacement Parts List
Description
1. Electronics Modules
Part Number
Integral Mount
77 - 265 Vac ......................................................................................................... 555584
12 - 60 Vdc .......................................................................................................... 555930
Remote NEMA 4X Mount

77-265 Vac ........................................................................................................... 555865
12 - 60 Vdc .......................................................................................................... 556409
Remote NEMA 4X Mount with Batcher

77-265 Vac ........................................................................................................... 555857
12 - 60 Vdc .......................................................................................................... 556417
2. I/O PCB
12-60 Vdc .................................................................................................................... 554180
77-265 Vac .................................................................................................................. 554205
3. Fuses
Slo-Blo, (12-60 Vdc) 2.0 amp ...................................................................................... 148743
Slo-Blo (77-265 Vac) 1.0 amp ..................................................................................... 148446
4. Kit, remote mount for NEMA 7 Integral Transmitter ..................................................... 902579-019

Assembly includes:
a) Mounting bracket with U-bolt d) 15 ft. cable assembly
b) Cable grip e) Tee mounting stand-off
c) Sensor junction box (two with Remote PCB)
5. Kit, remote mount for NEMA 4X Fiberglass Enclosure with larger display ......................... 555724
Includes:
a) Hardware Kit d) Fiberglass enclosure
b) Display board e) Lexan label
c) Remote PCB (Motherboard)
Mounting bracket with U-bolt (optional) ............................................................................. 555732
6. Cable PCB (Integral or Remote) ......................................................................................... 554239
Integral Remote
6. Replacement remote mount cable ...................................................................................... 150721

7. Grounding rings .................................................................................................... Contact Factory
Your TigermagEP™ can be fitted with an optional digital communication capability utilizing HART®
protocol. In order to operate this feature, you must have a Sparling model KP602 transmitter interface.
Consult factory for more details. HART® is a registered trademark of Rosemount Inc.
Teflon ® is a registered trademark of duPont
A.1 Appendix 1— Programming Firmware Ver. 1.0
1.1
General
The 16 character 2 line alphanumeric display is located directly above two magnetically operated
Hall effect switches. The left switch is labeled "YES" and the right switch is labeled "NO".
THESE SWITCHES ARE THE ONLY CONTROLS REQUIRED TO SELECT AND CHANGE
PARAM- ETERS ON THE TigermagEP. DO NOT ADJUST POTS.
The TigermagEP is configured to the user's installation (programmed) using the MAG-COMMAND
magnetic probe furnished with each meter. It can also be programmed with any high strength
magnet. See Figure A1.1. Either switch is activated through the glass window in the housing by
momentarily holding the MAG-COMMAND probe close to the switch.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO OPEN THE ELECTRONICS COMPARTMENT IN ORDER TO
CHANGE PROGRAM SETTINGS.
Refer to Figure A 1.2 to determine how to get to each section of the program.
Alphanumeric data is required for the password and to enter or change constants.
1.2
Entering
When data is required, the cursor will be posi-
tioned under the first character. A "NO"
answer will cause the next valid character to be
displayed in turn. A "YES" answer accepts the
displayed character or digit and moves the
Data cursor to the next position. After answering
"YES" to the last character, you will be
prompted with the entire data just entered.
Answer "NO" if you wish to change. Answer
"YES" when it is correct.
Figure A1.1
Tigermag EP Display
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 35
1.3
Batching
If your TigermagEP is equipped with the optional batching function, answer "YES" while the
meter is in normal operation mode to display batching information. For detail, see Appendix 2,
Batch Programming.
Modes
1.4
Show Meter
Hold the MAG-COMMAND probe next to the
"NO" switch for approximately 5 seconds.
The meter will respond:
SHOW METER DATA?

Data a) Answer "YES" and the meter will display the
model number, firmware version, serial
number, tag number, K factor (pulses/gal-
lon) liner and electrode material. The last
three values, G, I, & Z, are useful when
calling factory technical assistance when
troubleshooting the meter. As each data line
is displayed a "YES" answer will
display the next item. A 'NO' answer at any
item (or lack of response for 12 seconds)
will return the meter to the operating
display.
b) A failure to answer this prompt within a few
seconds will automatically bring the PASS-
WORD menu. See Section 1.5.
c) Answer "NO" and the PASSWORD prompt
appears. A failure to enter a correct pass-
word will return the meter to operation.
Figure A 1.2
Main Program
1.5
Password
PASSWORD=0000
To go beyond this point, a valid password is required. Every meter is shipped with the default
password "0001". Any user with a valid password can change the password.
Entry ▼ Defau t Password "0001"

The meter password is entered by responding to each digit of the password with a "YES" or
"NO". A "YES" moves the cursor under the next digit to the right. A "NO" scrolls to the next
higher value for the underlined digit and then back to 0 again. A 12 second time limit applies
to each digit selection, i.e., a lack of response advances the cursor to the next position. Upon
entry of a valid password, the meter enters a program mode and activates the fault output to
signal remotely that programming is taking place.
1.6
Rescale Rate
RESCALE RATE?
A "YES" answer enters the Rescale Rate loop. A

"NO" answer continues to the next menu item.
A menu is presented to select the engineering

units in which rate is displayed and scaled. By
answering "NO" each menu selection is
presented in turn. A "YES" selection chooses the
unit displayed and
moves on to the next item.
1.6.1 Select Rate Units

RATE UNITS=GPM
An answer of "YES" will display the rate in "GPM".

Otherwise answer "NO". A "NO" answer will
display the other predefined choices in turn, i.e.,
liters/ min., cu. ft./sec., liters/sec., cubic
meters/hour, million gallons/day, ft./sec,
meters/sec. and ???. Answer "YES" to the
predefined rate units or to "???". A "NO" to each
item brings you back to the beginning of the
loop. A "YES" answer is required to one of the
selections to leave the loop.
Select one of the presented units of measure by
answering "YES" and skip to Sec. 1.6.2. If no
appropriate choice is displayed, select "???" and
define your own units in 1.6.1a.
1.6.1a User Defined Rate Units
RATE UNITS=AAA
Note the cursor under the first A. Select the three
alphabetic or numeric characters which you want Figure A1.3
displayed for your selected rate units by answer- RescaleRateFlowchart
ing "NO" until the correct character is displayed in
the current cursor position. A "YES" answer then
accepts that character and moves the cursor one
position to the right. A "YES" to the last character
brings the conversion factor menu.
1.6.1b Conversion Factor
1=1.200000 GPM?
The conversion factor is defined as U.S. GPM/user unit. Enter the number of GPM
which is equal to 1 of your selected units.
Example: To set the conversion factor for gallons per hour, enter the number of gallons per minute which
is equal to 1 gallon per hour. One gallon per minute is equal to 0.016666 gallons per hour (1-;- 60). In this
case, enter 0.0166666.
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 37
1.6
Rescale Rate
1.6.2 Set Full Scale
The full scale flow rate defines only the flow rate at which the current output is set to 20 mA and at
which the frequency output is set to 1000 Hz. It does not affect the display or the accuracy of
the frequency or pulse output.
Cont'd.
0=5.000000 GPH?
In the case above, entering 5.0 GPH here will set the current output to 20 milliamps and the
frequency to 1000 Hz when the fluid flow reaches 5.0 GPH. Full scale flow is selected in the units
defined in 1.6.1 above. Thus, if "GPH" were defined, full scale would be defined in GPH not GPM. By
answering "YES" or "NO" to each digit, it is possible to enter the full scale flow rate. A full scale
below 3 FPS or above 35 FPS will receive a warning of "OUT OF RANGE LOW" or "OUT OF RANGE
HIGH". Unit is still functional, but is operating out of recommended range.
1.6.3 Select Rate as Percent of Full Scale
DISPLAY:RATE UNITS
A "YES" answer will display flow in engineering units as defined

in 1.6.2 "NO" displays rate as a percentage of full scale. Either
choice will affect only the format of the display and nothing
else.
1.7 Rescale
If your TigermagEP is equipped with the optional remote
batcher, refer to Appendix 2.
RESCALE TOTAL?
A "YES" answer enters the Rescale Total loop. A "NO"
Total answer continues to the next menu item.
1.7.0 Lockout
LOCKOUT: ON
LOCKOUT: OFF
LOCKOUT: OFF allows you to reprogram the high and low flow
alarms when the "YES" key is activated while in normal
operating mode. No password is required.
LOCKOUT: ON will only allow the viewing of high and low flow
alarms while in normal operating mode. To reprogram these
values you will need to enter the MagCommand Rescale Total
menu which requires a password.
After choice is made select "YES" to
continue.
Figure A1.4
Rescale Total Flow
1.7 Rescale
1.7.1 Alarms
% ALARM 1 = 0-99
% ALARM 2 = 0-99
Total Using MagCommand, you can set these alarm contacts to activate when flow rate exceeds the set
Cont'd. value in percent of full scale desired, from 0 through 99%. These contacts enable you to activate
alarms, small relays, equipment, etc. at a preset percentage of full scale. Most commonly used as
high and low flow alarms (through complementary contacts of externally supplied relays), these
can be set to warn you of conditions outside your process parameters.
1.7.2 Count Direction

The internal totalizer can be programmed to totalize in the forward direction, to totalize separately
for forward and reverse or provide you with net flow.
COUNT:FWD ONLY
Answer "YES" to count in the forward direction only (shown in the "operate" mode as "COUNT=")
COUNT:FWD,REV
Answer "YES" to have separate internal counters for forward and reverse flow (displayed as
"F CNT=" and "R CNT=" respectively).
COUNT:NET
Answer "YES" to count net flow only
1.7.3 Select Total

Units
A menu is presented to select the engineering units in which totalization or frequency is displayed
and scaled. By answering "NO" each menu selection is presented in turn. A "YES" selects the unit
displayed and moves on to the next item.
TOT UNITS=GAL
Answer "NO" to view the available predefined totalization units. Select "YES" to the preferred engi-
neering units for totalization. One of the options will be ???. This permits the definition of any desired
units. A "YES" must be selected to one of the options to exit this loop.
1.7.3a User Defined Totalizer Units
TOT UNITS =
AAA
Select the desired three (3) character abbreviation as in 1.6.1a on the previous page.
1=1.2500000 GAL?
Enter the number of U.S. gallons which is equivalent to 1 of your selected units.
For example, the conversion factor from U.S. Gallons to Imperial Gallons is 1.25 because there are
1.25 U.S. Gallons to each 1 Imperial Gallon.
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 39
1.7 Rescale
1.7.4 Set Registration
R=100.000 GAL?
Enter the number of your engineering units of totalization which is equivalent to one count of the
Total internal totalizer and external "TOT" output. This is normally an even number such as 0.1, 1, 10, 100,
etc. In the above case 100 gallons will produce one totalizer pulse .
Cont'd.
1.7.5 Reset Totalizer
Allows you to zero or reset the starting number on the totalizer.
RESET TOTALIZER?
Answer "YES" to advance, "NO" to return to RESCALE TOTAL?

ARE YOU SURE?
Answer "YES" to perform the reset of totalizer(s), "NO" to return to RESCALE TOTAL? (This is your
last chance to abort before you lose your present value of totalizer(s).)
PRESET TOTAL?
Answer "YES" to be able to initialize the new nonzero be-
ginning total, "NO" to return to RESCALE TOTAL? with
totalizer(s) already reset to zero in the last step.
COUNT=.000000000?
Enter new beginning total. If counting FWD, REV or NET
were selected earlier (1.7.2) then FCNT and RCNT can be
preset to their starting values.
1.8
Set Outputs
SET OUTPUTS?
A "YES" answer enters the Set Outputs loop. A "NO"

answer continues to the next menu item.
OUTPUT:4-20 MA
This permits the selection of 4-20 or 0-20 mA dc outputs.
Answer "YES" to the output desired. Most North American
installations will use 4-20.
1.8.1 Select Pulse Width
ONTIME:12.5
This selects the totalizer output of 0-60 Hz 12.5/25/50/100 ms,

24 Vdc. The choice is based on the external device
requirement as well as your values of 0 (Sect. 1.6.2) and R so
that pulses don't run together at the maximum flow. The
frequency output of 0-1000 Hz, 50/50 duty cycle is always
available (Section 1.6.2). See Figure 3.12, Electrical
Connections.
Figure A1.5
SetOutputsFlow Chart
1.8
Set Outputs
1.8.2 Backlight
BACKLITE:ON
BACKLITE:OFF
Cont'd.
This allows you to turn the display backlight on or off. "NO" toggles between the choices. "YES"
selects and advances.
1.8.3 Set Flow Direction
FLOW DIR: FWD
FLOW DIR: REV
This allows the user to reverse the normal flow direction. The default flow direction is from left to
right as you face the display. If flow is in the opposite direction a minus sign ( ) will appear in the
display the flow direction output will e active and the internal totalizer will e inhi ited in the count
forward direction. Apart from that, the meter will operate properly in either direction. Both pulse and
analog outputs will operate in both directions. Answer "NO" to reverse the normal flow direction.
1.8.4 Empty Pipe Detection
It allows the user to set the EPD control between 0 (=off) and 9 as part of "SET OUTPUTS?" menu.
Numerically, this represents the approximate delay in seconds before the activation of EPD state
(outputs driven to zero, totalizer on hold, message "OUTPUT INHIBITED" on display). Note EPD
setting functions like a "volume" control, with "0" serving as an "EPD-off" click and "1" thru "9"
enabling various levels of detection. Typical setting may be between 3 and 6, the lower the number,
the higher the possibility of "false" detection of a single air bubble. Factory setting is "0" (off).
1.8.5 Protocol
Selects between "SPAR"-Sparling MagCommand and "OFF"-no programming interface. "HART" will
also appear if meter has been equipped with the optional HART interface and will allow you to set the
number of HART's preambles in a message.
Figure A 1.6
Connecting HART Communicator
to TigermagEP
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 41
1.9
Damping
SET DAMPING?
Display and current output are damped independently. An-
swer "YES" to enter this loop.
Adjustments 1.9.1 Display Damping

DISP DAMPING - 5
A "NO" answer scrolls from 0 (no damping) through 9 (maxi-
mum damping). Answer "YES" to the desired degree of dis-
play damping. Some experimentation may be necessary to
obtain optimum results. Figure A 1.7
Set Damping Flow Chart
1.9.2 Current Damping

CURRENT DAMP=15
Current damping may be selected from 0-99 seconds. This corresponds approximately to the number
of seconds to respond 90% of the way to a step change in input.
1.9.3 Low Flow Cutoff

% ZERO CUTOFF=2
This is the minimum flow rate below which meter outputs are forced to zero. The number entered
corresponds to the selected percentage of full scale as set for "0" in Section 1.6.2. Choices range from
0 (low flow cutoff disabled) through 9%.
2.0 Exit
EXIT?
A "YES" answer stores the changes which have been made and returns the meter to operation.
A "NO" goes to the next menu item.
Programming
2.1Change
CHANGE PASSWORD?
ARE YOU SURE?

Answer "NO" to return to CHANGE PASSWORD. Answer "NO" again to continue to the next item.
Password A "YES" answer permits changing the password by scrolling through the four available digits.
Be sure to record the new password.
▼ F AILU R E TO REENTER THE NEW PA SSWORD WILL RESULT IN NOT BEING ABLE TO
REPROGRAM AT A LATER DATE .
2.2
Change Tag
CHANGE TAG?
Answer "YES" to change the tag. Default is "SPAR".
TAG=
A "NO" answer scrolls through your character choices. Answer
"YES" to skip to next letter. When you have finished the tag name,
"YES" will bring you back to the "CHANGE TAG" menu. "NO" will
advance to "DIAGNOSTICS", "YES" will enter the TAG loop again.
Figure A 1.8
Change Tag
2.3
Diagnostics
DIAGNOSTICS?
Answer "YES" to enter the diagnostics loop. A "NO" answer returns
to the RESCALE RATE menu.
It is NOT recommended
that diagnostics be
performed unless
malfunction is sus·
pected. Refer to the
WARNING trouble· shooting section
for coil and electrode tests
which can be performed.
Warning-the meter totalizers and flow

rate will cease to be updated while you
are in this loop. Outputs will be affected
by some tests as well as totalizer cou
nt. U se Caution.
2.3.1A Check HART Transmission

This option is only available if your meter is equipped with HART® com-
munications. Toggle between MARK and SPACE by selecting "NO".
Enter next box by selecting "YES".
2.3.1B Check Coil Current
STOP COIL DRIVE?

Answer "YES"
COIL=HIGH
Note the value on the second line of the display. To test low coil, enter
"NO"
COIL=LOW
Again, note its value. Both values should match closely. The typical
coil current should range around 1/4 to 1/3 amp. Coil currents are
affected by temperature. Unit is operating correctly unless currents * fHART
Enabled
don't match and are widely out of this range. To test high coil again, Figure A1.9
enter "NO". To end this test, enter "YES". DiagnosticsFlow
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 43
2.3
Diagnostics
2.3.2 Check Current Loop
LOOP CURRENT=04
By answering "NO" the loop current can be scrolled by 1 mA increments, from 4 mA up to 20 mA
and then back to 4. Answer "NO" to step to the next desired value. Answering "YES" at any time
Cont'd. will exit the loop. Check the 4 mA and 20 mA positions with a digital milliammeter. Each
should be accurate within ±0.02 mA (no damping is used).
The current output can also be used to test other equipment in the current loop such as recorders
and controllers.
2.3.3 Calibrate 4-20 mA Loop

CAL 4-20mA LOOP?
Answer "YES" to enter the calibrate mode. You must leave your recently calibrated milliammeter
connected in series with the 4-20 loop at this time.
LOSE OLD DATA?
Answer "YES" to continue, "NO" will exit leaving calibration unchanged. This is your last chance to abort if
your setup is not ready.
OUTPUT: 4mA?
Answer "YES" if your meter reads 4.00 mA. "NO" will allow you to calibrate current for zero flow.
I= 4.0000000?
Enter in the actual reading value from your digital milliammeter to calibrate zero flow. Answer "YES" to
continue.
OUTPUT: 20mA?
Answer "YES" if your meter reads 20.00 mA. "NO" will allow you to calibrate current for full scale.
I= 20.000000?
Enter in the actual reading value from your digital milliammeter to calibrate full scale. Answer "YES" to continue.
2.3.4 Set Frequency

Set frequency can be used to verify or set the frequency received by other devices to insure compatibility.
SET FRE0?
Select "YES" to enter the set frequency mode, select "NO" to continue.
F = .000000000
Enter desired frequency in the 1-1250 Hz range to appear as the frequency output or select "YES" to zero
value and end this test.
2.3
Diagnostics
2.3.5 Simulate 75% FS
This step will drive all outputs to 75% of full scale rate including the display.
Cont'd.
This test will alter the totalizer counts. On
exit from this test, reset or preset
totalizers to their proper value.
CAUTION
Enter "YES" to get last chance to abort "ARE YOU SURE?" Enter "YES" only if you wish to continue at which
point the meter will begin simulated 75% of its full scale (as signified by the letter "S" in the third from the last
position on the top line of display (just before "12" for alarms - See figure A 2.0). To end, reenter diagnostics
and reply "NO" to either "SIMULATE 75% FS?" or "ARE YOU SURE?" that follows.
2.3.6 Simulator Check

Simulator Check is used to verify that electronics are working satisfactorily by comparing actual values to
the factory preset values. Testing is done internally.
SIMULATOR CHECK?
Select "YES" to enter the simulator check mode, select "NO" to continue.
PLEASE WAIT
"PLEASE WAIT" is displayed while electronics self-check.
SELF TEST PASSED
The electronics are working satisfactorily.
SELF TEST FAILED
The electronics are not working satisfactorily. Replace electronics module. The second line of the display
will show a 47000/K value as GPM. Obtain K from meter record and calculate 47,000/K to check for match.
Figure A2.0
Simulate Mode
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 45
A.2 Appendix 2
Batch Programming & Operation - Firmware Ver. 1.0
This section of the manual covers only the batching function. For programming of other loops not
associated with the batching function, see Appendix 1.
1.1 General
The TigermagEP Batcher utilizes a touch pad for program-
ming both meter and batch operations. The "YES" and "NO"
buttons are the only controls required to select and change
parameters on the TigermagEP. Nothing else is required for
programming the meter with MagCommand.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO OPEN THE ELECTRONICS

COMPARTMENT IN ORDER TO CHANGE
PROGRAM SETTINGS.
Figure A 2.1
Enclosure for TigermagEP
with
Batching
1.2
Programming
The batching mode is activated in the Rescale Total menu. Refer to Figure A1.2 to determine how to
reach this section.
RESCALE TOTAL?
"YES" to enter the Rescale Total menu.
1.2.0 Lockout
LOCKOUT: ON
LOCKOUT: OFF
LOCKOUT: OFF allows you to reprogram batch size and prewarn levels while in normal operating
mode. No password is required.
LOCKOUT: ON will only allow you to view batch size and prewarn levels while in normal operating
mode. To reprogram these values you will need to enter the MAG-COMMAND Rescale Total menu
which requires a password.
After choice is made select "YES" to
continue.
1.3 Rescale
1.3.1 Batch On/Off
BATCH: ON
BATCH: OFF
Total "NO" toggles between 'Batch On' and 'Batch Off'.
BATCH: ON
1) gives you access to TigermagEP's batching functions while in normal
operation mode
2) disables Alarms 1 and 2.
3) batch size and prewarn levels become accessible for viewing or
reprogramming while in normal operation mode.
BATCH: OFF
1) turns off the TigermagEP's batching functions.
2) allows access to TigermagEP's Alarm 1 and Alarm 2
3) % Alarm 1 and % Alarm 2 become accessible for viewing or repro-
gramming while in normal operation mode.
1.3.2 Alarms
% ALARM 1 = 0-99
% ALARM 2 = 0-99
Using MagCommand, you can set these alarm contacts to activate at any
percent of full scale desired, from 0 through 99%. These contacts enable
you to activate alarms, equipment, etc. at a preset percentage of full scale.
Most commonly used as high and low flow alarms, these can be set to
alert you that process parameters may be out of range.
Alarms 1 & 2 are only available when batch mode is turned off (BATCH:
OFF). Alarm 1 and Alarm 2 can be set to activate at the percentage of full
scale specified here. After setting, "YES" accepts selection of Alarm 1 and Figure A 2.2
advances to Alarm 2. When lockout status is on (LOCKOUT: ON) you will Rescale Rate - Batcher
be able to view % Alarm 1 and % Alarm 2 values from normal operation
mode. When lockout status is off (LOCKOUT: OFF) you will be able to
change the values of % Alarm 1 and % Alarm 2.
1.3.3 Count Direction

The internal totalizer can be programmed to totalize in the forward direction, to totalize separately
for forward and reverse or provide you with net flow.
COUNT:FWD ONLY
Answer "YES" to count in the forward direction only (shown in the "operate" mode as "COUNT=")
COUNT:FWD,REV
Answer "YES" to have separate internal counters for forward and reverse flow (displayed as
"F CNT=" and "R CNT=" respectively).
COUNT:NET
Answer "YES" to count net flow only
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 47
1.3 Rescale
1.3.4 Select Total Units
A menu is presented to select the engineering units in which totalization or frequency is displayed
and scaled. By answering "NO" each menu selection is presented in turn. A "YES" selects the
unit displayed and moves on to the next item.
Total TOT UNITS=GAL
Cont'd.
Answer "NO" to view the available predefined totalization units. Select "YES" to the
preferred engineering units for totalization. One of the options will be ???. This permits the
definition of any
desired units. A "YES" must be selected to one of the options to exit this loop.
1.3.5a User Defined Totalizer Units
TOT UNITS = AAA
Select the desired 3 character abbreviation as in 1.6.1a on the previous page.
1=1.2500000 GAL?
Enter the number of U.S. gallons which is equivalent to 1 of your selected units.
For example, the conversion factor from U.S. Gallons to Imperial Gallons is 1.25 because there are 1.25
U.S. Gallons to each 1 Imperial Gallon.
RESCALE TOTAL
A "YES" answer enters the Rescale Total loop. A "NO" answer continues to the next menu item. See
Section 1.7.5 for details.
RESET TOTALIZER?
A "NO" answer ends this loop.
If batch is on (BATCH: ON) display will read:
GRAND = 000000000?
Enter
If batch is off (BATCH: OFF) display will read:
COUNT = 000000000?
1.4
Description of
1.4.1 Description of Operation
This option, if available, can be either enabled (BATCH: ON) or disabled (BATCH: OFF) in users
menu of "RESCALE TOTAL?" When enabled, the batch menu offers the choice of display direction of
counting (up or down) and the limits of the prewarn (relay #2) and the batch (relay #1). The status
Operation of the relays will be displayed on line 1 (last two places) as digits 1 and/or 2 whenever the corre-
sponding relay coil gets energized. Line 2 will show GRAND total, batch size, and the status of the
batch.
Once the programming is in place, the cycle starts when RESET is pushed. The display line 2 will
stop toggling between GRAND and BATCH and show 'BATCH=xxxxxx PZR' indicating that PZR
input has reset the 626 for the next batch. Pushing START activates both relays (shown in line 1 and
changes 'PZR' to 'RUN' as the batch starts counting off. Reaching PREWARN level drops out relay
#2 and 'PRE' replaces 'RUN' in line 2. At the end of the batch, relay #2 drops out and line 2 reverts
to toggling between Grand and 'BATCH=XXXXXX HLD' as the batching is on hold until RESET starts
it again. To abort batch in progress, push STOP. This overrides relays ON command dropping them
out (note line 1 will report them as ON). The flow and the count off will stop, at which point one can
resume this batch by pushing START or abort it via RESET for another batch (note however that
GRAND will include any flow that went into the batch prior to pushing STOP).
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 49
A.3 Appendix 3 — Communications
1.1 RS232
Wiring (3-wire cable less than 50 ft.)
Connect as follows:
PC "COM" Port 25 pin 626 J405 on I/O PCB (Integral)

Sparling 626 J9 (Remote - Motherbd)
Protocol 2-TX to 1-RX
3-RX to 2-TX
7-GND to 3-GND
4-RTS to 5-CTS to 4 - No Connection
PC "COM" Port 9 pin 626 J405 on I/O PCB

626 J9 (Remote - Motherbd)
2-RX to 2-TX
3-TX to 1-RX
5-GND to 3-GND
7-RTS to 8-CTS to 4 - No Connection
Set up the PC communications software (DOS, Windows 3.x, Windows 95)) as follows:
Example: Hyper Terminal

1200 baud
8 data bits
1 stop bit
Odd Parity
(Flow control = none)
Conversation:
Control-0 (11 hex) starts it (626 will reply PZR/PGM on the PC screen),
Control-U (15 hex) ends it (626 - no reply, its display - back to run mode).
Menu follows MagCommand.
Keyboard exceptions (for compatibility with existing programmers):
(Space Bar) steps over existing characters
(Backspace) clears characters
(Enter) or "Y" key serves as "yes", anything else as "no".
Burst mode
Control-S (13 hex) starts it.
The 626 will continuously copy its 2-line display to RS232 line.
Press and hold Control-U to end it.
Problems checklist:
• Check wiring
• Check PC setup
• Verify that 626 in its "SHOW METER DATA?" menu (or user's "SET OUTPUTS?) has
PROTOCOL: SPAR and not PROTOCOL: OFF nor PROTOCOL: HART.
1.2 RS-485
RS-485 (one-on-one only, no multidrop, less than 4000 ft.)
On digital PCB, U105 should be removed and U108 installed.
Wire and use as RS232
Line 4a5 626 (J405 on I/O PCB)
(+) or A to 2-TX (also line load)

(1) or B to 1-RX (also line load)
Shield to 3-GND
Problems checklist:
• See Section 1.1, RS232
• Line must terminate in its characteristic impedance at BOTH ends, e.g. for 24 AWG twisted pair
install terminating 120 ohm resister between 1 & 2 of J405 as well as across the other end. See
Figure 3.12.
IDS-626/627/656/657 Page 51
LLC
IDS: 626/627/656/657 R130228 2013

!"#$%&'()*'*(+,--'
!)+./0/ !"#$%&'#()
!"#$%&#'()*+"#&,&#'-&.%/
12/0/
345'"%&'6#78-55
98-&'"#:*;7-'6&
18#<:-'-"
!"#$%&'(&)* '%&*$&',".)-.)'"%+(&)*
The Model 656 is a microprocessor based The Model 656 magnetic flowmeter is based
electromagnetic flowmeter designed to on Faraday's Law which states that the
measure the flow of conductive liquids in full voltage induced in a conductor moving
pipes. The sensor and the transmitter are through a magnetic field is proportional to
integral and enclosed in a NEMA-7 the velocity of that conductor. The
explosion-proof housing. The sensor magnetic flowmeter will measure liquids with
housing is made of steel. conductivities greater than 5 micromhos.
#(+*!+%!. -"+(/%"#
!
!
!
!
!
!
+'',&$+(&)*# ! Command
!
!
! Accidental Submergence (NEMA6/IP67),

Permanent Submergence (NEMA6P/IP68) and
Direct Burial Sensors available
!
!
$"%(&-&"!. +$$/%+$0 !
!
!
!
(9).-,)9.+,+%4#
])>/+%)/)*54%()1%2$%(91B0?>*$6%A0+#%)/)*5%4$+%7901+4%2$+A$$1
;.==c%9B%B/9A%B9*%$)(#%)/)*5@%O7$1%(9//$(+9*%9>+7>+%+>*14%91%)29W$
7*9?*)55$6%4$+%7901+@
'8%.:.';<=>=?@.8@A;.%@>BAC
D1%$/$(+*910(%(0*(>0+%04%)(+0W)+$6%28%)1%$Q+$*1)/%(91+)(+%(/94>*$%A#$1
"+#0.().%"+!.1+$2,&(.%)(+(+1,".!&#',+0 /01$4%?9%$57+8%9*%A#$1%)%7>57%9*%W)/W$%04%4#>+%69A1,%0160()+01?%+9
"#$%&'%(#)*)(+$*,%-./01$%2)(3/0+%+*)1450++$*%6047/)8%04%*9+)+)2/$%:';<%01 +#$%5$+$*%+#)+%0+%4#9>/6%6*0W$%+#$%9>+7>+%40?1)/%+9%X%5D%9*%P$*9@
=;<%01(*$5$1+4%$14>*01?%$)48%*$)601?%01%)18%9*0$1+)+091@
%"4)5+1,".","$(%)!"#!"#$%&#'(
&*#(+,,+(&)* !"#$ %#&'()*+,-(#&.$ #'$ +/0#1,23/$ /3/%-+#4/.$ ,+/
"#$%5$+$*%5>4+%2$%59>1+$6%)+%)%7901+%01%+#$%/01$%01%A#0(#%+#$%707$%04 ,1,(3,23/$ (&$ .(5/.$ $ 67$ #+$ )+/,-/+$ '#+$ ,33$ 896:6$ 0/-/+.;
)/A)84%B>//%9B%+#$%7*9($44%/0C>06%>16$*%B/9A01?%(9160+0914@ "#$%B0*4+%(91B0?>*)+091%)//9A4%*$59W)/%9B%+#$%$/$(+*96$%)B+$*%+#$%/01$
"#$%5$+$*%5)8%2$%$C>077$6%A0+#%DEFG%&H;%9*%:;;%/2@,%DIID,%JGE, #)4%2$$1%6$7*$44>*0P$6%)16%6*)01$6@%V$59W)/%04%7$*B9*5$6%A0+#
KE&;%9*%&',%LGF%&;M%9*%-;M,%9*%%N*0+04#%F+)16)*6%B/)1?$4@ )1%&&^:-d%1>+%6*0W$*%)16%)%:^Xd%49(3$+%A*$1(#@
O1/8%+#*$$%60)5$+$*4%9B%4+*)0?#+%707$%/$1?+#%)*$%*$C>0*$6%B*95%+#$
($1+$*%9B%+#$%5$+$*%+9%19*5)/%924+*>(+0914%+9%92+)01%47$(0B0$6
)((>*)(0$4@%G1%+#$%45)//$*%40P$4%)//%9B%+#$%1$($44)*8%4+*)0?#+%707$
04%(91+)01$6%A0+#01%+#$%5$+$*%0+4$/B@
"3'%)4.*)*5),+(&,".4"4)%0
D%2)(3>7%2)++$*8%04%19+%*$C>0*$6%)16%+#$*$%04%19%1$$6%+9%*$7*9?*)5
0B%+#$%$/$(+*910(4%596>/$%04%*$7/)($6%9*%$Q(#)1?$6@%R$+$*%06$1+0B0().
+091%S+>2$%GJ,%%%4$*0)/%1>52$*,%M,%9BB4$+,%$+(@T%04%4+9*$6%91%)1%U-KVOR
(#07%016$7$16$1+%9B%+*)1450++$*%$/$(+*910(4@%"#$%U-KVOR%(#07%#)4
/0B$+05$%6)+)%*$+$1+091@
"4'(0.'&'".!"("$(&)*%.%F+)16)*6
"#$% F7)*/01?% "0?$*5)?UK"R% 04% 6$40?1$6% +9% 6$+$(+% )24$1($% 9*
01)6$C>)+$%W9/>5$%9B%7*9($44%B/>06%01%+#$%707$%)16%A0//%#9/6%+#$%9>+7>+
40?1)/%+9%X%5D%9*%P$*9@%"#04%B$)+>*$%69$4%19+%*$C>0*$%)18%#)*6%A0*01?
)4%0+%04%)%49B+A)*$%4$/$(+091@%O1$%9B%+#$%594+%0579*+)1+%W)/>$4%9B%+#04
B$)+>*$%04%+#)+%0+%7*$W$1+4%B)/4$%+9+)/0P)+091%794402/$%A0+#%9+#$*%5$+$*4 "#$% 4$(916% 04% +#$% d#9+.+)7d% $/$(+*96$% A#0(#% )//9A4% $/$(+*96$
>16$*%7)*+0)//8%B0//$6%707$%(9160+0914@ *$7/)($5$1+% A#0/$% +#$% 484+$5% 04% 4+0//% >16$*% 7*$44>*$% A0+#9>+
604+>*201?%+#$%7*9($44%B/9A@%V$59W)/%()1%2$%$)40/8%7$*B9*5$6%A0+#
"+#".)-.$)44/*&$+(&)*# )%7#0//074%4(*$A6*0W$*%)16%)%(*$4($1+%A*$1(#@%F7$(0)/%/9(301?
"#$%"0?$*5)?UKY%04%7*9?*)55)2/$%A0+#%R)?.Z955)16,%[)*+ ()+(#$4%A$*$%6$40?1$6%+9%7*$W$1+%#0?#%7*$44>*$%)((06$1+4%6>*01?
K*9+9(9/@%X.-;%5D,%VF.-:-%9*%VF.X\H%9>+7>+4%?0W$%89>%B/$Q020/0+8%A $/$(+*96$%*$59W)/@%"#$%4#>+.9BB%W)/W$%5>4+%2$%(/94$6%2$B9*$%+#$
#$1 01+$*B)(01?%A0+#%89>*%604+*02>+$6%(91+*9/%484+$5@ $/$(+*96$%5)8%2$%%*$59W$6@
%"4)(".4)/*("!.(%+*#4&(("%
V$59+$%59>1+01?%9B%+#$%+*)1450++$*%04%*$C>0*$6%A#$1%707$%W02*)+091
04%$Q($440W$,%A#$1%B/99601?%04%794402/$%9*%A#$*$%#0?#%+$57$*)+>*$
(9160+0914%$Q04+%S9W$*%-&-<]%^%&;;<ZT@
"#$% "0?$*5)?UKY% *$59+$% +*)1450++$*% 04% #9>4$6% 01% )% EURD.X_
$1(/94>*$%)16%B$)+>*$4%)%/)*?$*%40P$6%S\55T%&'%60?0+%-./01$%2)(3/0+
6047/)8@%D//%%79A$*,%(90/%)16%$/$(+*96$%%(911$(+0914%)*$%5)6$%A0+#01
+#$%+*)1450++$*%$1(/94>*$%)16%`>1(+091%29Q@%"#$%5$+$*%04%7*9?*)55$6
>401?%R)?.Z955)16@%[)//.$BB$(+%4A0+(#$4%A#0(#%)*$%$1$*?0P$6%B*95
9>+406$%+#$%$1(/94>*$@%"#$%$1(/94>*$%()1%2$%A)//%59>1+$6@%D1%97+091)/
2*)(3$+%B9*%707$%59>1+01?%04%)W)0/)2/$@
6&78.$&%$/&(%0 D%)/*!&*D
"#$%F7)*/01?%"0?$*5)?UK "R%7*9W06$4%4>7$*09*%%7$*B9*5)1($%01 "#$%>4$%9B%?*9>1601?%*01?4%04%*$(955$16$6%+9%$14>*$%)((>*)(8@
/0C>064% A#0(#% +$16% +9% 6$7940+% 191(916>(+0W$% (9)+01?4@% [0.a "R e*9>1601?%*01?4%)*$%*$C>0*$6%0B%)6`)($1+%70701?%04%/01$6%9*%191(916>(.
(0*(>0+*8%%7*96>($4%)%#0?#%017>+%057$6)1($%+9%+#$%+*)1450++$*b4 +0W$@%K>57%1904$%9*%$Q($440W$%V]%4#9>/6%2$%501050P$6%+9%)(#0$W$
7*$)57/0B0$*% S&; &-% 9#54T@% "#$% 057$6)1($% 9B% +#$% (9)+01?% 04 #0?#$4+%)((>*)(8@
1$?/0?02/$% )4% (957)*$6% +9% +#$% 057$6)1($% 9B% +#$% *$($0W01?
014+*>5$1+@%"#$%W9/+)?$%6*97%)(*944%+#$%$/$(+*96$%(9)+01?%04%)/49
1$?/0?02/$%$/0501)+01?%+#$%1$$6%B9*%$/$(+*96$%(/$)1$*4@
FLOW RATES & DIMENSIONS
Table 1 Flow & Dimensions
Dimensions (inches)
Size A B C D Flowrates (GPM) Full Scale
(inch) 150 lb 300 lb 150 lb 300 lb 150 lb 300 lb 150 lb 300 lb 1 fps 3 fps 33 fps
0.1 4.00 4.00 3.50 3.75 9.50 9.62 9.25 9.30 0.04 0.1 1.3
0.25 4.00 4.00 3.50 3.75 9.50 9.62 9.25 9.30 0.15 0.5 5.0
0.375 4.00 4.00 3.50 3.75 9.50 9.62 9.25 9.30 0.34 1.0 11
0.5 4.00 4.00 3.50 3.75 9.50 9.62 9.25 9.30 0.6 1.7 18
1 4.00 4.00 4.25 4.88 10.19 10.50 9.94 10.25 2 6 66
1.5 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.12 10.88 11.44 10.63 11.19 5 15 174
2 4.00 4.00 6.00 6.50 11.69 11.89 11.44 11.64 9 27 303
2.5 6.00 6.00 7.00 7.50 12.62 12.88 11.56 11.88 13 39 431
3 6.00 6.00 7.50 8.25 13.00 13.40 12.75 13.15 20 60 664
4 6.00 6.00 9.00 10.00 14.38 14.88 14.13 14.63 35 107 1,182
6 13.38 14.88 11.00 12.50 17.00 17.75 16.75 17.50 85 254 2,800
8 13.38 15.40 13.50 14.25 19.40 19.78 19.15 19.53 145 436 4,800
10 18.15 20.55 16.00 17.50 22.56 23.31 22.31 23.06 236 709 7,800
12 19.40 21.78 19.00 20.50 25.00 25.75 24.75 25.50 333 1,000 11,000
14 21.38 23.75 21.00 23.00 26.67 27.67 26.42 27.42 409 1,227 13,500
16 23.38 25.88 23.50 25.50 28.97 29.97 28.72 29.72 545 1,636 18,000
18 27.25 29.88 25.00 28.00 31.14 32.64 30.89 32.39 667 2,000 22,000
20 27.63 30.40 27.50 30.50 33.39 34.89 33.14 34.64 879 2,636 29,000
24 32.75 35.75 32.00 36.00 37.44 39.44 37.19 39.19 1,273 3,818 42,000
30 43.50 46.63 38.75 43.00 43.72 45.85 43.47 45.60 1,909 5,727 63,000
36 47.75 50.85 46.00 50.00 50.20 52.20 49.95 51.95 2,925 8,775 96,525
42 51.75 55.12 53.00 57.00 56.90 58.90 56.65 58.65 4,040 12,120 133,320
48 51.75 55.38 59.50 65.00 63.05 65.80 62.80 65.55 5,322 15,966 175,626
54 53.50 * 66.25 * 69.88 * 69.63 * 7,144 21,433 235,800
60 65.50 * 73.00 * 76.75 * 76.50 * 8,500 25,500 280,500
66 65.50 * 80.00 * 83.75 * 83.50 * 10,300 31,000 341,000
72 72.75 * 86.50 * 90.00 * 89.75 * 12,700 38,100 419,100
Dimensions for flanges. Allow 1/8" to 1/4" for lining thickness/ Dimensions C & D ± 0125"
Flow Rates: 0.25" ‐ 4.0" flow rates are for FEP/PTFE, Poly and HR liners. Ceramic sensor flow rates differ
slightly. Please see PDS‐626 for ceramic sensor flow rates for 0.25" ‐ 4.0".
How to Order a TigermagEP FM656
Base Model Number
FM656
Table 2: Size
AA = 0.10" OA = 0.25" OB = 0.375" OD = 0.5" OF = 1" OG = 1.5"
02 = 2" OH = 2.5" 03 = 3" 04 = 4" 06 = 6" 08 = 8" etc.
Table 3: Liner
1 ‐ Hard Rubber ‐ for NSF61 Meters (1" ‐ 72")
5 ‐ Polyurethane (2" ‐ 72")
6 ‐ Ceramic 1 (0.1" ‐ 4")
8 ‐ FEP / PTFE ‐ for NSF61 Meters (0.25" ‐ 48")
9 ‐ Neoprene (6" ‐ 72")
A ‐ Polyurethane ‐ for NSF61 Meters (2" ‐ 72")
Table 4: Electrode
1 ‐ 316SS 6 ‐ Fused Platinum: only with Ceramic
2 ‐ HastelloyC 7 ‐ Platinum: liners other than Ceramic
3 ‐ 316 SS Bullet Nosed 8 ‐ Zirconium
4 ‐ Titanium 9 ‐ Monel
5 ‐ Tantalum 0 ‐ Tungsten Carbide
Table 5: Flange Rating (JIS and DIN available upon request)
1 ‐ 150 lb flanges A ‐ B16.5 Cl 150 C ‐ B16.5 Cl 400
3 ‐ 300 lb flanges B ‐ B16.5 Cl 300 D ‐ B16.5 Cl 600
Table 6: Transmitter and Sensor Protection Rating
Remote Transmitters include 15 ft of cable
0 ‐ Integral NEMA4X/NEMA7 encl (FM Appr)
1 ‐ Remote NEMA4X/NEMA7 encl
2 ‐ Remote NEMA4X/NEMA7 encl, perm sub (NEMA6P/IP68)
3 ‐ Remote NEMA4X/NEMA7 encl, acc sub (NEMA6/IP67)
4 ‐ Remote NEMA4X/NEMA7 encl, direct burial
5 ‐ Remote NEMA4X encl
6 ‐ Remote NEMA4X encl, acc. sub (NEMA6/IP67)
7 ‐ Remote NEMA4X encl, direct burial
8 ‐ Remote NEMA4X encl, perm sub (NEMA6P/IP68)
Table 7: Power2
0 ‐ 77 ‐ 265 VAC 1 ‐ 12 ‐ 60 VDC
Options
Comm: HART, Modbus, RS485, RS232
High Temperature Coils ‐ required over 266F
Hot Tap removable electrodes (4" +)
Removable electrodes (4" +)
Add Cable Lengths (over 15 ft ‐ max 300 ft)
Relay for Fault and Flow Alarms
Model ‐ Size Liner ‐ Electrode Flange Transmitter ‐ Power Note: Remote enclosure shown for meters shipped after July '16
FM656 ‐ 24 8 7 A 5 ‐ 1 is 24", PTFE liner, Pt elect, B16.5 Cl 150 flanges, NEMA4X Trans, VDC Please call factory for dimensions for July'16 and before.
1 2
Ceramic Liner not available in the following sizes: OB ‐ 0.375" or OH ‐ 2 1/2" FM approval is up to 120 volts
Standard Specifications Model FM-656 Specifications
Accuracy: 0.1" - 0.25": 1% of flow (1- 33 fps) The magnetic flowmeter shall be microprocessor-based and flanged. It shall
1.0
(Freq Out) 0.5" - 72": 0.5% of flow (1-33 fps) indicate, totalize, and transmit flow in full pipes.
Optional 0.25% of flow (1 - 33 fps) 1.1 The magnetic flowmeter shall utilize DC bipolar pulsed coil excitation,operating
Temp Effect: ±0.025% FS/°C at frequencies up to 100 Hz and automatically re-zeroing after every cycle.
Full Scale Ranges: From 0-3 ftto0-33ft/sec The accuracy shall be at least 0.5% of flow rate over a 33:1 turn-down at all flow
1.2
Repeatability: ±0.1% of full scale rates above 1 fps. Accuracy shall be verified by calibration in a flow laboratory
Electrodes: 316 stainless steel standard (others available) traceable to the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology.
Liner: Ceramic (AlOx 99.5%)Hard Rubber, Neoprene, 1.3 The flow sensor liner shall be Ceramic, Hard Rubber, Neoprene, Polyurethane,
Polyurethane Food Grade Polyurethane, TEF Food Grade Poly, or TEF. The housing shall be steel.
(FEP/PTFE) 1.4
Outputs: 1) Isolated analog 4-20mA DC into 800 ohms (std)
2) scaled pulse 24 V DC with selectable 1.5 for
12.5/25/50/100 ms on time, max.freq. 60 Hz Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G
3) 0-1000 Hz freq., for 0-100% of flow rate, 15 V DC environments without use of air purge. CSA Approved for Class 1, Division 2.
4) Two flow alarms 1.6 The electronics shall be integrally or remote mounted.
5) Fault, with open collector 1.7 When remote mounted, the flowmeter transmitter shall be furnished in a NEMA-
6) RS232 communication 4X enclosure box, with a larger 3/8” character, 2-line 16 digit backlit display and
7) flow direction with open collector 15 feet of cable (standard). NEMA-7 remote option available. The remote
mounted flow sensor shall be accidental submergence proof, 33 ft/48 hours
8) Positive Zero Return (PZR) for external relay contacts. Outputs
1.8 The flowmeter shall be suitable for operation at temperatures from -40°F to
2 & 3 can be open collector if required.
266°F and at pressures from full vacuum to 740 psi. (Optional: higher
Mag-CommandTM: Selection and change of meter parameters by magnetic probe temperature & pressure)
without opening the enclosure.
1.9 The flowmeter electrodes on ceramic liners shall be fused platinum
Display: 2-Line, 16 Digit alphanumeric backlit display (rate
1. The meter shall incorporate Hi-Z circuitry. The preamplifier input
and total). Modular, rotatable 360° in 90° increments
impedance shall not be less than 1012 12 ohms. External ultrasonic electrode
Conductivity: Minimum 5 micromhos/cm cleaners shall not be acceptable.
Min Velocity: 0.3 fps (0.1 mps) 2.0 Available outputs 1) Isolated analog 4-20mAdc into 800 ohms (std); 2) scaled
Power Requirements: 77-265 Vac 50/60 Hz (12-60 Vdc optional) pulse 24 Vdc with selectable 12.5/25/50/100 ms on time, max. freq.60 Hz; 3) 0-
Power Consumption: Less than 20 Watts 1000 Hz freq., for 0-100% of flow rate, 15 Vdc; 4) two flow alarms; 5) fault, with
Enclosures: Transmitter: Cast aluminum epoxy coated. Integral open collector; 6) RS232 communication; 7) flow direction with open collector;
(NEMA-7) or remote mounted (NEMA-4X) 8) Positive Zero Return (PZR) for external relay contacts. Outputs 2 & 3 can be
Sensor Housing: Fabricated steel, epoxy coated. open collector if required.
Preamp Impedance: 1012 ohms minimum 2.1 Low flow cutoff shall be selectable from 0-9% of FS and there shall be two flow
alarms settable from 0-99% of span.
Amb. Temp: -20° to 140°F (-30° to 60°C) Display darkens over
2.2 A 2-line, 16 character backlit alphanumeric display shall include user-defined
158°F (70°C) flow units and total flow. All menu advice and commands shall be visible on
End Connections: 150 lb or 300 lb this display. The display shall be modular and rotatable 360°, in 90° increments.
Sensor Tube: 304 Stainless Steel Characters shall be at least 0.125” high for ease of readability.
Process Temp: Integral Mount: 2.3 The flowmeter shall incorporate the MAG-COMMAND™ feature allowing menu
Hard Rubber, Neoprene, Polyurethane, Food selection and changes to be made from outside the housing via Hall-effect
Grade Polyurethane ....... -40- 180°F sensors. It shall not be necessary to remove covers, panels or fasteners to
TEF, Ceramic...................-40 - 212°F accomplish calibration or program changes.
Remote Mount (opt): 2.4 The TigermagEPs unique diagnostic functions eliminate the need for a
TEF, Ceramic...................-40 - 266°F technician to carry test equipment or open the housing. Current ramp, complete
High Temp Coils (opt) coil check and true front-end input simulator may be activated in MAG-
TEF...................................-40 - 300°F COMMAND™ without opening the enclosure.
Ceramic............................-40 – 420°F 2.5 The meter software shall incorporate a password feature preventing changes.
Selectable Damping: 0-99 seconds
2.6 The meter shall feature nonvolatile E2PROM memory and universal electronics
Low Flow Cutoff: Selectable 0-9% of FS module compatibility between all TigermagEP™ meters.
Options: • Remote Mounted NEMA-4X or NEMA-7 Enclosure 2.7 The flowmeter shall have a switching power supply having an operating range
• Sensor rating of NEMA6/IP67, NEMA6P/IP68 and Direct from 77-265 Vac, 50/60 Hz (12-60 Vdc). Power consumption shall not exceed
Burial 20 Watts.
• Electrode Materials: Titanium, Hastelloy C, Monel, Zirconium, 2.8 All printed circuit boards shall be contained in a plug-in module and be
Tantalum, Platinum, Fused Platinum (ceramic only) interchangeable for any size without requiring test equipment.
• Process Temperature to 420°F (216°C) (Ceramic Only) 2.9 The flowmeter manufacturer shall have meters of the DC pulse type in similar
• 12-60 Vdc operation flowing media for a minimum of five years.
• HART, Modbus 3.0 The flowmeter shall be warranted against defective workmanship or materials
• RS-485 Communication for a period of two years from date of shipment.
• Alarm with 10A relays (NEMA-4X remote only) 4.0 Totalized flow and programmed configuration shall be maintained in memory for
the meters lifetime.
• Process Pressure to 1750 psi
5.0 The flowmeter shall be 656 TigermagEP™ manufactured by Sparling
Instruments, LLC
www.sparlinginstruments.com
4097 N. Temple City Blvd.
El Monte, CA 91731
(800) 800-FLOW
sales@sparlinginstrument.com
04/02 (Rev 1608) - 160826 © 2016 Sparling Instruments LLC, All Rights Reserved
Model 9690
MANUAL
Ultrasonic Inline Density Analyzer
Revision date: 17 June 2016 Page 1/52

Document history
Version Date Description of changes
1 24/11/2008 For software version V2.1.28
2 23/02/2009 Update for software version V2.1.29
6 21/02/2012 Update for software version V2.2.7b
7 04/03/2013 Update for software version V2.2.7c
11 26/01/2016 Russian translation of V2.2.7b
Preparation and precautions
• These safety and operating instructions should be available at all times for reference.
• The product is equipped with a three-wire electrical grounding-type plug. This plug
will only fit into a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are
unable to insert the plug into the outlet, the outlet must be replaced. Do not evade the
safety purpose of the grounding-type plug.
• Internal batteries (user interface only)
The user interface is provided with a battery powered circuit. There is a danger of
explosion and risk of personal injury if the battery is incorrectly replaced or
mistreated. Do not attempt to recharge the battery, disassemble it, immerse it in
water, or dispose of it in fire. Replacement has to be done by the manufacturer.
• Unplug the product from the mains power before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners
or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning.
• The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
• Upon completion of any service or repairs to the product, ask the service technician
to perform safety check to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.
• Do not use options and upgrades not recommended by the manufacturer as they
may cause hazards.
Never push objects of any kind into the product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltages or damage parts that could result in a fire or electric shock
9690 Manual V2.3.30 Version 17-06-2016 21 June 2016 Page 2/52

TABLE OF CONTENT
1. PREFACE 5
1.1 PURPOSE OF THE MANUAL 5

1.2 SYMBOLS AND CONVENTIONS 5
1.3 ABOUT THIS MANUAL 5
1.4 ABOUT THIS ANALYSER 6
2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 7
2.1 DIMENSIONS 7
2.2 SPECIFIATIONS 7
2.2.1 OVERVIEW 7
2.2.2 OPTIONS 7
2.2.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 8
2.2.4 INGRESS PROTECTION (WPF-HOUSING) 8
2.2.5 TEMPERATURE 8
2.2.6 HUMIDITY 8
2.2.7 STORAGE CONDITIONS 8
3. INSTALLATION 9
3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 9

3.1.1 WHEATERPROOF HOUSING (WPF-HOUSING) 9
3.1.2 SPLIT UNIT TYPE (SPLIT) 9
3.2 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION 11
3.2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW 11
3.2.2 TERMINAL OVERVIEW 11
3.2.3 TERMINAL WIRING 12
3.2.4 FERRITE INSTALLATION 15
3.2.5 CABLE COILING 18
4. OPERATION 19
4.1 PREPARATION AND PRECAUTIONS 19

4.2 BOOT PROCEDURE 19
4.3 PRIMARY VERIFICATIONS. 19
4.3.1 PURPOSE 19
4.3.2 PROCEDURE 19
4.3.3 EXAMPLES OF ULTRASONICS WAVEFORMS 20
4.4 OPTIONAL CALIBRATIONS 21
5. CONFIGURATION 22
5.1 LIQUID (PRODUCT) SELECTION 22

5.1.1 PURPOSE: 22
5.1.2 PROCEDURE (MANUAL SELECTION): 22
5.1.3 PROCEDURE (REMOTE SELECTION): 22
5.2 CONFIGURATION OF OUTPUTS. 22
5.2.1 ANALOG OUTPUT CONFIGURATION 22
5.2.2 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION 24
5.2.3 ALARM CONFIGURATION. 25
5.3 SENSOR PARAMETERS 26
5.3.1 INTRODUCTION 26
5.3.2 PROCEDURE 26
5.3.3 INSTRUCTIONS: 26
5.4 EDITING LIQUIDS (POLYNOMIAL CALIBRATIONS) 26
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION 26
5.4.2 PURPOSE: 26
5.4.3 PREPARATION FOR EDITING LIQUID PARAMETERS 27
5.4.4 PROCEDURE 27
5.4.5 ADJUSTING INDIVIDUAL ALARM TRIP POINTS. 27
5.4.6 ADJUSTING POLYNOMIALS. 27
6. MAINTENANCE 29
6.1 VERIFICATION OF OPERATION 29

6.2 ADJUSTING THE CALIBRATION 29
6.3 TYPES OF CALIBRATION 29
6.3.1 TEMPERATURE CALIBRATION 30
6.3.2 (LOW) DENSITY CALIBRATION 31
6.3.3 SPAN FACTOR CORRECTION (HIGH DENSITY CALIBRATION) 32
6.3.4 REPEATING THE CALIBRATION 33
6.3.5 DENSITY EXPRESSED AS WT% SOLIDS 33
6.3.6 FIELD CALIBRATION 34
6.4 SHUTTING DOWN THE ANALYSER 34
6.5 REMOVING 35
6.6 CLEANING 35
6.7 SENSOR REPLACEMENT AND CALIBRATION. 35
6.8 REBOOTING THE ANALYZER 35
7. FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS 37
7.1 INSTALLATION QUESTIONS 37

7.2 OPERATION QUESTIONS 37
8. TROUBLE SHOOTING 39
8.1 FAULT CODES: 39

8.2 NORMAL OPERATING VALUES 47
8.3 LOGGING FOR DIAGNOSTICS & EVALUATION 47
8.3.1 PREPARATIONS 47
8.3.2 MEMORY STICK LOGGING 48
8.3.3 PROCEDURE TO STOP LOGGING ON USB MEMORY STICK 48
8.4 CREATING DIAGNOSTICS FILES 48
8.4.1 PREPARATIONS 48
8.4.2 BACKUP SETTINGS PROCEDURE 49
9. OPTIONAL EXTENSIONS 50
9.1 SPARE PARTS 50

9.1.1 SPARES ON ANALYZER 50
9.1.2 FUSES 51
9.1.3 WEATHER PROOF HOUSING AND SPLIT-UNIT HOUSING 51
9.2 OPTIONS 51
9.2.1 ETHERNET CONNECTION MODULE 51
9.2.2 FIRMWARE UPDATE KIT 52

1. Preface
1.1 Purpose of the manual
This manual explains the installation, configuration, operation and calibration of your Rhosonics
analyzer.
For ease of reading and understanding, the manual is organized in logical steps, divided over
several chapters and sections. Where necessary, the manual provides additional information about
the above mentioned issues, and gives you all the answers regarding ultrasonic inline
concentration analysis in the added section with Frequently Asked Questions.
1.2 Symbols and conventions
WARNING:
This symbol indicates that failure to follow directions in the warning could result in bodily harm.
CAUTION:
This symbol indicates that failure to follow directions could result in damage to the equipment or
loss of information.
IMPORTANT:
This word indicates that the text that follows contains clarifying information or specific instructions.
NOTE:
This word indicates that the text that follows contains comments, sidelights or interesting points of
information.
1.3 About this manual

• The symbol ► indicates a step to be performed.
• Text represented as [Bold] indicates the (drawn) button on the touch screen display to be
pressed.
• Text in ITALIC refers to text displayed on the touch screen display
• Pages on the touch screen display are represented as figures. Below figures with numbers in
red explain how to access information and how to change numbers.

1 The title of the menu is given. In this example, the settings of the alarm relay #1 is given.
2 The name of the liquid calibration, to which the alarm settings are connected to.
3 This is a standard button, with details of the current settings.
Pressing the button allows adjustment of context sensitive settings, for example:
4 Button title.
In this example, pressing the large button allows you to assign the alarm to a specific
physical measurement or calculated result, such as Concentration, wt%.
The two smaller buttons allow you to change the value.
5 The actual physical/chemical parameter, monitored by the alarm relay.
6 The current value for this particular setting.
Pressing any button representing causes a numeric keyboard to pop up. (see second figure
above)
7 Ok button. Pressing this button will store all values as listed in the menu page.
8 Not ok button. No changes will be made. You will then return to the previous page.
1.4 About this analyser

This Rhosonics analyser is part of a product family, which is able to measure a number of physical
variables of a process fluid, for automation purposes. The product family and capabilities
(depending on analyser model) is given in the below table:
Liquid type Model Application area Application examples

8500 Diluted chemicals (wt% strength) NaOH, H2SO4 purity etc.
8520 Same, but suitable for 2 probes
Binary liquids
8550 Binary liquids, sample cell system
8580 Diluted chemicals (wt% strength) Corrosive liquids
9570 Two chemicals in solution. TMAH & PR, Electrolytes
9580 For more corrosive resistance H2SO4 & Zn++ or Cu++
Ternary 9585 Same, + solids & SG reading COD; customer option
liquids Ternary analysis by means of sound
9590 Pickling, i.e. HCl & Fe++
speed and density
9595 As 9590 for full-bore, zero intrusion As 9590; Caustic/Alumina
9660 Clarity, diluted chemicals Overflow clarity
9670 Clarity & high solids in slurries
All SG applications which cannot be
9671 Slurries which contain oil
Slurries done with 9690
9680 as 9670, tank installation Solids, SG, caustic strength
Tailings, Ball mill pulp, lime, coal
9690 Slurry density only
slurry

2. Technical specifications
2.1 Dimensions
Dimensions (weather proof housing) 300x300x120 mm, (HxWxD)

Dimensions (split unit) 170x245x42 mm, (HxWxD)
Display effective area 115x86 mm (WxH)
Display resolution and color 320x240 (WxH) monochrome LCD (8 levels)
Touch switch Analog resistance film type
Weight (weather proof housing) ± 6.2 kg
Weight (split unit w/o display) ± 1.4 kg
Power consumption Maximum 35 W (boot), 24 Watts (normal)
Fuse (AC) 1,6AT
Fuse (DC) 3,15AT
2.2 Specifiations
2.2.1 Overview
Temperature circuit:
Resolution ± 0.5 °C (24 hours warm-up)
Reproducibility ± 0.1 °C (24 hours warm-up)
Range -10 °C through 150 °C
(depending on probe type)
Density circuit:
Resolution 0.2 g/l
Accuracy +/- 0.005 S.G. ( approx. +/- 5g/l density)
Reproducibility 0.1 g/l
Range 700 g/l through 3000 g/l
4-20mA Outputs (2x):
Resolution ± 0.002 % of FS
Repeatability ± 0.02 % of FS
Output current & load ± 4-20 mA into 450 Ω
Alarm outputs (2x):
Type SPDT, adjustable low-low high alarm (2x)
Ratings ± 250 VAC - 2A max.
Interfaces:
Serial interface RS232, RS422, RS485 (optional)
Ethernet Ethernet available as option
Storage of product calibrations
Calibration polynomials for liquids 2 (standard), 200 (optional)
Measurement Units:
Solids g/l or %wt, accuracy: 5 g/l or 0.5 %wt
2.2.2 Options
On customer request the factory will equip the analyzer with either a:
• Ethernet-10 adapter with webpage
• Logging option, files accessible through Ethernet-10 adapter
• USB-memory stick option, for logging and debugging purposes
• Profibus DP interface
• 100-240 VAC 50/60 Hz power supply converter or a 24 VDC power supply

• 4-20 mA Output 1 with non-isolated output (standard) or isolated output
2.2.3 Environmental conditions
WARNING:
To prevent electrical fire or shock hazards, do not expose the instrument to rain or excessive
moisture.
2.2.4 Ingress Protection (WPF-housing)

External touch screen display front side: IP65 (when using gasket)
External touch screen display rear side: IP20
Control unit front side: IP20/55
Control unit rear side: IP20/24
Sensor: IP68
2.2.5 Temperature
To meet and maintain the specifications listed, the analyzer should be operated within -5ºC to
+50°C ambient temperature.
Consult the factory for details.
2.2.6 Humidity
Relative humidity < 95% at 40ºC (non condensing)
2.2.7 Storage conditions

Temperature: -40ºC to +75ºC

3. Installation
3.1 Mechanical Installation
3.1.1 Wheaterproof Housing (WPF-housing)
300
260
SYSTEM
320
300
Display
Cable gland holes (5x) for

M16x1.5 cable glands
120
10
Figure 1: Weather proof housing
Recommendations for installation of this housing are given below:

• Rating of housing is IP65, however when you plan to install outdoors:
o Always install under a protection cover, to prevent water ingress
o Always prevent direct sunlight, i.e. by means of a sun shade
• The diameter of the mounting holes is 8 mm
• Recommended bolt diameter is Ø 8 mm. The length depends on the mounting material you
are using (Steel, Concrete, etc.)
• The analyzer is supplied with 5 cable glands for use with cable dimensions:
o 4 glands for Ø 5 – 9mm
o 1 gland for Ø 9 – 14 mm
• Make sure the analyzer is mounted about at least 100mm above the ground or surface to
prevent cable cracks while installing.
3.1.2 Split unit type (SPLIT)

3.1.2.1 Controller installation

260
15.1
42 245
30.2
Midden Engweg 37A Phone: +31 341 370073
NL-3882 TS Putten Fax: +31 341 370074
The Netherlands Email: info@rhosonics.nl
Internet: www.rhosonics.nl
Fuse Fuse
AC 1.6A 3.15A DC
100-240V slow slow 18-36V Type: 8500-SPLT-TOD-VAC
Voltage: 100-240 VAC 18-36 VDC
Power: 35 Watt
GND GND Fuse: 1.6A Slow 3.15A Slow
Freq: 50/60 Hz
L - Made in Holland
Serial: 100506092
N +
To prevent electric shock, Pb

do not remove cover !
GND
Touch screen /
-12V
WARNING +12V
RS 232
Check wiring before
172
170
applying power
Touch
124.8
screen
C
NC 1
22.6
NO
Alarm
C 4-20 mA
NC 2 Out
NO
Ch1 Ch2
+ - + -
Pt100 4 wire
Sense +
Sense -
I ref +
Drain
I ref -
US Probe
5
10
Figure 2: SPLIT housing style.
This housing style is recommended for installation in system cabinets, ships or instrument panels.
Recommendations for installation of this housing are given below:
• Rating of housing is IP24, so when you plan to install outdoors:
o Always install in a dry and moist-free location
o Always prevent direct sunlight, i.e. by means of a sun shade
• The diameters of the mounting holes are 10mm
• Recommended bolt diameter is 10mm. The length depends on the mounting material you
are using.
3.1.2.2 Display installation
The display can be easily installed inside a panel of a cabinet. The instructions below indicate how.
This procedure requires a mechanical engineer as this installation may come precise.
1. Make sure that you cut a perfect right-angle like figure 3. The dimensions are given in this
figure.
131+0.5
-0
174+0.5
-0
Figure 3: Panel cut-out for display installation.
2. If this cut-out has been made you could check if the display will fit perfectly. Otherwise it
needs some corrections made with a file.
3. In the picture below is give how to mount the display in the cut-out with Fixtures

Figure 4: Display insertion with fixtures
These fixtures are included in the display packaging. While inserted the display and the fixtues you
could drive the screws in hand-tight.
3.2 Electrical Installation

3.2.1 System overview
In the figure below you will see a system overview. Dependant on your system you are installing the
overview will be different.
Figure 5: system overview WPF-housing (left) and SPLIT-unit (right)
The figures above are suitable for several systems. The overview does actually dement whether you
are installing a WPF-housing or a SPLIT-unit version.
3.2.2 Terminal overview

Figure 6 shows the back of the display. The display is already connected in a WPF housing. When
you are installing a SPLIT unit version there are some actions to be done such as connecting the
analyzer to the display. This will be made clear further in this manual.

Figure 6: Rear view of the display and his power supply
The analyzer is delivered ready to install. As the 4-20 mA neither as the Ethernet connection is
installed on-site. Below there is given information about the terminals to be used (figure 7).
Figure 7: Terminal overview of the analyzer.
3.2.3 Terminal Wiring

In the tables below you can see all the connectors which could be attached to the analyzer.
Depending on the analyzer model you are installing there are a couple of connectors which are
accessible. Most of the analyzer models do not require an accessibility of all terminals. Figure six
shows the possible terminals and connectors on your analyzer model.

3.2.4 Ferrite installation
Electronic equipment must have a certain level of "immunity" to the Electro Magnetic Interference
present in its environment so that it is not "susceptible" to that interference.
One of the measures to gain sufficient resistance to interference noise is to add ferrite beads to the
end of an electrical cable. Ferrite beads are used as a passive low-pass filter.
Also energy is absorbed resistively within the ferrite core and dissipated as low level heat.
3.2.4.1 Ferrites
The following ferrites are installed in the analyzer.
Part number Cable Diameter Qty. Usage

• Data cable display (2x)
74271112S 4.5 to 6 mm 4 (5) • Power wiring display
• Analog output cable
• Power cable analyzer
74271132S 7 to 8.5 mm 2 (1) • Power wiring display
(WPF/EXD only)
Dislodging key to release
74271 - 1
assembled ferrites
The following table shows a list of cables and their associated type of ferrite.

Ferrite type associated with cable type
CABLE TYPE 742 711 12 742 711 32
Coax cable (green), Heavy Duty X
Coax cable (white), Standard X
Coax cable (black), Special X
Temperature sensor cable (black), Heavy Duty X
Temperature cable (beige), Standard X
Multicore (Coax + Temperature) X
Conductivity sensor cable X
Power cable 90-230 VAC (cable not supplied, ferrite supplied) X
Power cable 18-36 VDC (cable not supplied, ferrite supplied) X
Data cable to display X (9600 2X)
Power cable 24 VDC display (excl. 9600 models) X
Power cable 24VDC to display (9600-WPF/EXD) X X
Power cable 24VDC to display (9600-SPLT) 2X
4-20 mA OUT cable (cable not supplied, ferrite supplied) X
The following table gives a list of cable sets and their included ferrite(s).
Cable set ZKAB-RFISUP-4,5-6MM- ZKAB-RFISUP-7-8,5MM-
74271112S 74271132S
MKSET-DV-###-MUL 1
MKSET-DV-US-ADAPTER 1
MKSET-ECMP-###-ST 1
MKSET-IP68-T1-###-ST 1 1 (coax)
MKSET-IP68-T1-###-MUL 1
MKSET-MPEX-T1-###-ST 1 1 (coax)
MKSET-MPEX-T1-###-HD 2
MKSET-MP-T1-###-MUL 1
MKSET-UFTW-T2-D-###-HD 3
MKSET-UFTW-US-D-###-HD 2
MKSET-UMCS-T2-###-HD 2
MKSET-UMCS-T2-###-ST 1 1 (coax)
MKSET-UMCS-US-###-HD 1
MKSET-UMCS-US-###-ST 1
MKSET-UMP50-T1-###-ST 1
3.2.4.2 Installation Location
Install the ferrites by opening it fully, then put the cable in as in picture 2. Next, close the cover and
press firmly until it is completely seated.

Figure 8: Ferrite bead with unlocking key Figure 8: Installing ferrites
24 VDC power cable display

742 711 12
Data cable display

742 711 12
742 711 32
742 711 32
742 711 12
742 711 32
Temperature sensor cable
Coax cable (supplied)

(optional model 9660)
4-20 mA OUT cable

Power cable 90-240
VAC (not supplied)
Conductivity senor
cable (supplied)
(not supplied)
Figure 9: Placement ferrites
Procedure:
Ferrites placement procedure (if not yet placed on the cable)
All cables (accept cable to alarm relays) to the analyzer board need a ferrite
Place the ferrite as close to the entrance of the housing (figure 3)
For cable inside the housing place at maximum of 100 mm to the connection to the analyzer
board
Remark:
Drawn in figure 3 is a weather proof housing, but the ferrite placement applies for all Rhosonics
analyzer types (Split unit housing, ATEX housing, Portable housing, etc.).

3.2.5 Cable coiling
Sometimes adding ferrites isn’t enough to improve the level of "immunity" to the electromagnetic
field, especially when cables are very long.
Effects of electromagnetic fields on coiled cable have been observed which influenced density
measurements. This is because a normal coiled cable has a higher inductance making it more
susceptible for electromagnetic fields.
We therefore recommend that excess of cable is laid out or figure-8 coiled.
Standard coiling is not ok. Figure 10: coiling is ok.

4. Operation
4.1 Preparation and precautions
WARNING:
Live components may be exposed if covers are opened or components are
removed.
The device must be disconnected from all power sources before carrying out any servicing or repair
work, this is explained in the next section.
Capacitors inside the device may still carry voltage even though they have been disconnected from
all power sources.
Never replace damaged powers supply cables yourself. If necessary, disconnect the device from
the mains and take it to a specialist workshop.
Only qualified specialists familiar with the hazards involved and the relevant regulations may
perform repairs.
4.2 Boot procedure
Question Answer
When to do it To turn on the analyzer
When NOT to do it During normal operation or after calibrations
What must be done before
What is needed
What must be done afterwards

Following steps are necessary for safely powering up the analyzer system:
Make sure that there is no power on the mains cord.
Connect the “Mains Power /DC Power” connector.
Power up the analyzer from outside the analyzer e.g. by connecting the mains cord or
powering up the 24V power supply.
After several seconds the message “Data is Loading” disappears from the screen. At this time
the analyzer is finished with booting.
4.3 Primary verifications.
4.3.1 Purpose
The purpose is to verify the proper operation of the analyzer with regard to the ultrasonic echo. Its
visualized waveform (time vs. amplitude plot) can be an aid to identify problems which are related to
the process (gas bubbles, faulty cable etc.)
When you are asked by the factory or your sales agent to submit a waveform for diagnostics
purposes, please follow this procedure.
NOTE: Please read the previous section to learn details about the memory stick that can be used.
4.3.2 Procedure
Open “Echo” in the Information / Diagnostics menu

Press “Refresh” and an echo will be displayed
Some examples and explanations are given below:
Figure 11: Example of a “good” echo.
The x-axis is the time axis, typically the total span is 15

microseconds. With large sound paths, the total span
could be up to 100 microseconds.
The Y-axis is the amplitude of the sensor at a given time.
From left to right, you should see a horizontal line, with
little “noise”. The actual echo should begin with a large negative going peak. After the echo (about 2
periods wide), some noise occurs which is normal.
Press “Copy to USB” to copy the echo displayed to an USB memory stick.
You may repeat several times with intervals of your choice (for instance when something
unexpected happens). Please make notes of the unexpected situations and record the time
and date. A maximum of 100 waveforms can be stored on the memory stick.
Remove the USB stick (AFTER you have stopped the logging, if applicable, as indicated in
the previous section).
You may view echo’s with a program capable of reading JPG-files (i.e. Paint)
NOTE:
The data will be stored on the USB stick in the following folder: RHO\HDCOPY\. In this folder, the
JPG-file will be stored as HD595~00.JPG. The ~00 is the number of the echo stored on the USB
stick. If more than 100 echoes are stored, the first JPG-file will be overwritten.
4.3.3 Examples of ultrasonics waveforms
Please refer to the previous section for a general

explanation. This echo is extremely good, as there is no
noise before the echo (left = before). The system will
measure the time based on the first negative going ½-
period, which is clearly identifiable.
Figure 12: Example of a “good” echo with PEEK window

sensors.
This waveform has more noise before (left side of) the
arrival of the echo. When noise further increases, the
analyzer will disregard it and will try to get a better return
echo. The system makes up to 30 measurements
including echo evaluations per second.
Figure 13: Example of a “fair” echo.

This waveform has a lot of noise before (left side of) the
arrival of the echo. The echo is barely identifiable in the
middle of all the noise.
This echo is typical for gas bubbles adhering to the probe
surface, what happens with liquids with dissolved air at
ambient pressure conditions.
Figure 14: Example of a “poor” echo.
This waveform is only noise and no echo,

The echo is not identifiable in the noice.
This echo is typical for a defective probe or cable and/or
false probe settings.
Figure 15: Example of “Bad” echo.
ACTIONS:
Press “Refresh” and wait until a new echo will
appears. (2 seconds)
Repeat this a couple of times.
The echo pattern either changes significantly, OR
the echo pattern remains the same.
4.3.3.1 Repeatable echo pattern:

When the echo pattern remains the same, then gas bubbles may adhere to the probe. Remove gas
bubbles and prevent this from happening again. One way to prevent this is to increase the pressure,
or to take other measures to prevent gas bubbles to adhere to the probe surface.
4.3.3.2 Random echo pattern:

When the echo pattern changes each 2 seconds after pressing “Refresh”, then you may have a
cable problem (ground or shield), OR your probe may be defective, OR the liquid may contain
suspended gases.
If possible, shut down the pump to see it there is improvement. If yes, then it is likely that the
pump causes cavitations, or the probe is mounted at the suction side of the pump, which
may cause flashing.
When suspended gases are not the problem, check the continuity of the cable (coax) with a
universal ohm meter. Disconnect the cable at both ends, then check the resistance between
centre conductor and shield (infinite ohms).
Ask another person to connect the centre conductor with shield at the other end and check
the resistance (should be less than 1 ohm per 10 metre of cable).
If the cable is OK, verify the probe by immersing it in water.
With “Liquid select”, switch to “1 – Water calibration”.
Check the waveform. If the situation is still the same, then your probe is defective. If the
situation is now normal, the problem is caused by the liquid as explained above. Please
consult your distributor to discuss the problem and possible solutions.
4.4 Optional calibrations
When there are problems during operation it is possible a calibration has to be redone.
In §6.2 it is explained when and what calibration has to be done when a measured value is deviating
from a certified value.

5. Configuration
5.1 Liquid (product) selection
5.1.1 Purpose:
To select a previously stored liquid calibration as the active calibration. When your analyzer is used
for one specific type of liquid only, the liquid select procedure may not be of interest to you.
5.1.2 Procedure (manual selection):

The Liquid Selection menu is accessible through the Liquid menu on the Main Menu.
► Press [Liquid select] to get access to the selection menu.

The active calibration appears. Information is given about
the liquid number and the name of the active liquid
calibration.
You may now wish to select another liquid by scrolling

through the list with Previous and Next. If you know the
number of the calibration, you can also directly change the
number by pressing the liquid number and enter the
number of your choice.
Figure 16: LIQUID SELECT page
5.1.3 Procedure (remote selection):

You can choose for remote selection through this menu.
An active connection between an external selection device, such as a PLC or remote switch is
required to make this work correctly.
Choose depending on the selection device for 7 pins connector or MJ2, when your system is wired
for remote product selection.
Otherwise, leave this setting to internal.
5.2 Configuration of outputs.
5.2.1 Analog Output configuration

This section describes how you can configure your 4~20mA outputs:
With these settings, you can set the following:
• To choose the result to transmit through the 4~20 mA outputs.

• The scaling of these parameters.
• What the system should do when the system detects problems, i.e. gas bubbles.
Access level 2 is required (supervisor).

The access code is 7410.
5.2.1.1 Procedure:
For reaching the analog output configuration do the
following:
► Via Main Menu => Configuration =>
4-20 mA OUT => Configuration => 4-20 mA OUT1
Figure 17: 4-20 mA OUT 1 page

5.2.1.2 Changing the output source:
► Press [Analog Output1] you go to the Assignment
page
► Here you can choose between the results of the
polynomial Poly(1), Poly (2) and one of the measured
value’s. The result of the polynomial are dependent of
the loaded liquid and the number of variables you can
choose from is dependent from the analyzer model.
►When you choose the desired value you will be returned
to the 4-20 mA OUT # menu.
Figure 18: ASSIGNMENT page
5.2.1.3 Output Scaling:

The analog output is of the 4~20 mA type.
As an example we scale the output to a range from 10 to 15 wt%, the procedure is as follows:
► Enter the lowest value corresponding to 4 mA by pressing [4 mA Equals], and enter 10.
► For the highest value do the same by pressing [20 mA Equals], and enter 15.
CAUTION:
Scaling the output to a high range, i.e. 0~100 wt%, results in loss of accuracy. The accuracy of the
output is 0,05 % of scale. Choosing a smaller range (difference between low and high value) results
in a better resolution. In the above example, the accuracy of the output is 0,1% of (15-10), which
equals 0,0025 wt%.
5.2.1.4 Error communication through analog outputs:

During an inline analysis, conditions may not always be perfect to perform a correct measurement.
The analyzer automatically detects when the liquid is not homogeneous, or when gas bubbles are
present, generates errors and initially holds its last valid reading.
In most processes, upset conditions may occur incidentally, due to not completely dissolved gases.
The analyzer freezes the measurement during these conditions.
Too long freezing may lead to a constant output, which in turn may lead to the conclusion that the
process is perfect. To signal a too long duration of upset process conditions, the analyzer can react
to these errors in four different modes.
• Force Low: force output to 3mA after XXX seconds

• Force High: force output to 21mA after XXX seconds
• Force Update: force output to maintain measurement (only for Temp and Gain)
• Hold last: Hold last correct measured value
Determine first:
• How long do I allow the system not to signal any
upset process conditions?
• What milli-Amp value do I wish to receive when
erratic conditions continue for a too long period of
time?
Figure 19: ERROR MODE OUT 1 page
Example: We want the output to force low when 120

seconds of continuous loss of signal occurs.
► Press [Error Mode] => [Force Low]=> Enter “120

After the specified number of seconds, the 4~20 mA OUT will be forced to the specified level (Low
level is 3 mA, High level is 21 mA).
Repeat this procedure for 4~20 mA OUT 2.
NOTE
When you wish to output temperature, set to “Force update” (no time can be set).
5.2.2 Display configuration
5.2.2.1 Purpose:
1. Define the parameters you wish to be viewed during normal operation.
2. Define smoothing (decay time).
3. Define the resolution on the display.
4. Graph scaling by trend line configuration.
5. Adjusting backlight turn off time.
5.2.2.2 Selecting the results (1):

Normally, you wish to view the concentration as main parameter, and the temperature as second
parameter (shown small). Should your analyzer be capable of measuring more chemical
components, you may wish to select another component. In addition, it is possible to view other,
secondary parameters, such as sound speed or Ultrasonic
attenuation, for specific evaluations.
► From the Configuration menu, press [Display]

► The procedure is similar to the assignment of mAout.
NOTE: This procedure does not affect the output and

alarm configurations.
Figure 20: DISPLAY CONFIGURE page
5.2.2.3 Smoothing / Decay time (2):

Smoothing is strongly recommended, since it gives you more accuracy. In addition, rapid changes in
concentration are being smoothed, hence the output value more represents the “bulk” value of the
liquid. When fast response is not required, we strongly
recommend setting the τ63 time between 5 and 20
seconds. Since smoothing affects the response time, the
best setting is a trade-off between accuracy and response
time.
A decay rate of 5 seconds is recommended for most

applications.
Figure 21: DECAY TIME page
5.2.2.4 Setting the display resolution (3):

This button allows you to toggle between 2 digits and 3 digits resolution. This setting does not affect
the output resolution. The 3-digit resolution may be selected when additional readout accuracy is
required, which is useful during field calibrations. For additional readout accuracy, it is
recommended to apply some display smoothing too. See next section for details.
5.2.2.5 Graph scaling (4):
During normal operation of the analyzer, you can activate additional screens, such as the graphs,
allowing you to see the trend of the results as configured in the previous section. The graphs show
the trend of the results over the last 15 minutes of operation.
The scaling of the graph is done in this section.

• Define the scales of the 2 graphs (Y-axis starting and ending points).
• The plotted results are those which were configured in the display menu.
In the display menu press

► [Trend configuration] ► [Min/Max value y-axis 1/2]
Now you can enter the values that should correspond to minimum and maximum of the y-axis 1 and
y-axis 2 (via pop-up keypad)
► With [Trendline sampling time]
you can enter the time that should correspond to the time
a trend value is written on the graph.
NOTE: The graph will plot the results which are monitored
by the display. Should you wish to plot other results, then
this is only possible by changing the display source value.
Figure 22: TRENDLINE CONFIGURATION page
5.2.2.6 Backlight turn off time (5):

This setting allows you to set the time that the backlight has to be turned OFF automatically. If the
backlight doesn’t have to be turned OFF, enter 0 minutes. Touching the screen will turn the backlight
ON. The set time has a fixed cycle and starts when the display is powered ON, so it can happen that
if you touched the screen the backlight is turned OFF within the set time.
5.2.3 Alarm configuration.
5.2.3.1 Introduction
Alarm relays are provided for monitoring specific measured concentrations. The analyzer allows you
to define which parameters are monitored, and at what values the relays should be possible. In
addition, you may select whether the alarms are activated during fault conditions (Normal) or
activated when no alarm is present (inverted operation).
5.2.3.2 Preparation.
• Determine which value you wish to monitor with each alarm.
• Determine whether you wish the alarm relay contacts to be activated during normal operation
(no alarm) or during a fault condition. This decision has consequence for the alarm wiring, as
a Normally Open (NO) contact will be closed when the value falls within the low and high
limit.
• Determine high and low trip points for each alarm.
NOTE
The analyzer has a database with specific alarm set points for each individual liquid. As the
adjustment of the set points is liquid type dependant, the
procedure for changing the set points is covered in
chapter “Liquid selection and editing”, paragraph “Editing
liquids”.
5.2.3.3 Selecting the alarms

► Via Configuration menu, ► Alarm (1or 2)
► [Alarm ½]
► The procedure is similar to the assignment of mAout.
Figure 23: ALARM 1 page
NOTE: Usually this would be the main parameter, i.e.

concentration in %w/w.

5.2.3.4 Setting low and high alarm points.
► Press [Low Alarm] and enter the corresponding value.
► Do the same for [High Alarm].
► Press [Accept] (after pressing Accept it may take up to 10 seconds to return to the Alarm
configuration page)
Repeat these steps for Alarm 2 if desired.
IMPORTANT:
Changes made to the alarm settings of an individual liquid will remain valid until the alarm settings
for this liquid are changed again.
5.3 Sensor parameters
5.3.1 Introduction
When replacing a probe, it is necessary to enter the probe
constants as supplied on the Probe Calibration Data Sheet
(PCDS).
Figure 24: SENSOR page
5.3.2 Procedure
• Obtain the Probe Calibration Data Sheet. The serial number of the probe is indicated on the
sheet.
• From the main menu, choose Configuration – Sensor – US sensor
• Check or modify the data as indicated on the data sheet
NOTE: If a probe is replaced, the previous data sheet is no longer valid.
5.3.3 Instructions:
► Via Main menu => Configuration =>Sensor
=> Ultrasonic=>Sensor1
The following menu appears:
► Enter the appropriate values from the PCDS.
Figure 25: ULTRASONIC PROBE CONFIGURATION

page
5.4 Editing liquids (polynomial calibrations)
5.4.1 Introduction
For a proper operation, it is vital that you obtain the right calibration data sheet for your liquid. The
polynomial constants, in conjunction with the built-in algorithm, compute the concentration from both
sound speed and temperature data. These essential data have been established in the factory and
sometimes may need to be changed, for instance when the liquid recipe is changed.
This section describes how you can edit existing polynomial calibrations and how to enter new
constants from an existing data sheet (sent by the factory).
5.4.2 Purpose:
• To select previously stored liquids, with their specific settings.
• To add new and modify existing liquid names and factors.
• To edit alarm trip points for each liquid type.
• To restore field calibration data or duplicate field calibration data from other analyzers
into this analyzer.

• To edit polynomial constants according to Liquid Datasheet sent by Rhosonics
5.4.3 Preparation for editing liquid parameters

• Obtain the liquid data sheet from the factory
• If applicable, obtain the desired alarm trip points for the variables you wish to monitor.
5.4.4 Procedure
► Via main menu => Liquids => Liquid edit
► Select the liquid number that you wish to edit or want to use for a new liquid.
► Edit the name. You may use characters and numbers. The maximum length is 16.
► Edit the minimum and maximum sound speed, as given on the liquid data sheet.
This will overwrite the minimum and maximum sound speed of the selected liquid in the liquid
database. Be aware that incorrect setting of the minimum and maximum sound speed can make a
proper measurement impossible.
► Press [More settings] or [Main] to save the minimum and maximum sound speed and to go to
the next page or go back to the Main menu (after pressing [More settings] or [Main] it may take up
to 10 seconds to enter the next page)
► Edit the Laboratory and Indicated values after pressing [More settings]
► Press [More settings] or [Main] to save the Laboratory and Indicated values and to go to the
next page or go back to the Main menu (after pressing [More settings] or [Main] it may take up to
10 seconds to enter the next page)
Next step (after pressing [More settings]) is the adjustments of the alarm trip points. This is
explained in the next section.
5.4.5 Adjusting individual alarm trip points.

You may adjust the alarm trip points for each stored product.
The source of the alarm, i.e. concentration or temperature etc., is determined in the configuration
menu.
► Press [Low Alarm]

► Enter the value that should correspond to low alarm.
► Press [High Alarm]
► Enter the value that should correspond to high alarm.
► Repeat these steps for Alarm 2 if desired.
Next step is (after pressing [More settings]) the editing of the polynomials of the liquid, which
calculate the concentration. This is explained in the next section.
5.4.6 Adjusting polynomials.
CAUTION:
Changing polynomials may lead the incorrect concentrations. Only perform this action if Rhosonics
asked you to do so.
Rhosonics may send you a new Liquid Datasheet with new liquid polynomials to improve the
concentration calculation. To enter the new polynomial values into a liquid follow the next steps.
► Select the liquid number that you wish to edit

► (Optional) Edit the name. You may use characters and numbers. The maximum length is 16.
► Edit the minimum and maximum sound speed
► Press [More settings]
► Make sure Laboratory and Indicated value are 1 for any NEW set of data to be entered.

► (Optional) edit alarm low and high trip points.
Now you get to the most important part, editing the polynomial data.
► Edit ALL parameters exactly as indicated on the data sheet (below)

► Press on each square with a parameter, then
► For each parameter, Enter the corresponding value from the Liquid Datasheet through pop-up
screen, and always start with the NUMBER first, then the + or – sign.
► Double check everything. Check the minus signs! And the exponents.
► Press pressing [More settings])
This step is optional. Only set Q and R settings when the factory has given instructions to do so. So
normally, press [Main]

6. Maintenance
6.1 Verification of operation
There are several things to keep in mind during

verification op operation.
The first action is are there any errors? An example

of an error is shown in the figure below. In this case
the temperature sensor1 is not connected. A
detailed description about fault codes and remedies
are given in §8.1.
Figure 26: Error example
In case of problems with the ultrasonic wave

detection it is recommended to look at §4.3, and
verify what the waveform is.
Depending on the analyzer model some values and settings will be put on hold until the error is
gone. It is recommended to start with calibrating when there are no errors present, else calibration
results can’t be trusted.
During verification it is necessary to check whether the analyzer is capable of following the trend of
the process, if this is not the case that can have several causes. The next paragraph §6.2 is
explaining the calibrations which can be done to adjust variations in measured parameters.
An important part of verification of operation is to check whether measured values are still valid. To
assure this there are several calibrations which have to be performed on regular bases. In the
beginning of the next paragraph a table with a maintenance schedule is displayed which tells how
and when to perform certain calibrations. It is always important that a calibration is done against a
known value this can be a sample with a known concentration in case of a sample or field calibration
or a calibrated temperature sensor in case of the temperature calibration.
6.2 Adjusting the calibration
You may calibrate the analyzer in order to assure optimal analysis results. This section describes
the different calibration routines, and the intervals which are required.
Types of calibration
The following table lists the different types of calibration, their purpose and the interval required to
perform these calibrations.
Calibration type Purpose Interval
Temperature offset Proper temperature compensation Weekly check,
3-months calibration
Low density Density offset calibration During first calibration.
calibration Following a temperature
calibration.
High density Adjusting the span of the density Within 30 days after low density
calibration measurement. calibration.
Field calibration Make reading equal to laboratory Once, repeated for
result, at target level. each product.
4~20 mA output Zero/span of analog output. Factory, after repair.
Temperature electrical Electronic basic calibration. Factory, after repair.

Polynomial calibration Optimal linearization & Once, by factory.
compensation
Probe calibration Entering probe data from probe Replacement/repair of probe.
calibration data sheet (PCDS).
There are 4 major calibrations to be performed after you

have installed the analyzer.
These 4 calibrations are accessible though one menu, as
given below:
Figure 27: Calibration page
These procedures are discussed in detail in the following

sections
6.2.1 Temperature calibration
The analysis result and the linearity highly depends on the integrity of the temperature circuit. The
temperature calibration provides a simple and effective way to apply corrections to the temperature
measurement, should this be necessary.
6.2.1.1 When needed

1 Exchange of temperature probe and/or hybrid probe.
2 When indicated temperature deviates from standard.
Check the temperature reading regularly, and perform a calibration when the reading
error exceeds 0.5 ºC. It is advised to calibrate the temperature sensor with a laboratory
calibrated sensor, as other temperature sensors in the same process may lack accuracy
or may not be representative for the temperature at the installation location of the probe.
6.2.1.2 Preliminary
Access the menu via:
Main=>Calibration=>Temperature
The left screen appears if a Pt100 is connected, in this case follow the instruction for the
Pt100 Temperature calibration.
The right screen appears if the temperature measurement is done by ultrasonic method, in
this case follow the Ultrasonic Temperature calibration.
Figure 28: Temperature calibration with Pt100

Figure 29: Temperature calibration without Pt100
6.2.1.3 Pt100 Temperature calibration procedure

Choose one of the following:
1 In case of replacing a temperature probe:

► Fill in the Temp. offset from the Probe Calibration Datasheet(PCDS). And [Accept]
► Figure 3 appears
► After 30 seconds, you will see the temperature reading approximate your certified
temperature to within +/- 0,1 ºC. Press the OK button to leave the menu.
► During this time, make sure that the temperature does not change. In addition, it is
recommended to perform this calibration only when the temperature has been stable for at
least one hour.
2 In the other case

► Read the temperature as indicated by the laboratory calibrated sensor.
► Fill in the certified Temperature.
► In this case the value for Temp. Offset1 is automatically updated.
After this [Accept] the value.
► Fout! Verwijzingsbron niet gevonden.
appears.
After 30 seconds, you will see the temperature
reading approximate your certified temperature to
within +/- 0,1 ºC. Press the OK button to leave the
menu.
► During this time, make sure that the temperature
does not change. In addition, it is recommended to
perform this calibration only when the temperature
has been stable for at least one hour.
Figure 30: Temperature calibration during averaging
6.2.1.4 Ultrasonic Temperature calibration procedure

Without a Pt100 there is only one way to perform a calibration.
► Read the temperature as indicated by the laboratory calibrated sensor.
► Fill in the certified Temperature.
► In this case the value for Temp. Offset1 is automatically updated.
► Press [Accept]. Fout! Verwijzingsbron niet gevonden.Fout! Verwijzingsbron niet
gevonden. appears.
► After 30 seconds, you will see the temperature reading approximate your certified
temperature to within +/- 0,1 ºC. Press the OK button to leave the menu.
► During this time, make sure that the temperature does not change. In addition, it is
recommended to perform this calibration only when the temperature has been stable for at
least one hour.
6.2.2 (Low) Density Calibration
6.2.2.1 When needed

• During first installation
• Following a temperature calibration
• When a probe is replaced.
• During periodic calibration
The analyzer can be calibrated at the actual process conditions, provided the temperature and the
density is known.
6.2.2.2 Procedure for Initial and Regular Calibration

1. When the process is stable, determine by any appropriate means the density and the
temperature.
The temperature must be known +/- 5 ⁰C
When the concentration is known and not the
density, the density of the slurry must be
determined. This can be done either by taking a
sample or by calculating the density based on the
concentration and hydraulic laws.
2. Enter the menu Calibration and then Low
Calibration (even when the density is high)
3. Enter the temperature and the SG (i.e. 1500).
Confirm after you have entered the appropriate
values
Figure 31: Low density calibration
The analyzer is now ready for use. Please take regular samples and determine whether the analyzer
needs a span correction factor.
NOTE: When you are calibrating under actual process conditions, the density may fluctuate more
than +/-1 g/l, due to natural variations in the density of the slurry.
As for any calibration, it is essential to use certified equipment, and liquids of which the properties
are known. You must be CERTAIN about what you enter, otherwise any calibration is useless.
For a solids and density measurement, the density and temperature information is not critical. In
fact, the temperature may differ up to 5 ºC from reality. The SG information may be different up to 10
g/l. The purpose of measuring SG and temperature is primarily to aid the system with determining
acoustic effects on sound propagation, which in turn affect the accuracy of the attenuation
measurement, the parameter that is most sensitive to the presence of suspended solids.
6.2.3 Span Factor correction (High Density Calibration)
6.2.3.1 Purpose
The high density calibration applies an additional SPAN factor. The purpose to assure a correct
reading within the low and the high calibration points. This calibration is only necessary when you
are interested in true values rather than just trends.
6.2.3.2 When needed

This calibration can be done following the standard or low calibration, and is preferably done within
30 days after completing the (low point) density calibration. Both calibrations do not affect each
other and each time the low or the high calibration is done, a new offset and span factor are
automatically determined. The analyzer determines a calibration factor and stores this factor in its
database. It is known as the “New factor”, which is normally between 0.3 and 9
When the readings are too low when the density increases above 1500, then the span factor needs
to be increased.
Example: The analyzer reads 1500 at a density of 1500, but indicates 1575 when it should read
1600.
The span factor is then more than 1. The calculation of the factor is as follows:
(true high value minus true low value) divided by (measured high value minus measured low value)
= (1600-1500) / (1575-1500) = 100/75 = 1.333.

1. Determine the span factor using the above
method.
2. Enter the menu Calibration and then High
Calibration
3. A span factor is indicated (factory default is 2).
Multiply the current factor with the span factor
which you determined previously
4. Enter this number as new span factor
5. Confirm and leave all menu’s.
Figure 32: Low density calibration
NOTE: The status of the process at the time of entering the new span factor is not affecting the
SPAN calibration.
NOTE2: Do not use the Certified S.G. calibration of the High density calibration page unless
Rhosonics tell you to do so. Always calculate the Span factor and enter this value in the proper field.
6.2.4 Repeating the calibration
Typically, the system requires only periodic calibration to compensate for drifts over
time, or when process conditions change. As the analyzer has built-in methods to compensate for
any internal effect, the only source of drift can occur due to excessive wear of the probe’s front
surface. The ruggedized probe head can allow wear and tear without noticeable degradation of the
sensitivity. The maximum allowable wear of the front surface is 5 mm, 20 mm with a long life (-LL)
sensor. When drift is suspected, the following is recommended:
► Perform the temperature calibration (only if necessary)

► Repeat the low point calibration (Clear Liquor Calibration)
NOTE: It is not necessary to repeat the high calibration for eliminating drift.
IMPORTANT:
Since the ability of the analyzer to correct for temperature change is only limited to +/- 5 ⁰C, it is
recommend to repeat the procedure when the actual temperature deviates more than +/- 5 ⁰C from
the temperature at the time of the last calibration.
6.2.5 Density expressed as wt% Solids
For conversion of the measured solids into g/l or wt%:

1. Determine the apparent density of the ore type.
For example, typical apparent density of copper ore is 4500 g/l or SG 4.5
2. Go to the menu Liquids and then Select Liquids
3. Select the appropriate density from the list, i.e. SG 4.5 and confirm your choice
4. Go the menu Configuration and then Display
5. Select Poly 1 concentration either as first or as second displayed value. It is
recommended to select SG as first displayed value and the Poly1 concentration as
second display value.
6. Go the menu Configuration and then Output and then either Output 1 or Output 2
7. Select the appropriate value you wish to send to the output you selected, i.e. SG or
Poly1 concentration
8. Adjust upper and lower limits corresponding with 4 and 20 mA
9. Exit all menu’s and verify that you have the right values on the display and the
desired measured units on your output.

6.2.6 Field calibration
6.2.6.1 Purpose
The field calibration is necessary for each product type. The installed polynomial calibration assures
linearization of both the concentration and the temperature dependency. Still, your product may
contain contaminations or additives that may have a small impact on the final analysis result. The
field calibration corrects this error. This correction can be considered as “slope” correction of the
programmed calibration. The final purpose is to make the analyzer read correctly at the target
concentration.
6.2.6.2 When needed

After installation, and when the product is flowing. The field calibration is intended to be a specific
calibration for your specific product.
The procedure must be repeated for each product. For your convenience, the analyzer determines a
calibration factor and stores this factor in its database, so that you don’t need to repeat the
procedure when you manually or remotely recall the product with its calibration factor.
6.2.6.3 Procedure
If you did not already do so, create some product types (if necessary) that you are processing in
your plant. You can do this through the menu Liquids=> Liquid Edit. The calibration will have effect
ONLY on the liquid which you have made the active liquid calibration.
The below procedure provides a brief guideline for the necessary steps.
The analyzer must be powered up for at least 4 hours

Select the product from the list (Through menu Liquids=>Liquid Select).
During stable processing, read the concentration from the display.
Take a sample for laboratory analysis.(immediately after taking the reading)
After taking a sample, take another reading
from the display.
Average the 2 readings.
After laboratory analysis of the sample, you
have 2 numbers, i.e. an “Indicated
value” (averaged reading of display) and a
“Laboratory value”.
Enter the field calibration menu (through
Calibration=> Field calibration menu.
Enter the 2 values in their appropriate field.
Figure 33: Field calibration Poly 1
After entering the data, you will see a new factor. It should be in the range of 0.900 up to 1.100. In
case you suspect a wrong factor, you may press “Cancel” and repeat the procedure. The selected
product has now been calibrated. You can see the concentration change after you have done this
calibration.
6.3 Shutting down the analyser
Question Answer
When to do it For maintenance inside the analyzer
When NOT to do it For liquids reset
What must be done before If logging; safe log files see 8.3

What is needed
In case of shutting down the analyser, make sure that Logging is off. For information about logging
see §8.3.
The analyzer must be powered down from the outside of the analyzer. This can be done by
e.g. disconnecting the mains cord or shutting down the 24V power supply.
It is recommended after powering down to disconnect the mains power connector on the
analyzer board.
6.4 Removing
Before removing anything please read the section about preparation and precautions.
Probes can be safely disconnected from the analyzer board without powering down the analyzer.
For removing probes refer to the probe manual if available.
If a display has to be replaced, the display can also be disconnected without powering down the
analyzer. Chapter 3 shows how the display is connected.
If the analyzer board has to be removed, this has to be done by your agent. The agent knows the
proper procedure how to do this.
6.5 Cleaning
It is not recommended to clean the inside of the product.
To clean the outside of the product, a dry and clean cloth is sufficient. Do not use any aggressive
cleaning agents. Using them may damage the lettering or the casing itself and might even impair the
function of the touch screen.
6.6 Sensor replacement and calibration.
For specific instructions for removing and installation of probes see the specific probe manual (if
available).
There are 2 possibilities of probes which can be replaced:
1. Replacing the ultrasonic probe:

A. When the ultrasonic sensor is replaced. Enter the data from the probe calibration
datasheet into the US sensor menu as described in §5.3.
B. The temperature calibration has to be redone according the procedure described in
§6.2.1.
C. After these calibrations the low density calibration has to be redone following the
procedure from §6.2.2.
2. Replacing of a separate Pt100 probe:

Redo the Pt100 calibration according the procedure described in §6.2.1.
6.7 Rebooting the analyzer

Rebooting is necessary after loading firmware and loading liquids. Both procedures are described in
the manual: “Field maintenance & update procedures for all models.”
After changing of settings and or calibrations it is not necessary to reboot the analyzer.
The rebooting procedure which can be performed after shutting down for maintenance is the same
as the boot procedure described in §4.2.

7. Frequently asked questions
7.1 Installation questions

Q: Do I need to calibrate the analyzer prior to installation?
A: The analyzer has been calibrated and tested in the factory. There is no need to (re)calibrate the
analyzer before installation, because all specific adjustments and calibrations can be done with a
fully installed analyzer.
Q: Our analyzer has a probe with 10 meter cable length. We want to install the controller unit further
away. Is this possible?
A: Yes, new cables are available. A new probe calibration datasheet will be provided with new
settings. For inputting this data see §5.2.
Q: I want to install the analyzer in a pipe line close to a pump. Is this possible?
A: Yes, but install the analyzer downstream of the pump. If cavitation can be expected, it is better to
stay at least 20 pipe diameter length away from the pump.
Q: What is the effect of pressure?

A: There is no noticeable effect of pressure, as long as the pressure does not increase above 10
bars. The sound speed may be affected above this pressure, but in case you are running the
analyzer at a higher pressure, this must have been discussed before delivery.
If the pressure is atmospheric or lower, then there is an increasing risk of gas bubbles. If installation
in an atmospheric tank is required, we recommend installing the probe near the bottom of the tank,
as to avoid build-up of gas bubbles on the sensor surfaces. In certain cases, degas systems can be
installed to avoid these problems. Contact the factory or your local agent to discuss possible
solutions.
Q: In our process, our liquid is constantly used, re-used and recycled. Our production makes that the
liquid is agitated and / or injected with air or other gas to improve the process. Can we simply insert
a probe in the buffer tank or the tank where the process takes place?
A: The system is capable to operate in liquids, where occasional gas bubbles are present. The
analyzer is NOT suitable in liquids, saturated with gas, or liquids with finely dispersed gas. See next
question for solutions.
Q: How can I measure in bubble-rich liquids?

A: Your sample take-off point should be located as low as possible in your (buffer) tank. Pump your
sample to a bubble removal system. This may be a simple settling tank, or an active removal
system. If available refer to the FAQ section “Corrosive liquids” for specific solutions.
7.2 Operation questions

Q: I just installed the analyzer and I am getting all kinds of error messages. How is this possible?
A: After power-up, the analyzer will try to make a valid measurement. As the analyzer has an
automatic system to detect the presence of liquid and gas bubbles in the pipe line, it is likely that the
pipe is not (completely) filled with liquid. Make sure that product is in the pipe line. Also check the
above recommendations in the FAQ installation section.
Some error messages do not necessarily mean that there is malfunction of the analyzer. For
instance, if the purpose of the instrument is to measure the suspended solids, specific errors may
occur due to the fact that the analyzer fails to make a proper sound speed measurement.
Attenuation measurements do not depend on signal quality.
Q: How can I check that the analyzer is working properly?

A: The analyzer will show no error message on the top of the measurement screen.
You can also check the detail measurement screen and compare the values with the values which
are considered to be normal, as described in the section “normal operation” in this manual.
Q: How can I calibrate the analyzer?

A: Instrument calibration, i.e. electronic circuits, probes, outputs etc. have been calibrated in the
factory and do not need calibration after installation.
When you replace a probe, you will need to enter the probe data, as given in the calibration data
sheet, in the configuration menu.
Zero calibration in pure water (<100 mg/l TDS) is recommended every month. Refer to the section
“Calibration” in this manual for details.
Polynomial calibration is provided by the factory, while the calibration data already is installed in the
analyzer during the final factory test procedure.
A field calibration at the target concentration is recommended after commissioning, by taking a
sample and enter the correct concentration into the analyzer. Unless the product formula changes,
this procedure is only required once.
Q: During certain process conditions, it can happen that gas bubbles are present in the liquid. How
does this affect the measurement?
A: The Rhosonics Ultrasonic Analyzer automatically detects the presence of product and gas
bubbles. It will then freeze the measurement until a next valid measurement is possible. Due to its
unique method of operation, the analyzer continues to operate reliably during upset process
conditions. The analyzer will not be able to measure when gas bubbles are continuously present or
when gas bubbles adhere to the surface of the sensor, which will be the case when measurement
are done under atmospheric conditions.
Q: How can I see that I am having gas bubbles in the pipe line?
A: Depending on the amount of gas bubbles, you will see occasional or frequent error messages in
the measurement screen. The detail measurement screen provides information about specific
ultrasonic parameters, such as the measured (ultrasonic) attenuation, which should normally be at a
level between 20 and 50, and constant.
Q: We are using the analyzer in a blending installation. When the production has stopped for more
than several minutes, the analyzer indicates gives a slight misreading, sometimes leading to
alarming situations. This also happens when the product starts flowing again. What is happening
and what can we do about it?
A: When the liquid is flowing, the temperature is in equilibrium in the entire pipe line. When the
product is standing still, the cold pipe line may either be heated or cooled slowly due to differences
in temperature with the ambient environment. Although the temperature of the liquid is measured at
a point which is considered representative for the ultrasonically measured product, unpredictable
temperature gradients may lead to incorrect temperature compensation, resulting in deviation in the
concentration reading.
You can solve this problem by using the optional “External Hold” option. An external 24 Volt DC
signal can stop the analyzer, so that the outputs and alarms are no longer updated. See the sections
“Installation” and “Automation and communication” for details.
Another method is to insulate the pipe line, so that it is not heated from the outside. For best results,
the entire pipe line (upstream) must be isolated.

8. Trouble shooting
8.1 Fault codes:
Status and error codes. Causes, actions and remedies.

Valid For Model 8500~9999 from v2.2.17 and up
Message on
Module Code Description Possible causes Possible remedies Analyzer action
display
1 Not really a fault,
1 Caused by signal on
because externally
external hold connector
given
2 Not really a fault,
2 Caused by modbus
because externally
address via MJ2
10 System: Ext. External hold is given All calculations are
10
hold is enabled enabled. 3 Hardware stopped
modification is
3 Caused by software
needed see update
update on Rev F
SYS and maintenance
Analyzer
manual Revision F.
modification
Software version from

Display software is
253 System: the display software is Check for
not compatible Everything is
253 Wrong too low. Problems may compatible display
with analyzer updated
disp. software occur for certain factory software
software
models.
Temperature Sensor (TS) codes

1 Check / repair
Temperature 1 Wiring is defective
wiring
sensor1. Has a bad
21 T Sens1 bad 2 Connections are 2 Check / repair
21, 22 connection or is
or no connection defective connections Calculations are
not connected at
all. 3 Replace Pt100 stopped accept for
3 Pt100-#1 defective
probe Power and
Value of 1 Redo temperature attenuation
1 Temperature
23 TSens1 value temperature calibration from the
23 calibration went wrong.
out of range sensor 1 is out of calibration menu.
range. 2 See error 22 2 See error 22
The low ADC value

Low value calibration Redo the low
TS1 for the
220 T ADC for temperature sensor reference calibration
temperature
220 calibration out of 1 is outside of range for sensor 1 with a
calibration of
range should be within 5% of precision resistor of
sensor 1 is out of
135000 100 ohm.
range.
Everything is
updated
Redo the low
The high ADC High value calibration
reference calibration
221 T ADC value for the for temperature sensor
for sensor 1 with a
221 calibration out of temperature 1 is outside of range
precision resistor in
range calibration of should be within 5% of
the range of 125-
sensor 1 is wrong. 170000 or 204000
150 ohm.

The resistance
Resistance for low
224 T ADC value for the low Redo this calibration
reference should be
224 calibration out of ADC calibration of with the correct
between 99 and 101
range temperature resistor value
ohm
sensor1 is wrong.
The resistance
Resistance for high
225 T ADC value for the high Redo this calibration
reference should be
between 125±1.25 ohm
and 150±1.5 ohm
sensor1 is wrong.
1 Low value ADC

Low value for the calibration for TS1 is not Redo the low
ADC calibration for performed. reference calibration
230 Temp1 ADC
230 temperature 2 Reset button is for sensor 1 with a
not calibrated
sensor1 is not pressed in the ADC precision resistor of
calibrated calibration page from 100 ohm.
TS1
Redo the low

High value for the
ADC calibration for High value ADC
231 Temp1 ADC for sensor 1 with a
231 temperature calibration for TS1 is not
not calibrated precision resistor in
sensor1 is not performed.
the range of 125-
calibrated
150 ohm.
1 Temperature offset
Offset for calibration for TS1 is not
Redo the
234 TSens1 offset temperature performed.
234 temperature offset
not calibrated sensor1 is not 2 Temperature offset
calibration for TS1.
calibrated calibration for TS1 is out
of range (+/- 9°C)
1 Check / repair
Temperature 1 Wiring is defective
wiring
sensor2. Has a bad
26, 86, 26 TSens2 bad 2 Connections are 2 Check / repair
connection or is
27, 87 or no connection defective connections Calculations are
not connected at
all. 3 Replace Pt100-#2 stopped accept for
3 Pt100-#2 defective
probe Power and
Value of 1 Redo temperature attenuation
28 T Sens2 1 Temperature
temperature calibration from the
28, 88 value out of calibration went wrong.
TS2 sensor2 is out of calibration menu.
range
range. 2 See error 27 2 See error 27
The low ADC value

Low value calibration Redo the low
for the
222 T ADC for temperature sensor reference calibration
temperature Everything is
222 calibration out of 2 is outside of range for sensor 2 with a
calibration of updated
range should be within 5% of precision resistor of
sensor 2 is out of
135000 100 ohm.
range.

Redo the low
The resistance High value calibration
223 T ADC value for the high for temperature sensor
for sensor 2 with a
223 calibration out of ADC calibration of 2 is outside of range
precision resistor in
range temperature should be within
the range of 125-
sensor2 is wrong. 161500-214200
150 ohm.
The resistance
Resistance for low
226 T ADC value for the low Redo this calibration
reference should be
between 99 and 101
ohm
sensor2 is wrong.
The resistance
Resistance for high
227 T ADC value for the high Redo this calibration
reference should be
between 125±1.25 ohm
and 150±1.5 ohm
sensor2 is wrong.
1 Low value ADC

Low value for the calibration for TS2 is not Redo the low
ADC calibration for performed. reference calibration
232 Temp2 ADC
232 temperature 2 Reset button is for sensor 2 with a
not calibrated
sensor1 is not pressed in the ADC precision resistor of
calibrated calibration page from 100 ohm.
TS2
Redo the low

High value for the
ADC calibration for High value ADC
233 Temp2 ADC for sensor 2 with a
233 temperature calibration for TS1 is not
not calibrated precision resistor in
sensor1 is not performed.
the range of 125-
calibrated
150 ohm.
1 Temperature offset
Offset for calibration for TS2 is not
Redo the
235 TSens2 offset temperature performed.
235 temperature offset
not calibrated sensor2 is not 2 Temperature offset
calibration for TS2.
calibrated calibration for TS2 is out
of range (+/- 9°C)
Ultrasonic Sensor 1 (US1) codes

Replace electronics
according the board
Hardware failure
removal procedure
detected during All ultrasonic
40 USens1 from the update and
US1 40 obtaining of the Defective electronics measurements are
Hardware failure maintenance
liquid echo of stopped
manual.
ultrasonic sensor1.
Get the electronics
repaired.

Polynomial
The settings for
1 Minimum and 1 Check Cmin and calculations and
sound path and or
maximum speed setting Cmax in Liquid edit data to outputs are
minimum and
are too large or too menu of selected stopped. Data on
50 USens1 maximum sound
50 small. liquid. measurement page
settings problem speed are wrong
2 are still updated
for the liquid echo
of ultrasonic 2 Check the sound
2 The sound path is
sensor1. path in the US
wrong.
sensor menu
1 Check the sound
1 Sound path is set
path in the US
The settings for wrong Polynomial
sensor menu
start of receiving calculations and
2 Check the dead
51 USens1 the ultrasonic data 2 Dead time is set data to outputs are
51 time in the US
settings problem of the liquid echo wrong stopped. Data on
sensor menu
is set wrong for measurement page
ultrasonic sensor1. 3 Maximum speed is 3 Check Cmax in 2 are still updated
Liquid edit menu of
too large or too small
selected liquid.
1 Make sure there is
1 US-#1 is not in a liquid
a liquid
2 Check / repair
2 Wiring is defective
wiring
3 Check / repair
connections and
3 Connections are sensor diagnostics in
The attenuation of defective update and
the liquid echo is maintenance
65 USens1
bigger than the manual
65 value out of
maximum allowed
range 4 Check the probe
attenuation for
sensor1. for contamination
4 US-#1 contaminated
and clean if Handling for
necessary. ultrasonic errors of
5 Replace US-#1 the liquid echo are
5 US-#1 defective
probe identical.
6 Check Max. Speed calculations
6 Maximum attenuation
Attenuation in the are stopped.
is set wrong
sensor menu mA Outs are forced
low or high when
The attenuation of selected.
the liquid echo is Polynomials are
bigger than the only updated when
Same as for error 65 Same as for error 65 they are power/
maximum allowed
attenuation for attenuation based.
66 USens1 sensor1.
66
noise problem
Degas the liquid.

There is too much
Make sure the probe
noise in the liquid Too much gas bubbles
is installed according
echo of ultrasonic in liquid
to the instructions in
sensor1.
the manual
1 Minimum and 1 Check Cmin and

67 USens1 The amplitude of
maximum speed setting Cmax in Liquid edit
67,69 value out of the liquid echo
are too large or too menu of selected
range from ultrasonic
small. liquid.

sensor1 is too 2 Check the sound
2 The sound path is
high. path in the US
wrong.
sensor menu
The amplitude of
68 USens1 the liquid echo 1 Should generate error
68,70 value out of from ultrasonic 65 or 66. Therefore Contact factory
range sensor1 is too error handling is not ok
small.
1 Cmax in Liquid
1 Maximum speed
edit menu of
setting is too small.
selected liquid.
The liquid echo for
2 Check the sound
71 USens1 ultrasonic sensor1 2 The sound path is too
71 path in the US
settings problem is before the large
sensor menu
window.
3 Check the dead
3 Dead time is too great time in the US
sensor menu
1 Degas the liquid.

Make sure the probe
1 Too much gas bubbles
The wave form of in liquid
72 USens1 to the instructions in
72- the liquid echo for the manual
wave form
74 ultrasonic sensor1
problem
is not ok. 2 Check the probe
for contamination
and clean if
necessary.
Generic codes: Reference Echo + Interface Echo (RE+IE)
Replace electronics
Hardware failure according the board
detected during removal procedure
All ultrasonic
140 USens1 obtaining of the from the update and
140 Defective electronics measurements are
Hardware failure reference and maintenance
stopped
interface echo of manual.
ultrasonic sensor1. Get the electronics
repaired.
The settings for 1 Check Trigger

1 Trigger point RE is set
sound path and or point RE in the US
wrong. Polynomial
minimum and sensor menu
calculations and
maximum sound
150 USens1 data to outputs are
150 speed are wrong
settings problem 2 Check Trigger stopped. Data on
for the reference 2 Trigger point IE is set
point IE in the US measurement page
and interface echo wrong.
sensor menu 2 are still updated
of ultrasonic
sensor1.

The settings for
Polynomial
start of receiving
calculations and
the ultrasonic data
151 USens1 Same as for error data to outputs are
151 of the reference Same as for error 150
settings problem 150 stopped. Data on
echo is set wrong
measurement page
for ultrasonic
2 are still updated
sensor1.
Reference Echo codes
The attenuation of
the reference echo
165 USens1
is bigger then the Same as for error
165 value out of Same as for error 150
maximum allowed 150
range
attenuation for
sensor1.
Handling for
ultrasonic errors of
The amplitude of the reference echo
167 USens1 the reference echo are identical.
Same as for error
167,169 value out of from ultrasonic Same as for error 150 Speed calculations
150
range sensor1 is too are stopped and
high. ultrasonic
temperature
calculations are
The amplitude of stopped. mA Outs
168 USens1 the reference echo are forced low or
Same as for error
168,170 value out of from ultrasonic Same as for error 150 high when selected.
150
range sensor1 is too Polynomials
small. updated when they
are power/
attenuation based
and only if the
The reference
temperature is
171 USens1 echo for ultrasonic Same as for error
171 Same as for error 150 coming from Pt100.
settings problem sensor1 is before 150
the window.
The wave form of

172 USens1
172- the reference echo Same as for error
wave form Same as for error 150
174 for ultrasonic 150
problem
sensor1 is not ok.
Interface Echo codes The errors 185-190 will not be displayed

1 In process liquid with 1 Ignore the
185 USens1 high attenuation. notification
IE Note: signal too Except for dead
185 value out of
low 2 Check Trigger time calculations
range 2 Trigger point IE is set
point IE in the US everything is
wrong.
sensor menu updated.
186 USens1 IE Note: too much Same as for error
186 Same as for error 185
noise problem noise 185

187 USens1
187, IE Note: signal too Same as for error
value out of Same as for error 185
189 high 185
range
188 USens1
188, IE Note: signal too Same as for error
problem low Same as for error 185
190 low 185
signal
Ultrasonic Sensor 2 (US2) codes
Replace electronics
Hardware failure according the board
detected during removal procedure
All ultrasonic
60 USens2 obtaining of the from the update and
60 Defective electronics measurements are
Hardware failure reference and maintenance
stopped.
interface echo of manual.
ultrasonic sensor1. Get the electronics
repaired.
The settings for 1 Minimum and 1 Check Cmin and

Polynomial
sound path and or maximum speed setting Cmax in Liquid edit
calculations and
minimum and are too large or too menu of selected
data to outputs
103 USens2 maximum sound small. liquid.
103 assigned to US2 are
settings problem speed are wrong
2 Check the sound stopped. Data on
for the liquid echo 2 The sound path is
path in the US measurement page
of ultrasonic wrong.
sensor2 menu 2 are still updated.
sensor2.
1 Check the sound
1 Sound path is set
path in the US Polynomial
The settings for wrong
sensor2 menu calculations and
start of receiving
2 Check the dead data to outputs
104 USens2 the ultrasonic data 2 Dead time is set
104 time in the US assigned to US2 are
US2 settings problem of the liquid echo wrong
sensor2 menu stopped. Data on
is set wrong for
3 Check Cmax in measurement page
ultrasonic sensor2. 3 Maximum speed is
Liquid edit menu of 2 are still updated.
too large or too small
selected liquid.
1 Make sure there is
1 US-#2 is not in a liquid
a liquid Handling for
2 Check / repair ultrasonic errors of
2 Wiring is defective the liquid echo are
wiring
3 Check / repair identical.
connections and Speed calculations
3 Connections are sensor diagnostics in for channel 2 are
The attenuation of defective update and stopped. Only
the liquid echo is maintenance mA Outs are forced
105 USens2
smaller than the manual low or high when
105 value out of
maximum allowed selected if they are
range 4 Check the probe
attenuation for assigned to values
sensor2. for contamination from channel 2.
and clean if Polynomials which
necessary. have input from
5 Replace US-#2 channel 2 are only
5 US-#2 defective
probe updated when they
6 Check Max. are power/
6 Maximum attenuation
Attenuation in the attenuation based.
is set wrong
sensor menu

Degas the liquid.
There is too much
Make sure the probe
106 USens2 noise in the liquid Too much gas bubbles
106 is installed according
noise problem echo of ultrasonic in liquid
to the instructions in
sensor2.
the manual
1 Minimum and 1 Check Cmin and

The amplitude of maximum speed setting Cmax in Liquid edit
107 USens2 the liquid echo are too large or too menu of selected
107,109 value out of from ultrasonic small. liquid.
range sensor2 is too 2 Check the sound
high. 2 The sound path is
path in the US
wrong.
sensor2 menu
The amplitude of
108 USens2 the liquid echo 1 Should generate error
108,110 value out of from ultrasonic 85 or 86. Therefore Contact factory
range sensor2 is too error handling is not ok
high.
1 Cmax in Liquid
1 Maximum speed
edit menu of
setting is too small.
selected liquid.
The liquid echo for
2 Check the sound
111 USens2 ultrasonic sensor1 2 The sound path is too
111 path in the US
settings problem is before the large
sensor 2 menu
window.
3 Check the dead
3 Dead time is too great time in the US
sensor 2 menu
1 Degas the liquid.

Make sure the probe
1 Too much gas bubbles
The wave form of in liquid
112 USens2 to the instructions in
the liquid echo for the manual
112tm114 Wave form
ultrasonic sensor1
problem
is not ok. 2 Check the probe
for contamination
and clean if
necessary.
CS1 conductivity sensor 1
1 See manual for
1 ADC value is NOK conditions
Conductivity zero calibration
236 Cond. Zero
236 calibration is NOK
calibration NOK
or out of range. 2 Conductivity sensor is 2 check wire
not connected connection
Analyses of the
1 Make sure the
1 Conductivity value is concentrations are
CS1 Conductivity reference value is
out of range. stopped or cannot
237 Cond. ref. reference OK
237 be trusted.
calibration NOK calibration is NOK 2See manual for
or out of range. 2 ADC value is NOK conditions
calibration
238 Conductivity The value of the 1 Conductivity sensor is 1 Check wires

238
out of range conductivity probe not connected connection

is outside
specifications. 2 Conductivity of 2 Check technical
process liquid is out of specifications of the
specified range conductivity sensor
3 Check repair probe

3 Conductivity probe is according the
defective maintenance and
update manual.
RHO Ultrasonic sensor 1 density error
1 Density calibration 1 Read the model

Ultrasonic sensor has gone wrong specific manual Readings based
195 USensor1
RHO 195 1 sg is out of on density cannot
SG out of range 2 Check if the
range. 2 Probe is out of be trusted
processline is
liquid
completely filled
8.2 Normal operating values
Note: The following does not apply for model 9690.
The probe attenuation which is displayed on measurement page 2 should have a value lower than
40dB in clear liquid, if not the probe has to be cleaned or replaced.
In deionised water the sound speed should be according the table in the appendix (chapter 11).
If this is not the case the temperature should be calibrated according §6.2.1.
If the problem still exists then perform a zero calibration according §6.2.2.
In the process the speed of sound should be higher than 400m/s and smaller than 3000m/s.
8.3 Logging for diagnostics & evaluation

During trouble shooting the factory or distributor might need life data from the process. This section
explains how to obtain that data ea. how to make a log file.
8.3.1 Preparations
IMPORTANT: Please read this section carefully before starting!
Question Answer
Make a log file over a period of time
The purpose
For remote trouble shooting (by factory)
When to do it When the factory / distributor recommends doing so.
When NOT to do it Not applicable
What must be done before Start real-time measurement
What is needed A USB memory stick

Storage of data in a safe location or sending data to
factory in a zipped file.

8.3.2 Memory Stick Logging
Slide the empty USB memory stick in the U-A
connector of the display
Check that the USB memory stick flashes,
indicating write/read actions
Wait until the continuous flashing stops (the display
is making folders on the USB stick, this should take
about 5 minutes)
Open “Logging” [Diagnostic]
[Information / Diagnostic] [Logging]
Enter the log sampling time
Press [Start logging]. The main measurement
page should indicate that the logging process is
active.
Figure 34: Logging page
Information: All main data, detail data, and a time tag are recorded in a temporary
file on the memory stick.
NOTE:
Never take out the memory stick without stopping the log process first
ALWAYS wait until the memory stick stops flashing (may take several minutes)
The data will be stored in the following folder: <USBSTICK>RHO\SAMPLE. In this folder,
you will find folders, indicating the day in the format YYMMDD. After day, the last data is
assembled in a .CSV file, and a new folder is created for the next day of logging. The .CSV
files can be easily opened with Excel. The stored .BIN files are temporary files and cannot
be opened, converted or used otherwise.
8.3.3 Procedure to stop logging on USB memory stick

Press “Stop & Save Log to USB”
Wait until the page “Saving data to USB” is disappeared from the screen, this may take up to
5 minutes
Remove USB stick and check the log data with Excel
8.4 Creating diagnostics files
8.4.1 Preparations
IMPORTANT: Please read this section carefully before starting!
Question Answer
1. Backup of factory and user settings
The purpose
2. For remote trouble shooting (by factory)
When the factory recommends doing so.
When to do it
Or when you wish to make a backup after adjusting
When NOT to do it Not applicable
What must be done before Not related to other procedures
What is needed A USB memory stick .

Storage of data in a safe location or sending data to
factory in a zipped file.

8.4.2 Backup settings procedure
After reading the previous section, you are ready to store the analyzer settings for backup.
1. Insert the USB stick in the USB jack of the display. This jack is located at the rear side, next
to the wired jacks.
NOTE: When the USB stick is blank, wait until the USB-stick stops flashing. This flashing
indicates that a folder structure is created on the USB stick.
2. Use the touch screen to change the access level.

3. Use pass word 0856 to get to level 3. This level you access to the store function.
4. Navigate to [Configuration] [Diagnostics]
►In this menu, press “Save Settings TO USB” (old name: Factory Diagn. to USB”)
NOTE: When a warning appears, do NOT continue and press the EXIT button. Please try
again, while making sure that you press the correct button.
5. Within 10 seconds, data is transferred.
►Take out the USB-memory stick
►Start the measurement sequence
6. Store all files which are located in the folder <USBdrive>:\RHO\RECIPE on your PC for later
use.
7. Send all these files (14) to the factory in case this was requested.

9. Optional extensions
9.1 Spare parts
9.1.1 Spares on analyzer
Below there are mentioned several spare parts mounted on the analyzer. The opposite
connectors mounted on the cable are related to the below picture and given in figure 3.
17
1 18
2
16
3
4
5 15
6
14
7
13
12
8
9 11 10
Figure 35: Analyzer board, all connectors, all models
# Spare part Article No. Subscription

1 Fuseholder 1.5 A ZEPC-FUSE-HOUDER Fuse holder 1.5 A
Voltslow
2 Fuseholder 3.15 A Slow ZEPC-FUSE-HOUDER Fuse holder 3.15 A
3 Mains power ZECO-CON-3P-P-1628150000 3-pins connector 24 DC/230 AC-
print, GN
4 DC Power ZECO-CON-3P-P-1628150000 3-pins connector 24 DC/230 AC-
print, GN
5 Power supply Touch ZECO-CON-3P-P-1597370000 3-pins connector-print, OR
Screen
6 Power supply Density ZECO-CON-3P-P-1597370000 3-pins connector-print, OR
Meter
7 Alarm Relays ZECO-CON-6P-P-1597400000 6-pins connector-print, OR
8 Conductivity Channel 1 ZECO-CON-7P-P-1597410000 7-pins connector-print, OR
9 Conductivity Channel 2 ZECO-CON-7P-P-1597410000 7-pins connector-print, OR
10 Temperature Input 2 ZECO-CON-5P-P-1597390000 5-pins connector-print, OR
11 Temperature Input 1 ZECO-CON-5P-P-1597390000 5-pins connector-print, OR
12 4-20 mA Input ZECO-CON-2P-P-1597360000 2-pins connector-print, OR
13 4-20 mA Output ZECO-CON-4P-P-1597380000 4-pins connector-print, OR
14 I2C Density meter ZECO-CON-3P-P-1597370000 3-pins connector-print, OR
15 Binary I/O ---- Not used
16 Liquid Select ZECO-CON-2P-P-1597360000 2-pins connector-print, OR
17 External Hold ZECO-CON-7P-P-1597410000 7-pins connector-print, OR
18 Cover sheet for analyzer ZEAS-PC-MUA2-F-COVER Cover for Rev. F and G analyzer

9.1.2 Fuses
1 Fuse 1.5A Voltslow ZEPC-FUSE-1.6A-5X20-ASLBC Fuse (T), 250V, 1.6A

2 Fuse 3.15A Slow ZEPC-FUSE-3.15A-5X20-FFHB Fuse (T), 250V, 3.15A
9.1.3 Weather proof housing and SPLIT-unit housing
1 3
1 Seperate Glands ZASM-WART-M20L- M20X1.5 PA Gland

1209200031
2 Nut for separate glands ZASM-WART-M20L-MOER M20X1.5 PA Nut for Glands
3 Complet set of packing ZASM-SAM1-AFDMODULES-
seals SET
4 Display for analyzer ZEAS-DISP-V806ITD-ETH Analyzer display, TFT, and
touchscreen w/ Ethernet option
9.2 Options
9.2.1 Ethernet Connection Module
The Ethernet Connection Module is needed to make a direct link to the analyzer. The optional
Ethernet adapter offers the user the opportunity to follow the operation of Rhosonics ultrasonic
process analyzers from their office computers without the need to physically be present at the
location of installation. This module is only available for displays which already have an Ethernet
connection possibility. Below you will find a table which contains displays and their Ethernet
availability.

Type Physical appearance Ethernet availability
V706MD Black housing, monochrome touch screen Ethernet adapter is available as option
V706CD Black housing, CSTN color touch screen Ethernet adapter is available as option
V806CD* Grey housing, CSTN color touch screen Ethernet is not available
V806CDi* Grey housing, CSTN color touch screen Ethernet adapter is installed
V806TD** Grey housing, TFT color touch screen Ethernet adapter is not available
V806TDi*** Grey housing, TFT color touch screen Ethernet adapter is installed
* Models sold in 2010
** TFT screens offer improved readability and viewing angle
***The TDi version is sold with analyzers shipped after March, 2011
Rhosonics can offer you a so called “module” mentioned above which contains a manual,
cable and USB-stick. The manual will guide you by instructing a couple of simple steps to
install complete the Ethernet application. Please point to your dealer for more information.
9.2.2 Firmware Update Kit

It could be that you would like to update your analyzer with the latest software. This could be needed
for better measurement.

Density analyzers for Slurries
Hybrid UMCS
9690 Series sensor with

UFTC cell
Hybrid Sensor Technology

Slurry Density Analyzer
Application Description
Rhosonics Analytical is proud to present the World’s At last a new and extremely reliable technology is
first non-intrusive inline density meter which available for the heavy industry to measure slurry
eliminates virtually all known disadvantages of existing and suspension density, inline, and with a minimum
systems on the market. of installation and maintenance effort. This means
that inline slurry monitoring is now feasible, without
The Rhosonics sensor of the Model 9690 Ultrasonic drawbacks of other inline density measurement
Density Analyzer employs only one, simple to install, methods, like nuclear and microwave systems.
flush mounted probe, which can be installed in a tank or
in an existing pipeline, or supplied with our UFTC Full The abrasive and corrosion resistant sensor material,
Bore Flow-Through cells, see picture. standard made of PEEK, well protects the internal
elements, which take care of transmitting and
receiving of a broad spectrum of ultrasonic sound
Benefits waves. Through the interaction of the sound between
the contact surface and the fluid to be measured,
the Model 9690 derives a complete image of the
 Very easy to install slurry density, without the need for the sound to
 Density measurement, independent of medium type pass through the fluid. From the imaged spectra,
 Fully inline, zero intrusion the system derives the density of your slurry,
 Very insensitive to gas bubbles regardless of composition, particle size and other
 Safe and durable probe system properties of the particles.
The Slurry Analyzer of the Future

Features Specifications
 High accuracy and reproducibility Method Hybrid Ultrasonic Spectroscopy
 Suitable for all types of slurries Density range Auto ranging 500...3000 g/l
 Maintenance free Temperature -10 ... 150 ºC
 Probe type available to suit your application Readout Density, temperature, SG
Accuracy +/- 0.005 (S.G.)
Response time <1 to 60 s (adjustable)
Analog outputs (2x) 4-20 mA (+/- 0.02%)
Industries Alarm outputs (2x) SPDT, Hi-Hi, Lo-Lo
RS-232 output Modbus through RS-232
The extremely powerful and revolutionary Ethernet TCP/IP Option (through web server)
technology allows inline fluid density Other options Profibus DP, Hart, PC link
measurement of any known slurry. Field tests Datalogging 1 year via USB memory stick
and experiments with a large variety of Housing /WPF Painted steel IP65, 300x320x120 mm
different compositions prove the Model 9690 /SPLT Split type for customer casing
analyzer's versatility. /PAN Panel mount
Terminal /MD 5,7“ Monochrome Touch Screen
 Limestone, Gypsum /CD 5,7” Colour Touch Screen
 Silicon carbide, Zirconium Carbonate Power /VAC 90-240 VAC, 10W
 Sand, Cement, Concrete, Dredging sludge /VDC 24VDC, 10W
 Ground Ore, Drilling Mud Probe UMP-079 PEEK Diver probe, 70x100 mm, with
 Cutting and Polishing Slurry 20”x 1 ¼” 316L Rod, 20 m Tefzel cable
Probe UFTW Flow-Through, Full Bore Wafer Sensor, 1-3”
Probe UMCS PEEK probe w/ flange, for installation in
pipe/tank, optional with weld adapter kit
Other solutions Cable /ST Standard cable, 7 mm, <150m
/HD Heavy duty cable <150m
Model 9690 measures the density of the slurry.
When liquor density is desired or in case you
wish to measure the suspended solids (TSS), or
all three parameters independently, then
Rhosonics Model 9670 with Full Bore Flow
Instalation
Through sensors is the instrument of your
Three methods probe installations are
choice.
available to suit your specific
Please advice the selection table on our
application.
website for the various models.
 UMP-079 diver/immersion probes are
available with different extension
length, for easy installation inside a
tank which is accessible from the top.
 UFTW Wafer sensor (1 to 3” pipes)
 UMCS type probe with weld adapter
Hybrid insertion can be installed permanently in any
probe for wafers tank or pipe size of 4” and larger.
Hybrid UMP-079
SS Diver probe
Continuous in-line monitoring & Process control

The Solution Specialist Contact & Distributors
The mission of Rhosonics Analytical is to provide Rhosonics Analytical BV

solutions for In-line concentration analysis of Midden Engweg 37A
virtually all existing process liquids, including NL-3882 TS PUTTEN
electrolytes, emulsions, suspensions and slurries. THE NETHERLANDS
For almost two decades, Rhosonics Analytical has Tel. +31 (0)341 370073
been focusing on the development and Fax.+31 (0)341 370074
employment of high-performance ultrasonic
technologies for in-line liquid concentration www.Rhosonics.com
analyzers and non-destructive testing of
materials.
Our products
 In-line concentration analyzers for virtually
all existing process liquids, including
solutions, electrolytes, emulsions,
suspensions, solids and slurries.
 Piezo composite transducers for Ultrasonic
NDT (Non-Destructive Testing) for new
inspection methods, including ToFD and
Phased Array.
The Solution Specialist

Rhosonics Analytical is The Solution Specialist
for the design, production and supply of
ultrasonic in-line process analyzers for liquids and
slurries in any industry world wide.
Worldwide distribution.
Please check our website for details.
v1.6
Rhosonics - The Solution Specialist
Code PUT11051-850-B
MANUAL UWC WAFER Date 24-03-2014
& UMCS SENSOR FOR DENSITY
METERS Rhosonics Analytical BV Author WdJ
Midden Engweg 37A, 3882TS Putten
Installation Manual
Rhosonics UWC wafers & UMCS sensors

For Rhosonics Density Meters
Table of contents
1. Purpose of this document ............................................................................................................................... 2

1.1 Document history ........................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 About this product ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 Applications ........................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.2 Brief description of the operation ......................................................................................................... 2
1.2.3 Applicable directives and standards...................................................................................................... 3
1.2.4 Usage in hazardous areas ...................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.5 General specifications ........................................................................................................................... 3
2. Installation of the wafer .................................................................................................................................. 4

2.1 Sealing material ............................................................................................................................................. 4
2.1.1 Non-gasketed sealing ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.2 Gasketed sealing ................................................................................................................................... 4
2.2 Bolting pattern and torque ............................................................................................................................ 4
2.3 Instructions..................................................................................................................................................... 4
3. Sensor installation & removal ......................................................................................................................... 6

3.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 Overview and electrical wiring of the sensor ........................................................................................ 6
3.1.2 Type Number Designation & Marking ................................................................................................... 6
3.1.3 Ratings ................................................................................................................................................... 7
3.2 Installation instructions.................................................................................................................................. 7
3.2.1 Sensor assembly .................................................................................................................................... 7
3.2.2 Sensor installation ................................................................................................................................. 7
3.2.3 Cover locking ......................................................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Maintenance & removal of the sensor ........................................................................................................... 8
3.3.1 Wear characteristics .............................................................................................................................. 8
3.3.2 Removal of the probe ............................................................................................................................ 8
3.3.3 Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 8
3.3.4 Calibration ............................................................................................................................................. 8
Page 1 PUT11051-850-UWC Wafer & UMCS146 Installation Manual-RevB.docx

Code PUT11051-850-B
1. Purpose of this document

This document describes the installation and maintenance of UWC wafers and sensors, which are intended
for density measurement in slurries.
1.1 Document history
Version Date Description of changes

A 24-3-2014 First release
B 16-4-2014 Typo errors corrected, added chapter for sensor installation
1.2 About this product
Rhosonics UWC wafers are used for installation of Rhosonics density sensors in piping systems for
slurries. Rhosonics wafers are made of UHMWPE, a thermoplastic. The Rhosonics UWC wafers can be
used for steel, rubber lined steel and plastic piping systems, however the engineering of the installation
should be in accordance with established design and engineering standards and procedures for plastic
piping systems.
Suitability for the intended service application should be determined by the installer and /or user prior to
installation in a steel or plastic piping system.
WARNING: Rhosonics Analytical DOES NOT RECOMMEND the use of thermoplastic piping products for
systems to transport or store compressed air or gases, or the testing of thermoplastic piping systems with
compressed air or gases in above-and-below-ground locations. The use of Rhosonics Analytical products
in compressed air or gas systems automatically voids Rhosonics Analytical warranty and their use against
our recommendation is entirely the responsibility and liability of the installer. Rhosonics Analytical will not
accept responsibility for damage or impairment of its products, or other consequential or incidental
damages caused by misapplication, incorrect assembly, and/or exposure to harmful substances or
conditions.
1.2.1 Applications
The Rhosonics Analytical UMCS series probes are Ultrasonic Probes, intended for use in abrasive and
corrosive liquids, including slurries. It is the sensing part of the ultrasonic density meter, of which the wafer
(UWC) is the process adapter. The electronic control unit is a Rhosonics 9600 series analyzer, which is
either standard or adapted to meet specific customer needs.
The target application is the continuous, qualitative measurements of synthetic, organic and mineral liquids.
1.2.2 Brief description of the operation

The wafer is installed in a pipe line between two flanges. The slurry to be measured flows through the pipe
line and the wafer. The wafer has a sensor port for the Rhosonics UMCS-146/200 Ultrasonic Sensor. This
sensor is flush with the pipe line.
The UMCS sensor generates ultrasonic waves into the slurry. The acoustic impedance of the slurry is a
function of the density of the slurry. The sensor temperature is measured simultaneously and may be
indicated and used to derive the SG from the measured density at the temperature of the process. The
controller is connected to the sensor and provides a density signal. The density is computed by dividing the
measured acoustic impedance by the sound velocity. The specific gravity is computed by dividing the
computed density by the density of water at the temperature of the process. Both density (at process
temperature) and SG are available as measured physical parameters.

Code PUT11051-850-B
1.2.3 Applicable directives and standards
A full list with directives and codes is given below.

97/23/EG Pressure Eqpt. Directive (PED directive)
CAUTION
Maximum temperature stated in design specification of UWC wafers made of UHMWPE is 90°C and the
maximum pressure is 25 bar . End user to ensure that a suitable safety device is fitted to prevent these
values from being exceeded.
The UWC wafer nor its sensor has been designed to be used as a support for a piping system. No
allowance has been made for thermal fatigue; it is assumed that heating and cooling of the machinery in
which the sensor is installed, will be carefully controlled to minimize thermal stress.
The sensor has not been designed to accommodate blast damage, flame impingement or any other
external hazard. Each sensor shall be routinely tested at the test pressure.
All operational hazards to be assessed by the end user.
WARNING
The UWC wafers must be installed by skilled personnel, familiar with the installation of plastic piping
components. In particular, the bolting procedure and the torque values are significantly lower than those
which are being used for bolting steel process equipment.
When the installation instructions are not followed, permanent damage to the wafer may be the result.
1.2.4 Usage in hazardous areas
This product is not intended for use in areas where explosive atmospheres, are likely to occur. Therefore it
may NOT be used in (ATEX or IECEx) classified Zones.
1.2.5 General specifications

Marking:
Process temperature -20…90 ⁰C.
Max. pressure: 16 bar
Model UWC-…
YR2012, S/N 12345
Electrical: Coax 75 ohm
For use with Rhosonics controllers only.
Mfr. Rhosonics Analytical BV, 3882TS Putten, Netherlands
Property Unit Norm. Min. Max

Operating pressure Bar(a) 1 0.05 25
Operating temperature ºC RT -20 90
Outside diameter (UMCS) mm 60 - -
Probe length (UMCS) mm 287 257 341
Wafer diameter (UWC) mm 230 1880
Wafer thickness (UWC) mm 60 - -
Material wafer (UWC) UHMWPE
Cable length mm 10 6 150
Cable diameter mm 6.8 5 9
Chemical compatibility & limitations of use

Hydrocarbons Please check chemical resistance table
Crude oil Not suitable
Sea water No limitations
NaCl (brine) No limitations
Acids > 20% Limited lifetime – consult factory
Acids < 20% No limitations
NaOH, KOH etc. No limitations
CAUTION
The client is responsible for ensuring that the process fluids will be compatible with UHMWPE

Code PUT11051-850-B
2. Installation of the wafer

Mating components should be checked to assure that tolerances and engagements are compatible. Do not
use any components that appear irregular or do not fit properly. Contact the appropriate manufacturer of
the component product in question to determine usability.
2.1 Sealing material
CAUTION
Sealing of plastic pipe joints and metal flanges to plastic components requires skills, knowledge and
experience. Special requirements may apply, depending on the piping system in which the wafer is
installed. When you are not familiar with the necessary procedures, please consult the responsible for the
original design of the piping system.
2.1.1 Non-gasketed sealing
HDPE flanges may be sealed without sealing material. The “memory” of pipe-grade HDPE makes it an
ideal flange face sealing surface. It becomes its own “gasket flange”, and seals well when un-marred and
torqued to meet or exceed the HDPE seating stress. When properly torqued, the joint between the wafer
(UMMWPE) and the mating flange becomes self gasketing.
Using this method, the specified seating torque needs to be applied, followed by a mandatory re-torque
applied 4-hours to 24-hours after completion of the initial torque application
2.1.2 Gasketed sealing
The second method, (gasketed), uses a low gasket seating bolt torque, applied to a soft elastomeric
gasket, for lower pressure applications (like landfill gas collection or use with torque-limited PVC or
fiberglass flanges), followed by the mandatory re-torque 4 hours to 24-hours after the initial torque.
Gasket material maybe either foamed PTFE, like Gylon, or an elastomer. For rubber lined pipes, additional
gaskets are not recommended
2.2 Bolting pattern and torque
CAUTION UNNECESSARY OVER TORQUING WILL DAMAGE THE WAFER.

Threads should be clean and well lubricated. Actual field conditions may require variations in these
recommendations.
2.3 Instructions
1. For connecting to HDPE flange surfaces, choose a method for sealing:

a. No gasket (the HDPE forms its own gasket, see previous sections)
b. Full faced elastomer gasket of 1/8” or 2 to 3 mm thick. Shore A hardness of 70 typ.
2. Carefully align the pipe sections with the wafer in order to avoid stress at the flange surface of the
wafer. In addition, the piping must be secured and supported to prevent movement which can
create excess stress and flange face damage.
3. Once the gasket is in place, align the bolt holes of the wafer and the adjacent flange faces
4. Lightly lubricate and insert all bolts and washers and loosely apply the nuts
5. Number all bolts for record purposes
6. Make sure the faces of the mating surfaces are flush against gasket (if present) prior to bolting
down the flanges.
7. Tighten the nuts by hand until they are snug. Establish uniform pressure over the flange faces by
tightening the bolts in 7 Nm (5 ft.-lbs.) increments up to the stated “Initial Minimum Torque” in the
table below, following a 180° opposing criss/cross sequence.
8. Reseat after 24 hours and record all final torque values
IMPORTANT: Care must be taken to avoid “bending” the flange when joining a UWC wafer to a “raised
face” flange.

Code PUT11051-850-B
In below table, torque values are given for Rhosonics wafers. These values assume the flanged joint
connects the wafer to a CLASS 150 flange, either steel or HDPE.
Diameter (inch) Initial Minimum Torque Final Maximum Torque

Nom.OD No.bolts ft.lbs Nm ft.lbs Nm
2 4 22 30 33 45
2.5 4 26 35 39 53
3 4 30 41 45 61
3.5 8 30 41 45 61
4 8 30 41 45 61
5 8 44 60 66 89
6 8 44 60 66 89
8 8 58 80 87 120
10 12 58 80 87 120
12 12 75 100 113 150
14 12 140 190 210 280
16 16 140 190 210 280
18 16 140 190 210 280
20 20 160 220 240 330
24 20 180 240 270 370
26 24 180 240 270 370
28 28 180 240 270 370
30 28 180 240 270 370
32 28 240 330 360 490
34 32 240 330 360 490
36 32 260 350 390 530
38 32 280 380 420 570
40 36 310 420 465 630
42 36 310 420 465 630
44 40 310 420 465 630
46 40 310 420 465 630
48 44 310 420 465 630
50 44 365 490 550 750
54 44 365 490 550 750
56 48 365 490 550 750
58 48 365 490 550 750
60 52 365 490 550 750
IMPORTANT
These estimated values are based on non-plated bolts and studs, using a K=0.16 for lightly greased bolts
and nuts.
Bolting must be done according to a criss-cross pattern. Reseating is necessary after 24 hours.
Reference: Bolt Torque For Polyethylene Flanged Joints TN-38/July 2011, www.plasticpipe.org

Code PUT11051-850-B
3. Sensor installation & removal
3.1 General
3.1.1 Overview and electrical wiring of the sensor
Sensor body
Body
terminal
head
Conduit entry D1
Figure 1: Ultrasonic sensor and cable connection
 The Sensor body is made of pure, non-filled PEEK, attached to the probe flange, which has 8 bolt
holes, for installation in Rhosonics UFTC type Flow-Through Cells or UWC type wafers.
 The Body terminal head is made of blue epoxy coated aluminium. Shape may differ from drawing
There are two joints in the weatherproof terminal head:

1. Protective Cover, threaded with O-ring seal
2. The Conduit Entry D1 for cable glands with M20x1.5 thread
The UMCS sensor has been designed and tested to IP68. All parallel and tapered threads are
manufactured in the standard accuracy class of manufacturing. When selecting cable glands and
fittings, suitable items must be chosen to meet the required ingress protection.
Only weatherproof glands with identical thread and IP rating may be fitted to the Conduit entry D1. If
non compatible components are fitted, it should be considered that the product no longer meets IP68
standards and should not be put into service as such.
3.1.2 Type Number Designation & Marking
Non ATEX sensors:
UMCS- Rx- xxTxx- xxxxx- xx xxx

Radius of curvature. 0 = flat
Flange diameter in mm, Flange thickness in mm
Flange & Wetted material. PK = PEEK
T-sensing (US=ultrasonic, T2 = Ext.
Pt100)
Probe length in mm or HT
(High Temperature full
PEEK sensor, non-ATEX)
Example: Probe Type Number UMCS-R0-60T09-316PK-US34

Ultrasonic Sensor; flange radius 60 mm, Thickness 9 mm; Material SS316, Wetted Material PEEK;
Temperature sensing by means of ultrasound, probe length from flange to tip=34 mm. The probe
length matches with the distance from the flange face of the wafer / spool to the inside diameter.

Code PUT11051-850-B
Example: Probe Type Number UMCS-R0-60T13-PK-USHT-146

Ultrasonic Sensor; flange radius 60 mm, Thickness 13 mm; Material PEEK; Temperature sensing by
means of ultrasound, High Temperature full PEEK sensor; Probe length = 146 mm. The probe length
matches with the distance from the flange face of the wafer / spool to the inside diameter.
Marking of type and serial number shall be either with permanently affixed tags on the cover or, when
this is not possible, with labels affixed to the probe body.
3.1.3 Ratings
The UMCS sensor is designed for high pressures and temperatures. The ratings are listed in below
table.
Flange code Flange Sensor material Pressure (MPa) Temperature (ºC)

material
60T09 PEEK PEEK 2.5 110* - 130*
60T13 PEEK PEEK 8.0 110* - 130*
60T09 AISI-316L PEEK 8.0 80
*NOTE: The sensor has been designed for continuous service at 110 ⁰C. Continuous exposure to a
temperature of 130 ⁰C reduces the useful lifetime of the sensor to 3 years, 1 year minimal.
Exposure to a temperature of 150 ⁰C maximum during a limited time span of 1hour has no detrimental
effect when this exposure is limited to once per week.
WARNING:
The maximum allowable temperature may be depending on the used material of the wafer.
3.2 Installation instructions
3.2.1 Sensor assembly
Double O-ring sealing

Flow-Through Spool or wafer with
(only one visible in this drawing)
sensor ports
Probe with
terminal head
8 pieces of M5x16 bolts with washer (AISI 316)

Flange on (both) cell ends
Figure 2: General mounting arrangement of UMCS sensor(s) in Flow-Through Cell / UWC wafer
3.2.2 Sensor installation

The probe flange has 8 bolt holes and is intended to be fitted in Rhosonics Model UFTC Flow-Through
Cells or wafers. The installation must be done with exclusively the following materials:
1.) Hex capped bolts, M5x20 mm with washers, AISI 316L, 8 pieces each.
2.) O-ring, Viton, 20.63x2.62 mm, 1 piece & O-ring, Viton, 29.82x2.62 mm, 1 piece
The user must ensure at all times that the used materials, in particular the O-rings, are
compatible with the process fluid characteristics. Viton O-rings are mainly intended for acid
applications. EPDM O-rings are recommended for non-acid applications.

Code PUT11051-850-B
IMPORTANT: Prior to installation, the following must be assured:

1.) The cell ports, to which the sensor is installed, must be thoroughly cleaned and inspected for
surface defects.
2.) The O-rings must be new and free of defects. In addition, the type of material of the O-rings must
be identified and verified for compatibility with the chemical and design temperature. Do not re-use
O-rings, otherwise proper leak tight sealing may be jeopardized.
3.) The grooves in the probe, in which the O-rings are seated, must be clean and inspected for
surface defects. Before inserting the O-rings, silicon grease may be applied to improve proper
seating during installation.
4.) The threaded pot holes in the flow-through cell as well as the bolts, must be clean and free of
damage.
During installation, the following must be assured:

1.) Insert the probe as straight as possible, with respect to the axial orientation of the probe port.
2.) The orientation of the conduit entry is preferably downwards and perpendicular to the pipe axis.
3.) Tighten the bolts with a standard metric hexagonal wrench (4.2 Nm).
4.) Do not cover the probe flange with insulation material.
3.2.3 Cover locking

Cover locking is by means of a stainless steel M3 x 8mm Hex socket grub screw. This screw is
tightened using a hexagonal key of dimensions 1.5mm AF.
NOTE: Ensure that the grub screw is fully retracted prior to tightening the head cover.
3.3 Maintenance & removal of the sensor

The UMCS series probes have been designed with long service life in mind. There are no components
which drift or wear, except for the probe surface, which can handle wear of approximately 3 to 5 mm.
Once worn out, it will not jeopardize pressure limits, however it will seize to function.
When wear is expected, the analyzer needs a simple calibration adjustment, to correct for offset. The
span of the calibration is not affected by wear.
3.3.1 Wear characteristics

As the probe is made of highly abrasion resistant PEEK, it will generally wear less than other materials
of the pipeline in which it is installed. In order to be on the safe side, the wear allowance of the piping
should be considered. When the corrosion/abrasion allowance for the piping is 3 to 5 mm, it is
recommended to replace the probe when the piping is replaced. When the corrosion allowance of the
piping is less than 3 mm, then there is no need to replace the probe.
3.3.2 Removal of the probe

1.) Follow all procedures and regulations, necessary for the removal of process components from a
pipe line.
IMPORTANT: Disconnect the probe connector from the instrument.
2.) Open the cover of the probe
3.) Unscrew the wires, loosen the cable gland.
4.) Remove the cable and protect the flying leads against damage, rain, fluids and dirt.
5.) Loosen all 8 bolts with a standard metric hexagonal wrench
6.) Remove the probe from the spool/wafer
3.3.3 Inspection
1.) Determine whether the probe needs to be replaced. (see “wear characteristics” above)
2.) When the probe needs to be replaced, dispose of the probe. If necessary, mark the probe that it is
no longer fit for use.
3.) When the probe can be re-used, please refer to the previous section(s) in this manual for
installation instructions. Note that the O-rings MUST be replaced at all times, once it has been in
use.
3.3.4 Calibration
Please refer to the service manual for general information and the calibration manual for specific instructions.

Belt Scales
Milltronics MSI and MMI
Operating Instructions 06/2012
Milltronics
Safety Guidelines
Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of others, and to protect the product and the connected
equipment. These warning notices are accompanied by a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
Qualified Personnel
This device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Qualified personnel are only authorized to install
and operate this equipment in accordance with established safety practices and standards.
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability:

 The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s agent.
 All new components are to be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments.
 Restrict repair to faulty components only.
 Do not reuse faulty components.
Warning: Cardboard shipping package provides limited humidity and moisture protection. This product can only function properly
and safely if it is correctly transported, stored, installed, set up, operated, and maintained.
This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to
several frequency based communications.
Note: Always use product in accordance with specifications.
Copyright Siemens AG 2012. All Rights Reserved Disclaimer of Liability
This document is available in bound version and in While we have verified the contents of this
electronic version. We encourage users to purchase manual for agreement with the instrumentation
authorized bound manuals, or to view electronic versions as described, variations remain possible. Thus we
designed and authored by Siemens Milltronics Process cannot guarantee full agreement. The contents of
Instruments. Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments will this manual are regularly reviewed and
not be responsible for the contents of partial or whole corrections are included in subsequent editions.
reproductions of either bound or electronic versions. We welcome all suggestions for improvement.
Technical data subject to change.
MILLTRONICS®is a registered trademark of Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments.
Contact SMPI Technical Publications European Authorized Representative

at the following address:
Technical Publications Siemens AG
Siemens AG Industry Sector
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments 76181 Karlsruhe
1954 Technology Drive, P.O. Box 4225 Deutschland
Peterborough, Ontario, Canada, K9J 7B1
Email: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
 For a selection of Siemens Milltronics level measurement manuals, go to:

www. siemens.com/processautomation. Under Process Instrumentation, select Level Measurement and then go to the manual
archive listed under the product family.
 For a selection of Siemens Milltronics weighing manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/processautomation. Under Weighing Technology, select Continuous Weighing Systems and then go to the
manual archive listed under the product family.
© Siemens AG 2012
Milltronics MSI and MMI Introduction 1
___________________
___________________
Safety notes 2
___________________
Description 3
Milltronics
___________________
Belt Scales
Milltronics MSI and MMI ___________________
Connecting 5
___________________
Commissioning 6
___________________
___________________
Technical data 8
___________________
Dimension drawings 9
06/2012
7ML19985CY04-04
Legal information
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Note the following:
WARNING
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG Order number: 7ML19985CY0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2012.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 07/2012 Technical data subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 5
1.1 The manual ....................................................................................................................................5
2 Safety notes............................................................................................................................................... 7
2.1 General safety instructions ............................................................................................................7
2.2 Installation in hazardous areas ......................................................................................................7
3 Description............................................................................................................................................... 11
4 Installing/Mounting................................................................................................................................... 13
4.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................13
4.2 Conveyor considerations .............................................................................................................13
4.2.1 Control gates................................................................................................................................14
4.2.2 Conveyor belting ..........................................................................................................................14
4.2.3 Head pulley ..................................................................................................................................14
4.2.4 Conveyor curvature......................................................................................................................17
4.2.5 Belt ploughs .................................................................................................................................18
4.2.6 Stacker conveyors .......................................................................................................................18
4.2.7 Conveyor trippers.........................................................................................................................18
4.2.8 Skirt boards and sealing strips.....................................................................................................19
4.3 Installation procedure...................................................................................................................21
4.3.1 Remove the idler..........................................................................................................................22
4.3.2 Remove the idler foot plate and modify the idler frame at both ends ..........................................23
4.3.3 Idler mounting: .............................................................................................................................23
4.3.4 Position the weighbridge..............................................................................................................27
4.3.5 Position the scale.........................................................................................................................27
4.3.6 Release the shipping stops..........................................................................................................28
4.3.7 Align and level the idlers ..............................................................................................................28
4.3.8 Check alignment ..........................................................................................................................29
5 Connecting .............................................................................................................................................. 33

Operating Instructions, 06/2012, 7ML19985CY04-04 3
Table of contents
6 Commissioning ........................................................................................................................................ 35
6.1 Calibration ................................................................................................................................... 35
6.2 Test Load .................................................................................................................................... 35
6.3 Balancing..................................................................................................................................... 35
6.4 Final calibration ........................................................................................................................... 36
6.5 Zero calibration ........................................................................................................................... 36
6.6 Span calibration .......................................................................................................................... 36
6.7 Material test................................................................................................................................. 37
6.8 Re-rating...................................................................................................................................... 37
7 Service and maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 39
7.1 Maintenance................................................................................................................................ 39
7.2 Replacing a load cell ................................................................................................................... 40
7.3 Spare parts.................................................................................................................................. 40
7.4 Technical support........................................................................................................................ 41
8 Technical data ......................................................................................................................................... 43
8.1 Metrological characteristics......................................................................................................... 46
9 Dimension drawings ................................................................................................................................ 49
9.1 Outline dimensions...................................................................................................................... 49

4 Operating Instructions, 06/2012, 7ML19985CY04-04
Introduction 1
Note
The Siemens weighing system is to be used only in the manner outlined in this manual,
otherwise protection provided by equipment may be impaired.
 It is your responsibility to read this manual before installing and starting up any
component of the weighing system to which the belt scale is being applied.
1.1 The manual

This manual covers only belt scale installation, operation, and maintenance procedures.
Integrator and speed sensor operating instructions are available for download from our website:
Siemens weighing (http://www.siemens.com/weighing)
Follow these operating instructions for quick, trouble-free installation, and maximum accuracy
and reliability of your weighing system.
We always welcome suggestions and comments about manual content, design, and
accessibility. Please direct your comments to:
Technical publications (mailto:techpubs.smpi@siemens.com)

Introduction
1.1 The manual

Safety notes 2
2.1 General safety instructions
CAUTION
Correct, reliable operation of the product requires proper transport, storage, positioning and
assembly as well as careful operation and maintenance. Only qualified personnel should
install or operate this instrument.
Note
Alterations to the product, including opening or improper repairs of the product, are not
permitted.
If this requirement is not observed, the CE mark and the manufacturer's warranty will expire.
2.2 Installation in hazardous areas
WARNING
Equipment used in hazardous areas must be Ex-approved and marked accordingly. It is

required that the special conditions for safe use provided in the manual and in the Ex
certificate are followed!
Hazardous area approvals
Note
The nameplate shown is a typical example. Please check the nameplate on your device for
your specific device configuration.

Safety notes
Nameplate
MILLTRONICS MSI BELT SCALE

R
7ML1234-56789-0ABC-D
Serial No.: GYZ / S1234567
Input : 15 V Max. Class II, Div 1, Gr. E, F, G
Enclosure : IP65 Class III
Ambient Temp. : ñ 40 C to +75 C IEC Ex SIR 08.0071X
Ex tD A21 IP65 T90 C
II 2 D
Ex tD A21 IP65 T90 C
0518 N117 SIRA 06ATEX9305X
Do Not Disassemble When An Explosive Dust Atmosphere Is Present
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc., Peterborough
Made in Canada
The device is approved for use in hazardous area and has the following approval:
● II 2D Ex tD A21 IP65 T90ºC
WARNING
Make sure the hazardous area approval is suitable for the environment in which the
device will be installed.

Safety notes
Instructions specific to hazardous area installations

(Reference European ATEX Directive 94/9/EC, Annex II, 1/0/6)
The following instructions apply to equipment covered by certificate number
SIRA06ATEX9305X:
1. For use and assembly, refer to the main instructions.
2. The equipment is certified for use as Category 2D equipment and may be used in hazardous
zones 21 and 22 with dusts.
3. This equipment has a maximum surface temperature of T90 °C (in a 75 °C ambient). Refer to
the applicable code of practice for selection of this equipment with respect to specific dust
ignition temperatures.
4. The equipment is certified for use in an ambient temperature range of -40 °C to 75 °C.
5. If the conductors of the attached cable are terminated in the hazardous area, appropriate
explosion protection (’Ex’) methods should be used that meet the requirements of European
Directive 94/9/EC for Group II, Category 2D.
6. The equipment has not been assessed as a safety related device (as referred to by Directive
94/9/EC Annex II, clause 1.5).
7. Installation and inspection of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel
in accordance with the applicable code of practice.
8. Repair of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with
the applicable code of practice.
9. Components to be incorporated into or used as replacements in the equipment shall be fitted
by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s documentation.
10.If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is the
responsibility of the user to take suitable precautions that prevent it from being adversely
affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not compromised.
Aggressive substances: e.g. acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals or solvents that
may affect polymeric materials.
Suitable precautions: e.g. regular checks as part of routine inspections or establishing from
the material’s data sheet that it is resistant to specific chemicals
11.Product marking shall include the warning: Do not disassemble when an explosive dust
atmosphere is present.

Safety notes
Special conditions for safe use

The ’X’ suffix to the certificate number relates to the following special condition(s) for safe use:
● The equipment shall be installed such that the supply cable is protected from mechanical
damage. The cable shall not be subjected to tension or torque. If the cable is to be
terminated within an explosive atmosphere, then appropriate protection of the free end of the
cable shall be provided.
● The equipment shall be bonded to earth by the use of approved type metal conduit and
conduit fittings.
● The apparatus shall be supplied with an input voltage not exceeding 15V.
● This assessment does not cover any additional mechanical parts (e.g. conveyor belt, idlers)
that are added during installation which may require an ignition hazard assessment as
specified in EN 13463-1:2001 Annex B.

Description 3
Milltronics MSI and MMI belt scales
Milltronics MSI belt scale is a heavy-duty, high-accuracy single idler scale for process and load-
out control.
Milltronics MMI belt scale is a heavy-duty, high-accuracy multiple idler scale for critical process
and load-out control. The MMI uses two or more Milltronics MSI belt scales in succession. The
scales are designed to be inserted into belt conveyors for continuous weighing of dry bulk solids.
Each MSI includes:
● one weighbridge with two load cells
● Siemens Milltronics test weight(s), ordered separately
The addition of an idler (supplied and installed by the customer) to the weighbridge completes
the weighing assembly. The load cells provide an electronic signal, proportional to load, which is
fed to the Siemens integrator. Thus, weighing is accomplished without interrupting the process
and without affecting the process material.
The MMI is used where conveyor belt speeds or belt loading characteristics result in conditions
that necessitate extending the weighing time beyond the capabilities of a single idler scale. It is
also well suited for applications that require higher sustained accuracies, such as production
control, inventory accountability or where certification for trade purposes is required.
The MSI/MMI is an accurate and repeatable force sensor. Its performance is ultimately
dependent upon the conveyor system and the quality of the installation and alignment.

Description

① idler mount bracket

② test weight bar
③ idler clip
④ idler frame
⑤ scale mounting bracket
⑥ dynamic beam
⑦ static beam
Figure 3-1 Overview of belt scale system
Note
Conduit and cable arrangement may differ from example shown
Principle of operation
Belt scales work with an existing belt conveyor and the selected Siemens integrator. As material
moving along the conveyor belt travels over the belt scale, it exerts a force proportional to the
material load through the suspended idler to the load cells.
The belt scale reacts only to the vertical component of the applied force. The resulting
movement in each load cell is sensed by its strain gauges. When the strain gauges are excited
by voltage from the electronic integrator, they produce an electrical signal proportional to weight,
which is then returned to the integrator. The vertical movement of the load cells is limited by the
positive overload stop incorporated into the load cell design.

4.1 Introduction
CAUTION
Installation shall be performed only by qualified personnel in accordance with local

governing regulations.
The belt scale is shipped from the factory as a single unit packed in a container for protection.
The weighbridge must be removed from its package and inspected for physical damage. Be sure
the conveyor design meets the installation requirements for the belt scale.
Note
 Use only approved conduit and conduit fittings or cable glands to maintain NEMA or IP
rating, as applicable.
 For hazardous area installations, use only approved junction boxes, metal conduit and
conduit fittings or cable glands. Adapter supplied for ½" NPT to M20x1.5. Discard if using
½" NPT conduit fitting.
 Adjust conveyor stringers to be rigid, straight, parallel to, and square with the belt line in
the area of the scale installation.
 Adjust pulleys to ensure that the conveyor belt tracks straight and centrally from the head
to the tail pulley.
 The idler to be used on the scale and at least the next two approach and retreat idlers,
must be of the same style and manufacturer, and in good condition.
Prepare the site in accordance with the Siemens drawing(s) or by referring to the Belt Scale
Applications Guidelines (7ML19985GA01).
4.2 Conveyor considerations

The ideal placement of the belt scale depends on the conveyor system. This section provides
guidelines to determine belt scale placement.

Installing/Mounting
4.2.1 Control gates

The installation of a material feed control gate or similar device improves uniform flow of
material.

① Control gate
② Uniform material distribution
③ Belt scale
Note
Ensure steady and uniform material loading to the belt at or near the same speed as the
conveyor belt.
4.2.2 Conveyor belting

Variations in the number of belt plies, the cover thickness and the type and number of splices in
a given belt cause considerable change in the weight per unit length of the belt. During the
course of zero calibrations, belt scales average the weight of the belt over one complete circuit
of the belt. Large deviations from the average adversely affect the zero calibrations.
4.2.3 Head pulley
Note
Use caution when installing a scale in a short conveyor, or when locating the scale near the
head pulley.
Since head pulleys are flat faced, and carrying idlers are generally troughed, the belt profile must
change from troughed to flat in a short distance. To accommodate this, the conveyor
manufacturer designs a built-in vertical displacement of the head pulley above the top of the
center roll of the adjacent idler.

Installing/Mounting
● Insert idlers of decreasing trough angles between the head pulley and the normal run of
idlers or there will be a considerable amount of stress on the belt edges and the idlers
adjacent to the head pulley. The stress is transmitted to the scale.
Note
On conveyors with 20° trough idlers throughout, a minimum of two fixed 20° idlers must
be located between the scale idler and the head pulley.

① 20º idlers
② Minimum 3 idler spaces
③ Head pulley
④ Belt scale
Note
On conveyors with 35° trough idlers throughout, a minimum of two 35° and one 20°
retreat idlers must be located between the scale and the head pulley.

① 35º idlers
③ Head pulley
④ 20º idler
⑤ 35º idlers
⑥ Belt scale
Note
On conveyors with 45° trough idlers throughout, a minimum of two 45°, one 35°, and one
20° retreat idlers must be located between the scale and the head pulley.

Installing/Mounting

7

① 45º idlers
③ Head pulley
④ 20º idler
⑤ 35º idler
⑥ 45º idlers
⑦ Belt scale
Note
The vertical displacement of the head pulley relative to the adjacent retreat idler is
normally in excess of that which is acceptable for belt scale installations.
When locating the scale close to the head pulley, a maximum of 13 mm (½") vertical
displacement between the top of the head pulley and the top of the center of the adjacent
roll is allowed.

① 13 mm (1/2") maximum
② Head pulley
③ 20° idler, center roll

Installing/Mounting
4.2.4 Conveyor curvature

Vertical curvature (varied heights on one belt) is common in conveyor design, but creates
difficulties for belt scales if not dealt with correctly. The curvature, whether concave (internal) or
convex (external), disturbs the idler alignment, if the scale is installed in the area of curvature.
The concave curve tends to lift the belt off of the idlers in the area of curvature as belt loading
decreases, adversely affecting the zero calibration.
Note
Avoid locating the scale within the tangents of scale curvature.
Concave

① Minimum 12 m (40 ft)

② Tangents
③ Belt scale
Convex

① Minimum 6 m (20 ft)

② Minimum 12 m (40 ft)
③ Tangents
④ Belt scale

Installing/Mounting
4.2.5 Belt ploughs

Belt ploughs or any conveyor or material control device that changes the profile of the carrying
belt in or near the scale area is not recommended. These devices can negatively affect the belt
scale idler alignment and usually create drag on the belt which the scale senses as a material
force of load.
Note
Do not install the scale within 9 m (30 ft) of belt ploughs or similar devices that contact the
material or belt.
4.2.6 Stacker conveyors

Any conveyor that is not a permanent structure, which varies in its incline, elevation or profile is
not considered a good installation for an accurate belt scale. A belt scale can be used effectively
in this conveyor type, but requires special setup. Siemens offers an inclinometer for use with
variable incline conveyors.
4.2.7 Conveyor trippers
Note
On a conveyor with a tripper car, locate the scale under the recommendations for vertical
curves, but with the tripper fully retracted.

Installing/Mounting
4.2.8 Skirt boards and sealing strips

Sometimes it is necessary to extend the infeed skirt boards and sealing strips the full length of
the conveyor. This can create problems in weighing accuracy if the sealing strips exert excess
force when contacting the belt and indirectly upon the idlers, especially where pinching occurs.
The situation adversely affects the zero calibrations.

① Skirt board
② Sealing strip dragging along belt
③ Pinching can occur here
④ Idler
Note
If possible, remove skirting in scale area. If not, adjust skirting so sealing strip does not put
excess force on the belt or allow pinching of material.

Installing/Mounting
Load cell handling

The MSI and MMI belt scales are designed for medium- to high-capacity operation and use two,
four, or six load cells. The load cells are protected by shipping stops to keep them from moving,
but the scale still needs to be handled with care to avoid damage. Shipping stops are 107 mm
(4.25") metal strips with holes at each end for screws. One screw holds the stop to the dynamic
section and the other screw holds the stop to the static section.
● When handling the belt scale during installation and set-up, make sure the stops remain in
place. Always re-install both shipping stops during maintenance or prolonged shutdown.

① 'A' screws
② shipping stop
③ 'B' screws

Installing/Mounting
4.3 Installation procedure

The following precautions should be observed when handling the scale.
● Do not pry on the idler, its mountings, or the cells directly.
● Do not stand or lean on the scale.
● Avoid shock from blows of a hammer when trying to position the scale during installation.
● Do not lift the scale by its idler.
● Do not lift the scale by the idler mounting brackets.
Note
For general safety and best system performance, the belt scale must be grounded
through the conveyor and the conveyor must be grounded to earth.
CAUTION
Arc welding
Use extreme caution when arc welding in the area of the belt scale. Ensure that no welding
current can flow through the belt scale. Welding currents passing through the scale can
functionally damage the load cells.
The MSI installation has eight stages:

1. Remove the idler(s)
2. Remove the idler foot plate
3. Idler mounting
4. Position the weigh bridge
5. Position the scale
6. Release the shipping stops
7. Align and level the idlers
8. Check alignment

Installing/Mounting
4.3.1 Remove the idler

1. Remove the idler(s) from the desired location on the conveyor.

Installing/Mounting
4.3.2 Remove the idler foot plate and modify the idler frame at both ends
Remove the idler foot plate and modify the idler frame at both ends of the idler as shown below.
Occasionally, in less than 5% of applications, the combined effect of the idler rework and the
clamping of the scale at its inboard mounting position could result in abnormal idler vibration.
When this occurs, gusset plate reinforcements should be welded to the idler at the joints of the
horizontal spine and the outer vertical leg member.

12.7 mm
(0.5")

① Before
② After
③ See notes below
Note
Idler support
Cut idler support as shown to allow clearance when the load is applied. Maximum allowable
idler spine for fitting to a belt scale is:
 457 to 1346 mm (18 to 53") belt width options:
– angled spine: 75 mm (3"), channel spine: 120 mm (4.75")
– angled spine 100 mm (4.5"), channel spine 170 mm (6.75")
– angled spine 125 mm (5"), channel spine 184 mm (7.25")
4.3.3 Idler mounting:

The belt scale is usually installed in conveyors employing conventional rigid structure idlers.
Within this type of idler, construction will vary depending on the manufacturer and the
application. The idler depicted in this section uses an angle iron spine. The following images
depict alternate idler construction and tips on how they should be modified and installed.

Installing/Mounting
● Troughed idler with channel spine
1 2
7 4
6 5
① Customer's idler
② Gusset reinforcement if required
③ 12.7 mm (0.5")
④ 100 mm (4")
⑤ After
⑥ Before
⑦ Foot pads welded to idler spine
Figure 4-1 Idler modification
① Idler clip
② Customer bolts (4 places)
Figure 4-2 Idler installation

Installing/Mounting
● Troughed idler with pipe spine
1 2
7 4
6 5
② Gusset reinforcement if required
③ 12.7 mm (0.5")
④ 100 mm (4")
⑤ After
⑥ Before
⑦ Foot pads welded to idler spine

① Welded to idler pipe (be sure idler is square to scale & conveyor frame)
② Idler clip
③ Customer bolts (4 places)

Installing/Mounting
● Flat idler
1 2
5 4
② In most applications standard conveyor manufacturers' brackets cannot be used,
replacement brackets (as shown) are needed.
③ 12.7 mm (0.5")
④ After
⑤ Before
① Idler clip
② Customer bolts (4 places)

Installing/Mounting
4.3.4 Position the weighbridge

Position the weigh bridge so that the center of the scale idler is centered between the adjacent
approach and retreat idlers. The belt scale is designed to use the existing holes in the stringer
and should not require further drilling.
Ensure that the scale is centered and square to the stringers and idler, and remove the idler
clamping brackets.

① Belt travel
② Location of removed idler
③ Test weights
④ Belt scale
Note
Clearance
Be sure there is sufficient clearance between the return belt, MSI, and its test weight (when
used during the calibration procedure).
4.3.5 Position the scale

Position the scale so that it is centered and square to the stringer. Mount the modified idler so
that it is centered on the scale using the idler clips (on large models, 1676 to 2438 mm (66 to
96") belt widths, the idler needs to be welded directly to the mount). Tighten all mounting
hardware.
Position the scale so that the large arrow on the scale mounting brackets is pointing in the
direction of belt travel.

① Conveyor stringer
② Idler clips

Installing/Mounting
4.3.6 Release the shipping stops

Release the shipping stops in order to free the weighing mechanism. Loosen screws 'A' and
rotate both shipping stops inward until the underside slots slide around the screws 'B'. Tighten
screws 'A' to secure in place.

① 'A' screws
② Shipping stop
③ 'B' screws
4.3.7 Align and level the idlers

Align and level the idlers properly by shimming the scale idler, the two approach idlers, and the
two retreat idlers, until they are within ± 0.8 mm (1/32") of each other. Check that the idlers are
centered and squared to the conveyor during the shimming process.

90°
C

A2 A1 R1 R2
① Belt travel
② Center of idlers to be in line
③ Idlers must be square to stringers
④ Alignment of idlers A2 to R2 to be within ± 0.8 mm (1/32")

Installing/Mounting
Note
Idler alignment
Precise idler alignment is very important to achieve maximum accuracy of the weighing
system. Misaligned idlers will result in unwanted forces being applied on each idler in the
weighing area, causing calibration and measurement errors.
4.3.8 Check alignment

Use a good quality wire or string to check for alignment. The wire or string must be able to
withstand sufficient tension in order to eliminate any sag. Adjust shims so that all rolls of the A2
through to the R2 idlers are in line within ± 0.8 mm (1/32").
$
$
5
5
① MSI with modified idler

② Wire or string (for alignment)
Although the accepted tolerance for idler alignment is ± 0.8 mm (1/32"), the scale-mounted idler
should never be lower than the adjacent idlers. Establishing good idler alignment is the most
important part of the installation procedure. Scale accuracy is directly affected by alignment.

Installing/Mounting
General installation requirements for legal for trade applications
General Conveyor Requirements

1. Conveyor must be permanent construction.
2. The conveyor length shall be no longer than 300 m (1000 ft) nor shorter than 12 m (40 ft)
from head to tail pulley.
3. The scale must be so installed, that the nearest weigh idler of the scale is at least 6 m (20 ft)
or 5 idler spaces (whichever is greater) from either the end of the loading skirt boards or the
head pulley.
4. Scale must be mounted a minimum of 12 m (40 ft) from the tangent point of any curves in the
conveyor.
5. The conveyor must have a Gravity type take-up and that take-up must be operating properly.
6. Material feed to conveyor to be uniform and centered.
7. The conveyor belting shall be no heavier than is required for normal use.
8. The conveyor must be covered on the top and sides for a minimum distance of 9 m (30 ft)
each end of the scale idlers. The side covers must extend down to a distance approximately
0.6 m (2 ft) below the return belt line.
9. The electrical power to the scale equipment must remain on at all times.
10.The belt scale integrator must be located under cover, preferably in a control room, not
subject to direct sunlight.
Stringer Requirements
1. The belt scale shall be located close to a vertical conveyor support where conveyor stringer
deflection is near zero.
2. The conveyor Stringers in the scale area should be strong enough to limit relative deflection
to 0.8 mm (1\32").
3. The conveyor stringers must be straight to prevent any belt tracking problems.

Installing/Mounting
Conveyor Idler Requirements

1. The user must purchase and Install "eleven (11) Scale Quality Idlers", one idler to be
mounted on the MSI Weighbridge and 5 idlers to be mounted on the approach and retreat
side of the MSI Weighbridge.
The user must purchase and Install "twelve (12) Scale Quality Idlers", two idlers to be
mounted on the MMI Weighbridge and 5 idlers to be mounted on the approach and retreat
side of the MMI Weighbridge.
2. Do not use Scale Service Idlers: use Scale Quality Idlers.
3. Scale Quality idlers are high tolerance idlers; for roll run-out, frame deflection and alignment;
whereas Scale Service idlers are choice idlers selected from a production run having the best
roll run-out.
4. The scale-mounted idlers must be modified to ensure proper clearance for belt scale
deflection.
5. The Scale Quality Idlers must be aligned to within 0.5 mm (0.02") of each other or better.
6. The belt must remain in contact with all three rollers (center and wing rollers) of each of the
aligned idlers.
7. Idlers must be flat, 20 or 35 degree trough angle. All idlers on the conveyor must have the
same trough angle.
8. Training idlers must not be located within 18 m (60 ft) of any scale weigh idler.
See also
Metrological characteristics (Page 46)

Installing/Mounting

Connecting 5

① Load cell A (C, E)

② Load cell B (D, F)
③ See detail 'A'
④ Detail 'A'
Load MSI, MMI-2, Integrator (MSI) Integrator (MMI- Integrator (MMI- SIWAREX FTC
cell MMI-3 2) 3)
A RED + EXC + EXC + EXC + EXC
BLK - EXC - EXC - EXC - EXC
WHT - SIG 'A' - SIG 'A' - SIG 'A' - SIG
GRN + SIG 'A' + SIG 'A' + SIG 'A' + SIG
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
B RED + EXC + EXC + EXC + EXC
BLK - EXC - EXC - EXC - EXC
WHT - SIG 'B' - SIG 'B' - SIG 'B' - SIG
GRN + SIG 'B' + SIG 'B' + SIG 'B' + SIG
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
C RED + EXC + EXC + EXC
BLK - EXC - EXC - EXC
WHT - SIG 'C' - SIG 'A' - SIG
GRN + SIG 'C' + SIG 'A' + SIG
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

Connecting
Load MSI, MMI-2, Integrator (MSI) Integrator (MMI- Integrator (MMI- SIWAREX FTC
cell MMI-3 2) 3)
D RED + EXC + EXC + EXC
BLK - EXC - EXC - EXC
WHT - SIG 'D' - SIG 'B' - SIG
GRN + SIG 'D' + SIG 'B' + SIG
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
E RED + EXC + EXC
BLK - EXC - EXC
WHT - SIG 'A' - SIG
GRN + SIG 'A' + SIG
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD
F RED + EXC + EXC
BLK - EXC - EXC
WHT - SIG 'B' - SIG
GRN + SIG 'B' + SIG
SHIELD SHIELD SHIELD

Commissioning 6
6.1 Calibration
After all parts of the weighing system (belt scale, speed sensor, integrator) have been properly
installed and connected, the weighing system and integrator must be calibrated. The calibration
is initially done using the test weight(s), however material tests are recommended to achieve the
greatest accuracy. Refer to the integrator operating instructions for programming and calibration
details and for information about material tests. All operating instructions are available for
download at our web site:
Siemens weighing (http://www.siemens.com/weighing)
6.2 Test Load

The test load value is required for calibration of the integrator. Enter the calculated value into the
associated programming parameter of the integrator in kilograms per meter or pounds per foot.
The test load value is calculated as follows:
Test load = Total weight of all test weights

Idler spacing (Kgm ) or (lbft)
6.3 Balancing
For applications where the conveyor loading does not repeat in locations across the width of the
belt, such as side-to-side loading, electronic balancing of the two load cells is recommended.
Balancing is completed during the initial start-up, but should be repeated if either load cell is
reinstalled or replaced. Refer to the associated integrator manual to complete the balancing
procedure.
When balancing load cells, apply a test weight to the extreme sides (side A or B), as required.

Commissioning
6.4 Final calibration
6.4 Final calibration

Program the belt scale integrator as suggested in its operating instructions and with parameters
suitable for the application. With programming complete, the system is ready for calibration.
A zero calibration can be performed after sufficient running of the conveyor allows the belt to
limber up and take its natural formation. A zero calibration is performed in accordance to the belt
scale integrator operating instructions with the conveyor running empty.
6.5 Zero calibration

Perform the zero calibration as described in the Calibration section of the integrator operating
instructions.
After the completion of the zero calibration, a span calibration, as described in the belt scale
integrator operating instructions, can be performed with the test weight(s) applied. Be sure to
stop the conveyor when applying and removing the test weight.
6.6 Span calibration

1. The span reference (test load) is simulated using the test weight.
2. Apply the calibration test weight(s) to the scale.
① MSI
② Test weights
3. Perform the span calibration as described in the Calibration section of the integrator
operating instructions.
After completing the span calibration, remove the test weights and store them. With a successful
zero and span calibration, and with the test weight(s) removed from the belt scale, the belt scale
system is ready for operation. Ensure that the belt scale integrator is left in RUN mode.

Commissioning
6.7 Material test
6.7 Material test

To achieve accuracy with respect to absolute values, perform material tests. Refer to the
associated integrator manual for instructions on material testing.
6.8 Re-rating
Consult your Siemens representative for any significant change in rate, speed, and/or idler
spacing from original design specifications to maintain proper design parameters.

Commissioning
6.8 Re-rating

7.1 Maintenance
Keep the weighing equipment clean. Accumulation of material between the fixed support frame
(static) and the live frame (dynamic) as well as around each load cell could affect the scale
accuracy.
Periodically check the alignment of the stringers and idlers in the weighing area.
When a problem arises in the conveyor, it is possible that the scale will be affected. Therefore,
periodic conveyor maintenance is important to proper scale operation which should include:
● lubrication of all pulleys and idlers
● proper belt tracking and training
● proper belt cleaning and scraping
● proper take up operation
● proper material feeding and spillage control
You can observe the integrity of the load cells by performing zero and span calibrations. If the
zero and span deviations display a continuous unidirectional drift or the system cannot be
calibrated for any apparent mechanical reason, the load cells may be damaged.

7.2 Replacing a load cell
7.2 Replacing a load cell
CAUTION
Re-install the shipping stops during maintenance or any other time when protection of the
load cells is required.
1. Install both shipping stops

2. Support the belt and weighing idler from above or below.
3. Remove load cell hardware from the dynamic (moving) parts.
4. Remove load cell hardware from the static support.
5. Remove the existing load cell from the belt scale.
6. Replace with a new load cell fastening to static support then dynamic (moving structure).
7. Remove belt and idler support.
8. Release both shipping stops
9. Adjust idler alignment if necessary.
10.Perform balance, zero, and span calibrations.
7.3 Spare parts

The only spare part recommended for the belt scale is the load cell. Refer to the load cell
nameplate for the proper size and model number. Re-balance any load cell that has been
replaced.


If you have any technical questions about the device described in these Operating Instructions
and do not find the right answers, you can contact Customer Support:
● Via the Internet using the Support Request:
Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
● Via Phone:
– Europe: +49 (0)911 895 7222
– America: +1 423 262 5710
– Asia-Pacific: +86 10 6475 7575
Further information about our technical support is available on the Internet at
Technical support (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/16604318)
Service & Support on the Internet

In addition to our documentation, we offer a comprehensive knowledge base online on the
Internet at:
Service & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
There you will find:
● The latest product information, FAQs, downloads, tips and tricks.
● Our newsletter, providing you with the latest information about your products.
● Our bulletin board, where users and specialists share their knowledge worldwide.
● You can find your local contact partner for Industry Automation and Drives Technologies in
our partner database.
● Information about field service, repairs, spare parts and lots more under "Services."
Additional Support
Please contact your local Siemens representative and offices if you have additional questions
about the device
Find your contact partner at:
Local contact person (http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner)


Technical data 8
Accuracy
MSI ± 0.5% or better of totalization over 20 to 100% operating range

MMI-2 ± 0.25% or better of totalization over 20 to 100% operating range
MMI-3 ± 0.125% or better of totalization over 25 to 100% operating range
Accuracy subject to: On factory approved installations the belt scale systems totalized weight will be
within the specified accuracy when compared to a known weighed material test sample. The test
rate must be within the specified range of the design capacity and held constant for the duration of
the test. The minimum material test sample must be equivalent to a sample obtained at the test
flow rate for three revolutions of the belt or at least ten minutes running time, whichever is greater.
Load Cell
construction 17-4 PH (1.4568) stainless steel construction with

304 (1.4301) stainless steel cover,
316 (1.4401) stainless steel cover (optional)
degree of protection IP67 rated
excitation 10 V DC nominal, 15 V DC maximum
output 2 mV/V excitation at rated load cell capacity
non-linearity 0.02% of rated output
hysteresis 0.02% of rated output
non-repeatability 0.01% of rated output
capacity maximum ranges: 50, 100, 250, 500, 750, 1000,
1250, 1500 lb
overload 150% of rated capacity
ultimate 300% of rated capacity
temperature -18 to +65 °C (0 to +150 °F) compensated
-40 to +75 °C (– 40 to +167 °F) operating range,
up to +175 °C (+347 °F) (optional)

Technical data
Belt width
18 to 96" in 1" increments to suit CEMA sizes, equivalent to 500 to 2000 mm in metric sizes
refer to Outline Dimensions
Belt speed
up to 5 m/s (984 fpm)
Contact Siemens application engineering for consideration of higher belt speeds.
Capacity
up to 12000 t/h (13200 STPH) at maximum belt speed
Conveyor incline
± 20° from horizontal, fixed incline

up to ±30° with reduced accuracy
Conveyor idler
flat to 35°
up to 45° with reduced accuracy
Idler diameter
50 to 180 mm (2 to 7")
Idler spacing
0.5 to 1.5 m (1.5 to 5.0 ft)

Technical data
Interconnection (to integrator)
< 150 m (500 ft) 18 AWG 6 conductor shielded cable

> 150 m (500 ft) to 300 m (1000 ft.) 20 AWG 8 conductor shielded cable
Approvals
US/Canada FM/CSA Class II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G and Class

III
Europe ATEX II 2D, Ex tD A21 IP65 T90 ºC
CE
International IECEx Ex tD A21 IP65 T90 ºC
Australia C-TICK
Russia GOST-R
GOST-R Ex
Metrology approvals
MSI, MMI:
Canada Measurement Canada
Europe MID
International OIML
China CMC
MSI only:
South Africa SABS
Russia Pattern Approval
MMI only:
USA NTEP
See also
Outline dimensions (Page 49)

Technical data
8.1 Metrological characteristics
Metrological characteristics
UK/0126/0047
R50/1997-GB1-09.01
Accuracy class ≥1
Temperature range -10 °C to +40 °C
Flowrate Qmax: Application dependent
Qmin: 20% of Qmax
Belt speed Vmax: 0.2 to 5.0 m/sec
Totalization scale interval ≥ 0.001 t
Weigh length L: Application dependent
Climactic environment Condensing, open
Electromagnetic environment E1 and E2, electromagnetic disturbances likely
found in other industrial locations
Table 8- 1 Technical requirements
BW500 certification switch When the switch is set for certification, editing of
the parameter values, span calibrations and
totalizer resets are denied.
Conveyor interlock If the weighing instrument is switched off or
ceases to function, the conveyor belt shall stop,
or visible or audible indication shall be given.
Out-of-range indication A continuous audible or visible indication shall be
given when the flowrate is above the maximum or
below the minimum value.
A continuous audible or visible indication shall be
given when the belt speed is above the maximum
or below the minimum value.
Totalization indicating devices Remote totalization indicating devices shall be
permanently engaged.
Printing devices Printing devices shall be permanently engaged.

Technical data
Installation conditions The frame support of the conveyor shall be

constructed in a rigid manner.
The belt shall always be supported on the
weighing rollers.
Belt cleaning devices shall have no significant
effect on the results.
The product being weighed shall travel in the
same direction and speed as the belt.
Sealing Components that are not intended to be adjusted
or removed by the user shall be fitted with a
sealing device.

Technical data

Dimension drawings 9
9.1 Outline dimensions
Note
2
1

Dimension drawings
9.1 Outline dimensions
Conveyor ③ ⑤ ② ① ④ weight
belt width Mounting minimum
scale width drop in width
18" 27" 23.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 82 lbs.
(457 mm) (686 mm) (591 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (37 kg)
20" 29" 25.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 85 lbs.
(508 mm) (737 mm) (641 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (39 kg)
24" 33" 29.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 90 lbs.
(610 mm) (838 mm) (743 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (41 kg)
30" 39" 35.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 99 lbs.
(762 mm) (991 mm) (895 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (45 kg)
36" 45" 41.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 107 lbs.
(914 mm) (1143 mm) (1048 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (49 kg)
42" 51" 47.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 116 lbs.
(1067 mm) (1295 mm) (1200 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (53 kg)
48" 57" 53.25" 9.5" 5.5" 7" 125 lbs.
(1219 mm) (1448 mm) (1353 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (57 kg)
54" 63" 59.25" 12" 8" 7" 175 lbs.
(1372 mm) (1600 mm) (1505 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (178 mm) (79 kg)
60" 69" 65.25" 12" 8" 7" 193 lbs.
(1524 mm) (1753 mm) (1657 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (178 mm) (88 kg)
66" 75" 71.25" 12" 8" 8" 229 lbs.
(1676 mm) (1905 mm) (1810 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (203 mm) (104 kg)
72" 81" 77.25" 12" 8" 8" 247 lbs.
(1829 mm) (2057 mm) (1962 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (203 mm) (112 kg)
Other widths available. Sizes are from 18 to 96" (457 to 2438 mm) in 1" (25.4 mm) increments. All
sizes are nominal.


www.siemens.com/level
www.siemens.com/weighing
Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice

Industry Sector 7ML19985CY04 Rev. 4.1
1954 Technology Drive
P.O. Box 4225 © Siemens AG 2012
Peterborough, ON
Canada K9J 7B1 *7ml19985CY04*
email: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com Printed in Canada
© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
Milltronics belt scales
■ Overview ■ Benefits
Milltronics MSI belt scale
• Outstanding accuracy and repeatability
• Unique parallelogram style load cell design
• Fast reaction to product loading; capable of monitoring fast
moving belts
• Rugged construction
• SABS approval (South Africa), OIML, MID, and Measurement
Canada
Milltronics MMI belt scale
• Exceptional accuracy and repeatability
• Unique parallelogram style load cell design
• Suitable for uneven or light product loading
• Capable of monitoring fast moving belts
• Low cost of ownership
Milltronics MSI is a heavy-duty, high accuracy full-frame single
• NTEP, OIML, MID, and Measurement Canada approved
idler belt scale used for process and load-out control.
Idler not included with belt scale.
■ Application
Milltronics MSI belt scale
Milltronics MSI belt scale provides continuous in-line weighing
on a variety of products in primary and secondary industries. It
4 is proven in a wide range of tough applications from extraction
(in mines, quarries and pits), to power generation, iron and steel,
food processing and chemicals. The MSI is suitable for monitor-
ing such diverse products as sand, flour, coal, or sugar.
The MSI’s proven use of parallelogram-style load cells results in
fast reaction to vertical forces, ensuring instant response to
product loading. This enables it to provide outstanding accuracy
and repeatability even with uneven loading and fast belt speeds.
Operating with Milltronics BW500, SIWAREX WT241, WP241, or
FTC microprocessor-based integrators, the MSI provides indica-
tion of flow rate, totalized weight, belt load, and belt speed of
bulk solid materials. A speed sensor monitors conveyor belt
speed for input to the integrator.
Milltronics MMI is a heavy-duty, high accuracy multiple idler belt
scale used for critical process and load-out control. The MSI is installed in a simple drop-in operation and may be
Idler not included with belt scale. secured with just four bolts. An existing idler is then attached to
the MSI dynamic beam. With no moving parts, maintenance is
kept to a minimum, with just periodic calibration checks
required.
Milltronics MMI belt scale
Milltronics MMI belt scale consists of two or more MSI single
idler belt scales installed in series. It provides high accuracy
continuous in-line weighing on a variety of products in primary
and secondary industries. The MMI system is proven in a wide
range of tough applications from extraction to power generation,
iron and steel, food processing and chemicals. The MMI is suit-
able for monitoring such diverse products as fertilizer, sand,
grain, flour, coal, or sugar.
The MMI’s proven use of parallelogram-style load cells results in
fast reaction to vertical forces, ensuring instant response to
product loading. This enables it to provide outstanding accuracy
and repeatability even with uneven or light loading, short idler
spacing and fast belt speeds. Operating with Milltronics BW500
integrator (for custody transfer applications), the MMI provides
indication of flow rate, total weight, belt load and belt speed of
bulk solids materials on a belt conveyor. A speed sensor moni-
tors conveyor belt speed for input to the integrator.
The MMI is installed in a simple drop-in operation and may be
secured with just eight bolts and existing idler sets, secured to
the dynamic beam. With no moving parts, maintenance is kept
to a minimum, with just periodic calibration checks required.
4/20 Siemens WT 10 · Update 06/2017

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
■ Design
Mounting
Note: Force
Idler clip
}
Idler frame
Scale mounting
Weigh
bracket
bridge
Idler mounting bracket Dynamic beam
Test weigh bar
Static beam
MSI/MMI mounting
4
Applications with 2 MSIs (MMI-2) Applications with 3 MSIs (MMI-3)
450 ... 1 525 mm (18 ... 60 inch) idler spacing 450 ... 1 525 mm (18 ... 60 inch) idler spacing
Belt travel Belt travel
Mounting (two or more MSI units)
Siemens WT 10 · Update 06/2017 4/21

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
■ Technical specifications 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)
Milltronics MSI/MMI Milltronics MSI/MMI
Mode of operation Load cell
Measuring principle Strain gauge load cells measuring Construction Stainless steel construction with
load on belt conveyor idler(s) 304 (1.4301) stainless steel cover.
Typical application Strain gauge protection:
polybutadiene
• MSI Control in fractionated stone blend-
ing tunnels Degree of protection IP67, IP65 on hazardous approved
models
• MMI Custody transfer
Cable length 3 m (10 ft)
Measurement accuracy
Note: to calculate installation cable
Accuracy1) length subtract 3 048 mm
• MSI ± 0.5 % or better of totalization (120 inch) from the "A" dimension
over 20 … 100 % operating range Excitation 10 V DC nominal,
• MMI-2 (2 idler) ± 0.25 % or better of totalization 15 V DC maximum
over 20 … 100 % operating range Output 2 ± 0.002 mV/V excitation (nomi-
• MMI-3 (3 idler) ± 0.125 % or better of totalization nal) at rated load cell capacity
Note: available with system over 25 … 100 % operating range Non-linearity and hysteresis 0.02 % of rated output
specification option D only Non-repeatability 0.01 % of rated output
• Repeatability ± 0.1 %
Capacity
Medium conditions • Maximum ranges 25, 50, 100, 250, 500, 750, 1 000,
Material temperature -50 … +175 °C (-58 … +347 °F) 1 250, 1 500, 2 000 lb
• Overload 150 % of rated capacity, ultimate
4
Belt design
300 % of rated capacity
Belt width • 18 … 96 inch in CEMA sizes
Temperature • -50 … +75 °C (-58 … +167 °F)
• Equivalent to 500 … 2 000 mm in operating range
metric size • -40 … +65 °C (-40 … +150 °F)
• Refer to dimensions section compensated
• -10 ... +40 °C (14 ... 104 °F)
Belt speed Up to 5 m/s (1 000 fpm)2)
compensated on trade approved
Capacity Up to 12 000 t/h (13 200 STPH) at versions
maximum belt speed. Please con-
Weight See dimensions section
tact a Siemens representative for
higher rates. Interconnection wiring • < 150 m (500 ft) 18 AWG
(to integrator, per MSI) (0.75 mm²) 6 conductor shielded
Conveyor incline • ± 20° from horizontal,
cable
fixed incline
• > 150 m … 300 m
• Up to ± 30° with reduced
(500 ft … 1 000 ft) 18 … 22 AWG
accuracy3)
(0.75 … 0.34 mm²), 8 conductor
Idlers shielded cable
Idler profile • Flat to 35° Approvals • CSA/FM Class II, Div. 1,
• Up to 45° with reduced Groups E, F, G and Class III
accuracy3) • ATEX II 2D Ex tD A21 IP65 T90 ºC
Idler diameter 50 … 180 mm (2 … 7 inch) • EAC Ex
• IECEx Ex tD A21 IP65 T90 ºC
Idler spacing 0.5 … 1.5 m (1.5 … 5.0 ft)
• CE, RCM, EAC, KCC, CMC, RTN
Metrology approvals Measurement Canada, MID, OIML,
SABS4), NTEP5), STAMEQ, GOST
1) Accuracy subject to: on factory approved installations the belt scale system’s totalized weight will be within the specified accuracy
when compared to a known weighed material test sample.
The test rate must be within the specified range of the design capacity and held constant for the duration of the test.
The minimum material test sample must be equivalent to a sample obtained at the test flow rate for three revolutions of the belt
or at least ten minutes running time, whichever is greater.
2) Contact Siemens application engineering (factorysupport.smpi@siemens.com) for consideration of higher belt speeds.
3) Review by Siemens application engineer required.
4) MSI only.
5) MMI only.

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
■ Selection and ordering data Article No. Article No.

Milltronics MSI belt scale 7MH7122- Milltronics MSI belt scale 7MH7122-
A heavy-duty, high-accuracy single idler belt scale 77777 - 77777 A heavy-duty, high-accuracy single idler belt scale 77777 - 77777
for process and load-out control. for process and load-out control.
For Milltronics MMI belt scale system, two or more For Milltronics MMI belt scale system, two or more
MSI belt scales are required. Calibration weights MSI belt scales are required. Calibration weights
are required and ordered as separate items. are required and ordered as separate items.
Click on the Article No. for the online 59 inch, 'A' = 68 inch (1 727 mm) BW
configuration in the PIA Life Cycle Portal.
60 inch, 'A' = 69 inch (1 753 mm) CA
Scale construction
61 inch, 'A' = 70 inch (1 778 mm) CB
Standard duty, CE, RCM, EAC, KCC  1
62 inch, 'A' = 71 inch (1 803 mm) CC
Hazardous Duty  2
63 inch, 'A' = 72 inch (1 829 mm) CD
CSA/FM Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G and Class
III, ATEX II 2D, EAC Ex, IECEx, CE, RCM 64 inch, 'A' = 73 inch (1 854 mm) CE
Belt width and 'A' dimension 65 inch, 'A' = 74 inch (1 880 mm) CF
18 inch, 'A' = 27 inch (686 mm)  AA 66 inch, 'A' = 75 inch (1 905 mm) CG
19 inch, 'A' = 28 inch (711 mm)  AB 67 inch, 'A' = 76 inch (1 930 mm) CH
20 inch, 'A' = 29 inch (737 mm)  AC 68 inch, 'A' = 77 inch (1 956 mm) CJ
21 inch, 'A' = 30 inch (762 mm)  AD 69 inch, 'A' = 78 inch (1 981 mm) CK
22 inch, 'A' = 31 inch (787 mm)  AE 70 inch, 'A' = 79 inch (2 007 mm) CL
23 inch, 'A' = 32 inch (813 mm)  AF 71 inch, 'A' = 80 inch (2 032 mm) CM
24 inch, 'A' = 33 inch (838 mm)  AG 72 inch, 'A' = 81 inch (2 057 mm) CN
4
25 inch, 'A' = 34 inch (864 mm)  AH 73 inch, 'A' = 82 inch (2 083 mm) CP
26 inch, 'A' = 35 inch (889 mm)  AJ 74 inch, 'A' = 83 inch (2 108 mm) CQ
27 inch, 'A' = 36 inch (914 mm)  AK 75 inch, 'A' = 84 inch (2 134 mm) CR
28 inch, 'A' = 37 inch (940 mm)  AL 76 inch, 'A' = 85 inch (2 159 mm) CS
29 inch, 'A' = 38 inch (965 mm)  AM 77 inch, 'A' = 86 inch (2 184 mm) CT
30 inch, 'A' = 39 inch (991 mm)  AN 78 inch, 'A' = 87 inch (2 210 mm) CU
31 inch, 'A' = 40 inch (1 016 mm)  AP 79 inch, 'A' = 88 inch (2 235 mm) CV
32 inch, 'A' = 41 inch (1 041 mm)  AQ 80 inch, 'A' = 89 inch (2 261 mm) CW
33 inch, 'A' = 42 inch (1 067 mm)  AR 81 inch, 'A' = 90 inch (2 286 mm) DA
34 inch, 'A' = 43 inch (1 092 mm)  AS 82 inch, 'A' = 91 inch (2 311 mm) DB
35 inch, 'A' = 44 inch (1 118 mm)  AT 83 inch, 'A' = 92 inch (2 337 mm) DC
36 inch, 'A' = 45 inch (1 143 mm)  AU 84 inch, 'A' = 93 inch (2 362 mm) DD
37 inch, 'A' = 46 inch (1 168 mm)  AV 85 inch, 'A' = 94 inch (2 388 mm) DE
38 inch, 'A' = 47 inch (1 194 mm)  AW 86 inch, 'A' = 95 inch (2 413 mm) DF
39 inch, 'A' = 48 inch (1 219 mm)  BA 87 inch, 'A' = 96 inch (2 438 mm) DG
40 inch, 'A' = 49 inch (1 245 mm)  BB 88 inch, 'A' = 97 inch (2 464 mm) DH
41 inch, 'A' = 50 inch (1 270 mm)  BC 89 inch, 'A' = 98 inch (2 489 mm) DJ
42 inch, 'A' = 51 inch (1 295 mm)  BD 90 inch, 'A' = 99 inch (2 515 mm) DK
43 inch, 'A' = 52 inch (1 321 mm)  BE 91 inch, 'A' = 100 inch (2 540 mm) DL
44 inch, 'A' = 53 inch (1 346 mm)  BF 92 inch, 'A' = 101 inch (2 565 mm) DM
45 inch, 'A' = 54 inch (1 372 mm)  BG 93 inch, 'A' = 102 inch (2 591 mm) DN
46 inch, 'A' = 55 inch (1 397 mm)  BH 94 inch, 'A' = 103 inch (2 616 mm) DP
47 inch, 'A' = 56 inch (1 422 mm)  BJ 95 inch, 'A' = 104 inch (2 642 mm) DQ
48 inch, 'A' = 57 inch (1 448 mm)  BK 96 inch, 'A' = 105 inch (2 667 mm) DR
49 inch, 'A' = 58 inch (1 473 mm)  BL Load cell capacity
50 inch, 'A' = 59 inch (1 499 mm)  BM Not specified1)  0
51 inch, 'A' = 60 inch (1 524 mm)  BN 25 lb (11.3 kg)  9 L1A
52 inch, 'A' = 61 inch (1 549 mm)  BP
53 inch, 'A' = 62 inch (1 575 mm)  BQ
54 inch, 'A' = 63 inch (1 600 mm)  BR
55 inch, 'A' = 64 inch (1 626 mm) BS
56 inch, 'A' = 65 inch (1 651 mm) BT
57 inch, 'A' = 66 inch (1 676 mm) BU
58 inch, 'A' = 67 inch (1 702 mm) BV

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales

Milltronics MSI belt scale 7MH7122- Milltronics MSI belt scale 7MH7122-
A heavy-duty, high-accuracy single idler belt scale 77777 - 77777 A heavy-duty, high-accuracy single idler belt scale 77777 - 77777
for process and load-out control. for process and load-out control.
For Milltronics MMI belt scale system, two or more For Milltronics MMI belt scale system, two or more
MSI belt scales are required. Calibration weights MSI belt scales are required. Calibration weights
are required and ordered as separate items. are required and ordered as separate items.
50 lb (22.7 kg)  1 System specification
100 lb (45.4 kg)  2 Standard MSI and MMI  A
250 lb (113.4 kg)  3 NTEP Certified MMI3)4)5) B
500 lb (226.8 kg)  4 OIML/MID Certified4)5) C
750 lb (340.2 kg)  5 MSI for MMI-3 ± 0.125 % accuracy6) D
1 000 lb (453.6 kg)  6
Further designs Order code
1 250 lb (567 kg)2)  7
2) Please add "-Z" to article no. and specify order
1 500 lb (680.4 kg)  8 code(s).
2 000 lb (907.2 kg)  9 L1B Stainless steel tag [69 x 38 mm (2.7 x 1.5 inch)],  Y15
Measuring-point number / identification
Fabrication (max 27 characters), specify in plain text.
C5-M rated polyester painted mild steel  1 1 Application Eng. reference number  Y31
Electro-galvanized mild steel: (max. 15 characters), specify in plain text.
18 ... 29 inch (457.2 ... 736.6 mm) 1 2 Manufacturer's test certificate:  C11
According to EN 10204-2.2
30 ... 41 inch (762 ... 1 041.4 mm) 1 3
Factory calibration certificate  Y33
4
42 ... 53 inch (1 066.8 ... 1 346.2 mm) 1 4
OIML/MID approval additional nameplate Y77
54 ... 65 inch (1 371.6 ... 1 651 mm) 1 5 (submit application data with order)5)
66 ... 77 inch (1 676.4 ... 1 955.8 mm) 1 6 NTEP approval additional nameplate Y78
(submit application data with order)5)
78 ... 89 inch (1 981.2 ... 2 260.6 mm) 1 7
Extended cable length (For spare part pricing and A08
90 ... 96 inch (2 286 ... 2 438.4 mm) 1 8 part number consult factory)
Load cell with 15 m (49.2 ft) cable length
Stainless steel 304 (1.4301), bead blast finish [standard is 3 m (9.8 ft)]
(1 ... 6 µm, 40 ... 240 µin) for belt width scales:
High temp load cell (For spare part pricing and part T50
18 ... 29 inch (457.2 ... 736.6 mm) 2 1 number consult factory)
Load cell suitable for high temp up to 175 °C (347 °F)
30 ... 41 inch (762 ... 1 041.4 mm) 2 2 [standard is 75 °C (167 °F)]7)
42 ... 53 inch (1 066.8 ... 1 346.2 mm) 2 3 Load cell with 316 (1.4401) cover (For spare part H53
54 ... 65 inch (1 371.6 ... 1 651 mm) 2 4 pricing and part number consult factory)
Load cell cover is constructed from 316 (1.4401)
66 ... 77 inch (1 676.4 ... 1 955.8 mm) 2 5 stainless steel [standard is 304 (1.4301)]
78 ... 89 inch (1 981.2 ... 2 260.6 mm) 2 6 FDA compliant version K01
Conduit and fittings designed for food applications
90 ... 96 inch (2 786 ... 2 438.4 mm) 2 7 conforming to FDA/USDA standards
Stainless steel 316 (1.4401), bead blast finish Operating instructions Article No.
(1 ... 6 µm, 40 ... 240 µin) for belt width scales:
MSI Manuals
18 ... 29 inch (457.2 ... 736.6 mm) 3 1
• English 7ML1998-5CY04
30 ... 41 inch (762 ... 1 041.4 mm) 3 2
• German A5E32007535
42 ... 53 inch (1 066.8 ... 1 346.2 mm) 3 3
Note: the operating instructions should be
54 ... 65 inch (1 371.6 ... 1 651 mm) 3 4 ordered as a separate item on the order.
66 ... 77 inch (1 676.4 ... 1 955.8 mm) 3 5 All literature is available to download for free, in a
range of languages, at
78 ... 89 inch (1 981.2 ... 2 260.6 mm) 3 6
http://www.siemens.com/weighing/documentation
90 ... 96 inch (2 786 ... 2 438.4 mm) 3 7
 We can offer shorter delivery times for configurations designated with
C5-M rated polyester painted mild steel (compati-  4 1 the Quick Ship Symbol 
ble with MWL or flat bar weight calibration system)
Galvanized, for belt width scales:
(compatible with MWL or flat bar weight system)
18 ... 29 inch (457.2 ... 736.6 mm) 4 2
30 ... 41 inch (762 ... 1 041.4 mm) 4 3
42 ... 53 inch (1 066.8 ... 1 346.2 mm) 4 4
54 ... 65 inch (1 371.6 ... 1 651 mm) 4 5
66 ... 77 inch (1 676.4 ... 1 955.8 mm) 4 6
78 ... 89 inch (1 981.2 ... 2 260.6 mm) 4 7
90 ... 96 inch (2 786 ... 2 438.4 mm) 4 8

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales

Spare parts 100 lb (45.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B1H53
Flat bar/MWL retrofit kit 7MH7723-1FW 250 lb (113.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B2H53
Conduit replacement kit 7MH7723-1NA 500 lb (226.8 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B3H53
FDA conduit replacement kit 7MH7723-1QL 750 lb (340.2 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B4H53
MWL calibration weight support brackets 7MH7723-1JT 1 000 lb (453.6 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B5H53
galvanized
Load cell, high temperature up to 175 °C (347 °F)
Stainless steel load cells
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8T50
Standard load cell with 304 (1.4301) stainless steel
cover 50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0T50
50 lb (22.7 kg) 7MH7725-1AC 100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1T50
100 lb (45.4 kg) 7MH7725-1AD 250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2T50
250 lb (113.4 kg) 7MH7725-1AE 500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3T50
500 lb (226.8 kg) 7MH7725-1AF 750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4T50
750 lb (340.2 kg) 7MH7725-1AG 1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5T50
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) 7MH7725-1AH 1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6T50
1 250 lb (567 kg) 7MH7725-1EA 1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7T50
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) 7MH7725-1EB 2 000 lb (907.2 kg) PBD-25851-A9T50
100 lb (45.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID 7MH7725-1DB Load cell, high temperature up to 175 °C (347 °F)
with 316 (1.4401) stainless steel cover
250 lb (113.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID 7MH7725-1DC
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8TH
4
500 lb (226.8 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID 7MH7725-1DD
50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0TH
750 lb (340.2 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID 7MH7725-1DE
100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1TH
1 000 lb (453.6 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID 7MH7725-1DF
250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2TH
50 lb (22.7 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1DT
500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3TH
100 lb (45.4 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1DU
750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4TH
250 lb (113.4 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1DV
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5TH
500 lb (226.8 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1DW
1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6TH
750 lb (340.2 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1DX
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7TH
1 000 lb (453.6 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1DY
2 000 lb (907.2 kg) PBH-25851-A9TH
1 250 lb (567 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1EE
Load cell with 15 m (49.2 ft) cable length
1 500 lb (680.4 kg), CSA/FM/ATEX/IECEx 7MH7725-1EF
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8A08
Load cell with 316 (1.4401) stainless steel cover
50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0A08
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8H53
100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1A08
50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0H53
250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2A08
100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1H53
500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3A08
250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2H53
750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4A08
500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3H53
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5A08
750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4H53
1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6A08
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5H53
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7A08
1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6H53
2 000 lb (907.2 kg) PBD-25851-A9A08
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7H53
100 lb (45.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B1A08
2 000 lb (907.2 kg) PBD-25851-A9H53
1 000 lb (45.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B5A08
Load cell with 15 m (49.2 ft) cable length and 316
(1.4401) stainless steel cover
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8AH
50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0AH
100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1AH
250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2AH
500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3AH
750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4AH
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5AH

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
■ Selection and ordering data Article No.

1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6AH
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7AH
2 000 lb (907.2 kg) PBD-25851-A9AH
100 lb (45.4 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B1AH
1 000 lb (453.6 kg), NTEP, OIML/MID PBD-25851-B5AH
with 15 m (49.2 ft) cable length
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8TA
50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0TA
100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1TA
250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2TA
500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3TA
750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4TA
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5TA
1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6TA
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7TA
4 2 000 lb (907.2 kg)

PBD-25851-A9TA
with 15 m (49.2 ft) cable length and 316 (1.4401)

stainless steel cover
25 lb (11.3 kg) PBD-25851-A8AHT
50 lb (22.7 kg) PBD-25851-A0AHT
100 lb (45.4 kg) PBD-25851-A1AHT
250 lb (113.4 kg) PBD-25851-A2AHT
500 lb (226.8 kg) PBD-25851-A3AHT
750 lb (340.2 kg) PBD-25851-A4AHT
1 000 lb (453.6 kg) PBD-25851-A5AHT
1 250 lb (567 kg) PBD-25851-A6AHT
1 500 lb (680.4 kg) PBD-25851-A7AHT
2 000 lb (907.2 kg) PBD-25851-A9AHT
Idler clips
5 inch (127 mm) for 27 ... 62 inch 7MH7723-1BT
(686 ... 1 575 mm) "A" dimensions
7 inch (178 mm) for 63 ... 74 inch 7MH7723-1DF
(1 600 ... 1 880 mm) "A" dimensions
Calibration weights
6.0 lb/ 2.7 kg 7MH7724-1AB
18 lb/ 8.2 kg 7MH7724-1AA
18 lb/ 8.2 kg certified weight A5E32423812
Milltronics flat bar calibration weights, see page
4/58
Note: calibration accessories should be ordered as
a separate line order
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7)
 We can offer shorter delivery times for configurations designated with the
Quick Ship Symbol 
1) Only for quotation purposes, not a valid ordering option.

2)
Available with Fabrication options 11 ... 18 and 41 ... 48 only, and with
System specification option A only.
3)
Two MSI are required to make the NTEP approved MMI.
4)
Approval available with load cell options 2 ... 6 only and applicable
BW500.
5)
Complete specification data sheet on page 4/3 and submit
with order "legal for trade" version.
6)
Includes metrological approved load cells.
7) Not available with construction option 2, or system specification options
B, C, D.

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
■ Dimensional drawings
Note: Conduit
and cable
arrangement
may differ
from example
shown
MSI dimensions
Conveyor belt Mounting scale Minimum drop-in C D E Weight (approx.)

width width width
A B
18 inch 27 inch 23.25 inch 9.5 inch 5.5 inch 7 inch 82 lb
(457 mm) (686 mm) (591 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (37 kg)
(508 mm) (737 mm) (641 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (39 kg)
(610 mm) (838 mm) (743 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (41 kg)
(762 mm) (991 mm) (895 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (45 kg)
(914 mm) (1 143 mm) (1 048 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (49 kg)
(1 067 mm) (1 295 mm) (1 200 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (53 kg)
(1 219 mm) (1 448 mm) (1 353 mm) (241 mm) (140 mm) (178 mm) (57 kg)
54 inch 63 inch 59.25 inch 12 inch 8 inch 7 inch 175 lb
(1 372 mm) (1 600 mm) (1 505 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (178 mm) (79 kg)
(1 524 mm) (1 753 mm) (1 657 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (178 mm) (88 kg)
(1 676 mm) (1 905 mm) (1 810 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (203 mm) (104 kg)
(1 829 mm) (2 057 mm) (1 962 mm) (305 mm) (203 mm) (203 mm) (112 kg)
Other widths available - check configuration information.
Sizes are from 18 inch (457 mm) to 96 inch (2 438 mm) in 1 inch (25.4 mm)
increments. All sizes are nominal.
Note: dimension B must be approx. 3/8 inch or 10 mm less than Y
dimension of the conveyor (see Application Questionnaire on page 4/3).

© Siemens AG 2017
Belt Scales
■ Schematics
Belt direction
Load cell A Load cell B
Conduit and box

connector
Detail A
See detail A
Load cell A Load cell B

Notes:
Conduit and cable arrangement may
differ from example shown.
To maintain NEMA or IP rating, use

only approved conduit and conduit
4 fittings or cable glands.
For hazardous area installations, use

only approved junction boxes, metal
conduit and conduit fittings or cable
Customer glands.
Shld A
Shld B
Red A
Red B
Wht A
Wht B
Grn A
Grn B
Blk A
Blk B
junction box
Conduit and connector not provided
on hazardous approved versions.
+ EXC
- EXC
- SIG A
+ SIG A
- SIG B
+ SIG B
Shld
To integrator
MSI/MMI connections
■ More information
NTEP/Measurement Canada/OIML & MID Specification Data
Please complete and submit the rele- Value Please complete and submit the rele- Value
vant details listed below when order- vant details listed below when order-
ing NTEP, Measurement Canada, or ing NTEP, Measurement Canada, or
OIML & MID approval options OIML & MID approval options
NTEP OIML & MID
Maximum rated capacity (TPH) Totalization scale interval (tonnes)
Minimum rated capacity (TPH) Belt speed max/min (m/s)
Belt speed (FPM) Maximum flow rate (MTPH)
Scale division (tons) Minimum flow rate (MTPH)
Maximum loading (lb/ft) Minimum totalized load (tonnes)
Measurement Canada Product to be weighed
Rate Maximum capacity (tonnes)
Speed (min/max m/s, FPM) Weigh length (m)
Test load (kg/m, lb/ft) Ratio between minimum net load and
maximum capacity
Zero testing should have a duration of
at least (____) revolutions

Speed Sensors
SITRANS WS300
Operating Instructions 05/2010
SITRANS
Safety Guidelines: Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of
others, and to protect the product and the connected equipment. These warning notices are
accompanied by a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
Qualified Personnel: This device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this
manual. Qualified personnel are only authorized to install and operate this equipment in accordance with
established safety practices and standards.
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s
agent.
• All new components are to be provided by Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc.
• Restrict repair to faulty components only.
• Do not reuse faulty components.
Warning: Cardboard shipping package provides limited humidity and moisture protection. This product
can only function properly and safely if it is correctly transported, stored, installed, set up, operated, and
maintained.
This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
Copyright Siemens Milltronics Process Disclaimer of Liability

Instruments Inc. 2010. All Rights Reserved
authorized bound manuals, or to view electronic described, variations remain possible. Thus we
versions as designed and authored by Siemens cannot guarantee full agreement. The contents
Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. Siemens of this manual are regularly reviewed and
Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. will not be corrections are included in subsequent editions.
responsible for the contents of partial or whole Please check the website shown below for the
reproductions of either bound or electronic versions. latest manual revisions.
We welcome all suggestions for improvement.
MILLTRONICS®is a registered trademark of Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc.
Contact SMPI Technical Publications European Authorized Representative

at the following address:
Technical Publications Siemens AG
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. Industry Sector
1954 Technology Drive, P.O. Box 4225 76181 Karlsruhe
Peterborough, Ontario, Canada, K9J 7B1 Deutschland
• For a selection of Siemens Milltronics level measurement manuals, go to:

www. siemens.com/level. Choose Support, and then Manuals / Operating Instructions.
• For a selection of Siemens Milltronics weighing manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/weighing. Choose Support, and then Manuals / Operating Instructions.
© Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. 2010

Table of Contents
Safety Notes .............................................................................................................................................1
Safety Marking Symbols .............................................................................................................1
The Manual ...............................................................................................................................................2
Technical Support ..........................................................................................................................2
SITRANS WS300 Speed Sensor ....................................................................................... 3
Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 4
Installation .......................................................................................................................... 6
Dimensions ...............................................................................................................................................6
Mounting ...................................................................................................................................................7
Mounting to a Tail Pulley .............................................................................................................8
Mounting to a Bend or Snub Pulley ..........................................................................................9
Mounting using Optional Threaded Shaft Coupling ...........................................................10
General Installation Steps .............................................................................................. 11
Interconnection ................................................................................................................ 12
Terminals (standard version) ..............................................................................................................12
Terminal Connections to Siemens Milltronics Integrators ...............................................13
Terminal Connections to SIWAREX FTC Integrator ............................................................13
Terminals (IS version) ...........................................................................................................................14
Terminal Connections to Siemens Milltronics Integrators ...............................................14
Terminal Connections to SIWAREX FTC Integrator ............................................................14
Maintenance ...................................................................................................................... 15
Inspection ................................................................................................................................................15
Recommended spare parts ......................................................................................................15
Hazardous Area Installations ......................................................................................... 16
Product Nameplates .............................................................................................................................16
Instructions Specific to Hazardous Area Installations ................................................................17
i
ii
Safety Notes1
Special attention must be paid to warnings and notes highlighted from the rest of the text
by grey boxes.
WARNING: relates to a caution symbol on the product, and means

that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result in
death, serious injury, and/or considerable material damage.
WARNING1: means that failure to observe the necessary precau-
tions can result in death, serious injury, and/or considerable
material damage.
CAUTION: means that failure to observe the necessary precautions can
result in considerable material damage.
Note: means important information about the product or that part of the operating
manual.
Safety Marking Symbols

In manual: On product: Description
WARNING: refer to accompanying documents (manual)

for details.
1.
This symbol is used when there is no corresponding symbol on the product.
7ML19985ML01 SITRANS WS300 Speed Sensor – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 1

The Manual
Note: This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area may cause interference to several frequency
based communications.
This instruction manual covers the installation, operation and maintenance of the WS300
speed sensor.
We strongly recommend reading this manual, and any manual for a product used in
conjunction with the WS300 (such as a belt scale integrator), for proper installation and
operation of any component of the weighing system. Adhering to the installation and
operating procedures ensures a quick, trouble-free installation and allows for the
maximum accuracy and reliability of your weighing system.
Integrator and speed sensor instruction manuals are available for download from
www.siemens.com/processautomation.
accessibility. Please direct your comments to techpubs.smpi@siemens.com.
Technical Support
Support is available 24 hours a day.
To find your local Siemens Automation Office address, phone or fax number go to:
www.siemens.com/automation/partner
•Click on the tab Contacts by Product and then find your product group (+Process
Automation > +Weighing Technology).
•Select the team Technical Support. Click on Next.
•Click on the appropriate continent, then select the country followed by the city.
Click on Next.
For on-line technical support go to:

www.siemens.com/automation/support-request
•Enter the device name (WS300) or order number, then click on Search, and select
the appropriate product type. Click on Next.
•You will be prompted to enter a keyword describing your issue. Then either browse
the relevant documentation, or click on Next to email a detailed description of
your issue to Siemens Technical Support staff.
Siemens A&D Technical Support Center: phone +49 180 50 50 222

fax +49 180 50 50 223+
Page 2 SITRANS WS300 Speed Sensor – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 7ML19985ML01

SITRANS WS300 Speed Sensor
SITRANS WS300 speed sensor is a low- to high-resolution shaft driven speed sensor. It
measures the shaft's rotation by sending pulses to the integrator. The WS300 is certified
for use in hazardous and non-hazardous locations.
This small, light-weight speed sensor features:
• Optional resolutions for accurate measurement over a range of belt speeds
• Long bearing life
• Corrosion resistance
Pulses are generated for each rotation of the WS300 shaft. These pulses are typically fed
into a Milltronics belt scale integrator. The integrator interprets the pulses and uses them
in the calculation of belt speed, flow rate, and material totalization.
The WS300 works with the following integrators:
• Milltronics BW100
• Milltronics BW500
• SIWAREX FTC
• Competitive integrators – consult your local Siemens representative
The WS300 sensors can also be used with older model Siemens integrators:
• Compuscale • Compuscale IIA • Compu-M
• Compuscale II • Compuscale III
For further information about Siemens products,

go to www.siemens.com/processautomation.

Specifications
Power
• standard: +10 to +30 V DC, 60 mA max.
• IS: +5 to +16 V DC, 25 mA max. (from IS Switch Isolator)
Ambient Temperature
• standard: -40 to +55 °C (-40 to +131 °F)
• IS: -25 to +60 °C (-13 to +140 °F)
Input
• shaft rotation 0.5 to 2000 rpm, bi-directional, resolution dependent
Output
• uni-directional open collector sinking output
• standard: +10 to +30 V DC, 25 mA max.
• IS: load current, 0 to 15 mA
• 32, 256, 1000, or 2000 pulses per revolution (PPR)
PPR Max. RPM Hz

32 2000 1066
256 2000 8530
1000 900 15000
2000 450 15000
Enclosure
• aluminum, rated NEMA 4X/Type 4X/IP65
• stainless steel (optional), rated NEMA 4X/Type 4X/IP65
Cable (recommended)
• standard: 3-wire shielded, 0.82 mm2 (18 AWG)
• IS: 2-wire shielded 0.324 mm2 (22 AWG)
• maximum cable run 305 m (1000 ft)
Weight
• 1.22 kg (2.68 lbs) aluminum
• 2.41 kg (5.3 lbs) stainless steel

Approvals
Note: The device nameplate lists the approvals that apply to your device.
• standard version:
• General CE, C-TICK
• Hazardous CSA/FM Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
ATEX II 2D Ex tD A21 IP65 T70 °C
IECEx Ex tD A21 IP65 T70 °C
• IS version:
• General CE, C-TICK
• Hazardous Intrinsically Safe (IS) rating based on Switch and
Isolator Approvals (see below)
Switch and Isolator Approvals
Note: The Approval Ratings for the Proximity Switch and the IS Switch Isolator
are the property of Pepperl + Fuchs. Copies of these Approval Certificates may be
obtained from our website www.siemens.com/continuous-weighing. Click on
Support, then Approvals / Certificates, to find the appropriate certificate.
Proximity Switch Approval Ratings (Pepperl + Fuchs #NJ0.8-5GM-N)

• ATEX: II 2G, EEx ia IIC T6 (with suitable IS Switch Isolator)1
• CSA/FM (with suitable IS Switch Isolator or Switch Amplifier):
Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G system approval
IS Switch Isolator (Pepperl + Fuchs #KFA5-SOT2-Ex2 or #KFA6-SOT2-Ex2)
• ATEX: II (1) G, [EEx ia] IIC
• CSA/FM: Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
1.
Based on the ATEX rating of the NAMUR sensor and CSA/FM system approvals.

Installation
Note: Installation shall be performed only by qualified personnel in accordance
with local governing regulations.
Dimensions
305 mm
(12.0")
50 mm 131 mm
(1.96") (5.16")
89 mm
Rod ø: (3.5")
8.0 mm
(5/16")
60 mm
Shaft ø: 15.9 mm (2.38")
(5/8")
102 mm
(4.03")
½" NPT conduit entrance
(optional M20 adapter available)
102 mm 159 mm
(4.00") (6.25")
111 mm
(4.36")
½" NPT conduit entrance

(optional M20 adapter available)

Mounting
The input shaft on the WS300 is coupled to the rotating shaft on a belt driven pulley and is
not externally supported. The unit’s arresting rod stops it from rotating with the pulley
shaft and can be fitted with a spring to soften sudden speed changes.
CAUTION: The arresting rod should only be solidly attached to the

WS300. Fixing the rod at both ends will apply binding forces and
cause the unit’s bearings to wear prematurely.
When mounting, make sure the unit and the pulley shaft are concentric to avoid stresses
on the unit’s bearings.
For preferred mounting locations, refer to the associated belt scale or weigh feeder
instruction manual.
For shafts that do not have enough material protruding to use a set screw, or that cannot
be removed for modification, a threaded shaft coupling can be used.

Mounting to a Tail Pulley
d tension spring (supplied)
angle bracket slotted
for arrestor rod belt
≥ 10 mm (0.375")
WS300 flexible conduit
angle bracket slotted

tension spring (supplied)
for arrestor rod
arrestor rod (cut to suit)
89 mm
(3.5")
WS300
flexible conduit
Notes:
• Distance (d) is the take up travel on the tail pulley
• When adjusting the belt take up, ensure there is play on the arrestor rod. If the
arrestor rod is pushed against the end of its travel slot, premature wear may
result on the bearing.

Mounting to a Bend or Snub Pulley
tension spring (supplied)
stringer
WS300
belt
flexible conduit
tension spring
stringer
3/8" drilled hole for

arrestor rod arrestor rod (cut to suit)
bend or snub pulley
89 mm
3.5"
WS300
flexible
conduit
pulley bearing
Note: When mounting to a bend or snub pulley only a 3/8” (10 mm) drilled hole is
required for the arrestor rod.

Mounting using Optional Threaded Shaft Coupling
25 mm 95 mm set
(1.0") (3.75") screw
25 mm
M12x1.75
(1.0")
.254mm (.010") A
A
M12x1.75 (use adhesive
when installing threaded
shaft coupling (e.g. Loctite)
Note: All other installation instructions apply. See “General Installation Steps” on
page 11.

General Installation Steps
1. Drill out pulley shaft to a depth of 64 mm (2.5”) concentric to its centerline.
WARNING: Exercise caution and remain within specified

tolerances.
2. Drill out and thread the set screw hole.

M8x1.25 (5/16-18 UNC)
set screw (by customer)
64 mm
(2.5")
25 mm 16.00 mm (0.630") dia.
(1") 16.07 mm (0.633")
3. Attach angle iron bracket to work with the arrestor rod (if mounting on a tail pulley).
4. Cut the arrestor rod to a suitable length.
5. Insert the WS300 shaft into the pulley shaft and lock with set screw on flat of shaft.
Example slot for 127 mm
arrestor rod (5") approx. secure
when mounted to with
tail pulley - use bolt or
drilled hole for post
snub or bend
pulley
angle iron bracket or

conveyor stringer web
tension spring
6. Attach spring to arresting rod and frame.
7. Encase wiring in flexible conduit to allow unit to float.
8. Wire the WS300 to the integrator. See Terminal Connections to Siemens Milltronics
Integrators, or Terminal Connections to SIWAREX FTC Integrator on page 13.
WARNING: The arresting rod should only be solidly attached to

the WS300. Fixing the rod at both ends will apply binding forces
and wear the bearings on the unit prematurely.

Interconnection
Note: Installation shall be performed only by qualified personnel and in
accordance with local governing regulations.
Interconnection between the standard WS300 unit and the integrator should be made
with three-wire shielded, 0.82 mm2 (18 AWG) cable. To connect the WS300 IS unit to the
switch isolator, use two-wire shielded 0.324 mm2 (22 AWG) cable. Use the same cable to
connect the switch isolator to the integrator.
For both units, ground the shield at the integrator end ONLY. Connect shield to
appropriate terminal at the integrator.
Notes:
• Flexible conduit is recommended so that excess stress is not applied to the
shaft bearings.
• Use appropriate conduit and conduit fittings or cable glands to maintain NEMA
or IP rating.
Standard Intrinsically
Version Safe Version
1
GND
Terminals (standard version)

1 – +V DC
The positive power supply from the integrator connection.
2 – Clockwise Speed Out

The positive output connection of the measurement loop. This output is only used when
the sensor is rotating clockwise.
3 – Counter-Clockwise Speed Out

The positive output connection of the measurement loop. This output is only used when
the sensor is rotating counter-clockwise.

4 – Common
The common connection used as a reference point with the integrator.
GND – Ground
A ground connection. Do not use this ground for the cable shield.
Notes:
• Ground the cable shield at the integrator end only!
• For optimal performance the housing of the Speed Sensor must be connected
to a reliable earthed ground.
Terminal Connections to Siemens Milltronics Integrators

WS300 1 2 3 4
GND
standard +V CW CCW Cmn
Milltronics BW100 8 7 7 6 N/C
Milltronics BW500 19 16 16 17 N/C
Terminal Connections to SIWAREX FTC Integrator

WS300 1 2 3 4
GND
(standard) +V CW CCW Cmn
24 V X1.10
X1.9 X1.9
SIWAREX FTC (backplane (CI- and N/C
(CI+) (CI+)
bus) Common)
Note:
• N/C indicates the terminal is not normally connected.
Determine the pulley shaft rotation on the end of the pulley shaft to which the WS300 is
attached.
If the pulley shaft rotates clockwise, connect the appropriate wire to terminal 2.
If the pulley shaft rotates counter-clockwise, connect the appropriate wire to terminal 3.
WARNING: Do not connect terminals two and three at the same

time.

Terminals (IS version)
1 – +V DC
The positive power supply from the integrator connection.
2 – Speed Out
The positive output connection of the measurement loop.
GND – Ground
A ground connection. Do not use this ground for the cable shield.
Notes:
• Ground the cable shield at the integrator end only!
• For optimal performance the housing of the Speed Sensor must be connected
to a reliable earthed ground.
Terminal Connections to Siemens Milltronics Integrators

IS Switch Isolator
WS300 IS Integrator
Terminal
1 1
2 3
7 speed signal input
8 - excitation
Terminal Connections to SIWAREX FTC Integrator

IS Switch Isolator
WS300 IS FTC
Terminal
1 1
2 3
7 CI+
8 IL+
Connect CI- to Common.

Maintenance
Inspection
Periodically the cover should be removed and the enclosure and circuit board should be
cleaned for dust and grime buildup. If cleaning is required, disconnect the power and use
a vacuum cleaner and a clean, dry paintbrush. While the cover is off, check all electrical
contacts for corrosion and evidence of arcing.
WARNING: Do not remove cover when an explosive dust

Wear on the bearings is detected by excess play or sound. If the bearings exhibit excess
play or produce an unreasonably loud sound, the speed sensor should be returned to
Siemens for repair.
Recommended spare parts

• WS300 circuit card (based on Resolution and Connections)
• Pepperl+Fuchs IS switch isolator (if required)

Hazardous Area Installations
Product Nameplates
Note: The nameplate shown is a typical example. Please check the nameplate on
your device for your specific device configuration.
SITRANS WS300 SPEED SENSOR

7ML1234-56789-0ABC-D
Serial No.: GYZ / V1234567 N117
Input: 10–30 V , 60 mA MAX.
Output: 30 V , 25 mA MAX.
Enclosure: TYPE 4X / NEMA 4X / IP65
0518
II 2 D Class II, Div 1, Gr. E, F, G
Ex tD A21 IP6X T70°C Class III
Ta = –40°C to 55°C R
SIRA 06ATEX9303X
IECEx SIR 08.0070X
159134
Do Not Open When An Explosive Dust Atmosphere is Present
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc.

Peterborough
Made In Canada
SITRANS WS300 IS SPEED SENSOR

7ML1234-56789-0ABC-D
Serial No.: GYZ / V1234567 N117
Input: 5–16 V , 25 mA MAX.
Output: 0-15 mA MAX.
Enclosure: TYPE 4X / NEMA 4X / IP65
0518
II 1 G Class I, Div 1, Gr. A, B, C, D

EEx ia IIC T6 Class II, Div 1, Gr. E, F, G
Ta=60°C Class III
Hazardous approvals based on Pepperl+Fuchs #NJ0.8-5GM-N
Do Not Open When An Explosive Gas Atmosphere is Present

Peterborough
Made In Canada

Instructions Specific to Hazardous Area Installations
(Reference European ATEX Directive 94/9/EC,
Annex II, 1/0/6)
The following instructions apply to equipment covered by certificate number
Sira 06ATEX9303X:

2. The equipment is certified for use as Category 2D equipment and may be used in
hazardous zones 21 and 22 with dusts.
3. This equipment has a maximum surface temperature of T70°C (in a +55°C ambient).
Refer to the applicable code of practice for selection of this equipment with respect
to specific dust ignition temperatures.
4. The equipment is certified for use in an ambient temperature range of -40 to +55°C.
5. Any cable or conduit entries must meet the requirements of European Directive
94/9/EC for Group II, Category 2D.
6. Cable should be selected in accordance with the applicable code of practice and
such that its insulation can withstand the maximum surface temperature of the
enclosure (T70°C).
7. The equipment has not been assessed as a safety related device (as referred to by
Directive 94/9/EC Annex II, clause 1.5).
8. Installation and inspection of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained
personnel in accordance with the applicable code of practice.
9. Repair of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in
accordance with the applicable code of practice.
10. Components to be incorporated into or used as replacements in the equipment shall
be fitted by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s
documentation.
11. If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is
the responsibility of the user to take suitable precautions that prevent it from being
adversely affected, thus ensuring that the type of protection is not compromised.
- Aggressive substances: for example, acidic liquids or gases that may attack
metals or solvents that may affect polymeric materials
- Suitable precautions: for example, regular checks as part of routine
inspections or establishing from the material’s data sheet that it is resistant to
specific chemicals
12. Product marking shall include the warning: Do not open when an explosive dust
Special Conditions for Safe Use

The ’X’ suffix to the certificate number relates to the following special condition(s) for
safe use:
• Cable or conduit entries shall comply with the requirements of the European
Directive 94/9/EC for Group II, Category 2D and maintain the overall IP rating of the
enclosure.

Notes.fm Page 2 Thursday, October 11, 2001 8:48 AM
Notes
IQ300IX.fm Page 5 Tuesday, October 2, 2001 1:43 PM

www.siemens.com/continuous-weighing
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. Subject to change without prior notice
Industry Automation (IA) 7ML19985ML01 Rev. 1.1
P.O. Box 4225
Peterborough, ON
Canada K9J 7B1
© Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments Inc. 2010
*7ml19985ML01*
Printed in Canada
email: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
Integrators
Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L
Edition 12/2016
Safety Guidelines
Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of others, and to protect the product and the connected equipment.
These warning notices are accompanied by a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
Qualified Personnel
This device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this manual. Qualified personnel are only authorized to install and
operate this equipment in accordance with established safety practices and standards.

• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s agent.
• All new components are to be provided by Siemens.
Warning: Cardboard shipping package provides limited humidity and moisture protection. This product can only function properly and safely if
it is correctly transported, stored, installed, set up, operated, and maintained.
This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause interference to several
frequency based communications.
Copyright Siemens AG 2016. All Rights Reserved Disclaimer of Liability
authorized bound manuals, or to view electronic versions as described, variations remain possible. Thus we
designed and authored by Siemens. Siemens will not be cannot guarantee full agreement. The contents of
responsible for the contents of partial or whole this manual are regularly reviewed and
reproductions of either bound or electronic versions. corrections are included in subsequent editions.
We welcome all suggestions for improvement.
European Authorized Representative
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
76181 Karlsruhe
Deutschland
• For a selection of Siemens level measurement manuals, go to:

www. siemens.com/processautomation. Select Products & Systems, then under Process Instrumentation, select Level Measurement.
Manual archives can be found on the Support page by product family.
• For a selection of Siemens weighing manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/processautomation. Under Products & Systems, select Weighing and Batching Systems.
Manual archives can be found on the Support page by product family.
© Siemens AG 2016
1
___________________
Safety Notes
okjlkjlj
___________________
The Manual 2
Milltronics BW500 and
___________________
BW500/L 3
Milltronics ___________________
4
Specifications
Integrators ___________________
Installation 5
BW500 and BW500/L
___________________
Start Up 6
Operating Instructions ___________________
Recalibration 7
___________________
Operation 8
___________________
PID Control 9
___________________
Batching 10
___________________
Communications 11
___________________
Parameters 12
___________________
Troubleshooting 13
___________________
Certification 14
___________________
Appendix A
12/2016
A5E33482052-AD
Legal information
DANGER
WARNING
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will be
used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to property
damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific task
in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions. Qualified
personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and avoiding
potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Note the following:
WARNING
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication may
be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software described.
Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the information in this
publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent editions.
Siemens AG Document order number: A5E33482052 Copyright © Siemens AG 2016.

Division Process Industries and Drives Ⓟ 11/2016 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Safety Notes ......................................................................................................................................... 11

2 The Manual ........................................................................................................................................... 13
3 Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L ........................................................................................................... 15
4 Specifications........................................................................................................................................ 17
5 Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 21
5.1 Dimensions .............................................................................................................................21
5.2 Layout .....................................................................................................................................23
5.3 Optional Plug-ins.....................................................................................................................25
5.3.1 SmartLinx Module ...................................................................................................................25
5.3.2 mA I/O board ...........................................................................................................................25
5.3.3 LVDT Conditioner Card...........................................................................................................26
5.3.4 Optional Components and their Locations .............................................................................27
5.4 Interconnection .......................................................................................................................27
5.4.1 System Diagram .....................................................................................................................28
5.4.2 Scale - One Load Cell .............................................................................................................29
5.4.3 Scale - Two Load Cells ...........................................................................................................30
5.4.4 Scale - Four Load Cells ..........................................................................................................32
5.4.5 Scale - Six Load Cells .............................................................................................................33
5.4.6 Scale - LVDT ...........................................................................................................................34
5.5 Speed ......................................................................................................................................35
5.5.1 Constant Speed (No Sensor) ..................................................................................................35
5.5.2 Main Speed Sensor ................................................................................................................36
5.5.3 Auxiliary Speed Sensor...........................................................................................................37
5.6 Auxiliary Inputs ........................................................................................................................38
5.7 Auto Zero ................................................................................................................................38
5.8 RS232 Port 1 ..........................................................................................................................39
5.8.1 Printers ....................................................................................................................................39
5.8.2 Computers and Modems ........................................................................................................ 39
5.9 Remote Totalizer .....................................................................................................................40
5.10 mA Output 1 ............................................................................................................................40
5.11 Relay Output ...........................................................................................................................40
5.12 RS485 Port 2 ..........................................................................................................................41
5.12.1 Daisy Chain .............................................................................................................................41
5.12.2 Terminal Device ......................................................................................................................41
5.13 RS232 Port 3 ..........................................................................................................................41
5.14 Power Connections .................................................................................................................42
5.15 mA I/O Board Connections .....................................................................................................43
BW500 and BW500/L

Operating Instructions, 12/2016, A5E33482052-AD 3
Table of contents
5.16 Installing/replacing the back-up battery ................................................................................. 44

6 Start Up ................................................................................................................................................ 47
6.1 Keypad ................................................................................................................................... 47
6.2 Program Mode ....................................................................................................................... 48
6.2.1 Program Mode Display .......................................................................................................... 48
6.2.2 To enter PROGRAM mode .................................................................................................... 49
6.2.3 RUN Mode ............................................................................................................................. 51
6.3 Initial Start Up......................................................................................................................... 51
6.3.1 Power Up ............................................................................................................................... 52
6.3.2 Programming.......................................................................................................................... 52
6.4 Load Cell Balancing ............................................................................................................... 57
6.4.1 Typical Two Load cell belt scale ............................................................................................ 58
6.4.1.1 Access P295 .......................................................................................................................... 58
6.4.2 Balancing six load cell belt scales.......................................................................................... 62
6.4.2.1 Balancing for A and B ............................................................................................................ 62
6.4.2.2 Balancing for C and D ............................................................................................................ 62
6.4.3 Zero Calibration...................................................................................................................... 63
6.4.4 RUN Mode ............................................................................................................................. 65
7 Recalibration ......................................................................................................................................... 67
7.1 Belt Speed Compensation ..................................................................................................... 67
7.1.1 Access P018 .......................................................................................................................... 67
7.2 Material Tests......................................................................................................................... 68
7.2.1 %Change ............................................................................................................................... 69
7.2.1.1 Access P019 and enter EDIT mode ...................................................................................... 70
7.2.2 Material Test .......................................................................................................................... 70
7.3 Design Changes..................................................................................................................... 72
7.4 Recalibration .......................................................................................................................... 72
7.4.1 Routine Zero .......................................................................................................................... 72
7.4.2 Initial Zero .............................................................................................................................. 74
7.4.3 Direct Zero ............................................................................................................................. 75
7.4.4 Auto Zero ............................................................................................................................... 76
7.4.5 Routine Span ......................................................................................................................... 77
7.4.6 Initial Span ............................................................................................................................. 78
7.4.7 Direct Span ............................................................................................................................ 80
7.4.8 Multispan ................................................................................................................................ 81
7.4.8.1 Programming.......................................................................................................................... 82
7.5 Online Calibration................................................................................................................... 85
7.5.1 Online Calibration feature ...................................................................................................... 86
7.5.2 Activate Online Calibration ..................................................................................................... 88
7.6 Factoring ................................................................................................................................ 90
7.6.1 Access P359 in VIEW mode .................................................................................................. 91
7.7 Linearization ........................................................................................................................... 92
8 Operation .............................................................................................................................................. 97
8.1 Load Sensing ......................................................................................................................... 97
BW500 and BW500/L

4 Operating Instructions, 12/2016, A5E33482052-AD
Table of contents
8.2 Speed Sensing ........................................................................................................................97

8.3 Differential Speed Detection ...................................................................................................98
8.4 Moisture Compensation ..........................................................................................................98
8.5 Incline compensation ..............................................................................................................99
8.6 Modes of Operation ..............................................................................................................100
8.7 Damping ................................................................................................................................100
8.8 mA I/O (0/4-20 mA) ...............................................................................................................101
8.9 Relay Output .........................................................................................................................102
8.10 Totalization ............................................................................................................................103
8.10.1 Internal Totalizer ...................................................................................................................103
8.10.2 External Totalizer ..................................................................................................................104
9 PID Control ......................................................................................................................................... 107
9.1 Hardware ..............................................................................................................................107
9.2 Connections ..........................................................................................................................107
9.2.1 Setpoint Controller – Rate Control ........................................................................................108
9.2.2 Setpoint Controller – Load Control........................................................................................109
9.2.3 Setpoint Controller – Master/Slave Control...........................................................................110
9.2.4 Setpoint Controller – Rate and Load Control ........................................................................111
9.3 Setup and Tuning..................................................................................................................112
9.3.1 Proportional Control (Gain), P ..............................................................................................112
9.3.2 Integral Control (Automatic Reset), I ....................................................................................112
9.3.3 Derivative Control (Pre-Act or Rate), D ................................................................................113
9.3.4 Feed Forward Control, F .......................................................................................................113
9.4 PID Setup and Tuning...........................................................................................................114
9.4.1 Initial Start-Up .......................................................................................................................114
9.5 Programming ........................................................................................................................117
10 Batching ............................................................................................................................................. 121
10.1 Connections ..........................................................................................................................122
10.1.1 Typical Ladder Logic .............................................................................................................122
10.2 Programming ........................................................................................................................123
10.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................................123
10.3.1 Pre-act Function ....................................................................................................................124
11 Communications ................................................................................................................................. 125
11.1 BW500 and BW500/L and SmartLinx ...................................................................................125
11.2 Connections ..........................................................................................................................126
11.2.1 Wiring Guidelines ..................................................................................................................126
11.3 Configuring Communication Ports ........................................................................................127
11.3.1 P770 Serial protocols ............................................................................................................127
11.3.2 P771 Protocol address..........................................................................................................128
11.3.3 P772 Baud Rate....................................................................................................................128
11.3.4 P773 Parity ...........................................................................................................................128
BW500 and BW500/L

Table of contents
11.3.5 P774 Data bits...................................................................................................................... 129

11.3.6 P775 Stop bits ...................................................................................................................... 129
11.3.7 P778 Modem attached ......................................................................................................... 129
11.3.8 P779 Modem idle time ......................................................................................................... 130
11.3.9 P780 RS-232 Transmission interval .................................................................................... 130
11.3.10 P781 Data message ............................................................................................................ 131
11.3.11 P799 Communications Control ............................................................................................ 131
11.4 Dolphin Protocol ................................................................................................................... 132
11.5 Modbus RTU/ASCII Protocol ............................................................................................... 133
11.5.1 How Modbus Works ............................................................................................................. 133
11.5.2 Modbus RTU vs. ASCII ........................................................................................................ 134
11.5.3 Modbus Format .................................................................................................................... 134
11.5.4 Modbus Register Map .......................................................................................................... 134
11.5.5 Modbus Register Map (cont’d) ............................................................................................. 138
11.6 Modems ............................................................................................................................... 147
11.6.1 Example Setup ..................................................................................................................... 147
11.7 Error Handling ...................................................................................................................... 149
12 Parameters ..........................................................................................................................................153
12.1 Start Up (P001 to P017) ....................................................................................................... 153
12.1.1 P001 Language .................................................................................................................... 153
12.1.2 P002 Test Reference Selection ........................................................................................... 153
12.1.3 P003 Number of Load Cells ................................................................................................. 154
12.1.4 P004 Rate Measurement System ........................................................................................ 154
12.1.5 P005 Design Rate Units ....................................................................................................... 154
12.1.6 P008 Date ............................................................................................................................ 154
12.1.7 P009 Time ............................................................................................................................ 155
12.1.8 P011 Design Rate ................................................................................................................ 155
12.1.9 P014 Design Speed ............................................................................................................. 155
12.1.10 P015 Speed Constant .......................................................................................................... 155
12.1.11 P016 Belt Length.................................................................................................................. 156
12.1.12 P017 Test Load .................................................................................................................... 156
12.1.13 P018 Speed Adjust .............................................................................................................. 157
12.1.14 P019 Manual Span Adjust ................................................................................................... 157
12.1.15 P022 Minimum Speed Frequency........................................................................................ 157
12.1.16 P080 Display Damping ........................................................................................................ 157
12.1.17 P081 Display Scroll Mode .................................................................................................... 158
12.2 Relay/Alarm Function (P100 - P117) ................................................................................... 158
12.2.1 P100 Relay Function ............................................................................................................ 158
12.2.2 P101 High Alarm / Deviation Alarm ..................................................................................... 159
12.2.3 P102 Low Alarm ................................................................................................................... 159
12.2.4 P107 Relay Alarms .............................................................................................................. 159
12.2.5 P117 Relay Dead Band ....................................................................................................... 160
12.2.6 P118 Relay Logic ................................................................................................................. 160
12.2.7 P119 Override ...................................................................................................................... 160
12.3 mA I/O Parameters (P200 - P220) ....................................................................................... 161
12.3.1 P200 mA Output Range ....................................................................................................... 161
12.3.2 P201 mA Output Function .................................................................................................... 161
12.3.3 P204 mA Output Average .................................................................................................... 161
BW500 and BW500/L

Table of contents
12.3.4 P212 mA Output Minimum ....................................................................................................162

12.3.5 P213 mA Output Maximum ...................................................................................................162
12.3.6 P214 4 mA Output Trim ........................................................................................................162
12.3.7 P215 20 mA Output Trim ......................................................................................................162
12.3.8 P220 mA Output Damping ....................................................................................................162
12.3.9 P250 mA input range ............................................................................................................163
12.3.10 P255 mA Input Function .......................................................................................................163
12.3.11 P261 4 mA Input Trim ...........................................................................................................163
12.3.12 P262 20 mA Input Trim .........................................................................................................164
12.3.13 P270 Auxiliary Input Function ...............................................................................................165
12.4 Calibration Parameters (P295 – P360) .................................................................................167
12.4.1 P295 Load Cell Balancing ....................................................................................................167
12.4.2 P341 Days Of Service...........................................................................................................167
12.4.3 P350 Calibration Security .....................................................................................................168
12.5 Online Calibration Options (P355 - P358) ............................................................................168
12.5.1 P355 Online Calibration Feature ..........................................................................................168
12.5.2 P356 Online Calibration Reference Weight ..........................................................................168
12.5.3 P357 Online Calibration Limits .............................................................................................169
12.5.4 P358 Online Calibration Activation .......................................................................................169
12.5.5 P359 Factoring ......................................................................................................................169
12.5.6 P360 Calibration Duration .....................................................................................................169
12.5.7 P365 Multispan .....................................................................................................................170
12.5.8 P367 Direct Zero Entry .........................................................................................................170
12.5.9 P368 Direct Span Entry ........................................................................................................170
12.5.10 P370 Zero Limit Deviation % ................................................................................................171
12.5.11 P371 Auto Zero Initiation Upper Limit ...................................................................................171
12.5.12 P377 Initial Zero ....................................................................................................................171
12.5.13 P388 Initial Span ...................................................................................................................171
12.6 Linearization Parameters (P390 - P392) ..............................................................................172
12.6.1 P390 Linearizer .....................................................................................................................172
12.6.2 P391 Linearizer Load Points .................................................................................................172
12.6.3 P392 Linearizer Compensation % ........................................................................................172
12.6.4 P398-01 Moisture Content ....................................................................................................172
12.6.5 P398-02 Moisture Content ....................................................................................................172
12.6.6 P399 Incline Sensing ............................................................................................................173
12.7 Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Control ......................................................................173
12.7.1 P400 PID System..................................................................................................................173
12.7.2 P401 PID Update Time .........................................................................................................173
12.7.3 P402 PID Process Value Source ..........................................................................................174
12.7.4 P405 Proportional Term ........................................................................................................174
12.7.5 P406 Integral Term ...............................................................................................................174
12.7.6 P407 Derivative Term ...........................................................................................................174
12.7.7 P408 Feed Forward Term .....................................................................................................174
12.7.8 P410 Manual Mode Output ...................................................................................................175
12.7.9 P414 Setpoint Configuration .................................................................................................175
12.7.10 P415 Local Set point Value ..................................................................................................175
12.7.11 P416 External Setpoint .........................................................................................................176
12.7.12 P418 Remote Setpoint Ratio ................................................................................................176
12.7.13 P419 PID Freeze Option .......................................................................................................176
BW500 and BW500/L

Table of contents
12.8 Batch Control (P560 – P568) ............................................................................................... 176

12.8.1 P560 Batch Mode Control .................................................................................................... 176
12.8.2 P564 Batch Setpoint ............................................................................................................ 177
12.8.3 P566 Batch Pre-Warn .......................................................................................................... 177
12.8.4 P567 Batch Pre-Warn Setpoint ............................................................................................ 177
12.8.5 P568 Batch Pre-Act ............................................................................................................. 177
12.8.6 P569 Manual Batch Pre-Act Amount ................................................................................... 178
12.8.7 P598 Span Adjust Percentage ............................................................................................. 178
12.9 Totalization (P619 - P648) ................................................................................................... 178
12.9.1 P619 Totaling Dropout ......................................................................................................... 178
12.9.2 P620 Display Zero Dropout .................................................................................................. 178
12.9.3 P621 mA Zero Dropout ........................................................................................................ 179
12.9.4 P631 Totalizer Resolution .................................................................................................... 179
12.9.5 P634 Communication Totalizer Resolution .......................................................................... 180
12.9.6 P635 Verification Totalizer ................................................................................................... 180
12.9.7 P638 External Totalizer Resolution...................................................................................... 181
12.9.8 P643 External Contact Closure............................................................................................ 182
12.9.9 P647 Totalizer Display ......................................................................................................... 182
12.9.10 P648 Totalizer Reset, Internal ............................................................................................. 182
12.9.11 P680 Test Load: Weight (Options)....................................................................................... 183
12.9.12 P681 Total Mass of Test Weights ........................................................................................ 183
12.9.13 P682 Average Idler Spacing ................................................................................................ 183
12.9.14 P690 Speed Constant Entry ................................................................................................ 183
12.9.15 P691 Drive Pulley Diameter ................................................................................................. 184
12.9.16 P692 Pulses Per Sensor Revolution .................................................................................... 184
12.10 ECal Parameters (P693 – P698).......................................................................................... 184
12.10.1 P693 Load Cell Capacity Units ............................................................................................ 184
12.10.2 P694 ECal Load Cell Capacity............................................................................................. 184
12.10.3 P695 ECal Load Cell Sensitivity .......................................................................................... 185
12.10.4 P696 ECal Load Cell Excitation ........................................................................................... 185
12.10.5 P697 ECal Idler Spacing ...................................................................................................... 185
12.10.6 P698 ECal Conveyor Inclination .......................................................................................... 185
12.10.7 P699 ECal mV Span ............................................................................................................ 186
12.10.8 P735 Back Light ................................................................................................................... 186
12.10.9 P739 Time Zone................................................................................................................... 186
12.11 Communication (P740 - P799)............................................................................................. 187
12.11.1 P742 Word Order Parameter ............................................................................................... 187
12.11.2 P750 – P769 SmartLinx Module Specific Parameters ......................................................... 187
12.11.3 P770 – P789 Local Port Parameters ................................................................................... 187
12.12 SmartLinx Hardware Testing ............................................................................................... 187
12.12.1 P790 Hardware Error ........................................................................................................... 188
12.12.2 P791 Hardware Error Code ................................................................................................. 188
12.12.3 P792 Hardware Error Count ................................................................................................ 188
12.12.4 P794 SmartLinx Module Type.............................................................................................. 188
12.12.5 P795 SmartLinx Protocol ..................................................................................................... 189
12.12.6 P799 Communications Control ............................................................................................ 189
12.13 Test and Diagnostic (P900 - P951) ...................................................................................... 189
12.13.1 P900 Software Revision ....................................................................................................... 189
12.13.2 P901 Memory Test ............................................................................................................... 189
BW500 and BW500/L

Table of contents
12.13.3 P911 mA Output Test ...........................................................................................................190

12.13.4 P914 mA Input Value ............................................................................................................190
12.13.5 P918 Speed Input Frequency ...............................................................................................190
12.13.6 P931 Running Totalizer ........................................................................................................190
12.13.7 P940 Load Cell mV Signal Test ............................................................................................191
12.13.8 P943 Load Cell A/D Reference .............................................................................................191
12.13.9 P948 Error Log ......................................................................................................................191
12.13.10 P950 Zero Register ...............................................................................................................191
12.13.11 P951 Span Register ..............................................................................................................191
12.13.12 P952 Design Load ................................................................................................................192
12.13.13 P999 Master Reset ...............................................................................................................192
13 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................. 193
13.1 Generally ...............................................................................................................................193
13.2 Specifically ............................................................................................................................193
14 Certification ......................................................................................................................................... 197
14.1 Certification ...........................................................................................................................197
14.2 Parameters unlocked when certification switch is set: .........................................................197
14.3 Certification Printing ..............................................................................................................198
A Appendix............................................................................................................................................. 199
A.1 Appendix I .............................................................................................................................199
A.1.1 Memory Backup ....................................................................................................................199
A.1.2 Software Updates .................................................................................................................199
A.1.3 Calibration Criteria ................................................................................................................199
A.2 Appendix II ............................................................................................................................200
A.3 Technical support..................................................................................................................205
Glossary ............................................................................................................................................. 207
Index................................................................................................................................................... 211
BW500 and BW500/L

Table of contents
BW500 and BW500/L

Safety Notes 1
Special attention must be paid to warnings and notes.
WARNING
WARNING
It means that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result in death, serious
injury, and/or considerable material damage.
Note
It means important information about the product or that part of the operating manual.
BW500 and BW500/L

Safety Notes
BW500 and BW500/L

The Manual 2
Note
• The Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L are to be used only in the manner outlined in this
instruction manual.
• These products are intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
This instruction manual covers the operation, installation, and maintenance of Milltronics BW500
and BW500/L.
Please refer to this manual for proper installation and operation of your BW500 or BW500/L belt
scale integrator. As BW500 and BW500/L must be connected to a belt scale, and optionally a
speed sensor, refer to their manuals as well.
The manual is designed to help you get the most out of your BW500 and BW500/L, and it
provides information on the following:
• How to install the unit • Outline diagrams

• How to program the unit • Wiring diagrams
• How to operate the keypad and read the display • Parameter values
• How to do an initial Start Up • Parameter uses
• How to optimize and maintain accurate operation of • MODBUS register mapping
the unit
• Modem configuration
For the complete library of Siemens Milltronics manuals, go to Siemens Milltronics manuals
(www.siemens.com/weighing).
BW500 and BW500/L

The Manual
BW500 and BW500/L

Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L 3
Milltronics BW500
The Milltronics BW500 is a full-featured integrator for use with belt scales and weighfeeders. The
speed and load signals from the conveyor and scale, respectively, are processed to derive rate
of material flow, and totalization. The primary values of speed and load, and the derived values
of rate and total are available for display on the local LCD, or as output in the form of analog mA,
alarm relay and remote totalization.
Milltronics BW500/L
The Milltronics BW500/L is an integrator for use in basic belt scale or weighbelt applications. The
speed and load signals from the conveyor and scale, respectively, are processed to derive rate
of material flow, and totalization. The BW500/L does not include the advanced feature set for
control.
Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L features

BW500 and BW500/L support Siemens Milltronics Dolphin Plus software and Modbus protocol
on the two RS232 ports and the RS485 port for communication to customer PLC or computer.
BW500 and BW500/L also support Siemens SmartLinx for popular industrial communication
systems.
Reliable and robust user interface

● multi-field LCD display
● local keypad
Instrumentation I/O
BW500 BW500/L
Remote totalizer contacts 2 2
Programmable relays 5 2
Programmable discrete inputs 5 5
mA input 2 for PID1) control
mA output 3: rate, load, speed or PID1) 1: rate, load, speed
control
1) The optional mA I/O board is required for 3 outputs: PID control, moisture, and incline compensa-
tion.
BW500 and BW500/L

Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L
Popular Windows and Industrial communications

● Two RS232 ports
● One RS485 port
Individual port configuration for

● Dolphin Plus
● Modbus ASCII
● Modbus RTU
● Printer
● SmartLinx compatible
Controls and operation functions
BW500 BW500/L
Load linearization ✓ ✓
Auto zero ✓ ✓
PID control1) ✓
Batch control ✓
Multispan operation ✓
Moisture compensation1) ✓ fixed
Incline compensation1) ✓ fixed
Differential speed detection ✓
Real time clock ✓
1) The optional mA I/O board is required for 3 outputs: PID control, moisture, and incline compensa-
tion.
BW500 and BW500/L

Specifications 4
Specification
Power
• AC version 100 ... 240 V AC +/- 10%, 50/60 Hz, 55 VA max.
Fuse FU3 = 2AG, 2AMP, 250V Slo Blo
• DC version 10 - 30 V DC, 26 W max.
Fuse FU2 = 3.75A Resettable (not user replaceable)
Application
• Compatible with Siemens belt scales or equivalent 1,
2, 4, or 6 load cell scales (1 or 2 load cell scales for
BW500/L)
• Compatible with LVDT equipped scales, with use of
optional interface board
Accuracy 0.1 % of full scale
Resolution 0.02 % of full scale
Environmental
• Location Indoor/outdoor
• Altitude 2000 m max.
• Ambient temperature -20 to 50 °C (-5 to 122 °F)
• Relative humidity Suitable for outdoor (Type 4X / NEMA 4X /IP65 enclosure)
• Installation category II
• Pollution degree 4
Enclosure
• Type Type 4X / NEMA 4X / IP65
• Dimensions 285 mm W x 209 mm H x 92 mm D

(11.2" W x 8.2" H x 3.6" D)
• Material Polycarbonate
Programming Via local keypad and/or Dolphin Plus interface

Display Illuminated 5 x 7 dot matrix liquid crystal display with 2
lines of 40 characters each
Memory • Program and parameters stored in non-volatile FLASH
ROM, upgradable via Dolphin Plus interface
• Runtime totalizers and clock settings1) stored in battery
backed RAM, battery P/N PBD-20200035 or use
equivalent 3V Lithium battery (BR 2335), 5 year life
BW500 and BW500/L

Specifications
Inputs
Load cell 0 ... 45 mV DC per load cell
Speed sensor Pulse train 0 V low, 5 V high (TTL setting) or
10 ... 24 V high (HTL setting), 1 ... 3000 Hz or
open collector NPN switch or
relay dry contact
Auto zero Dry contact from external device
mA See optional mA I/O board 1)
Auxiliary 5 discrete inputs for external contacts (Low = 0 V, High =
10 ... 24 V), each programmable for either display scroll-
ing, totalizer 1 reset, zero, span, multispan, print, batch
reset, or PID function.
1) Not available with BW500/L.
Outputs
mA • 1 programmable 0/4 ... 20 mA, for rate, load, and
speed output
• Optically isolated
• 0.1 % of 20 mA resolution
• 750 Ω load max
• See optional mA I/O board 1)
Load cell 10 V DC compensated excitation for strain gauge type, 6
cells max, BW500 has 4 independent inputs, BW500/L
has 2. The maximum load, in either case, must not exceed
150 mA.
Speed sensor 12 V DC, 150 mA max. excitation
Remote totalizer 1 • Contact closure 10 ... 300 ms duration
• Solid state relay contact rated 30 V DC, 100 mA max.
• Max. contact on-resistance = 36 Ω
• Max. off-state leakage = 1 uA
Remote totalizer 2 • Contact closure 10 ... 300 ms duration
• Solid state relay contact rated 240 V AC/DC,
100 mA max.
• Max. contact on-resistance = 36 Ω
• Max. off-state leakage = 1 uA
Relay output
• BW500 5 alarm/control relays, 1 form 'A' SPST relay contact per
relay, max. 5 A at 30 V DC / 250 V AC non-inductive; min.
10 mA at 5 V DC
• BW500/L 2 alarm relays
BW500 and BW500/L

Specifications
Communications
Two RS232 ports
One RS485 port (isolated)
SmartLinx compatible (see Options below)
Cable
One load cell
• Non-sensing 4 wire shielded, 20 AWG or equivalent, 150 m (500 ft.)
max.
• Sensing 6 wire shielded, 20 AWG or equivalent, 300 m (1000 ft.)
max.
Two/four/six1) load cells
• Non-sensing 6 wire shielded, 20 AWG or equivalent, 150 m (500 ft.)
max.
• Sensing 8 wire shielded, 20 AWG or equivalent, 300 m (1000 ft.)
max.
Speed sensor 3 wire shielded, 18 AWG or equivalent, 300 m 1000 ft.)
Auto zero 1 pair, twisted/shielded, 18 AWG, 300 m (1000 ft.) max.
Remote total 1 pair, twisted/shielded, 18 AWG, 300 m (1000 ft.) max.
1) For four or six load cell scales, run two separate cables of the two load cell configuration. Four/six load cells not availa-
ble with BW500/L.
Options
• Speed Sensor Siemens MD-36/36A/256 or 2000A, RBSS, TASS,
WS100, or WS300, or compatible
• Dolphin Plus Siemens Windows based software interface (refer to as-
sociated product documentation)
• SmartLinx Modules protocol specific modules for interface with popular indus-
trial communications systems (refer to associated product
documentation)
mA I/O board1)
• Inputs • 2 programmable 0/4 ...20 mA for PID, control, incline,
and moisture compensation, and online calibration
• Isolated
• 0.1 % of 20 mA resolution
• 200 Ω input impedance
• Outputs • 2 programmable 0/4 ... 20 mA for PID control, rate,

load, and speed output
• Isolated
• 0.1% of 20 mA resolution
• 750 Ω load max.
BW500 and BW500/L

Specifications
Options
• Output supply Isolated 24 V DC at 50 mA, short circuit protected
LVDT interface card For interface with LVDT based scales

Weight 2.6 kg (5.7 lb)

Approvals
BW500 BW500/L
CE 1), CSA US/C, FM, RCM, GOST ✓ ✓
Legal for Canadian Trade - Measurement Canada approved ✓
Legal for US Trade - NTEP approved ✓
Legal for European Trade - MID approved ✓
Legal for International Trade - OIML approved ✓
1) EMC performance available upon request
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation 5
Note
• Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with local
governing regulations.
• This product is susceptible to electrostatic shock. Follow proper grounding procedures.
5.1 Dimensions
Note
Nonmetallic enclosure does not provide grounding between connections. Use grounding
type bushings and jumpers.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.1 Dimensions
① Lid screws (6 pieces)

② Customer mounting screw
③ Enclosure
④ Lid
⑤ Mounting hole (4 places)
⑥ Conduit entry area. Recommend drilling the enclosure with a hole saw and the use of suitable
cable glands to maintain ingress rating.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.2 Layout
5.2 Layout
① Battery, memory back up

② Port 3 (RJ-11)
③ Fuse FU3
④ Optional LVDT conditioner card4)
⑤ Optional Analog I/O board2)
⑥ Certification switch1)
⑦ Optional SmartLinx module3)
1) Applicable for trade approvals.
2) Not available for BW500/L.
3) To reduce communication interference, route SmartLinx cable along right side.
4) The LVDT card must be removed to access terminals below it.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.2 Layout
WARNING
• All field wiring must have insulation suitable for at least 250 V.
• DC input terminals shall be supplied from a source providing electrical isolation between
the input and output, in order to meet applicable safety requirements of IEC 61010-1.
• Relay contact terminals are for use with equipment having no accessible live parts and
wiring having insulation suitable for at least 250 V. The maximum allowable working
voltage between adjacent relay contact shall be 250 V.
• The non-metallic enclosure does not provide grounding between conduit connections.
Use grounding type bushings and jumpers.
Please note that the DC version of this layout will appear slightly differently.
Mounting the Enclosure

1. Remove the lid screws and open the lid to reveal the mounting holes.
2. Mark and drill four holes in the mounting surface for the four screws (customer supplied).
3. Fasten with a long screwdriver.
① Mounting holes
Note
• Recommended mounting: directly to wall or to electrical cabinet back panel with #6
screws
• If alternate mounting surface is used, it MUST be able to support four times the weight of
the unit.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.3 Optional Plug-ins
5.3.1 SmartLinx Module

BW500 and BW500/L is software/hardware ready to accept the optional Siemens SmartLinx
communications module that provides an interface to one of several popular industrial
communications systems.
BW500 and BW500/L may be shipped to you without a SmartLinx module, for installation at a
later date.
If you are ready to install your SmartLinx module, or want to change it, please follow the
instructions as outlined.
Installation
1. Isolate power and voltages applied to the BW500 and BW500/L
2. Open the lid
3. Install the module by mating the connectors and secure in place using the two screws
provided
4. Route communication cable to SmartLinx module along the right side of the enclosure wall.
This route will reduce communication
Note
Refer to the SmartLinx documentation for any required hardware settings prior to closing
the lid.
5. Close the lid.

6. Apply power and voltage to the BW500 and BW500/L.
Refer to
● SmartLinx Module in the Specifications (Page 17)
● P750 – P769 SmartLinx Module Specific Parameters in this manual under Parameters
(Page 153)
● the SmartLinx manual for wiring
5.3.2 mA I/O board

BW500 is software/hardware ready to accept the optional mA I/O board1). The mA I/O board
provides 2 programmable 0/4 to 20 mA outputs, 2 programmable 0/4 to 20 mA inputs and a
nominal 24 V DC supply for loop powered devices.
Note
Not available with the BW500/L
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
BW500 may be shipped to you without an mA I/O board, for installation at a later date.
If you are ready to install your mA I/O board, please follow the instructions as outlined.
Installation
1. Isolate power and voltages applied to the BW500
2. Open the lid
3. Install the board by mating the connectors and secure the card in place using the three
screws provided
4. Close the lid
5. Apply power and voltage to the BW500
Refer to
● Specifications (Page 17)
● mA I/O Board Connections (Page 43)
● mA I/O Parameters (P200 - P220) under mA I/O Parameters (P200 - P220) (Page 161)
● mA I/O (0/4-20 mA) in the mA I/O (0/4-20 mA) (Page 101) section.
5.3.3 LVDT Conditioner Card

BW500 is software/hardware ready to accept the optional LVDT conditioner card.
BW500 may be shipped to you without an LVDT conditioner card, for installation at a later date.
If you are ready to install your card, please follow the instructions as outlined.
Installation
1. Isolate power and voltages applied to the BW500
2. Open the lid
3. Install the three provided standoffs into the motherboard at the locations as shown in the
diagram in Layout.
4. Connect the wiring between the card and the motherboard according to the instructions in
Scale – LVDT.
5. Affix the card on the standoffs using the three screws provided.
6. Close and secure the lid.
7. Re-apply power and voltages to the the BW500.
Refer to
● Specifications (Page 17)
● Scale – LVDT (Page 34)
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
5.3.4 Optional Components and their Locations
① SmartLinx
② Route SmartLinx cable along right hand wall
③ LVDT conditioner card
④ mA I/O board
5.4 Interconnection
Note
• Wiring may be run via common conduit. However, these may not be run in the same
conduit as high voltage contact or power wiring.
• Ground shield at one point only.
• Insulate at junctions to prevent inadvertent grounding.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
5.4.1 System Diagram
① Belt scale, see Specifications (Page 17)

② Speed sensor, optional, see Specifications (Page 17)
③ mA output to customer device
④ mA output to customer device (optional I/O board required)
⑤ mA input from customer device (optional I/O board required)
⑥ Relay output, to customer device (2 for BW500/L)
⑦ Auxiliary inputs
⑧ Customer remote totalizer
⑨ Optional fieldbus connection (SmartLinx card required)
⑩ Communication ports can be configured for Siemens Milltronics Dolphin Plus, print data, or
Modbus ASCII or RTU protocol
⑪ Communication ports can be configured for Siemens Milltronics Dolphin Plus, print data, or
⑫ Communication ports can be configured for Siemens Milltronics Dolphin Plus, print data, or
⑬ Fieldbus communication
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
Note
Typical system capability. Not all components or their maximum quantity may be required.
5.4.2 Scale - One Load Cell
Siemens Belt Scale
① Customer junction box

② Load cell excitation
③ Load cell inputs
Note
Color code for load cells used on Siemens weighfeeders may be different than shown.
Please refer to the weighfeeder wiring diagram.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
Where separation between the BW500 and BW500/L and belt scale exceeds 150 m (500 ft.), or
legal for trade certification:
1. Remove jumpers from BW500 and BW500/L terminal 11/12 and 13/14
2. Run additional conductors from: BW500 and BW500/L terminal 12 to scale 'red' BW500 and
BW500/L terminal 13 to scale 'blk'
If the load cell wiring colors vary from those shown, or if extra wires are provided, consult
Siemens.
5.4.3 Scale - Two Load Cells

② Integrator
③ Load cell excitation
④ Load cell inputs
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
Note
Color code for load cells used on Siemens weighfeeders may be different than shown.
Please refer to the weighfeeder wiring diagram.
Where separation between the BW500 and BW500/L and belt scale exceeds 150 m (500 ft.), or
legal for trade certification:
1. remove jumpers from BW500 and BW500/L terminal 11/12 and 13/14.
2. run additional conductors from:
BW500 and BW500/L terminal 12 to scale 'red'
BW500 and BW500/L terminal 13 to scale 'blk'
Siemens.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
5.4.4 Scale - Four Load Cells

② Integrator
③ Load cell excitation
Where separation between the BW500 and belt scale exceeds 150 m (500 ft), or legal for trade
certification:
1. remove jumpers from BW500 terminal 11/12 and 13/14
BW500 terminal 12 to scale 'red'
BW500 terminal 13 to scale 'blk'
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
If the load cell wiring colours vary from those shown, or if extra wires are provided, consult
Siemens.
Note
Not available with the BW500/L.
5.4.5 Scale - Six Load Cells

② Integrator
③ Load excitation
Where separation between the BW500 and belt scale exceeds 150 m (500 ft), or legal for trade
certification:
1. remove jumpers from BW500 terminal 11/12 and 13/14
2. run additional conductors from: BW500 terminal 12 to scale 'red' BW500 terminal 13 to scale
'blk'
Siemens.
Note
Six Load Cells not applicable for the BW500/L.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.4 Interconnection
5.4.6 Scale - LVDT
① Siemens Milltronics LVDT Conditioner

② Load cell excitation
③ Siemens Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L
⑤ Maximum cable run LVDT to Conditioner 300 m (1000 ft)
⑥ Belt scale with LVDT
The LVDT Conditioner Card can be mounted on the BW500 or BW500/L Motherboard, or in a
remotely located enclosure. The above wiring diagram is for a remote mounted installation.
† For LVDT Conditioner cards that are mounted on the BW500 or BW500/L Motherboard, use 5
individual wires instead of the 4-conductor shielded cable shown above.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.5 Speed
♦ Cable shields must connect to ground only through the BW500 or BW500/L Motherboard
(TB15). They should not be grounded to the LVDT Conditioner Card enclosure or any other
location.
* Where separation between the BW500 or BW500/L and LVDT conditioner exceeds 150 m
(500 ft):
1. remove jumpers from BW500 and BW500/L terminal 11/12 and 13/14
BW500 terminal 12 to integrator terminal block '+EXC'
BW500 terminal 13 to integrator terminal block '-EXC'
Note
• LCA (Terminal 2) is jumpered to SHLD (Terminal 5), which internally connects to the load
cell circuit common.
• Do not connect to the Speed Sensor (Terminal 17) common, it is isolated from the load
cell circuitry.
5.5 Speed
5.5.1 Constant Speed (No Sensor)
If a speed sensor is not used, a jumper or

contact closure must be connected across
BW500 and BW500/L terminals 17 / 18 when
the conveyor is running. If a speed sensor is
used, ensure that the jumper is removed.
Note: With contact closed or jumpered when
the conveyor is idle, the integrator will contin-
ue totalizing.
① Speed sensor
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.5 Speed
5.5.2 Main Speed Sensor
① Speed sensor
② WS300 example
Note
Shields are common, but not grounded to chassis. Run cable shields through SHLD
terminals and ground at BW500 and BW500/L only.
Connect BW500 and BW500/L terminal 16 to speed sensor terminal:

● '2' for clockwise speed sensor shaft rotation
● '3' for counter-clockwise speed sensor shaft rotation.
Speed sensor shaft rotation is viewed from the front cover of the speed sensor enclosure.
Input device in the form of open collector transistor or dry contact across BW500 and BW500/L
terminals 16 / 17 will also serve as a suitable speed signal.
If a speed sensor other than the models shown is supplied, consult with Siemens for details.
For the Main Speed Sensor input, switch SW3 should be set to "HTL" for use with speed
sensors providing 12V output logic, open-collector NPN outputs or dry contacts. This "HTL"
setting provides a switching threshold of 5.5 V (nom.) with +/- 1V hysteresis and an internal pull-
up of 12 V through a 3.3 kohm resistor.
To use a speed sensor with 5 V logic-level outputs, the "TTL" setting on SW3 provides a
switching threshold of 2.9 V (nom.) with +/- 0.5 V hysteresis and an internal pull-up of 5V (nom.)
through a 1.5 kohm resistor.
A second speed sensor input can be added using the Auxiliary inputs: the second speed input
allows calculation of Differential Speed. For more information, see Auxiliary Inputs under
Parameters (Page 153).
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.5 Speed
5.5.3 Auxiliary Speed Sensor
① Speed sensor
Note
Shields are common, but not grounded to chassis. Run cable shields through SHLD
terminals and ground at BW500 only.
Connect any one of BW500 terminals 24 through 28 to speed sensor terminal:

● '2' for clockwise speed sensor shaft rotation
● '3' for counter-clockwise speed sensor shaft rotation.
Speed sensor shaft rotation is viewed from the front cover of the speed sensor enclosure.
An input device in the form of an open collector transistor, or dry contact may be connected
between BW500 terminal 29 (COM) and any one of the AUX inputs (terminals 24 through 28).
As per the "HTL" setting for the Main Speed Sensor input, an internal pullup of 12 V through a
3.3 kohm resistor is supplied, with a switching threshold of 5.5 V (nom.) and +/- 1 V hysteresis. If
a speed sensor other than the models shown is supplied, consult with Siemens.
Note
Auxiliary speed sensor not available for BW500/L.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.6 Auxiliary Inputs
5.6 Auxiliary Inputs
Customer dry contacts, or open collector transistor output supplied as required.

Refer to P270 (Page 165) for programming details.
5.7 Auto Zero
Prefeed activated dry contact.

Refer to Auto Zero (Page 76).
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.8 RS232 Port 1
5.8 RS232 Port 1
5.8.1 Printers
① Printer
② Receive
③ Common
5.8.2 Computers and Modems

For connection to a PC compatible computer or modem, using no flow control, typical
configurations are:
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.9 Remote Totalizer
5.9 Remote Totalizer
① Supply, 30 V max, Remote totalizer 1

② Supply, 240 V max, Remote totalizer 2
Note
External power supply not required on all totalizer models.
5.10 mA Output 1
to customer instrumentation, isolated mA out-

put, 750 Ω maximum load
5.11 Relay Output
Relays shown in de-energized state, contacts normally open, rated 5 A at 250 V noninductive.
Note
BW500/L has relay 1 and 2 only
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.12 RS485 Port 2
5.12 RS485 Port 2

5.12.1 Daisy Chain
① Customer device
5.12.2 Terminal Device
① Customer device
5.13 RS232 Port 3
Note
Jumper pins 4-6 and 7-8 on the DB9 connector when using hardware flow control.
Otherwise, leave them open.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.14 Power Connections
5.14 Power Connections

The BW500 is available in AC or DC power models.
Note
AC power connections
1. The equipment must be protected by a 15 A fuse or a circuit breaker in the building
installation.
2. A circuit breaker or switch in the building installation, marked as the disconnect switch,
shall be in close proximity to the equipment and within easy reach of the operator
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.15 mA I/O Board Connections
5.15 mA I/O Board Connections
① Auxiliary supply output, isolated 24 V DC at 50 mA, short circuit protected

② From customer instrumentation, isolated mA input, 200 Ω
③ From customer instrumentation, isolated mA input, 200 Ω
④ To customer instrumentation, isolated mA output, 750 Ω maximum load
⑤ To customer instrumentation, isolated mA output, 750 Ω maximum load
Note
mA I/O Board connections are not available for BW500/L.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
5.16 Installing/replacing the back-up battery

The battery (see Specifications (Page 17)) should be replaced every 5 years to ensure back up
during lengthy power outages. An on board capacitor provides 20 minutes of charge to preserve
the memory while the battery is being changed.
Note
The unit is supplied with one battery (battery P/N PBD-20200035 (BR2335) or use
equivalent 3 V Lithium battery). Insert the battery into the holder as described below before
using the BW500 and BW500/L.
WARNING
Power
Disconnect power before installing or replacing the battery.
Installation steps:
1. Open the enclosure lid.
2. Slide the battery into the holder. Be sure to align the + and – terminals correctly.
3. Close and secure enclosure lid.
BW500 and BW500/L

Installation
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up 6
Note
For successful start up, ensure that all related system components, such as the belt scale
and speed sensor, are properly installed and connected.
BW500 and BW500/L operates under two modes: RUN and PROGRAM. On initial powerup, the
unit starts in the PROGRAM mode.
6.1 Keypad
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.2 Program Mode
Key Function
PROGRAM mode RUN mode
In view mode: scrolls through changes PID local setpoint
parameter list values
decimal key prints
minus key switches PID between auto and

manual mode
opens RUN mode
opens parameter direct entry opens PROGRAM mode
initiates calibration initiates calibration
clears entry
toggles between view and edit

modes, confirms parameter
values
opens RUN mode changes RUN mode display
starts totalizer 1 reset sequence
6.2 Program Mode

The PROGRAM parameters define the calibration and operation of the BW500 and BW500/L.
In PROGRAM mode, the user can view the parameter values or edit them to suit the application.
6.2.1 Program Mode Display

VIEW
P001 Language V
1-En 2-Fr 3-De 4-Es 5-It 6-Po 7-Ru 1
EDIT
P001 Language E
1-En 2-Fr 3-De 4-Es 5-It 6-Po 7-Ru 1
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.2 Program Mode
6.2.2 To enter PROGRAM mode

Press the following key to access the parameter:
P001 Language V
1-En 2-Fr 3-De 4-Es 5-It 6-Po 7-Ru 1
The default of previous parameter view is displayed. For example, P001 is the default parameter for
initial start up
To select a parameter
Press the following key to move up:
P002 Test Reference Selection V

1-Weight, 2-Chain, 3-Ecal 1
For example, scrolls up from P001 to P002
Press the following key to move down:
P001 Language V
1-En 2-Fr 3-De 4-Es 5-It 6-Po 7-Ru 1
For example, scrolls down from P002 to P001
To access parameter directly

Press the following key to access the parameter:
View/Edit Parameter
Enter Parameter Number
Press the following keys in sequence:
P011 Design Rate: V

Enter Rate 100.00 kg/h
For example: access P011, design rate
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.2 Program Mode
Or press the following for the direct access of parameters:
P940-2 Load Cell mV Signal Test V

mV reading for B 6.78
For example: access P940-2, load cell B mV signal
To change a parameter value
P011 Design Rate: V

From the view mode
Press the following key:
P011 Design Rate: E

If edit mode is not enabled after pressing ENTER, security is locked. Refer toSecurityLock (P000)
under Parameters for instructions on disabling.
Press the following key to enter the new value
P014 Design Speed V

Enter Speed 0.08 m/s
For P001 to P017, ENTER effects the change and scrolls to the next required parameter.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.3 Initial Start Up
To reset a parameter value

P011 Design Rate: E

From the edit mode
P011 Design Rate: V

Value is reset to factory value. For example: 0.00 kg/h
6.2.3 RUN Mode

To operate BW500 and BW500/L in the RUN mode, the unit must undergo an initial
programming to set up the base operating parameters.
Attempting to enter the RUN mode without satisfying the program requirements forces the
program routine to the first missing item.

Initial start up of BW500 and BW500/L consists of several stages, and assumes that the physical
and electrical installation of the belt scale and speed sensor, if used, is complete:
● power up
● programming
● load cell balancing
● zero and span calibration
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.3.1 Power Up
Upon initial power up, BW500 and BW500/L displays:
P001 Language V
1-En 2-Fr 3-De 4-Es 5-It 6-Po 7-RU 1
The initial display prompts the user to select the preferred language.
6.3.2 Programming
Press:
BW500 and BW500/L then scrolls sequentially through the start up program as parameters P001
through P017 are addressed.
P002 Test Reference Selection V

Select 1-Weight, 2-Chain, 3-Ecal 1
For example: Accept ’weight’ (supplied with scale) as the test reference.
P003 Number of Load Cells V

Enter Number of Load Cells 2
For example: accept ’2’ as the number of load cells.
Note
For six load cell belt scales, select 4.
P004 Rate Measurement System V

Select 1-Imperial, 2-Metric 2
For example: Accept ’2’ for measurements in metric.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
P005 Design Rate Units: V

Select: 1-t/h, 2-kg/h, 3-kg/min 1
For example: accept ’1’ for units in t/h
Note
t/h equals metric tonnes per hour.
Press the following key: 1)
P008 Date: V
Enter YYYY-MM-DD 1999-03-192)
1) Not applicable for the BW500/L
2) default date
P008 Date: E
Enter YYYY-MM-DD 1999-03-19
For example, enter current date of March 19, 1999
Press the following keys in a sequence1):
P009 Time: V
Enter HH-MM-SS 00-00-00
1) Factory set time 24 hour clock
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
P009 Time: E
Enter HH-MM-SS 00-00-00
For example: enter current time of 14:41
Press the following keys in a sequence:
P011 Design Rate1): V

Enter Rate 0.00 t/h
1) Factory design rate
P011 Design Rate: E

Enter Rate 0.00 t/h
For example: rate of 100 t/h
Press the keys in the following sequence:
P014 Design Speed1) V

1) Factory design speed
P014 Design Speed E

For example: speed of 0.8 m/s
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
P015-01 Speed Constant V

Pulses/m 0.0000
Note: If the speed input is configured for constant speed, display value reads ‘Jumpered’.
Press the following key to advance:
If the speed input is connected to a speed sensor, pressing enter at P015 invokes P690 for data
entry. Press the following key:
P690-01 Speed Constant Entry E

1-Calculated, 2-Sensor Data 1
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
Select: 1 - Calculated Select: 2 - Sensor Data

The program returns to P015. Calculate the The program advances through parameters P691
value per Parameter P690. and P692 prompting entry from the sensor name-
plate. From this data, the speed constant is calcu-
lated and automatically entered into P015.
P015-01 Speed Constant E P691-01 Step 1: V

Pulses/m 0.0000 Drive Pully Diameter 0.00 mm
Press the following keys in the P692-01 Step 2: V
given sequence: Pulses per sensor Rev. 0.00
Enter Pulses
P015-01 Speed Constant V
Pulses/m 0.0000
For example: speed constant
of 100.3 pulses per meter
This value is calculated. For manual or automatic calculation, refer to P690 on page 143. To program
Differential Speed (P015-02), follow steps above for P015-01.
P016 Belt Length V
Enter Length 0.00
m
factory set length
Press the following key: For example
belt length of
25 m
P016 Belt Length E

Enter Length 0.000
m
For example belt length of 25 m
Press the following keys:
P017 Test Load: Weight MS 1 V

Enter test load 0.00
kg/m
If P002 Test Load Reference had been set for 2-Chain, the display would read:
P017 Test Load: Chain MS 1 V
Enter test load 0.00 kg/m
or, if 3-ECal refer to ECal parameters (P693 - P699 on page 144)
P017 Test Load: ECal MS 1 V
Enter test load 0.00 kg/m
or, if P002 is set to 1-Weight, pressing enter at P017 invokes P680 for data entry.

1-Enter Value, 2-Enter Data 0
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.4 Load Cell Balancing
Select: 1 - Enter Value Select: 2 - Enter Data

The program returns to P017.
Press The program advances through parameters P681
and P682 prompting entry of the total mass of all
the test weights used for SPAN calibration and
the average measured idler space before and
after the scale. From this data the test load is
calculated and automatically entered into P017
P017 Test Load: Weight MS 1 E P681 Step 1: V
Enter test load Total Mass of Test Weights 0.00 kg
00.00
Press Units are selected in P004: metric, imperial.
For example: test load of 20.5 P682 Step 2: V

kg/m Average Idler Space m
Enter test load 00.00
Note
For a two or three idler system, multiply the average idler space by the number of scale
idlers. For example, 1.5 m idler space with 2 scale idlers equals 3 m.
This value is calculated. For manual or automatic calculation, refer to P680. The test load value
should be less than the design load. If not, contact Siemens.
The initial programming requirements are now satisfied. To ensure proper entry of all critical
parameter values, return to P002 and review parameters through to P017.
Note
Load cell balancing is not required if the selected test reference is ECal (P002 = 3). In the
case of ECal, the load cells are balanced by the ECal procedure.
If you are operating a two or four load cell belt scale, it is recommended that the load cells be
balanced electronically prior to initial programming and calibration, or after either or both load
cells have been reinstalled or replaced.
Unbalanced load cells can adversely affect the performance of your belt conveyor weighing
system.
With the conveyor stopped and locked out, lift the belt off the weighing idlers.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.4.1 Typical Two Load cell belt scale
① Belt travel
② Load cell B
③ Test weight bar
④ Load cell A
6.4.1.1 Access P295
P295 Load Cell Balancing: E

Select: 1-A&B, 2-C&D 0
Option ’2’ enabled only if P003, number of load cells is 4
Load Cell Balancing A & B

Place weight at cell B and press ENTER
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
① Test weight

Place weight at cell A and press ENTER
① Test weight
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up

Load cells are now balanced
Balancing the load cells requires a subsequent zero and span calibration
If four load cell scale, press the following key to continue:
P295 Load Cell Balancing: V

Select: 1-A&B, 2-C&D 1
P295 Load Cell Balancing: E

Select:1-A&B, 2-C&D 1
Load Cell Balancing C & D

Place weight at cell D and press ENTER
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
① Test weight
Load Cell Balancing C & D

Place weight at cell C and press ENTER
① Test weight
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
Load Cell Balancing C &D

Load cells are now balanced
Balancing the load cells requires a subsequent zero and span recalibration
6.4.2 Balancing six load cell belt scales

For a six load cell belt scale, the six load cells are connected into four inputs. Load cells A, C
and E are connected into inputs A and C; load cells B, D and F are connected into inputs B and
D.
Balancing load cells is still recommended to optimize system accuracy. The balancing needs to
be done twice, once for P295–01 = A and B and then once for P295–02 = C and D.
Three weights that are all very close to the same mass are required.
6.4.2.1 Balancing for A and B

1. Place one weight at load cell B, one weight at load cell D and one weight at load cell F, all at
the same time.
2. Start the balancing procedure for A and B.
3. Press enter for B.
4. Move the 3 weights to A, C and E.
5. Press enter for A.
Balance for A side and B side is complete.
6.4.2.2 Balancing for C and D

1. Move all the weights back to B, D and F.
2. Set P295 to C and D.
3. Press enter for D (or B, depending on software revision).
4. Move the 3 weights again to A, C and E.
5. Press enter for C (or A, depending on software revision).
Balance for C and D is complete. Remove the weights and perform zero calibrations.
Note
After balancing is complete, applying a weight on A or B side should not result in the digital
count values from PAR 943 being out by no more than a difference of 100.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
6.4.3 Zero Calibration
Note
To obtain an accurate and successful calibration, ensure that the required criteria are met.
Refer to Calibration Criteria (Page 199).
Zero Calibration: Current Zero 0

Clear belt. Press ENTER to Start
The current zero count
Initial Zero Calibration. In progress %

Current Reading: #####
The zero count being calculated while calibration is in progress
The duration of the Zero calibration is dependent on speed (P014), length (P016), and
revolutions (P360) of the belt.
Calibration Complete. Deviation 0.00

Press ENTER to accept value: 551205
The deviation from previous zero. For an initial zero there is no previous zero; hence the deviation is
0. For example: the new zero count, if accepted
Zero Calibration. Current Zero 551205

Clear belt. Press ENTER to Start
Accepting the Zero returns to start of Zero. A new Zero can be performed, or continue to Span.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
Note
The moisture meter is ignored during calibration. If inclinometer is used, then calibration is
adjusted based on incline angle.
Span Calibration
When performing a Span Calibration where the test reference is ECal (P002 = 3), the supplied
test weight or test chain must not be applied, and the conveyor must be run empty.
Note
With the conveyor stopped and locked out, apply the test weight or chain to the scale as
instructed in the associate manuals; then start the conveyor.
Span Calibration Current Span 0

Setup test Press ENTER to Start
For example: the current span count.
Initial Span Calibration in progress %

Current Reading ####
The span count being calculated while calibration is in progress.
The duration of the Span calibration is dependent on speed (P014), length (P016), and
revolutions (P360) of the belt.
Span Count Too Low

Press CLEAR to continue
● signal from load cell too low, ensure proper test weight or chain is applied during calibration
● check for proper load cell wiring and ensure shipping brackets have been removed.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
Calibration Complete Deviation 0.00

Press ENTER to accept value: 36790
● the deviation from the previous span. For an initial span, there is no previous span count;
hence the deviation is 0.
● For example: the new span count, if accepted.
Span Calibration. Current Span 36790

Setup test. Press ENTER to Start
Accepting the Span returns to start of Span. A new Span can be performed, or enter RUN mode.
If calibrating with a test weight or test chain, remove it from the scale and store in a secure place
before returning to RUN mode.
Note
The moisture meter is ignored during calibration. If the Inclinometer is used, then calibration
is adjusted based on incline angle.
6.4.4 RUN Mode

Proper programming and successful zero and span calibration allow entry into the RUN mode.
Otherwise, entry is denied and the first missing item of programming or calibration is displayed.
Rate 0.00 t/h

Total 1 0.00 t
For example: if there is no material on the belt and the conveyor is running. The current rate is 0 and
no material has been totalized.
Once the initial programming is complete and the BW500 and BW500/L is operating in the RUN
mode, you may now put the belt conveyor into normal service. The BW500 is functioning under
its initial program and calibration, reporting rate of material flow and totalizing.
BW500 and BW500/L

Start Up
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration 7
7.1 Belt Speed Compensation
To achieve optimum accuracy in the rate computation, the belt speed displayed must equal that
of the actual belt speed. As the speeds are likely to differ, a belt speed compensation should be
performed.
Run the conveyor with the belt empty.
View the belt speed.
7.1.1 Access P018
P018 Speed Adjust V

Enter New Speed 0.60
For example: current speed of 0.6 m/s
Stop the conveyor and measure a length of the belt; marking the forward end (start time) and the
back end (stop time). Use the belt scale as the stationary reference.
Run the belt and measure the time for the belt length to pass over the scale.
speed = (belt length / time) m/s or ft/min.
Refer to the Start Up (Page 47) section for instructions on parameter selection and changing
values.
P018 Speed Adjust E

Enter New Speed 0.60
For example: current speed of 0.6 m/s and enter correct speed of 0.63 m/s.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.2 Material Tests
P015 Speed Constant V

Pulses/m 97.5169
Speed sensor constant, adjust for P015
P014 Design Speed V

For constant speed (jumper), adjusts P014
The displayed speed (used in the rate computation) now equals the actual speed.
Note
When the speed adjust is entered, the instantaneous speed of the BW500 at that time is
used; this may cause an additional error if the speed is not checked again compared to the
BW500. Continue checking the speed against the BW500 and adjusting until the speed can
be matched exactly to when the input is entered.
7.2 Material Tests

Perform material tests to verify the accuracy of the span calibration and compensate for material
flow. If the material tests indicate a repeatable deviation exists, perform a manual span adjust
(P019). This procedure automatically alters the span calibration and adjusts the test load (P017)
value, yielding more accurate span recalibrations.
If the span adjust value is within the accuracy requirements of the weighing system, the material
test was successful. Resume normal operation.
If the span adjust value is not acceptable, repeat the material test to verify repeatability. If the
result of the second material test differs considerably, consult Siemens or contact your local
Siemens representative.
If the span adjust values are significant and repeatable, perform a manual span adjust.
Note
Test weights are NOT used during material tests.
There are two methods of executing the manual span adjust: % Change and Material Test
● % Change: based on the material test, the difference between the actual weight of material
and the weight reported by the BW500 and BW500/L is calculated and entered into P019 as
% change.
● Material Test: based on material test, the actual weight of material is entered into P019
The method of execution is a matter of preference or convenience, and either way yields the
same result.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.2 Material Tests
7.2.1 %Change
To run a %Change material test:
1. Run the belt empty
2. Perform a zero calibration
3. Put the BW500 and BW500/L into RUN mode
4. Record the BW500 and BW500/L total as the start value _ _ _ _ _ _ _
5. Run material at a minimum of 50% of design rate over the belt scale for a minimum of 5
minutes
6. Stop the material feed and run the conveyor empty
7. Record the BW500 and BW500/L total as the stop value _ _ _ _ _ _ _
8. Subtract the start value from the stop value to determine the BW500 and BW500/L total
9. Weigh the material sample if not already known
BW500 and BW500/L total = _ _ _ _ _ _ _
material sample weight = _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Calculate the span adjust value
% span adjust = (BW500 - material sample weight) x 100/ material sample weight
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.2 Material Tests
7.2.1.1 Access P019 and enter EDIT mode
P019 Manual Span Adjust E

Select 1-% Change 2-Material Test 0
P598 Span Adjust Percentage V

Enter Calculated +/- error 0.00
P598 Span Adjust Percentage E

Enter Calculated +/- error 0.00
if % change is negative, remember to enter the minus sign, for example, -1.3.
P017 Test Load Weight:MS1 V

Enter Test load 56.78
For example: the new test load value is displayed
7.2.2 Material Test
Access P019 and enter EDIT mode
P019 Manual Span Adjust E

Select 1-% Change 2-Material Test 0
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.2 Material Tests
Material Test
Add to Totalizer 0-No 1-Yes
If yes, the weight of the material test will be added to the totalizer, if no, material is Material Test
added to test totalizer (4) only. For example, do not add weight of material test to totalizer.
Material Test
Press ENTER to start
Material Test tonnes

Press ENTER to start #.### t
The totalizer reading as the material test is run.
Material Test 964.032 t

ENTER actual amount tonnes
For example: the weight totalized by the belt scale and BW500 and BW500/L 975.633 kg is the actual
weight of the material test.
Material Test Deviation -1.19

Accept 0-No, 1-Yes
The calculated deviation is displayed as a % of the actual weight.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.3 Design Changes
P017 Test Load Weight: MS1 V

Enter Test Load 56.78
For example, the new test load value is displayed.
Verify the results of the span adjust by material test or return to normal operation.
7.3 Design Changes

Where parameters have been changed with a resultant impact on the calibration, they do not
take effect until a recalibration is done.
If significant changes have been made, an initial zero (P377) and/or initial span (P388) may be
required (See, under P377 (Page 171) or P388 (Page 171)).
7.4 Recalibration
To maintain the accuracy of the weighing system, periodic zero and span recalibration is
required. Recalibration requirements are highly dependent upon the severity of the application.
Perform frequent checks initially, then as time and experience dictate, the frequency of these
checks may be reduced. Record deviations for reference.
The displayed deviations are referenced to the previous zero or span calibration. Deviations are
continuously tallied for successive zero and span calibrations, and when exceed their limit
(+12.5 and -12.5 from the initial zero or span), indicate an error message that the deviation or
calibration is out of range.
7.4.1 Routine Zero
Note
Press the follwoing key:
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
Zero Calibration. Current Zero. 551205

Clear belt. Press ENTER to start
For example: the current zero count.
Zero Calibration in progress %

Current Reading: 0.01 kg/m
For example: the load reported while calibration is in progress
Calibration complete. Deviation 0.02

Press ENTER to accept value 551418
For example: the calculated deviation in % of full span and the new zero count, if accepted.
A deviation that is high (Siemens recommends 3 or higher) should be investigated further to

identify the source).
Calibration is out of range 403.37

Deviation report:
If unacceptable, press the following key to restart:
This indicates that the mechanical system is errant. P377, initial zero, should be used judiciously
and only after a thorough mechanical investigation.
The cause of the increased deviation must be found and rectified. A zero recalibration as
previously described can then be retried.
If the operator deems this deviation to be acceptable, set P377 to 1 to invoke an initial zero
calibration. Further deviation limits are now based on this new initial zero.

For example: zero calibration is accepted, played as the current zero.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
Note
This is the end of zero calibration. Proceed with zero, or span recalibration, or return to RUN.
7.4.2 Initial Zero

Perform an initial zero if necessary when calibration is out of range message is shown. During
this step the progress of the process will be shown on the display with a progress indicator in %.
P377 Initial Zero E

Enter 1 to start initial Zero 0
Press the following keys

For example, the current zero.
Initial Zero Calibration in progress %

For example, the zero count being calculated while calibration is in progress.

For example: the deviation in % from previous zero. The new zero count if accepted. If unacceptable,
press the following key to restart:
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
Press

For example, the current zero count.
Note
This is the end of zero calibration. Proceed with span recalibration or return to RUN.
7.4.3 Direct Zero

Use direct zero entry (P367) when replacing software or hardware, if it is not convenient to
perform an initial zero. A record of the last valid zero count is required.
P367 Direct Zero Entry E

Enter Zero Count 0
Zero Calibration. Current Zero V

Enter Zero Count 551401
For example, the last valid zero count.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
7.4.4 Auto Zero

The Auto Zero function is useful in outdoor applications where there are fluctuations in
temperature, causing the zero to change throughout the day.
Auto Zero provides automatic zero calibration in the RUN mode under the following conditions:
● the auto zero input (terminals 29/30) is in a closed state; jumper or remote contact
● the load on the belt is within the programmed percentage (P371) based on the design load
(P952)
Note
Set Parameter P371 to a value from 1 to 10%, default is 2%. See “P371 Auto Zero
Initiation Upper Limit (Page 171)"
● the terminal and load status coincide for at least one belt revolution
The rate display is interrupted by the Auto Zero routine.
Rate 0.00 t/h

Total 1: 0.00 tonnes AZ
(AZ flashes on and off)
Note
t/h equals metric tonnes per hour
Calibration Complete. Deviation 0.0

Auto-Zero value 551410
For example, typical zero and deviation values.
The duration of the auto zero is one or more belt revolutions (P360). If either condition is
interrupted during that period, the auto zero is aborted and the RUN display is resumed. After
one belt revolution, another auto zero will be attempted if the input and load conditions are met.
If the resulting zero deviation is less than an accumulated 2% from the last operator initiated
zero, the auto zero is accepted.
If the deviation is greater than an accumulated 2%, an error message is displayed. The error
message is cleared after five seconds, however if a relay is programmed for diagnostics, it
remains in alarm so long as the Auto Zero conditions are being met.
If material feed resumes during an auto zero function and is greater than the maximum load on
the belt (P371), the totalizing function is maintained.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
7.4.5 Routine Span
Note

Setup test. Press ENTER to start
For example: the current span count
Zero should be done prior to Span

Setup test. Press Enter to start.
Perform a zero calibration or press:
Span Calibration in progress %

Current Reading: 55.56 kg/m
The load reported while calibration is in progress.

For example: the deviation in % from previous span, if the new span count is accepted. If unaccepta-
ble, press the following key to restart:
A deviation that is high (Siemens recommends three or higher) should be investigated further to
identify the source).
Note
During this step the progress of the process will be shown on the display with a progress
indicator in %.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
Span Count too Low.

Press CLEAR to continue.
Signal from load cell too low: ensure shipping brackets are removed and proper test weight or chain is
applied during span.
Calibration aborted
Belt speed is too low:
For example: belt speed is <10% of design (P014).
Calibration is out of range Deviation Error: XX.XX
This indicates that the mechanical system is errant. The use of P388, initial span, should be
used judiciously and only after a thorough mechanical investigation has been exercised.
Find and rectify the cause of the increased or decreased deviation. Then re-try a span
recalibration.
If this deviation is still unacceptable, set P388 to 1 to invoke an initial span calibration. Further
deviation limits are now based on this new initial span.

For example: span calibration is accepted and displayed as the current value.
7.4.6 Initial Span
Note
Perform an initial span when a calibration out of range message appears.
During this step the progress of the process will be shown on the display with a progress
indicator in %.
A zero calibration should be performed prior to performing a span calibration.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
P388-01 Initial Span E

Enter 1 to start Initial Span 0

Setup test. Press ENTER to start 0
Zero should be done prior to Span

Perform a zero calibration or clear.
Initial Span Calibration in progress

The span count being calculated while calibration is in progress.

The deviation is reset. For example, the new span value if accepted or unacceptable, press the follow-
ing key to restart:
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration

Note
End of span calibration. Remove the test weight and return to RUN.
7.4.7 Direct Span

Direct span entry (P368) is intended for use when replacing software or hardware, and when it is
not convenient to perform an initial span. A record of the last valid span count is required.
P368-01 Direct Span Entry E

Enter Span Count 0
Press the following keys in a given sequence:
P368-01 Direct Span Entry V

Enter Span Count 41900
For example: the last valid span count.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
7.4.8 Multispan
The BW500 offers a multispan function, which allows the BW500 to be calibrated for up to eight
different feed conditions that would produce varying load characteristics. Different feed
conditions are typically related to the running of different materials or multiple feed locations. The
varying load characteristic often has a bearing on the belt tension, and is observed especially
when in close proximity to the scale. To accommodate such scale applications, a span
correction can be made by selecting and applying the appropriate span.
Since every material has its own unique physical properties, and may load the belt differently, a
span calibration may be required for each material to realize maximum accuracy.
In the case of different feeder locations, a span calibration may be required to match each
feedpoint or combination of feedpoints.
Each time one of the eight conditions is in effect, the corresponding multispan is selected prior to
putting the BW500 into the RUN mode. The selection is made by either changing the multispan
operation number, accessed via P365, or by external contacts connected to the Auxiliary input,
and programmed via P270.
To enable multispan operation, the following must be addressed.
● connections
● programming
● calibration
● operation
Note
Multispan is not available with BW500/L.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
Connections
If the span selection is to be done by remote contact, the following connections would apply.
Otherwise, no additional connections to the BW500 are required.
Multispan Selection of Spans 1 and 2 Multispan Selection of Spans 1 to 8
*Remote contact can be from relay, open collector switch, or BCD switch.
7.4.8.1 Programming
P365 Multispan E
Select [1-8] 0
Span 1 will have already been set as part of the Start Up and initial calibration. Therefore, select
2.
P017 Test Load: Weight MS2 E

Enter test load 0
Enter the test load value, and press the following key to do a span calibration:
To do a span calibration for another condition, (i.e. span 3 or 4 etc.), access P365 and repeat
these steps for each condition. As with any initial span, follow the span calibration for each
multispan with a material test and factoring.
To use remote span selection, auxilliary Inputs, 1 and/or 2 or 3, are programmed to read the
contact state as the span selection. Remote selection overrides the keypad (or Dolphin Plus)
selection. The auxilliary inputs override the keypad selection.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
P270-01 Auxiliary Input Function E

Select Function [0-13] 0
Enter the following key:
These programs Auxiliary Input 1 (terminal 24) to read the contact state for span selections: 1 or
2.
Access P270 and enter EDIT mode (when using spans 3 and/or 4)
If spans 3 and/or 4 are to be used:
Access P270 and enter EDIT mode (when using spans 3 and/or 4)

This programs Auxiliary Input 2 (terminal 25), in conjunction with Auxiliary input 1 reads the
contact state for the span selections 3 and 4.
Access P270 and enter EDIT mode (when using spans 5 to 8)

If spans 5, 6, 7, and/or 8 are to be used:
Access P270 and enter EDIT mode (when using spans 5 to 8)

This programs Auxiliary Input 3 (terminal 26), in conjunction with Auxiliary input 1 and Auxiliary
input 2 to read the contact state for span selections 5, 6, 7, and 8. Remote selection of a span is
not enabled until a span calibration has been done. Initial span selection must be done via the
Multispan parameter, P365.
Initial multispan calibration or span selection is made via the Multispan parameter (P365).
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.4 Recalibration
Operation
When span calibration is done, press the following key to revert to the RUN mode.
Rate kg/h 0.00 kg/h Multispan 2

Total 1: 0.00 kg
For example: if there is no material on the belt and the conveyor is running. The current rate is 0 and
no material has been totalized.
When the material to be run on the belt changes, the multispan is changed to the corresponding
span. This is completed either by changing the span value entered in P365, or by closing the
appropriate contacts connected to the programmed Auxiliary inputs.
Span Auxiliary Input Multispan Multispan

Aux 1 Selection Aux 2 Selection Aux 3
1
It may be required to reset or note the totalizer value, as the process materials being conveyed
change. Refer to Operation. (Page 97)
Linearization applies concurrently to spans.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.5 Online Calibration

The Online Calibration feature may be used to routinely check, and if necessary adjust, the Span
calibration in RUN mode, without interrupting the material flow or process.
Note
Not available with BW500/L.
Install a weigh bin, (bin or silo equipped to

provide a 4 to 20 mA output proportional to
weight), preceding the material infeed.
Connect the weigh bin to one of the mA inputs
on the optional mA I/O board of the BW500:
either mA input 1, terminals 5 and 6; or mA
input 2, terminals 7 and 8.
Install a material feed control device, preced-
ing the weigh bin.
① Feeder
② Max. (e.g. 90%)
③ High (e.g. 70%)
④ Reference weight: (the amount of material held between High and Low levels)
⑤ Low (e.g. 30%)
Note
• Press the "PAR" key twice, to enter a parameter number directly.
• Whenever you wish to change a value, press "ENTER" to enable the EDIT mode.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
P355 Online Calibration Feature E

Select: 0-Off, 1-On 0
EDIT mode: value can be changed.
Select the Online Calibration feature:

7.5.1 Online Calibration feature

Access
P355 Online Calibration Features V

Select: 0-Off, 1-On 1
Value is accepted.
Enter the weigh bin reference weight, (the amount of material the bin holds between the high
and low levels), in units selected in P005.
Access

Select: 0-Off, 1-On 10.000
For example: reference bin weight.
Enter the max., high, and low limit setpoints as a percentage in P357.
P357-01 Online Calibration Limits V

MAX Limit: 90.0
Limit as a percentage
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
Access

HIGH Limit: 70.0
Access

LOW Limit: 30.0
Calibrate the mA inputs on the BW500 to the 4 and 20 mA levels of the weigh bin. 4 mA is
calibrated with the weigh bin empty, using P261-01 or –02. 20 mA is calibrated with the weigh
bin full, using P262-01 and P262-02.
Assign one of the mA inputs for the Online Calibration function.
Access
P255-01 mA Input Function V

Select 0, 1-PID SP, 2-PID FV, 3-OCAL 3
For example: mA input 1 set to 3.
Assign one of the 5 relays, P100-01 to P100-05, to the Online Calibration function.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
Access
P100-01 Relay Function V

Select Function [0-9] (see manual) 9
For example: relay 1 set to 9.
Program the assigned relay using P118, relay logic, so that when you connect the assigned
relay to the weigh bin material feed control device, the weigh bin material feed stops when the
Online relay is energized.
7.5.2 Activate Online Calibration

Activate Online Calibration

0-OFF, 1-ACTIVE
Note
For remote access, Online Calibration can also be activated using one of the Auxiliary inputs
(refer to P270 (Page 165))
When the Online Calibration is activated, normal operation continues until the weigh bin fills to
the maximum level, (90% in the example shown). During the filling stage, the current level is
displayed as a percentage.
Online Calibration - LOW > 19%

Wait for LEVEL > MAX RLY
Current level displayed as percentage.
When the maximum limit is reached, the relay assigned to the Online Calibration function
energizes to stop the weigh bin material feed.
Online Calibration - 94% > MAX

Wait for LEVEL < HIGH RLY1
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
Material continues to be discharged from the weigh bin, and when the level drops to the High
limit (70% in the example) the Online totalizer is automatically activated.
Online Calibration - TOTAL 3.71 tonnes

Calibration in progress RLY1
Running total
When the Low limit (30%) is reached, the totalizer is deactivated and the assigned relay is de-
energized, which reopens the material feed to the weigh bin.
The BW500 Online material total, the amount of material totalized between the High and Low
limits, is compared to the value entered in P356. The deviation percentage between these
values and the new Span count value is displayed.
Online Calibration - Deviation 2.51%

Press ENTER to accept New span 22280
Deviation percent and new Span count value
Press the following key to accept the results.
Online Calibration Complete

Press ENTER to accept New span 22280
Note
• Deviation must be no greater than ±12% of the initial span or it will not be accepted.
• For remote access, Online Calibration can be accepted using one of the Auxiliary inputs:
(refer to P270 (Page 165))
If you want to reject the results and return to RUN mode, press the following key:
Rate 0.00 t/h

Total 1: 10.15 t
Note
t/h equals metric tonnes per hour
For remote access, to return to RUN mode, program one of the Auxiliary inputs: (refer to
P270 (Page 165))
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.6 Factoring
If you want to reject the results and perform another online calibration, press the following key to
return to P358.
Access

0-OFF, 1-ACTIVE 1
If the deviation is greater than ±12%:
Calibration is out of range

Deviation Error:
1. Rerun online calibration to verify the deviation: press the following key to return to P358.
2. Verify the mechanics of the belt scale: carry out material tests to ensure the readings are
correct.
3. If the mechanics are functioning correctly, perform an initial span using P388.
7.6 Factoring
Note
For optimum accuracy in the factoring results, a routine zero calibration is recommended.
To calculate the value of a new or unknown test weight to the current span, the factoring
procedure is used.
With the belt empty, the test weight in place, and the conveyor running:
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.6 Factoring
7.6.1 Access P359 in VIEW mode
P359 Factoring V
Select 1-Weight, 2-Chain
Factoring Weight
Place weight and press ENTER.
For example: factor the test weight.
Factoring Weight
Factoring in progress ##.## kg/m
The load reported while factoring is in progress.
Factoring Weight
Press ENTER to accept value 45.25
For example: the new value is accepted.
P017 Test Load Weight: V

Enter Test Load 45.25
For example: the current test load value.
Factoring is complete. Remove test weight and return to RUN mode if desired.
Note
If multispan function is used, the test load value is stored for the current multispan only.
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.7 Linearization
7.7 Linearization
Conveyor applications where the ideal belt scale location has been compromised, or where
there is a high degree of variation in belt tension, typically cause the belt scale to report load
non-linearly. The BW500 and BW500/L provides a linearizing function (P390 - P392) to correct
for the deficiency in the weighing system and to provide an accurate report of the actual process.
To verify that the cause of the non-linearity is not mechanical:

● Run the conveyor belt empty and stop it.
● Lift the belt off of the scale and suspend various test weights to the scale. If the load reported
by the BW500 and BW500/L is non-linear, a mechanical problem is indicated. Refer to the
belt scale manual to resolve the non-linearity by improved installation or repair.
If it is determined that the non-linearity is due to the weighing application, and not the actual belt scale,
apply linearization by performing the following:
● zero calibration
● span calibration at 90 to 100% of design rate
● material tests at 90 to 100% of design rate
● manual span adjust if required
● material tests at 1 to 5 intermediary flow rates where compensation is required.
Note
Compensation points must be at least 10% of the design load apart.
● calculate the percentage compensation for each flow rate tested.

%compensation = (actual weight - totalized weight * 100)/totalized weight
where:
actual weight = material test
totalized weight = BW500 and BW500/L total
Note
• After the compensation has been programmed into the BW500 and BW500/L, a material
test should be run to verify the effect of linearization.
• If additional compensation is required, it must be based on new material tests performed
with the linearization turned off (P390 = 0).
Example:
A non-linearity with respect to the ideal response exists in a belt scale application with design
rate of 200 t/h. It is decided to do material tests at 15, 30, 45, 60 and 75% of the design load.
After performing a zero and a span calibration at 100% of the design load, followed by material
tests and manual span adjust, five material tests were performed at 30, 60, 90, 120 and 150 t/h,
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.7 Linearization
as indicated by the BW500. The following data was tabulated. (This example is exaggerated for
emphasis).
The material tests should be run at same belt speed, representative of normal operation; in this
case 1.2 m/s. For each rate, record the corresponding load value by scrolling to the BW500 load
display during running conditions or by calculation.
load = (rate/speed)
BW500 load material test BW500 total compensationa)

kg/m tonnes tonnes %
6.94 2.5 2.8 -10.7
13.89 5.0 4.5 11.1
20.83 7.5 7.9 -5.1
27.78 10.0 9.2 8.7
34.72 12.5 13.3 -6.0
a) calculation example: % compensation = [(2.5 – 2.8) x 100]/2.8
= -10.7
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.7 Linearization
① Actual weight per material test

② Totalized weight by BW500
③ Belt scale response
④ Linearized BW500 response
⑤ Internal response 100% - 150% of span
⑥ % compensation
⑦ Span (100%)
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.7 Linearization
Program the BW500 as follows:
Parameter Function
P390 = 1 linearization – on
P391-01 = 6.94 point 1, load
P391-02 = 13.89 point 2, load
P391-03 = 20.83 point 3, load
P391-04 = 27.78 point 4, load
P391-05 = 34.72 point 5, load
P392-01 = - 10.7 point 1, compensation
P392-02 = 11.1 point 2, compensation
P392-03 = - 5.1 point 3, compensation
P392-04 = 8.7 point 4, compensation
P392-05 = -6.0 point 5, compensation
Note:Often only one point of compensation is required, usually at a low load value. In the prior exam-
ple, if compensation was only required at 6.94 kg/m, the programming could be as follows. Compen-
sation is optimized by establishing the next load value that agrees with the material test, hence where
compensation is zero and entering it as the next compensation point.
P390 = 1 linearization on
P391-01 = 6.94 point 1, load
P391-02 = 20.00 point 2, load
P392-01 = -10.7 point 1, compensation
P392-02 = 0 point 2, compensation
BW500 and BW500/L

Recalibration
7.7 Linearization
① Actual weight per material test

② Totalized weight by BW500
③ Belt scale response
④ Linearized BW500 response
⑤ Internal response 100% - 150% of span
⑥ % compensation
⑦ Span (100%)
For Parameter reference, go to Parameters (Page 153)
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation 8
8.1 Load Sensing
For the BW500 and BW500/L to calculate rate and totalize material flow along the belt conveyor,
a load signal representative of weight of material on the belt is required. The load signal is
provided by the belt scale. The BW500 and BW500/L is compatible with belt scales fitted with 1,
2, 4, or 61) strain gauge type load cells. To function with LVDT type sensors, an optional LVDT
conditioning card is required.
Refer to Specifications (Page 17), and Installation (Page 21) for belt scale requirements and
connection.
1) Not available with BW500/L
8.2 Speed Sensing

For the BW500 and BW500/L to calculate rate and totalize material flow along the belt conveyor,
a speed signal representative of belt speed is required. For optimum accuracy of the weighing
system, and both constant and variable speed applications, a speed sensor is required. The
design speed (P014) and speed constant (P015) need to be programmed.
In constant speed applications (no speed sensor), the BW500 can be programmed to provide an
internal speed signal. This is achieved by entering the design speed (P014) and providing a
contact closure across speed input terminals (17/18). The speed constant (P015) defaults to
‘jumpered’. This contact should change to open when the conveyor is idle to prevent errant
totalization.
In applications with two speed sensors, the BW500 can be programmed to provide differential
speed. % slip can be calculated, using the difference between the two speed signals with
reference to the first speed.2)
Refer to Specifications (Page 17) and Installation (Page 21) for speed sensor requirements and
connection.
2) Differential speed detection is not available on the BW500/L.
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.3 Differential Speed Detection
8.3 Differential Speed Detection

Dual point speed sensing is used for monitoring speed at two points in the system where a
difference in speed can be detrimental to the equipment or its operation. The two speed sensors
are typically applied on belt conveyors to give an alarm if excessive slip between the head pulley
and tail pulley is detected. The secondary speed sensor is especially useful on variable speed
conveyors, and may also be used to detect a malfunction in the primary speed sensor.
The BW500 provides a 12 V DC, 150 mA maximum, regulated power supply for both speed
sensors. The primary speed sensor is used for all "Run" display integration, and is the reference
value for differential speed detection. The primary speed sensor is generally reserved for the
driven device (tail pulley). The second speed sensor is generally reserved for the driving device
(head pulley), and is used for comparison to the primary speed sensor, for differential speed
detection only.
The second speed signal is compared to the primary speed signal, and will initiate an alarm
condition if the second speed signal is outside the programmed high and low alarm setpoints.
Connect the second speed sensor as shown in the Installation section (refer to AuxiliarySpeed
Sensor), and program the second speed sensor as described in the following steps:
1. Program one of the Auxiliary Inputs as a Speed Sensor input P270-01 to 05 = 16 (Speed
Sensor).
2. Program second speed sensors speed constant P015-02 = pulses per meter or foot (Refer to
Start Up on page 29, for speed sensor programming).
3. Program one of the alarms for Differential Speed Detection alarm P100-01 to 05 = 10 (Speed
Differential).
4. Program the High Alarm setpoint P101-01 to 05 = 110% (default).
5. Program the Low Alarm setpoint P102-01 to 05 = 90% (default).
Note
Differential speed detection is not available on the BW500/L.
8.4 Moisture Compensation

Moisture Compensation is used to compensate for the moisture component of the material being
weighed. It factors out the moisture component of load, rate and total for all multispans selected.
The factored value is meant to report the dry mean values of the material being conveyed.
The BW500 receives the static load cell signal, and adjusts the value of the load being displayed
and integrated by the moisture percentage. The mA I/O card is required to accept the mA signal
from the Moisture Meter. This mA signal can represent 0 to 100% moisture. The moisture
percentage is displayed in P398-01. Using P398-02, the moisture percentage can be
represented as a percentage of mass to be deducted from the total mass1).
1) The
BW500/L allows for a fixed moisture content to be entered. See “P398-01 Moisture
Content (Page 172)”.
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.5 Incline compensation
Example:
Setting P398-02 = 30% will allow the 4 - 20 mA input to correspond to 0 - 30% moisture.
The Zero and Span calibration is not affected by the presence of a moisture meter. It is
understood that the calibrations are performed using dry static weights.
The Moisture Meter must be connected to the appropriate mA input and programmed as
described in the following steps:
1. Enable mA input function for moisture compensation P255-01 or 02 = 4 (moisture
compensation).
2. Set appropriate mA input range P250-01 or 02 = 2 (default is 4 - 20 mA).
3. Set mA input moisture ratio P398-02 = 100% (default).
4. Observe moisture percentage using P398-01.
8.5 Incline compensation

Incline compensation is used to compensate for the varying vertical force component applied to
the belt scale due to varying inclination of the conveyor. The BW500 and BW500/L receives the
static load cell signal, and adjusts the load displayed and integrated, by a factor of COSINE of
the angle of incline.
The Inclinometer should be mounted to the conveyor stringer, parallel to the center of the belt
scale. The mA I/O card is required to accept the mA signal from the Inclinometer. This mA signal
must represent -30 to 30°. The incline angle is displayed in P399.
The dynamic load cell signal will vary with the incline of the conveyor. The BW500 and BW500/L
load display and integration values will remain constant for the given load on the belt scale
through the specified range of inclination.
The Zero and Span calibrations of the BW500 and BW500/L will be adjusted based on the angle
of incline of the conveyor. The Zero and Span calibration can be performed at any angle.
However, if incline compensation will be used, it must be enabled for all Zero and Span
calibrations1).
1)The BW500/L allows for a fixed inclined angle to be entered. See “P399 Incline Sensing
(Page 173)”.
The Inclinometer must be connected to the appropriate mA input and programmed as described
in the following steps:
1. Enable mA input function for incline compensation P255-01 or 02 = 5 (Incline compensation).
2. Set appropriate mA input range P250-01 or 02 = 2 (default is 4 - 20 mA).
3. Observe incline angle using P399.
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.6 Modes of Operation
8.6 Modes of Operation

RUN is the normal or reference mode of operation. It continuously processes the load and speed
signals from the belt scale to produce internal load, speed and rate signals, which are in turn
used as the basis for totalization, mA output, relay control, and communication data. The RUN
display is programmed (P081) to scroll through rate, totalization (P647), load and speed; either
manually by pressing the enter key, or automatically.
Rate Rate Load

Total 1 Total 2 Speed
If the BW500 is programmed for batch control, the batch display is added to the display scroll.
Refer to Batch Control (Page 176) for more information.
From the RUN mode, access to the PROGRAM mode, and zero and span calibration is made.
The PROGRAM mode allows viewing and, with security permission (P000), editing parameter
values. During PROGRAM, RUN mode functions are still active, that is.: rate, relay, mA output
and totalization.
If the PROGRAM mode is left idle for a period of ten minutes, it automatically reverts to RUN
mode.
Zero and span calibrations effectively halt the RUN mode while they are in progress. During this
time, totalization ceases, and all mA outputs, except for PID, fall to zero.
8.7 Damping
Damping (P080) provides control over the speed at which the displayed readings and output
functions respond to changes in their respective input function: load, speed and the internal rate
signals. Changes in the displayed rate of material flow, material loading and belt speed are
controlled by the damping. Relay alarm functions based on input functions of rate, load and
speed, respond to the damped value.
Damping consists of a first order filter applied to the signal (reading or output value).
If mA damping (P220) is enabled (value other than 0), then the damping (P080) as it pertains to
the mA function is overridden, and responds independently at the specified mA output damping
rate (P220).
Note
Damping (P080 or P220) is not applicable to the mA output when programmed for PID
function (P201 = 4).
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.8 mA I/O (0/4-20 mA)
8.8 mA I/O (0/4-20 mA)
Output
The standard BW500 and BW500/L provides one isolated mA output. The output can be
assigned (P201) to represent rate, load or speed. The output range can be set to 0 - 20 mA or 4
- 20 mA (P200). The 0 or 4 mA value corresponds to empty or zero condition, whereas the 20
mA value corresponds to the associated design value: rate (P011), load (P952), or speed
(P014). The mA output can be limited for over range levels of 0 mA minimum and 22 mA
maximum (P212 and P213 respectively). The output 4 and 20 mA levels can also be trimmed
(P214 and P215 respectively) to agree with a milliammeter or other external mA device.
The mA output value can be tested to output a prescribed value using parameter P911. Refer to
P911 (Page 190).
The optional mA I/O board provides two additional mA outputs1), programmable as outputs 2 and
3, using the same parameters as the standard output (1). If programmed for PID control, output
2 is assigned to PID control loop 1 and output 3 is assigned to PID control loop 2.
1) not available with BW500/L
Input
The optional mA I/O board provides two mA inputs, programmable as inputs 1 and 2. If
programmed for PID control, generally, input 1 is assigned to PID control loop 1 and input 2 is
assigned to PID control loop 2.
The input range can be set to 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (P250), and assigned a function (P255), for
example: PID setpoint. The 4 and 20 mA levels can be trimmed (P261 and P262) to agree with
an external device. The external device could be a moisture sensor, or an inclinometer.
Note
mA inputs not available with BW500/L
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.9 Relay Output
8.9 Relay Output

The BW500 offers five single pole single throw (SPST) relays that can be assigned (P100) to
one of the following alarm functions, the BW500/L offers two relays of the same type:
● rate: relay alarms on high and/or low material flow rate.
● load: relay alarms on high and/or low belt load.
● speed: relay alarms on high and/or low belt speed.
● differential speed1): relay alarms if second speed signal outside high and/or low alarm
setpoints.
● diagnostic: relay alarms on error condition as it is reported. See “Troubleshooting”.
● PID1)2): PID control setpoint deviation
● batch pre-warn1)
● batch setpoint1)
For rate, load, and speed alarm functions, the high and low alarm setpoints (P101 and P102
respectively) are required and must be entered in the appropriate units. The high alarm setpoint
acts as the setpoint deviation alarm for relays programmed for PID setpoint deviation.
The on/off actuation at both high and low setpoints is buffered by the damping (P080) and the
programmable dead band (P117), to prevent relay chatter due to fluctuations. The relay is
normally energized; holding the normally open (n.o.) contact closed (can be programmed for
reverse operation, P118). Upon an alarm condition, the relay is deenergized and the relay
contact is opened. Once in alarm, the relay remains in alarm state until the alarm condition is
removed.
2) Is offered only if the PID system (P400) is enabled.
Example:
P014 = 2m/s, design speed
P100 = 3, belt speed
P101 = 100% (2 m/s)
P102 = 20% (0.4 m/s)
P117 = 2% (0.04 m/s)
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.10 Totalization
① Actual low alarm

’off’ = 22%
’on’ = 20%
alarm ‘on’ is with relay de-energized
8.10 Totalization
The totalization function is based on the internal rate (mass per unit time) signal proportional to
belt speed and load on the associated belt scale. It is not affected by the damping function
(P080). The rate signal is sampled several times a second to accurately count the mass of
material conveyed. The count is held in the master totalizer used to increment the internal
totalizers and to produce a pulse signal for the remote totalizers.
The BW500 provides several separate totalizer functions:
8.10.1 Internal Totalizer

The BW500 provides several separate totalizer functions:
● local display (totalizers 1 and 2)
● verification totalizer (totalizer 3)
● material test totalizer (totalizer 4)
● batch total (totalizer 5)
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.10 Totalization
8.10.2 External Totalizer
● totalizer outputs (remote totalizers 1 and 2)

To avoid totalizing material at flow rates below the low flow rate limit, the totalizer drop out limit
(P619) is set to a percentage of the design load. Below this limit, totalization stops. When
material flow returns to a rate above the drop out limit, totalization resumes.
Totalizer resolution or count value is set by the respective internal (P631) and external (P638)
totalizer1) resolution parameters.
1)If the resolution selected causes the totalizer to lag behind the count rate, the next possible
resolution is automatically entered.
Example:
● Internal totalizer 1
Given: P005 = 1 (t/h), P631 = 4
Then: totalizer count increments by 10 for each 10 metric tonnes registered
● External totalizer 1
Given: P005 = 1 (t/h), P638 = 5
Then: contact closure occurs once for every 10 metric tonnes registered
For remote totalization, the contact closure duration (P643) is automatically calculated upon
entry of the design rate (P011) and remote totalizer (P638) parameters, so that the duration of
contact closure allows the relay response to track the total up to 150% of the design rate. The
value can be changed to suit specific contact closure requirements, such as in the case of
programmable logic controllers. If the duration selected is inappropriate, the next possible
duration is automatically entered.
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.10 Totalization
External Totalizer Calculation Example:

Design Rate = 50 t/h (P011)
External Totalizer Resolution Selected = 0.001 (P638 = 1)
External Totalizer Contact Closure Time selected = 30 msec (P643 = 30)
External Totalizer Cycle Time = 60 msec (External Totalizer Contact Closure Time X 2)
1. Calculate the maximum number of pulses per second for the Contact Closure Time selected
(P643).
Maximum Number of pulses per second
= 1 / External Totalizer Cycle Time
= 1 / 0.060
= 16.6 (which is rounded to a whole number of 16 in the BW500)
2. Calculate the pulses per second required for the External Totalizer Resolution selected
(P638).
Pulses per second = ((Design Rate) * 150%) / (External Totalizer Resolution X 3600)
= (50 t/h X 150%) / ( 0.001 X 3600)
= 20.83
Because the required 20.83 pulses per second is greater than the maximum 16 pulses per
second, the External Totalizer Resolution of 0.001 will not allow the External Totalizer to track up
to 150% of the design rate. The External Totalizer Resolution will have to be increased to 0.01 or
the External Totalizer Contact Closure Time will have to be decreased.
The totalizers are reset through the master reset (P999), the totalizer reset (P648), or through
the keypad.
● master reset: the reset of all totalizer functions is included in the master reset.
● totalizer reset: totalizer reset can be used to reset internal totalizers 1 and 2, or totalizer 2
independently. Resetting the internal totalizers 1 and 2 resets the internal registers for
external totalizers 1 and 2.
● Keypad: pressing the following keys while in the RUN mode resets internal totalizer 1:
Placing the internal totalizers on to the display scroll of the RUN mode is controlled by the
totalizer display parameter (P647); displaying either one or both totalizers.
BW500 and BW500/L

Operation
8.10 Totalization
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control 9
The PID control algorithm in the BW500 is designed specifically to work for feed rate control
applications. It is based on motor control type algorithms and includes several anti-wind up
provisions.
One way to prevent wind up is to monitor the input speed frequency from the weighfeeder. If the
input frequency drops below 5 Hz, the PID control output freezes at its current value. Otherwise,
the output winds up to 100% if the feeder is shut off while there is still a set point greater than
zero. When the feeder is turned back on, there would be a surge of product flow until the system
regains stability. With anti-wind up, the feeder can be stopped and started with minimal
disruption to the controlled flow rate.
To operate the BW500 as a controller, address the following:
● hardware
● connections
● setup and tuning
● programming
Note
PID control not available on the BW500/L.
9.1 Hardware
For the BW500 to operate as a controller, install the optional mA I/O board. Refer to Installation
(Page 21).
9.2 Connections
Connections to process instruments, in addition to standard operating connections, must be
made.
Refer to:
● Installation (Page 21), specifically:
● Relay Output (Page 40), for relay connections
● mA I/O board (Page 43), for mA input and output connections
● Auxiliary Inputs (Page 38), for optional remote control
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.2 Connections
Connect the BW500 as either a:

1. setpoint controller – load control
2. setpoint controller – rate control
3. setpoint controller – rate and load control
4. setpoint controller – external process variable with or without rate and load control
PID loop mA output terminals mA input terminal (mA I/O)

(mA I/O)
1 2 1&2 1 5&6
2 3 3&4 2 7&8
9.2.1 Setpoint Controller – Rate Control
① Shearing weighfeeder
② Belt scale
③ Motor speed controller
④ Control output (P201-02 = 4)
⑤ Optoinal remote setpoint - rate (P255-01 = 1)
⑥ Load
⑦ Speed
⑧ Speed sensor
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.2 Connections
9.2.2 Setpoint Controller – Load Control
① Belt Scale
② Motor speed controller
③ Control output (P201-02 = 4)
④ Optoinal remote setpoint - rate (P255-01 = 1)
⑤ Load
⑥ Speed
⑦ PID 1 process value source - rate (P402-01 = 1)
⑧ Speed sensor
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.2 Connections
9.2.3 Setpoint Controller – Master/Slave Control
① Belt scale
② Motor speed controller
③ Control output rate (P201-02 = 4)
④ Remote ratio setpoint rate (P255-01 = 1 P418-01 to suit)
⑤ Load
⑥ Speed
⑦ Speed sensor
⑧ PID 1 process value source - rate (P402-01 = 1)
⑨ Belt scale
⑩ Motor speed controller
⑪ Control output rate (P201-02 = 4)
⑫ Rate* (P201-01 = 1)
⑬ Remote setpoint rate (P255 - 01 = 1)
⑭ Load
⑮ Speed
⑯ Speed sensor
⑰ PID 1 process value source - load (P402-01 = 1)
*P201-03=1 also applicable
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.2 Connections
9.2.4 Setpoint Controller – Rate and Load Control
① Motor speed controller - rate

② Motor speed controller - load
③ PID 1 control output, (P201-02 = 4)
④ PID 2 control output, (P201-03 = 4)
⑤ PID 1 remote setpoint - load (P255-01 = 1)
⑥ PID 2 remote setpoint - rate (P255-02 = 1)
⑦ Load
⑧ Belt scale
⑨ Speed
⑩ PID 1 process value source - load (P402-01 = 2), PID 2 process value source - rate (P402-02 =
1)
⑪ Speed sensor
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.3 Setup and Tuning

Before proceeding, it would be beneficial to qualify and quantify the terms you will encounter in
the setup and tuning of the control system.
9.3.1 Proportional Control (Gain), P

The P term on the BW500 adjusts the control output based on the difference between the set
point and the measured flow rate. A higher P term makes the BW500 more sensitive and faster
to react to changes or disturbances. If set too high, the BW500 becomes less stable, and more
susceptible to oscillations in the control output.
● allowable input range: 0.000 to 2.000
● typical operating range: 0.300 to 0.600
● default value: 0.400
The control output cannot reach the setpoint using only the P term. Since the P term acts on the
difference between the setpoint and process variable, a small difference between these two
always exist and the difference is never zero. A small P term can get the process very close to
set point, but it would take a very long time. At the very least, an Iterm is required to eliminate
the offset created by the P term.
9.3.2 Integral Control (Automatic Reset), I

The I term on the BW500 is used to increase or reduce the amount of control output to eliminate
the offset caused by the P term. The I term acts on the accumulation of the error over small
increments of time. As the process reaches setpoint and the error becomes small, the effect of
the I term decreases. A higher I term makes the BW500 faster to react to changes, but can also
make it less stable.
The P and I terms together can make a suitable control algorithm and for many applications,
they work fine. However, if faster response to changes is desired, it is necessary to use larger P
and I terms. Unfortunately, larger terms can make the system unstable. A derivative term is
needed to influence the control output as the process variable approaches the set point.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.3.3 Derivative Control (Pre-Act or Rate), D

The D term on the BW500 influences the control output based on changes in the magnitude and
direction of the change in error. If there is a constant error, the D term has no effect. As the error
gets larger, the D term combines with the P term to make the BW500 control output respond
faster. When the error is getting smaller, the D term acts to reduce the amount of control output
to help prevent overshooting the set point. In general, a higher P term will require a larger D
term.

The result of the derivative action is that it can make a system more responsive and more stable
at the same time.
9.3.4 Feed Forward Control, F

On the BW500, the F term is used to adjust the control output based on a setpoint change. The
use of this term can make the system reach the new setpoint faster. If the term is not used, the
system responds using the P, I and D terms only. The difference between the new setpoint and
the process variable is the error and the control algorithm responds to eliminate this new error.
When the F term is used and a new setpoint is entered, a proportion of the difference between
the new setpoint and the process variable is automatically added on to the control output. This
shifts the process variable closer to the new setpoint faster than using the P, I and D terms
alone. This is done on a one time basis.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.4 PID Setup and Tuning
The PID control function of the BW500 can be configured to operate in several modes.
● controller output: direct acting
● feedback: rate, load, or external
● control: local or remote (ratio) setpoint

Proper tuning of the control PID terms is essential to system operation and optimum
performance from the feeder. The recommended procedures for tuning the PID control terms at
initial start-up are described in this section.
9.4.1 Initial Start-Up

Although the default values of the P, I, D, and F terms will suit the majority of applications,
shearing weigh feeders in particular, some tuning will be necessary nonetheless.
There are several techniques and procedures for tuning conventional PID controllers, some work
better depending upon the application. We recommend using "closed-loop cycling" for the
BW500 integrator/controller for feed rate control. This technique focuses on tuning the P term
first while disabling the I and D terms. This is followed by adding andtuning the I term, then the D
term. To outline this procedure:
1. With the P term set to its default value of 0.400, disable the I, D, and F terms by setting them
to 0.000.
2. Enter a feed rate setpoint that is 30% of the designed maximum flow rate.
3. Having applied the test weights or chain provided, start the feeder and observe the time it
takes the feeder to reach setpoint, also observe the oscillation around setpoint.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
4. Adjust the P term accordingly for consistent oscillation and error. Progressively decrease the
P term value if there is too much oscillation and error. Likewise, increase the value if the error
is not consistent and oscillating around the setpoint. Refer to figures 1, 2, and 3 below.
5. Once the P term value is set to give the control output of the BW500 consistent oscillation
and the error is at its minimum, turn the feeder off.
6. The I term value can now be set. Begin by entering the default value of 0.2.
7. Restart the feeder (test weights or chains still applied) and feed rate setpoint entered.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
8. Again observe the oscillation of the control output. Compare results to the figures 4,5 and 6
below.
9. The D term is not critical in typical shearing type weigh feeder applications. The purpose of
the D term is to anticipate where the process is heading by looking at thetime, rate, and
direction of change of the process variable. The D term becomes very useful in applications
where the material control point is far away from the measuring point. An example of this
would be a weigh belt or conveyor with a belt scale (constant speed) being fed from a pre-
feeder some distance or more than a few seconds process time from the scale.
A properly set D term will make the initial oscillations around the setpoint smaller, as in figure
6. A D term set too high induces high oscillations, as in figure 4. Omission of the D term, or
set too low, shows no effect on the system.
10.The above closed loop cycling procedure allows ease in start up, but final adjustments may
be necessary in actual process operation.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.5 Programming
9.5 Programming
The BW500 is software ready, however the controller function must be specifically programmed
in addition to programming of parameters P001 through P017.
The BW500 offers programming for two separate PID controls, 1 and 2. The controller being
programmed is identified by the suffix to the parameter number. e.g. P400-01 indicates that PID
for control system 1 is accessed.
Note
All programming should be done in the PID manual mode.
Access
P400-01 PID System E

Select: 0-Off, 1-Manual, 2-Auto 0
Select 1-manual to program PID parameters
Off disables the PID parameter set, P401 to P418. They are not accessible.
Manual: the control output is the manual output P410.
Auto: engages the PID controller function. This can also be done using the following key:
Note
For the mA output:
• mA output 2 (P201-02) is normally reserved for controller 1. The signal is output at
terminals 1 and 2 on the mA I/O board.
• mA output 3 (P201-03) is normally reserved for controller 2. The signal is output at
P201-02 mA Output Function E

Select: 1-Rate, 2-Load, 3-Speed, 4-PID 1
Select the PID function.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.5 Programming
Note
For the mA input:
• mA input 1 is an external signal normally reserved for controller 1. The signal is input at
• mA input 2 is an external signal normally reserved for controller 2. The signal is input at
P250-01 mA Input Range E

Select 1- 0 to 20, 2-4 to 20 2
Select the appropriate range for the mA input signal.
P255-01 mA Input Function E

Select: 0, 1-PID SP, 2-PID PV 0
Assign either 1: PID setpoint, or 2: process variable as the function of the mA input.
P401-01 PID Update Time E

Readings between PID Updates 1
Enter the value, e.g. nominal value of 1.
P402 Process Variable Source E

1- Rate, 2-Load, 3-mA In
Select the source. Rate and load are internal values.
P405-01 Proportional Term E

Enter 0.40
Enter the value for the proportional term, for example: nominal value of 0.4.
P406-01 Integral Term E

Select 1- 0 to 20, 2-4 to 20 0.2
Enter the value for the integral term, for example: nominal value of 0.2.
P407-01 Derivative Term E

Enter 0.05
Enter the value for the derivative term, for example: nominal value of 0.05.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.5 Programming
P408-01 Feed Forward Term E

Enter 0.3
Enter the value for the feed forward term, for example: nominal value of 0.3.
P410-01 Manual Mode Output E

Current Output Value 0
% value of output during manual operation, P400 = 1.
P414-01 Setpoint Configuration E

0-Local, 1mA In 0
Selection of setpoint source: 0 = local (keypad or Dolphin Plus), 1 = mA input
Local: the setpoint is the value entered into P415

mA Input 1: the setpoint is the mA value on input 1, terminals 5 and 6 on the mA I/O board
mA Input 2: the setpoint is the mA value on input 2, terminals 7 and 8 on the mA I/O board
P415-01 Local Setpoint Value E

Enter Setpoint 0
Enter the setpoint value in engineering units. Not applicable if P414 = 1.
P416-01 External Setpoint E

Setpoint 0
Current setpoint value in engineering units, obtained from the mA input.
P418-01 Remote Setpoint Ratio E

Enter % of Master Output 100.000
Increase or decrease to scale input setpoint if desired.
P250-01 mA Input Range E

Select 1- 0 to 20, 2-4 to 20 2
Select the appropriate range for the mA input signal.
BW500 and BW500/L

PID Control
9.5 Programming
P255-01 mA Input Function E

Select 0, 1-PID SP, 2-PID PV 0
Assign either 1: PID setpoint, or 2: process variable as the function of the mA input.
Note
The PID setpoint can be modified while in RUN mode using the up/down arrow keys.
BW500 and BW500/L

Batching 10
The batching process, as it relates to the BW500 operation, can be defined as the transfer of a
predetermined quantity of material.
The process supports a count up operation (P560), in that the total (totalizer 5) begins at zero
and increments up to the programmed setpoint (P564). A relay (RL1 through 5) programmed as
the batch setpoint function (P100 = 8) is actuated when the material total reaches the setpoint.
The relay contact acts as an interlock to the material feed to end the batch.
Another relay can be programmed as a pre-warn alarm (P100 = 7), to alert the process that
batch end is near. The relay is actuated when the material total reaches the prewarn setpoint
(P567) at some practical value below the batch setpoint. The pre-warn function is
enabled/disabled from the batch process through P566.
For batch operations, the following must be addressed:
● Connections
● Programming
● Operation
Note
Not available on the BW500/L
BW500 and BW500/L

Batching
10.1 Connections
10.1 Connections
10.1.1 Typical Ladder Logic
* Typical relay assignment. Relays 1-5 are available for batch setpoint or pre-warm alarm func-
tion.
♦ Typical auxiliary input assignment. Inputs 1- 5 are available for batch reset.
① BW500 / RL1* batch stop
② Stop
③ Start
④ Motor contactor / MC1
⑤ Alarm
⑥ BW500 / RL2* pre-warm
⑦ Batch reset
⑧ BW500/ aux 1
BW500 and BW500/L

Batching
10.2 Programming
10.2 Programming
The pre-warn function is optional.
The setpoint associated with the pre-warn relay is entered in P567, batch setpoint.
The setpoint associated with the batch relay is entered in P564, batch pre-warn setpoint.
Batch Operation
Access P100, relay function select relay (1 – 5)
select function 7, pre-warn
Access P560 Batch Mode Control select 1, enable batch operation
if batch pre-warn is selected access P567, batch enter the pre-warn total
pre-warn setpoint
Access P568 Batch Pre-act set to OFF (0) or AUTO (1) or manual (2)
Relays
Access P100, Relay Function select relay (1 – 5)
select function 7, Pre-Warn
10.3 Operation
Once the BW500 relays are connected to the process logic, and it is programmed, the BW500 is
ready for totalizing the batch and stopping the process when the batch setpoint is reached. The
batch operation: start, pause, resume, and cancel are controlled externally by the process
control (e.g. PLC)
Place the unit in the RUN mode.
Press ALT DISP until the batch screen is displayed.
Rate 0.00 kg/h SP: 20.000

Batch 0.00 kg
For example: relay 1 is programmed for pre-warn, P100-1=7.
Start running the batch.

The display will show the rate of material flow and the batch total, as well as the batch setpoint.
If pre-warn is used, relay contact is open.
When the batch total reaches the pre-warn setpoint, if programmed, the alarm event is removed
and the assigned relay contact is closed.
Rate 123.4 kg/h SP: 20.000

Batch 17.00 kg ALM 1
BW500 and BW500/L

Batching
10.3 Operation
The process continues, and when the batch total reaches the batch setpoint, the alarm event is
displayed and the assigned relay is actuated (contact opened). Typically the relay contact would
be integrated into the batch control logic to end the process.
Rate 123.4 kg/h

Batch 20.00 kg ALM 12
Relay 2 is programmed for batch setpoint, P100-2=8.
When the next batch is to be run, pressing the following keys then on the local keypad, or
providing a momentary contact closure across an auxiliary input (programmed as batch reset,
P270 = 8), sets the alarm display and resets the batch total to zero, and the relay contact to its
closed state.
Rate 0.00 kg/h SP: 20.000

Batch 0.00 kg
Note
The batch setpoint can be modified in RUN mode using the up/down arrow keys.
10.3.1 Pre-act Function

If repetitive batches are being run, the pre-act function (P568) can be enabled to automatically
trip the setpoint relay before or after the batch setpoint is reached to assure best batch accuracy.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications 11
The BW500 and BW500/L is an sophisticated belt scale integrator that can communicate status
back to a SCADA system using a serial device such as radio modems, leased lines, or dial up
modems.
① Dial-up modem
② Radio modem
③ Leased line modem
The BW500 and BW500/L supports two protocols: Dolphin and Modbus. Dolphin is a proprietary
Siemens Milltronics protocol designed to be used with Dolphin Plus. Modbus is an industry
standard protocol used by popular SCADA and HMI systems.
11.1 BW500 and BW500/L and SmartLinx

In addition to three onboard communication ports, the BW500 and BW500/L is compatible with
Siemens’ SmartLinx communication modules which provide an interface to popular industrial
communication systems.
This section only describes the onboard communications. For more information on SmartLinx,
please consult the appropriate SmartLinx manual.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.2 Connections
11.2 Connections
WARNING
When a SmartLinx card is installed and P799 = 1, the parameters that the SmartLinx card
is writing to the BW500 and BW500/L will be continuously updated. Therefore, if you
connect a SmartLinx card to the BW500, set P799 = 1 and not write anything to the
SmartLinx card, your setpoints will be 0.
There are three serial communication ports on the BW500 and BW500/L:
Port Description
1 RS-232, Terminals 31 to 34
2 RS-485, terminals 35 to 40
3 RS-232, RJ-11 modular telephone jack
Refer to the Installation (Page 21) for wiring diagrams specific to each port.
11.2.1 Wiring Guidelines

Improper wiring and choice of cables are the most common sources of communication
problems. Listed below are some suggested guidelines:
• 15 meters (50 feet) for RS-232
• 1200 meters (4000 feet) for RS-485
• Ensure that communication cable is run separately from power and control cables (i.e. do not
tie wrap your RS-232 cable to the power cable or have them in the same conduit).
• cable is shielded and connected to ground at one end only
• 24 AWG (minimum)
• follow proper grounding guidelines for all devices on the bus
• use good quality communication grade (shielded twisted pairs) cable that is recommended for
RS-232.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.3 Configuring Communication Ports

The BW500 and BW500/L communications ports are setup by a series of parameters (P770 –
P789) which are indexed by port.
The communication parameters are indexed to the following:
Port Description
1 RS-232, Terminals 31 to 34
2 RS-485, terminals 35 to 40
3 RS-232, RJ-11 modular telephone
f indicates the factory setting.
Note
Changes to these parameters are not effected until the power to the unit is turned off and
then back on.
11.3.1 P770 Serial protocols

The communications protocol used between the BW500 and BW500/L and other devices for the
selected port, ports 1 to 3 (P770-01 to –03).
The BW500 and BW500/L supports Siemens Milltronics’ proprietary “Dolphin” data format, as
well as the internationally recognized Modbus standard in both ASCII and RTU formats. It also
supports direct connection of a printer.
The Siemens protocol is compatible with the Dolphin Plus configuration program. See the
Siemens web site for information on this PC product
(http://www.siemens.com/processautomation (http://www.siemens.com/processautomation)).
The Modbus protocol is an open standard developed by AEG Schneider Automation Inc.
Specifications are available from their web site (http://www.modicon.com/
(http://www.modicon.com/)).
Other protocols are available with optional SmartLinx cards.
Values
0f (01 and 02) communications disabled
1f (03) Siemens Milltronics "Dolphin" protocol
2 Modbus ASCII slave serial protocol
3 Modbus RTU slave serial protocol
4 printer
Note
BW500 and BW500/L must be in RUN mode to allow for the print operation.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.3.2 P771 Protocol address
Note
Applicable only to ports programmed for Modbus RTU or Modbus ASCII (P770).
The unique identifier of the BW500 and BW500/L on the network for the selected port, ports 1 to
3 (P771-01 to -03).
For devices connected with the Siemens Milltronics protocol this parameter is ignored. For
devices connected with a serial Modbus protocol this parameter is a number from 1- 247. It is up
to the network administrator to ensure that all devices on the network have unique addresses.
Do not use the value “0” for Modbus communications as this is the broadcast address and is
inappropriate for a slave device.
Values
0 to 9999 (f = 1)
11.3.3 P772 Baud Rate

The communication rate with the master device for the selected port, ports 1 to 3 (P772- 01 to –
03).
The baud rate chosen should reflect the speed of the connected hardware and protocol used.
Values
1f (01 and 02) 4800 baud
2 9600 baud
3f (03) 19,200 baud
11.3.4 P773 Parity

The serial port parity for the selected port, ports 1 to 3 (P773-01 to –03).
Ensure that the communications parameters are identical between the BW500 and BW500/L
and all connected devices.
For example many modems default to N-8-1 which is: No parity, 8 data bits, and 1 stop bit.
Values
0f none
1 even
2 odd
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.3.5 P774 Data bits

The number of data bits per character for the selected port, ports 1 to 3 (P774-01 to –03).
Protocol P744 Value

Modbus RTU 8
Modbus ASCII 7 or 8
Dolphin Plus 7 or 8
Note
If using port 2, 8 data bits must be used.
Values
5 to 8 (f = 8)
11.3.6 P775 Stop bits

The number of bits between the data bits for the selected port, ports 1 to 3 P775-01 to -03).
Values
1 or 2 (f = 1)
11.3.7 P778 Modem attached

Sets port 1 (P778-01) to use an external modem.
Any connected modem must be set up to auto-answer incoming calls. The BW500 and BW500/L
does not automatically configure the modem.
Autobaud (enabled by P778=1)
When the BW500 and BW500/L is powered up or the P779 Modem Inactivity Timeout expires
three carriage returns are sent to the modem to allow it to set its serial connection to P772 Baud
Rate.
If a connection is made with the modem at a different baud rate the BW500 and BW500/L will
attempt to use that rate instead of the P772 value. For troubleshooting purposes the baud rate
on the modem can be hard-coded to the rate set on the BW500 and BW500/L. See your modem
documentation for information on fixing the baud rate.
Values
0f no modem connected
1 modem connected
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.3.8 P779 Modem idle time

Sets the time in seconds that the BW500 and BW500/L will keep the modem connected even
though no activity is happening.
To use this parameter ensure that P778=1.
This parameter allows for reconnection to the BW500 and BW500/L unit after an unexpected
disconnect. Ensure that the value is low enough to avoid unnecessary delays when an
unexpected disconnect occurs but long enough to avoid timeout while you are still legitimately
connected.
Hanging Up
If the line is idle and the P779 Modem Inactivity Timeout expires then the modem is directed to
hang up the line. This is done with the Hayes commands:
● two second delay
● +++
● two second delay
● ATH
Ensure that P779 is set longer than the standard polling time of the connected master device.
0 disables the inactivity timer.
Values
0-9999: 0 (f = 1)
11.3.9 P780 RS-232 Transmission interval
Note
Applicable only to ports programmed for printer communication (P770).
Sets the interval between transmissions to be applied to the selected port, ports 1 to 3 (P780-01
to –03).
Enter the period in minutes (f = 0)
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.3.10 P781 Data message
Note
Applicable only to ports programmed for printer communication (P770).
Sets the data message to be delivered via the selected port, ports 1 to 3 (P781-01 to -03). All
messages and printouts include time and date2).
Entry:
0f = no message
1 = rate
2 = total1)
3 = load
4 = speed
5 = rate, total1), load and speed
6 = rate and total1)
7 = batching2)
8 = rate and speed
9 = quick start parameters (P001 – P017)
10 = all parameters
1) Totalizer 1 and/or 2 as set by P647, Totalizer Display.
11.3.11 P799 Communications Control

Assigns programming control either locally through the keypad or Dolphin Plus (P770 = 1), or
remotely through Modbus protocol (P770 = 2 or 3) or SmartLinx.
Entry:
0 = local
1 = remote
WARNING
When a SmartLinx card is installed and P799 = 1, the parameters that the SmarlLinx card is
writing to the BW500 and BW500/L will be continuously updated. Therefore, if you connect
a SmartLinx card to the BW500 and BW500/L, set P799 = 1 and not write anything to the
SmarLinx card, your setpoints will be zero.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.4 Dolphin Protocol
11.4 Dolphin Protocol

The protocol is available on all communications ports on all units. This protocol is not available
for third party use.
The primary use of this protocol is to connect the BW500 and BW500/L to Siemens Milltronics’
Dolphin Plus configuration software.
Dolphin Plus Screen Shot
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.5 Modbus RTU/ASCII Protocol

Modbus is an industry standard protocol owned by Schneider Automation Inc.1) and is used
throughout process control industries for communication between devices. Modbus RTU and
Modbus ASCII are both master-slave type protocols. BW500 and BW500/L’s Modbus is a slave
unit.
BW500 and BW500/L supports both the RTU and ASCII version of Modbus and attempts to
automatically detect the type when a connection is made.
Note
• host should wait at least 500 ms between a message polls to the BW500 and BW500/L
• for Modbus RTU, the host should wait at least 1000 ms for a response from the BW500
and BW500/L. In Modbus ASCII mode the suggested timeout is 1500 ms.
1) Modicon is a registered trademark of Groupe Schneider.

A brief description of Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII is given in this manual. For a full
description of the Modbus protocol, contact your local Schneider representative. Also you may
try their web site at:
http://www.modicon.com/ (http://www.modicon.com/)
At the time of publication of this manual, the Modbus Protocol was located under products /
technical publications / communications products / Modbus protocol.
Note
Siemens does not own the Modbus RTU protocol. All information regarding that protocol is
subject to change without notice.
11.5.1 How Modbus Works

As mentioned above, Modbus is a master-slave type protocol. This can also be referred to as a
query-response protocol. What both of these terms mean is that on the network, there is one
master which requests information from multiple slave devices. The slave devices are not
permitted to talk unless they have been asked for information. When responding, the slaves will
either give the information that the master has requested or give an error code consisting of why
it cannot give the information or that it did not understand the request. Refer to Error Handling
(Page 149).
All BW500 and BW500/L information is mapped into the Modbus holding registers so that
Modbus function code 03 can read from them and Modbus function code 06 and 16 can write to
them.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.5.2 Modbus RTU vs. ASCII

There are two main differences between Modbus RTU and Modbus ASCII. The first is that
Modbus RTU encodes the message in 8-bit binary, while ASCII encodes the message in ASCII
characters. Therefore, one byte of information would be encoded into 8 bits for RTU and into two
ASCII characters for ASCII (which would be two 7-bit units). The second difference is that the
error checking method is different (see below).
Modbus RTU has the advantage that it has a much greater data throughput than ASCII. Modbus
ASCII has the advantage that it allows time intervals of up to one second to occur between
characters without causing an error. Either protocol works with the BW500 and BW500/L.
11.5.3 Modbus Format
Note
When using a commercial Modbus driver all of the message details are handled for you.
To give you a better idea of how a Modbus message works, a master on network would send a
message in a format similar to this:
Station address Function code Information Error check
Where:
Station address the network address of the slave being ac-

cessed
Function Code number that represent a Modbus command,
either:
03 read function
06, 16 write functions
Information depends on function code
Error Check Cyclical Redundancy Check (CRC) for RTU
and Longitudinal Redundancy Check (LRC)
for ASCII
There is more to the frame than is described above, this is shown to give the user a general
idea of what is going on. For a full description, refer to the Modbus specifications.
11.5.4 Modbus Register Map

The memory map of the BW500 and BW500/L occupies the Modbus holding registers (R40,001
and up).
The BW500 and BW500/L was designed to make it easy for users to get useful information via
Modbus. The following chart gives an overview of the different sections.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Register Map for BW500 and BW500/L
Map Legend Description

Type: Arbitrary classification of registers.
Description: Brief description or title of associated register.
Start: Provides the starting address for the register(s)
where the parameter values are to be read from
or written to.
Number R: The number of registers required to read or write
the complete parameter value. Where the num-
ber of registers (6) are addressed in incrementing
sequence from the start register.
Parameter Values: Refer to Parameter Values.
Read: Identifies the read / write capability for the regis-
ter being addressed.
Reference: Provides reference documentation for the register
being addressed.
Type Description Start #R Parameter Read Reference

Values
Format Format 40,062 1 0-1 r/w Refer to
Word for 32 Modbus
bit variables Register
Map (cont’d)
section
given below.
ID Device Iden- 40,064 1 2 r Refer to
tifier Modbus
Register
Map (cont’d)
section
given below.
Handshak- Parameter 40,090 1 0-999 r/w Refer to the
ing Area Primary 40,091 1 0-9 r/w Modbus
(Parameter Index Register
Access) Map (cont’d)
Secondary 40,092 1 0-9 r/w section
Index given below.
Format 40,093 1 bit mapped r/w
Word
Read Value 40,094 2 32 bits r
(word 1)
Write Value 40,096 2 32 bits r/w
(word 1)
Date and YYYY 41,000 1 1996-2069 r/w Refer to the
Timea) MM 41,001 1 1 - 12 r/w Date and
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications

Values
DD 41,002 1 1 - 31 r/w Time
(R41,000 –
41,006)
section
given below
and also
P008
(Page 154)
hh 41,003 1 00 - 23 r/w Refer to the
mm 41,004 1 00 - 59 r/w Date and
Time
ss 41,005 1 00 - 59 r/w (R41,000 –
41,006)
section
given below
and also
P009
(Page 155)
Time Zone 41,006 1 -12 - 12 r/w see P739
(Page 186)
Process Rate 41,010 2 32 bits r Refer to the
Values Load 41,012 32 bits r Process
Values
Speed 41,014 2 32 bits r (R41,010 –
Total 1 41,016 2 32 bits r R41,048)
Total 2 41,018 2 32 bits r section
given below.
Device State 41,020 1 bit mapped r Refer to the
Process
Values
(R41,010 –
R41,048)
section
given below.
Command 41,022 1 bit mapped r/w Refer to
Control Command
Controls
(41,022)
given below.
Multi-Span 41,024 1 1-8 r/w Refer to
Selection Multispan
(Page 81)
and P365
(Page 170).
Total 1 dec- 41,025 1 1-3 r/w Refer to
imal places Read/Write
Total 2 dec- 41,026 1 1-3 r/w (R41,025 –
imal places R41,026)
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications

Values
Batch total 41,027 1 1-3 r/w Total Deci-
mal Places
section
given below.
PID 1 Set- 41,040 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
pointa) P415
PID 2 Set- 41,042 2 32 bits r/w (Page 175).
pointa)
Batch Set- 41,044 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
pointa) P564.
(Page 177)
Batch Pre- 41,046 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
warn Set- P567
pointa) (Page 177).
I/O Discrete 41,070 1 bit mapped r Refer to the
Input I/O (R41,070
Relay Out- 41,080 1 bit mapped – 41,116)
puts section
given below.
mA Inputsa) 41,090 2 0000 - r
20,000
mA Outputs 41,110 3b) 0000 - r
20,000
Diagnostic Diagnostic 41,200 1 number r Refer to the
State code Trouble-
shooting
(Page 193)s
ection.
P940, load 41,201 2 32 bits r Refer to
cell A, index P940 Load
1 Cell mV
P940, load 41,203 2 32 bits r Signal Test
cell B, index (Page 191)
2 and P943
Load Cell
P940, load 41,205 2 32 bits r A/D Refer-
cell C, index ence
3a) (Page 191)
P940, load 41,207 2 32 bits r
cell D, index
4a)
P943, index 41,209 2 32 bits r
1
P943, index 41,211 2 32 bits r
2a)
P943, index 41,213 2 32 bits r
3a)
P943, index 41,215 2 32 bits r
4
P943, index 41,217 2 32 bits r
5
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications

Values
P943, index 41,219 2 32 bits r
6a)
P943, index 41,221 2 32 bits r
7a)
PID Tuninga) PID 1 Pro- 41,400 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
portional P405
Term (Page 174).
PID 2 Pro- 41,402 2 32 bits r/w
portional
Term
PID 1 Inte- 41,404 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
gral Term P406
PID 2 Inte- 41,406 2 32 bits r/w (Page 174).
gral Term
PID 1 Deriv- 41,408 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
ative Term P407
PID 2 Deriv- 41,410 2 32 bits r/w (Page 174).
ative Term
PID 1 Feed 41,412 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
Forward P408
Term (Page 174).
PID 2 Feed 41,414 2 32 bits r/w
Forward
Term
PID 1 Re- 41,416 2 32 bits r/w Refer to
mote Set- P418
point Ratio (Page 176).
PID 2 Re- 41,418 2 32 bits r/w
mote Set-
point Ratio
a) Not available with BW500/L
b) BW500/L has 1 output only
11.5.5 Modbus Register Map (cont’d)

Format (R40,062)
This value determines the format of all unsigned, double-register integers (UINT32), except for
those in the direct parameter access.
0 indicates that the most significant byte (MSB) is given first
1 indicates that the least significant byte (LSB) is given first
For more information on this data format see page 108 and also P742 Word Order Parameter
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Device Identifier (R40,064)

This value identifies the Siemens Milltronics device type and is “2” for the BW500 and BW500/L.
Handshaking Area (Parameter Access)

Built into BW500 and BW500/L is an advanced handshaking area that can be used to read and
write 32 bit parameters.
Mapping
Parameter Read and Write (40,090 – 40,095) is a series of six registers that are used for reading
and writing parameter values to and from the BW500 and BW500/L. The first three registers are
always unsigned integers representing parameters and index values. The second three registers
are the format and value(s) of the parameter.
All parameters normally accessed through the hand-held programmer are available through
these registers:
Address Description
40,090 Parameter (integer)
40,091 Primary Index (integer)
40,092 Secondary Index (integer)
40,093 Format word (bit mapped)
40,094 Read value, word 1
40,095 Read value, word 2
40,096 Write value, word 1
40,097 Write value, word 2
Reading Parameters
To read parameters through Modbus follow these steps:
1. Send the parameter, its primary index, and its secondary index (usually 0) and format to
registers 40,090, to 40,093.
2. Wait until you can read the above values from the registers (40,090 to 40,093).
3. Read the value from registers 40,094 and 40,095.
Writing Parameters
To set parameters through Modbus follow these steps:
1. Send the parameter, its primary index, and its secondary index (usually 0) to registers
40,090, 40,091, and 40,092.
2. Write the value to registers 40,096 and 40,097
3. Write the desired format word to register 40,093 to enable the BW500 and BW500/L to
interpret the value correctly.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Format Register:
Bits Values Description

1-8 0-2 Error Code
9 - 11 0-7 decimal offset
12 0/1 decimal shift, Right (0) or Left
(1)
13 0/1 Numeric format: Fixed (0) or
FLoat (1)
14 0/1 Read or Write of data, Read (0),
Write (1)
15 0/1 Word order: Most Significant
word first (0), Least Significant
Word first (1)
16 Reserved
The bits listed above are in order from least to most significant:
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
For example, to format the output value so that it is shown with two decimal places shifted to the
left the format bits would look like this:
16 0 reserved
15 0 most significant first
14 0 read
13 1 float format
12 0
11 0 decimal offset +2
10 1
9 0
8 0
7 0
6 0
5 0 no error code
4 0
3 0
2 0
1 0
The value sent to the BW500 and BW500/L is 0001001000000000 binary or 4608 decimal.
The value 4608 is sent as an integer to register 40,093 to format the output words 40,094 and
40,095 accordingly.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
If the numeric data type is set for integer and the value contains decimal places they are
ignored. In this situation use the decimal offset to ensure that you have an integer value and
then write your code to recognize and handle the decimal offset. Bits 9 to 11 indicate the number
of places by which the decimal is to be shifted. Bit 12 indicates the direction by which the
decimal point is shifted, left or right. For example, if the decimal offset (value of bits 9 to 11) is ‘2’
and the shift (value of bit 12 is) ‘0’, then the decimal point is shifted two places to the right.
Error Codes
The error codes returned in the format area are 8-bit integers found in the lowest 8 bits of the
format word. This allows for 256 potential error codes.
Currently the BW500 and BW500/L has two error codes available:
Values Description
0 No error
1 Data not available as percent (available as units)
2-255 Reserved
Date and Time (R41,000 – 41,006)1)

The date and time can be read or written in registers 41,000 to 41,006 as defined in the table
above.
Example: If you are located in Toronto, Canada and would like to set the date and time to
February 14, 1999, 1:30 p.m. and 42 seconds, you would write the following:
Bits Values
R41,000 1999
R41,001 2
R41,002 14
R41,003 13
R41,004 30
R41,005 42
R41,006 -5
Note
The time zone register is used only as a reference and does not affect the operation of the
BW500.
Process Values (R41,010 – R41,048)

Rate, Load, Speed, and Total (R41,010 – R41,019)
The associated registers provide the readings of rate, load, and speed. Totalizer 1 and Totalizer
2 in engineering units as displayed in the local BW500 and BW500/L display.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Device State (41,020 – 41,020)

The Device State word is used to feed back the current operating state of the product. Each bit
gives the state of different parts of the product, some mutually exclusive, others are not. The
state should be checked to verify any device commands.
Bit # Description Bit Clear Bit Set (1)

1 PID 1 Modea) Manual Auto
2 PID 1 Freezea) No Yes
3 PID 1 Setpoint Sourcea) Local Remote
7 Zero No In progress
8 Span No In progress
9 - - -
10 - - -
11 - - -
12 - - -
13 Write Privileges No Yes
14 System Configured Not Configured Yes
15 Mode Calibration Mode RUN Mode
16 Totalizing Not Totalizing Totalizing
a) Not available with BW500/L.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Command Controls (41,022)

The command control word is used to control the unit. Each bit gives access to a command or
state as if the operator was using the keypad.
Bits initiating a command (7-12) must change state to cause the command the begin. For
example, to reset totalizer 1, Bit 9 must be set to 0, then changed to 1. It can stay set or clear for
any period:
Bit # Description Bit Clear Bit Set (1)

7 Zero No change Start
8 Span No change Start
9 Reset Totalizer 1 No change Reset
10 Reset Totalizer 2 No change Reset
11 Reset Batch Totalizera) No change Reset
12 Print - Print
13 - - -
14 - - -
15 - - -
16 - - -
WARNING
Before the BW500 and BW500/L can be commanded remotely, parameter P799 must be
set for remote control.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Read/Write (R41,025 – R41,026) Total Decimal Places

Sets the number of decimal places (0-3) being read for Total 1, (words 41,016 and 41,017) and
Total 2, (words 41,018 and 41,019).
With 3 decimal places, the largest value that can be read is 2,147,483.648.
With 2 decimal places, the largest value that can be read is 21,474,836.48.
With 1 or 0 decimal places, the largest value that can be read is 100,000,000.
Although the word registers are limited to reading a maximum value as indicated above for the
defined number of decimal places, the overflow bits of Instrument_Status2 (Word 31) will only
reflect an overflow condition (Bits 1 and 2 set to 1) when the decimal place is set to 2 or 3.
When set to 2 or 3, the word registers will stop accumulating at the indicated values however,
the LUI will continue to totalize to a value of 100,000,000. Should this condition exist, prior to
resetting the totalizer registers, be sure to observe and record the totalized value as displayed
on the LUI. Not doing this could cause a reporting discrepancy in expected material totals within
the process.
Once the internal totalizer registers realize a value of 100,000,000, the internal registers will
perform a rollover, causing the display of the LUI to start from a value of 0. This will also cause
the Instrument_Status2 word bits to reset to 0.
Example: R41,025
Bits 0 and 1 are used to indicate the number of decimal places being read in Total 1: words 7
and 8.
Bit 15 is used to indicate if the decimal place is too large to read the total value correctly.
If three decimal places are being read in Total 1:
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
If three decimal places are being read in Total 1, and the value is too large to be read with three
decimal places:
Bits 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
I/O (R41,070 – 41,116)

The BW500 provides I/O in the form of:
● discrete inputs
● relay outputs
● mA inputs1)
● mA outputs1)
1) The standard BW500 provides only one mA output (0/4 – 20 mA). The inclusion of an optional
mA I/O card provides two mA inputs (0/4 – 20 mA) and two additional mA outputs. The optional
mA I/O card is not available with BW500/L
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
For the I/O, the assigned registers represent the logic status (e.g. open or closed) of the I/O as
configured. Discrete inputs are configured via P270, auxiliary input function; while relay outputs
are configured via P100, relay function.
The I/O are mapped into the respective input and output registers, R41,070 and R41,080, as
follows:
R41,070 R41,080
Input Bit Output Bit
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
For the mA I/O, the assigned registers represent the mA level (e.g. 0 to 20 mA) of the I/O as
registered in P911 and P914, mA output test (output value) and mA input value.
The mA I/O are mapped into the respective input and output registers:
Input Register Output Register

1 R41,090 1 R41,110
2 R41,091 2 R41,111
3 R41,112
For 0 to 20 mA I/O, the register value ranges from 0 to 20,000. For 4 to 20 mA I/O, the register
value ranges from 4,000 to 20,000. If the 4 or 20 mA values have been trimmed, then the
register value is adjusted accordingly; e.g. an I/O value of 22 mA would be registered as 22,000.
Diagnostic (R41,200)
Refer to Troubleshooting (Page 193)
PID Tuning (R41,400 – 41,419)1)

For BW500 set up for PID control, several registers have been provided for tuning. Refer to PID
Control (Page 107) and the associated parameters as listed in the register map.
Note
Before you can change any of the setpoints, P799 must be set for remote control.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
Parameter Values
Bit Mapped bits are packed into registers in groups of 16 bits (1 word). In this manual we
number the bits from 1 to 16, with bit 1 being the least significant bit and bit 16 referring to the
most significant bit.
16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
MSB LSB
Large numbers are put into unsigned 32 bit integers with a fixed decimal place of three. For
example, a value of ‘7345’ represents a value in the BW500 ‘7.345’. The default word order is
that the first word is the most significant word (MSW) and the second word (register) is the least
significant word (LSW).
For example, if we read R41,431 as a 32-bit, the 32 bits would look like the following:
R41,431 R41,432
16 MSB 1 16 LSB 1
32 32-bit integer value (UNINT32) 1
The whole is read as a 32-bit integer. The most significant byte (MSB) and least significant byte
(LSB) can be reversed to accommodate some Modbus drivers.
Text Messages
If a Siemens Milltronics device parameter returns a text message, that message is converted to
a number and provided in the register. The numbers are shown in the table below:
Number Text Message as Displayed on LCD

22222 invalid value
30000 off
30001 on
30002 ====
30003 (parameter does not exist)
30004 err
30005 err1
30006 open
30007 shrt
30008 pass
30009 fail
30010 hold
30012 hi
30013 de
30014 en
-32768 value is less than -20,000
32767 value is greater than 20,000
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.6 Modems
11.6 Modems
The BW500 and BW500/L has been successfully connected to several different modems. In
general, the Modbus protocol is a very modem friendly protocol. This section gives some general
guidelines on modems and their connection. For detailed information, see the modem
documentation.
Picking Modems
There are several different types of modems; dial-up, leased line, radio-link, fiber-optic, to name
the most common.
Dial-up
uses a standard analog phone line and dials the number of the receiving modem.
Lease line
come in either 2 or 4 wire types and use special phone lines that are ‘leased’ from your phone
company (or you) and do not require any dialing.
Radio-link
come in many different types, but all use radio frequencies for transmitting the information.
Fiber-optic
uses a fiber-optic line to connect the two modems.
Each type of modem and each model have various characteristics. Before purchasing the
modem contact the modem manufacturer and ask if they have had experience using the
modems with Modbus protocol with no flow control. If they have, ask them what settings were
required.
Setting up the Modems

Modems can be configured using software, dip switches, jumpers, or a combination.
Dip switches are normally located at the back of the modem, jumpers are normally located on
the motherboard and require that you remove the cover. Software normally requires you to use a
standard terminal program and to connect to the RS-232 port on the modem and send special
commands. The most popular command set is called the AT, or Hayse, command set.
Your modem manual should give details on how to configure it.
11.6.1 Example Setup

For a typical dial-up modem, try the following setup as a first attempt:
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.6 Modems
Master
Modem
● auto answer off (dip switch?)
● load factory default (dip switch?)
● no flow control (dip switch?)
● baud rate = 9600
● 10 data bits (probably the default)
Modbus RTU Software

● 8 bit
● no parity
● 1 stop bit
● dial prefix: ATDT
● Initialization command: ATE0Q0V1X05=0512=100
● Reset command: ATZ
● Hang-up command: ATHO
● Command response delay: 5 seconds
● Answer Delay: 30 seconds
● Inter-character delay: 55 ms
Slave
Modem
● auto answer on (dip switch?)
● load factory default (dip switch?)
● no flow control (dip switch?)
● 10 data bits (probably the default)
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.7 Error Handling
BW500 and BW500/L

● set P770, port 1, to the value 3 (Modbus RTU)
● set P771, port 1, to the value 1 (Network ID 1)
● set P772, port 1, to the value 3 (Baud rate of 9600)
● set P773, port 1, to the value 0 (No Parity)
● set P774, port 1, to the value 8 (8 Data Bits)
● set P775, port 1, to the value 1 (1 Stop Bit)
● set P778, port 1, to the value 1 (Communications through Modem)
● set P779, port 1, to the value 300 (Modem Inactivity of 300 seconds)
Note
Parameters are defined the in the Installation section
11.7 Error Handling

Modbus Responses
When polled by a Modbus Master, a slave device will do one of the following:
1. Not reply
means something went wrong with the transmission of the message
2. Echo back the command with the correct response
is the normal response, (see the Modbus specifications for more details)
3. Return an Exception Code
reflects an error in the message
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.7 Error Handling
BW500 and BW500/L uses the following exception codes:
Code Name Meaning

01 Illegal Function The function code received in
the query is not an allowable
action for the slave.
02 Illegal Data Address The data address received in
the query is not an allowable
address for the slave.
03 Illegal Data Value A value contained in the query
data filed is not an allowable
value of the slave.
04 Slave Device Failure An unrecoverable error occurred
while the slave was attempting
to perform the requested action.
05 Acknowledge The slave has accepted a re-
quest and is processing it, but a
long duration of time is required.
06 Slave Device Busy The slave is processing a long-
duration program command.
08 Memory Parity Error The slave attempted to read
extended memory, but detected
a parity error in the memory.
Service may be required on the
slave.
Error Handling
Errors can be divided up into two general sources:
● an error in transmission
● user tries to do something that is not a valid action
In the first case, the BW500 and BW500/L will not respond and let the master wait for a
‘response time out’ error, which will cause the master to re-send the message.
In the second case, it depends on what the user tries to do. Listed below are various actions and
what the expected outcome is. In general, BW500 and BW500/L will not give an error to the user
request.
● If the user reads an invalid parameter, the user will get a number back.
● If the user writes an invalid parameter (a non-existing parameter or a read only parameter),
the value will be ignored and no error response will be made. However, the current value will
not reflect the desired new value.
● If the user writes a read only register, then the value will be ignored and no error response
will be made. However, the current value will not reflect the desired new value.
● If the user attempts to write one or more registers that are out of range, an exception
response code 2 will be generated.
● If using an unsupported function code, undocumented results may occur. The user is
encouraged not to do this.
BW500 and BW500/L

Communications
11.7 Error Handling
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters 12
f indicates factory set value
P000 Security Lock

Locks out the program editor so that parameter values for P001 through P999 cannot be
changed. This however, does not prevent the access to the parameters for viewing.
Programming is locked out if the value of P000 is other than 1954.
Entry:
1954 = unlockedf
12.1 Start Up (P001 to P017)

This is the minimum parameter programming required before attempting a calibration and
successful entry into the RUN mode.
12.1.1 P001 Language

Selects the language for communication with the BW500 and BW500/L
Entry:
1 = Englishf 5 = Italian
2 = French 6 = Portuguese
3 = German 7 = Russian
4 = Spanish
12.1.2 P002 Test Reference Selection

Selects the type of test reference used to represent a material load: weight, chain, or electronic.
weight: the weight that is supplied specific to the scale

chain: optional, sized specific to scale and conveyor
electronic: calibration based on automatic calculation of the
mV span from the load cells
Entry:
1 = weightf
2 = chain
3 = ECal
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.1 Start Up (P001 to P017)
12.1.3 P003 Number of Load Cells

Siemens belt scales are available in models of one, two, four, or six load cell design. Select the
number of load cells corresponding to the belt scale connected. If using the optional remote
LVDT conditioner card, for LVDT based scales, select “1”.
Entry:
enter the number of load cells: BW500: 1, 2f, 4, or 61)

BW500/L: 1, 2f
1) For 6 load cell belt scales, enter 4.
12.1.4 P004 Rate Measurement System

Selects system of measurement used, either imperial or metric.
Entry:
1 = imperial
2 = metricf
12.1.5 P005 Design Rate Units

Determines the units for programming and measurement.
imperial - P004 = 1 metric - P004 = 2

entry: 1f = T/h (tons/hour) t/h (tonnes/hour)
2= LT/h (long tons/hour) kg/h (kilograms/hour)
3= lb/h (pounds/hour) kg/min (kilo-
grams/minute)
4= lb/min (pounds/minute)
Changing this parameter does not affect the rate (P011), belt speed (P014), or belt length
(P016) parameters. These parameters should be re-entered for conformity in units.
t =1000 kg
LT=2240 lb.
T=2000 lb.
12.1.6 P008 Date

Enter the current date in yyyy-mm-dd format:
yyyy = year
mm=month, 01 –12
dd=day, 01 – 31
e.g. 1999-03-19 (March 19, 1999)
Note
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.1 Start Up (P001 to P017)
12.1.7 P009 Time

Enter the current time in hh-mm-ss 24 hour format.
Where:
hh=hour
mm=minute
ss=second
Note
12.1.8 P011 Design Rate

Specifies the design rate of material flow for the belt scale (f = 0.00).
Enter the design rate in the units selected (P005).
12.1.9 P014 Design Speed

Specifies the design speed for the conveyor belt (f = 0.00)
Speed units are:
feet/min if the imperial system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 1
metres/s if the metric system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 2
12.1.10 P015 Speed Constant

Set the speed constant for the speed sensor selected (P015-01 or 02)1).
1) Index 02 is not available with BW500/L
The value in P015-01 is used with the speed sensor frequency, to calculate the actual belt speed
(f = 0.000).
The value in P015-02 is used for differential speed detection2).
Note
Entry: If speed input is wired for constant speed (terminals 17/18 jumpered), value defaults
to jumpered, and the second speed sensor is ignored.
If the speed input is connected to a speed sensor, press ENTER . P015 automatically jumps to
P690. Refer to P690 (Page 183) for speed constant entry.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.1 Start Up (P001 to P017)
12.1.11 P016 Belt Length

The length of the conveyor belt (one belt revolution) (f = 0.000)
Length units are:
feet: if the imperial system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 1
metres: if the metric system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 2
Enter the belt length.
12.1.12 P017 Test Load

The load to be referenced when performing a span (f = 0.00).
Load units are:
lb/ft: if the imperial system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 1
kg/m: if the metric system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 2
The display indicates the test reference as selected by P002: ‘weight’, ‘chain’, or ‘ECal’ and the
multispan number MS, 1-81).
1) Multispan function is not available with BW500/L.
Enter the test load value. In the case of weight, pressing enter at P017 invokes P680 for data
entry.
In the case of ECal, pressing enter at P017 invokes P693 for data entry. ECal sets the value for
P017 at 100% of design load (P952).
In the case of chain, pressing enter at P017 allows direct entry of the load value stamped on the
chain’s name plate.
If P002 is set to 'weight' the test load parameter presents two options:
1. enter the load in weight/unit length
Set P680 Test Load: Weight (Options) to ’1-Enter Value’, and then enter the desired value for
P017.
or
2. the mass and the weigh length.
Set P680 Test Load: Weight (Options) (Page 183) to ’2-Enter Data’ and then enter the ’Total
Mass of Test Weights’ in P681, and the ’Average Idler Space’ in P682.
Example:
3 standard MSI test weights, 1.2 meter idler spacing
Test Load: 24.6 kg (3x8.2 kg)/(1.2 m) =20.5 kg/m
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.1 Start Up (P001 to P017)
12.1.13 P018 Speed Adjust

This parameter allows adjustment to the speed constant for both speed sensors (P015-01 or
P015-02)2). Initially, this parameter displays the dynamic speed of the belt. If thedisplayed speed
is not equal to the actual speed, enter the actual belt speed (f = 0.00).
For speed sensor applications, the value of P015 is automatically adjusted.
For constant speed (terminals 17/18 jumpered) the value of P014 is automatically adjusted.
12.1.14 P019 Manual Span Adjust

Provides a means for adjustment to the span calibration (f = 0)
The adjustment value is determined by performing material tests and is subsequently entered
either as a calculation of % change into P598, or as the weight of the material test.
Entry:
1 = % change
2 = material test
Refer to Recalibration (Page 67).
12.1.15 P022 Minimum Speed Frequency

Sets the minimum frequency that the speed sensor can reliably read. Signals at low frequencies
are erratic, adversely affecting the performance of the weighing system.
Entry:
1 = 1 Hz (at 1 Hz, it takes 1 s before defaulting to 0 speed)
2 = 2 Hzf (at 2 Hz, it takes 0.5 s before defaulting to 0 speed)
12.1.16 P080 Display Damping

P080-01 Rate
P080-02 Load
P080-03 Speed
Sets the speed of response to which the displayed readings (rate, load, and speed), and outputs
(alarm and mA1)) react to change.Refer to Operation (Page 97).
Note
Effect of damping (P080-01) on mA output can be overridden by mA output damping (P220).
The higher the damping value, the slower the response.

Enter damping value, range 0.000f – 999
1) Damping is not applicable to the mA output if programmed for PID function (P201 = 4).
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.2 Relay/Alarm Function (P100 - P117)
12.1.17 P081 Display Scroll Mode

The RUN displays are scrolled either manually by pressing ALT DISP if the scroll mode is set to
off, or automatically if the mode is set to on.
Entry:
0f = OFF
1 = ON
Note
BW500 has 5 programmable relays and BW500/L has 2
These parameters are specific to the use of the relay/alarm function. Refer to Operation
(Page 97).
12.2.1 P100 Relay Function

Sets the relay function for the relay selected; BW500: relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05), BW500/L:
relays 1 and 2 (P100 - 01, 02)
Note
• To reset the Diagnostics relay, the BW500 and BW500/L must be cycled between
PROGRAM and RUN mode
• To reset the Batch relays, the Batch totalizer must be reset.
Entry:
0 = OFF f
1 = rate
2 = load
3 = speed
4 = diagnostic
5 = PID-01 setpoint deviation1)2)
6 = PID-02 setpoint deviation 1)2)
7 = pre-warn1)3)
8 = setpoint1)3)
9 = online calibration1)4)
10 = differential speed detection1)5)
11 = certification rate alarm (high alarm preset to 100%, low alarm preset to 20 %)6)
2) Valid only if PID system (P400) is enabled
3) Valid only if batch function (P560) is enabled
4) Valid only if online calibration (P355) is enabled
5) Valid only if Aux. input (P270) = 16 (differential speed detection)
6) When selected parameters P101 and P102 are locked
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.2.2 P101 High Alarm / Deviation Alarm

High Alarm (f = 100)
For relay functions, P100 = 1, 2, and 3, this parameter sets the high alarm setpoint for the relay
selected; BW500: relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05); BW500/L: relays 1 and 2 (P100 -01 to -02).
Enter the value in % of full scale.
Deviation Alarm (f = 10)1)
For relay functions, P100 = 5 and 6, this parameter sets the deviation setpoint for the relay
selected; relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05).
Enter the value in % of setpoint.
Differential Speed (f = 110)1)
For differential speed functions, P100 = 10, this parameter sets the high alarm setpoint for the
relay selected; relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05).
1) Not available with the BW500/L.
12.2.3 P102 Low Alarm

Sets the low alarm setpoint for relay selected, BW500: relays 1 to 5 (P100 – 01 to – 05),
BW500/L: relays 1 and 2 (P100 – 01 to – 02) (f=20).
Enter the value in % of full scale
Note
Not applicable if P100 = 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
Differential Speed (f = 90)1)

For differential speed functions, P100 = 10, this parameter sets the low alarm setpoint for the
relay selected; BW500: relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05).
12.2.4 P107 Relay Alarms

Sets the alarm mode for the relay selected; BW500: relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05); BW500/ L:
relays 1 and 2 (P100 -01 to -02).
Entry:
1 = high and lowf
2 = high only
3 = low only
Note
Not applicable if P100 = 4, 5, 6, 7, or 8.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.2.5 P117 Relay Dead Band

Sets the dead band for the relay selected; BW500: relays 1 to 5 (P100 -01 to -05); BW500/ L:
relays 1 and 2 (P100 -01 to -02). The dead band prevents relay chatter due to fluctuations at the
high or low setpoint (f = 3.0).
Enter the value in % of full scale, or for deviation alarm enter % of setpoint, range is 1 to 10 %.
Note
Not applicable if P100 = 4, 7, or 8.
12.2.6 P118 Relay Logic

Sets the logic applied to relays to determine their open or closed state.
Power Failure
The relays on the BW500 default to normally open under power loss.
Normal Operation
In software, all relays are programmed the same way; with ON setpoints always indicating relay
action. This parameter allows the reversal of the operation. Normally, P118 = 2 for each relay.
Reverse Operation
When P118 = 3, the operation of the indexed relay is reverse from normal.
Values
P118 Logic Relay

2 positive logic normally closedf
3 negative logic normally open
12.2.7 P119 Override

This function allows the user to simulate an alarm condition: ON or OFF, which will override
normal operation until P119 setting is returned to normal.
Values
P119 Condition Display (alarm field)

0 normal normal
1 alarm on ALM #
2 alarm off blank
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.3 mA I/O Parameters (P200 - P220)

These parameters are specific to the use of the mA output. Refer to mA Output (Page 101)for
details.
● mA output 1 is physically located at terminals 21/22 on the main board
● mA outputs 2 and 3, and inputs 1 and 2 are physically located on the optional mA I/O board
which is mounted onto the main board.1)
In the case of assigning mA input and output functions to PID control1), the following correlation
exist:
mA input mA output
PID control 1 1 2
PID control 2 2 3
12.3.1 P200 mA Output Range

Sets the mA range for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P200 - 01 to - 03)2).
Entry:
1 = 0 - 20 mA
2 = 4 - 20 mAf
2) BW500/L has one output, parameters will not present multiple indexes.
12.3.2 P201 mA Output Function

Assigns the mA output function for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P201 - 01 to - 03)2)
Entry:
1 = ratef
2 = load
3 = speed
4 = PID control output3) 4)
4) Valid for outputs 2 and 3, only if PID system (P400) is enabled.
12.3.3 P204 mA Output Average

Sets the averaging period, in seconds, for the rate output for output 1 only.
The instantaneous mA values are averaged for the set period, and then the average value is
output during the next period while a new average is being calculated.
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 – 999 = averaging period
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.3.4 P212 mA Output Minimum

Sets the minimum mA limit for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P212 - 01 to - 03)2). The limit
sets the lower mA range (0 or 4 mA) to a minimum output value (f = 3.80).
Enter limit value, range 0 - 22
12.3.5 P213 mA Output Maximum

Sets the maximum mA limit for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P213 - 01 to - 03)2). The limit
sets the upper mA range (20 mA) to a maximum output value (f = 22.00).
Enter limit value, range 0 - 22
12.3.6 P214 4 mA Output Trim

Trims the 4 mA output level for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P214 - 01 to – 03)1). The trim
adjust the output to agree with a milliameter or other external mA input device.
Scroll the trim value up or down
12.3.7 P215 20 mA Output Trim

Trims the 20 mA output level for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P215 - 01 to - 03)1). The trim
adjust the output to agree with a milliammeter or other external mA input device.
Scroll the trim value up or down
12.3.8 P220 mA Output Damping

Sets the damping for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P220 - 01 to - 03)1). Damping sets the
speed at which the mA output reacts to change. The greater the damping value, the slower the
response. If the value is 0, the mA output assumes the damping set in P080 (f = 0.00).
Enter the damping value, range 0.001 – 999
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.3.9 P250 mA input range

Sets the mA range for the input selected, inputs 1 to 2 (P250 - 01 to - 02).
Entry:
1 = 0 - 20 mA
2 = 4 - 20 mAf
Note
12.3.10 P255 mA Input Function

Assigns the mA input function for the input selected, inputs 1 to 2 (P250 - 01 to - 02)
0 = OFFf
1 = PID setpoint
2 = PID process variable
3 = Online calibration1)
4 = Moisture compensation
5 = Incline compensation
Note
1) Valid only if Online Calibration is turned on, (P355 = 1).
12.3.11 P261 4 mA Input Trim

Trims the 4 mA input level for the input selected, inputs 1 to 2 (P250 - 01 to - 02). The trim
adjusts the input to agree with an external 4 mA source.
Follow the BW500 online instructions to trim the input
Note
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.3.12 P262 20 mA Input Trim

Trims the 20 mA input level for the input selected, inputs 1 to 2 (P250 - 01 to - 02). The trim
adjusts the input to agree with an external 20 mA source.
Follow the BW500 online instructions to trim the input.
Note
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.3.13 P270 Auxiliary Input Function

Selects the auxiliary input function for the input selected; inputs 1 to 5 (P270 - 01 to - 05).
Value Function Symbol Description

0 off
1 alternate display: momentary closure of
the input contact caus-
es the RUN display to
scroll to the next dis-
play.
2 reset totalizer 1: momentary closure of
the input contact resets
the totalizer.
3 zero: momentary closure of
the input contact initi-
ates a zero calibration.
4 span: momentary closure of
the input contact initi-
ates a span calibration.
5 print: momentary closure of
the input contact sends
a print request.
6a) multispan selection: maintained closure
state of the input con-
tact(s) (up to 3) selects
the multispan (P365).
8a) reset batch: momentary closure of
the input contact resets
the batch totalizer to
zero.
9a) PID freeze: off closure suspends
PID function in the auto
mode freeze function in
the auto mode and
holds output at last
value
10a) PID setpoint source: remote
local
11a) PID mode: auto

manual
12 external alarm: the input contacts sta-

tus is sensed off
13 remote communication keypad / Dolphin Plus
write: write (program) enabled
SmartLinx/ remote
device write (program)
enabled
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
Value Function Symbol Description

14a) initiate online calibra- momentary closure of
tion: the input contact initi-
ates online calibration
15a) accept new online cali- momentary closure of
bration span: the input contact ac-
cepts the online calibra-
tion deviation
16a) auxiliary speed sensor for differential speed
detection
Entry:
Note
Before you can use Online Calibration, P100, P255, P355, P356, and P357 must be set up.
0 = OFFf
1 = alternate display
2 = reset totalizer 1
3 = zero
4 = span
5 = print
6 = multispan selection1) 2)
7 = reserved2)
8 = reset batch2)
9 = PID freeze2)
10 = PID setpoint source2)
11 = PID mode2)
12 = external alarm
13 = remote communication write
14 = Initiate Online Calibration2)
15 = Accept new online calibration span2) 3)
16 = Auxiliary speed sensor2)
1)If the BW500 is programmed for multispan operation, the auxiliary input contact state
determines the multispan number (equivalent to P365). Input 1 is reserved for multispan 1 and 2
selection. Input 2 is reserved for multispan 3 and 4 selection. Input 3 is reserved for multispan 5
to 8 selection.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.4 Calibration Parameters (P295 – P360)
3) Enter 1 (existing – ALT_DSP) to reject the new online calibration span.
multispan selection Auxiliary Input auxiliary input 2 auxiliary input 3

1
If an attempt is made to select a multispan that has not been zero and span calibrated, the
selection request is ignored.
Note
• When performing a remote span, it will first perform a zero, then it will ask you to set up
span test. Once loading is within +/- 2% of the design test weight, it will perform the span.
• For the print command to work, the BW500 and BW500/L must be in RUN mode.
12.4 Calibration Parameters (P295 – P360)
12.4.1 P295 Load Cell Balancing

Initiates an electronic balancing of the load cell input signals. Balancing is required for belt scale
models of two, four, or six load cell design.
Refer to Start Up (Page 47) for requirements and execution.
12.4.2 P341 Days Of Service

The cumulative days that the application device has been in service. The time is recorded once
daily in a non-resetable counter. Periods of less than 24 hours. are not recorded, nor
accumulated (f = 0).
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.5 Online Calibration Options (P355 - P358)
12.4.3 P350 Calibration Security

P350 Calibration Security
zero Span ‘Reset T’

entry: 0 = no additional Yes Yes Yes
security.f
1 = in addition to Yes No Yes
P000 lock; no
span.
2 = in addition to No No Yes
P000; no zero, no
span.
3 = in addition to No No No
P000; no zero, no
span, no totalizer
1 (T1) reset.
Note
• Online calibration options must be enabled (P355 = 1) before they become available.
• Not available with BW500/L.
12.5.1 P355 Online Calibration Feature

Enables Online Calibration.
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 = ON
12.5.2 P356 Online Calibration Reference Weight

Enter the weigh bin reference weight, (in units selected in P005), range 0.000 to 99999 (f =
0.000).
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.5.3 P357 Online Calibration Limits

Use to enter the weigh bin limit settings.
P357.1 MAX LIMIT, range 0.0 to 100.0 (f = 0%)
P357.2 HIGH LIMIT, range 0.0 to 100.0 (f = 0%)
P357.3 LOW LIMIT, range 0.0 to 100.0 (f = 0%)
12.5.4 P358 Online Calibration Activation

Initiates online calibration.
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 = ON
12.5.5 P359 Factoring

Factoring is used as a method of calculating the value of the test load (P017) to a new test
reference; either: weight, or chain. The task is performed only for the weight or chain relevant for
the multispan selected, if applicable.
Entry:
1 = weight (f = 1)
2 = chain
Refer to Recalibration (Page 67) for execution of the factoring procedure.
Note
Totalization is halted during the factoring procedure, and resumed only upon return to the
RUN mode.
12.5.6 P360 Calibration Duration

Sets the number of whole belt revolutions to be used during a zero or span calibration.
Enter number of belt revolutions, range 1 to 99. For belt scale applications 1 belt revolution or 2
minutes, whichever is longer; for weghfeeder applications 3 belt revolutions or 5 minutes,
whichever is longer.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.5.7 P365 Multispan
Note
Select the span reference to be applied for determination of rate and totalization.
Entry:
1 = multispan 1 (MS1), for product or condition Af
2 = multispan 2 (MS2), for product or condition B
3 = multispan 3 (MS3), for product or condition C
4 = multispan 4 (MS4), for product or condition D
5 = multispan 5 (MS5), for product or condition E
6 = multispan 6 (MS6), for product or condition F
7 = multispan 7 (MS7), for product or condition G
8 = multispan 8 (MS8), for product or condition H
Refer to Multispan and P270, Auxiliary Input Function (6).
12.5.8 P367 Direct Zero Entry

Directly enters the zero reference count.
Direct entry is intended for use when replacing software or hardware and it is not convenient to
perform an initial zero at that time (f = 0).
Refer to Recalibration (Page 67) for execution.
12.5.9 P368 Direct Span Entry

Directly enters the span reference count for the span selected, 1 to 8 (P368-01 to -08).
Note
BW500/L has one span entry possible, no indices will be presented.
Direct entry is intended for use when replacing software or hardware and it is not convenient to
perform an initial span at that time (f = 0).
Refer to Recalibration (Page 67) for execution.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.5.10 P370 Zero Limit Deviation %

Sets the zero calibration deviation limit (±) from the last initial zero. If the accumulated deviation
of successive zero calibrations exceeds the limit, the zero calibration is aborted (f = 12.5).
Note
If the legal for trade certification switch has been set, the zero limit is ±2%.
Enter the maximum allowable % deviation, range is 1 to 12.5 %.
12.5.11 P371 Auto Zero Initiation Upper Limit

This parameter sets maximum load on the belt as a percentage of design load at which the
device will allow ’auto-zero’ to run, min. 1.0%, max. 10.0%, default 2.0%.
When the certification switch is set this parameter will assume the default value (2.0%).
Note
Material will not be totalized during auto zero calibrations.
12.5.12 P377 Initial Zero

Resets the initial zero.
The initial zero is the reference zero to which all subsequent operator initiated zero calibrations
are compared in determining whether they have deviated beyond the zero limit (P370) (f = 1).
Note
Refer to Initial Zero (Page 74) on for execution.
12.5.13 P388 Initial Span

Resets the initial span for the span selected, multispan 1 to 8 (P388-01 to -08)1).
The initial span is the reference to which all subsequent span calibrations are compared in
determining whether they have deviated beyond an accumulated ±12.5% of the initialspan (f =
1).
Note
Refer to Initial Span (Page 78) for execution.
1) BW500/L has one span entry possible, no indices will be presented.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.6 Linearization Parameters (P390 - P392)
12.6 Linearization Parameters (P390 - P392)

These parameters are used to compensate for non-linear response of the weighing system to
the BW500 and BW500/L. Refer to Linearization for execution, and example on the use of these
parameters.
Note
In the case of multispan operation, the linearizer is applied to all spans.
12.6.1 P390 Linearizer

Enables or disables the linearization function.
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 = ON
12.6.2 P391 Linearizer Load Points

Enters the load values, in units of P017, for the point selected, points 1 to 5 (P391-01 to -05) (f =
0.00, 150 % max.)
12.6.3 P392 Linearizer Compensation %

Enters the compensation value, in percent, for the point selected, point 1 to 5 (P392-01 to −05) (f
= 0.00), range is -150 to 150 %.
12.6.4 P398-01 Moisture Content

Factors out moisture component of load, rate and total for all multispans selected. The factored
values are meant to report the dry mean values of the material being conveyed (f = 0.00)
Enter the moisture content in % weight or mA Input Value1).
1) BW500/L will allow manual entry of a moisture content.
12.6.5 P398-02 Moisture Content

Allows moisture content P398-01 to be scaled to maximum value.
Enter the moisture content in % weight (maximum value 20 mA)
Note
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.7 Proportional Integral Derivative (PID) Control
12.6.6 P399 Incline Sensing

Factors out the varying vertical force components applied to the belt scale for all multispans
selected (f = 0.00). The value is presented in degree angle (0.0° = horizontal), with a range from
-30 to 30 °.
P399 can also be used for a constant angle if a mA input is not configured. Otherwise, P399 will
contain the current value corresponding to the mA input.1)
1) BW500/L does not have mA inputs, only a fixed incline compensation value can be entered.
Note
• Changes to P401, P402, and P414 are not immediately effected while in auto mode.
Change should be made in the manual mode and are effected upon return to the auto
mode.
• The PID function does not control during any of the calibration functions (e.g. zero, span,
factor, material test).
• Not available with BW500/L.
12.7.1 P400 PID System

Enables the selected PID system, systems 1 or 2 (P400 – 01 or – 02).
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 = manual
2 = auto
12.7.2 P401 PID Update Time

Sets the update time (P401 – 01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2).
Normally the controller is updated each time the process value is updated (every 300 ms).
However in unstable or slow reacting systems the controller update can be programmed to
update on a multiple of the process value update. A high value can introduce instability (f = 1).
Entry:
1 = 300 ms
2 = 600 ms
3 = 900 ms, etc.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.7.3 P402 PID Process Value Source

Determines the source of the process value (P402 – 01 or – 02) for the corresponding PID
system (1 or 2)
The process value is the value that the controller is trying to match with the setpoint (f = 1)
Enter:
1 = ratef
2 = load
3 = mA input 1
4 = mA input 2
12.7.4 P405 Proportional Term

Sets the proportional term (P405-01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2) (f = 0.400)
The proportional term is the proportional gain. A gain of 1 is equivalent to a proportional band of
100%.
The proportional band is the range of deviation from the setpoint that corresponds to the full
range or the control output.
Enter the proportional term 0.000 to 2.000.
12.7.5 P406 Integral Term

Sets the integral term (P406-01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2) (f = 0.200)
Enter the integral term 0.000 to 2.000.
12.7.6 P407 Derivative Term

Sets the derivative term (P407-01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2) (f = 0.050)
Enter the derivative term 0.000 to 1.000.
12.7.7 P408 Feed Forward Term

Sets the feed forward term (P408-01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2) (f =
0.300)
Enter the feed forward term 0.000 to 1.000.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.7.8 P410 Manual Mode Output

Displays the percentage output value (P410-01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or
2).
When the PID system is in manual, this is the value output, providing bumpless transfer when
switching from manual to auto. When switching from auto to manual, this parameter is loaded
with the current controlled value.
12.7.9 P414 Setpoint Configuration

Configures the setpoint (P414-01 or -02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2).
Determines the source for the PID’s setpoint. If local, the setpoint value is entered into P415.
The setpoint can be set from the mA input 1 or 2. The mA value is scaled to the full scale value
of the process value (P402).
Entry:
0 = localf
1 = mA input 11)
2 = mA input 21)
3 = % rate2)
4 = % load2)
1) For PID-01, the setpoint source is mA input 1; for PID-02, the setpoint source is mA input 2.
2)Options 3 and 4 are only available if P402 has been set for an external process value source.
For option 3, the setpoint will be the current rate value displayed as a percentage: for option 4 it
will be the current load value displayed as a percentage.
12.7.10 P415 Local Set point Value

Sets the local set point (P415-01 / 02), in engineering units, for the corresponding PID system (1
or 2) when in auto mode. For the external process variable, the set point is shown in % (f =
0.000).
Note
The PID setpoint can be modified while in RUN mode using the up/down arrow keys.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.8 Batch Control (P560 – P568)
12.7.11 P416 External Setpoint

Displays the external setpoint (P416-01 / 02), in engineering units, for the corresponding PID
system (1 or 2). For the external process variable, the setpoint is shown is %.
If the setpoint is external (P414 = 1 or 2), then this parameter displays the setpoint value that is
being input, either mA input 1 or 2.
12.7.12 P418 Remote Setpoint Ratio

Sets the remote setpoint ratio (P418 –01/02) for the corresponding PID system (1 or 2) when
P414 = 1 or 2 (f = 100).
The remote setpoint ratio scales remote setpoint input by the set percentage. A value of 100
means that the setpoint is 100% of the mA input.
12.7.13 P419 PID Freeze Option
Note
If the input speed frequency drops below 5 Hz, the PID control output freezes at its current
value.
Enables or disables the PID freeze option described in the note above.
Entry:
0 = OFF
1 = ONf

The following parameters are specific to the use of the BW500 as a batch controller. P564-P568
is accessible only when Count Up (1) is selected.
Note
Not available with the BW500/L
12.8.1 P560 Batch Mode Control

Enables the batch control function.
Batch control is count up.
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 = count up
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.8.2 P564 Batch Setpoint

Sets the batch total. When the amount of material delivered reaches this point, the batch relay
contact opens (P100) to signal the end of the batch. (f = 0.000).
Enter the setpoint of the units of weight selected (P005).
Note
The batch setpoint can be modified while in RUN mode using the up/down arrow keys.
12.8.3 P566 Batch Pre-Warn

Enables or disables the pre-warn function associated with batch control, warning that the batch
is nearing completion.
Entry:
0 =OFFf
1 = ON
12.8.4 P567 Batch Pre-Warn Setpoint

Sets the setpoint for the pre-warn function (P566). When the batch reaches the setpoint, the
relay contact associated with the pre-warn function (P100) closes (f = 0.000).
Enter setpoint in units of weight selected (P005).
12.8.5 P568 Batch Pre-Act

Acts on the batch operation such that when the batch totalizer is reset, the batch total is
compared to the setpoint (P564). The difference is then applied to pre-act on the setpoint for the
next batch to improve the accuracy of the batch. The activity is internally limited to ±10% of the
batch setpoint.
Entry:
0 = OFFf
1 = Auto
2 = Manual
e.g. For Auto Batch Pre-Act
1st batch 2nd batch 3rd batch

setpoint 1000 1000 1000
pre-act 1000 950 960
total 1050 990 1000
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.9 Totalization (P619 - P648)
12.8.6 P569 Manual Batch Pre-Act Amount

Enter a value to make the setpoint relay change state at a known value lower than the setpoint
(P564). This allows the feeding system to empty with each batch. The value of the manual pre-
Act entry is generally reflective of the material that is left in the feeding system.
Example:
Setpoint = 1000
Manual Pre-Act = 50
The setpoint relay will activate when the batch totalizer reaches 950.
12.8.7 P598 Span Adjust Percentage

Accessible only through manual span adjust (P019), when percent change (1) is selected. Refer
to % Change.

The following parameters are specific to the use of the BW500 and BW500/L totalizers. See
“Totalization (Page 103)”.
12.9.1 P619 Totaling Dropout

Sets the limit, in percent of design load, below which material rates are not totalized (f = 3.0).
The value of 0 is reserved to allow both negative and positive totalization. Enter drop out value in
% of design load, range is 0 to 25 %.
12.9.2 P620 Display Zero Dropout

Activates the limit as defined in P619 ’Totalling Dropout’, below which, the rate and/or load are
set to 0.0.
-01 = Rate
-02 = Load
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.9.3 P621 mA Zero Dropout

Activates the limit as defined in P619 ’Totalling Dropout’, below which, the analog output, with
respect to rate and load only, is set to 0.0.
Note
• Valid only if P201 = 1 or 2
• BW500 has three mA outputs, BW500/L has one
12.9.4 P631 Totalizer Resolution

This parameter sets the resolution of the totalizer selected.
Totalizers are:
-01 = totalizer 1
-02 = totalizer 2
-03 = verification totalizer
-04 = material test totalizer
-05 = batch totalizer1)
Entry:
1 = 0.001 (one thousandth)
2 = 0.01 (one hundredth)
3 = 0.1 (one tenth)
4 = 1 (unit)f
5 = 10 (x ten)
6 = 100 (x hundred)
7 = 1000 (x thousand)
1) Not available with the BW500/L
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.9.5 P634 Communication Totalizer Resolution

Used to set the number of fixed decimal places for Total 1 and Total 2 for SmartLinx or Modbus
communication.
Entry:
P634 Index Description Value # of decimal places

Primary Index 1 Total 1 for SmartLinx 3f 3
communication 2 2
1 1
0 0
Primary Index 2 Total 2 for SmartLinx 3f 3
communication 2 2
1 1
0 0
With 3 decimal places set, the largest readable value is 2, 147, 483.638. With 2 decimal places
set, the largest readable value is 21, 474, 836.38. With 1 or 0 decimal places set, the largest
readable value is 100, 000, 000.
Note
This parameter is only relevant if viewing the totalizer value using remote communications,
such as SmartLinx or Modbus.
12.9.6 P635 Verification Totalizer

Enables a dedicated internal totalizer that totals the amount of material conveyed during a zero
or span verification. It is used to verify the accuracy of the scale.
If a printer is connected to a port and the required programming is in order, a printout of the
activity is automatically done on completion of the verification process.
Note
Date and time are not available with the BW500/L
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
Entry:
0 = off, verification totalizer disabledf
1 = do not total, verification totalizer is enabled, but main totalizers1) are disabled
2 = add total, verification totalizer is enabled as well as main totalizers1)
1) Main totalizers consist of internal totalizers 1 and 2, and external totalizers 1 and 2.
12.9.7 P638 External Totalizer Resolution
Note
• If the resolution selected would cause the totalizer to lag behind the count at 100% of
design rate, the next possible resolution is automatically entered.
• External Totalizer output frequency must not exceed 13.33 Hz at 150% of design rate.
This parameter sets the resolution of the selected external totalizer.

Totalizers are:
P638-01, external totalizer 1 (T1), terminals 52/53
P638-02, external totalizer 2 (T2), terminals 55/56
Entry:
1 = 0.001 (one thousandth)
2 = 0.01 (one hundredth)
3 = 0.1 (one tenth)
4 = 1 (unit) f
5 = 10 (x ten)
6 = 100 (x hundred)
7 = 1000 (x thousand)
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.9.8 P643 External Contact Closure

Sets the duration of the contact closure, in ms, for the external totalizer selected, totalizers 1 and
2 (P643-01 or -02) (f = 30)
Permissible values are in 10 ms increments from 0. The value is automatically calculated upon
entry of P011 (design rate) and P638 (totalizer 1 resolution, external) so that the duration of
contact closure allows the transistor switch response to track the total, up to 150% of the design
rate. The value can be changed to suit specific contact closure requirements, such as in the
case of programmable logic controllers.
Note
• If the duration selected causes the totalizer to lag behind the count rate, the next possible
duration is automatically entered.
• External Totalizer output frequency must not exceed 13.33 Hz at 150% of design rate.
12.9.9 P647 Totalizer Display

Selects the totalizer combination to be displayed, either manually through the scroll display key
or automatically by control of the display mode (P081).
Entry:
1 = totalizer 1f
2 = totalizer 2
3 = totalizer 1 and 2
12.9.10 P648 Totalizer Reset, Internal

Manual reset of the selected internal totalizer when the entry is made (f = 0).
Entry:
0 = no reset
1 = reset totalizer 2
2 = reset totalizers 1 and 2
Resetting the internal totalizers 1 and 2 resets the internal registers for external totalizers 1 and
2.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.9.11 P680 Test Load: Weight (Options)

Selects the method by which the test load is entered into P017.
1 = enter value: returns to P017 for entry of the test load value. This value is calculated by the
formula: Total Mass of the test weights/average idler spacing
Example:
3 test weights each weighing 8.2 kg, idler spacing before the scale is 1225 mm, the idler spacing
after the scale is 1175 mm.
The average idler spacing is 1225 +1175/2=1200 mm or 1.2 m
Total mass of test weights/average idler spacing = 3X8.2 kg/1.2 m = 24.6/1.2 = 20.5 kg/m
2 = enter data: advances to P681 and P682 for entry of required data to automatically calculate
and enter the test load into P017.
12.9.12 P681 Total Mass of Test Weights

For test load data entry (P680=2) this parameter is enabled for entry of the total mass of all of
the test weights used for span calibration. The mass units are determined in P004 (imperial=1,
metric=2).
12.9.13 P682 Average Idler Spacing

For test load data entry (P680=2) this parameter is enabled for entry of the average idler space
before and afer the scale. On multiple scale idler systems, this includes the entire weigh area.
The length units are determined in P004 (imperial=1, metric=2).
12.9.14 P690 Speed Constant Entry

Selects the method by which the speed constant is entered, for both speed sensors (P690-01 or
02)1).
1) BW500/L has only one speed input
1 = calculated, this selection returns the program to appropriate P015 for entry of speed
constant:
(speed sensor pulses per revolution)/(pulley circumference (m or ft) / revolution)
e.g:
WS300-256 PPR mounted on 6” Bend Pulley
(256 pulses per revolution)/(0.478meters per revolution) = 534.694 pulses per meter or 162.975
pulses per feet
OR
2 = sensor data, the selection forwards the program to P691 and P692 for entry of the required
sensor data for automatic calculation. The calculated value is automatically entered into P015-01
or 02.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.10 ECal Parameters (P693 – P698)
12.9.15 P691 Drive Pulley Diameter

For speed constant entry (P690 =2), this parameter is enabled for entry of the drive pulley
diameter (P691-01 or 02)1).
Enter the pulley diameter (units determined in P004).
12.9.16 P692 Pulses Per Sensor Revolution

For speed constant entry (P690 = 2), this parameter is enabled for entry of the pulses per
revolution that the speed sensor delivers (P692-01 or 02)1).
Enter the pulses per revolution from the speed sensor nameplate.

Accessible only through P017 for ECal test reference. After Ecal completion, only a zero
calibration is necessary to allow access to the RUN mode.
Note
ECal is not available on six load cell belt scales.
12.10.1 P693 Load Cell Capacity Units

Determines the units used for entering eCal data:
1 = kg
2 = lb
3 = Other (mV Span)1)
1)In the case of other, software jumps to P699 since data entry P694 through P698 are not
applicable if P693=4.
12.10.2 P694 ECal Load Cell Capacity

Enters the load cell’s weighing capacity for the selected cell (f = 1.0).
-01 = load cell A
-02 = load cell B
-03 = load cell C2)
-04 = load cell D2)
Enter the value in the units corresponding to the scale selection, e.g. in kg if P693 = 1, or lb. if
P693 = 2 or 3.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.10.3 P695 ECal Load Cell Sensitivity

Enters the load cell’s sensitivity for the selected cell (f = 1.0).
-01 = load cell A
-02 = load cell B
-03 = load cell C2)
-04 = load cell D2)
Enter the value in mV/V obtained from load cell nameplate.
12.10.4 P696 ECal Load Cell Excitation

Determines the excitation applied to the load cells.
Nominally this value is 10 V. However, a measurement of the voltage at the load cell provides
the most accurate entry.
Enter the load cell excitation in V DC.
12.10.5 P697 ECal Idler Spacing

Enters the measured distance between the weighing idlers. Refer to the associated belt scale
instruction manual (f = 1.0).
Distance units are:
feet: if the imperial system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 1
metres: if the metric system of measurement has been selected, P004 = 2
Enter the distance to three decimal points.
12.10.6 P698 ECal Conveyor Inclination

Enters the inclination or declination angle of the conveyor at the point where the belt scale is
installed (f = 0.0000).
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
Enter the inclination in degrees.

Upon entry, display jumps to P017 to display the design load value as the test load.
12.10.7 P699 ECal mV Span

Enter the mV span corresponding to 0 to 100% full scale load.
Upon entry, display jumps to P017 to display the design load value as the test load.
12.10.8 P735 Back Light

Sets the intensity of the back light for the LCD (f = 10).
Entry:
0 = off
1 to 10 = low to high
12.10.9 P739 Time Zone

The offset from Greenwich mean time (GMT) of local time.
This parameter does not affect any timed events because all times are local. It can be accessed
by a remote computer for synchronization purposes.
Enter local time zone –12 to 12
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.11 Communication (P740 - P799)
12.11 Communication (P740 - P799)
Note
Changes to these parameters are not effected until the power to the unit is turned off and
then back on.
These parameters cover the various communications formats supported by the BW500 and
BW500/L: serial printer, Dolphin Plus, SmartLinx, and Modbus.
12.11.1 P742 Word Order Parameter
Note
This parameter affects SmartLinx and Modbus communications
This value determines the format of all unsigned, double-register integers (UINT32), except for
those in the direct parameter access.
Values Description
0f most significant byte (MSB) is given first
1 least significant byte (LSB) is given first
12.11.2 P750 – P769 SmartLinx Module Specific Parameters

These parameters are specific to the SmartLinx module installed. Refer to the module
documentation for a list and description of the specific parameter requirements.
12.11.3 P770 – P789 Local Port Parameters

These parameters are specific to programming of the BW500 and BW500/L communication
ports. Refer to Communications (Page 125) for a listing and description of these parameters.
12.12 SmartLinx Hardware Testing

These parameters are used to test and debug a SmartLinx card (if installed).
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.12 SmartLinx Hardware Testing
12.12.1 P790 Hardware Error

The results of ongoing hardware tests in the communications circuitry.
Values Description
PASSf No errors
FAIL least significant byte (LSB) is given firstError
occurred communicating with card; device will try
to reinitialize communications with card. If mes-
sage continues, record values in P791 and P792
and contact your local Siemens representative.
ERR1 No module installed, or module not supported;
SmartLinx communications have been disabled
If FAIL or ERR1 is displayed in P790 (Hardware Error), go to P791 (Hardware Error Code) and
P792 (Hardware Error Count) for information about the error.
12.12.2 P791 Hardware Error Code

Indicates the precise cause of Fail or ERR1 condition from P790.
Values Description
0f No errors
Any other value Error code; provide this code to your Siemens
representative for troubleshooting
12.12.3 P792 Hardware Error Count

A count that increments by 1 each time Fail is reported in P790 (Hardware Error).
Values Description
Range: 0 to 9999 Error count; provide this number to your Siemens
representative for troubleshooting.
12.12.4 P794 SmartLinx Module Type

This parameter is used to identify the module type when SmartLinx is used. If you are not using
SmartLinx, this parameter is not functional. Please see the associated SmartLinx instruction
manual for a full description of this parameter.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.13 Test and Diagnostic (P900 - P951)
12.12.5 P795 SmartLinx Protocol

This parameter is used to identify the protocol when SmartLinx is used. If you are not using
SmartLinx, this parameter is not functional. Please see the associated SmartLinx instruction
manual for a full description of this parameter.
If a SmartLinx module is not configured, P795 will have a value of either 255 or 0.
12.12.6 P799 Communications Control

Assigns programming control through the local keypad (or Dolphin Plus, P770 = 1), or through a
Modbus protocol (P770 = 2 or 3)
Entry:
0 = local
1 = modbus
Note
These parameters are used for test and diagnostic purposes.
12.13.1 P900 Software Revision

Displays the EPROM (Flash ROM) software revision level.
12.13.2 P901 Memory Test

Tests the memory. Test is initiated by scrolling to the parameter or repeated by 'pressing enter'
Display:
PASS = normal
FAIL = consult Siemens.
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.13.3 P911 mA Output Test

Tests the mA output value for the output selected, outputs 1 to 3 (P911 -01 to -03)1)
Displays the value from the previous measurement. A test value can be entered and the
displayed value is transmitted to the output. Upon returning to the RUN mode, the parameter
assumes the actual mA output level (f = 0).
Use the UP and DOWN arrow to scroll the value
1) BW500/L has one output only
12.13.4 P914 mA Input Value

Displays the current mA input value for the input selected, inputs 1 to 2 (P914 – 01 to -02).
Note
• Not applicable if mA I/O board is not connected.
• Not available for BW500/L
12.13.5 P918 Speed Input Frequency

Displays the frequency of the speed input signal in Hertz.
12.13.6 P931 Running Totalizer

1 = Total 1
2 = Total 2
3 = Verification Total
4 = Material Test Load
5 = Batch Total
6 = NTEP Total
7 = 0Cal Start Total
8 = 0Cal End Total
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.13.7 P940 Load Cell mV Signal Test

Displays the raw (unbalanced) mV signal input for the selected load cell, load cells A to D1)
(P940 – 01 to – 04).
Range 0.00 - 50.0 mV.
1) Depending on the number of load cells selected by P003, not all load cells may be in use.
12.13.8 P943 Load Cell A/D Reference

Displays the A/D reference value for the selected load cells. These values are affected by load
cell balancing (P295).
Load cells are:
– 01 = A and B
– 02 = C and D2)
– 03 = A and B plus C and D2)
– 04 = A
– 05 = B
– 06 = C2)
– 07 = D2)
2) Not available for BW500/L
12.13.9 P948 Error Log

Displays a log of the last 25 error or alarm events (P948 – 01 to – 25) that have occurred. Event
01 is the current error.
Display:
0 = no error
# = error code; refer to Troubleshooting
12.13.10 P950 Zero Register

Registers the number of zero calibrations that have been done since the last master reset (f = 0).
12.13.11 P951 Span Register

Registers the number of span calibrations for the span selected, span 1 to 8 (P951 - 01 to - 08),
that have been done since the last master reset (f = 0).
BW500 and BW500/L

Parameters
12.13.12 P952 Design Load

Displays the value of the design load, which corresponds to the full scale value for alarm and mA
output functions. The design load is calculated, based on the design rate and design speed (f =
0.00).
12.13.13 P999 Master Reset

Resets parameters and totalizers to their factory setting (f = 0).
Enter 9 to execute the reset.
BW500 and BW500/L

Troubleshooting 13
13.1 Generally
1. First check to see that:

– There is power at the unit
– The LCD is showing something
– The device can be programmed using the fixed keypad.
2. Then, check the wiring pin outs and verify that the connection is correct.
3. Next, go over the setup parameter P770 to P779 and verify that these values match the
settings in the computer that you are using to communicate with it.
4. Finally, if you should check that the port you are using on the computer. Sometimes trying a
different Modbus driver will solve the problem. An easy stand-alone driver called ModScan32,
is available from Win-Tech at www.win-tech.com (www.win-tech.com). We have found that
this driver has been very useful to test communications.
13.2 Specifically
Q1: I tried to set a Siemens Milltronics device parameter, but the parameter remains unchanged.
A1:
a. Try setting the parameter from the keypad. If it can’t be set using the keypad, check the lock
parameter (P000) and
b. Check to ensure that the SW1 (certification switch) is not in the certification position.
Error Code ! a) Code Name Message/Action

201 Error - Load Cell A & B Reading between A & B
> 15000, or no signal.
Check wiring.
202 Error - Load Cell C & D Reading between C &
D > 15000, or no sig-
nal. Check wiring.
203 ✓ Err: 203 Memory failure test.
Consult Siemens.
210 ✓ Remote Totalizer 1 Increase resolution.
exceeded
211 ✓ Remote Totalizer 2 Increase resolution.
exceeded
BW500 and BW500/L

Troubleshooting
13.2 Specifically

212 ✓ Maximum speed ex- Speed is > twice the
ceeded design speed. Check
design belt speed,
actual belt speed,
speed constant. Per-
form speed constant
adjust (P018) if neces-
sary.
213 ✓ Maximum rate exceed- Rate is > thee times the
ed design rate. If no me-
chanical cause, check
to see if re-rating the
design rate is required.
220 Span too low The span is based on
the Design Load
(P952). Ensure that the
mV value representing
the design load is
greater than 1 mV.
Typically the Test Load
(P017) value is less
than the value in P952;
if it is greater than P952
check that the values
entered in START UP
parameters (P001 to
P017) are entered
correctly. Ensure prop-
er test weight or chain
is applied during span
calibration.
221 Span out of range Span deviation >
12.5%. Consider an
initial span (P388).
Refer to Initial Span.
222 ✓ Auto Zero out of range Zero deviation > mini-
mum limit. Consider an
initial zero (P377).
Refer to Initial Zero.
223 Security Violation An attempt to run
command / calibration
that is not allowed un-
der current security
level.
225 BF Flashes in the bottom
right corner of display
when battery charge is
too low.
227 ✓ Err: 227 No process data avail-
able. Consult Siemens.
228 Batch pre-act adjust- Pre-act adjustment is
ment > 10% ignored. Tune process
to limit batch error.
BW500 and BW500/L

Troubleshooting
13.2 Specifically

240 Integrator not config- P002-P017 must be
ured programmed
241 ✓ No PID mA Input PID Process Value
Source (P402) or PID
Setpoint (P414) has
been programmed for a
mA Input, however mA
Input Function (P255)
has not been pro-
grammed properly.
242 ✓ No PID mA Output PID System (P400) has
been turned on, but mA
Output (P201) has not
been programmed
properly.
243 No batch setpoint relay Batch has been set up,
but no relay has been
configured for a set-
point.
244 ✓ No speed relay Second speed sensor
configured, but no relay
is assigned
PF Power Failure Displayed at the bottom
right corner of the dis-
play if power is inter-
rupted after the
integrator has been
calibrated.
a) The codes in this column with checkmarks will produce relay output for a diagnostic alarm.
BW500 and BW500/L

Troubleshooting
13.2 Specifically
BW500 and BW500/L

Certification 14
14.1 Certification
For installations requiring trade certification, the BW500 and BW500/L provides a certification
compliance switch. Refer to the layout diagram.
After certification of the installation has been obtained, the switch is set. The switch must be
positioned to the left to enable trade certification compliance.
When the switch is set for certification, editing most parameter values, span calibrations, and
main totalizer reset are denied. The maximum acceptable deviation from one zero calibration to
another is limited to an accumulated ± 2% of the zero value, and the totalizer dropout (P619) is
limited to 3% or less, when the certification switch is set.
To set the certification switch, disconnect power before opening the enclosure lid.
● slide switch to the left position
● close the lid
● reconnect the power
Note
14.2 Parameters unlocked when certification switch is set:
P000 Security Lock

P009 Time
P100 Relay Function (if P100 is set to ’11 - Certification
Rate alarm’, P100 will be locked)
P560 - P569 Batch Control Functions
P648 Totalizer Reset. Unlock entry #1
P080 Damping Display
P081 Display scroll mode
P400 - P419 PID
P631 Lock index ’01’, unlock remaining index ’02 - 05’
P634 Unlock
P635 Unlock
P647 Unlock
BW500 and BW500/L

Certification
14.3 Certification Printing
14.3 Certification Printing

Certification printing is allowed if the following conditions are met:
● certification switch is set
● rate is below 2 %
● a communications port has been programmed for a printer
The printout must consist of the following:
● Date: YYYY-MM-DD
● Time: HH:MM:SS
● Instrument ID#: Belt Scale serial number
● Units: Units set in P005
● Start Total: End total of previous print
● End Total: Accumulated totalizer including Start Total
● Net Total: End total minus Start Total
If a power failure occurs during totalization, power failure indicator “PF” will be printed in the
middle of a new line, even if it has been cleared from the screen. “PF” will be cleared from the
screen after printing.
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix A
A.1 Appendix I
A.1.1 Memory Backup

The BW500 and BW500/L requires no maintenance or cleaning, other than a periodic
replacement of the memory backup battery. Refer to Installing/replacing the back-up battery
(Page 44).
A.1.2 Software Updates

Software updates require Siemens Dolphin Plus software, contact your local Siemens
representative.
It is recommended that the old software and parameters be saved to your PC before
downloading the new software.
Once installed, a master reset (P999) must be done.
The parameters can then be reloaded, either manually or downloaded from the previously saved
file. If downloading parameters via Dolphin Plus, confirm that BW500 and BW500/L is in
PROGRAM mode. The zero and span values are included in the parameter file, However, new
zero and span calibrations should be done regardless, and as soon as possible to ensure
operating accuracy.
A.1.3 Calibration Criteria

Zero
● belt must be empty. Run the conveyor for several minutes to limber the belt and ensure that it
is empty.
● test weights or chain are not used during a zero calibration
● conveyor running at normal speed
● moisture input not used during a zero calibration
● inclination will be used if feature is activated
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
A.2 Appendix II
Span
● a zero must be done prior
● belt must be empty
● test weight or chain must be applied
● conveyor running at normal speed test reference (chain or weight applied)
● moisture input not used
● inclination will be used if feature is activated
PID Systems
● zero and span criteria must be met
● set controller (P400) to manual and adjust the output for 100% belt speed (using the 4 and 8
keys).
If the PID is not set to manual, the speed output will be the last value prior to starting the zero
or span calibration
● shut off the prefeed to conveyor
● In process where a prefeed device is included, it must be turned off to ensure that no material
is fed onto the belt.
A.2 Appendix II
Appendix II: Software Revision History
Software Revision Date Changes

2.00 April 30, 1999 • Original software release
2.01 July 20, 1999 • French language added
• 38400 baud rate option
removed
• Span updated to reference
current zero value
• NTEP printout added
• Totalizer rollover updated to
1,000,000 for all resolutions
• Added units to verification
totalizer printout
• Error display updated to
toggle between error and run
mode
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
A.2 Appendix II

2.02 October 08, 1999 • Limited external contact
closure to 300 msec
• Added software filter to
speed signal
• Factoring now based on
current zero value
• Individual damping added for
Rate, Load and Speed dis-
play
• Parameters saved perma-
nently in Flash
• German added
• Devicenet added
• Display only the load cells
selected
2.03 May 16, 2000 • Allow proper startup if no
RAM battery installed
2.04 June 30, 2000 • Larger flash added
2.05 February 07, 2001 • SmartLinx update time in-
creased to 250 msec.
• Batch totalizer was made
accessible using Modbus
• New real time clock added
• BW500 calibrations no long-
er affected by time out
• Auto Zero alarm relay will
now reset toggling from pro-
gram to run mode
2.06 February 17, 2001 • Updated calibration error so
that it will not display a nega-
tive 0 error, -0.00%
3.00 April 27, 2001 • Added flowmeter option
• Parameters are no longer
changeable with remote
communications when certi-
fication switch set
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
A.2 Appendix II

3.01 July 17, 2001 • Increased maximum idle
time for SmartLinx to 9999
seconds
• Fixed totalizer error when
load is negative and totalizer
drop out is 0.00
• Allowed acces to P635 in
certification mode
• Setting of certification switch
changes totalizer dropout to
0.00
3.02 August 07, 2001 • Fixed bug in totalizer P619
totalizer dropout
3.03 February 20, 2002 • Fixed timing issue with inter-
val printing
• Added % rate and % load to
PID setpoint configuration,
P414
• Updated Auto Zero to allow
run display to be seen, AZ
now flashes in bottom right
hand corner of display
• Updated span adjust calcu-
lation
• Increased totalizer resolution
to 100,000,000
• Improved error interruption
on display
• Fixed zero and span calibra-
tion using remote communi-
cations
3.04 May 09, 2002 • Fixed SmartLinx error check-
ing
• Fixed error with discrete
inputs
• Added P419 PID freeze
enable/disable
• Updated zero calibration
when certification switch set,
now references last operator
initiated zero prior certifica-
tion switch set
• Added power failure indica-
tor on display, "PF"
• Added online calibration
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
A.2 Appendix II

3.05 November 11, 2002 • SmartLinx memory map
increased
• Improve external totalizer
contact closure duration
3.06 July 23, 2003 • Updated PID control be-
tween remote/ local setpoint
• Improve Dolphin Plus com-
munications
• Batch setpoint now adjusta-
ble in "RUN" mode
• Slowed down the display
when scroll key is held
3.08 March 1, 2006 • Remote zero and span cali-
brations fixed
• Differential speed detection
added
• Moisture meter added
• Inclinometer feature added
3.09 August 8, 2006 • Remote totalizer exceeded
error fixed
• Totalizer dropout (P619)
now limited to 3% or less
when certification switch en-
abled
3.11 March 31, 2009 • Second speed sensor accu-
racy at frequencies below 10
Hz fixed
• Parameter download using
Dolphin Plus fixed (Dolphin
Plus patch required)
• Electronic load cell balanc-
ing of C&D fixed
• Word order format with re-
mote communication fixed
• Integrator serial number
added to printout
• Power failure message add-
ed to printout
3.12 August 2009 • Fixed word order for
SmartLinx
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
A.2 Appendix II

3.13 December 2010 • BW500/L option added
• Updated eCal and test load
parameters
• Added option 11 to P100
• Zero and Span show pro-
gress in %
• Added display and mA drop-
out
• Totalizer dropout (P619)
now limited to 25%
• Improve Modbus communi-
cation
• Improve Diagnostic parame-
ter
• Remote span does not re-
quire zero prior to running
• Online calibration now ad-
justs P017 value
• New language options for
print strings
• Added load cell values to
Modbus map
• 3 decimal place resolution
on batch totalizer added
• Updated Display options for
remote parameters changes
3.13.03 June 12, 2012 • Added Portuguese, Italian
and Russian languages
3.13.04 Feb 26, 2013 • Added Smartlinx options,
Profinet, Modbus TCP/IP,
Ethernet/IP
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
A.3 Technical support
Technical Support
If this documentation does not provide complete answers to any technical questions you may
have, contact Technical Support at:
● Support request (http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request)
● More information about our Technical Support is available at
Technical Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/csi/service)
Internet Service & Support

In addition to our documentation, Siemens provides a comprehensive support solution at:
● Services & Support (http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support)
Personal contact
If you have additional questions about the device, please contact your Siemens personal contact
at:
● Partner (http://www.automation.siemens.com/partner)
In order to find the contact for your product, select under 'All Products and Branches' the path
'Automation Technology > Sensor Systems'.
Documentation
You can find documentation on various products and systems at:
● Instructions and manuals Instructions and manuals
(http://www.siemens.com/processinstrumentation/documentation)
BW500 and BW500/L

Appendix
BW500 and BW500/L

Glossary
Auto Zero
Allows a zero calibration to be performed automatically in RUN mode when the load drops below
the preset amount (P371) of design for 1 complete calibration period (P360).
Auxiliary Inputs
Can be programmed to allow the use of an external contact to provide the following functions,
display scroll, totalizer 1 reset, Zero, Span, Multispan, Print, Batch reset, or PID functions.
Batching
The accumulation of a predetermined quantity of material.
Contacts
A junction of electrical conductors in open (not connected) or closed (connected) states.
Damping
Provides control over the speed at which the displayed rate, load, speed readings, and output
functions are updated in response to changes in the internal rate signals.
Design Rate
This is the maximum material flow rate for this particular application (100% full scale).
Differential Speed
Difference in speed at two points in a mechanical system.
Direct Span
If replacing software or hardware, this allows the entry of the previously recorded span value.
Direct Zero
If replacing software or hardware, this allows the entry of the previously recorded zero value.
BW500 and BW500/L

Glossary
Factoring
Used to calculate the test load value of a new or unknown test weight using the current span as
reference.
Inclinometer
Accepts incline information about conveyor or scale.
Initial Span
Usually the first span performed, it is used as reference for all other spans to determine whether
they have deviated beyond the accumulated +/- 12.5%.
Initial Zero
Usually the first zero performed, it is used as reference for all other zeros to determine whether
they have deviated beyond the Zero Limit (P370).
Input/Output Trim
Allows the 4 and 20 mA values to be adjusted and verified with an external source (meter).
Linearization
Compensates for non-linear output of the belt scale caused by varying load rates.
Load Cell
Strain Gauge type transducer that produces an electrical output proportional to force (load)
applied.
LVDT
An electromechanical transducer that produces an electrical output proportional to the
displacement of a separate movable core.
mA
A unit of measure for current flow, milliamperes.
Material Test
Material samples used to verify the accuracy of the span calibration.
BW500 and BW500/L

Glossary
Modbus
An industry standard protocol used by popular SCADA and HMI systems.
Moisture sensor
A mA input function to incorporate moisture reading from an external moisture sensor.
Multispan
Since every material has its own unique physical properties, and may impact differently, a span
calibration is required for each material to realize maximum accuracy.
PID
Proportional Integral Derivative control is used to control the feed rate to a setpoint, either
internal to the BW500 or external.
RAM
Random Access Memory.
Random Access Memory

Memory that has both read and write capabilities.
Relay
An electromechanical device with contacts that can be closed or opened by energizing a coil.
Routine Span
Any operator initiated span calibration.
Routine Zero
Any operator initiated zero calibration.
Setpoint
A value that the integrator is trying to match.
SmartLinx
An interface to popular industrial communication systems.
BW500 and BW500/L

Glossary
SPA
Single Parameter Access, used to view or edit parameters through the available communication
ports.
Span
This is a count value representing the mV signal provided by either the LVDT or Load Cell at
100% design load.
Span Register
This is the number of span calibrations that have been performed since the last master reset.
Test Weight
A calibrated weight which will represent a certain load on the scale.
Totalizer
An incremental counter that records the total of material that has been monitored.
Zero Register
Shows the number of zero calibrations that have been performed since the last master reset.
BW500 and BW500/L

Index
Calibration
online, 85
A Command Controls, 143
communication
alarm
configuration ports, 127
condition, 102, 160
ports, 125
display, 124
communications, 125
event, 123
configuring ports, 127
function, 158
ports, 15, 127
high, 159
protocol, 127, 128
mode, 159
Communications, 19
Approvals, 20
configuring communication ports, 127
Auto Zero, 76
Connections, 82, 107
Autobaud, 129
control
Auxiliary Input, 83, 83, 83
feed forward, 113
integral, 112
output, 112
PID, 114, 161
proportional, 112
B
rate, 107
balancing, 57 system, 112
batching, 121 controller
baud rate, 128, 148 function, 117
belt speed compensation, 67 logic, 104, 182
bit values, 146 PID, 107, 114
setpoint, 107
Customer Support Hotline, 205
C
Cable, 19
D
calibration
online, 19, 87, 88, 168, 204 Damping, 100
calibration data
ECal, 57, 156, 184, 184 advanced access, 139
initial, 57, 63, 74, 78, 80, 82 bits, 129
online, 19, 87, 88, 168, 204 types, 146
calibration Date and Time, 141
initial, 57, 63, 74, 78, 80, 82 deviation
calibration alarm, 102
ECal, 57, 156, 184, 184 Device Identifier, 139
calibration Device State, 142
online, 19, 87, 88, 168, 204 Diagnostic, 145
calibration Dial-up modem, 125
ECal, 57, 156, 184, 184 Direct span, 80
calibration direct zero, 75
ECal, 57, 156, 184, 184 discrete
calibration input, 18
online, 19, 87, 88, 168, 204 Dolphin, 16
Plus, 16, 125, 127, 132
BW500 and BW500/L

Index
Dolphin" L
protocol, 132
Leased line modem, 125
linearization, 92
load cell, 17
E
load cells, 57
Ecal, 184 LVDT, 17, 34
ECal, 64
error
check, 134 M
codes, 141
mA, 18, 118
handling, 150
analog, 15
error"
I/O board, 107
messages, 150
input, 101, 118, 161
example modem setup, 148
output, 117, 161
External Totalizer, 105
output test, 190
Main entry, 149
Mapping, 139
F
maximum separation, 126
factoring, 90, 91 Milltronics BW500, 15
Format register, 138, 141 Milltronics BW500 and BW500/L features, 15
Format Register, 140 Milltronics BW500/L, 15
function, 18 Modbus, 133
alarm, 102 how modbus works, 133
output, 102 protocol, 125, 133
pre-act, 124 responses, 149
RTU/ASCII protocol, 133
Modbus RTU Software, 148
H modem, 125
modems, 125, 147
Handshaking Area, 139
available, 129
Hanging Up, 130
example setup, 148
High Alarm, 159
hanging up, 130
Hotline, 205
inactivity timeout, 130
picking, 147
setting up, 147
I
setup, 147
I/O board, 118 modes
Incline compensation, 99 run mode, 69
initial span, 78 Moisture Compensation, 98
initial startup, 114 mounting
initial zero, 72, 74 wall mount, 25
Input, 18 Mounting the Enclosure, 24
Installation, 21, 25 multispan, 81, 91
installing or replacing the battery, 44
Instrumentation I/O, 15
Internet, 205 N
network address, 128, 131, 131, 134
Non metallic enclosure, 21
K
non-linearity, 92
Key, 48
BW500 and BW500/L

Index
O P270 auxilliary input function, 165

P341 days of service, 167
Online Calibration, 85
P350 calibration security, 168
Options, 19
P355 online calibration feature, 168
Output, 18, 101
P356 online calibration reference weight, 168
P357 online calibration limits, 169
P359 factoring, 169
P
P360 calibration duration, 169
P388 and enter EDIT mode, 79 P365 multispan, 170
P392 linearizer compensation %, 172 P367 direct zero entry, 170
P771 (IP) network address, 128, 130, 131 P370 zero limit deviation, 171
P772 (IP) baud rate, 128 P370 zero limit deviation %, 171
P774 (IP) data bits, 129 P371 auto zero initiation upper limit, 171
P775 (IP) stop bits, 129 P377 initial zero, 171
P778 (IP) modem available, 129 P388 initial span, 171
P779 (G) modem inactivity timeout, 130 P390 linearizer, 172
parameter, 172 P391 linearizer load points, 172
P000 security lock, 153 P398 moisture content, 172
P001 language, 153 P398-02 moisture content, 172
P002 test reference selection, 153 P399 incline sensing, 173
P003 number of load cells, 154 P400 PID system, 173
P004 rate measurement system, 154 P401 PID update time, 173
P005 design rate units, 154 P402 PID process value source, 174
P008 date, 154 P405 proportional terms, 174
P009 time, 155 P406 integral term, 174
P011 design rate, 155 P407 derivative term, 174
P014 design speed, 155 P408 feed forward term, 174
P015 speed constant, 155 P410 manual mode output, 175
P016 belt length, 156 P414 setpoint configuration, 175
P017 test rate, 156 P415 local set point value, 175
P019 manual span adjust, 157 P416 external setpoint, 176
P022 minimum speed frequency, 157 P418 remote setpoint ratio, 176
P080 damping display, 157 P419 PID freeze option, 176
P081 display scroll mode, 158 P560 batch mode control, 176
P100 relay function, 158 P564 batch setpoint, 177
P101 high alarm/deviation alarm, 159 P566 batch pre-warn, 177
P102 low alarm, 159 P567 batch pre-warn setpoint, 177
P107 relay alarms, 159 P568 batch pre-act, 177
P118 relay logic, 160 P569 manual batch pre-act amount, 178
P119 relay override, 160 P598 span adjust percentage, 178
P200 mA output range, 161 P619 totaling dropout, 178
P201 mA output function, 161 P620 display zero dropout, 178
P204 mA output average, 161 P631 totalizer resolution, 179
P212 mA output minimum, 162 P634 communication totalizer resolutions, 180
P213 mA output maximum, 162 P635 verification totalizer, 180
P214 mA output trim, 162 P638 external totalizer resolution, 181
P215 20 mA output trim, 162 P643 external contact closure, 182
P220 mA output damping, 162 P647 totalizer display, 182
P250 mA input range, 163 P648 totalizer reset, internal, 182
P255 mA input function, 163 P690 speed constant entry, 183
P261 mA input trim, 163 P691 drive pulley diameter, 184
P262 mA input trim, 164 P692 pulses per sensor revolution, 184
BW500 and BW500/L

Index
P693 load cell capacity units, 184 R

P694 Ecal load cell capacity, 184
Radio modem, 125
P695 Ecal load cell sensitivity, 185
RAM, 17
P696 Ecal load cell excitation, 185
rate
P697 Ecal idler spacing, 185
control, 107, 114
P699 Ecal mV span, 186
Reading Parameters, 139
P735 back light, 186
Refer to, 25
P739 time zone, 186
Register Map, 135, 138
P770 (IP) protocol, 127
relay, 107, 121, 123, 158, 159, 159, 160, 160
P770-P789 Local port parameters, 187
alarm, 102
P773 parity, 128
contacts, 18
P781 data message, 131
functions, 159
P794 SmartLinx module type, 188
relay
P795 SmartLinx protocol, 189
batch, 177
P901 memory test, 189
relay
P911 mA output test, 190
setpoint, 178
P914 mA input value, 190
relay/, 158
P918 speed input frequency, 190
remote
P931 running totalizer, 190
setpoint, 176
P940 load cell mV signal test, 191
reset
P943 load cell A/D reference, 191
master, 105, 192
P948 error log, 191
reset a parameter value, 51
P999 master reset, 192
RS232 Port 3, 41
relay dead band, 160
RUN, 47
parameters
RUN mode, 65
P358 online calibration activation, 169
P750 - P769 SmartLinx module specific
parameter, 187
S
P771 protocol address, 128
P790 hardware error, 188 SCADA, 125
P792 hardware error count, 188 Service, 205
parity, 128 setpoint, 177
read and write, 139 batch, 123
reading, 139 local, 175
SmartLinx hardware testing, 187 PID, 163
values, 141 rate, 114
writing, 139 relay, 178
paramter remote, 176
P799 communications control, 189 Slave, 148
PID, 18, 102, 114 SmartLinx, 125, 126, 127
function, 101 Software updates, 199
manual mode, 117 span, 80, 170
setpoint, 101, 163 adjust, 68, 72
setup and tuning, 114, 114 calibation, 82
PID, 18, 102, 114 calibration, 68, 72, 81, 84, 92
PID control, 107 correction, 81
PID Systems, 200 direct, 80
PID Tuning, 145 initial, 78, 80, 82
product ID, 139 multispan, 81, 82
PROGRAM, 47 mV, 186
protocol, 127 recalibration, 74, 75
remote, 82
BW500 and BW500/L

Index
routine, 77 routine, 72
verification, 180 verification, 180
Span, 200 Zero, 199
span adjust value, 69
Span Calibration, 64
Specification, 17
stop bits, 129
Support, 205
T
term
derivative, 112, 174
forward, 174
integral, 174
proportional, 174
test
load, 68, 91, 169, 186
material, 68, 94, 173
value, 190
Text Messages, 146
To access parameter directly, 49
To change a parameter value, 50
To select a parameter, 49
totalization, 103
totalizer, 103, 104, 182
functions, 103
internal, 180
master, 103
totalizer, 103, 104, 182
totalizer, 103, 104, 182
troubleshooting, 193
W
web site, 133
Weight, 20
wiring
9-pin to RJ-11, 42, 44
guidelines, 126
Writing Parameters, 139
Z
zero, 18
calibration, 63, 90
direct, 75
initial, 74
recalibration, 72
BW500 and BW500/L

Index
BW500 and BW500/L

Siemens Canada Limited

1954 Technology Drive Printed in Canada
P.O. Box 4225 Subject to change without prior notice
Peterborough, ON A5E33482052 Rev. AD
Canada K9J 7B1 © Siemens AG 2016
Ultrasonic Transmitters
SITRANS Probe LU (HART)
Quick Start Manual 12/2013
SITRANS
IQ300IX.fm Page 5 Tuesday, October 2, 2001 1:43 PM
SITRANS Probe LU Quick Start Manual
This manual outlines the essential features and functions of SITRANS Probe LU. We strongly
English
advise you to acquire the detailed version of the manual so you can use your instrument to its
mmmmm
fullest potential. The complete manual is available on our website at:
www.siemens.com/probelu. The printed manual is available from your local Siemens
representative.
Questions about the contents of this manual can be directed to:
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
1954 Technology Drive, P.O. Box 4225
Copyright Siemens Milltronics
Process Instruments 2013. Disclaimer of Liability
All Rights Reserved
We encourage users to purchase While we have verified the contents of this manual
authorized bound manuals, or to view for agreement with the instrumentation described,
electronic versions as designed and variations remain possible. Thus we cannot
authored by Siemens Milltronics Process guarantee full agreement. The contents of this
Instruments. Siemens Milltronics manual are regularly reviewed and corrections are
Process Instruments will not be included in subsequent editions. We welcome all
responsible for the contents of partial or suggestions for improvement.
whole reproductions of either bound or
electronic versions. Technical data subject to change.
MILLTRONICS is a registered trademark of Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Safety Guidelines1
Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of others, and to
protect the product and the connected equipment. These warning notices are accompanied by
a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
WARNING: relates to a caution symbol on the product, and means that failure to
observe the necessary precautions can result in death, serious injury, and/or
considerable material damage.
WARNING1: means that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result
in death, serious injury, and/or considerable material damage.
Note: means important information about the product or that part of the operating manual.
1. This warning symbol is used when there is no corresponding caution symbol on the product.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START MANUAL Page EN-1

SITRANS Probe LU
WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Siemens
English
mmmmm
could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

Notes:
• SITRANS Probe LU is to be used only in the manner outlined in this manual,
otherwise protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
• This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference to several frequency based
communications.
SITRANS Probe LU is a loop-powered continuous level monitor, using advanced ultrasonic

techniques. The unit consists of an electronic component coupled to the transducer and
process connection.
The transducer is available in ETFE (ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene) or PVDF (polyvinylidene
fluoride), allowing SITRANS Probe LU to be used in a wide variety of industries and
applications using corrosive chemicals.
The ultrasonic transducer contains a temperature sensing element to compensate for
temperature changes in the application.
Communication is via HART1, and signals are processed using Sonic Intelligence®.
Specifications
For a complete listing, see the SITRANS Probe LU Instruction Manual. For Approvals
information, please refer to the device nameplate.
Ambient/Operating Temperature
Note: Process temperature and pressure capabilities are dependent upon information
on the product nameplate. The reference drawing listed on the nameplate can be
downloaded from the Siemens website. Go to the product page at:
www.siemens.com/probelu.
hand programmer
product nameplate
ambient temperature
surrounding enclosure: flange adaptor
–40 to +80 °C (–40 to +176 °F)
customer-
supplied flange
process temperature:
–40 to +85 °C (–40 to +185 °F)
1. HART® is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
Page EN-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START MANUAL A5E32168031

Power
Nominal 24 V DC at max. 550 Ohm: for other configurations see the full manual.
• Maximum 30 V DC
English
• 4 to 20 mA
Approvals
• General: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Hazardous: Intrinsically Safe (Europe) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(US/Canada) FM/CSA: (barrier required)1
Class III T4
(International) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brazil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Non-incendive (US) FM: 2
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T5
• Marine Lloyd’s Register of Shipping

ABS Type Approval
Note: Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor Type 4X /
NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
1.
See FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing on page 1 of Appendix A, for reference drawing
23650516, or CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing on page 2 of Appendix A, for reference
drawing 23650517.
2. See FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing on page 3 of Appendix A, for reference drawing 23650583.

Installation
WARNINGS:
English
mmmmm
• Materials of construction are chosen based on their chemical compatibility (or

inertness) for general purposes. For exposure to specific environments, check with
chemical compatibility charts before installing.
• This product can only function properly and safely if it is correctly transported,
stored, installed, set up, operated, and maintained.
• The user is responsible for the selection of bolting and gasket materials which will
fall within the limits of the flange and its intended use, and which are suitable for
the service conditions.
Note: Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in accordance with
local governing regulations.
Mounting Location
Recommendations:
• Ambient temperature within –40 to +80 °C (–40 to +176 °F).
• Easy access for viewing the display and programming via the hand programmer.
• An environment suitable to the housing rating and materials of construction.
• Keep the sound path perpendicular to the material surface.
Precautions:
• Avoid proximity to high voltage or current wiring, high voltage or current contacts, and to
variable frequency motor speed controllers.
• Avoid interference to the sound path from obstructions or from the fill path.
Fill
The sound path should be:

pipe
• perpendicular to the
monitored surface
• clear of rough walls, rungs
seams, rungs, or
other obstructions seams
10°
• clear of the fill path

Mounting Instructions
Note: Ideally, mount SITRANS Probe LU so that the face of the transducer is at least
300 mm (1 ft) above the highest anticipated level.
English
mmmmm
SITRANS Probe LU is available in three thread types: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, or PF2/G.
1. Before inserting SITRANS Probe LU into its mounting connection, ensure that the threads
are of the same type to avoid damaging them.
2. Simply screw SITRANS Probe LU into the process connection, and hand tighten.
Wiring
Power1
WARNINGS:
DC terminals shall be supplied from an SELV 1 source in accordance with IEC-
1010-1 Annex H.
All field wiring must have insulation suitable for rated voltages.
Connecting SITRANS Probe LU

Notes: cover screws
• For detailed information on Intrinsically
Safe set-ups, please see the full manual. hinged lid
• Use shielded, twisted pair cable (wire
gauge AWG 22 to AWG 14 /0.34 mm2 to
2.08 mm2).
• Separate cables and conduits may be
required to conform to standard
instrumentation wiring practices, or
electrical codes.
• The non-metallic enclosure does not
provide a continuous ground path threaded water-
connection tight gland
between conduit connections: use
grounding-type bushings and jumpers.
1. Safety Extra Low Voltage

1. Strip the cable jacket for approximately 70 mm
(2.75") from the end of the cable, and thread the terminals for m
A
loop current
wires through the gland1.
2. Connect the wires to the terminals as shown
English
above: the polarity is identified on the terminal

block.
3. Tighten the gland to form a good seal.
cable
4. Close the cover and tighten screws: please do
not overtighten screws. Recommended torque is
1.1 to 1.7 N-m (10 to 15 in-lb).
.
1
Wiring setups for hazardous area installations

Always check the device nameplate and process device tag to verify the approval rating.
1. Intrinsically Safe wiring
Device nameplate (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
SITRANS Probe LU Ii = 120 mA II 1 G
Pi = 0.8 W Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 0518
7MLxxxx-xxxxx-xxxx Encl.: NEMA/TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68
Serial No: GYZ / B1034567 Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C Ci = 3.6 nF SIRA 06ATEX2355X
Li = 0 mH IECEx SIR 13.0008X
Power Rating: 24V Nom., 30V Max., 4-20 mA HART
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough ATENÇÃO - RISCO POTENCIAL DE CARGA ELETROSTÁTICA - VEJA INSTRUÇÕES
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts
The ATEX certificate can be downloaded from the product

page of our website at: www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Approvals /
Certificates.
The IECEx certificate listed on the nameplate can be viewed on the IECEx website. Go to:
http://iecex.iec.ch and click on Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity then enter the
certificate number IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Device nameplate (FM/CSA)

Class I, Div 1, Group A, B, C, D Vmax = 30 V HART
Class II, Div 1, Group E, F, G Imax = 120 mA
SITRANS Probe LU
Class III Pmax = 0.8 W
7ML1234-78910-ABC-D Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
Temp. Code: T4 Ci = 3.6 nF
Serial No: GYZ / S1034567 Encl.: NEMA/TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68 Li = 0.5 mH
Power Rating: 24V Nom., 30V Max., 4-20 mA CSA per drawing: 23650517 159134
FM per drawing: 23650516
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough
Assembled in Canada with domestic and imported parts WARNING: Possible static hazard, do not rub or clean on site.
FM Intrinsically Safe connection drawing number 23650516, and CSA Intrinsically Safe
connection drawing number 23650517 can be downloaded from the product page of our
website at: www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level
Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• For power demands see Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance on page 4.
• For wiring requirements: follow local regulations.
• Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor Type 4X /
• Refer to Instructions specific to hazardous area installations (Reference European
ATEXDirective 94/9/EC, Annex II, 1/0/6) on page 7.
1. If cable is routed through conduit, use only approved suitable-size hubs for waterproof application.

2. Non-incendive wiring (FM US only)
SITRANS Probe LU Class I,Div.2,
7ML1234-78910-ABC-D Encl.: NEMA/TYPE 4X, 6, IP67, IP68 Group A,B,C,D
Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C
English
Serial No: GYZ / S1034567 Temp.Code:T5
Power Rating: 24V Nom., 30V Max., 4-20 mA
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments, Peterborough HART
FM Class 1, Div 2 connection drawing

number 23650583 can be downloaded from the product page of our website at:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level Measurement >
Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• For power demands, see Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance on page 4 of Appendix A.

(Reference European ATEXDirective 94/9/EC, Annex II, 1/0/6)
The following instructions apply to the SITRANS Probe LU covered by certificate number SIRA
06ATEX2355X:
2. The equipment is certified for use as Category 1G equipment.
3. The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors with apparatus groups IIA,
IIB, and IIC, and temperature classes T1, T2, T3, and T4.
4. The equipment is certified for use in an ambient temperature range of –40 C to +80 C.
Directive 94/9/EC Annex II, clause 1.5).
personnel in accordance with the applicable code of practice (EN 60079-14 and EN 60079-
17 in Europe).
7. Repair of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance
with the applicable code of practice (e.g. EN 60079-19 within Europe).
8. Components to be incorporated into or used as replacements in the equipment shall be
fitted by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s
documentation.
(continued on next page)
9. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that manual override is possible in order to
shut down the equipment and protective systems incorporated within automatic
processes which deviate from the intended operating conditions, provided that this does
not compromise safety.
10. The ‘X’ suffix to the certificate number relates to the following special conditions for safe
use:
Parts of the enclosure may be non-conducting and may generate an ignition-
capable level of electrostatic charge under certain extreme conditions. The
user should ensure that the equipment is not installed in a location where it
may be subjected to external conditions (such as high-pressure steam) which
might cause a build-up of electrostatic charge on non-conducting surfaces.

11. If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is the
Aggressive substances:e.g. acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals, or
English
solvents that may affect polymeric materials.

mmmmm
Suitable precautions: e.g. regular checks as part of routine inspections or

establishing from the material’s data sheet that it is
resistant to specific chemicals.
12. Equipment Marking:
The equipment marking contains at least the information on the product nameplate, shown on
the inside front cover of this manual.
Operation
RUN Mode and PROGRAM Mode
SITRANS Probe LU has two modes of operation: RUN and PROGRAM.
SITRANS Probe LU automatically starts in RUN mode when power is applied, and detects the
material level. The primary reading displays the material level (in meters) referenced from
Empty (process empty level). This is the default start-up display mode.
System status is displayed on the LCD, or on a remote communications terminal.
RUN Mode Display

Use the hand programmer to control the display.
12
Normal operation Failsafe operation
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Primary Reading (displays level, distance, or volume1, in either units or percent).

2 – Secondary Reading (displays Parameter number for Auxiliary Reading2)
3 – Echo status indicator: Reliable Echo or Unreliable Echo
4 – Units or Percent
5 – Active bar graph represents material level
6 – Auxiliary Reading (depending on the parameter selected, it displays milliAmp value,
distance, or echo confidence, with units where applicable.)
1.
For details on displaying flow instead of volume, please see P050 in the full manual.
2.
Press to display the auxiliary reading field when in RUN mode.

If the echo confidence drops below the echo confidence threshold, the failsafe timer starts
running. When the timer expires, the letters LOE (Loss of Echo) alternate with the reading
every two seconds, and the Reliable Echo indicator is replaced by the Unreliable indicator.
When a valid reading is received, the level reading display returns to normal operation.
English
mmmmm
PROGRAM Mode Display
2 3 1– Primary Reading (displays parameter value)
2– Secondary Reading (displays parameter number)
1
3– Programming indicator
4 4– Auxiliary Reading (displays parameter names for P001 to
P010, if a language is selected. It displays the index value
for indexed parameters, such as P054).
Programming
• Set parameters to suit your specific application.
• Activate PROGRAM mode at any time, to change parameter values and set operating
conditions.
• For local programming, use the Siemens hand programmer.
• For programming from a distance, use either a PC running SIMATIC PDM, or a HART
handheld communicator.
Hand programmer
Key Programming Mode
For direct access to SITRANS Probe LU,
point the programmer at the SITRANS Decimal point1
Probe LU display and press the keys.
(For detailed instructions, see the next Negative value
page.)
CLEAR value
hand programmer TOGGLE between Units and % on parameter
value
display End PROGRAM session and enable RUN mode
Update echo quality parameters
max. 600 mm Parameter scroll-up

(2 ft)
Parameter scroll-down
DISPLAY opens parameter fields
ENTER the displayed value
1.
Press plus three-digit parameter number, to set
parameter to show in the auxiliary display.

Low temperature effects on RUN/PROGRAM modes
If the internal temperature falls to –30 oC (–22 oF) or below, it will affect both RUN and
PROGRAM modes.
English
RUN mode will operate normally, with the following exceptions:

mmmmm
• hand programmer operation is disabled

• the LCD displays only limited information: the bar graph and the reliable/unreliable echo
indicator
PROGRAM mode:
• hand programmer operation is disabled
Security: (P000: Lock)

Value Description
Value stored in P069 * Lock off: programming permitted
other Lock activated: no changes permitted
* Factory setting for P069 is 1954: after a new value is entered and accepted, it becomes the
default setting.
Activating SITRANS Probe LU

Power up the instrument. SITRANS Probe LU starts in RUN mode.
Notes:
• Keep infrared devices such as laptops, cell phones, and PDA’s, away from SITRANS
Probe LU to prevent inadvertent operation.
• The following instructions apply when using the Hand Programmer.
• Do not use the Hand Programmer at the same time as SIMATIC PDM, or erratic operation
may result.
• Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to access PROGRAM mode, and press
PROGRAM to return to RUN mode.
• You do not need to key in initial zeros when entering a parameter number: for example,
for P005, key in 5.

Accessing a parameter
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY , to activate PROGRAM Icon
PROGRAM mode.
English
mmmmm
Parameter Number
2. Either use the ARROW keys to scroll to a Parameter Value
different parameter, or:
3. Press DISPLAY to open the Parameter Number
field. current value
4. Key in the desired parameter number followed by
ENTER .
5. For example: press then .
6. The LCD displays the new parameter number and
value.
Changing a Parameter Value

Notes:
• Security must be disabled to enable programming: set P000 to the Unlocked Value stored
in P069. (A remote master can still change configuration, if P799 is set to allow this.)
• Invalid entries will be rejected or limited.
• CLEAR can be used to clear the field.
1. Key in the new value.

2. Press ENTER to set the value.
Parameter Reset to Factory Default
1. Scroll to the parameter or enter its address.
2. Press CLEAR then ENTER . The value returns to the default setting.
Master Reset (P999)

Returns all parameters except P000 and P069 to default settings. (The learned TVT curve is not
lost.)
1. Press PROGRAM , then DISPLAY to activate PROGRAM mode.
2. Press DISPLAY to open parameter fields.
3. Key in 999.
4. Press CLEAR then ENTER , to Clear All and initiate
reset. The LCD displays C.ALL.
5. Reset complete. (Reset takes several seconds to complete.)

Quick Setup: steps 1 to 10
Note: Default values (factory settings) are marked by an asterisk (*) in the tables.
English
mmmmm
1. Select language (P010: Language)

0 * Numeric/None ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 English
P001 OPERATION BETRIEB FONCTIONMT FUNCIONAM.
Values 2 German P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
3 French P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Spanish
P006 EMPTY MESSBER. VIDE VACIO
P007 SPAN MESSSPANNE PLAGE RANGO
P010 LANGUAGE SPRACHE LANGUE IDIOMA
2. Set P001: Operation (measurement mode)

Notes:
• Setting P001 resets Span (P007), unless Span has previously been set to a different value.
• Changing P001 may reset Output Function (P201): this applies to HART only.
Level returns distance to material level referenced from Empty (process empty level). The
1 *
Values reading is returned in volumetric units if parameters 050 to 055 are set to enable this.
2 Space returns distance to material level referenced from Span (process full level).
3 Distance returns distance to material level from reference point (transducer face).
mA Output with Level, Space, and Distance operation

Level Space Distance
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer
0%
face (4 mA)
(20 mA) Span (4 mA) Span
Span 100% 0% Distance
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Set Measurement Response (P003)

1 * slow 0.1m/minute
Values 2 medium 1m/minute
3 fast 10m/minute
Set P003 to a measurement response speed just faster than the maximum filling or emptying
rate (whichever is greater).

4. Select measurement units (P005)
1 * meters
2 centimeters
English
Values 3 millimeters
mmmmm
4 feet
5 inches
5. Set process empty level (P006: Empty) Level Setup

transducer
Note: face
• P006 and P007 are interlinked: see
notes attached to P007. Span 100%
0.0000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or

Range P007
Values 0.0000 to 12.000 m (40 ft)
P006
Default Maximum range
Level
Empty can be set to any distance: not necessarily
the bottom of the tank. Empty 0%
6. Set measurement range (P007: Span)1

0.0000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or
Range Span can be set at any distance above
0.0000 to 12.000 m (40 ft)
Values Empty level
5.725 m (18.78 ft) or
Default
11.725 m (38.47 ft)
.
Notes:
• Setting P006 resets Span, if it has not previously been set to a different value.
• The default setting for Span is based on Operation (P001) and Empty (P006). Span is set to
Empty minus 110% of Blanking distance1, unless Operation is set to distance (P001=3). In
this case, Span is set to Empty distance.
• Always prevent the monitored surface from approaching within 0.3 m (1 ft) of the
transducer face. This provides a 0.05 m (2") safety margin, as 0.25 m (10") is the minimum
distance detectable.
7. Minimize false reflections: Set P838 (Auto False Echo Suppression Distance)
Use P838 and P837 Maximum range:
Range
together: follow the 0.000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or
Value (depends on model)
instructions for P837. 0.000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Default 1.000 m (3.28 ft)
1. Default setting for Blanking is 0.25 m (10").

8. Enable False Echo Suppression: set P837 (Auto False Echo Suppression)
0 Off
Value 1 * Use "learned" TVT
English
2 "Learn"
mmmmm
Using P837 and P838 (perform this function at low tank levels)
The TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curve sets a threshold which screens out false echoes1. If
SITRANS Probe LU displays an incorrect full level, or if the reading fluctuates between a false
high level and a correct level, use P838 and P837 together to elevate the TVT (Time Varying
Threshold) in this region and de-sensitize the receiver from any ‘base noise’ caused by internal
transducer reflections, nozzle echoes, or other vessel false echoes2.
. Using P837 and P838 (continued)
Notes:
• Use this function only if there is a minimum distance of 2 meters from SITRANS Probe LU
to the material. This function works best if the vessel is empty or nearly empty.
• Set P837 and P838 during start up, if possible.
• If the vessel contains an agitator, the agitator should be running.
a. Determine the actual distance from the transducer face to the material level.
b. Select P838 and key in [distance to material level – 0.5 m].
c. Select P837, then press 2 (Learn) and ENTER . P837 will automatically revert to 1 (use
Learned TVT) after a few seconds.
9. Return to RUN
Press PROGRAM to return to RUN mode: setup is complete.
SITRANS Probe LU Communications: HART

Note: See mA Output with Level, Space, and Distance operation on page 12 for an
illustration of the mA output with different modes of operation.
• You will need the full manual to acquire the list of applicable parameters.
• Please contact your local representative concerning the availability of the HART DD for
SITRANS Probe LU.
• We recommend that you use SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) to program your
instrument.
Maintenance
SITRANS Probe LU requires no maintenance or cleaning.
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability

For detailed information, please see the inside back cover.
1. False echoes can be caused by obstructions in the beam path.

2. For more details on Auto False Echo Suppression, please see the full manual.

SITRANS Probe LU Kvikstart Manual
Denne manual opridser de væsentligste karakteristika og funktioner af SITRANS Probe LU.
Vi anbefaler dig kraftigt at anskaffe den detaljerede version af denne manual, så du kan anvende
apparatet fuldt ud. Den komplette manual kan fås på vort website:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Den trykte manual kan fås hos din lokale Siemens repræsentant.
Spørgsmål vedrørende indholdet af denne manual kan rettes til:
E-mail: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
Process Instruments 2013. Ansvarsfragåelse
Dansk
mmmmm
Alle rettigheder forbeholdes
Vi opfordrer brugerne til at anskaffe de Skønt vi har kontrolleret, at indholdet af denne
autoriserede, indbundne manualer eller manual stemmer overens med de beskrevne
at læse de elektroniske versioner, der er instrumenter, kan der stadig forekomme
udarbejdet og skrevet af Siemens variationer. Vi kan derfor ikke garantere en
Milltronics Process Instruments. fuldstændig overensstemmelse. Indholdet af
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments denne manual revideres jævnligt, og eventuelle
påtager sig intet ansvar for indholdet af rettelser inkluderes i de efterfølgende udgaver. Vi
delvise eller fuldstændige gengivelser af modtager gerne forslag til forbedringer.
indbundne eller elektroniske versioner.
Retten til ændringer af de tekniske data
forbeholdes.
MILLTRONICS er et registreret varemærke, der tilhører Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Sikkerhedsvejledning1
De anførte advarsler skal overholdes for at sikre egen og andres sikkerhed samt for at
beskytte produktet og det tilhørende udstyr. Disse advarsler ledsages af en tydeliggørelse af
graden af forsigtighed, der bør overholdes.
ADVARSEL: vedrører et advarselssymbol på produktet og betyder, at en

manglende overholdelse af de nødvendige forholdsregler kan føre til død,
alvorlig personskade og/eller omfattende materielle skader.
ADVARSEL1: betyder, at en manglende overholdelse af de nødvendige
forholdsregler kan føre til død, alvorlig personskade og/eller omfattende
materielle skader.
Bemærk: betyder vigtige oplysninger om produktet eller denne del af brugsvejledningen.
1 Dette advarselssymbol anvendes, når der ikke er noget tilsvarende advarselssymbol på produktet.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – KVIKSTART MANUAL Side DA-1

SITRANS Probe LU
ADVARSEL: Ændringer eller modifikationer, der ikke er udtrykkeligt godkendt
af Siemens, kan ophæve brugerens ret til at benytte udstyret.
Bemærkninger:
• SITRANS Probe LU bør kun anvendes som beskrevet i denne manual, da den
beskyttelse, udstyret yder, ellers kan forringes.
• Dette produkt er beregnet til anvendelse i industriområder. Brugen af dette udstyr i
et beboelsesområde kan forårsage interferens med forskellige frekvensbaserede
kommunikationer.
SITRANS Probe LU er en sløjfeforsynet kontinuert niveaumåler, der anvender avanceret

Dansk
ultralydsteknologi. Dette instrument består af en elektronisk komponent, der er forbundet til

mmmmm
transduceren og procestilslutningen.
Transduceren fås i ETFE (ethylen-tetrafluoroethylen) eller PVDF (polyvinylidenfluorid), hvilket
gør det muligt at anvende SITRANS Probe LU inden for et stort udvalg af industrier og
applikationer, hvor der bruges korrosive kemikalier.
Ultralydstransduceren indeholder en temperaturføler for at kompensere for
temperaturændringer i applikationen.
Kommunikationen foregår via HART1, og signalerne behandles ved hjælp af Sonic
Intelligence®.
Tekniske data
For en fuldstændig liste, jf. SITRANS Probe LU Instruktionsbogen. For oplysninger om
godkendelser henvises der til apparatets navneskilt.
Omgivende temperatur/Driftstemperatur
Bemærk: De tilladelige procestemperaturer og -tryk afhænger af oplysningerne på
apparatets navneskilt. Referencetegningen, der er angivet på dette skilt, kan
downloades fra Siemens' website:
håndholdt
programmeringsenhed
produktets navneskilt
omgivende temperatur
omkring huset: flangeadapter
–40 til +80 °C (–40 til +176 °F)
brugerleveret
flange
procestemperatur:
–40 til +85 °C (–40 til +185 °F)
1 HART® er et registreret varemærke, der tilhører HART Communication Foundation.
Side DA-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – KVIKSTART MANUAL A5E32168031

Strømforsyning
Nominel 24 V dc ved max. 550 Ohm: for andre konfigurationer henvises der til den
komplette manual.
• Max. 30 V dc
• 4 til 20 mA
Godkendelser
• Alment: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Risikoområder Egensikker (Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(US/Canada) FM/CSA1: (barriere påkrævet)
Klasse I, Div. 1, Gruppe A, B, C, D
Klasse II, Div. 1, Gruppe E, F, G
Dansk
Klasse III T4
(Internationalt) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brasilien) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Ikke-antændingsfarlig
(US) FM2:
Klasse I, Div. 2, Gruppe A, B, C, D T5
• Maritimt Lloyd's Skibsregister
ABS typegodkendelse
Bemærk: Godkendte støv- og vandtætte kabelrørstætninger er påkrævet for udendørs

Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 placeringer.
1 Se referencetegning nr. 23650516 FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing på side 1 i Appendiks A eller
referencetegning nr. 23650517 CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing på side 2 i Appendiks A.
2 Se referencetegning nr. 23650583 FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing på side 3 i Appendiks A.

Installation
ADVARSLER:
• Konstruktionsmaterialerne er valgt på basis af deres kemiske kompatibilitet (eller
inerti) ved almindelig brug. Hvis de skal udsættes for særlige omgivelser, bør
foreneligheden kontrolleres i tabeller over kemiske kompatibiliteter inden
installationen.
• Dette produkt kan kun fungere korrekt og sikkert, såfremt det transporteres,
opbevares, installeres, indstilles, bruges og vedligeholdes rigtigt.
• Brugeren er ansvarlig for at vælge sammenboltnings- og pakningsmaterialer, der
ligger inden for flangens begrænsninger og dens påtænkte anvendelse, og som
passer til anvendelsesforholdene.
Bemærk: Installationen må kun foretages af kvalificeret personale og under overholdelse
Dansk
mmmmm
af de lokalt gældende regler.
Montagested
Anbefalinger:
• Omgivende temperatur på mellem -40 til +80 °C (-40 til +176 °C).
• Lettilgængeligt for aflæsning af displayet og programmering ved hjælp af den håndholdte
programmeringsenhed.
• Omgivelser, der svarer til instrumenthusets klassificering og konstruktionsmaterialer.
• Sørg for, at lydens vej er vinkelret på materialets overflade.
Forholdsregler:
• Undgå nærhed til højspændings- eller stærkstrømsledninger, højspændings- eller
stærkstrømskontakter samt motorhastighedsregulatorer med variabel frekvens.
• Undgå, at materialpåfyldningen eller andre forhindringer interfererer med lydens vej.
Påfyldning
Lydens vej bør være:

• vinkelret på den
målte overflade
• fri for ru vægge, rør
svejsesøm, stigetrin
eller andre stigetrin
forhindringer
• udenfor svejsesøm
påfyldningsområdet
10°

Montageanvisning
Bemærk: SITRANS Probe LU bør ideelt monteres, således at transducerens overflade
er mindst 300 mm (1 ft) over det højeste forventede niveau.
SITRANS Probe LU fås med tre gevindtyper: 2" NPT, 2" BSP eller PF2/G.
1. Inden SITRANS Probe LU indsættes i montagetilslutningen, skal det kontrolleres, at
gevindene er af samme type for at undgå at beskadige dem.
2. SITRANS Probe LU skrues blot på procestilslutningen og strammes med håndkraft.
Elektrisk installation
Strømforsyning1
ADVARSLER:
Dansk
mmmmm
DC–klemmerne skal forsynes fra en SELV 1 kilde i henhold til
IEC-1010-1 Bilag H.
Alle elinstallationer på stedet skal være forsynet med en passende isolering i
forhold til de nominelle spændinger.
Tilslutning af SITRANS Probe LU

Bemærkninger: dækslets
• For detaljeret information om egensikre skruer
opsætninger henvises der til den hængslet låg
komplette manual.
• Brug afskærmet parsnoet kabel
(trådtykkelse AWG 22 til AWG 14 /0.34 mm2
til 2.08 mm2).
• Separate kabler og kabelrør kan være
nødvendige for at overholde
standardmetoderne for elinstallation af
instrumenter eller de elektriske normer.
• Det ikke-metalliske instrumenthus vandtæt
gevindtilslutning kabelafslutning
tilvejebringer ikke en kontinuert
jordingsvej mellem kabelrørenes
tilslutninger: brug gennemføringer og
ledningsbroer af jordingstypen.
1 Safety Extra Low Voltage (Sikkerhed ekstralav spænding)

1. Afisoler kablet på ca. 70 mm fra enden af kablet klemmer til A
sløjfestrømmen
og før ledningerne gennem kabelafslutningen1.
m
2. Forbind ledningerne med klemmerne som vist

herover: polariteten er angivet på klemrækken.
3. Stram kabelafslutningen for at opnå en god
tætning.
4. Luk dækslet og stram skruerne: pas på ikke at kabel
stramme skruerne for meget.
Det anbefalede moment er fra 1,1 til 1,7 N.m.
Elektriske opsætninger ved installationer i risikoområder

Dansk
Tjek altid godkendelsesniveauet på instrumentets navneplade og procesudstyrskiltet.

1. Egensikker elinstallation
Apparatets navneplade (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
ATEX-certifikatet kan downloades fra produkt-siden på vort website på: 

www.siemens.com/probelu. Gå til Support > Approvals (Godkendelser) / Certificates
(Certifikater).
IECEx-certifikatet, der er angivet på navnepladen, kan læses på IECEx-websitet. Gå til: 
http://iecex.iec.ch og klik på Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity og indtast
certifikatnummeret IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Apparatets navneplade (FM/CSA)
SITRANS Probe LU
FM Egensikkert forbindelsesdiagram nummer 23650516 og CSA Egensikkert

forbindelsesdiagram nummer 23650517 kan downloades fra produktsiden på vort website
på: www.siemens.com/probelu. Gå til Support > Installation Drawings
(Installationsdiagrammer) > Level Measurement (Niveaumåling) > Continuous - Ultrasonic
(Kontinuert - Ultralyd).
• For strømbehov, se Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance på side 4.
• Mht. kravene til elinstallationen: Følg de lokale bestemmelser.
• Godkendte støv- og vandtætte kabelrørstætninger er påkrævet for udendørs Type
4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 placeringer.
• Der henvises til Særlige anvisninger vedrørende installation i risikoområder
(Reference: det europæiske ATEX Direktiv 94/9/EF, Bilag II, 1/0/6) på side 7.

2. Ikke-antændingsfarlig elinstallation (kun FM USA)
Serial No: GYZ / S1034567 Amb.Temp.: – 40°C to 80°C Temp.Code:T5
FM Klasse 1, Div 2 forbindelsesdiagram nummer 23650583 kan downloades fra produktsiden

på vort website på: www.siemens.com/probelu. Gå til Support > Installation Drawings
(Installationsdiagrammer) > Level Measurement (Niveaumåling) > Continuous - Ultrasonic
(Kontinuert - Ultralyd).
• Mht. effektbehov, se Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance på side 4 i Appendiks A.
Særlige anvisninger vedrørende installation i risikoområder

(Reference: det europæiske ATEX Direktiv 94/9/EF, Bilag II, 1/0/6)
Dansk
Følgende anvisninger gælder for SITRANS Probe LU, der er dækket af certifikat nummer
SIRA 06ATEX2355X:
1. Hvad angår brug og montage henvises der til de generelle anvisninger.
2. Dette udstyr er godkendt til brug som Kategori 1G udstyr.
3. Dette udstyr kan anvendes med brændbare gasser og dampe sammen med apparater af
gruppe IIA, IIB og IIC og temperaturklasserne T1, T2, T3 og T4.
4. Dette udstyr er godkendt til brug i et interval af omgivende temperatur fra -40 C til
+80 C.
5. Dette udstyr vurderes ikke som en sikkerhedsanordning (ifølge direktivet 94/9/EF Bilag II,
paragraf 1.5).
6. Installationen og inspektionen af dette udstyr skal udføres af tilstrækkeligt uddannet
personale i henhold til de gældende normer (EN 60079-14 og EN 60079-17 i Europa).
7. Reparation af dette udstyr skal udføres af tilstrækkeligt uddannet personale i henhold til
de gældende normer (fx. EN 60079-19 inden for Europa).
8. Komponenter, der skal indbygges eller bruges som erstatningskomponenter i udstyret,
skal monteres af tilstrækkeligt uddannet personale i henhold til fabrikantens
dokumentation.
9. Det påligger brugeren at sørge for, at en manuel omgåelse er mulig for at afbryde
udstyret og beskyttelsessystemer, der er indbygget i automatiske processer, som afviger
fra de tilsigtede driftsbetingelser, under forudsætning af, at dette ikke bringer
sikkerheden i fare.
10. Bogstavet ‘X’ i slutningen af certifikatnummeret henviser til følgende specielle
betingelser for sikker brug:
Dele af instrumenthuset kan være ikke-ledende og kan, under visse ekstreme
forhold, frembringe en elektrostatisk ladning af en størrelse, der kan forårsage
antændelse. Brugeren skal sørge for, at udstyret ikke installeres på et sted,
hvor det kan blive udsat for ydre forhold (såsom højtryksdamp), der kan
medføre en akkumulering af elektrostatisk ladning på ikke-ledende overflader.

11. Hvis det er sandsynligt, at udstyret vil komme i kontakt med aggressive stoffer, påligger
det brugeren at træffe egnede foranstaltninger for at undgå enhver uhensigtsmæssig
påvirkning, således at denne type beskyttelse ikke sættes over styr.
Aggressive stoffer: fx. væske- eller gasformige syrer, der kan angribe
metaller, eller opløsningsmidler, der kan påvirke
polymere materialer.
Egnede forholdsregler: fx. jævnlig kontrol i forbindelse med de rutinemæssige
inspektioner eller godtgørelse ud fra materialets
datablad af, at det er modstandsdygtigt over for
specifikke kemikalier.
12. Mærkning af udstyret:
Udstyrets mærkning indeholder mindst oplysningerne på produktets navneskilt, der er
vist på indersiden af omslaget til denne manual.
Drift
Dansk
mmmmm
RUN Mode og PROGRAM Mode

SITRANS Probe LU har to driftstilstande: RUN og PROGRAM
SITRANS Probe LU starter automatisk i RUN mode, når strømmen sluttes, og måler
materialniveauet. Den primære visning viser materialniveauet (i meter) i forhold til Tom (proces
tom niveau). Dette er standardtilstanden ved opstart.
Systemets status vises på LCD-displayet eller på en fjernbetjeningsterminal.
Display i RUN Mode1

23
Brug den håndholdte programmeringsenhed til at betjene displayet.
Normal drift Fejlsikker drift
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Primær visning (viser niveau, afstand eller volumen3 i enheder eller procenter).
2 – Sekundær visning (viser parameternummeret svarende til den ekstra visning3)
3 – Ekkostatusindikator: Pålideligt ekko eller Upålideligt ekko
4 – Enheder eller procenter
5 – Det dynamiske søjlediagram angiver materialniveauet
6 – Ekstra visning (afhængigt af den valgte parameter vises milliAmp-værdien, afstanden
eller ekkokonfidensen, med enheder som påkrævet).
1 Hvis kablet føres gennem kabelrør, brug kun muffer af en passende størrelse, der er godkendt til
vandtætte applikationer.
2
For oplysninger om visning af flow i stedet for volumen henvises der til P050 i den komplette manual.
3
Tryk på for at vise det ekstra visningsfelt i RUN mode.

Hvis ekkokonfidensen falder til under ekkokonfidensgrænsen, går timeren for fejlsikker drift i
gang. Når timeren udløber, vises bogstaverne LOE (Loss of Echo - Tab af ekko) skiftevis med
målingen hvert andet sekund, og indikatoren Pålideligt ekko erstattes af Upålideligt ekko. Når
der modtages en gyldig måling, vender niveauvisningen tilbage til normal drift.
Display i PROGRAM Mode

2 3 1– Primær visning (viser parameterværdien)
2– Sekundær visning (viser parameternummeret)
1
3– Programmeringsindikator
4 4– Ekstra visning (viser parameternavne for P001 til P010,
såfremt et sprog er valgt. Viser indeksværdien for
indekserede parametre, såsom P054).
Programmering
Dansk
mmmmm
• Indstil parametrene, så de passer til din specifikke applikation.
• PROGRAM mode kan aktiveres når som helst for at ændre parameterværdierne og
indstille driftsbetingelserne.
• Brug Siemens håndholdte programmeringsenhed til lokal programmering.
• Til fjernprogrammering bruges enten en PC, der kører SIMATIC PDM, eller en HART
håndholdt kommunikationsenhed.
Håndholdt programmeringsenhed
For at få direkte adgang til SITRANS
Tast Programmeringsmode
Probe LU skal du rette programmerings- Decimalpunktum1
enheden mod displayet på SITRANS
Probe LU og trykke på tasterne. (Se Negativ værdi
detaljerede anvisninger på næste side).
SLET værdi
håndholdt programmeringsenhed SKIFT mellem Enheder og % for
parameterværdien
display Afslut PROGRAM sessionen og slå RUN mode til
Opdatér ekkokvalitetsparametrene
Gennemløb parametrene opad

max. 600 mm
Gennemløb parametrene nedad
DISPLAY åbner parameterfelterne
ENTER indlæser den viste værdi
1
Tryk på plus det trecifrede parameternummer for at
angive den parameter, der skal vises i det ekstra
display.

Effekt af lave temperaturer på RUN/PROGRAM modes
Hvis den indre temperatur falder til -30 oC eller derunder, påvirkes både RUN og PROGRAM
mode.
RUN mode vil fungere normalt med følgende undtagelser:
• Betjening med den håndholdte programmeringsenhed er sat ud af kraft
• LCD-displayet viser kun begrænsede informationer: Søjlediagrammet og indikatoren for
pålideligt/upålideligt ekko
PROGRAM mode:
• Betjening med den håndholdte programmeringsenhed er sat ud af kraft.
Sikkerhed: (P000: Lås)

Værdi Beskrivelse
Dansk
Værdi gemt i P069 * Lås slået fra: programmering tilladt

mmmmm
andet Lås aktiveret: ingen ændringer tilladt

* Fabriksindstillingen for P069 er 1954: når en ny værdi indlæses og accepteres, bliver den
standardindstillingen.
Aktivering af SITRANS Probe LU

Tænd for instrumentet. SITRANS Probe LU starter i RUN mode.
Bemærkninger:
• Hold infrarøde apparater, såsom bærbare computere, bærbare telefoner og PDA'er væk
fra SITRANS Probe LU for at undgå utilsigtede ændringer.
• Følgende anvisninger gælder ved brug af den håndholdte programmeringsenhed.
• Brug aldrig den håndholdte programmeringsenhed samtidig med SIMATIC PDM, da dette
kan føre til uberegnelige ændringer.
• Tryk på PROGRAM og derefter på DISPLAY for at slå over i PROGRAM mode, og
tryk på PROGRAM for at vende tilbage til RUN mode.
• Du behøver ikke indtaste de indledende nuller ved indlæsning af parameternumre: for
P005 indtastes for eksempel 5.

Adgang til en parameter
1. Tryk på PROGRAM og derefter på DISPLAY , PROGRAM ikonet
for at aktivere PROGRAM mode.
Parameternummer
2. Brug enten PILE tasterne for at gennemløbe Parameterværdi
parametrene, eller:
3. Tryk på DISPLAY for at åbne Parameternummer-
feltet. aktuel værdi
4. Indtast det ønskede parameternummer efterfulgt af
ENTER
5. For eksempel: tryk på og derefter på
6. LCD-skærmen viser det nye parameternummer og
Dansk
parameterens værdi.
mmmmm
Ændring af en parameterværdi
Bemærkninger:
• Sikkerhedsfunktionen skal være slået fra for at tillade programmering: indstil P000 til
værdien Ulåst, der er gemt i P069. (En master kan stadig ændre konfigurationen på
afstand, såfremt P799 er indstillet, så dette er tilladt).
• Ugyldige værdier afvises eller begrænses.
• SLET kan bruges til at slette feltet.
1. Indtast den nye værdi.
2. Tryk på ENTER for at indstille værdien.
Reset af en parameter til fabriksstandarden
1. Gennemløb parametrene, til du når den ønskede, eller indtast dens adresse.
2. Tryk på SLET og derefter på ENTER . Værdien tilbagestilles til
standardindstillingen.
Master Reset (P999)

Tilbagestiller alle parametre undtagen P000 og P069 til standardindstillingerne. (Den indlærte
TVT-kurve går ikke tabt).
1. Tryk på PROGRAM og derefter på DISPLAY for at aktivere PROGRAM mode.
2. Tryk på DISPLAY for at åbne parameterfelterne.
3. Indtast 999
4. Tryk på SLET og derefter på ENTER for at slette alt og

starte reset. LCD-skærmen viser C.ALL.
5. Reset afsluttet. (Det tager adskillige sekunder at gennemføre et

reset).

Hurtig opsætning: trin 1 til 10
Bemærk: Standardværdierne (fabriksindstillingerne) er angivet med en stjerne (*) i
tabellerne.
1. Vælg sprog (P010: Sprog)

Numerisk/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
Intet P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Engelsk
Værdier P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Tysk P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Fransk P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Spansk
Dansk
mmmmm
2. Indstil P001: Drift (målingsmode)

Bemærkninger:
• Når P001 indstilles, resettes Spændvidden (P007), medmindre Spændvidden forinden er
indstillet til en anden værdi.
• Ændring af P001 kan medføre reset af Outputfunktionen (P201): dette gælder kun for HART.
Niveau opgiver afstanden til materialniveauet i forhold til Tom (proces tom niveau).
1 * Visningen opgives i volumenenheder, såfremt parametrene 050 til 055 er indstillet, så
dette er tilladt.
Værdier 2 Tomrum opgiver afstanden til materialniveauet i forhold til Spændvidde (proces fuld
niveau).
Afstand opgiver afstanden til materialniveauet i forhold til referencepunktet
3
(transduceroverfladen).
mA-udgang med funktionen Niveau, Tomrum og Afstand

Niveau Tomrum Afstand
Transducer (P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
overflade 0%
(4 mA)
Spændvidde (20 mA) Spændvidde (4 mA) Spændvidde
100% 0% Afstand
Tomrum
P007
P006
Niveau
Tom Tom
Tom 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Indstil målingsrespons (P003)

1 * langsom 0,1 m/minut
Værdier 2 middel 1 m/minut
3 hurtig 10 m/minut
Indstil P003 til en målingsresponshastighed, der lige netop er hurtigere end den maksimale
fyldnings- eller tømningshastighed (den største af disse).

4. Vælg måleenheder (P005)
1 * meter
2 centimeter
Værdier 3 millimeter
4 fod
5 tommer
5. Indstil proces tom niveauet (P006: Tom) Niveauopsætning

Transducer
Bemærk: overflade
• P006 og P007 er forbundet med hinanden: jf.
bemærkninger vedrørende P007 Spænd- 100%
vidde
0,0000 til 6,000 m eller
Måleområde P007
0,0000 til 12,000 m
Dansk
Værdier
mmmmm
Standardværdi Maksimalt måleområde P006
Niveau
Tom kan indstilles til en hvilken som helst afstand:
det behøver ikke være bunden af tanken. Tom 0%
1
6. Indstil måleområdet (P007: Spændvidde)
0,0000 til 6,000 m eller
Måleområde
0,0000 til 12,000 m Spændvidden kan indstilles til enhver
Værdier
Standardværdi
5,725 m eller afstand over niveauet Tom.
11,725 m
Bemærkninger:
• Når P006 indstilles, resettes Spændvidden, medmindre den forinden er indstillet til en
anden værdi.
• Standardværdien for Spændvidde er baseret på Drift (P001) og Tom (P006). Spændvidde
er indstillet til Tom minus 110% af Slukningsafstanden1, medmindre Drift er indstillet til
afstand (P001=3). I så fald er Spændvidde indstillet til afstanden Tom.
• Den målte overflade må aldrig komme nærmere end 0,3 m fra transduceroverfladen.
Dette giver en sikkerhedsmargin på 0,05 m, eftersom 0,25 m er den mindste målbare
afstand.
7. Minimer falske refleksioner: Indstil P838 (Afstand for automatisk dæmpning af

falsk ekko)
Brug P838 og P837 Maksimalt måleområde:
Måleområde
sammen: følg 0,000 til 6,000 m eller
Værdi (afhænger af modellen)
instruktionerne for P837. 0,000 til 12 m
Standardværdi 1,000 m
1 Standardindstillingen for Slukning er 0,25 m

8. Slå dæmpning af falsk ekko til: indstil P837 (Automatisk dæmpning af falsk
ekko)
0 Fra
Værdi 1 * Brug "indlært" TVT
2 "Indlær"
Ved hjælp af P837 og P838 (udfør denne funktion med lavt tankniveau)
TVT-kurven (Time Varying Threshold - TidsVarierende Tærskel) definerer en tærskel, som
filtrerer de falske ekkoer fra1. Hvis SITRANS Probe LU ukorrekt angiver et fuldt niveau, eller
hvis visningerne svinger mellem et falsk højt niveau og et korrekt niveau, så brug P838 og P837
sammen til at øge TVT i dette område og gøre modtageren mindre følsom over for eventuel
“baggrundsstøj” forårsaget af interne transducerrefleksioner, ekkoer fra mundstykket eller
andre falske ekkoer fra beholderen2.
Dansk
Ved hjælp af P837 og P838 (fortsat)

mmmmm
Bemærkninger:
• Brug kun denne funktion, hvis der er en afstand på mindst 2 meter fra SITRANS Probe LU
til materialet. Denne funktion virker bedst, hvis beholderen er tom eller næsten tom.
• Indstil så vidt muligt P837 og P838 i løbet af opstarten.
• Hvis beholderen indeholder en omrører, bør denne være i drift.
a. Bestem den reelle afstand fra transduceroverfladen til materialniveauet.
b. Vælg P838 og indtast [afstand til materialniveau - 0,5 m].
c. Vælg P837, og tryk dernæst på 2 (Indlær) og ENTER P837 vender automatisk tilbage til
1 (brug indlært TVT) efter nogle få sekunder.
9. Vend tilbage til RUN

Tryk på PROGRAM for at vende tilbage til RUN mode: opsætningen er færdig.
SITRANS Probe LU kommunication: HART

Bemærk: Jf. mA-udgang med funktionen Niveau, Tomrum og Afstand på page 12 for en
illustration af mA-udgangen i forskellige driftstilstande.
• Det er nødvendigt at råde over den komplette manual for at have adgang til listen over
mulige parametre.
• Kontakt venligst din lokale repræsentant mht. tilgængeligheden af HART DD til SITRANS
Probe LU.
• Vi anbefaler dig at bruge SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) til at programmere
instrumentet.
Vedligeholdelse
SITRANS Probe LU kræver ingen vedligeholdelse eller rengøring.
Reparation af instrumentet og ansvarsbegrænsning

For yderligere oplysninger henvises der til indersiden af bagomslaget.
1 Falske ekkoer kan skyldes forhindringer på strålens vej.

2 For yderligere detaljer om Automatisk dæmpning af falsk ekko henvises der til den komplette manual.

SITRANS Probe LU Kurzanleitung
Dieses Gerätehandbuch ist eine Kurzfassung der wesentlichen Merkmale und Funktionen des
SITRANS Probe LU. Es ist sehr empfehlenswert, die ausführliche Version des Gerätehand-
buchs zu erwerben, damit Sie Ihr Gerät optimal nutzen können. Die vollständige Betriebsanlei-
tung finden Sie auf unserer Webseite: www.siemens.de/probelu. Um ein gebundenes
Exemplar zu erhalten, wenden Sie sich an Ihren zuständigen Siemens Milltronics Ansprech-
partner.
Wenn Sie Fragen haben, wenden Sie sich bitte an:
Peterborough, Ontario, Kanada, K9J 7B1
E-Mail: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
Process Instruments 2013. Haftungsausschluss
All Rights Reserved
Diese Unterlage ist sowohl in gebundener als Wir haben den Inhalt der Druckschrift auf
auch in elektronischer Form verfügbar. Wir Übereinstimmung mit dem beschriebenen Gerät
fordern Benutzer auf, genehmigte, gebundene geprüft. Dennoch können Abweichungen nicht
Betriebsanleitungen zu erwerben oder die von ausgeschlossen werden, so dass wir für die
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments vollständige Übereinstimmung keine Gewähr
entworfenen und genehmigten elektronischen übernehmen. Die Angaben in dieser Druckschrift
Ausführungen zu betrachten. Siemens werden regelmäßig überprüft, und notwendige
Milltronics Process Instruments ist für den Korrekturen sind in den nachfolgenden Auflagen
Inhalt auszugsweiser oder vollständiger enthalten. Für Verbesserungsvorschläge sind wir
Deutsch
mmmmm
Wiedergaben gebundener oder elektronischer dankbar.
Ausführungen nicht verantwortlich. Technische Änderungen vorbehalten.
MILLTRONICS ist eine eingetragene Marke der Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Sicherheitstechnische Hinweise1
Warnhinweise müssen zu Ihrer persönlichen Sicherheit sowie der Sicherheit Dritter und zur
new
Vermeidung von Sachschäden beachtet werden. Zu jedem Warnhinweis wird der jeweilige
Gefährdungsgrad angegeben.
WARNUNG: bezieht sich auf ein Warnsymbol auf dem Produkt und bedeutet,
dass bei Nicht-Einhalt der entsprechenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen Tod, schwere
Körperverletzung und/oder erheblicher Sachschaden eintreten können.
WARNUNG1: bedeutet, dass bei Nicht-Einhalt der entsprechenden
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen Tod, schwere Körperverletzung und/oder erheblicher
Sachschaden eintreten können.
Hinweis: steht für eine wichtige Information über das Produkt selbst oder den Teil der
Betriebsanleitung, auf den besonders aufmerksam gemacht werden soll.
1. Dieses Warnsymbol wird verwendet, wenn sich kein entsprechendes Vorsichtssymbol auf dem
Produkt befindet.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – KURZANLEITUNG Seite DE-1

SITRANS Probe LU
WARNUNG: Durch Änderungen oder Modifikationen, die nicht ausdrücklich durch
Siemens genehmigt wurden, könnte die Berechtigung für den Betrieb des Gerätes
erlöschen.
Hinweis: Betriebssicherheit und Schutz des SITRANS Probe LU sind nur gewährleistet,
wenn das Gerät so eingesetzt wird, wie es dieses Gerätehandbuch vorsieht.
SITRANS Probe LU ist ein Zweileiter-Ultraschall-Messumformer zur kontinuierlichen Füllstand-

messung unter Einsatz modernster Ultraschall-Technologie. Das Gerät besteht aus einer Aus-
werteelektronik, die mit dem Sensor und Prozessanschluss verbunden ist.
Als Sensormaterial steht ETFE (Ethylen-Tetrafluorethylen) oder PVDF (Polyvinylidenfluorid) zur
Auswahl. Damit ist der SITRANS Probe LU für den Einsatz in zahlreichen Industriebereichen
und Applikationen mit korrosiven Chemikalien geeignet.
Der Ultraschall-Sensor besitzt einen integrierten Temperaturfühler, um Temperaturschwankun-
gen in der Applikation auszugleichen.
new
Die Kommunikation erfolgt über HART1 und die Signalverarbeitung über Sonic Intelligence®.
Technische Daten
Eine vollständige Liste finden Sie in der Betriebsanleitung des SITRANS Probe LU. Das Typen-
schild des Geräts liefert genaue Angaben zu den Zulassungen.
Deutsch
mmmmm
Umgebungs-/Betriebstemperatur
Hinweis: Prozesstemperatur und Druckwerte sind von den Angaben auf dem Typen-
schild des Geräts abhängig. Die auf dem Typenschild angeführte Referenzzeichnung
steht auf der Siemens Website zum Download zur Verfügung. Gehen Sie zu:
www.siemens.de/probelu.
Handprogrammiergerät
Typenschild des Geräts
Umgebungstemperatur (um
das Gehäuse): Flanschadapter
–40 bis +80 °C (–40 bis +176 °F)
kundenseitiger
Flansch
Prozesstemperatur:
–40 bis +85 °C (–40 bis +185 °F)
1. HART® ist ein eingetragenes Warenzeichen der HART Communications Foundation.
Seite DE-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – KURZANLEITUNG A5E32168031

Versorgungsspannung
Nominal DC 24 V bei max. 550 Ohm: Angaben zu weiteren Konfigurationen finden Sie
in der Betriebsanleitung.
• Maximal DC 30 V
• 4 bis 20 mA
Zulassungen
• Allgemein: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Ex-Bereiche Eigensicher (Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(US/Kanada) FM/CSA1: (Barriere erforderlich)
Class I, Div. 1, Gruppen A, B, C, D
Class II, Div. 1, Gruppen E, F, G
Class III T4
(Brasilien) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
Deutsch
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Betriebsmittel für Zone 2 
(Non-incendive) (USA) FM2:
Class I, Div. 2, Gruppen A, B, C, D T5
• Schiffbauzulassung Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
ABS Schiffbau-Zulassung
Hinweis: Im Außenbereich IP67, IP68, Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6 sind zugelas-
sene staub- und wasserdichte Leitungsverschlüsse erforderlich.
1. Zeichnung Nr. 23650516 finden Sie unter FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing auf Seite 1 oder
Zeichnung Nr. 23650517 unter CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing auf Seite 2, Anhang A.
2. Zeichnung Nr. 23650583 finden Sie unter FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing auf Seite 3, Anhang A.

Installation
WARNUNGEN:
• Die Werkstoffe werden entsprechend ihrer chemischen Beständigkeit (oder Träg-
heit) für allgemeine Zwecke gewählt. Bei Einsatz in speziellen Umgebungsbedin-
gungen muss vor der Installation die Materialbeständigkeit mit Beständigkeitsta-
bellen geprüft werden.
• Der einwandfreie und sichere Betrieb des Produktes setzt sachgemäßen Transport,
Lagerung, Aufstellung und Montage sowie sorgfältige Bedienung und Instandhal-
tung voraus.
• Der Benutzer ist für die Auswahl von Schraub- und Dichtungsmaterial verantwort-
lich. Dieses muss den für den Flansch aufgestellten Bedingungen und dessen
bestimmter Verwendung entsprechen und für die Betriebsbedingungen geeignet
sein.
Hinweise: Die Installation darf nur durch qualifiziertes Personal und unter Beachtung der
lokalen, gesetzlichen Bestimmungen durchgeführt werden.
Einbauort
Empfehlungen:
new
• Umgebungstemperaturbereich –40 bis +80 °C (–40 bis +176 °F).

• Einfacher Zugang zum Ablesen der Anzeige und zur Programmierung über Handprogrammer.
• Umgebungsbedingungen kompatibel mit den Nennwerten des Gehäuses und dem Werkstoff.
• Der Schallkegel sollte senkrecht zur Materialoberfläche sein.
Deutsch
Vorsichtsmaßnahmen:
mmmmm
• Vermeiden Sie Standorte in der Nähe von Hochspannungs- oder Motorleitungen,

Schaltschützen oder Frequenzumrichtern (Thyristor Steuerantriebe).
• Vermeiden Sie Störungen des Schallkegels durch Einbauten oder durch die Befüllung.
Befüllung
Der Schallkegel muss:

• im rechten Winkel zur
Oberfläche des Mess-
stoffs gelangen Rohr
• Abstand zu störenden
Einbauten, Schweiß- Sprossen
nähten oder Leiter-
sprossen halten Schweiß-
• Abstand zur Befüllung nähte 10°
halten

Montageanweisungen
Hinweis: Idealerweise ist der SITRANS Probe LU so zu montieren, dass ein Mindestab-
stand von 300 mm (1 ft.) zwischen der Sensorunterkante und dem maximal zu erwartenden
Füllstand gewährleistet ist.
SITRANS Probe LU ist in drei Gewindeausführungen erhältlich: 2" NPT, 2" BSP oder PF2/G.
1. Bevor Sie den SITRANS Probe LU einschrauben, überprüfen Sie, dass es sich um
denselben Gewindetyp handelt, um eine Beschädigung zu vermeiden.
2. Schrauben Sie den SITRANS Probe LU in den Prozessanschluss und ziehen Sie ihn von
Hand an.
Anschluss
Hilfsenergie1
WARNUNGEN:
Gemäß IEC -1010-1 Anhang H müssen Gleichstromklemmen von einer Schutz-
kleinspannungsquelle (SELV) 1 versorgt werden.
Alle Feldanschlüsse müssen entsprechend der angelegten Spannung isoliert
sein.
Anschluss des SITRANS Probe LU
Deutsch
Hinweise:
mmmmm
Deckel-
• Nähere Angaben zur Schaltung bei Eigen- schrauben
sicherheit finden Sie in der vollständigen Deckel mit
Betriebsanleitung. Scharnier
• Verwenden Sie geschirmtes Kabel mit ver-

drilltem Aderpaar (Drahtstärke AWG 22 bis
AWG 14 /0,34 mm2 bis 2,08 mm2).
new
• Eine getrennte Leitungsverlegung kann
erforderlich sein, um Standardanforderun-
gen an den Anschluss oder elektrische
Richtlinien zu erfüllen.
• Das Gehäuse ist schutzisoliert und besitzt
Gewinde- Wasserdichte
keine stetige Erdverbindung zu der anschluss Kabelver-
Klemmleiste. Verwenden Sie geeignete schraubung
Durchführungen.

1. Lösen Sie den Kabelmantel ca. 70 mm (2,75") vom
Klemmen für
Ende des Kabels ab und führen Sie die Adern Schleifenstrom m
A
durch die Kabelverschraubung ein1.

2. Schließen Sie die Drähte wie oben abgebildet an.
Die Polarität ist auf den Klemmen gekennzeich-
net.
3. Ziehen Sie die Verschraubung an, so dass sie gut
abdichtet. Kabel
4. Schließen Sie den Deckel und ziehen Sie die
Schrauben an, allerdings nicht zu stark. Die
empfohlene Drehkraft beträgt 1,1 bis 1,7 N-m (10
bis 15 in-lb).
Anschlussmethoden bei Einbau in Ex-Bereichen

Überprüfen Sie in allen Fällen die Zulassungen auf dem Typen- und Prozessschild Ihres Geräts.
1. Anschlussmethode Eigensicher
Typenschild des Geräts (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
Deutsch
Das ATEX-Zertifikat steht auf der Produktseite unserer Website zum Download zur
Verfügung: www.siemens.de/probelu. Siehe Support > Approbationen /
Prüfbescheinigungen / Zertifikate.
Das auf dem Typenschild aufgeführte IECEx-Zertifikat finden Sie auf der IECEx-Website.
Gehen Sie zu: http://iecex.iec.ch, klicken Sie auf Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity und
geben die Zertifikatsnummer IECEx SIR 13.0008X ein.
Typenschild des Geräts (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
Die Anschlusszeichnung FM Eigensicher Nr. 23650516 und die Anschlusszeichnung CSA

Eigensicher Nr. 23650517 steht auf der Produktseite unserer Website zum Download zur
Verfügung: www.siemens.de/probelu. Gehen Sie zu Support > Installationszeichnungen >
Füllstandmessung > Kontinuierliche Verfahren - Ultraschall.
• Angaben zum Strombedarf finden Sie unter Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
auf Seite 4, Anhang A.
• Anschlussanforderungen: Beachten Sie lokale Vorschriften.
• Im Außenbereich IP67, IP68, Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6 sind zugelassene
staub- und wasserdichte Leitungsverschlüsse erforderlich.
• Siehe Vorschriften bezüglich Installationen in Ex-gefährdeten Bereichen
(Europäische ATEX Richtlinie 94/9/EG, Anhang II, 1/0/6) auf Seite 7.

2. Anschlussmethode Betriebsmittel für Zone 2 (Non-incendive)
(nur FM USA)
Die Anschlusszeichnung FM Class 1, Div 2, Nr. 23650583 steht auf der Produktseite unserer
Website zum Download zur Verfügung: www.siemens.de/probelu. Gehen Sie zu Support >
Installationszeichnungen > Füllstandmessung > Kontinuierliche Verfahren - Ultraschall.
• Angaben zum Strombedarf finden Sie unter Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance auf
Seite 4, Anhang A.
Vorschriften bezüglich Installationen in Ex-gefährdeten

Bereichen (Europäische ATEX Richtlinie 94/9/EG, Anhang II, 1/0/6)
Folgende Vorschriften finden Anwendung auf den SITRANS Probe LU, der Gegenstand des
Zertifikats Nr. SIRA 06ATEX2355X ist:
1. Angaben zu Verwendung und Zusammenbau finden Sie im Hauptteil der Vorschriften.
2. Das Gerät ist für den Einsatz als Betriebsmittel der Kategorie 1G zertifiziert.
3. Das Gerät kann mit brennbaren Gasen und Dämpfen mit Betriebsmitteln der Gruppen IIA,
IIB und IIC und Temperaturklasse T1, T2, T3 und T4 eingesetzt werden.
4. Das Gerät ist für einen Einsatz bei Umgebungstemperaturen von –40 C bis +80 C zuge-
Deutsch
lassen.
5. Das Gerät wird nicht als Sicherheitseinrichtung (im Sinne der Richtlinie 94/9/EG Anhang
II, Klausel 1,5) eingestuft.
6. Installation und Prüfung dieses Geräts dürfen nur durch entsprechend geschultes Perso-
nal in Übereinstimmung mit den geltenden Verfahrensregeln (EN 60079-14 und EN 60079-
17 in Europa) durchgeführt werden.
7. Die Reparatur dieses Geräts darf nur durch entsprechend geschultes Personal in Über-
einstimmung mit den geltenden Verfahrensregeln (z. B. EN 60079-19 in Europa) durchge-
führt werden.
8. Ins Gerät einzubauende oder als Ersatzteil zu verwendende Werkstücke müssen durch
entsprechend geschultes Personal in Übereinstimmung mit der Dokumentation des Her-
stellers montiert werden.
9. Es liegt in der Verantwortung des Benutzers dafür zu sorgen, dass das Gerät und Schutz-
systeme, welche in automatische Prozesse eingegliedert sind, manuell ausgeschaltet
werden können, wenn sie von den vorgesehenen Betriebsbedingungen abweichen; die
Sicherheit darf dabei auf keinen Fall gefährdet werden.
10. Die Endung ‚X’ der Zertifizierungsnummer bezieht sich auf folgende Sonderbedingungen
für sichere Verwendung:
Teile des Gehäuses können nicht leitfähig sein und können unter bestimmten,
extremen Bedingungen eine zündfähige elektrische Ladung erzeugen. Der
Benutzer muss sicherstellen, dass die Einbaustelle des Geräts keinen externen
Bedingungen (wie z. B. Hochdruckdampf) ausgesetzt ist, welche die Entwick-
lung elektrostatischer Ladung auf nicht leitfähigen Oberflächen verursachen
könnten.

11. Es sind geeignete Maßnahmen zu treffen, um eine Beschädigung des Geräts im Falle eines
Kontakts mit aggressiven Stoffen zu verhindern und die Schutzart zu gewährleisten.
Aggressive Stoffe: z. B. säurehaltige Flüssigkeiten oder Gase, die Metalle
angreifen können, oder Lösungen, die polymerische
Stoffe angreifen.
Geeignete Maßnahmen: z. B. regelmäßige Kontrollen im Rahmen einer Routine-
prüfung oder Aufstellung der Beständigkeit gegen
bestimmte Chemikalien anhand des Datenblatts des
Materials.
12. Gerätekennzeichnung:
Die Kennzeichnung des Geräts enthält mindestens die Angaben auf dem Typen-
schild, das vorne auf der Innenseite des Umschlags dieser Betriebsanleitung abge-
bildet ist.
Betrieb
RUN Modus und PROGRAMMIER-Modus
Der SITRANS Probe LU besitzt 2 Betriebsarten: RUN und PROGRAMMIERUNG.
Sobald das Gerät eingeschaltet ist, startet der SITRANS Probe LU automatisch im RUN-Modus
new
und erfasst den Materialfüllstand. Auf der Hauptanzeige erscheint der Materialfüllstand (in
Metern) bezogen auf den Messbereich (Nullpunkt des Prozesses). Dies entspricht der Vorein-
stellung der Anzeige.
Der Systemzustand erscheint entweder auf dem LCD oder auf einem Datenübertragungsendgerät.
Anzeige im RUN Modus1

Deutsch
mmmmm
23
Die Anzeige wird mit dem Handprogrammiergerät bedient.
Normalbetrieb Failsafebetrieb
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Hauptanzeige (Anzeige von Füllstand, Abstand oder Volumen2, in Einheiten oder

Prozent)
2 – Nebenanzeige (Anzeige der Parameternummer für die Zusatzanzeige3)
3– Echozustandssymbol: Zuverlässiges Echo oder Unzuverlässiges Echo
4– Einheiten oder Prozent
5– Aktive Balkenskala zur Darstellung des Füllstands
6– Zusatzanzeige (je nach ausgewähltem Parameter erscheint hier der mA Wert, Abstand
oder die Echogüte, ggf. mit der Einheit.)
1.
Bei einer Kabeleinführung über Schutzrohr verwenden Sie nur zugelassene Kabelverschraubungen
geeigneter Größe für wassergeschützte Applikationen.
2. Nähere Angaben zur Anzeige von Durchflusswerten anstelle des Volumens finden Sie unter P050 in
der ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung.

Wenn die Echogüte ihren eingestellten Grenzwert unterschreitet, startet die Fail-safe-Zeit.
Nach Ablauf der Fail-safe-Zeit werden abwechselnd die Buchstaben LOE (Loss of Echo: Echo-
verlust) und der Messwert angezeigt (im Zwei-Sekundentakt). Das Symbol ‚Unzuverlässiges
Echo’ löst das Symbol ‚Zuverlässiges Echo’ ab. Sobald wieder ein gültiger Messwert erfasst
wird, kehrt die Anzeige des Füllstandmesswerts auf den Normalbetrieb zurück.
Anzeige im PROGRAMMIER-Modus
1– Hauptanzeige (zeigt den Parameterwert an)
2 3
2– Nebenanzeige (zeigt die Parameternummer an)
1 3– Symbol Programmierung
4– Zusatzanzeige (wenn eine Sprache gewählt wurde,
4 erscheint hier die Bezeichnung von Parameter P001 bis
P010. Für Parameter mit Index, wie z. B. P054, wird der
Indexwert angezeigt).
Programmierung
• Stellen Sie die Parameter entsprechend Ihrer Applikation ein.
• Die PROGRAMMIERUNG kann jederzeit aktiviert werden, um Parameterwerte zu ändern
und Betriebsbedingungen einzustellen.
• Für die Programmierung am Gerät verwenden Sie das Siemens Handprogrammiergerät.
• Für eine Fernprogrammierung verwenden Sie entweder einen PC mit SIMATIC PDM,
oder einen HART-Feldkommunikator.
Handprogrammiergerät
Deutsch
Tast Programmiermodus
mmmmm
Um direkt auf den SITRANS Probe LU
zuzugreifen, richten Sie das Program- Dezimalstelle1
miergerät auf die Anzeige des SITRANS
Probe LU und drücken Sie die Tasten. Negativer Wert
(Nähere Anweisungen finden Sie auf
der nächsten Seite.) Wert LÖSCHEN
new
UMSCHALTEN zwischen Einheiten und % am
Handprogrammiergerät Parameterwert
Abbrechen der PROGRAMMIERUNG und
Aktivierung des RUN-Modus
Display Aktualisierung der Echogüteparameter
Durchlauf der Parameter vorwärts

max. 600 mm
(2 ft) Durchlauf der Parameter rückwärts
DISPLAY öffnet Parameterfelder
EINGABE des angezeigten Wertes
1.
Taste und drei-stellige Parameternummer einge-
ben: Einstellung des Parameters zur Anzeige im
Zusatzfeld.
3.
Im RUN-Modus erscheint durch Drücken der Taste das Zusatzanzeigefeld.

Einfluss niedriger Temperaturen auf die Betriebsarten
RUN/PROGRAMMIERUNG
Innentemperaturen von –30 oC (–22 oF) oder weniger wirken sich negativ auf die beiden
Betriebsarten RUN und PROGRAMMIERUNG aus.
Der Betrieb im RUN-Modus ist normal, mit Ausnahme folgender Punkte:
• das Handprogrammiergerät ist nicht betriebsfähig
• die Anzeige auf dem LCD ist beschränkt auf: die Balkenanzeige und das Symbol
zuverlässiges/unzuverlässiges Echo
PROGRAMMIER-Modus:
• das Handprogrammiergerät ist nicht betriebsfähig.
Datensicherung (P000: Verriegelung)

Wert Beschreibung
Gespeicherter Wert in P069 * Verriegelung ausgeschaltet: Programmierung freigegeben
weitere Funktionen Verriegelung aktiviert: keine Änderungen zugelassen
* Werkseinstellung für P069 ist 1954: nach Eingabe und Bestätigung eines neuen Wertes wird
new
dieser zur Vorgabe.
Start des SITRANS Probe LU

Schalten Sie das Gerät ein. Der SITRANS Probe LU startet im RUN-Modus.
Deutsch
Hinweise:
mmmmm
• Halten Sie Infrarotgeräte, wie z. B. Laptops, Mobiltelefone und PDAs, vom SITRANS
Probe LU fern, um einen versehentlichen Betrieb zu verhindern.
• Die folgenden Anweisungen beziehen sich auf die Verwendung des Handprogram-
miergeräts.
• Das Handprogrammiergerät und SIMATIC PDM dürfen nicht gleichzeitig verwendet
werden. Der Betrieb könnte dadurch beeinträchtigt werden.
• Taste PROGRAM gefolgt von DISPLAY drücken, um den PROGRAMMIER-Modus
aufzurufen; Taste PROGRAM erlaubt die Rückkehr in den RUN-Modus.
• Vorgestellte Nullen brauchen bei der Eingabe einer Parameternummer nicht eingegeben
werden: für P005 tippen Sie z. B. 5 ein.

Zugriff auf einen Parameter
1. Taste PROGRAM gefolgt von DISPLAY Symbol
drücken, um die PROGRAMMIERUNG zu aktivieren. PROGRAMMIERUNG
2. Zum Blättern auf einen anderen Parameter, entweder Parameternummer

Parameterwert
die PFEIL-Tasten drücken oder:
3. Taste DISPLAY , um das Feld Parameternummer
zu öffnen. aktueller Wert
4. Eingabe der gewünschten Parameternummer gefolgt
von ENTER .
5. Beispiel: Taste gefolgt von .
6. Das LCD zeigt die neue Parameternummer und den
Wert an.
Änderung eines Parameterwertes

Hinweise:
• Die Sicherheitsverriegelung muss deaktiviert werden, um die Programmierung zu ermög-
lichen: stellen Sie P000 auf den in P069 gespeicherten Freigabewert ein. (Diese Konfigu-
ration kann bei entsprechender Einstellung von P799 durch einen externen Master
geändert werden.)
• Ungültige Eingaben werden zurückgewiesen oder begrenzt.
• Die LÖSCHTASTE erlaubt, das Feld zu löschen.
Deutsch
mmmmm
1. Geben Sie den neuen Wert ein.
2. Taste ENTER zur Einstellung des Werts.
Rücksetzen des Parameters auf Werkseinstellung
1. Blättern auf den Parameter oder Eingabe seiner Adresse.
2. Drücken Sie die Taste LÖSCHEN gefolgt von ENTER . Der Wert kehrt auf die
new
Werkseinstellung zurück.
Master Reset (P999)

Stellt alle Parameter außer P000 und P069 auf die voreingestellten Werte zurück. (Die korri-
gierte TVT-Kurve geht nicht verloren.)
1. Taste PROGRAM , gefolgt von DISPLAY zur Aktivierung des PROGRAMMIER-
Modus.
2. DISPLAY öffnet Parameterfelder.
3. Geben Sie den Wert 999 ein.
4. Taste LÖSCHEN gefolgt von ENTER zum Löschen aller

Werte und Start des Resets. Auf dem LCD erscheint C.ALL.
5. Reset beendet. (Dauert einige Sekunden.)

Schnellstart: Schritte 1 bis 10
Hinweis: Werkseinstellungen sind in den Tabellen durch ein Sternchen (*) gekennzeichnet.
1. Auswahl der Sprache (P010: Sprache)
Numerisch/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL

0 *
Keine P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Englisch
Werte P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Deutsch P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Französisch P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Spanisch
2. Einstellung P001: Betriebsart (Art der Messung)

Hinweise:
• Durch Einstellung von P001 wird auch die Messspanne (P007) bestimmt, es sei denn sie
wurde zuvor auf einen anderen Wert eingestellt.
new
• Durch Änderung von P001 kann die Ausgangsbetriebsart (P201) zurückgesetzt werden:
nur gültig für HART.
Füllstand: Abstand zum Materialfüllstand ausgehend vom Nullpunkt des Prozesses

1 * (Messbereich). Bei entsprechender Einstellung der Parameter P050 bis P055 ist eine
Deutsch
Anzeige in Volumeneinheiten möglich.

Werte
mmmmm
Leerraum: Abstand zum Materialfüllstand ausgehend vom Vollpunkt des Prozesses

2
(Messspanne).
Abstand: Abstand zum Materialfüllstand ausgehend vom Bezugspunkt (Sensorsende-
3
fläche).
mA Ausgang bei der Betriebsart Füllstand, Leerraum und Abstand

Füllstand Leerraum Abstand
Sensorsende- (P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
fläche 0%
(4 mA)
(20 mA) Messspanne (4 mA) Messspanne
Mess- 0% Abstand
spanne 100%
Leerraum
P007
P006
Füllstand
Messbereich Messbereich
Mess- 0% 100% 100%
bereich (4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Einstellung P003: Reaktionszeit

1 * langsam 0,1 m/Minute
Werte 2 mittel 1 m/Minute
3 schnell 10 m/Minute
Die Reaktionszeit P003 soll die max. Geschwindigkeit beim Befüllen oder Entleeren (es gilt der
größere Wert) leicht übertreffen.

4. Einstellung P005: Maßeinheit
1 * Meter
2 Zentimeter
Werte 3 Millimeter
4 Feet
5 Zoll
5. Einstellung P006: Messbereich (Nullpunkt Füllstandeinstellung

des Prozesses) Sensorsende-
fläche
Hinweis:
• P006 und P007 beeinflussen sich gegensei- Mess- 100%
tig; siehe Anmerkungen zu P007. spanne
P007
Mess- 0,0000 bis 6,000 m (20 ft) oder
bereich 0,0000 bis 12,000 m (40 ft) P006
Werte Füllstand
Vorein-
Maximaler Bereich
stellung
Mess- 0%
Der Nullpunkt kann auf jeden beliebigen Abstand bereich
eingestellt werden; nicht unbedingt auf den Tank-
boden.
6. Einstellung P007: Messspanne1

Mess- 0,0000 bis 6,000 m (20 ft) oder Der Vollpunkt kann auf jeden beliebigen
Deutsch
bereich 0,0000 bis 12,000 m (40 ft) Abstand oberhalb des Nullpunkts einge-
mmmmm
Werte
Vorein- 5,725 m (18,78 ft) oder stellt werden.
stellung 11,725 m (38,47 ft)
.
Hinweise:
• Durch Einstellung von P006 wird auch die Messspanne bestimmt, es sei denn sie wurde
zuvor auf einen anderen Wert eingestellt.
new
• Die Voreinstellung der Messspanne hängt von der Betriebsart (P001) und dem Messbe-
reich (P006) ab. Die Messspanne entspricht dem Messbereich (P006) minus 110% des
Ausblendungsabstands1, es sei denn die Betriebsart ist Abstand (P001=3). In diesem Fall
entspricht die Messspanne dem Messbereich (P006).
• Die Materialoberfläche sollte immer in einem Abstand von 0,3 m (1 ft) von der Sensors-
endefläche gehalten werden. Dies gewährleistet einen Sicherheitsspielraum von 0,05 m
(2”), da der minimal erfassbare Abstand 0,25 m (10“) beträgt.
7. Störreflexionen minimieren: Einstellung von P838 (Abstand autom.

Störechoausblendung)
P838 und P837 sind zusam- Maximaler Bereich:
Messbereich
men zu verwenden: folgen 0 bis 6,000 m (20 ft.) oder
Sie den Anweisungen für Wert (je nach Ausführung)
0 bis 12 m (40 ft.)
P837. Voreinstellung 1,000 m (3,28 ft)
1. Die voreingestellte Ausblendung beträgt 0,25 m (10").

8. Aktivierung der Störechoausblendung: Einstellung von P837 (Autom.
Störechoausblendung)
0 Aus
Wert 1 * Ermittelte TVT verwenden
2 Korrigieren
P837 und P838 (Durchführen dieser Funktion bei niedrigem Füllstand)

Die TVT-Kurve (Time Varying Threshold) legt einen Schwellwert zum Ausblenden von Stör-
echos1 fest. Wenn der SITRANS Probe LU fälschlicherweise einen Maximalfüllstand anzeigt
oder wenn der Messwert zwischen einem Maximalfüllstand und dem Ist-Füllstand schwankt,
kann die TVT-Kennlinie (Time Varying Threshold) mit P838 und P837 in diesem Bereich angeho-
ben werden; der Empfänger kann damit Störgeräusche von internen Sensorreflexionen, Echos
des Montagestutzens oder andere Störechos des Behälters ignorieren2.
Verwendung von P837 und P838 (Fortsetzung)
Hinweise:
• Verwenden Sie diese Funktion nur, wenn der Abstand vom SITRANS Probe LU zum
Material mindestens 2 Meter beträgt. Um diese Funktion optimal zu nutzen, sollte der
Tank leer oder fast leer sein.
new
• Stellen Sie P837 und P838 wenn möglich während der Inbetriebnahme ein.
• Wenn ein Rührgerät vorhanden ist, sollte dieses in Betrieb sein.
a. Bestimmen Sie den Ist-Abstand von der Sensorsendefläche zum Materialfüllstand.

b. Wählen Sie P838 und geben Sie den [Abstand zum Materialfüllstand – 0.5 m] ein.
Deutsch
c. Wählen Sie P837 und drücken Sie 2 (Ermitteln) und ENTER . P837 kehrt nach ein paar
mmmmm
Sekunden automatisch auf 1 (Ermittelte TVT verwenden) zurück.
9. Rückkehr in den RUN Modus

Drücken Sie die PROGRAMMIER- Taste, um in den RUN Modus zurückzukehren; die Ein-
stellung ist beendet.
SITRANS Probe LU Kommunikation: HART
Hinweis: Eine Darstellung des mA Ausgangs mit verschiedenen Betriebsarten finden Sie
unter mA Ausgang bei der Betriebsart Füllstand, Leerraum und Abstand auf Seite 12.
• Eine Liste aller verfügbaren Parameter finden Sie in der ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung.
• Auskunft über die Verfügbarkeit der HART-Gerätebeschreibung für den SITRANS Probe
LU erteilt Ihr zuständiger Ansprechpartner.
• Zur Programmierung Ihres Geräts empfehlen wir SIMATIC Process Device Manager
(PDM).
Wartung
SITRANS Probe LU erfordert weder Wartung noch Reinigung.
Gerätereparatur und Haftungsausschluss

Nähere Angaben finden Sie auf der inneren, hinteren Umschlagseite.
1. Störechos können durch Behinderungen im Schallkegel verursacht werden.

2. Genaue Angaben zur Autom. Störechoausblendung finden Sie in der ausführlichen Betriebsanleitung.

Περιληπτικό Εγχειρίδιο Οδηγιών του
SITRANS Probe LU
Το παρόν εγχειρίδιο περιγράφει τα βασικά χαρακτηριστικά και λειτουργίες του SITRANS Probe
LU. Σας συνιστούμε να αποκτήσετε την πλήρη έκδοση του εγχειριδίου, ώστε να μπορέσετε να
αξιοποιήσετε όλες τις δυνατότητες της συσκευής σας. Το πλήρες εγχειρίδιο διατίθεται στην
τοποθεσία μας web στο Διαδίκτυο: www.siemens.com/probelu. Το εγχειρίδιο σε έντυπη μορφή
διατίθεται από τον τοπικό αντιπρόσωπο της Siemens.
Ερωτήσεις σχετικά με τα περιεχόμενα του εγχειριδίου αυτού μπορείτε να απευθύνετε προς τη:
Πνευματικά δικαιώματα: Siemens Milltronics
Process Instruments 2013. Δήλωση αποποίησης
Με την επιφύλαξη παντός δικαιώματος
Παροτρύνουμε τους χρήστες να αγοράζουν Παρόλο που έχουμε ελέγξει ότι τα περιεχόμενα του
εξουσιοδοτημένα έντυπα εγχειρίδια ή να παρόντος εγχειριδίου συμφωνούν με τα όργανα που
ανατρέχουν σε ηλεκτρονικές εκδόσεις των περιγράφονται, τυχόν διαφοροποιήσεις είναι πιθανές.
εγχειριδίων που έχουν δημιουργηθεί και Επομένως, δεν μπορούν να εγγυηθούμε πλήρη
εγκριθεί από τη Siemens Milltronics Process συμφωνία μεταξύ των περιεχομένων του και της
Instruments. Η Siemens Milltronics Process συσκευής που αγοράσατε. Τα περιεχόμενα του
Instruments δεν φέρει ευθύνη για τα εγχειριδίου αυτού επανεξετάζονται σε τακτά χρονικά
περιεχόμενα των αντιγράφων ολόκληρου ή διαστήματα και οι διορθώσεις ενσωματώνονται στις νέες
μέρους του αναπαραχθέντος εγχειριδίου, εκδόσεις του. Κάθε πρόταση για τυχόν βελτιώσεις είναι
ανεξάρτητα από το αν πρόκειται για ευπρόσδεκτη.
ηλεκτρονική έκδοση ή εκτυπωμένο
αντίγραφο. Τα τεχνικά χαρακτηριστικά υπόκεινται σε τροποποιήσεις.
Το ΜILLTRONICS είναι σήμα κατατεθέν της Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Οδηγίες ασφαλείας1
Οι προειδοποιητικές υποδείξεις πρέπει να τηρούνται προκειμένου να διασφαλίζεται η
προσωπική σας ασφάλεια και η ασφάλεια τρίτων καθώς και να προστατεύεται το προϊόν και
ο συνδεδεμένος με αυτό εξοπλισμός. Οι προειδοποιητικές υποδείξεις συνοδεύονται από μια
επεξήγηση σχετικά με το βαθμό της προφύλαξης που πρέπει να λαμβάνεται.
Ελληνικά
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: σχετίζεται με ένα προειδοποιητικό σύμβολο πάνω στο προϊόν

mmmmm
και σημαίνει ότι η μη τήρηση των απαιτούμενων προφυλάξεων μπορεί να

προκαλέσει θάνατο, σοβαρό τραυματισμό ή/και σημαντικές υλικές ζημίες.
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ1: σημαίνει ότι η μη τήρηση των απαιτούμενων προφυλάξεων

μπορεί να προκαλέσει θάνατο, σοβαρό τραυματισμό ή/και σημαντικές υλικές
ζημίες.
Σημείωση: σημαίνει σημαντικές πληροφορίες σχετικά με το προϊόν ή με το συγκεκριμένο
τμήμα του εγχειριδίου χρήσης.
1.
Αυτό το προειδοποιητικό σύμβολο χρησιμοποιείται όταν δεν υπάρχει αντίστοιχο προειδοποιητικό σύμβολο στο προϊόν.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – ΠΕΡΙΛΗΠΤΙΚΟ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΟΔΗΓΙΩΝ Σελίδα EL-1

SITRANS Probe LU
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΗ: Αλλαγές ή τροποποιήσεις χωρίς ρητή έγκριση από
τη Siemens θα μπορούσαν να αναστείλουν την άδεια του χρήστη να
χρησιμοποιεί τον εξοπλισμό.
Σημειώσεις:
• Το SITRANS Probe LU πρέπει να χρησιμοποιείται μόνο με τον τρόπο που
περιγράφεται στο παρόν εγχειρίδιο, διαφορετικά ενδέχεται να διακυβευτεί η
ασφάλεια που παρέχει ο εξοπλισμός.
• Το προϊόν αυτό προορίζεται για χρήση σε βιομηχανικό περιβάλλον. Η λειτουργία
του παρόντος εξοπλισμού σε κατοικημένη περιοχή ενδέχεται να προκαλέσει
παρεμβολές σε ορισμένες ραδιοεπικοινωνίες.
Το SITRANS Probe LU είναι ένα βροχο-ενισχυμένο (loop-powered) όργανο συνεχούς

παρακολούθησης στάθμης, το οποίο χρησιμοποιεί προηγμένες τεχνικές υπερήχων.
Αποτελείται από ένα ηλεκτρονικό εξάρτημα που συνδέεται με το μορφοτροπέα και το
συνδετήρα διεργασίας.
Ο μορφοτροπέας διατίθεται σε έκδοση ETFE (αιθυλενοτετραφθοροαιθυλένιο) ή PVDF
(φθοριούχος πολυβινιλιδίνη), επιτρέποντας τη χρήση του SITRANS Probe LU σε ευρύ
φάσμα βιομηχανιών και εφαρμογών που χρησιμοποιούν διαβρωτικές χημικές ουσίες.
Ο μορφοτροπέας υπερήχων περιέχει ένα στοιχείο μέτρησης της θερμοκρασίας, για να
αντισταθμίζει τις θερμοκρασιακές μεταβολές στην εφαρμογή.
Η επικοινωνία γίνεται μέσω HART1 και η επεξεργασία των σημάτων με χρήση της
τεχνολογίας Sonic Intelligence®.
Προδιαγραφές
Για τον πλήρη κατάλογο προδιαγραφών, ανατρέξτε στο εγχειρίδιο οδηγιών του SITRANS
Probe LU. Σε ό,τι αφορά τις πληροφορίες για τις εγκρίσεις, ανατρέξτε στην πινακίδα
ονόματος του προϊόντος.
Θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος/λειτουργίας
Σημείωση: Τα όρια θερμοκρασίας και πίεσης της διεργασίας εξαρτώνται από τις
πληροφορίες στην πινακίδα ονόματος του προϊόντος. Το σχέδιο αναφοράς που
αναφέρεται στην πινακίδα ονόματος μπορείτε να το “κατεβάσετε” από την τοποθεσία Web
Ελληνικά
της Siemens, www.siemens.com/probelu.

mmmmm
φορητός προγραμματιστής
πινακίδα ονόματος προϊόντος

θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος γύρω
από το περίβλημα: φλαντζωτός προσαρμογέας
–40 έως +80 °C (–40 έως +176 °F)
φλάντζα που παρέχεται

από τον πελάτη
θερμοκρασία διεργασίας:
–40 έως +85 °C (–40 έως +185 °F)
1.
Το ΗART® είναι σήμα κατατεθέν του HART Communication Foundation.
Σελίδα EL-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – ΠΕΡΙΛΗΠΤΙΚΟ ΕΓΧΕΙΡΙΔΙΟ ΟΔΗΓΙΩΝ A5E32168031

Τροφοδοσία
Ονομαστική: 24 V DC με μέγ. αντίσταση για άλλες προδιαγραφές, ανατρέξτε στο πλήρες
550 Ohm: εγχειρίδιο.
• Μέγιστη 30 V DC
• 4 έως 20 mA
Εγκρίσεις
• Γενική: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Επικινδυνότητας
Ενδογενώς 
ασφαλής (Ευρώπη) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(ΗΠΑ/Καναδάς) FM/CSA1: (απαιτείται φράγμα)

Κλάση I, Τμ. 1, Ομάδες A,B,C,D
Κλάση II, Τμ. 1, Ομάδες E, F, G
Κλάση III T4
(Διεθνής) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
(Βραζιλία) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Μη εμπρηστική (ΗΠΑ) FM2:
Κλάση I, Τμ. 2, Ομάδες A,B,C,D T5
• Ναυτική Νηογνώμων ασφαλιστών του Lloyds
Έγκριση τύπου ABS
Σημείωση: Εγκεκριμένα υδατοστεγή στεγανοποιητικά αγωγών και στεγανοποιητικά

αγωγών για προστασία από τη σκόνη απαιτούνται για εξωτερικούς χώρους τύπου 4X /
NEMA 4X, τύπου 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68
Ελληνικά
1.
Βλέπε FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing στη σελίδα 1 του Παραρτήματος A, για αριθμό
διαγράμματος 23650516, ή CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing στη σελίδα 2 του
Παραρτήματος A, για αριθμό διαγράμματος 23650517.
2. Βλέπε FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing στη σελίδα 3 του Παραρτήματος A, για αριθμό
διαγράμματος 23650583.

Εγκατάσταση
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΕΙΣ:
• Τα υλικά κατασκευής έχουν επιλεγεί με βάση τη χημική τους συμβατότητα (ή αδράνεια)
για γενική χρήση. Σε ό,τι αφορά την έκθεση σε συγκεκριμένο περιβάλλον,
αντιπαραβάλετε με τους πίνακες χημικής συμβατότητας, προτού προχωρήσετε στην
εγκατάσταση.
• Το παρόν προϊόν μπορεί να λειτουργεί κανονικά και με ασφάλεια μόνο αν μεταφέρεται,
αποθηκεύεται, τοποθετείται, ρυθμίζεται, χρησιμοποιείται και συντηρείται σωστά.
• Ο χρήστης είναι υπεύθυνος για την επιλογή των υλικών πάκτωσης και των
παρεμβυσμάτων, ώστε να εμπίπτουν στα όρια της φλάντζας και της προβλεπόμενης
χρήσης της, και τα οποία να είναι κατάλληλα για τις συνθήκες λειτουργίας.
Σημείωση: Η εγκατάσταση πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται από εξειδικευμένο προσωπικό
και σύμφωνα με τους κατά τόπους ισχύοντες κανονισμούς.
Θέση τοποθέτησης
Συστάσεις:
• Θερμοκρασία περιβάλλοντος από –40 έως +80 °C (–40 έως +176 °F).
• Εύκολη πρόσβαση για παρακολούθηση της οθόνης και προγραμματισμό μέσω του
φορητού προγραμματιστή.
• Κατάλληλο περιβάλλον ανάλογα με τα ονομαστικά χαρακτηριστικά του περιβλήματος
και τα υλικά κατασκευής.
• Διατηρείτε τη διαδρομή ήχου κατακόρυφη προς την επιφάνεια του υλικού.
Προφυλάξεις:
• Αποφύγετε τη γειτνίαση με υψηλές τάσεις ή καλώδια με ρεύμα, επαφές υψηλής τάσης ή
ρεύματος και ελεγκτές ταχύτητας κινητήρων μεταβλητής συχνότητας.
• Αποφύγετε τις παρεμβολές στη διαδρομή ήχου από εμπόδια ή από τη διαδρομή
πλήρωσης
Πλήρωση
Η διαδρομή ήχου θα
πρέπει να είναι:
• κατακόρυφη προς
την υπό
παρακολούθηση
επιφάνεια σωλήνας
• απαλλαγμένη από
ανώμαλα τοιχώματα, βαθμίδες
Ελληνικά
αρμούς, βαθμίδες ή
άλλα εμπόδια
mmmmm
• μακριά από τη αρμοί

διαδρομή πλήρωσης 10°

Οδηγίες τοποθέτησης
Σημείωση: Στην ιδανική περίπτωση, τοποθετήστε το SITRANS Probe LU κατά
τέτοιον τρόπο, ώστε η επιφάνεια του μορφοτροπέα να βρίσκεται τουλάχιστον 300 mm
(1 ft.) πάνω από την υψηλότερη προβλεπόμενη στάθμη.
Το SITRANS Probe LU διατίθεται με τρεις τύπους σπειρωμάτων: 2" NPT, 2" BSP ή PF2/G.
1. Προτού συνδέσετε το SITRANS Probe LU στη θέση τοποθέτησης, βεβαιωθείτε ότι τα
σπειρώματα είναι του ίδιου τύπου, για να μην υποστούν ζημία.
2. Βιδώστε απλώς το SITRANS Probe LU στο συνδετήρα διεργασίας και σφίξτε το με το
χέρι σας.
Καλωδίωση
Τροφοδοσία1
ΠΡΟΕΙΔΟΠΟΙΗΣΕΙΣ:
Οι ακροδέκτες DC τροφοδοτούνται με ρεύμα από πηγή SELV 1 σύμφωνα με το
παράρτημα Η του IEC-1010-1.
Όλα τα καλώδια της εγκατάστασης πρέπει να είναι κατάλληλα μονωμένα, ανάλογα
με την ονομαστική τάση.
Σύνδεση του SITRANS Probe LU

βίδες
Σημειώσεις: καλύμματος
• Για λεπτομερείς πληροφορίες σχετικά με
τις διατάξεις Ενδογενούς Ασφάλειας, καπάκι με μεντεσέ
ανατρέξτε στο πλήρες εγχειρίδιο.
• Χρησιμοποιήστε θωρακισμένο,
συνεστραμμένο ζεύγος καλωδίων (πάχος
AWG 22 έως AWG 14 /0.34 mm2 έως
2.08 mm2).
• Μπορεί να χρειαστούν περαιτέρω
καλώδια και αγωγοί για συμμόρφωση με
τις πρότυπες πρακτικές καλωδίωσης
οργάνων ή τους ηλεκτρικούς κώδικες.
• Το μη μεταλλικό περίβλημα δεν παρέχει
Ελληνικά
σπειροτομημένη υδατοστεγής
συνεχή γείωση μεταξύ των συνδέσεων σύνδεση στυπιοθλίπτης
mmmmm
των αγωγών: να χρησιμοποιείτε

διαπεραστήρες και βραχυκυκλωτήρες
τύπου γείωσης.
1.
Πολύ χαμηλή τάση ασφαλείας

1. Απογυμνώστε το μανδύα του καλωδίου για ακροδέκτες για
ρεύμα βρόχου A
m
70 mm (2,75") περίπου από το άκρο του
καλωδίου και περάστε με σπειροτόμηση τα
καλώδια μέσα από το στυπιοθλίπτη1.
2. Συνδέστε τα καλώδια στους ακροδέκτες, όπως
φαίνεται παραπάνω: η πολικότητα
επισημαίνεται στο μπλοκ ακροδεκτών.
3. Σφίξτε το στυπιοθλίπτη για να πετύχετε καλή
στεγάνωση. καλώδιο
4. Κλείστε το κάλυμμα και σφίξτε τις βίδες: μην
σφίγγετε υπερβολικά τις βίδες. Η
προτεινόμενη ροπή είναι 1,1 έως 1,7 N-m
(10 έως 15 in-lb).
Καλωδιώσεις για εγκαταστάσεις σε επικίνδυνες περιοχές

Ελέγχετε πάντοτε την πινακίδα ονόματος της συσκευής και την ετικέτα συσκευής διεργασίας
για να βεβαιώνεστε για το είδος της έγκρισης.1
1. Ενδογενώς ασφαλής καλωδίωση
Πινακίδα ονόματος συσκευής (ATEX/IECEX/
INMETRO/C-TICK) KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
Το πιστοποιητικό ATEX μπορεί να ληφθεί από τη σελίδα προϊόντων της τοποθεσίας μας Web:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Πηγαίνετε στο Support (Υποστήριξη) > Approvals / Certificates
(Εγκρίσεις / Πιστοποιητικά).
Το πιστοποιητικό IECEx που αναφέρεται στην πινακίδα ονόματος μπορείτε να το δείτε στην
ιστοσελίδα της IECEx. Επισκεφθείτε την ιστοσελίδα: http://iecex.iec.ch και κάντε κλικ στο Ex
Equipment Certificates of Conformity (Πιστοποιητικά συμμόρφωσης εκρηκτικού
εξοπλισμού) και μετά καταχωρίστε τον αριθμό πιστοποιητικού IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Πινακίδα ονόματος συσκευής (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
Ελληνικά

To διάγραμμα συνδέσεων ενδογενώς ασφαλούς εγκατάστασης FM, αριθμός 23650516, και το

διάγραμμα συνδέσεων ενδογενώς ασφαλούς εγκατάστασης CSA, αριθμός 23650517, μπορούν
να ληφθούν από τη σελίδα προϊόντων της τοποθεσίας μας Web στο Διαδίκτυο:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Πηγαίνετε στο Support (Υποστήριξη) > Installation Drawings
(Διαγράμματα εγκατάστασης) > Level Measurement (Μέτρηση στάθμης) > Continuous -
Ultrasonic (Συνεχής - Υπέρηχοι).
• Για τις απαιτήσεις ισχύος βλέπε Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance στη σελίδα 4.
• Για τις απαιτήσεις καλωδίωσης: ακολουθείτε τους τοπικούς κανονισμούς.
• Εγκεκριμένα υδατοστεγή στεγανοποιητικά αγωγών και στεγανοποιητικά αγωγών για
προστασία από τη σκόνη απαιτούνται για εξωτερικούς χώρους τύπου 4X / NEMA 4X,
τύπου 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68.
• Ανατρέξτε στις Οδηγίες ειδικά για εγκαταστάσεις σε επικίνδυνες περιοχές (κωδικός
ευρωπαϊκής οδηγίας ATEX 94/9/EΚ, παράρτημα II, 1/0/6) στη σελίδα 7.
1. Αν κάποιο καλώδιο περνά μέσα από αγωγό, να χρησιμοποιείτε μόνο κατάλληλου μεγέθους
υδατοστεγείς διανομείς.

2. Μη εμπρηστική καλωδίωση (FM ΗΠΑ μόνο)
Το διάγραμμα συνδέσεων FM Κλάση 1, Τμ. 2, αριθμός 23650583, μπορεί να ληφθεί από τη

σελίδα προϊόντων της τοποθεσίας μας Web στο Διαδίκτυο: www.siemens.com/probelu.
Πηγαίνετε στο Support (Υποστήριξη) > Installation Drawings (Διαγράμματα
εγκατάστασης) > Level Measurement (Μέτρηση στάθμης) > Continuous - Ultrasonic
(Συνεχής - Υπέρηχοι).
• Για τις απαιτήσεις ισχύος βλέπε Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance στη σελίδα 4 του
Παραρτήματος A.
Οδηγίες ειδικά για εγκαταστάσεις σε επικίνδυνες περιοχές

(κωδικός ευρωπαϊκής οδηγίας ATEX 94/9/EΚ,
παράρτημα II, 1/0/6)
Οι οδηγίες που ακολουθούν ισχύουν για το SITRANS Probe LU που καλύπτεται από τον
αριθμό πιστοποίησης SIRA 06ATEX2355X:
1. Για τη χρήση και τη συναρμολόγηση, ανατρέξτε στις βασικές οδηγίες.
2. Ο εξοπλισμός έχει πιστοποιηθεί για χρήση ως εξοπλισμός κατηγορίας 1G.
3. Ο εξοπλισμός μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί με εύφλεκτα αέρια και ατμούς με
συσκευές των ομάδων IIA, IIB, και IIC και κατηγορίες θερμοκρασιών T1, T2, T3
και T4.
4. Ο εξοπλισμός έχει πιστοποιηθεί για χρήση σε περιοχή θερμοκρασιών
περιβάλλοντος από –40 °C έως +80 °C.
5. Ο εξοπλισμός δεν έχει αξιολογηθεί ως συσκευή που σχετίζεται με την ασφάλεια
(όπως αναφέρεται στην Οδηγία 94/9/EΚ, Παράρτημα II, παράγραφος 1.5).
6. Η εγκατάσταση και η επιθεώρηση του παρόντος εξοπλισμού θα πρέπει να
πραγματοποιείται από κατάλληλα εκπαιδευμένο προσωπικό, σύμφωνα με τον
εφαρμοστέο κώδικα πρακτικής (EN 60079-14 και EN 60079-17 στην Ευρώπη).
7. Η επισκευή του παρόντος εξοπλισμού θα πρέπει να πραγματοποιείται από
κατάλληλα εκπαιδευμένο προσωπικό, σύμφωνα με τον εφαρμοστέο κώδικα
πρακτικής (π.χ. ΕΝ 60079-19 στην Ευρώπη).
8. Εξαρτήματα που πρόκειται να ενσωματωθούν στον εξοπλισμό ή να
χρησιμοποιηθούν ως ανταλλακτικά πρέπει να τοποθετούνται από κατάλληλα
Ελληνικά
εκπαιδευμένο προσωπικό, σύμφωνα με την τεκμηρίωση του κατασκευαστή.

9. Συνιστά ευθύνη του χρήστη να εξασφαλίζει τη δυνατότητα χειροκίνητης
παράκαμψης, ούτως ώστε να είναι εφικτός ο τερματισμός λειτουργίας του
εξοπλισμού και των συστημάτων προστασίας που είναι ενσωματωμένα στις
αυτόματες διεργασίες που παρεκκλίνουν από τις προβλεπόμενες συνθήκες
λειτουργίας, υπό τον όρο ότι κάτι τέτοιο δεν διακυβεύει την ασφάλεια.
10. Το επίθεμα ‘X’ στον αριθμό πιστοποίησης σχετίζεται με τις εξής ειδικές συνθήκες
ασφαλούς λειτουργίας:
Τμήματα του περιβλήματος μπορεί να είναι μη αγώγιμα και να δημιουργούν
ηλεκτροστατικό φορτίο που μπορεί να προκαλέσει ανάφλεξη υπό ορισμένες
ακραίες συνθήκες. Ο χρήστης θα πρέπει να διασφαλίσει ότι ο εξοπλισμός
δεν έχει εγκατασταθεί σε χώρο όπου μπορεί να υποβάλλεται σε εξωτερικές
συνθήκες (όπως ατμό υψηλής πίεσης), με αποτέλεσμα το σχηματισμό
ηλεκτροστατικού φορτίου σε μη αγώγιμες επιφάνειες.

11. Αν είναι πιθανόν να έλθει ο εξοπλισμός σε επαφή με διαβρωτικές ουσίες, τότε
συνιστά ευθύνη του χρήστη να λάβει τις κατάλληλες προφυλάξεις για να
αποφευχθεί τυχόν ανεπανόρθωτη βλάβη του, διασφαλίζοντας κατ’ αυτόν τον
τρόπο ότι δεν διακυβεύεται ο τύπος προστασίας.
Διαβρωτικές ουσίες: π.χ. όξινα υγρά ή αέρια που ενδέχεται να
διαβρώσουν μέταλλα ή διαλύτες που ενδέχεται να
επιδράσουν σε πολυμερή υλικά.
Κατάλληλες προφυλάξεις: π.χ. τακτικοί έλεγχοι ως τμήμα συστηματικών
ελέγχων ή επιβεβαίωση από το φύλλο δεδομένων
υλικών ότι παρουσιάζουν αντοχές σε συγκεκριμένες
χημικές ουσίες.
12. Σήμανση εξοπλισμού:
Η σήμανση του εξοπλισμού περιλαμβάνει τουλάχιστον τις πληροφορίες στην
πινακίδα ονόματος προϊόντος, η οποία φαίνεται στη μέσα μεριά του εξώφυλλου
του παρόντος εγχειριδίου.
Λειτουργία
Λειτουργίες RUN και PROGRAM
Το SITRANS Probe LU έχει 2 τρόπους λειτουργίας: RUN και PROGRAM.
Το SITRANS Probe LU ξεκινά αυτόματα στη λειτουργία RUN με το που θα τροφοδοτηθεί με
ρεύμα και μετρά τη στάθμη υλικού. Η κύρια ένδειξη απεικονίζει τη στάθμη υλικού (σε μέτρα)
με σημείο αναφοράς το Κενό (μηδενική στάθμη διεργασίας). Αυτός είναι ο προεπιλεγμένος
τρόπος απεικόνισης κατά την εκκίνηση.
Η κατάσταση του συστήματος απεικονίζεται στην οθόνη LCD ή σε απομακρυσμένο
τερματικό επικοινωνίας.
Οθόνη λειτουργίας RUN

Χρησιμοποιήστε το φορητό προγραμματιστή για τον έλεγχο της οθόνης.
12
Κανονική λειτουργία Ασφαλής λειτουργία
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
Ελληνικά
mmmmm
1 – Κύρια ένδειξη (δείχνει τη στάθμη, την απόσταση ή τον όγκο, σε μονάδες ή ποσοστό
επί τοις εκατό)2.
2 – Δευτερεύουσα ένδειξη (δείχνει τον Κωδικό παραμέτρου για τη Βοηθητική ένδειξη3)
3 – Ενδείκτης κατάστασης ηχούς: Αξιόπιστη Ηχώ ή Αναξιόπιστη Ηχώ
4 – Μονάδες ή ποσοστό επί τοις εκατό
5 – Το ενεργό ραβδόγραμμα αναπαριστά τη στάθμη του υλικού
6 – Βοηθητική ένδειξη (ανάλογα με την επιλεγμένη παράμετρο, δείχνει την τιμή milliAmp,
την απόσταση ή την αξιοπιστία ηχούς, μαζί με τις μονάδες μέτρησης, όποτε
χρειάζεται.)
1. Για λεπτομέρειες σχετικά με την εμφάνιση της ροής αντί του όγκου, ανατρέξτε στην P050 στο πλήρες
εγχειρίδιο.
2. Πιέστε για να εμφανιστεί το πεδίο της βοηθητικής ένδειξης όντας στη λειτουργία RUN.

Αν η αξιοπιστία της ηχούς πέσει κάτω από το κατώφλι αξιοπιστίας ηχούς, ξεκινά η λειτουργία
του χρονόμετρου ασφαλούς λειτουργίας. Όταν παρέλθει η λήξη για το χρονόμετρο, τα
γράμματα LOE (Απώλεια Ηχούς) εναλλάσσονται με την ένδειξη κάθε δύο δευτερόλεπτα, και
ο ενδείκτης Αξιόπιστη Ηχώ αντικαθίσταται από τον ενδείκτη Αναξιόπιστη Ηχώ. Μετά τη λήψη
έγκυρης τιμής, η οθόνη ένδειξης στάθμης επιστρέφει στην κανονική λειτουργία.
Οθόνη λειτουργίας PROGRAM

2 3 1– Κύρια ένδειξη (εμφανίζει τιμή παραμέτρου)
2– Δευτερεύουσα ένδειξη (εμφανίζει κωδικό παραμέτρου)
1 3– Δείκτης προγραμματισμού
4– Βοηθητική ένδειξη (εμφανίζει ονόματα παραμέτρων
4
από P001 έως P010, αν είναι επιλεγμένη μια γλώσσα.
Εμφανίζει την τιμή ευρετηρίου για τις παραμέτρους που
έχουν ενταχθεί στο ευρετήριο, όπως η P054).
Προγραμματισμός
• Ρυθμίστε τις παραμέτρους προσαρμόζοντάς τες στην εκάστοτε εφαρμογή.
• Ενεργοποιήστε τη λειτουργία PROGRAM οποιαδήποτε στιγμή, προκειμένου να
αλλάξετε τις τιμές των παραμέτρων και να καθορίσετε τις συνθήκες λειτουργίας.
• Στον προγραμματισμό επί τόπου, χρησιμοποιήστε το φορητό προγραμματιστή
Siemens.
• Στον προγραμματισμό εξ αποστάσεως, χρησιμοποιήστε PC με SIMATIC PDM ή
φορητό communicator HART.
Φορητός προγραμματιστής
Πλήκτρο Λειτουργία προγραμματισμού
Για άμεση πρόσβαση στο SITRANS
Probe LU, στρέψτε τον
Υποδιαστολή1
προγραμματιστή προς την οθόνη του
SITRANS Probe LU και πατήστε τα
πλήκτρα. (Για λεπτομερείς οδηγίες Αρνητική τιμή
ανατρέξτε στην επόμενη σελίδα).
CLEAR (μηδενισμός ή απαλοιφή) τιμής
φορητός προγραμματιστής
TOGGLE (εναλλαγή) μεταξύ μονάδων και
ποσοστού % για την τιμή της παραμέτρου
Τερματισμός λειτουργίας PROGRAM και
οθόνη έναρξη λειτουργίας RUN
Ενημέρωση των παραμέτρων ποιότητας
Ελληνικά
ηχούς mmmmm
μέγ. 600 mm Κύλιση παραμέτρου προς τα πάνω

(2 ft.)
Κύλιση παραμέτρου προς τα κάτω
Το DISPLAY ανοίγει τα πεδία παραμέτρων
ENTER (καταχώριση) τιμής που

απεικονίζεται
1. Πιέστε και έναν τριψήφιο κωδικό παραμέτρου για

να ρυθμιστεί η παράμετρος που θα εμφανίζεται στη
βοηθητική οθόνη.

Επιδράσεις χαμηλής θερμοκρασίας στις λειτουργίες RUN/
PROGRAM
Αν η εσωτερική θερμοκρασία πέσει κάτω από τους –30 oC (–22 oF) ή ακόμα χαμηλότερα,
επηρεάζει τόσο τη λειτουργία RUN όσο και τη λειτουργία PROGRAM.
Η λειτουργία RUN θα εκτελείται κανονικά, με τις ακόλουθες εξαιρέσεις:
• Η λειτουργία του φορητού προγραμματιστή είναι απενεργοποιημένη
• η οθόνη LCD θα εμφανίζει περιορισμένες μόνο πληροφορίες: το ραβδόγραμμα και τον
ενδείκτη αξιόπιστης/αναξιόπιστης ηχούς
Λειτουργία PROGRAM:
• Η λειτουργία του φορητού προγραμματιστή είναι απενεργοποιημένη
Προστασία: (P000: Κλείδωμα)

Τιμή Περιγραφή
Αποθηκευμένη τιμή στην P069 * Ξεκλείδωμα: επιτρέπεται προγραμματισμός
άλλη Κλείδωμα: δεν επιτρέπονται αλλαγές
* Προεπιλεγμένη ρύθμιση για την P069 είναι η 1954: μετά την εισαγωγή και αποδοχή νέας
τιμής, η τιμή αυτή αποτελεί τη νέα προεπιλεγμένη ρύθμιση.
Ενεργοποίηση του SITRANS Probe LU

Τροφοδοτήστε το όργανο με ρεύμα. Το SITRANS Probe LU ξεκινά από τη λειτουργία RUN.
• Διατηρείτε τις συσκευές υπερύθρων, π.χ. φορητούς υπολογιστές, κινητά τηλέφωνα και
PDA, μακριά από το SITRANS Probe LU, προκειμένου να αποφευχθεί τυχόν ακούσια
λειτουργία του.
• Οι οδηγίες που ακολουθούν ισχύουν κατά τη χρήση του φορητού προγραμματιστή.
• Μην χρησιμοποιείτε το φορητό προγραμματιστή ταυτόχρονα με το SIMATIC PDM. Αν
το κάνετε ενδέχεται η λειτουργία να είναι ακανόνιστη.
• Πατήστε PROGRAM μετά DISPLAY για πρόσβαση στη λειτουργία PROGRAM,
και πατήστε PROGRAM για επιστροφή στη λειτουργία RUN.
• Δεν χρειάζεται να πληκτρολογήσετε τα πρώτα μηδενικά κατά την εισαγωγή του
κωδικού μιας παραμέτρου: π.χ., στην περίπτωση της P005, πληκτρολογήστε 5.
Ελληνικά
mmmmm

Προσπέλαση παραμέτρου
1. Πατήστε PROGRAM και μετά DISPLAY , για Εικονίδιο
να ενεργοποιήσετε τη λειτουργία λειτουργία PROGRAM
PROGRAM.
Κωδικός παραμέτρου
2. Χρησιμοποιήστε κάποιο από τα πλήκτρα-βέλη Τιμή παραμέτρου
ARROW για μετάβαση σε διαφορετική

παράμετρο ή:
3. Πατήστε DISPLAY για να ανοίξει το πεδίο
Κωδικός παραμέτρου. τρέχουσα τιμή
4. Πληκτρολογήστε τον κωδικό παραμέτρου που

επιθυμείτε και μετά πατήστε ENTER .
5. Για παράδειγμα: πατήστε και μετά .
6. Η οθόνη LCD εμφανίζει το νέο κωδικό παραμέτρου
και την τιμή της παραμέτρου.
Αλλαγή τιμής μιας παραμέτρου

• Η προστασία πρέπει να απενεργοποιείται για να είναι εφικτός ο προγραμματισμός:
ρυθμίστε την P000 στην Ξεκλείδωτη τιμή που είναι αποθηκευμένη στην P069. (Κάποιο
απομακρυσμένο σύστημα ελέγχου εξακολουθεί να μπορεί να αλλάξει τις παραμέτρους,
αν η P799 έχει ρυθμιστεί κατά τέτοιον τρόπο ώστε να επιτρέπεται κάτι τέτοιο).
• Οι μη έγκυρες καταχωρήσεις απορρίπτονται ή περιορίζονται.
• Το πλήκτρο CLEAR μπορεί να χρησιμοποιηθεί για το μηδενισμό/την απαλοιφή του
πεδίου.
1. Πληκτρολογήστε τη νέα τιμή.

2. Πατήστε ENTER για να καταχωρίσετε την τιμή.
Επαναφορά παραμέτρου στην εργοστασιακή προεπιλεγμένη τιμή
1. Μεταβείτε στην παράμετρο ή πληκτρολογήστε τον κωδικό της.
2. Πατήστε CLEAR και μετά ENTER . Η τιμή επανέρχεται στην προεπιλεγμένη τιμή. Ελληνικά
Γενική Επαναφορά (P999) mmmmm
Επαναφέρει όλες τις παραμέτρους, εκτός από τις P000 και P069, στις προεπιλεγμένες τιμές.
(Η καμπύλη “learned TVT” δεν χάνεται).
1. Πατήστε PROGRAM , και μετά DISPLAY για να ξεκινήσει η λειτουργία
PROGRAM.
2. Πατήστε DISPLAY για να ανοίξουν τα πεδία παραμέτρων.
3. Πληκτρολογήστε 999.
4. Πατήστε CLEAR και μετά ENTER , για μηδενισμό/
απαλοιφή όλων και για να ξεκινήσει η επαναφορά. Η οθόνη
LCD εμφανίζει την ένδειξη C.ALL.
5. Η επαναφορά ολοκληρώθηκε. (Η επαναφορά μπορεί να
διαρκέσει μερικά δευτερόλεπτα.)

Γρήγορη ρύθμιση: βήματα 1 έως 10
Σημείωση: Οι προεπιλεγμένες (εργοστασιακές) τιμές επισημαίνονται με έναν αστερίσκο
(*) στους πίνακες.
1. Επιλέξτε γλώσσα (P010: Γλώσσα)

* Αριθμητική/
ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0
Καμία P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Αγγλικά P001 OPERATION BETRIEB FONCTIONMT FUNCIONAM.

Τιμές P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Γερμανικά
P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Γαλλικά
P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Ισπανικά P006 EMPTY MESSBER. VIDE VACIO
2. Ρυθμίστε την P001: Λειτουργία (λειτουργία μέτρησης)

• Η ρύθμιση της P001 επαναφέρει το Εύρος κλίμακας (P007), εκτός αν αυτό έχει ήδη ρυθμιστεί σε
διαφορετική τιμή.
• Η αλλαγή της P001 μπορεί να επαναφέρει τη Λειτουργία εξόδου (P201): αυτό ισχύει μόνο με HART.
Το Level (στάθμη) δίνει την απόσταση έως τη στάθμη υλικού με σημείο αναφοράς το
Κενό (μηδενική στάθμη διεργασίας). Η ένδειξη αποδίδεται σε ογκομετρικές μονάδες, αν
1 *
οι παράμετροι 050 έως 055 έχουν ρυθμιστεί έτσι, ώστε να ενεργοποιείται η απεικόνιση
αυτή.
Τιμές
Το Space (κενός χώρος) δίνει την απόσταση έως τη στάθμη υλικού με σημείο
2
αναφοράς το Εύρος κλίμακας (πλήρη στάθμη διεργασίας).
Το Distance (απόσταση) δίνει την απόσταση έως τη στάθμη υλικού από το σημείο
3
αναφοράς (επιφάνεια μορφοτροπέα).
Έξοδος mA με λειτουργία Στάθμη, Κενός χώρος και Απόσταση

Στάθμη Κενός χώρος Απόσταση
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
επιφάνεια
μορφοτροπέα 0%
(4 mA)
Εύρος
κλίμακας
(20 mA) Εύρος κλίμακας (4 mA) Εύρος κλίμακας
100% 0% Απόσταση
Ελληνικά
Κενός χώρος
mmmmm
P007
P006
Στάθμη
Κενό Κενό
Κενό 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Καθορίστε την απόκριση μέτρησης (P003)

1 * αργή 0,1m/min
Τιμές 2 μέτρια 1m/min
3 γρήγορη 10 m/min
Ρυθμίστε την P003 σε ταχύτητα απόκρισης μέτρησης λίγο υψηλότερη από το μέγιστο ρυθμό
πλήρωσης ή κένωσης (όποιος από τους δύο είναι μεγαλύτερος).

4. Επιλέξτε τις μονάδες μέτρησης (P005)
1 * μέτρα
2 εκατοστά
Τιμές 3 χιλιοστά
4 πόδια
5 ίντσες
5. Καθορίστε τη μηδενική στάθμη της Ρύθμιση στάθμης

διεργασίας (P006: Κενό)
επιφάνεια μορφοτροπέα
Σημείωση:
• Οι P006 και P007 συνδέονται μεταξύ τους:
100%
ανατρέξτε στις σημειώσεις της P007. Εύρος
κλίμακας
0,0000 έως 6,000 m (20 ft.) ή P007

Εμβέλεια
0,0000 έως 12.000 m (40 ft.) P006
Τιμές
Προεπιλεγ Στάθμη
Μέγιστη εμβέλεια
μένη τιμή
Η τιμή Κενό μπορεί να ρυθμιστεί σε οποιαδήποτε Κενό 0%
απόσταση: όχι απαραίτητα στον πυθμένα του
δοχείου.
6. Καθορίστε το φάσμα τιμών μέτρησης

(P007: Εύρος κλίμακας)1
0,0000 έως 6,000 m (20 ft.) ή Το Εύρος κλίμακας μπορεί να ρυθμιστεί σε
Εμβέλεια
0,0000 έως 12.000 m (40 ft.) οποιαδήποτε απόσταση πάνω από τη
Τιμές
Προεπιλεγ 5,725 m (18,78 ft.) ή μηδενική στάθμη (Κενό)
μένη τιμή 11,725 m (38,47 ft.)
.
• Η ρύθμιση της P006 επαναφέρει το Εύρος κλίμακας, αν αυτό δεν έχει ήδη ρυθμιστεί σε
διαφορετική τιμή.
• Η προεπιλεγμένη τιμή για το Εύρος κλίμακας στηρίζεται στις παραμέτρους Λειτουργία
(P001) και Κενό (P006). Το Εύρος κλίμακας ρυθμίζεται στην τιμή Κενό μείον 110% της
απόστασης “νεκρής ζώνης”1, εκτός αν η Λειτουργία είναι ρυθμισμένη στο distance
(απόσταση) (P001=3). Στην περίπτωση αυτή, το Εύρος κλίμακας ρυθμίζεται στην
Ελληνικά
απόσταση Κενό. mmmmm
• Να αποφεύγετε πάντοτε να πλησιάζει η υπό παρακολούθηση επιφάνεια στα 0,3 m (1 ft)
από την επιφάνεια του μορφοτροπέα. Έτσι παρέχεται περιθώριο ασφάλειας 0,05 m
(2"), δεδομένου ότι τα 0,25 m (10") είναι η ελάχιστη μετρήσιμη απόσταση.
7. Ελαχιστοποιήστε τις παρασιτικές ανακλάσεις: Ρυθμίστε την P838 (Απόσταση

αυτόματης καταστολής παρασιτικής ηχούς)
Χρησιμοποιήστε αμφότερες τις Εμβέλεια Μέγιστη εμβέλεια:
P838 και P837: ακολουθήστε (εξαρτάται από το 0,000 έως 6,000 m (20 ft.) ή
τις οδηγίες για την P837. Τιμή μοντέλο) 0,000 έως 12 m (40 ft.)
Προεπιλεγμένη τιμή 1,000 m (3,28 ft.)
1.
Η προεπιλεγμένη τιμή για τη “Νεκρή ζώνη” είναι 0,25 m (10")

8. Ενεργοποίηση καταστολής παρασιτικής ηχούς: ρυθμίστε την P837 (Αυτόματη
καταστολή παρασιτικής ηχούς
0 Off
Τιμή 1 * Χρήση "learned" TVT (χρήση της τιμής που “έμαθε” το σύστημα)
2 "Learn" (εκμάθηση)
Χρήση P837 και P838 (εκτελέστε τη λειτουργία αυτή για χαμηλές στάθμες δοχείου)
Η καμπύλη TVT (Μεταβλητό όριο χρόνου) καθορίζει ένα όριο που προστατεύει από
παρασιτική ηχώ1. Αν το SITRANS Probe LU εμφανίζει εσφαλμένη πλήρη στάθμη ή αν η
ένδειξη παρουσιάζει διακυμάνσεις ανάμεσα σε μια εσφαλμένη υψηλή στάθμη και μια σωστή
στάθμη, χρησιμοποιήστε τις P838 και P837 μαζί για να αυξήσετε το TVT (Μεταβλητό όριο
χρόνου) σε αυτήν την περιοχή και για να απευαισθητοποιήσετε το δέκτη από οποιοδήποτε
“υπόβαθρο θορύβου” που προκαλείται από τις εσωτερικές ανακλάσεις του μορφοτροπέα,
την ηχώ των ακροφυσίων ή από άλλη παρασιτική ηχώ του δοχείου2.
Χρήση P837 και P838 (συνέχεια)
• Χρησιμοποιήστε τη λειτουργία αυτή μόνο αν υπάρχει ελάχιστη απόσταση 2 μέτρων
από το SITRANS Probe LU μέχρι το υλικό. Η λειτουργία αυτή είναι αποτελεσματική αν
το δοχείο είναι άδειο ή σχεδόν άδειο.
• Ρυθμίστε τις P837 και P838 κατά την εκκίνηση, αν είναι δυνατόν.
• Αν το δοχείο περιέχει αναδευτήρα, ο αναδευτήρας θα πρέπει να βρίσκεται σε
λειτουργία.
a. Προσδιορίστε την απόσταση από την επιφάνεια του μορφοτροπέα μέχρι τη

στάθμη του υλικού.
b. Επιλέξτε την P838 και πληκτρολογήστε [απόσταση μέχρι τη στάθμη του υλικού -
0,5 m].
c. Επιλέξτε την P837 και μετά πατήστε 2 (Εκμάθηση) και ENTER . Η P837
μεταπίπτει αυτόματα στο 1 (χρήση Learned TVT) ύστερα από μερικά
δευτερόλεπτα.
9. Επιστροφή στη λειτουργία RUN

Πατήστε PROGRAM για να επιτρέψετε στη λειτουργία RUN: η ρύθμιση ολοκληρώθηκε.
Επικοινωνίες του SITRANS Probe LU: HART

Ελληνικά
Σημείωση: Βλέπε Έξοδος mA με λειτουργία Στάθμη, Κενός χώρος και Απόσταση στη
mmmmm
σελίδα 12 για απεικόνιση της εξόδου mA σε διαφορετικούς τρόπους λειτουργίας.
• Θα χρειαστείτε το πλήρες εγχειρίδιο για να δείτε τον κατάλογο όλων των παραμέτρων.
• Σχετικά με τη διαθεσιμότητα του HART DD για το SITRANS Probe LU, επικοινωνήστε
με τον τοπικό αντιπρόσωπο.
• Σας συνιστούμε να χρησιμοποιήσετε το SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) για
να προγραμματίσετε τη συσκευή σας.
Συντήρηση
Το SITRANS Probe LU δεν χρειάζεται συντήρηση ούτε καθαρισμό.
Επισκευή μονάδας και αποκλειόμενη ευθύνη.
Για περισσότερες πληροφορίες, ανατρέξτε στην εσωτερική σελίδα του οπισθόφυλλου.
1.
Η παρασιτική ηχώ μπορεί να προκληθεί από εμπόδια στη διαδρομή της δέσμης.
2.
Για περισσότερες λεπτομέρειες σχετικά με την Αυτόματη καταστολή παρασιτικής ηχούς, ανατρέξτε στο πλήρες
εγχειρίδιο.

SITRANS Probe LU - Manual para la puesta
en marcha rápida
Este manual contiene indicaciones importantes y condiciones para la utilización del SITRANS
Probe LU. Le recomendamos encarecidamente que obtenga la versión completa de las
instrucciones de servicio para beneficiarse de todas las funciones del instrumento. Para
copias electrónicas del documento consulte: www.siemens.com/probelu. Los manuales
también están disponibles en versión impresa – contacte su representante Siemens.
Para más información acerca de este documento contacte:
Peterborough, Ontario, Canadá, K9J 7B1
Process Instruments 2013. Exención de responsabilidad
Todos los derechos reservados
Recomendamos a nuestros usuarios Hacemos todo lo necesario para garantizar la
obtengan copias impresas de la conformidad del contenido de este manual con el
documentación o consulten las instrumento proporcionado. Sin embargo, estas
versiones digitales diseñadas y informaciones quedan sujetas a cambios y no
comprobadas por Siemens Milltronics asumimos responsabilidad alguna en caso de
modificaciones. Examinamos y corregimos el
Process Instruments. En ningún caso
contenido de este manual regularmente y nos
será Siemens Milltronics Process esforzamos en proporcionar publicaciones cada
Instruments responsable de vez más completas. No dude en contactarnos si
reproducciones totales o parciales de la tiene preguntas o comentarios.
documentación, ya sea de versiones
impresas o electrónicas. Las especificaciones están sujetas a cambios.
MILLTRONICS es una marca registrada de Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments.
Indicaciones de seguridad1
Es imprescindible respetar las indicaciones de seguridad para una utilización sin peligro
alguno para el usuario, el personal, el instrumento y los equipos conectados a éste. Por
motivos de claridad expositiva en los textos de indicación y de precaución se destaca el nivel
de precaución necesario para cada intervención.
ADVERTENCIA: información que se refiere a un marcado colocado en el

producto. Significa que al no observar las precauciones de seguridad se puede
provocar la muerte, lesiones corporales graves y/o daños materiales
considerables.
ADVERTENCIA1: significa que la no observancia de las debidas precauciones
podría tener como consecuencia la muerte, lesiones graves o importantes daños
materiales.
Español
Nota: es una información importante acerca del instrumento o de la parte respectiva del
mmmmm
manual, al cual se debe atender especialmente.
1. Símbolo utilizado cuando el producto no lleva marcado de seguridad.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – PUESTA EN MARCHA RÁPIDA Página ES-1

SITRANS Probe LU
ADVERTENCIA: Al efectuar cambios o modificaciones sin autorización previa
de Siemens se puede anular la autorización del usuario a utilizar este
producto.
Notas:
• El SITRANS Probe LU debe funcionar únicamente de la manera como se especifica
en éste manual. La realización técnica de estas condiciones es la condición para
una utilización sin peligro alguno.
• Este instrumento está destinado a ser utilizado en áreas industriales. 
El funcionamiento de este aparato en una área residencial puede causar
interferencia en comunicaciones basadas en varias frecuencias.
SITRANS Probe LU es un sistema 2 hilos diseñado para la medición de nivel continua con
técnicas ultrasónicas avanzadas. El sistema combina una electrónica conectada a un
transductor y la conexión al proceso.
El SITRANS Probe LU está disponible con sensores de ETFE (etilenotetrafluoretileno) o PVDF
(fluoruro de polivinilideno). Su diseño permite la utilización en una extensa gama de industrias
y aplicaciones con sustancias químicas corrosivas.
El sensor ultrasónico está provisto de un sensor de temperatura para compensar variaciones
de temperatura en la aplicación.
El sistema puede comunicar con el protocolo HART1e incorpora la tecnología Sonic
Intelligence®para el procesamiento de señales.
Especificaciones
Para un listado completo, véase por favor la versión completa de las instrucciones de servicio
del SITRANS Probe LU. Para más detalles acerca de las Aprobaciones, ver la placa de
identificación del sistema.
Ambiente/de funcionamiento
Nota: Los límites de temperatura y presión en el proceso pueden variar. Para ello
véase la placa de identificación. El diagrama de referencia mencionado en la placa se
puede descargar del sitio web Siemens. Consulte la página producto en:
programador portátil
placa de identificación
temperatura ambiente
(exterior de la caja): adaptador de brida
–40 ... +80 °C (–40 ... +176 °F)
brida provista
por el cliente
Español
temperatura de proceso:
mmmmm
–40 ... +85 °C (–40 ... +185 °F)
1. HART® es una marca registrada de HART Communication Foundation.
Página ES-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – PUESTA EN MARCHA RÁPIDA A5E32168031

Alimentación de tensión
24 VCC nominal, 550 ohmios máximo: otras configuraciones: véase la versión completa
de las instrucciones de servicio.
• Máximo 30 V DC
• 4 ... 20 mA
Aprobaciones
• General: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Areas peligrosas:Seguridad intrínseca(Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(EE.UU./Canadá) FM/CSA: (requiere barrera de
seguridad)1
Clase I, Div. 1, Grupos A, B, C, D
Clase II, Div. 1, Grupos E, F, G
Clase III T4
(Internacional) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brasil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Anti-incendivo (US) FM: 2
Clase I, Div. 2, Grupos A, B, C, D T5
• Uso naval Lloyd’s Register of Shipping

Aprobación tipo ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
Nota: Utilizar conductos aptos, resistentes a la intemperie y estancos al polvo y al agua

para aplicaciones Tipo 4X / NEMA 4X, Tipo 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68.
Español
1. Ver FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing página 1 , Anexo A, diagrama de referencia 23650516,
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing página 2 o Anexo A, diagrama de referencia 23650517.
2. Consultar el FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing página 3 Anexo A, diagrama n°23650583.

Instalación
ADVERTENCIAS:
• Los materiales de construcción son seleccionados en base a su compatibilidad
química (o inertidad) para usos generales. Antes de instalar el aparato en
ambientes específicos consulte las tablas de compatibilidad química.
• El funcionamiento correcto y seguro de este producto presupone un transporte, un
almacenamiento, una instalación conforme así como un manejo y un
mantenimiento rigurosos.
• El usuario se compromete a utilizar tornillos y selladores conformes a los límites de
la brida y a su utilización, y que se adapten a las condiciones de servicio.
Nota: La instalación del instrumento debe ser realizada solamente por especialistas
capacitados, respetando las normas específicas del país.
Lugar de montaje
Recomendaciones:
• Temperatura ambiente:–40 a +80 °C (–40 a +176 °F).
• El dispositivo debe situarse en un lugar visible, de fácil acceso para el comunicador
portátil.
• Ambiente adecuado para la caja y los materiales de construcción.
• Mantener el trazado sonoro perpendicular a la superficie del material.
Precauciones:
• Se recomienda montar el aparato lejos de los circuitos de alta tensión o corriente,
contactores y controladores de velocidad de motor de frecuencia variable.
• Mantener el trazado sonoro lejos de obstrucciones o aberturas de llenado.
llenado
El trazado sonoro debería:
• ser perpendicular a
la superficie
controlada
• situarse lejos de tubo
paredes rugosas,
soldaduras, peldaños
peldaños y otras
obstrucciones soldaduras
• situarse lejos de la 10°
corriente de llenado
Español
mmmmm

Instrucciones de montaje
Nota: Se recomienda instalar el sistema SITRANS Probe LU respetando una distancia
mínima de 300 mm (1 ft) entre la superficie emisora del sensor y el máximo nivel
esperado.
SITRANS Probe LU está disponible con tres tipos de rosca: 2" NPT, 2" BSP o PF2/G.
1. Se recomienda comprobar antes de insertar el SITRANS Probe LU que las roscas son
idénticas para evitar dañarlas.
2. El sistema SITRANS Probe LU se fija mediante la conexión roscada. Apriete a mano
únicamente.
Cableado
Alimentación1
ADVERTENCIAS:
Los bornes de conexión (CC) deberían recibir el suministro eléctrico de una
fuente de alimentación SELV 1 en conformidad con la norma IEC-1010-1 Anexo H.
Aislar todos los cableados tomando en cuenta las tensiones utilizadas.
Conexión eléctrica del SITRANS Probe LU

Notas: tornillos de la tapa
• Para más detalles sobre las
configuraciones con seguridad intrínseca tapa
véase la versión completa de las articulada
instrucciones de servicio.
• Utilizar un cable par trenzado apantallado
(calibre AWG 22 a AWG 14/ 0,34 mm2 a
2,08 mm2).
• Para la instalación électrica deben
observarse las normas y disposiciones
pertinentes. Pueden ser necesarios cables
y conductos separados. conexión prensa
roscada estopas
• La caja no metálica no provee la conexión estanco
a tierra entre conductores: utilizar bornas
y puentes conectables a tierra.
Español
mmmmm
1. Safety Extra Low Voltage (voltaje de seguridad especialmente bajo).

1. Pelar el extremo de la cubierta del cable unos 70
mm (2.75"), y pasar los cables a través del bornes para m
A
corriente de
prensaestopas1. bucle
2. Conectar los cables con los terminales como se
indica precedentemente. polaridad indicada en
los bornes de conexión.
3. Apretar el prensaestopas para conseguir un
sellado óptimo. cable
4. Cerrar la tapa y apretar los tornillos sin forzar.
Par de apriete recomendado 1,1 a 1,7 N-m (10 a 
15 in-lb).
.
1
Cableado en áreas potencialmente explosivas

En cualquier caso, es recomendable comprobar las aprobaciones indicadas en las placas de
identificación del aparato y de la conexión al proceso.
1. Cableado intrínsecamente seguro
Placa de identificación del aparato (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
El certificado ATEX se puede descargar desde nuestra web, página producto :

www.siemens.com/probelu. Ver Support > Approvals / Certificates.
El certificado IECEx referenciado en la placa de identificación se puede visualizar en el sitio
web IECEx. Ver: http://iecex.iec.ch seleccionar Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity, y
especificar el número de certificado IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Placa de identificación del aparato (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
El diagrama de conexiones FM seguridad intrínseca número 23650516 y el diagrama de

conexiones CSA seguridad intrínseca número 23650517 están disponibles en nuestra página
web: www.siemens.com/probelu. Véase Support > Installation Drawings > Level
• Requisitos de alimentación: verLoop Voltage versus Loop Resistance página 4.
• Requisitos relativos al cableado: respetar las normas locales.
• Utilizar conductos aptos, resistentes a la intemperie y estancos al polvo y al agua
para aplicaciones Tipo 4X / NEMA 4X, Tipo 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68
• Ver Instrucciones específicas para instalaciones en zonas peligrosas (Directiva
Español
Europea ATEX 94/9/CE, Anexo II, 1/0/6) página 7.
1. Si se emplean conductos para tender los cables se recomienda utilizar prensaestopas certificados
adecuados para garantizar la estanqueidad.

2. Cableado anti incendio (non-incendive) (FM EE.UU. únicamente)
Diagrama de conexión FM Clase 1, Div. 2 número 23650583 se puede descargar desde

nuestra web, página producto: www.siemens.com/probelu. Véase Support > Installation
Drawings > Level Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• Consultar los requisitos de alimentación en Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance página
4, Anexo A.
Instrucciones específicas para instalaciones

en zonas peligrosas
(Directiva Europea ATEX 94/9/CE, Anexo II, 1/0/6)
Estas instrucciones se refieren al dispositivo SITRANS Probe LU que ha obtenido el certificado
número SIRA 06ATEX2355X:
1. Más informaciones acerca de la utilización y del montaje se pueden encontrar en las
instrucciones de servicio.
2. El aparato está clasificado como dispositivo de la categoría 1G.
3. El aparato puede ser utilizado en zonas con gases y vapores inflamables, con aparatos
del Grupo IIA, IIB y IIC, clases de temperatura T1, T2, T3 y T4.
4. El aparato puede soportar temperaturas ambientes de –40 C a +80 C.
5. El aparato no se ha analizado como sistema de protección (como se indica en la Directiva
94/9/CE Anexo II, cláusula 1.5).
6. La instalación e inspección de este aparato deben ser realizadas por el personal
adecuadamente formado, respetando los códigos de práctica aplicables (en Europa: EN
60079-14 y EN 60079-17).
7. La reparación de este equipo deberá realizarse por personal calificado en conformidad
con los códigos de práctica aplicables (EN 60079-19 en Europa).
8. La integración de componentes o la sustitución de parte del equipo eléctrico deberá
realizarse por personal calificado en conformidad con las indicaciones en la
documentación del fabricante.
9. El usuario es responsable de garantizar el sobrepaso manual, para desactivar el equipo y
los sistemas de protección utilizados en procesos automáticos, cuando éstos no
funcionen en conformidad con condiciones predeterminadas (sin riesgo alguno para la
seguridad).
10. El sufijo ‘X’ en el número de certificado indica condiciones de seguridad específicas:
La caja del sistema puede incluir partes no conductoras capaces de generar
cargas electrostáticas suficientes para provocar la inflamación en condiciones
extremas dadas. Es imprescindible evitar la utilización del equipo en
condiciones exteriores (como vapores de alta presión) que pudieran causar la
Español
acumulación de cargas electrostáticas en las superficies no conductoras.

(continúa en la página siguiente)

11. El usuario es responsable de tomar las precauciones necesarias para evitar el daño del
aparato y garantizar el nivel de protección obtenido, si existe la posibilidad de que esté
en contacto con productos agresivos.
Ejemplos de productos agresivos:líquidos ácidos o gases que pueden dañar
los metales, o disolventes que pueden dañar los
polímeros.
Ejemplos de precauciones adecuadas:inspecciones periódicas o confirmación
de la resistencia de los materiales a ciertas
sustancias químicas (ver las especificaciones del
producto).
12. Identificación del aparato:
El aparato debe ser provisto de un marcaje que incluya los datos proporcionados en la placa
de identificación, ilustrada en la portada interior de este documento.
Funcionamiento
Modo RUN y Modo PROGRAM
El sistema SITRANS Probe LU tiene dos modos de funcionamiento: RUN y PROGRAM.
Una vez completada la puesta en marcha el SITRANS Probe LU arrancará en modo RUN con
el cual se detecta el nivel del producto. La lectura principal corresponde al nivel del material
(en metros) desde el nivel proceso vacío. Este estado coincide con el modo de funcionamiento
predeterminado, después de la puesta en marcha inicial.
El modo de funcionamiento del sistema puede aparecer tanto local (pantalla LCD) como
remotamente (interfaz de comunicación).
Visualización en modo RUN

La visualización se controla con el comunicador portátil.
12
Funcionamiento normal Función de autoprotección
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Lectura principal (indicación de: nivel, distancia o volumen1 en unidad o porcentaje).

2 – Lectura secundaria (indicación del Número de parámetro para la Lectura auxiliar2)
3 – Indicador de eco: Eco fiable o Eco poco fiable
4 – Unidad o Porcentaje
5 – Indicación de nivel por gráfico de barras
6 – Lectura auxiliar (visualización de un valor mA, de la distancia, o de la fiabilidad de eco,
en unidades si es aplicable.)
Español
mmmmm
1. Para visualizar el caudal y no el volúmen, ver P050 en la versión completa de las instrucciones de
servicio.
2.
La visualización de la lectura auxiliar se obtiene pulsando la tecla en modo RUN.

Cuando el nivel de fiabilidad de eco es inferior al umbral de fiabilidad de eco el sistema activa
el temporizador de autoprotección. Después del tiempo definido (temporizador) aparece en el
indicador el mensaje LOE (pérdida de eco) y la lectura, cada dos segundos. El Indicador eco
poco fiable sustituye al Indicador eco fiable. El indicador de nivel vuelve a funcionar
normalmente si el sistema obtiene una lectura (medición) válida.
Visualización en Modo PROGRAM

2 3 1 – Lectura principal (indicación del número de parámetro)
2 – Lectura secundaria (indicación del número de parámetro)
1
3 – Indicador de programación
4 4 – Lectura auxiliar (los nombres de los parámetros P001 -
P010 aparecen en la pantalla, en el idioma seleccionado.
En el caso de los parámetros indexados (ej. P054)
aparece el valor correspondiente (índice).
Programación
• Con los parámetros el usuario programa el sistema tal como necesario para su
aplicación.
• El usuario puede activar el modo de funcionamiento PROGRAM en cualquier momento,
para modificar los valores de los parámetros del sistema y ajustar su operación.
• La programación local se efectúa con el programador portátil Siemens.
• Programación a distancia: utilizar un PC con SIMATIC PDM, o un comunicador portátil
HART.
Programador portátil
Orientar el calibrador hacia el Tecla Modo de programación
visualizador del SITRANS Probe LU. 
Con las teclas del calibrador el usuario Punto decimal1
accede directamente al sistema
SITRANS Probe LU. (Para mayores Valor negativo
detalles véase la página siguiente.)
CLEAR (borrar) el valor
programador portátil
TOGGLE (visualización alternada): valor del
parámetro en unidad y %
Desactivar el modo PROGRAM y activar el
indicador modo RUN
Actualización de los parámetros de calidad del
eco
máx. 600 mm Visualizar parámetro siguiente
(2')
Visualizar parámetro precedente
DISPLAY (visualización) campos de parámetros
ENTER (entrar) el valor indicado
1.
Pulsar y un número de parámetro de tres dígitos
Español
mmmmm
para visualizar el parámetro en el campo lectura

auxiliar.

Efectos de las bajas temperaturas sobre el
funcionamiento en modo RUN/PROGRAM
Si la temperatura interior desciende a –30 oC (–22 oF) o menos, afectará al funcionamiento en
modo RUN y PROGRAM.
El sistema funcionará normalmente en modo RUN, excepto:
• calibrador de mano desactivado
• visualización en la pantalla LCD limitada: gráfico de barras, indicador de eco fiable / poco
fiable
Modo PROGRAM:
• calibrador de mano desactivado
Seguridad: (P000: Activada)

Valor Descripción
Valor almacenado en
* Seguridad desactivada: programación autorizada
P069
Otros valores Seguridad activada: modificaciones no autorizadas
* Valor de fábrica para P069 = 1954: el usuario puede sustituir el valor por otro valor numérico
(= valor predeterminado).
Activación del SITRANS Probe LU

Conectar la alimentación eléctrica del sistema. El SITRANS Probe LU accede directamente al
modo RUN.
Notas:
• Para operar correctamente el SITRANS Probe LU debe funcionar lejos de computadoras
laptop, teléfonos celulares y asistentes digitales personales.
• Instrucciones para la utilización del programador portátil.
• No se debe utilizar simultáneamente el programador portátil y SIMATIC PDM, puede
ocasionar errores de funcionamiento.
• Presionar la tecla PROGRAM y DISPLAY para activar el modo PROGRAM y
presionar la tecla PROGRAM para volver al modo RUN.
• Introducir el número de parámetro, sin los ceros iniciales: para acceder a P005, teclear 5.
Español
mmmmm

Ajuste de parámetros
1. Presionar la tecla PROGRAM y DISPLAY , para SímboloPROGRAM
visualizar modo PROGRAM.
Número de
parámetro
2. Con las FLECHAS se accede a un parámetro Valor del param.
diferente, o:
3. Presionar la tecla DISPLAY para acceder al campo
Número de Parámetro. Valor actual
4. Introducir el número de parámetro deseado y pulsar
ENTER .
5. Ejemplo: pulsar y .
6. El número y el valor del parámetro aparecen en la
pantalla de cristal líquido (LCD).
Modificar el valor de un parámetro

Notas:
• Desactivar la seguridad para efectuar la programación: programar P000, Bloqueo
desactivado (valor almacenado en P069). (La función de puesta a cero general permite
cambiar la configuración (depende del parámetro P799).
• El sistema descarta o limita las entradas no válidas.
• Pulsar la tecla CLEAR para borrar los valores en la pantalla.
1. Teclear un valor nuevo.
2. Pulsar ENTER para ajustar el valor.
Reinicialización de un parámetro al valor de fábrica
1. Acceder al parámetro o introducir la dirección correspondiente.
2. Pulsar CLEAR y ENTER . Se almacena el valor predeterminado.
Master Reset/Reinicialización (P999)

Con esta función se obtiene la reinicialización de los parámetros (excepto P000 y P069) a los
valores predeterminados. (El sistema almacena el curva TVT obtenida.)
1. Presionar PROGRAM , y DISPLAY para activar el modo PROGRAM.
2. Pulsar DISPLAY (visualización) para abrir campos de parámetros.
3. Teclear 999.
4. Pulsar CLEAR y ENTER , para borrar todo (Clear All) y
activar la reinicialización. C.ALL.aparece en la pantalla.
5. Reinicialización efectuada. (La puesta a cero requiere algunos

segundos.)
Español
mmmmm

Puesta en marcha rápida: etapas 1 - 10
Nota: Los ajustes de fábrica se identifican mediante un asterisco (*).
1. Seleccionar el idioma (P010: Idioma)

Numérico/Sin ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
idioma P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Español
Valores P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Alemán P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Francés P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
(Unidades)
4 Español P006 EMPTY MESSBER. VIDE VACIO
P007 INTERVALO MESSSPANNE PLAGE RANGO
2. Programar P001: Operación (modo de medición)

Notas:
• Al ajustar P001 se reinicializa P007 (Alcance) siempre que no se haya introducido un
Alcance de medida.
• La modificación P001 puede activar la puesta a cero de P201, Función de salida (HART
únicamente).
Nivel indica la distancia nivel 0% (tanque vacío) / material. Se visualiza la lectura en

1 *
unidades de volumen (depende del ajuste de los parámetros P050 – P055).
Valores 2 Espacio indica la distancia nivel 100% (tanque lleno) / material.
3 Distancia indica la distancia punto de referencia (cara del sensor) / material.
Salida analógica: funcionamiento en modo Nivel, Espacio, Distancia

Superficie Nivel Espacio Distancia
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
emisora del
0%
sensor (4 mA)
(20 mA) Alcance de (4 mA) Alcance
Alcance de 100% 0% Distancia
medida medida de medida
Espacio
P007
P006
Nivel
Vacío Vacío
Vacío 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Programar el Tiempo de respuesta (P003)

1 * lento 0.1m/minuto
Valore
2 medio 1m/minuto
s
3 rápido 10m/minuto
Español
Ajustar P003 para obtener un tiempo de respuesta un poco más rápido que la máxima
mmmmm
velocidad de llenado / vaciado (o el valor más alto).

4. Seleccionar la unidad de medida (P005)
1 * metros
2 centímetros
Valores 3 milímetros
4 pies
5 pulgadas
5. Ajustar el nivel de vacío (P006: 0%) Configuración del nivel

Superficie
Nota: emisora del
• Existe una relación directa entre P006 y sensor
P007: ver las notas en P007. Alcance de 100%
medida
0,0000 ... 6,000 m (20 ft) o
Rango P007
0,0000 ... 12,000 m (40 ft)
Valores Valor P006
predeter- Rango máximo Nivel
minado
Vacío 0%
Ajustar el punto 0% libremente: no necesariamente
corresponde al fondo del tanque.
6. Ajustar el rango de medida (P007: Alcance)1

0,0000 ... 6,000 m (20 ft) o
Rango
0,0000 ... 12.000 m (40 ft) Ajustar el Rango de medida libremente
Valores Valor (distancia por encima del nivel proceso
5,725 m (18.78 ft) ó
predeter- vacío).
11,725 m (38.47 ft.)
minado
.
Notas:
• Al ajustar P006 se reinicializa P007 (Alcance de medida) siempre que no se haya
introducido un valor diferente.
• El valor predefinido del Alcance de medida se basa en la Operación (P001) y el 0% (P006).
El Alcance de medida se define como el 0% - 110% de la zona muerta1, siempre que el
sistema Funcione en modo distancia (P001=3). En este caso el Alcance de medida, o
Span, corresponde al nivel 0%.
• Es imprescindible respetar la distancia mínima de 0,3 m (1 ft) entre la superficie
controlada y la superficie emisora (cara) del transductor. Asimismo se obtiene un margen
de seguridad de 0,05 m (2"). La mínima distancia de detección es 0,25 m (10").
7. Minimizar falsos ecos: ajustar P838 (Distancia de supresión automática de

falsos ecos)
P838 se utiliza Rango máximo:
Rango
conjuntamente con P837. 0,0000 a 6,000 m (20 ft) o
(depende del modelo)
Español
Véanse las instrucciones Valor

0,0000 a 12 m (40 ft)
mmmmm
en P837. Valor predeterminado 1,000 m (3.28 ft)
1. Zona muerta predefinida = 0,25 m (10").

8. Activar la Supresión automática de falsos ecos: ajustar P837 (Supresión
automática de falsos ecos).
0 Off (desactivado)
Valor 1 * Utilizar curva TVT obtenida
2 Obtener curva
Utilizar P837 y P838 (realizar con niveles bajos de material)

La curva TVT (Time Varying Threshold) define el umbral utilizado para eliminar los falsos ecos1.
Si en la pantalla del SITRANS Probe LU aparece un nivel 100% incorrecto, o si la lectura varía
(nivel alto incorrecto / nivel correcto), utilizar P838 y P837 para levantar la curva TVT
correspondiente y desensibilizar el receptor frente a interferencias y ruidos de fondo
provocados por reflejos en la parte interior del transductor o del tubo, o falsos reflejos de
objetos situados dentro del tanque2.
. Utilización de P837 y P838 (continuación)
Notas:
• Recomendamos utilizar esta función sólo si la distancia mínima entre el SITRANS Probe
LU y el material es 2 metros. Los mejores resultados se obtienen cuando el tanque está
vacío o casi vacío.
• Ajustar P837 y P838 durante la puesta en marcha (si es posible).
• Activar el agitador en tanques de proceso con agitadores.
a. Definir la distancia entre la superficie emisora del sensor y el material.

b. Seleccionar P838 y teclear [distancia hasta el nivel del material – 0,5 m].
c. Seleccionar P837, pulsar 2 (Learn/Obtener) y ENTER . P837 vuelve automáticamente a
1 (utilizar curva TVT obtenida) después de unos segundos.
9. Volver al modo RUN
Presionar PROGRAM para volver al modo RUN: puesta en marcha efectuada.
Comunicación SITRANS Probe LU: HART

Nota: Para más detalles acerca de la salida mA y los modos de operación consulte Salida
analógica: funcionamiento en modo Nivel, Espacio, Distancia , página 12.
• Para informaciones más detalladas acerca de los parámetros, ver la versión completa de
las instrucciones de servicio.
• Contacte a su representante local para comprobar la disponibilidad del HART DD para el
SITRANS Probe LU.
• Recomendamos parametrizar el aparato utilizando el software SIMATIC Process Device
Manager (PDM).
Mantenimiento
SITRANS Probe LU no necesita mantenimiento o limpieza.
Reparaciones y límite de responsabilidad

Español
Para más detalles véase la portada interior.

mmmmm
1. Los falsos ecos pueden ser provocados por obstrucciones que intersectan con el haz.
2. Para más detalles acerca de la Supresión automática de falsos ecos consulte la versión completa de
las instrucciones de servicio.

SITRANS Probe LU Mise en service rapide
Ce manuel décrit les caractéristiques et les fonctions essentielles de l'appareil SITRANS
Français
Probe LU. Il est recommandé de se reporter à la version intégrale des instructions de service
mmmmm
pour accéder à l'ensemble des fonctions de l'appareil. Cette version est disponible sur :
www.siemens.com/probelu. Pour obtenir une version imprimée, contactez votre représentant
Siemens.
Toute question sur le contenu de ce document peut être adressée à :
E-mail : techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
Process Instruments 2013. Clause de non-responsabilité
Tous droits réservés
Nous encourageons les utilisateurs à se Le contenu de ce document a été vérifié pour
procurer les exemplaires imprimés de garantir la conformité avec les caractéristiques de
ces documents, ou les versions l'instrument. Des divergences étant possibles,
électroniques préparées et validées par nous ne pouvons en aucun cas garantir la
Siemens Milltronics Process conformité totale. Ce document est révisé et
Instruments. Siemens Milltronics actualisé régulièrement pour inclure les nouvelles
Process Instruments ne pourra être tenu caractéristiques. N’hésitez pas à nous faire part
responsable du contenu de toute de vos commentaires.
reproduction totale ou partielle des
versions imprimées ou électroniques. Sous réserve de modifications techniques.
MILLTRONICS est une marque déposée de Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Consignes de sécurité1
ll est important de respecter les consignes fournies dans ce document afin de garantir la
sécurité de l'utilisateur ou de tiers et la protection de l'instrument ou de tout équipement
connecté à ce dernier. Chaque avertissement s'associe à une explication détaillée du niveau
de précaution recommandé pour chaque opération.
AVERTISSEMENT : fait référence à une mention sur le produit. Signifie que la

mort, des blessures corporelles graves et/ou des dommages matériels
conséquents peuvent se produire si les dispositions de sécurité
correspondantes ne sont pas respectées.
AVERTISSEMENT 1: signifie que la mort, des blessures corporelles graves et/ou
des dommages matériels conséquents peuvent se produire si les dispositions de
sécurité correspondantes ne sont pas respectées.
N.B. : information importante concernant l'instrument ou une section particulière des
instructions de service.
1. Ce symbole est utilisé lorsque le produit ne comporte pas un marquage de sécurité.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MISE EN SERVICE RAPIDE Page FR-1

Français SITRANS Probe LU
AVERTISSEMENT : Toute intervention ou modification effectuée sans l’accord
mmmmm
préalable de Siemens peut remettre en cause les droits d’utilisation du

dispositif.
Notes :
• Pour garantir la sécurité, le SITRANS Probe LU doit être utilisé suivant les
consignes fournies dans ce document.
• Cet instrument est conçu pour une utilisation en milieu industriel. Utilisé en zone
résidentielle, cet instrument peut provoquer différentes interférences radio.
SITRANS Probe LU est un appareil ultrasonique très performant. Alimenté par boucle de
courant, il délivre la mesure de niveau en continu. Cet appareil est composé d’une électronique
associée à un transducteur et un raccord process.
Le SITRANS Probe LU s’utilise avec un transducteur en ETFE (tétrafluoréthylène, éthylène) ou
en PVDF (fluorure de polyvinylidene), offrant une très grande flexibilité d’utilisation et une
résistance optimale aux produits chimiques corrosifs.
Le transducteur ultrasonique est doté d’un capteur pour compenser les variations de
température.
Communication HART1 et techniques de traitement du signal Sonic Intelligence®.
Caractéristiques techniques
Pour une liste exhaustive se reporter au manuel d’utilisation SITRANS Probe LU. 
Les homologations sont indiquées sur la plaque signalétique de l'instrument.
Température ambiante/de fonctionnement

N.B. : La température et la pression de process applicables varient en fonction des
informations reportées sur la plaque signalétique du produit. Le schéma de référence
indiqué sur la plaque signalétique peut être téléchargé depuis le site internet Siemens.
Voir la page produit : www.siemens.com/probelu.
programmateur portable
plaque signalétique du
température ambiante produit
(volume autour du boîtier) : adaptateur bride
–40 ... +80 °C (–40 ... +176 °F)
bride fournie
par le client
température de process :
–40 ... +85 °C (–40 ... +185 °F)
1. HART® est une marque déposée de HART Communication Foundation.
Page FR-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MISE EN SERVICE RAPIDE A5E32168031

Alimentation électrique
Standard 24 VCC à 550 ohms maximum. Pour plus de détails se reporter aux instructions
de service.
Français
• Max. 30 V CC
• 4 ... 20 mA
Homologations
• Usage généralCSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Zone dangereuse :Sécurité intrinsèque(Europe) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(USA/Canada) FM/CSA : (barrière requise)1
Classe I, Div. 1, Gr. A, B, C, D
Classe II, Div 1, Gr. E, F & G
Classe III T4
(Brésil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Non-incendiaire (US) FM : 2
Classe I, Div. 2, Groupes A, B, C, D, T5

Certification ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
N.B. : Les conduits utilisés doivent être étanches à la poussière et à l’eau pour les
applications en extérieur Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68.
1. Voir FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing page 1 , Annexe A, pour le dessin réf. 23650516, ou CSA
Intrinsically Safe connection drawing page 2, Annexe A, pour le dessin réf. 23650517.
2. Voir FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing page 3, Annexe A, dessin réf. 23650583.

Installation
AVERTISSEMENTS :
Français
mmmmm
• Les matériaux de construction sont choisis en fonction de leur compatibilité

chimique (ou inertie), pour une exploitation générale. Vérifiez les tableaux de
compatibilité chimique avant toute installation dans un environnement spécifique.
• Le parfait fonctionnement de cet instrument et sa sécurité présupposent un
transport approprié, un stockage, une installation, une utilisation et une
maintenance soigneuses.
• Le boulonnage et les joints choisis par l'utilisateur doivent permettre de respecter
les consignes et les limites d'utilisation de la bride, et s'adapter aux conditions de
fonctionnement.
N.B. : L'installation doit être effectuée par un personnel qualifié, en accord avec les
dispositions réglementaires locales.
Recommandations pour le montage

Recommandations :
• La température ambiante doit se situer entre –40 et +80 °C (–40 et +176 °F).
• Accès facile à l’affichage et à la programmation avec le programmateur portatif.
• Environnement adapté à l'indice de protection du boîtier et aux matériaux de
construction.
• Le signal ultrasonore doit être perpendiculaire à la surface du matériau mesuré.
Précautions :
• Il est préférable de ne pas installer l’instrument près de câbles/contacts haute tension,
câbles/contacts pour courant élevé et régulateurs de vitesse à fréquence variable.
• Eviter toute interférence entre le signal d’émission et les obstructions ou le flot de
remplissage.
Remplissage
Le faisceau d’émission 
doit être :
• perpendiculaire à la
surface mesurée
• loin des parois tuyau
rugueuses, soudures,
barreaux ou autres barreaux
obstructions
• loin du flot de soudures
remplissage 10°

Instructions pour le montage
N.B. : Pour optimiser le fonctionnement, prévoir un écart minimum de 300 mm (1 ft)
entre la face émettrice du transducteur SITRANS Probe LU et le niveau maximum
Français
attendu.
mmmmm
SITRANS Probe LU est disponible avec trois types de filetage : 2" NPT, 2" BSP ou PF2/G.
1. Avant d’insérer le SITRANS Probe LU dans le raccord de montage vérifier que les
filetages soient identiques pour éviter de les endommager.
2. Il suffit ensuite de visser le SITRANS Probe LU sur le raccord process, et serrer
manuellement.
Câblage
Alimentation1
AVERTISSEMENTS :
Les bornes CC doivent être alimentées par une source SELV1 conformément à la
norme CEI 1010-1 Annexe H.
Isoler tous les câblages en tenant compte des tensions nominales.
Connexion du SITRANS Probe LU

vis de fixation 
Notes : du couvercle
• Pour plus de détails sur les applications de couvercle
sécurité intrinsèque se reporter aux articulé ou à
charnière
• Utiliser un câble paire blindée/torsadée
(jauge AWG 22 - AWG 14/ 0,34 mm2 à
2,08 mm2).
• Des câbles et des conduits séparés
peuvent être nécessaires pour garantir la
conformité avec les consignes de câblage
ou les normes électriques.
• Le boîtier non-métallique n'assure pas la raccord presse-étoupe
fileté étanche
mise à la terre entre les connexions.
Utiliser des traversées et des bretelles
appropriées, avec mise à la terre.
1. Très basse tension de sécurité (TBTS, ou SELV)

1. Retirer environ 70 mm (2.75") de gaine à borne de
A
l’extrémité du câble. Faire passer les câbles à connexion, m
courant de boucle
travers le presse-étoupe1.
2. Connecter les câbles aux bornes tel qu’illustré. la
Français
polarité est indiquée sur le bornier.

3. Serrer le presse-étoupe pour garantir
l’étanchéité.
câble
4. Fermer le couvercle et serrer les vis. Eviter un
serrage excessif ! Couple de serrage
recommandé 1,1 à 1,7 N-m (10 à 15 in-lb).
.
1
Câblage pour zones dangereuses

Dans tous les cas, vérifier les homologations indiquées sur la plaque signalétique et la plaque
d'identification de l'instrument.
1. Câblage sécurité intrinsèque
Plaque signalétique de l’instrument (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
Le certificat ATEX peut être téléchargé de la page produit de notre site : www.siemens.com/
probelu. Consulter Support > Approvals / Certificates.
Le certificat IECEx indiqué sur la plaque signalétique est accessible à partir du site internet
IECEx. Consulter : http://iecex.iec.ch et cliquer sur Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity.
Entrer le numéro de certificat IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Plaque signalétique de l’instrument (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
Les schémas de raccordement FM Sécurité Intrinsèque numéro 23650516, et CSA Sécurité

Intrinsèque numéro 23650517 sont disponibles sur la page produit de notre site :
www.siemens.com/probelu. Consulter Support > Installation Drawings > Level
Measurement > Continuous - Radar.
• Pour plus de détails sur la consommation de courant, voir Loop Voltage versus Loop
Resistance page 4.
• Exigences relatives au câblage : respecter les prescriptions locales.
• Les conduits utilisés doivent être étanches à la poussière et à l’eau pour les
applications en extérieur Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68.
• Consulter Instructions spécifiques pour l’installation en zone dangereuse (réf.
Directive Européenne ATEX 94/9/CE, Annexe II, 1/0/6) page 7.
1. Si le câble est installé sous conduit, utiliser des bouchons étanches, résistants à l'eau.

2. Câblage non-incendiaire (FM, USA uniquement)
Français
Le schéma de référence pour connexion FM, Classe 1, Div. 2 numéro 23650583 peut être
téléchargé sur la page produit de notre site : www.siemens.com/probelu. Consulter Support
> Installation Drawings > Level Measurement > Continuous - Radar.
• La consommation électrique est détaillée dans Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
page 4 de l'Annexe A.
Instructions spécifiques pour l’installation

en zone dangereuse
(réf. Directive Européenne ATEX 94/9/CE, Annexe II, 1/0/6)
Consignes applicables à l'instrument SITRANS Probe LU objet du certificat N° SIRA
06ATEX2355X :
1. L'utilisation et l'assemblage sont décrits dans les instructions de service.
2. L'appareil est certifié en tant qu’instrument de la catégorie 1G.
3. L'appareil peut être utilisé en présence de gaz et de vapeurs inflammables, avec des
instruments de groupe IIA, IIB et IIC, classification de température T1, T2, T3 et T4.
4. L'appareil est certifié pour utilisation dans une plage de température ambiante de –40 C
à +80 C.
5. Conformément à la Directive 94/9/CE Annexe II, clause 1.5, cet instrument n’est pas
considéré un appareil de sécurité.
6. L’installation et la vérification de cet appareil doivent être effectuées par un personnel
qualifié, en accord avec le code de bonne pratique applicable (EN 60079-14 et EN 60079-
17 pour l’Europe).
7. Toute réparation de cet appareil doit être effectuée par un personnel qualifié, en accord
avec le code de bonne pratique applicable (ex. EN 60079-19 pour l’Europe).
8. Les composants intégrés dans l'appareil ou utilisés pour les remplacements éventuels
devront être installés par un personnel qualifié en accord avec les spécifications
contenues dans la documentation fournie par le fabricant.
(cf. page suivante)
9. L’utilisateur doit faire le nécessaire pour permettre l’arrêt manuel de l'appareil et des
dispositifs de protection associés à des processus automatiques, à condition que cela
n’affecte pas la sécurité de l’installation.
10. Le suffixe ‘X’ du numéro de certificat fait référence aux conditions spéciales suivantes,
permettant l’utilisation de l'appareil en toute sécurité :
Certaines parties non-conductrices du boîtier peuvent être à l’origine de
charges électrostatiques suffisantes pour déclencher l’inflammation en
conditions de fonctionnement extrêmes. L’emplacement choisi pour
l’installation doit permettre de protéger l'appareil des conditions externes
(vapeur haute pression par exemple) qui peuvent donner lieu à une
accumulation de charge électrostatique sur les surfaces non-conductrices.

11. Lorsque l'appareil peut entrer en contact avec des substances aggressives, il incombe à
l’utilisateur de prendre les mesures adéquates pour empêcher sa détérioration et
garantir le degré de protection.
Substances aggressives :liquides ou gaz acides pouvant affecter des métaux
Français
ou solvants pouvant affecter des matériaux

mmmmm
polymérisés.
Mesures adéquates : vérifications régulières dans le cadre d’inspections ou
confirmation de la résistance à certaines substances
chimiques sur la base des spécifications fournies.
12. Marquage du produit :
Le marquage de l'appareil devra comporter au moins les mentions reportées sur la plaque
signalétique du produit, indiquées sur la couverture interne de ce document.
Fonctionnement
MODE RUN et Mode PROGRAM
SITRANS Probe LU fonctionne sous deux modes : RUN et PROGRAM(mation).
Le SITRANS Probe LU commute en mode RUN dès la mise sous tension, pour détecter le
niveau de produit. Le lecture principale correspond au niveau de matériau (en mètres), depuis
le niveau Vide (niveau process vide). Cela correspond à l’affichage par défaut dès la mise sous
tension.
Le mode de fonctionnement de l’appareil est indiqué sur l’écran LCD. Il peut être visualisé à
distance par une interface de communication.
Affichage en mode RUN

12
Le programmateur portatif permet de contrôler l’afficheur.
Fonctionnement normal Fonctionnement Sécurité-Défaut
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Lecture principale (affichage du niveau, de la distance ou du volume1, en unité ou

pourcentage).
2 – Lecture secondaire (affichage du numéro de paramètre associé à la Lecture auxiliaire2)
3– Indicateur de l’état de l’écho : Echo fiable ou Echo peu fiable
4– Unités ou pourcent
5– Représentation du niveau de produit (bargraphe)
6– Lecture auxiliaire (l’affichage varie en fonction du paramètre sélectionné : valeur en mA,
distance, ou fiabilité de l’écho, avec unité de mesure, si applicable.)
1.
Pour obtenir l'affichage du débit au lieu du volume se reporter à P050 dans les instructions de service.
2.
Appuyer sur pour obtenir l’affichage du champ lecture auxiliaire en mode RUN.

Un niveau de fiabilité de l’écho inférieur au seuil défini déclenche la temporisation sécurité-
défaut. A la fin de la temporisation on obtient l’affichage alterné de LOE (Loss of Echo, ou perte
d’écho) et de la lecture, toutes les deux secondes. L’indicateur Echo peu fiable remplace
l’Indicateur écho fiable. La mesure de niveau est affichée dès qu’une lecture correcte est
Français
obtenue.
mmmmm
Affichage en mode PROGRAM
2 3 1 – Valeur primaire (affichage de la valeur du paramètre)
2 – Lecture secondaire (affichage du numéro de paramètre)
1
3 – Indicateur de programmation
4 4 – Lecture auxiliaire (affichage des noms des paramètres
P001 à P010, lorsqu'une langue a été sélectionnée.
Affichage de la valeur d’index pour les paramètres
indexés, par ex : P054).
Programmation
• Régler les paramètres suivant les besoins de l’application.
• L’utilisateur peut faire commuter l'appareil en mode PROGRAM à tout moment, pour
modifier la valeur d’un paramètre et régler le fonctionnement.
• Effectuer la programmation locale de l'appareil avec le programmateur portatif Siemens.
• Pour réaliser la programmation à distance, utiliser un PC équipé du logiciel
SIMATIC PDM, ou un communicateur portable HART.
Programmateur portatif
Touche Mode de programmation
Pour accéder au SITRANS Probe LU
directement, diriger le programmateur Virgule décimale1
vers l’affichage et appuyer sur les
touches correspondantes. (Pour plus de Valeur négative
détails se reporter à la page suivante.)
CLEAR (efface la valeur)
programmateur portable TOGGLE affichage alterné de la valeur du
paramètre, en Unité et %
Quitter le mode PROGRAM et lancer le
affichage mode RUN
Actualiser les paramètres associés à la
qualité de l’écho
max. 600 mm Défilement des paramètres (vers le HAUT)
(2 ft)
Défilement des paramètres (vers le BAS)
AFFICHAGE : ouverture des champs
Paramètres
ENTRER la valeur affichée
1. Appuyer sur suivi du numéro de paramètre (trois

chiffres) pour obtenir l’affichage d’un paramètre
spécifique dans le champ auxiliaire.

Effets des basses températures sur le fonctionnement en
mode RUN/PROGRAM
Une température interne égale ou inférieure à –30 oC (–22 oF) affecte le fonctionnement de
Français
mmmmm
l'appareil en mode RUN et PROGRAM.

L'appareil fonctionne normalement en mode RUN. Quelques exceptions :
• programmateur portatif désactivé
• l’afficheur à cristaux liquides ; limité au bargraphe et à l’indicateur de la fiabilité de l’écho
Mode PROGRAM :
• programmateur portatif désactivé
Sécurité : (P000 : Verrouillage)

Valeur Description
Valeur stockée en P069 * Verrouillage désactivé : programmation autorisée
Autres valeurs Verrouillage activé : modifications interdites
* La valeur par défaut de P069 est 1954. Cette valeur peut être remplacée par une autre valeur
au choix.
Démarrage de l'appareil SITRANS Probe LU

Mettre l'appareil sous tension. Le SITRANS Probe LU démarre en mode RUN.
Notes :
• Pour garantir le fonctionnement optimal du SITRANS Probe LU il est préférable de ne pas
utiliser les ordinateurs, les téléphones portables et les assistants personnels (PDA) à
proximité de l'appareil.
• Ces instructions s’appliquent à l’utilisation du programmateur portatif.
• L'utilisation simultanée du programmateur portatif et de SIMATIC PDM est déconseillée
car elle peut perturber le fonctionnement du radar.
• Appuyer sur PROGRAM et DISPLAY pour accéder au mode PROGRAM et
appuyer sur PROGRAM pour revenir au mode RUN .
• Entrer le numéro de paramètre souhaité, en omettant les zéros. Pour accéder au
paramètre P005 p.ex., entrer 5.

Accès aux paramètres
1. Appuyer sur PROGRAM et DISPLAY , pour Icône PROGRAM
activer Mode PROGRAM.
Français
numéro de
mmmmm
paramètre
2. Utiliser les FLECHES pour accéder à un valeur du
paramètre différent ou : paramètre
3. Appuyer sur AFFICHAGE pour accéder au champ
Numéro de paramètre. valeur courante
4. Entrer le numéro du paramètre souhaité et appuyer sur
ENTER .
5. Exemple : appuyer sur et .
6. On obtient l’affichage du nouveau numéro de
paramètre et de la valeur correspondante.
Pour modifier la valeur d’un paramètre

Notes :
• Pour accéder à la programmation, désactiver la sécurité. Programmer P000 =
Verrouillage désactivé (valeur stockée en P069). (Le paramètre P799 peut autoriser la
modification de la configuration par un appareil maître distant.)
• L'appareil rejette ou limite les valeurs non valides.
• Appuyer sur la touche CLEAR pour effacer le contenu du champ.
1. Entrer la nouvelle valeur.
2. Appuyer sur ENTER pour régler la valeur.
Actualisation du paramètre à la valeur programmée en usine
1. Accéder au paramètre ou entrer l’adresse correspondante.
2. Appuyer sur CLEAR et ENTER . La valeur programmée en usine est restaurée.
Remise à zéro générale (P999)

Restaure la valeur par défaut de tous les paramètres, excepté P000 et P069. (L'appareil
conserve la courbe TVT obtenue.)
1. Appuyer sur PROGRAM , et AFFICHAGE pour activer le mode PROGRAM .
2. Appuyer sur AFFICHAGE pour ouvrir les champs Paramètres.
3. Entrer 999.
4. Appuyer sur CLEAR et ENTER , pour effacer toutes les
valeurs et lancer la remise à zéro. C.ALL.est affiché.
5. Remise à zéro effectuée. (Cette opération prend quelques

secondes.)

Mise en service rapide : étapes 1 à 10
N.B. : Les valeurs par défaut (programmées en usine) sont identifiées par * ci-dessous.
Français
mmmmm
1. Sélectionner une langue (P010 : Langue)

Numérique/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
Aucune P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 English
Valeurs P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Deutsch P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Français P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Español
P007 SPAN MESSSPANNE ETENDUE RANGO
2. Régler P001 : Fonctionnement (mode de mesure)

Notes :
• Le réglage de P001 entraîne la remise à zéro de P007, sauf si une Etendue de mesure a
déjà été programmée.
• La modification de P001 peut entraîner la remise à zéro de la Fonction sortie mA (P201).
Cette règle s’applique à HART uniquement.
Niveau fournit la distance entre le niveau process vide (Vide) et la surface du matériau.
1 * La mesure est fournie en unité volumétrique (en fonction de la programmation des
paramètres 050 à 055).
Valeurs Espace fournit la distance entre le niveau process plein (Etendue) et la surface du
2
matériau.
Distance permet d’obtenir le niveau référencé au point de référence (face émettrice du
3
transducteur).
Sortie analogique (niveau, espace et distance)

Niveau Espace Distance
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
face émettrice du
0%
transducteur (4 mA)
(20 mA) Etendue (4 mA) Etendue
Etendue 100% 0% Distance
Espace
P007
P006
Niveau
Vide Vide
Vide 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Définir le temps de réponse de la mesure (P003)

1 * lent 0,1m/minute
Valeurs 2 moyen 1m/minute
3 rapide 10m/minute
Régler P003 pour obtenir un temps de réponse légèrement supérieur à la vitesse maximale de
remplissage/vidange (soit à la valeur la plus élevée).

4. Sélectionner l’unité de mesure (P005)
1 * mètres
2 centimètres
Français
Valeurs 3 millimètres
mmmmm
4 pieds
5 pouces
5. Définir le niveau process vide (P006 : Vide) Configuration du niveau

face émettrice
N.B. : du transducteur
• P006 et P007 sont des paramètres
conjugués. Se reporter aux Notes étendue 100%
après P007.
P007
Plage de 0,0000 ... 6,000 m (20 ft) ou
mesure 0,0000 ... 12,000 m (40 ft) P006
Valeurs
Valeur par niveau
Etendue maximale
défaut
vide 0%
Le niveau correspondant au 0% peut être réglé au
choix. Il ne doit pas forcément correspondre au
fond de la cuve.
6. Régler l’étendue de mesure (P007 : Etendue)1

Plage de 0,0000 ... 6,000 m (20 ft) ou
mesure 0,0000 ... 12,000 m (40 ft) L’Etendue de mesure correspond à un
Valeurs
Valeur par 5,725 m (18.78 ft) ou niveau au choix, au dessus du Vide.
défaut 11,725 m (38.47 ft)
.
Notes :
• Le réglage de P006 entraîne la remise à zéro de l'Etendue de mesure, sauf si une plage
différente a déjà été programmée.
• Le réglage par défaut de l'Etendue de mesure varie en fonction de P001 (Fonctionnement)
et P006 (Vide). L’étendue de mesure correspond au Vide - 110% de la Zone morte,1, sauf is
l'appareil fonctionne en mode distance (P001=3). Dans ce cas, l'Etendue de mesure
correspond à la distance Vide.
• La surface du matériau ne doit jamais se trouver à moins de 0,3 m (1 ft) de la face
émettrice du transducteur. Ce réglage permet une distance de sécurité de 0,05 m (2") ; 
la distance minimale mesurable étant 0,25 m (10").
7. Réduire les réflexions parasites. Régler P838, Distance de suppression

automatique des échos parasites.
Utiliser les paramètres Plage de mesure Plage maximale :
P838 et P837 ensemble. (en fonction du 0,000 ... 6,000 m (20 ft) ou
Suivre les instructions Valeur
modèle) 0,000 ... 12 m (40 ft)
fournies en P837. Valeur par défaut 1,000 m (3.28 ft)
1. Le réglage par défaut de la zone morte est 0,25 m (10")

8. Activer la Suppression auto. des échos parasites. 
Programmer P837 (Suppression auto. des échos parasites)
0 Off
Français
Valeur 1 * Utiliser la courbe TVT obtenue

mmmmm
2 Obtenir courbe
Utiliser P837 et P838. Le niveau de produit dans la cuve doit être bas.
La courbe TVT (Time Varying Threshold) définit le seuil utilisé pour différencier les échos
parasites des échos réels1. Si le SITRANS Probe LU indique un niveau plein erroné, ou si la
lecture varie entre un niveau haut erroné et un niveau correct, régler P838 et P837 pour «
hausser » la courbe TVT dans la zone correspondante. Cette opération désensibilise le
récepteur, pour ne pas tenir compte des bruits de fond engendrés pas les réflexions internes
(antenne), des échos à l’intérieur de la rehausse ou de tout autre écho parasite dans la cuve2.
. Utilisation des paramètres P837 et P838 (suite)
Notes :
• Utiliser cette fonction uniquement si la distance minimale entre le SITRANS Probe LU et
la surface du produit est de 2 mètres. Il est préférable d’utiliser cette fonction lorsque le
réservoir est vide, ou presque vide.
• Il est préférable de programmer les paramètres P837 et P838 durant la mise en service.
• Si la cuve est équipée d'un agitateur, s’assurer que ce dernier soit en marche.
a. Définir la distance réelle entre la face émettrice du transducteur et la surface du produit

mesuré.
b. Sélectionner P838 et entrer [distance à la surface du produit – 0,5 m].
c. Sélectionner P837, puis appuyer sur 2 (Obtenir) et ENTER . P837 revient
automatiquement à 1 (utiliser la courbe TVT obtenue) après quelques secondes.
9. Revenir au mode RUN.
Appuyer sur PROGRAM pour revenir au mode RUN. fin des réglages.
Communication SITRANS Probe LU : HART

N.B. : Pour plus de détails sur le fonctionnement de la sortie analogique, se reporter à
Sortie analogique (niveau, espace et distance),page 12.
• Vous trouverez des explications détaillées sur les paramètres applicables dans les
• Pour plus de détails sur la description HART du SITRANS Probe LU veuillez contacter
votre representant.
• Nous vous conseillons d’utiliser SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) pour
programmer l'instrument.
Maintenance
Le SITRANS Probe LU ne requiert ni maintenance, ni nettoyage.
Réparation de l'instrument et limite de responsabilité

Pour plus de détails, veuillez vous reporter à la dernière page.
1. L’obstruction du faisceau d’émission peut être à l’origine d’échos parasites.

2. Pour plus de détails sur la Suppression automatique des échos parasites voir les instructions de
service.

SITRANS Probe LU - Manuale di avvio rapido
Questo manuale descrive le funzioni più importanti del SITRANS Probe LU. Si consiglia
all'operatore di leggere le istruzioni operative per ottenere i massimi risultati. La versione
completa delle istruzioni operative è disponibile sul nostro sito web:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Per la versione stampata, rivolgersi al proprio rappresentante di
Siemens.
Per ulteriori informazioni su queste istruzioni, rivolgersi a:
Copyright Siemens
Italiano
Milltronics Process
mmmmm
Clausola di esclusione della responsabilità
Instruments 2013.
Tutti i diritti riservati
Si consiglia agli utenti di acquisire La conformità tra lo stato tecnico dell'apparecchio e il
manuali stampati autorizzati o di contenuto di queste istruzioni è stato verificato; tuttavia,
consultare le versioni elettroniche potrebbero essere riscontrate alcune variazioni.
progettate e realizzate da Non garantiamo pertanto la completa conformità delle
Siemens Milltronics Process istruzioni con l'apparecchio descritto. Si avvisa inoltre
Instruments. Siemens Milltronics che tutti i documenti vengono regolarmente controllati ed
Process Instruments non potrà aggiornati e che le eventuali correzioni vengono incluse
essere ritenuta responsabile per nelle versioni successive. Si invitano gli utenti a
la riproduzione parziale o totale trasmetterci i propri suggerimenti e commenti.
del contenuto delle versioni
stampate o elettroniche. Dati tecnici soggetti a cambiamenti senza alcun
preavviso.
MILLTRONICS è un marchio registrato di Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments.
Indicazioni di sicurezza1
L'apparecchio deve essere usato solo osservando le avvertenze. Un utilizzo non corretto
potrebbe causare danni anche gravi alle persone, sia al prodotto e agli apparecchi ad esso
collegati. Le avvertenze contengono una spiegazione dettagliata del livello di sicurezza da
osservare.
AVVERTENZA: questo simbolo sul prodotto indica che la mancata osservazione

delle precauzioni necessarie può causare morte o gravi lesioni personali nonché
seri danni materiali.
AVVERTENZA1: questo simbolo indica che la mancata osservazione delle
precauzioni necessarie può causare morte o gravi lesioni personali nonché seri
danni materiali.
Nota: le note contengono importanti informazioni sul prodotto o sulla sezione delle
istruzioni operative a cui viene fatto riferimento.
1. Questo simbolo viene usato se sul prodotto non appare il corrispondente simbolo di avvertimento.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MANUALE DI AVVIO RAPIDO Pagina IT-1

SITRANS Probe LU
AVVERTENZA: Ogni cambiamento o modifica non espressamente approvato da
Siemens potrebbe revocare il diritto all'utilizzo dell'apparecchio.
Note:
• Per garantire la protezione il SITRANS Probe LU deve essere utilizzato osservando
le istruzioni e avvertenze contenute in questo manuale.
• Questo apparecchio è stato progettato per l'uso in ambienti industriali. L’uso di
questo apparecchio in zone residenziali può causare disturbi a diverse
comunicazioni radiofoniche.
SITRANS Probe LU è un misuratore di livello continuo a circuito alimentato a due fili, che
Italiano
utilizza una avanzata tecnologia ultrasonica. L'apparecchiatura è formata da un componente

mmmmm
elettronico collegato ad un trasduttore e un attacco al processo.

Il misuratore di livello è dotato di un trasduttore di ETFE (tetrafluoretilene) o PVDF (polifluoruro
di vinilidene). Questo consente di utilizzare SITRANS Probe LU in una vasta gamma di
applicazioni, anche con prodotti chimici.
Il trasduttore è dotato di un sensore di temperatura che consente di compensare le variazioni
di temperatura nell'applicazione.
Per la trasmissione, l'apparecchio utilizza il sistema HART1 e i segnali vengono elaborati con
Sonic Intelligence®.
Specifiche tecniche
Il dati tecnici completi sono descritti nel manuale di istruzioni SITRANS Probe LU. Per
informazioni sulle certificazioni, consultare la targhetta sull'apparecchio.
Temperatura ambientale/di funzionamento

Nota: Le caratteristiche relative a temperatura di funzionamento e pressione sono
riportate nella targhetta dell'apparecchio. L'illustrazione di riferimento citata su tale
targhetta può essere scaricata direttamente dal sito Siemens. Consultare la pagina
prodotto: www.siemens.com/probelu.
programmatore portatile
targhetta
dell'apparecchio
temperatura ambientale sulla
custodia: adattatore per flangia
da –40 a +80 °C (da –40 a +176 °F)
flangia in
dotazione
temperatura di esercizio:
da –40 a +85 °C (da –40 a +185 °F)
1. HART® è un marchio registrato della HART Communication Foundation.
Pagina IT-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MANUALE DI AVVIO RAPIDO A5E32168031

Alimentazione
Nominale 24 V CC a 550 Ohm max. Per ulteriori informazioni consultare le istruzioni
operative.
• Massima 30 V DC
• 4 ... 20 mA
Certificazioni
• Generali: CSAUSA/Canada, FM, CE
• Zone a rischio esplosione
Sicurezza intrinseca (Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(USA/Canada) FM/CSA: (richiede barriera)1
Classe I, Div. 1, Gruppi A, B, C, D
Italiano
Classe II, Div. 1, Gruppi E, F, G
Classe III T4
(Internazionale) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brasile) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Non-incendivo (USA) FM: 2
Classe I, Div. 2, Gruppi A, B, C, D T5
• Marittima 
Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
Certificato tipo ABS (American Bureau of Shipping)
Nota: Le applicazioni esterne tipo 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 richiedono
l'impiego di pressacavi e guarnizioni a tenuta stagna alla polvere e all'acqua.
1.
Vedi FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing pagina 1 , Appendice A, per l'illustrazione di riferimento
23650516, o CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing pagina 2 Appendice A, per l'illustrazione di
riferimento 23650517.
2. Vedi FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing pagina 3 Appendice A, illustrazione n. 23650583.

Installazione
AVVERTENZE:
• I materiali di composizione vengono scelti in base alla compatibilità chimica (o
inerzia) per uso generico. Per l'esposizione in ambienti specifici, verificare il grafico
della compatibilità chimica prima di procedere all'installazione.
• Questo apparecchio funziona in modo appropriato e sicuro solo se trasportato,
custodito, installato, impostato e conservato in modo corretto.
• L'utente è responsabile della selezione dei materiali quali bulloni o guarnizioni che
consentano di rispettare i limiti e l'uso appropriato della flangia e che siano
adeguati alle condizioni di servizio.
Nota: L'installazione deve essere eseguita esclusivamente da personale qualificato e in
conformità con le normative locali correnti.
Italiano
mmmmm
Posizione di montaggio
Raccomandazioni:
• Assicurarsi che la temperatura ambientale sia compresa tra –40 e +80 °C (–40 e +176 °F).
• Installare l'apparecchio in modo da ottenere un accesso facilitato al display, per la
visualizzazione e il controllo nonché per la programmazione tramite il programmatore
portatile.
• Scegliere un'ambiente idoneo alle caratteristiche e ai materiali di composizione della
custodia dell'apparecchiatura.
• Assicurarsi che il percorso del segnale a ultrasuoni sia perpendicolare alla superficie del
materiale.
Precauzioni:
• Evitare di installare l'apparecchio in prossimità di fili elettrici o cavi ad alta tensione, di
contatti ad alta tensione e di controller di velocità motori a frequenza variabile.
• Evitare interferenze al cono di trasmissione del sensore, causate da ostruzioni o dal
flusso di carico.
Il cono di emissione dovrà Flusso di carico
essere:
• perpendicolare alla
superficie del
prodotto misurato
tubo
• posizionato a
un'adeguata scale
distanza dalla parete
del serbatoio e da
giunzioni/
asperità, cordoni di
saldature 10°
saldatura, e altre
sporgenze
• lontano dal flusso di
carico

Istruzioni di montaggio
Nota: I risultati ottimali di misura si ottengono rispettando la distanza minima di
montaggio del SITRANS Probe LU dal massimo livello del prodotto (300 mm (1 ft) .
SITRANS Probe LU è disponibile con tre tipi di filettature: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, o PF2/G.
1. Prima di inserire il livellostato SITRANS Probe LU nell’attacco di collegamento, verificare
la corrispondenza delle filettature onde evitare di danneggiarle.
2. E' sufficente avvitare l'apparecchio SITRANS Probe LU sull'attacco di processo e
stringere manualmente.
Collegamento elettrico
Alimentazione1
Italiano
mmmmm
AVVERTENZE:
I terminali CC devono essere alimentati da una fonte SELV 1 in conformità con la
direttiva IEC-1010-1 Allegato H.
Tutti i collegamenti elettrici di campo devono disporre di adeguato isolamento

per le tensioni di esercizio.
Collegamenti SITRANS Probe LU

Note: viti coperchio
• Ulteriori informazioni sull'eliminazione coperchio a
automatica di echi falsi sono riportate cerniera
nelle istruzioni operative.
• Utilizzare cavo bifilare schermato/
intrecciato (calibro 22 AWG - 14 AWG
(0,34 mm2 - 2,08 mm2).
• Potrà essere necessario separare i cavi e
conduit in conformità con le procedure
standard di cablaggio della
strumentazione o con codici locali per
materiali elettrici. raccordo pressacavo
• La custodia non metallica non fornisce un filettato stagno
collegamento a terra continuo tra i
conduttori. Utilizzare pertanto boccole e
ponticelli di messa a terra.
1. SELV (bassissima tensione di sicurezza)

1. Rimuovere il rivestimento del cavo per circa morsetti per A
70 mm (2.75") partendo dall'estremità, quindi corrente del m
loop
passare i fili attraverso il serracavo1.
2. Collegare i fili con gli appositi morsetti seguendo
il diagramma: la polarità viene indicata sul blocco
terminale.
3. Avvitare il pressacavo per garantire la tenuta
disposizione
stagna. cavi
4. Chiudere il coperchio della custodia e riavvitare
le viti. Non serrare le viti a fondo. Torsione
(coppia) consigliata 1,1 - 1,7 N-m (10 - 15 in-lb).
.
1
Possibilità di cablaggio per installazioni in zone pericolose

L'importante in ogni caso è di controllare le certificazioni riportate sulla targhetta
Italiano
dell'apparecchio e sull'apposita etichetta.

1. Cablaggio intrinsecamente sicuro
Targhetta apparecchio (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
Il certificato ATEX è scaricabile dalla pagina prodotto del nostro sito internet:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Rubrica Support > Approvals / Certificates.
Il certificato IECEx riportato sulla targhetta dell'apparecchio è disponibile sul sito internet
IECEx. Vedi: http://iecex.iec.ch e cliccare su Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity poi
digitare il numero di certificato IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Targhetta apparecchio (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
Diagramma di cablaggio sicurezza intrinseca FM, numero 23650516 e diagramma di

cablaggio sicurezza intrinseca CSA, numero 23650517 sono disponibili sulla pagina prodotto
del nostro sito web: www.siemens.com/probelu. Vedi Support > Installation Drawings >
Level Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• Per informazioni sull'alimentazione necessaria vedi Loop Voltage versus Loop
Resistance pagina 4.
• Per informazioni sul cablaggio: attenersi alle prescrizioni vigenti.
• Le applicazioni esterne tipo Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 richie-
dono l’impiego di pressacavi e guarnizioni a tenuta stagna alla polvere e all’acqua.
• Consultare Istruzioni specifiche per aree potenzialmente esplosive (Direttiva
Europea ATEX 94/9/CE, Allegato II, 1/0/6) pagina 7.
1. Se il cavo viene inserito in un tubo protettivo o conduit, utilizzare un pressatubo di dimensioni adatte
per garantire la tenuta stagna.

2. Cablaggio non incendivo (solo FM/USA)
Il diagramma di collegamento FM Classe 1, Div 2 numero 23650583 è disponibile sulla pagina

prodotto nel nostro sito internet: www.siemens.com/probelu. Vedi Support > Installation
Drawings > Level Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• Per informazioni sull'alimentazione necessaria vedi Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
pagina 4, Appendice A.
Istruzioni specifiche per aree potenzialmente esplosive
Italiano
(Direttiva Europea ATEX 94/9/CE, Allegato II, 1/0/6)
Le seguenti istruzioni riguardano il SITRANS Probe LU contrassegnato dal numero di
certificato SIRA 06ATEX2355X:
1. Per ulteriori informazioni sull'uso e l'assemblaggio, consultare le istruzioni operative.
2. L'apparecchio è certificato per l'uso come dispositivo di Categoria 1G.
3. L'apparecchiatura può essere utilizzata in atmosfere potenzialmente esplosive composte
da gas o vapori pericolosi, con dispositivi del Gruppo IIA, IIB e IIC, classi di temperatura
T1, T2, T3 e T4.
4. Questo apparecchio certificado resiste a temperature ambientali tra –40 C e +80 C.
5. Questa apparecchiatura non è stata definita dispositivo di sicurezza nell'ambito della
direttiva 94/9/CE Allegato II, clausola 1,5.
6. L'installazione e l'ispezione di questi dispositivi devono essere eseguite da personale
qualificato in conformità con le normative locali correnti (EN 60079-14 e EN 60079-17 in
Europa).
7. Le riparazioni di questo dispositivo devono essere eseguite in conformità con i codici di
procedura applicabili (esempio: EN 60079-19 in Europa).
8. I componenti incorporati nel dispositivo o utilizzati per sostituire altre parti dovranno
essere installati da personale qualificato in conformità con le instruzioni contenute nella
documentazione fornita dal fabbricante.
9. L'utente deve garantire la possibilità di intervento manuale per mettere fuori uso il
dispositivo e i sistemi di protezione incorporati in processi automatici che deviano dalle
condizioni operative interessate a condizione che ciò non comprometta la sicurezza.
10. Il suffisso ‘X’ del numero di certificato si riferisce alle condizioni speciali per l'uso sicuro:
Parti della custodia possono essere non conduttive e generare un livello di
carica elettrostatica innescabile in particolari condizioni estreme. L'utente
deve assicurarsi che l'apparecchiatura non venga installata in un luogo in cui
potrebbe essere soggetto a condizioni esterne (vapore ad alta pressione) che
potrebbero causare un accumulo di carica elettrostatica sulle superfici non
conduttive.

11. Se esiste la possibilità che l'apparecchio entri in contatto con sostanze aggressive,
l'utente è responsabile ed è tenuto a prendere le debite precauzioni in modo da evitare
che essa venga danneggiata, assicurandosi pertanto che non venga compromesso il tipo
di protezione.
Esempi di sostanze aggressive: liquidi o gas acidi in grado di attaccare e corrodere
metalli, o solventi in grado di danneggiare materiali
polimerici.
Precauzioni consigliate: ad es. controlli regolari durante le ispezioni di
routine, consultazione delle specifiche dei materiali
relative alla resistenza a sostanze chimiche
specifiche.
12. Marcatura dell'apparecchio:
La marcatura dell'apparecchio dovrà contenere almeno le informazioni fornite sulla
targhetta dell'apparecchiatura, riportate sulla copertina iniziale di questo manuale.
Italiano
mmmmm
Funzionamento
Modo RUN e Modo PROGRAM
SITRANS ProbeLR dispone di due modalità di funzionamento: RUN e PROGRAM.
L'apparecchio SITRANS Probe LU si avvia automaticamente in modo RUN e misura il livello del
prodotto. Il valore di misura principale è la distanza misurata (in metri) al livello di materiale,
misurata dal Vuoto (livello processo vuoto). Questo è il modo di avvio predefinito.
Lo stato di funzionamento dell'apparecchio viene fornito dall'indicatore LCD incorporato o da
un'indicatore esterno.
Display nel modo RUN

Utilizzare il programmatore portatile per controllare il display.
12
Funzionamento normale Funzionamento fail-safe
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Valore di misura principale (visualizza livello, distanza o volume 1, in unità di misura o

percentuale).
2 – Lettura secondaria (visualizza il numero di parametro per la lettura ausiliaria2)
3– Indicatore stato eco: Eco attendibile o Eco inattendibile
4– Unità o Percentuale
5– Grafico a barre attivo (rappresenta il livello del materiale)
6– Lettura ausiliaria (in base al parametro selezionato, è possibile visualizzare il valore in
milliAmp, la distanza o l'attendibilità dell'eco, in unità di misura se applicabili)
1. Il parametro P050 viene utilizzato per determinare la portata invece del volume. Per ulteriori
informazioni consultare le istruzioni operative.
2.
Premere per visualizzare la lettura ausiliaria in modo RUN.

Se l'attendibilità dell'eco scende al di sotto della soglia di affidabilità dell'eco, si attiva il timer
di autoeliminazione degli errori. Quando il timer si disattiva, le lettere LOE (Loss of Echo,
perdita eco) si alternano alla lettura ogni due secondi e l'indicatore eco attendibile viene
sostituito da quello di eco inattendibile. Quando l'apparecchio riceve una lettura valida, il
display di lettura del livello torna al funzionamento normale.
Visualizzazione in modo PROGRAM

2 3 1 – Lettura primaria (visualizza il valore del parametro)
2 – Lettura secondaria (visualizza il numero del parametro)
1
3 – Indicatore di programmazione
4 4 – Lettura ausiliaria (visualizza i nomi dei parametri da P001
a P010, se è stata selezionata una lingua. Visualizza il
valore indice dei parametri indicizzati, ad esempio P054).
Italiano
Programmazione
mmmmm
• Impostare i parametri in base all'applicazione specifica.
• Attivare il modo PROGRAM in qualsiasi momento, per modificare i valori dei parametri e
per impostare le condizioni di funzionamento.
• Per la programmazione locale, utilizzare il programmatore portatile Siemens.
• Per la programmazione a distanza, è possibile utilizzare un PC con software
SIMATIC PDM o un programmatore portatile HART.
Programmatore portatile
Per l'accesso diretto a SITRANS Tasto Modo program
Probe LU, puntare il programmatore
verso il display del SITRANS Probe LU Virgola decimale1
e premere i tasti. (Per istruzioni
dettagliate consultare la pagina Valore negativo
successiva.)
CLEAR per cancellare il valore
programmatore portatile TOGGLE per passare da Unità di misura a % sul
valore di un parametro
Per finire la sessione PROGRAM e attivare il
display modo RUN
Per aggiornare i parametri qualitativi dell'eco
max. 600 mm Scorrimento dei parametri verso l'alto

(2 ft)
Scorrimento dei parametri verso il basso
DISPLAY per aprire i campi di parametri
ENTER per confermare il valore visualizzato
1. Premere e un numero di parametro a tre cifre per

impostare il parametro e visualizzare la lettura ausiliaria.

Effetto delle temperature basse sulle modalità di
funzionamento RUN/PROGRAM
Se la temperatura interna scende a –30 oC (–22 oF) o meno, influisce su entrambe le modalità
RUN e PROGRAM.
L'apparecchio funzionerà normalmente nel modo RUN, con le seguenti eccezioni:
• il programmatore portatile viene disattivato
• il display LCD indica solo alcuni dati: il grafico a barre e l'indicatore eco attendibile/
inattendibile
Modo PROGRAM :
• il programmatore portatile viene disattivato
Protezione: (P000: Blocco)

Italiano
mmmmm
Valore Descrizione
Valore memorizzato in P069 * Blocco disattivato: programmazione consentita
altro Blocco attivato: modifiche non consentite
* L'impostazione di fabbrica per P069 è 1954: il nuovo valore immesso e accettato diventa il
valore predefinito.
Attivazione del SITRANS Probe LU

Collegare l'apparecchio all'alimentazione. SITRANS Probe LU viene avviato nel modo RUN.
Note:
• E' opportuno posizionare il SITRANS Probe LU lontano da dispositivi a raggi infrarossi
quali laptop, telefoni cellulari e computer palmari onde evitare operazioni involontarie.
• Le istruzioni che seguono si riferiscono all'utilizzo del calibratore portatile.
• Non utilizzare il calibratore portatile e SIMATIC PDM contemporaneamente, onde evitare
problemi di funzionamento.
• Premere PROGRAM e DISPLAY per accedere al modo PROGRAM, e premere
PROGRAM per accedere nuovamente al modo RUN.
• Non è necessario digitare gli zeri iniziali durante l'immissione di un numero di parametro:
ad esempio, per P005, digitare 5.

Accesso ad un parametro
1. Premere PROGRAM quindi DISPLAY , per
Modo PROGRAM
attivare Modo PROGRAM.
2. Per accedere a un parametro diverso, utilizzare i tasti Numero parametro

Valore parametro
freccia oppure:
3. Premere DISPLAY per aprire il campo del numero
di parametro. Valore attuale
4. Digitare il numero di parametro desiderato, quindi
premere ENTER .
5. Esempio: premere e .
6. Il display a cristalli liquidi visualizza il nuovo numero e il
Italiano
valore di parametro.
mmmmm
Modifica di un valore di parametro
Note:
• La protezione deve essere disattivata in modo da consentire la programmazione:
impostare P000 sul valore sblocatto memorizzato in P069. (La configurazione puo' ancora
essere modificata da un master remoro se P799 è impostato correttamente.)
• Le immissioni non valide vengono rifiutate o limitate.
• Con CLEAR si cancellano i valori visualizzati.
1. Digitare il nuovo valore.
2. Premere ENTER per impostare il valore.
Reset dei valori dei parametri preimpostati
1. Scorrere fino al parametro desiderato oppure digitarne l'indirizzo.
2. Premere CLEAR quindi ENTER . Il valore torna all'impostazione predefinita in
fabbrica.
Reset generale (P999)

Consente il ripristino dei valori predefiniti ad eccezione di P000 e P069. (Non cancella la curva
TVT acquisita.)
1. Premere PROGRAM , quindi DISPLAY per attivare il modo PROGRAM .
2. Premere DISPLAY per aprire i campi dei parametri.
3. Digitare 999.
4. Premere CLEAR quindi ENTER , per cancellare tutti i
valori e avviare l'azzeramento. Il display visualizza C.ALL.
5. Reset completato. (La sequenza di ripristino richiede alcuni

secondi.)

Configurazione rapida: tappe 1 - 10
Nota: I valori preimpostati (valori di fabbrica) sono contrassegnati da un asterisco (*) nelle
tabelle.
1. Selezione della lingua (P010: Lingua)

Numerico/Non ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
applicabile P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Inglese
Valori P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Tedesco P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Francese P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Spagnolo
Italiano

mmmmm
2. Impostare P001: Funzionamento (modo misurazione)

Note:
• Impostando P001 viene reimpostato P007, a meno che Intervallo di misura non sia stato
precedentemente impostato su un altro valore.
• La modifica di P001 puo' provocare il ripristino della funzione di output (P201), ma solo con
HART.
Livello riporta la distanza al livello del materiale, misurata dal Vuoto (livello processo
1 * vuoto). La lettura viene riportata in unità volumetriche se le impostazioni dei parametri da
050 a 055 lo consentono.
Valori Spazio riporta la distanza al livello del materiale, misurata dall'Intervallo di misura (livello
2
processo pieno).
Distanza riporta la distanza al livello del materiale dal piano di riferimento (parte
3
anteriore del trasduttore).
Uscita analogica in mA con Livello, Spazio e Distanza

Livello Spazio Distanza
parte frontale (P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
del trasduttore 0%
Intervallo (4 mA)
(20 mA) Intervallo (4 mA) Intervallo
di misura 100% 0% Distanza
di misura di misura
Spazio
P007
P006
Livello
Vuoto Vuoto
Vuoto 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Impostazione della Risposta di misurazione (P003)

1 * lento 0,1m/minuto
Valori 2 medio 1m/minuto
3 veloce 10m/minuto
Impostare P003 per ottenere una risposta leggermente superiore alla velocità massima di
riempimento o svuotamento (in base al valore piu' alto).

4. Selezione unità di misura (P005)
1 * metri
2 centimetri
Valori 3 millimetri
4 piedi
5 pollici
5. Impostazione del livello di vuoto del Impostazione Livello

processo (P006: Vuoto) parte frontale
del trasduttore
Nota: Intervallo di
• I parametri P006 e P007 sono collegati: misura
100%
vedi note, P007.
Italiano
P007
0,0000 a 6,000 m (20 ft) o
mmmmm
Scala P006
Valori 0,0000 a 12,000 m (40 ft)
Preimpostato Valore massimo Livello
Il livello di vuoto puo' essere impostato da qualsiasi Vuoto 0%

distanza: non necessariamente dal fondo del
serbatoio.
6. Impostazione del campo di misura (P007: Intervallo di misura)1
Scala
0,0000 a 6,000 m (20 ft) o L'Intervallo di misura (Span) può essere
0,0000 a 12,000 m (40 ft) impostato a qualsiasi distanza al di
Valori
5,725 m (18.78 ft) o sopra del livello Vuoto.
Preimpostato
11.725 m (38.47 ft)
.
Note:
• Impostando P006 viene reimpostato Intervallo di misura, a meno che non sia stato
precedentemente impostato su un altro valore.
• L'impostazione predefinita dell'Intervallo di misura è basata sui valori di Funzionamento
(P001) et Vuoto (P006). L'Intervallo di misura è impostato su Vuoto - 110% della Zona
morta1, a meno che il Modo di funzionamento non sia impostato su Distanza (P001=3). In
questo caso, l'Intervallo di misura viene impostato sulla distanza di Vuoto.
• Evitare che la superficie monitorata si trovi ad una distanza inferiore a 0,3 m (1 ft) dalla
parte frontale del sensore. Questo consente un margine di sicurezza di 0,05 m (2"), dato
che la distanza minima rilevabile è 0,25 m (10").
7. Minimizzazione di echi falsi (di disturbo) Impostare P838 (Distanza di

soppressione automatica di echi falsi)
Utilizzare contemporanea- Valore massimo:
Scala
mente P838 e P837: 0,000 a 6,000 m (20 ft) o
(dipende dal modello)
seguire le istruzioni fornite Valore 0,000 a 12 m (40 ft)
con P837. Preimpostato 1,000 m (3.28 ft)
1. L'impostazione predefinita della Zona morta è 0,25 m (10").

8. Eliminazione automatica echi falsi (Auto False Echo Suppression) impostare
P837 (eliminazione automatica echi falsi).
0 Off
Valore 1 * Utilizzare la curva TVT ottenuta
2 Ottenere curva
P837 e P838 (da eseguire quando il livello di prodotto nel serbatoio è basso)
La soglia dinamina TVT (Time Varying Threshold) consente l'esclusione automatica di echi
falsi1. Se il SITRANS Probe LU visualizza un livello pieno errato, o se si osservano grandi
variazioni di livello (livello pieno/livello corretto) è consigliabile utilizzare P838 e P837
contemporaneamente per elevare la curva TVT (Time Varying Threshold) e desensibilizzare il
ricevitore da fenomeni sonori provocati da cattive riflessioni nel trasduttore, sporgenze del
tronchetto o falsi echi nel serbatoio2.
P837 e P838 (segue)
Italiano
.
mmmmm
Note:
• Questa funzione va usata solo se si rispetta la distanza minima di 2 metri tra il SITRANS
Probe LU e il livello del materiale. Utilizzare questa funzione quando il serbatoio è vuoto,
o quasi vuoto.
• E' consigliabile impostare P837 e P838 durante l'avvio dell'apparecchio.
• Eventuali dispositivi per la miscelazione di materiali nel serbatoio dovranno essere in
funzione.
a. Determinare la distanza tra la parte frontale del sensore e il livello del materiale.
b. Selezionare P838 e digitare [distanza al livello del materiale – 0,5 m].
c. Selezionare P837, premere 2 (Ottenere) e ENTER . P837 ritorna automaticamente a 1
(curva TVT ottenuta) dopo qualche secondo.
9. Ritorno al modo RUN
Premere PROGRAM per tornare al modo RUN: l'impostazione è terminata.
Comunicazione SITRANS Probe LU: HART

Nota: Vedi Uscita analogica in mA con Livello, Spazio e Distanza, pagina pagina 12 per
l'uscita analogica ottenuta a seconda dei diversi modi operativi.
• E' necessario consultare il manuale d'uso integrale per ottenere la lista di tutti i parametri.
• Per maggiori informazioni sulla disponibilità del file HART DD per SITRANS Probe LU vi
preghiamo di consultare il proprio rappresentante.
• Si consiglia di utilizzare SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) per programmare
l'apparecchio.
Manutenzione
Il SITRANS Probe LU non richiede interventi di manutenzione o pulizia.
Riparazione dell'apparecchio ed esclusione di responsabilità
Per ulteriori informazioni consultare la copertina finale di questo documento.
1. I falsi echi possono essere provocati da ostacoli e interferenze nella propagazione dell'impulso
sonoro.
2. Ulteriori informazioni sull'eliminazione automatica di echi falsi sono riportate nelle istruzioni operative.

SITRANS Probe LU Quick Start Handleiding
Deze handleiding beschrijft de belangrijkste kenmerken en functies van de SITRANS Probe LU. Wij
raden u sterk aan de uitgebreide versie van de handleiding te verwerven zodat u uw instrument zo
optimaal mogelijk kunt gebruiken. De volledige handleiding is beschikbaar op onze website: 
www.siemens.com/probelu. De gedrukte handleiding is verkrijgbaar via uw Siemens
vertegenwoordiging.
Vragen omtrent de inhoud van deze handleiding kunnen worden gericht aan:
Auteursrecht Siemens Milltronics
Process Instruments 2013. Disclaimer
Alle rechten voorbehouden
Wij raden gebruikers aan geautoriseerde, Hoewel we de inhoud van deze gebruikershandlei-
ingebonden gebruikershandleidingen te ding hebben geverifieerd aan de omschreven instru-
kopen, of om de elektronische versies te mentatie, kunnen desondanks afwijkingen
raadplegen, zoals ontworpen en voorkomen. Wij kunnen derhalve niet een volledige
goedgekeurd door Siemens Milltronics overeenstemming garanderen. De inhoud van deze
Process Instruments. Siemens Milltronics handleiding wordt regelmatig herzien, en correcties
Process Instruments is niet aansprakelijk worden opgenomen in volgende uitgaven. Wij
voor de inhoud van gedeeltelijk, of geheel houden ons aanbevolen voor suggesties ter verbeter-
Nederlands
gekopieerde versies, gebonden of elek- ing.
tronisch. Technische gegevens kunnen worden gewijzigd.
mmmmm
MILLTRONICS is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Veiligheidsrichtlijnen1
Waarschuwingsmeldingen moeten worden aangehouden om de eigen veiligheid en die van
anderen te waarborgen en om het product en de aangesloten apparatuur te beschermen.
Deze waarschuwingsmeldingen gaan vergezeld met een verduidelijking van de mate van
voorzichtigheid die moet worden aangehouden.
Waarschuwing: heeft betrekking op een waarschuwingssymbool op het product

en betekent dat het niet aanhouden van de noodzakelijke voorzorgsmaatregelen
kan leiden tot ernstig of dodelijk letsel en/of aanzienlijke materiële schade.
WAARSCHUWING1: betekent dat het niet aanhouden van de noodzakelijke
voorzorgsmaatregelen kan leiden tot ernstig of dodelijk letsel en/of aanzienlijke
materiële schade.
Opmerking: geeft belangrijke informatie aan over het product of dat deel van de
gebruikershandleiding.
1. Dit waarschuwingssymbool wordt gebruikt wanneer er geen corresponderend

waarschuwingssymbool op het product aanwezig is.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START HANDLEIDING Pagina NL-1

SITRANS Probe LU
WAARSCHUWING: wijzigingen of modificaties die niet uitdrukkelijk zijn
goedgekeurd door Siemens kunnen de toestemming om de apparatuur te
bedienen ongeldig maken.
Opmerkingen:
• De SITRANS Elektrode LU mag uitsluitend worden gebruikt op de manier zoals
beschreven in deze handleiding, anders kan de bescherming die deze apparatuur
biedt in gevaar komen.
• Dit product is bedoeld voor gebruik in industriegebieden. Bij gebruik in
woongebieden kunnen er storingen van verschillende radiografische toepassingen
ontstaan.
SITRANS Probe LU is een loop-gevoede continue niveausensor, die gebruikt maakt van
geavanceerde ultrasone technieken. De eenheid bestaat uit een elektrisch component,
gekoppeld aan de antenne en procesaansluiting.
De antenne is leverbaar in ETFE (ethyleen-tetrafluor-ethyleen) of PVDF (polyvinylideen
fluoride), waardoor de SITRANS Probe LU kan worden gebruikt in een breed scala sectoren en
toepassingen waarbij corrosieve chemicaliën worden gebruikt.
De ultrasone meetversterker bevat een temperatuurelement om de temperatuurveranderingen
in de toepassing te compenseren.
Nederlands
Communicatie via HART1, en signalen worden verwerkt m.b.v. Sonic Intelligence®.

mmmmm
Specificaties
Raadpleeg de SITRANS Probe LU gebruikershandleiding voor een volledig overzicht.
Raadpleeg het typeplaatje van het instrument voor de Goedkeuringen.
Omgevings-/bedrijfstemperatuur
Opmerking: procestemperatuur en drukspecificaties zijn afhankelijk van informatie op
het typeplaatje van het product. De referentietekening, zoals vermeld op het
typeplaatje, kan worden gedownload van de Siemens website;
Handprogrammeereenheid
Product typeplaatje
Omgevingstemperatuur rond
behuizing: Flensadapter
–40 tot +80 °C (–40 tot +176 °F)
Door klant
geleverde flens
Procestemperatuur:
–40 tot +85 °C (–40 tot +185 °F)
1. HART ® is een geregistreerd handelsmerk van de HART Communications Foundation.
Pagina NL-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START HANDLEIDING A5E32168031

Voeding
Nominaal 24 V DC bij max. 550 Ohm: Raadpleeg de volledige handleiding voor andere
configuraties
• Maximum 30 V DC
• 4 tot 20 mA
Goedkeuringen
• Algemeen CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Explosiegevaarlijk Intrinsiekveilig (Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(US/Canada) FM/CSA: (Zenerbarrière verreist)1
Klasse I, Div. 1, Groepen A, B, C, D
Klasse II, Div. 1, Groepen E, F, G
Klasse IIIT4
(Internationaal) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brazilië) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
Nederlands
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Niet brandver- (US) FM2:
oozakend Klasse I, Div. 2, Groepen A, B, C, D T5
ABS typegoedkeuring
Opmerking: goedgekeurde stofdichte en waterdichte doorvoerafdichtingen zijn vereist

voor buiten type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locaties.
1. Zie FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing op pagina 1 van Appendix A, tekeningnr. 23650516, of
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing op pagina 2 van Appendix A, tekeningnr. 23650517.
2. Zie FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing op pagina 3 van Appendix A, tekeningnr. 23650583.

Installatie
WAARSCHUWINGEN:
• Constructiematerialen zijn gekozen op basis van hun chemische compatibiliteit (of
inertheid) voor algemene doeleinden. Controleer voor blootstelling aan specifieke
omgevingen, de chemische bestendigheidslijsten, voorafgaande aan de installatie.
• Dit product kan uitsluitend correct en veilig werken wanneer het correct wordt
getransporteerd, opgeslagen, geïnstalleerd, ingesteld, bediend en onderhouden.
• De gebruiker is verantwoordelijk voor het kiezen van bevestingingsmateriaal en
pakkingen. Deze moeten binnen de flensmaat vallen, voldoen aan het bedoelde
gebruik en geschikt zijn voor de bedrijfsomstandigheden.
Opmerking: de installatie mag uitsluitend worden uitgevoerd door gekwalificeerd
personeel en in overeenstemming met lokale regelgeving.
Installatielocatie
Aanbevelingen:
• Omgevingstemperatuur binnen bereik –40 tot +80 °C (–40 tot +176 °F).
• Gemakkelijke toegang om het display te bekijken en voor programmering via de
handprogrammeereenheid.
• Een omgeving die geschikt is voor de beschermingsklasse van de behuizing en de
gebruikte constructiematerialen.
• Houd het meetpad haaks op het materiaaloppervlak.
Nederlands
Voorzorgsmaatregelen:
mmmmm
• Vermijd nabijheid van hoogspanningsbekabeling, contacten met hoge spanningen of

stromen en frequentie-omvormers.
• Voorkom interferentie in de ultrasone bundel als gevolg van obstructies in de vulstroom
Vullen
Het pad van de ultrasone
bundel moet:
• haaks staan op het
bewaakte oppervlak leiding
• vrij zijn van ruwe
wanden, naden, sporten
laddersporten of
andere obstructies naden
• buiten de vulstroom 10°
vallen

Montage-instructies
Opmerking: monteer de SITRANS Probe LU idealiter zo dat het oppervlak van de
antenne tenminste 300 mm (1 ft.) boven het hoogste te verwachten niveau ligt.
SITRANS Probe LU is beschikbaar in drie schroefdraaduitvoeringen: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, of PF2/G.
1. Zorg er vóór het aanbrengen van de SITRANS Probe LU in de montage-aansluiting voor,
dat de schroefdraadaansluitingen van hetzelfde type zijn zodat ze niet beschadigd raken.
2. Schroef de SITRANS Probe LU gewoon in de procesaansluiting, handvast aandraaien.
Bedrading
Voeding1
WAARSCHUWINGEN:
DC klemmen moeten worden gevoed vanuit een voedingsbron 1 , conform IEC-
1010-1 Annex H.
Alle veldbekabeling moet zijn voorzien van een isolatie die geschikt is voor
nominale spanningen.
Aansluiten SITRANS Probe LU

Opmerkingen: deksel-
Nederlands
• Raadpleeg de uitgebreide handleiding schroeven
voor gedetailleerde informatie over de scharnierend
mmmmm
intrinsiekveilige instelling. deksel
• Gebruik afgeschermde, twisted pair kabel
(draaddikte AWG 22 tot AWG 14/0,34 mm2
tot 2,08 mm2).
• Er kunnen aparte kabels en doorvoeren 1
nodig zijn om te voldoen aan de standaard
instrumentatie bekabelingsnormen of
elektrische regelgeving.
• De niet-metalen behuizing biedt geen con- waterdichte
schroefdraad-
tinue aarding tussen doorvoeraansluitin- aansluiting
wartel
gen: Gebruik aardende bussen en jumpers.

1. Strip de kabelmantel over een lengte van
aansluit-
ongeveer 70 mm (2.75") vanaf het einde van de klemmen m
A
kabel en voer de draden door de wartel.1

2. Sluit de draden aan op de klemmen zoals
hierboven aangegeven: de polariteit wordt
aangegeven op de aansluitklemmen.
3. Draai de wartel aan om een goede afdichting te
vormen.
4. Sluit het deksel en draai de schroeven aan: de kabel
schroeven niet te strak aandraaien. Aanbevolen
koppel is 1.1 tot 1.7 N-m (10 tot 15 in-lb).
Bedradingsconfiguratie voor installaties in explosiegevaarlijke zones

Controleer altijd de typeplaat van het instrument en de procestypeplaat, om de toelatingen te
verifiëren.
1. Intrinsiekveilige bekabeling
Apparaat typeplaatje (ATEX/IECEx/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
II 1 G
Nederlands
SITRANS Probe LU Ii = 120 mA

Het ATEX certificaat kan worden gedownload vanaf de productpagina van onze website op:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Ga naar Support > Approvals / Certificates.
Het IECEx certificaat vermeld op de naamplaat kan worden bekeken op de IECEx website.
Ga naar: http://iecex.iec.ch en klik op Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity en voer
vervolgens het certificaatnummer IECEx SIR 13.0008X in.
Apparaat typeplaatje (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
FM intrinsiekveilige aansluiting tekeningnummer 23650516, en CSA intrinsiekveilige

aansluiting tekeningnummer 23650517 kunnen worden gedownload vanaf de productpagina
van onze website op: www.siemens.com/probelu. Ga naar Support > Installation Drawings
> Level Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• Voor voedingsvereisten zie Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance op pagina 4.
• Voor bedradingsvereisten: volg de lokale regelgeving.
• Goedgekeurde stofdichte en waterdichte doorvoerafdichtingen zijn vereist voor
buiten type 4X / NEMA 4X, type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locaties.
• Raadpleeg Instructies speciaal voor installaties in explosiegevaarlijke zones
(Raadpleeg de Europese ATEX richtlijn 94/9/EC, Annex II, 1/0/6) op pagina 7.

2. Niet brandveroorzakende bekabeling (alleen FM/US)
FM klasse 1, div 2 aansluiting tekeningnummer 23650583 kan worden gedownload vanaf de

productpagina van onze website op: www.siemens.com/probelu. Ga naar Support >
Installation Drawings > Level Measurement > Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• Voor voedingsvereisten, zie Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance op pagina 4 van
Appendix A.
Instructies speciaal voor installaties in explosiegevaarlijke

zones (Raadpleeg de Europese ATEX richtlijn 94/9/EC,
Annex II, 1/0/6)
De volgende instructies gelden voor de SITRANS Probe LU waarvoor een certificaat met het
nr. SIRA 06ATEX2355X van toepassing is:
1. Raadpleeg de volledige handleiding voor gebruik en montage.
2. De apparatuur is gecertificeerd voor gebruik als Category 1G apparatuur.
3. De apparatuur mag worden gebruikt met ontbrandbare gassen en dampen met
apparaatgroepen IIA, IIB, en IIC, en temperatuurklassen T1, T2, T3, en T4.
Nederlands
4. De apparatuur is gecertificeerd voor gebruik in een omgevingstemperatuurbereik
van –40 C ... +80 C.
5. De apparatuur is niet getest als veiligheidstoestel (zoals omschreven in richtlijn 94/9/EC
Annex II, clause 1.5).
6. Installatie en inspectie van deze apparatuur moet worden uitgevoerd door voldoende
opgeleid personeel, conform de geldende normen (EN 60079-14 en EN 60079-17 in
Europa).
7. Reparatie van deze apparatuur moet worden uitgevoerd door voldoende opgeleid
personeel, conform de geldende normen (EN 60079-19 en EN in Europa).
8. Componenten die moeten worden opgenomen in, of vervangen worden in de apparatuur,
moeten worden gemonteerd door getraind personeel in overeenstemming met de
documentatie van de producent.
9. Het is de verantwoordelijkheid van de gebruiker om er voor te zorgen dat een
handmatige bediening mogelijk is om de apparatuur en de geïntegreerde
beveiligingssystemen binnen geautomatiseerde processen die afwijken van de bedoelde
bedrijfsomstandigheden uit te schakelen, vooropgesteld dat dit de veiligheid niet in
gevaar brengt.
10. Het achtervoegsel ‘X’ suffix achter het certificaatnummer heeft betrekking op de
volgende speciale voorwaarden voor veilig gebruik:
Delen van de behuizing kunnen niet-geleidend zijn en kunnen een
elektrostatisch niveau genereren dat in staat is om een ontsteking op te
wekken onder extreme omstandigheden. De gebruiker moet er voor zorgen dat
de apparatuur niet wordt geïnstalleerd in een locatie waar deze kan worden
blootgesteld aan externe condities (zoals hogedruk stoom) welke een opbouw
van elektrostatische lading kan veroorzaken op niet-geleidende oppervlakken.

11. Wanneer de apparatuur in contact kan komen met agressieve stoffen, dan is het de
verantwoordelijkheid van de gebruiker om de nodige maatregelen te nemen om te
voorkomen dat het instrument negatief wordt beïnvloed, en zo te waarborgen dat de
typeclassificatie niet in gevaar komt.
Agressieve stoffen: bijvoorbeeld zure vloeistoffen of gassen
die metalen aantasten, of oplosmiddelen
die invloed kunnen hebben op polymeren.
Geschikt voorzorgsmaatregelen: Bijvoorbeeld regelmatige controles als
onderdeel van routinematige inspecties,
of vaststellen op basis van het materiaal
datablad dat het bestand is tegen
specifieke chemicaliën.
12. Markering van het instrument
De apparatuurmarkering bevat tenminste de informatie op het product typeplaatje, zoals
getoond aan de binnenzijde van het voorblad van deze handleiding.
Bediening
RUN modus en PROGRAM modus
De SITRANS Probe LU kent twee bedrijfsmodi: RUN en PROGRAM.
De SITRANS Probe LU start automatisch in RUN modus wanneer de voedingsspanning wordt
ingeschakeld en detecteert het materiaalniveau. De primaire uitlezing toont het
materiaalniveau (in meters) ten opzichte van Leeg (Empty) (proces leeg niveau). Dit is de
fabrieksinstelling voor het start display.
De systeemstatus wordt op het LCD weergegeven, of op een communicatiebeeldscherm op
Nederlands
afstand.
RUN modus display1

23
Gebruik de handprogrameereenheid om het display te bedienen.
Normaal bedrijf Failsafe bedrijf
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Primaire uitlezing (toont niveau, afstand of volume2 in of eenheden of percentage).

2 – De secundaire uitlezing (toont parameternummer voor aanvullende uitlezing3)
3 – Echo status indicator: Betrouwbare echo of onbetrouwbare echo
4 – Units (eenheden) of Percent (percentage)
5 – Een actieve bargraph toont het productniveau
6 – Aanvullende uitlezing (hangt af van de geselecteerde parameter, toont mA waarde,
afstand of echo confidence, met eenheden daar waar van toepassing.)
1.
Wanneer de kabel door een doorvoer wordt gevoerd, gebruik dan uitsluitend wartels van de goede
maat die zijn goedgekeurd voor een waterdichte toepassingen.
2. Raadpleeg P050 in de uitgebreide handleiding voor meer informatie over weergave van flow i.p.v.
volume.

Wanneer de echobetrouwbaarheid daalt tot onder de echobetrouwbaarheid drempel, begint
de failsafe timer te lopen. Wanneer de timer afloopt, verschijnen de letters LOE (Loss of Echo,
echoverlies) elke 2 seconden afgewisseld met de meetwaarde, en de betrouwbare echo
indicator wordt vervangen door de onbetrouwbare echo indicator. Wanneer een geldige
meetwaarde wordt ontvangen, keert het niveaudisplay weer terug naar normaal bedrijf.
PROGRAM modus display

2 3 1– Primaire weergave (toont parameterwaarde)
2– Secundaire weergave (toont parameternummer)
1
3– Programmeerindicator
4 4– Aanvullende weergave (toont parameternamen voor
P001 tot P010, wanneer een taal is gekozen. Het toont de
index waarde voor geïndexeerde parameters, zoals
P054).
Programmering
• Stel de parameters in voor uw specifieke toepassing.
• Activeer de PROGRAMMEER modus op elk gewenst moment, om parameterwaarden te
wijzigen en om bedrijfsomstandigheden in te stellen.
• Gebruik voor lokale programmering de Siemens handprogrammeereenheid.
• Voor het programmeren op afstand kunt u of een PC met SIMATIC PDM, of een HART
handheld communicator gebruiken.
Nederlands
Handprogrammeereenheid
mmmmm
Richt voor directe toegang tot de Toet Programmeermodus
SITRANS Probe LU de programmeer-
eenheid op het display van de SITRANS Decimale punt1
Probe LU en druk op de toetsen. (Raad-
Negatieve waarde
pleeg de volgende pagina voor gedetail-
leerde instructies). WIS waarde
Handprogrammeereenheid Eenheden / % van parameterwaarde

Beëindig de PROGRAM sessie en activeer de
RUN modus
Display
Bijwerken echokwaliteitsparameters
Parameters bladeren omhoog

max. 600 mm
(2 ft.) Parameters bladeren naar beneden
DISPLAY opent parametervelden
BEVESTIG de getoonde waarde.
1. Druk op en voer het drie-posities parameternum-

mer in, voor de aanvullende uitlezing in het display tij-
dens de RUN modus.
3.
Druk op om de aanvullende weer te geven wanneer in de RUN modus.

Effecten van lage temperaturen op RUN/PROGRAM
modus
Wanneer de temperatuur in de behuizing daalt tot –30 oC (–22 oF) of lager, heeft dit invloed op
zowel RUN als PROGRAM modi.
RUN modus zal normaal functioneren, met de volgende uitzonderingen:
• Bediening met de handprogrammeereenheid is gedeactiveerd.
• Het LCD toont slechts beperkte informatie: de bargraph en de betrouwbare/
onbetrouwbare echo indicator
PROGRAM modus:
• Bediening met de handprogrammeereenheid is gedeactiveerd.
Veiligheid: (P000: Vergrendeling)

Waarde Omschrijving
Waarde opgeslagen in
* Vergrendeling niet actief: Programmering toegestaan
P069
andere Vergrendeling actief: wijzigingen niet toegestaan
* Fabrieksinstelling voor P069 is 1954: nadat een nieuwe waarde is ingevoerd en
geaccepteerd, wordt het de standaard instelling.
Activeren van de SITRANS Probe LU

Nederlands
Inschakelen van het instrument. De SITRANS Probe LU start in de RUN modus.

mmmmm
Opmerkingen:
• Houdt infrarood apparaten, zoals laptops, mobiele telefoons en PDA’s uit de buurt van de
SITRANS Probe LU om ongewenste werking te voorkomen.
• De volgende instructies gelden bij gebruik van de handprogrammeereenheid.
• Gebruik de handprogrammeereenheid niet tegelijkertijd met SIMATIC PDM, anders kan
ongewenste werking optreden.
• Druk op PROGRAM vervolgens op DISPLAY om de PROGRAM modus te kiezen,
druk vervolgens op PROGRAM om terug te keren in de RUN modus.
• U hoeft niet de voorloopnullen in te voeren bij de invoer van een parameternummer: Voer
bijvoorbeeld voor P005 een 5 in.

Een parameter kiezen
1. Druk op PROGRAM dan op DISPLAY , om de PROGRAM Icon
PROGRAM modus te activeren.
parameternummer
2. Gebruik de PIJL toetsen om naar een andere parameterwaarde
parameter te gaan, of:
3. Druk op DISPLAY om het parameternummerveld te
openen. huidige waarde
4. Voer het gewenste parameternummer in gevolgd door
ENTER .
5. Voorbeeld: druk op en vervolgens op .
6. Het LCD toont het nieuwe parameternummer en de
waarde.
Wijzigen van een parameterwaarde

Opmerkingen:
• De beveiliging moet zijn uitgeschakeld om te programmeren: stel P000 in op de Unlocked
Value die is opgeslagen in P069. (Een remote master kan nog steeds de configuratie
wijzigen wanneer P799 zo is ingesteld.)
• Ongeldige invoer wordt genegeerd of beperkt.
• CLEAR kan worden gebruikt om het veld te wissen.
Nederlands
mmmmm
1. Voer de nieuwe waarde in.
2. Druk op ENTER om de waarde te bevestigen.
Parameter herstellen tot standaard fabriekswaarde
1. Blader naar de parameter of voer het adres in.
2. Druk op CLEAR en vervolgens op ENTER . De waarde is nu weer de standaard
instelling.
Master Reset (P999)

Alle parameters, behalve P000 en P069 krijgen weer hun default waarde. (De aangeleerde TVT
curve gaat niet verloren.)
1. Druk op PROGRAM , en vervolgens op DISPLAY om de PROGRAM modus te
activeren.
2. Druk op DISPLAY om parametervelden te openen.
3. Toets 999 in.
4. Druk op CLEAR en vervolgens op ENTER , om alle
parameters te wissen en een reset uit te voeren. Op het LCD
verschijnt C.ALL.
5. Reset afgerond. (Het duurt een aantal seconden voordat de
reset is afgerond. )

Snelle Setup: stappen 1 t/m 10
Opmerking: standaard waarden (fabrieksinstellingen) zijn met een asterisk (*) gemarkeerd
in de tabellen.
1. Kies taal (P010: Taal)

Numeriek/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
Geen P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Engels
Waarden P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Duits P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Frans P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Spaans
2. Stel P001 in: Bedrijf (meetmodus)

Opmerkingen:
• Door het instellen van P001 wordt Bereik (P007) gereset, tenzijn Bereik eerder is
ingesteld op een andere waarde.
• Door het wijzigen van P001 kan de Uitvoerfunctie (P201) worden gewijzigd: dit geldt
alleen voor HART.
Nederlands
Niveau geeft de afstand tot het niveau van het medium, ten opzichte van Leeg (proces
1 * leegniveau). De meetwaarde wordt gegeven in volumetrische eenheden wanneer
mmmmm
Waarden parameters 050 tot 055 hiervoor zo zijn ingesteld.

2 Ruimte geeft de afstand tot het mediumniveau t.o.v. Bereik (proces vol niveau).
Afstand geeft de afstand tot het materiaalniveau aan vanaf het referentiepunt
3
(antenne-oppervlak).
mA uitgang met Niveau, Ruimte en Afstand

Niveau Ruimte Afstand
antenne- (P001 = 1) (P001 = (P001 = 3)
oppervlak 0%
(4 mA)
Bereik (20 mA) Bereik (4 mA) Bereik
100% 0% Afstand
Ruimte
P007
P006
Niveau
Leeg Leeg
Leeg 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Stel meetresponsie in (P003)

1 * Langzaam 0,1 m/min
Waarden 2 Gemiddeld 1 m/min
3 Snel 10 m/min
Stel P003 in op een meetresponsiesnelheid die net even sneller is dan de max. vul- of
leegsnelheid (welke maar groter is)

4. Kies meeteenheden (P005)
1 * Meters
2 Centimeters
Waarden 3 Millimeters
4 Feet
5 Inches
5. Stel proces leeg niveau in (P006: Leeg) Niveau instelling

Antenne-
Opmerking: oppervlak
• P006 en P007 zijn onderling verbonden:
raadpleeg de opmerkingen bij P007. Bereik
100%
0,0000 tot 6,000 m (20 ft.) of

Bereik P007
0,0000 tot 12,000 m (40 ft.)
Waarden P006
Fabrieksin-
Maximum bereik
stelling Niveau
Leeg kan worden ingesteld op elke afstand: niet Leeg 0%
noodzakelijkerwijze de bodem van de tank.
6. Stel Meetbereik in (P007: Bereik)1
Bereik
0,0000 tot 6,000 m (20 ft.) of Bereik kan worden ingesteld op elke
0,0000 tot 12,000 m (40 ft.) gewenste afstand boven het Leeg
Nederlands
Waarden
Fabrieksin- 5,725 m (18,78 ft.) of niveau.
mmmmm
stelling 11,725 m (38,47 ft.)
.
Opmerkingen:
• Door het instellen van P006 wordt Bereik gereset, wanneer het niet eerder is ingesteld op
een andere waarde.
• De fabrieksinstelling voor Bereik is gebaseerd op Bedrijf (P001) en Leeg (P006). Bedrijf
wordt ingesteld op Leeg minus 110% van de Blanking afstand 1, tenzij Bedrijf is ingesteld
op Afstand (P001=3). In dit geval wordt Bereik ingesteld op de Leeg afstand.
• Voorkom altijd dat het bewaakte oppervlak binnen 0,3 m (1 ft) van het antenne-oppervlak
komt. Dit creëert een 0,05 m (2") veiligheidsmarge, omdat 0,25 m (10") de minimum te
detecteren afstand is.
7. Minimaliseer ongewenste reflecties: Stel P838 in, afstand stoorecho

onderdrukking
Gebruik P838 en P837 Maximum bereik:
Bereik
samen: volg de instructies 0,000 tot 6,000 m (20 ft.) of
Waarde (hangt af van model)
voor P837. 0,000 tot 12 m (40 ft.)
Fabrieksinstelling 1,000 m (3,28 ft.)
1. De fabrieksinstelling voor Blanking is 0,25-10m

8. Schakel stoorecho-onderdrukking in: Stel P837 in (automatische
onderdrukking stoorecho’s)
0 OFF
Waarde 1 * Gebruik aangeleerde TVT
2 Leren
Gebruik P837 en P838 (voer deze functie uit bij lage tankniveaus)
De TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curve stelt een drempel in welke stoorecho's uitfiltert1.
Wanneer de SITRANS Probe LU een onjuist max. niveau weergeeft, of wanneer de
meetwaarde fluctueert tussen een onjuist hoog niveau en een correct niveau, gebruik dan
P838 en P837 samen om de TVT (Time Varying Threshold) in dit gebied te verhogen en om de
ontvanger minder gevoelig te maken voor eventuele 'basisruis' die wordt veroorzaakt door
interne antennereflecties, nozzle echo's, of andere onjuiste echo's in de tank.2
Gebruik P837 en P838 (vervolg)
Opmerkingen:
• Gebruik deze functie alleen wanneer er tenminste een afstand van 2 meter bestaat
tussen de SITRANS Probe LU en het materiaal. Deze functie werkt het best wanneer de
tank leeg is of bijna leeg is.
• Stel P837 en P838 tijdens het opstarten in, indien mogelijk
• Wanneer de tank is uitgerust met een roerwerk, moet dit roerwerk draaien.
a. Bepaal de werkelijke afstand vanaf het antenne-oppervlak tot het materiaalniveau.
Nederlands
b. Kies P838 en voer in [afstand tot materiaalniveau min 0,5m].

c. Kies P837, druk dan op 2 (Leer) en ENTER P837 keert automatisch terug naar 1
mmmmm
(gebruik aangeleerde TVT) na enkele seconden.
9. Ga terug naar RUN

Druk op PROGRAM om terug te gaan naar de RUN modus: De instelling is afgerond.
SITRANS Probe LU communicatie: HART

Opmerking: Raadpleeg mA uitgang met Niveau, Ruimte en Afstand op pagina 12 voor een
illustratie van de mA uitgang met verschillende bedrijfsmodi.
• U heeft de uitgebreide handleiding nodig voor de lijst van parameters die van toepassing zijn.
• Neem contact op met uw lokale vertegenwoordiging voor informatie omtrent de
beschikbaarheid van de HART DD voor de SITRANS Probe LU.
• Wij raden het gebruik aan van de Simatic Process Device Manager (PDM) voor het
programmeren van uw instrument.
Onderhoud
De SITRANS Probe LU vereist geen onderhoud of reiniging.
Reparatie van de eenheid en uitsluiting van aansprakelijkheid
Raadpleeg voor gedetailleerde informatie de binnenkant van de achterflap.
1. Stoorecho's kunnen worden veroorzaakt door obstructies in het pad van de bundel.
2. Raadpleeg voor meer informatie over het onderdrukken van stoorecho's de uitgebreide handleiding.

SITRANS Probe LU 
Manual de início rápido
Este manual descreve em linhas gerais as características e funções principais da SITRANS Probe
LU. Recomendamos a obter a versão detalhada do manual para poder utilizar o máximo potencial
do seu instrumento. O manual completo está disponível no nosso site na web:
www.siemens.com/probelu. O manual impresso está disponível no seu representante local
Siemens.
Quaisquer dúvidas a respeito do conteúdo deste manual devem ser enviadas para:
Peterborough, Ontário, Canadá, K9J 7B1
Process Instruments 2013. Exclusão de Responsabilidade
Todos os direitos reservados
Aconselhamos os usuários a adquirirem Apesar de termos verificado o conteúdo deste
manuais autorizados relacionados, ou a manual relativamente à conformidade com os
verem versões eletrónicas como instrumentos descritos, este pode ter algumas
concebidas e autenticadas pela Siemens variações. Assim, não podemos garantir toda a
Milltronics Process Instruments. A conformidade. O conteúdo deste manual é revisto
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments com regularidade e as correções são incluídas em
não se considera responsável pelo edições posteriores. Todas as sugestões de
conteúdo de reproduções parciais ou melhoramento são bem-vindas.
totais de versões relacionadas ou
eletrónicas. Os dados técnicos estão sujeitos a alterações.
MILLTRONICS é uma marca comercial registada da Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Instruções de Segurança1
As mensagens de advertências devem ser tidas em conta para garantir a sua segurança
pessoal bem como a de terceiros e para proteger o produto e o equipamento a ele associado.
Estas mensagens de advertências são acompanhadas por uma explicação do nível de cautela
Português
a tomar. mmmmm
ATENÇÃO: refere-se a um símbolo de aviso no produto e significa que o não

cumprimento das precauções necessárias pode resultar em morte, ferimentos
graves e/ou danos consideráveis no material.
ATENÇÃO: significa que o não cumprimento das precauções necessárias pode
resultar em morte, ferimentos graves e/ou danos consideráveis no material.
Nota: significa informação importante acerca do produto ou dessa parte do manual de
funcionamento
1 Este símbolo de aviso é utilizado quando não existe qualquer símbolo de cautela correspondente
sobre o produto.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MANUAL DE INÍCIO RÁPIDO Página PT-1

SITRANS Probe LU
ATENÇÃO: As alterações ou modificações não aprovadas expressamente pela
Siemens podem anular a autoridade do usuário para utilizar o equipamento.
Notas:
• A SITRANS Probe LU é para ser usada apenas da forma descrita neste manual,
caso contrário a proteção fornecida pelo equipamento pode ser prejudicada.
• Este produto é para ser usado em áreas industriais. A operação com este
equipamento numa área residencial pode causar interferências a várias
comunicações à base de frequência.
A SITRANS Probe LU é um monitor contínuo de nível alimentado em ‘loop’, que utiliza técnica
ultrassônica avançada. A unidade consiste num componente eletrónico acoplado ao
transdutor e à conexão ao processo.
O transdutor está disponível em ETFE (etileno-tetrafluoroetileno) ou em PVDF (fluoreto
polivinilideno), possibilitando que a SITRANS Probe LU seja usada numa larga variedade de
indústrias e aplicações que utilizem químicos corrosivos.
O transdutor ultrassônico contém um elemento sensor de temperatura para compensação das
variações da mesma, na aplicação.
A comunicação é feita através do dispositivo HART1 e os sinais são processados utilizando o
sistema Sonic Intelligence®.
Especificações
Para obter uma listagem completa, consulte o Manual de Instruções da SITRANS Probe LU.
Para informações sobre as Aprovações, consulte a placa de características do produto.
Temperaturas de ambiente/funcionamento
Nota: A temperatura de processo e as capacidades de pressão dependem das
informações na placa de características do produto. O desenho para consulta listado
na placa de características pode ser descarregado do site na web da Siemens em
Português
mmmmm
programador manual
placa de características
do produto
temperatura ambiente no
invólucro: adaptador flangeado
–40 a +80 °C (–40 a +176 °F)
flange fornecida
pelo cliente
temperatura de processo:
–40 a +85 °C (–40 a +185 °F)
1 HART® é uma marca comercial registada da HART Communication Foundation.
Página PT-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MANUAL DE INÍCIO RÁPIDO A5E32168031

Alimentação
Nominal 24 V CC a 550 Ohm máx: para outras configurações, ver o manual completo.
• Máximo 30 VCC
• 4 a 20 mA
Aprovações
• Gerais: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Ambientes Intrínsecamente 
perigosos Seguro (Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(EUA/Canadá) FM/CSA1: (necessária barreira)
Classe I, Div. 1, Grupos A, B, C, D
Classe II, Div. 1, Grupos E, F, G
Classe III T4
(Internacional) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brasil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Não-inflamável (EUA) FM2:
Classe I, Div. 2, Grupos A, B, C, D T5
• Naval Lloyd’s Register of Shipping
Aprovação Tipo ABS
Observação: Os selos de conduíte impermeável a pó e água são obrigatórios para locais

externos do tipo 4X / NEMA 4X, tipo 6/ NEMA 6, IP67, IP68.
Português
1 Ver FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing na página 1 do Apêndice A, para o desenho número
23650516, ou CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing na página 2 do Apêndice A, para o desenho
número 23650517.
2 Ver FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing na página 3 do Apêndice A, para o desenho número
23650583.

Instalação
ATENÇÃO:
• Os materiais de construção são escolhidos com base nas suas capacidades
químicas (ou inatividade) para finalidades gerais. Para exposição a ambientes
específicos, verificar as tabelas de compatibilidade química, antes da instalação.
• Este produto só poderá funcionar de forma correta e segura se for transportado,
armazenado, instalado, configurado e utilizado de forma adequada e se a sua
manutenção for corretamente efetuada.
• O usuário é responsável pela seleção dos materiais de montagem e juntas que
estejam dentro dos limites da flange e da sua utilização pretendida e que sejam
adequados para as condições de serviço.
Nota: A instalação só deverá ser realizada por pessoal qualificado e em concordância com
os regulamentos locais vigentes.
Localização de montagem
Recomendações:
• Temperatura ambiente compreendida entre –40 a +80 °C (–40 a +176 °F).
• Acesso fácil para a visualização do display e para programação através do programador
manual.
• Um ambiente adequado à especificação do invólucro e aos materiais de construção.
• Manter o trajeto do som perpendicular à superfície do material.
Precauções:
• Evitar a proximidade de instalações elétricas de alta tensão ou corrente, contatos de alta
tensão ou corrente, e de controladores de velocidade de motor por frequência variável.
• Evitar interferências ao trajeto do som provenientes de obstruções ou do trajeto de
enchimento.
Enchimento
O trajeto do som deverá ser:
• perpendicular à
superfície
monitorizada,
• desimpedido de tubos
Português
paredes rugosas,
costuras, travessas, travessas
mmmmm
ou outras obstruções
• desimpedir o trajeto costuras
do som de 10°

Instruções de Montagem
Nota: Preferencialmente, montar a SITRANS Probe LU por forma que a face do
transdutor esteja pelo menos 300 mm acima do mais elevado nível esperado.
A SITRANS Probe LU está disponível com três tipos de rosca: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, ou PF2/G.
1. Antes de instalar a SITRANS Probe LU na sua conexão de montagem, assegure-se de
que as roscas são do mesmo tipo para evitar danificá-las.
2. Roqueie simplesmente a SITRANS Probe LU a conexão ao processo, e aperte à mão.
Instalação Elétrica
Alimentação1
AVISOS:
Os terminais CC devem ser alimentados através de uma fonte de alimentação
SELV 1 (Baixa Tensão Extra de Segurança) de acordo com a norma IEC -1010-1,
Anexo H.
Todas as ligações de campo devem ter um isolamento adequado às tensões
nominais.
Ligação da SITRANS Probe LU

Notas: parafusos
• Para informação detalhada sobre da tampa
configurações de Segurança Intrínseca, tampa
ver por favor, o manual completo. basculante
• Utilizar um cabo de par trançado e

blindado (condutores de calibre AWG 22 a
AWG 14/0.34 mm2 a 2.08 mm2).
• Poderão ser necessários cabos e
conduítes separados por uma questão de
conformidade com as práticas
normalizadas de ligação de Português
instrumentação ou códigos elétricos. conexão prensa-
• O invólucro não metálico não proporciona cabo
mmmmm
roscada
estanque
uma passagem contínua de terra entre
ligações de conduítes: usar buchas e
‘jumpers’ de aterramento.
1 Baixa Tensão Extra de Segurança.

1. Retirar o isolamento do cabo em
terminais para A
aproximadamente 70 mm a partir do seu laço de corrente m
extremo, e faça passar os condutores através

do prensa-cabo1.
2. Ligue os condutores aos terminais como acima
mostrado: a polaridade está indicada no bloco
de terminais.
3. Aperte o prensa-cabo de forma a dar uma boa
vedação. cabo
4. Feche a tampa e aperte os parafusos: não

aperte demasiado os parafusos. O torque
recomendado é de 1,1 a 1,7 N-m.
Configurações da instalação elétrica para instalações em áreas

perigosas1
Sempre verifique a placa de identificação do dispositivo e o rótulo do dispositivo do processo
para verificar a classificação de aprovação.
1. Instalação elétrica com segurança intrínseca
Placa de identificação do dispositivo 
(ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK) KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
O certificado ATEX pode ser baixado da página de produtos em nosso site:

www.siemens.com/probelu. Acesse Support (Suporte) > Approvals / Certificates
(Aprovações/Certificados).
O certificado IECEx, listado na placa de identificação, pode ser consultado no site da IECEx.
Acesse: http://iecex.iec.ch, clique em Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity (Certificados
de Conformidade de Equipamento Ex) e digite o número de certificado IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Placa de identificação do dispositivo (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
Português

O número do desenho da conexão de segurança intrínseca 23650516 de FM e o número do

desenho da conexão de segurança intrínseca 23650517 de CSA podem ser baixados da
página do produto no nosso site em: www.siemens.com/probelu. Acesse Support (Suporte) >
Instalation Drawings (Desenhos de Instalação) > Level Measurement (Medição de Nível) >
Continuous – Ultrasonic (Contínuo – Ultrasonic).
• Para exigências de alimentação, consulte Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance na
página 4.
• Para requisitos de instalação elétrica: siga os regulamentos locais.
• Os selos de conduíte impermeável a pó e água são obrigatórios para locais externos tipo
4X /NEMA 4X, tipo 6 /NEMA 6, IP67, IP68.
• Consulte Instruções específicas para instalações em ambientes perigosos (Referência
Diretriz Europeia ATEX 94/9/CE, Anexo II, 1/0/6) na página 7.
1 Se o cabo for encaminhado através de conduíte, utilize apenas cubos de tamanho adequado e
aprovados para aplicação à prova de água.

2. Instalação elétrica não-inflamável (somente para FM EUA)
O número do desenho da conexão 23650583 de Classe 1, Div 2 de FM pode ser baixado da

página do produto no nosso site: www.siemens.com/probelu. Acesse Support (Suporte) >
Instalation Drawings (Desenhos de Instalação) > Level Measurement (Medição de Nível) >
Continuous – Ultrasonic (Contínuo – Ultrasonic).
• Para exigências de alimentação, consulte Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance na
página 4 no apêndice A.
Instruções específicas para instalações em ambientes

perigosos (Referência Diretriz Europeia ATEX 94/9/CE,
Anexo II, 1/0/6)
As instruções seguintes referem-se à SITRANS Probe LU coberta pelo certificado número
SIRA 06ATEX2355X:
1. Para utilização e montagem, consulte as instruções principais.
2. O equipamento está certificado para ser utilizado como equipamento de Categoria 1G.
3. O equipamento pode ser utilizado com gases e vapores inflamáveis com os grupos de
aparelhos IIA, IIB, e IIC, e classes de temperatura T1, T2, T3, e T4.
4. O equipamento está certificado para ser utilizado dentro de uma gama de temperatura
ambiente de -40 C a +80 C.
5. O equipamento não foi avaliado como dispositivo relacionado com a segurança
(conforme referido pela Directiva 94/9/CE, Anexo II, cláusula 1.5).
6. A instalação e inspeção deste equipamento serão realizadas por pessoal com formação
adequada, de acordo com o código de prática aplicável (EN 60079-14 e
EN 60079-17 na Europa).
7. A reparação deste equipamento deverá ser efectuada por pessoal com formação
adequada, de acordo com o código de prática aplicável (por exemplo, EN 60079-19 na
Europa).
Português
8. Os componentes a serem incorporados ou utilizados como componentes de substituição

neste equipamento, deverão ser instalados por pessoal com formação adequada, de
acordo com a documentação do fabricante.
9. É da responsabilidade do usuário certificar-se de que é possível fazer uma ativação em
modo manual a fim de desligar o equipamento e os sistemas de proteção incorporados
nos processos automáticos, que se desviem das condições de funcionamento
pretendidas, desde que tal não comprometa a segurança.
10. O sufixo "X” ao número do certificado diz respeito às seguintes condições especiais de
utilização segura:
Partes do invólucro podem ser não condutoras e podem gerar um nível de carga
eletrostática capaz de gerar uma ignição em certas condições extremas. O
usuário deverá zelar para que o equipamento não seja instalado num local onde
possa estar sujeito a condições externas (como, por exemplo, vapor de alta
pressão) que possam provocar uma acumulação de carga eletrostática em
superfícies não condutoras.

11. Se for previsível que o equipamento vá entrar em contato com substâncias agressivas, é
da responsabilidade do usuário tomar as precauções adequadas para que o
equipamento não seja adversamente afetado, garantindo, portanto, que a proteção
adotada não seja comprometida.
Substâncias agressivas: por exemplo, líquidos ou gases ácidos que possam
atacar os metais, ou solventes que possam afetar os
materiais poliméricos.
Precauções adequadas: por exemplo, verificações regulares como parte das
inspeções de rotina ou estabelecimento a partir da
ficha técnica do material se o mesmo é resistente a
produtos químicos específicos.
12. Marcação do equipamento:
A marcação do equipamento contém pelo menos a informação que se encontra na
placa de características do produto, apresentada no interior da capa frontal deste
manual.
Operação
Modos RUN e PROGRAM
A SITRANS Probe LU tem dois modos de funcionamento: RUN e PROGRAM.
A SITRANS Probe LU parte automaticamente em modo RUN quando é ligada a alimentação, e
detecta o nível do material. A primeira leitura mostra o nível do material (em metros) em
referência a Empty (nível de processo vazio). Este é o modo de partida padrão do display.
O estado do sistema é apresentado no LCD, ou num terminal de comunicações remoto.
Display de Modo RUN

Utilize o programador manual para controlar o display.
12
Funcionamento normal Funcionamento “À prova de falhas”
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
Português
mmmmm
1 – Primeira Leitura (apresenta nível, distância ou volume2, em unidades físicas ou

percentagem).
2 – Segunda Leitura (apresenta o número de Parâmetro para Leitura Auxiliar3)
3– Indicador de estado dos ecos: Eco Confiável ou Eco Não Confiável
4– Unidades ou Percentagem
5– Gráfico de barras ativo representa o nível do material
6– Leitura Auxiliar (dependendo do parâmetro selecionado, apresenta o valor em
miliamperes, distância, ou fiabilidade do eco, com unidades onde aplicável).
1
Para detalhes para mostrar o caudal em vez do volume, por favor, ver P050 no manual completo.
2
Pressionar para apresentação do campo de leitura auxiliar quando em modo RUN.

Se a confiabilidade do eco descer abaixo do limiar de confiabilidade de eco, o temporizador “à
prova de falhas" começa a funcionar. Quando a temporização termina, as letras LOE (Perda de
Eco) alternam com a leitura a intervalos de dois segundos, e o indicador de Eco Confiável é
substituído pelo indicador de Não Fiável. Quando uma leitura válida é recebida, o display de
leitura de nível regressa ao funcionamento normal.
Display de Modo PROGRAM

2 3 1– Primeira Leitura (apresenta o valor do parâmetro)
2– Segunda Leitura (apresenta o número do parâmetro)
1
3– Indicador de Programação
4 4– Leitura Auxiliar (apresenta os nomes dos parâmetros de
P001 a P010, se um idioma estiver selecionado,
apresenta o valor do índice para os parâmetros
indexados, tais como P054).
Programação
• Defina os parâmetros para se adequarem à sua aplicação específica.
• Ative o modo PROGRAM em qualquer altura, para alterar os valores dos parâmetros e
definir as condições de funcionamento.
• Para programação local, utilize o programador manual Siemens.
• Para programação à distância, utilize ou um PC que faça correr PDM SIMATIC, ou um
comunicador de mão HART.
Programador manual
Tecla Modo de Programação
Para acesso direto à SITRANS Probe
LU, aponte o programador ao display Ponto decimal1
da SITRANS Probe LU e pressione as
teclas. (Para instruções detalhadas, ver Valor negativo
página seguinte).
CLEAR (apagar) valor
programador manual TOGGLE (comutar) entre Unidades e % do
valor de parâmetro
Terminar a sessão PROGRAM e ativar o modo
display RUN
Português
Atualizar parâmetros de qualidade de eco

mmmmm
máx. 600 mm Percorrer parâmetros para cima
Percorrer parâmetros para baixo

DISPLAY (apresentar) abre campos de
parâmetros
ENTER (introduzir) o valor apresentado
1.
Pressione mais o número de parâmetro de três dígi-
tos, para definir o parâmetro a mostrar na apresentação
auxiliar.

Efeito de temperatura baixa sobre os modos RUN/PROGRAM
Se a temperatura interna cai para –30 oC ou abaixo, afetará ambos os modos RUN e
PROGRAM.
O modo RUN funcionará normalmente, com as seguintes exceções:
• operação com programador manual está desativada
• o LCD apresenta apenas informação limitada: o gráfico de barras e o indicador de eco
confiável/não confiável
O modo PROGRAM:
• operação com programador manual está desativada
Segurança: (P000: Bloquear)

Valor Descrição
Valor armazenado em P069 * Desbloquear: programação permitida
outros Bloqueio ativado: nenhumas alterações permitidas
* O padrão de fábrica para P069 é 1954: após um valor novo ser introduzido e aceite, este
torna-se o valor padrão.
Ativação da SITRANS Probe LU

Ligue o instrumento. A SITRANS Probe LU parte em modo RUN.
Notas:
• Mantenha dispositivos com infra-vermelhos tais como computadores portáteis,
telefones celulares, e PDAs, afastados da SITRANS Probe LU para impedir
funcionamentos inadvertidos.
• As instruções seguintes aplicam-se ao utilizar o Programador Manual.
• Não utilize o Programador Manual ao mesmo tempo que o SIMATIC PDM, pois pode ter
como resultado um funcionamento incorreto.
• Pressione PROGRAM e a seguir DISPLAY para aceder ao modo PROGRAM, e
pressione PROGRAM para regressar ao modo RUN.
• Não é necessário a introdução dos zeros iniciais ao entrar com o número de parâmetro:
Português
por exemplo, para P005, introduza 5.

mmmmm

Acesso a um parâmetro
1. Pressione PROGRAM e a seguir DISPLAY , Ícone PROGRAM
para ativar Modo PROGRAM.
Número de Parâmetro
2. Utilize ou as teclas de SETA para passar Valor de Parâmetro
para um parâmetro diferente ou:
3. Pressione DISPLAY para abrir o campo do Número
de Parâmetro. Valor atual
4. Introduza o número de parâmetro pretendido seguido
de ENTER .
5. Por exemplo: pressione e depois .
6. O LCD apresenta os novos número e valor de
parâmetro.
Alteração de um Valor de Parâmetro

Notas:
• A segurança tem que ser desativada para se poder programar: defina P000 para o Valor
de Desbloqueado guardado em P069. (Um “master” remoto pode mesmo assim mudar a
configuração, se P799 estiver definido para o permitir).
• As entradas inválidas serão rejeitadas ou limitadas.
• CLEAR pode ser utilizada para limpar o campo.
1. Introduza o novo valor.
2. Pressione ENTER para definir o valor.
Reset dos Parâmetros para os Valores de Fábrica
1. Desloque-se até ao parâmetro ou introduza o seu endereço.
2. Pressione CLEAR e a seguir ENTER . O valor regressa ao valor de fábrica.
Reset Principal (P999)

Volta a colocar todos os parâmetros excepto P000 e P069 nos valores padrões. (A curva TVT
Português
programada não se perde). mmmmm
1. Pressione PROGRAM , e a seguir DISPLAY para ativar o modo PROGRAM.

2. Pressione DISPLAY para abrir os campos de parâmetros.
3. Introduza 999.
4. Pressione CLEAR e a seguir ENTER , para Limpar Tudo
e iniciar o reset. O LCD apresenta C.ALL.
5. Reset completo. (O reset demora vários segundos a concluir).

Configuração Rápida: passos de 1 a 10
Nota: Os valores padrões de fábrica estão assinaladas com um asterisco (*) nas tabelas.
1. Selecionar idioma (P010: Idioma)

Numéricos/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
Nenhum P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 English
Valores P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Alemão P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Francês P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Espanhol
2. Definir P001: Funcionamento (modo de medição)

Notas:
• A definição de P001 altera a Faixa (P007), exceto se esta tiver sido definida
anteriormente para um valor diferente.
• A alteração de P001 pode alterar a Função Saída (P201): isto aplica-se apenas para
HART.
Level devolve a distância até ao nível do material tendo como referência

1 * Empty (nível do processo em vazio). A leitura é devolvida em unidades
volumétricas se os parâmetros 050 a 055 estiverem definidos para o permitir.
Valores Space devolve a distância até ao nível do material tendo como referência Span
2
(nível de processo cheio).
Distance devolve a distância até ao nível de material a partir do ponto de
3
referência (face do transdutor).
Saída em mA com funcionamento Level, Space e Distance

Face do (P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
Português
transdutor 0%
(4 mA)
mmmmm
(20 mA) Span (4 mA) Span

Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Definição da Resposta de Medição (P003)

1 * lenta 0,1m/minuto
Valore
2 média 1m/minuto
s
3 rápida 10m/minuto
Definir P003 para uma velocidade de resposta da medição mais rápida do que a velocidade máxima de
enchimento ou esvaziamento (a que for maior).

4. Seleção das unidades de medição (P005)
1 * metros
2 centímetros
Valores 3 milímetros
4 pés
5 polegadas
5. Definição do nível de processo vazio Configuração do Nível

(P006: Empty) Face do
transdutor
Nota:
• P006 e P007 estão interligados: ver notas Span 100%
anexas para P007.
P007
0.0000 a 6.000 m ou
Faixa P006
Valores 0.0000 a 12.000 m
Padrão Faixa máxima Level
Empty pode ser definido para qualquer distância: Empty 0%

não necessariamente o fundo do reservatório.
6. Definição da faixa de medição

(P007: Span)1
0.0000 a 6.000 m ou
Faixa
0.0000 a 12.000 m
O Span pode ser definido para qualquer
Valores distância acima do nível Empty
5.725 m ou
Padrão
11.725 m
.
Notas:
• A definição de P006 altera o Span, se não tiver sido definido anteriormente para um valor
diferente.
• O valor padrão para Span é baseada em Operation (P001) e Empty (P006). Span é definido
para Empty menos 110% da distância de Bloqueio1, exceto se Operation estiver definido
para Distance (P001=3). Neste caso, Span é definida para a distância Empty.
Português
• Previna sempre a superfície monitorada de se aproximar a menos de 0,3 m da face do

mmmmm
transdutor. Isso proporciona uma margem de segurança de 0,05 m, uma vez que 0,25 m é
a distância mínima detectável.
7. Minimização de reflexos falsos: Definir P838 (Distância de Supressão

Automática de Ecos Falsos)
Utilize P838 e P837 em Faixa máxima:
Faixa
conjunto: siga as 0.000 a 6.000 m ou
Valor (depende do modelo)
instruções para P837. 0.000 a 12 m
Padrão 1.000 m
1 A definição por defeito para Bloqueio é 0,25 m

8. Ativação da Supressão Automática de Ecos Falsos: definir P837 (Supressão
Automática de Ecos Falsos)
0 Desligado
Valor 1 * Utilizar a TVT programada
2 "Learn"
Utilização de P837 e P838 (efetuar esta função com níveis de reservatório

baixos)
A curva TVT (Time Varying Threshold - Limiar de Variação de Tempo) define um limiar ao qual
elimina ecos falsos1. Se a SITRANS Probe LU apresentar um nível cheio incorreto, ou se a
leitura variar entre um nível alto falso e um nível correto, utilize os parâmetros P838 e P837
conjuntamente para elevar a curva TVT nesta região e para dessensibilizar o receptor de
qualquer "ruído de base" causado por reflexos internos do transdutor, ecos de bocais ou outros
ecos falsos do reservatório2.
Utilização de P837 e P838 (continuação)
Notas:
• Usar esta função unicamente se existir uma distância mínima de 2 metros da Sonda LU
SITRANS ao material. Esta função trabalha melhor se o reservatório estiver vazio ou
aproximadamente vazio.
• Defina os parâmetros P837 e P838 durante a partida, se possível.
• Se o tanque possuir um agitador, este deverá estar em funcionamento.
a. Determine a distância real entre a face do transdutor e o nível do material.
b. Selecione P838 e introduza [distância ao nível do material - 0,5m].
c. Selecione P837 e em seguida pressione 2 (Learn) e ENTER . P837 reverterá
automaticamente para 1 (utilize Learned TVT) ao fim de alguns segundos.
9. Regressar a RUN
Pressione PROGRAM para regressar ao modo RUN: A configuração está completa.
Comunicações da SITRANS Probe LU: HART

Nota: Ver Saída em mA com funcionamento Level, Space e Distance na page 12 uma
Português
ilustração da saída em mA com modos de funcionamento diferentes.

mmmmm
• Necessitará do manual completo para obter a lista dos parâmetros aplicáveis.

• Contacte, por favor, o seu representante local relativamente à disponibilidade do HART
DD para SITRANS Probe LU.
• Recomendamos que utilize o Gerenciador de Dispositivo de Processo SIMATIC (PDM)
para programar o seu instrumento.
Manutenção
A SITRANS Probe LU não requer qualquer manutenção ou limpeza.
Reparação da Unidade e Exclusões de Responsabilidade
Para informações detalhadas, ver a contra capa interior.
1 Os ecos falsos podem ser causados por obstruções no trajeto do feixe.

2 Para mais detalhes sobre a Supressão Automática de Ecos Falsos, ver o manual completo.

SITRANS Probe LU Pikakäyttöopas
Tämä opas kertoo SITRANS Probe LU:n ominaisuuksista ja toiminnoista. On erittäin suositeltavaa
tutustua myös oppaan laajaan versioon, jossa laitteen ominaisuudet on selvitetty
yksityiskohtaisesti. Täydellinen opas löytyy verkkosivuiltamme osoitteesta
www.siemens.com/probelu. Painetun oppaan saat paikalliselta Siemens edustajaltasi.
Tämän oppaan sisältöä koskevia asioita voi tiedustella osoitteesta:
Sähköposti: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
Process Instruments 2013. Vastuuvapauslauseke
Kaikki oikeudet pidätetään
Kehotamme käyttäjiä hankkimaan Tämän oppaan sisältö on tarkistettu vastaamaan
oppaan hyväksytyn painetun laitoksen kuvattua laitteistoa, mutta muutokset ovat
tai tutustumaan Siemens Milltronics mahdollisia. Tämän vuoksi valmistaja ei voi taata
Process Instruments:n laatimaan ja täydellistä yhtäpitävyyttä. Tämän oppaan sisältöä
hyväksymään sähköiseen versioon. tarkistetaan säännöllisesti ja korjaukset
Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments sisällytetään seuraaviin painoksiin. Otamme
ei vastaa osittain tai kokonaan parannusehdotuksia mielellämme vastaan.
kopioitujen painettujen tai sähköisten
versioiden sisällöstä. Teknisiin tietoihin saattaa tulla muutoksia.
MILLTRONICS on Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments:n rekisteröity tavaramerkki.
Turvaohjeet1
Annettuja varoituksia on noudatettava käyttäjään ja muihin henkilöihin kohdistuvien
henkilövahinkojen sekä tuotteen ja siihen kytkettyjen varusteiden laitevahinkojen
välttämiseksi. Varoitusten yhteydessä ilmoitetaan myös vaaratasosta.
VAROITUS: Varoitus liittyy tuotteen varoitussymboliin. Varoituksen huomiotta

jättäminen saattaa aiheuttaa hengenvaaran, vakavia ruumiinvammoja ja
merkittäviä aineellisia vahinkoja.
VAROITUS1: Varoituksen huomiotta jättäminen saattaa aiheuttaa hengenvaaran,
vakavia ruumiinvammoja ja merkittäviä aineellisia vahinkoja.
Huomautus: Huomautuksissa on tärkeitä tuotteeseen tai käyttöoppaaseen liittyviä tietoja.
Suomi
mmmmm
1. Tätä varoitusmerkkiä käytetään, kun tuotteessa ei ole vastaavaa varoitussymbolia.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – PIKAKÄYTTÖOPAS Sivu FI-1

SITRANS Probe LU
VAROITUS: Laitteeseen tehdyt muutokset ja muokkaukset, joita Siemens ei ole
erikseen hyväksynyt, saattavat vaikuttaa laitteen käyttöoikeuksiin.
Huomautukset:
• SITRANS Probe LU:ta saa käyttää ainoastaan tässä käyttöoppaassa kuvatulla
tavalla, koska muutoin laitteen suojaustaso voi heikentyä.
• Tämä tuote on tarkoitettu käytettäväksi teollisuustiloissa. Laitteen käyttäminen
asuinalueilla saattaa aiheuttaa häiriöitä monenlaiseen radiotaajuuksia käyttävään
viestintään.
SITRANS Probe LU on silmukkavirralla toimiva jatkuvatoiminen tasonkorkeuden tarkkailulaite,

jossa hyödynnetään kehittynyttä ultraäänitekniikkaa. Laite koostuu elektroniikkayksiköstä,
joka on kytketty anturiin ja prosessiliitäntään.
Anturia on saatavana ETFE:stä (etyleenitetrafluorietyleenistä) tai PVDF:stä
(polyvinylideenifluoridista) valmistettuna, joten SITRANS Probe LU:ta voidaan käyttää monilla
teollisuudenaloilla ja monissa sovelluksissa, joissa käytetään syövyttäviä kemikaaleja.
Ultraäänianturiin sisältyy myös lämpötilatuntoelin, jonka avulla voidaan kompensoida
käytönaikaiset lämpötilanvaihtelut.
Viestinvälitys tapahtuu HART1in välityksellä, ja signaalien käsittelyyn käytetään Sonic
Intelligence® -tekniikkaa.
Tekniset tiedot
Täydellinen erittely löytyy SITRANS Probe LU -laitteen käyttöoppaasta. Hyväksynnät on
merkitty laitteen nimikilpeen.
Ympäristön lämpötila/käyttölämpötila
Huomautus: Prosessilämpötila ja paineominaisuudet riippuvat tuotteen nimikilven
tiedoista. Kilvessä mainitun viitepiirroksen voi ladata Siemens verkkosivuilta
osoitteesta www.siemens.com/probelu.
käsiohjelmointilaite
tuotteen nimikilpi
kotelon ympäristön lämpötila:
–40 - +80 °C (–40 - +176 °F) laipan sovitin
asiakkaan
asentama laippa
prosessin lämpötila:
–40 - +85 °C (–40 - +185 °F)
Suomi
mmmmm
1. HART® on HART Communications Foundationin rekisteröity tavaramerkki.
Sivu FI-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – PIKAKÄYTTÖOPAS A5E32168031

Virta
Nimellisjännite 24 V (tasavirta) ja lisätietoja muista kokoonpanoista on oppaan
enintään 550 Ohm: laajassa versiossa.
• Enintään 30 V DC
• 4 - 20 mA
Hyväksynnät
• Yleiset: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Räjähdysvaaralliset tilat 
Luonnostaan 
vaaraton (Eurooppa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(USA/Kanada) FM/CSA1: (edellyttää suojausta)
Luokka I, jako 1, ryhmät A, B, C, D
Luokka II, jako 1, ryhmät E, F, G
Luokka III T4
(Kansainvälinen) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brasilia) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Sytyttämätön (USA) FM2:
Luokka I, jako 2, ryhmät A,B,C,D T5
• Meriympäristö Lloyd's Register of Shipping
ABS-tyyppihyväksyntä
Huomautus: Tyyppi 4X / NEMA 4X, tyyppi 6 / NEMA 6, IP67-, IP68-tyypin ulkosovelluksissa

on käytettävä hyväksyttyjä pöly- ja vesitiiviitä johdintiivisteitä.
Suomi
1. Katso FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing sivu 1 liitteen A piirustus nro 23650516, tai CSA
Intrinsically Safe connection drawing sivu 2liitteen A piirustus nro 23650517.
2. Katso FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing sivu 3 liitteen A piirustus nro 23650583.

Asennus
VAROITUKSET:
• Rakenneaineet valitaan yleisiin käyttötarkoituksiin niiden kemiallisen
yhteensopivuuden (eli reagoimattomuuden) perusteella. Erityisympäristöille
altistuvissa sovelluksissa kemiallinen yhteensopivuus on tarkistettava taulukoista
ennen asennusta.
• Tämä tuote toimii asianmukaisesti ja turvallisesti ainoastaan, jos kuljetuksen,
varastoinnin, asennuksen, säädön, käytön ja huollon yhteydessä toimitaan
asianmukaisesti.
• Käyttäjä vastaa laipan kiinnitys- ja tiivistemateriaaleista, käyttötavasta ja
huoltokelpoisuudesta.
Huomautus: Asennuksen saa suorittaa ainoastaan asiantunteva henkilöstö ja
asennuksessa on noudatettava paikallisia määräyksiä.
Asennuspaikka
Suositukset
• Ympäristön lämpötilan vaihteluväli –40 - +80 °C (–40 - +176 °F).
• Sopivassa asennuspaikassa näytön näkee helposti ja sen voi ohjelmoida helposti
käsiohjelmointilaitteella.
• Asennuspaikan on oltava laitteen kotelon luokituksen ja rakenneaineiden mukainen.
• Äänen kulkusuunnan on oltava kohtisuorassa aineen pintaan nähden.
Varotoimet:
• Vältä sijoittamista korkeajännitteisten ja -virtaisten johtojen ja liittimien sekä
vaihtuvataajuisten moottorien nopeudenohjainten lähelle.
• Vältä esteiden tai täytön aiheuttamia häiriöitä äänen kulkualueella.
Täyttö
Äänen kulkualueen tulee olla:
• kohtisuorassa
tarkkailtavaan pintaan
nähden
putki
• vapaa karkeista
seinistä, saumoista,
poikkipuista ja muista poikkipuut
esteistä
• täyttöaukon saumat
vaikutuksen
10°
ulottumattomissa
Suomi
mmmmm

Asennusohjeet
Huomautus: SITRANS Probe LU asennetaan ihannetapauksessa niin, että anturin
pinta on ainakin 300 mm korkeimman arvioidun tason yläpuolella.
SITRANS Probe LU on saatavissa kolmella eri kierteellä: NPT 2" , BSP 2" tai PF2/G.
1. Ennen kuin työnnät SITRANS Probe LU:n asennusliitäntäänsä, varmista, että kierteet ovat
samaa tyyppiä, jotta ne eivät vahingoitu.
2. Kiinnitä SITRANS Probe LU prosessiliitäntään kiertämällä paikoilleen ja kiristä käsin.
Johdotus
Virta1
VAROITUKSET:
Tasavirtaliittimet on kytkettävä IEC -1010-1 -standardin Liitteen H mukaiseen
SELV1 -lähteeseen.
Kaikissa kenttäjohtimissa on oltava ilmoitetun jännitteen mukainen eristys.
SITRANS Probe LU:n kytkeminen

Huomautukset: kannen ruuvit
• Yksityiskohtaiset tiedot luonnostaan
vaarattoman rakenteen toteutuksesta saranoitu
ovat oppaan laajassa versiossa. luukku
• Käytä suojattuja kierrettyjä parikaapeleja

(lankamitta AWG 22 - AWG 14/0.34 mm2 -
2.08 mm2).
• Standardien tai sähkölainsäädännön
mukaiseen johdotukseen saatetaan
tarvita erilliset kaapelit ja johtimet.
• Metalliton kotelo ei muodosta jatkuvaa
maadoitusta putkiliitäntöjen välille: käytä kierreliitäntä vesitiivis
maadoittavia läpivientejä ja välijohtimia. holkki
Suomi
mmmmm
1. Turvallinen pienoisjännite

1. Pura kaapelin vaippaa noin 70 mm:n matkalta silmukkavirtaliittimet
toisesta päästä ja pujota johdot holkin läpi1.
A
m
2. Kytke johdot liittimiin yllä kuvatulla tavalla:

napaisuus on merkitty riviliittimeen.
3. Kiristä holkki, niin että johdot lukittuvat hyvin
paikoilleen.
4. Sulje kansi ja kiristä ruuvit: älä kiristä ruuveja
liian tiukkaan. kaapeli
Suositeltu momentti on 1,1-1,7 N-m.
Kytkentämääritykset asennettaessa räjähdysvaarallisiin tiloihin1

Tarkista hyväksyntäluokitus aina laitteen nimikilvestä ja prosessikilvestä.
1. Luonnostaan vaaraton johdotus
Laitteen nimikilpi (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
ATEX-sertifikaatti voidaan ladata tuotesivulta sivustostamme osoitteesta

www.siemens.com/probelu. Siirry kohtaan Support (Tuki) > Approvals / Certificates
(Hyväksynnät / Sertifikaatit).
Tuotekilvessä mainittu IECEx-sertifikaatti on tarkistettavissa IECEx:n verkkosivustossa.
Mene sivulle http://iecex.iec.ch ja napsauta kohtaa Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity.
Syötä sen jälkeen sertifikaatin numero IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Laitteen nimikilpi (FM/CSA)
SITRANS Probe LU
Luonnostaan vaaraton FM-johdotuspiirustus numero 23650516 ja luonnostaan vaaraton

CSA-johdotuspiirustus numero 23650517 voidaan ladata tuotesivultamme osoitteesta
www.siemens.com/probelu. Siirry kohtaan Support (Tuki) > Installation Drawings
(Asennuspiirustukset) > Level Measurement (Tason mittaus) > Continuous - Ultrasonic
(Jatkuva - Ultraääni).
• Tehontarve: katso Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance sivu 4.
• Johdotusvaatimukset: noudata paikallisia määräyksiä.
• Tyyppi 4X / NEMA 4X, Tyyppi 6 / NEMA 6, IP67-, IP68-tyypin ulkosovelluksissa on
käytettävä hyväksyttyjä pöly- ja vesitiiviitä johdintiivisteitä.
• Katso Räjähdysvaarallisten tilojen asennusta koskevat ohjeet (ATEX-direktiivi 94/9/
Suomi
EY, liite II, kohta 1/0/6) sivu 7.
1. Jos vedät kaapelin putken kautta, käytä vain hyväksyttyjä ja sopivankokoisia vedenkestäviä
keskittimiä.

2. Sytyttämätön johdotus (vain FM USA)
FM luokka 1, jako 2 -kytkentäpiirustus nro 23650583 voidaan ladata tuotesivulta

sivustostamme osoitteesta www.siemens.com/probelu. Siirry kohtaan Support (Tuki) >
Installation Drawings (Asennuspiirustukset) > Level Measurement (Tason mittaus) >
Continuous - Ultrasonic (Jatkuva - Ultraääni).
• Tehontarve: katso liite A, Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance sivu 4.
Räjähdysvaarallisten tilojen asennusta koskevat ohjeet

(ATEX-direktiivi 94/9/EY, liite II, kohta 1/0/6)
Seuraavat ohjeet koskevat sertifikaatin SIRA 06ATEX2355X mukaisia SITRANS Probe LU -
laitteita:
1. Käyttö- ja kokoamisohjeet ovat pääohjeissa.
2. Laite on sertifioitu luokan 1G laitteeksi.
3. Laitetta saadaan käyttää palavien kaasujen ja höyryjen yhteydessä laiteluokissa IIA, IIB
ja IIC sekä lämpötilaluokissa T1, T2, T3 ja T4.
4. Laite on sertifioitu käytettäväksi -40 - +80 C:n ympäristön lämpötilassa.
5. Laitetta ei ole luokiteltu direktiivin 94/9/EY liitteen II kohdan 1.5 mukaiseksi turvallisuuteen
myötävaikuttavaksi laitteeksi.
6. Tämän laitteen saa asentaa ja tarkistaa vain koulutettu henkilö sovellettavan standardin
(Euroopassa EN 60079-14 ja EN 60079-17) mukaisesti.
7. Tämän laitteen saa korjata vain koulutettu henkilö sovellettavan käytännön ja standardin
(Euroopassa EN 60079-19) mukaisesti.
8. Laitteeseen liitettävät tai vaihdettavat osat saa asentaa vain koulutettu henkilö
valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
9. Käyttäjä vastaa laitteen sulkemisen manuaalisesti mahdollistavan ohituskytkeminen
asentamisesta sekä suunnitelluista käyttöolosuhteista poikkeavien automaattisten
prosessien suojajärjestelmien integroinnista (sillä edellytyksellä että tämä ei vaikuta
käyttöturvallisuuteen).
10. X-pääte sertifiointinumerossa tarkoittaa, että laitteen turvalliseen käyttöön sovelletaan
seuraavia erikoisehtoja:
Osa kotelosta ei ehkä johda sähköä ja saattaa synnyttää tietyissä oloissa
sähköstaattisia varauksia, jotka voivat sytyttää materiaaleja. Käyttäjän tulee
varmistaa, että laitetta ei asenneta ympäristöön, jossa se altistuu ulkoisille
olosuhteille (kuten korkeapaineiselle höyrylle), jotka saattavat synnyttää
sähköstaattisia varauksia sähköä johtamattomille pinnoille.
Suomi

11. Jos laite joutuu todennäköisesti kosketuksiin voimakkaasti reagoivien aineiden kanssa,
käyttäjän on varmistettava, että kyseiset aineet eivät pääse vaikuttamaan laitteeseen ja
heikentämään sen suojausta.
Voimakkaasti reagoivat aineet:
esimerkiksi metalleja syövyttävät hapot ja polymeeriin
vaikuttavat liuotteet.
Varatoimet: esimerkiksi säännölliset tarkistukset tai sen
tarkistaminen, että laitteen materiaali kestää tiettyjä
kemikaaleja.
12. Laitteen merkinnät:
Laitteen merkinnät sisältävät vähintään tuote-esitteen tiedot, jotka on esitelty tämän
oppaan sisäkannessa.
Käyttö
RUN- ja PROGRAM-tilat
SITRANS Probe LU:ssa on kaksi toimintatilaa: RUN ja PROGRAM
Kun virta kytketään, SITRANS Probe LU asettuu automaattisesti RUN-tilaan ja mittaa aineen
korkeustasoa. Ensisijainen lukema näyttää aineen korkeuden (metreinä) suhteessa Tyhjään
(prosessin perustasoon). Kyseessä on oletuskäynnistystila.
Järjestelmän tila näkyy nestekidenäytöltä tai kaukonäytöstä.
RUN-käyttötilan näyttö
12
Voit hallita näyttöä käsiohjelmointilaitteella.
Tavallinen käyttö Vikaturvallinen käyttö
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 - Ensisijainen lukema (pinnan korkeus, etäisyys tai tilavuus yksikköinä tai prosentteina)1.
2 - Toissijainen lukema (apulukeman parametrinumero2)
3 - Kaiun tilailmaisin: luotettava kaiku tai epävarma kaiku
4 - Yksikkö tai prosenttimerkki
5 - Pinnan tasoa kuvaava aktiivinen pylväskaavio
6 - Apulukema (valitun parametrin mukaan, näyttää milliampeeriarvon, etäisyyden tai kaiun
luotettavuuden, tarvittaessa yksikköinä).
Suomi
mmmmm
1. Lisätietoja virtaaman näyttämisestä tilavuuden sijaan on oppaan laajassa versiossa, parametria P050
koskevassa kohdassa.
2.
Paina , kun haluat nähdä apulukeman ollessasi RUN-tilassa.

Jos kaiun luotettavuus putoaa kynnysarvon alle, vikaturva-ajastin käynnistyy. Jos ajastin ehtii
laskea nollaan, näytössä näkyy LOE (Loss of Echo, kaikuvika) -viesti kahden sekunnin välein
vuorotellen lukeman kanssa ja luotettavan kaiun ilmaisimen tilalla näkyy epävarman kaiun
ilmaisin. Kun laite vastaanottaa kelvollisen lukeman, pintalukemanäyttö palaa normaaliin
toimintatilaan.
PROGRAM-ohjelmointitilan näyttö
2 3 1- Ensisijainen lukema (parametrin arvo)
2- Toissijainen lukema (parametrinumero)
1
3- Ohjelmointi-ilmaisin
4 4- Apulukema (parametrien P001-P010 nimet, jos kieli on
valittu. Indeksoitujen parametrin hakemistoarvo, kuten
P054).
Ohjelmointi
• Määritä parametrit sovelluksen mukaisiksi.
• Voit aktivoida PROGRAM-ohjelmointitilan milloin tahansa, kun haluat muuttaa
parametrien arvoja ja määrittää käyttöasetukset.
• Käytä paikalliseen ohjelmointiin Siemens -käsiohjelmointilaitetta.
• Käytä etäohjelmointiin SIMATIC PDM -järjestelmällä toimivaa henkilökohtaista
tietokonetta tai HART-yhteensopivaa taskutieturia.
Käsiohjelmointilaite
Voit käyttää SITRANS Probe LU -laitetta Painike Ohjelmointitila
suoraan suuntaamalla
ohjelmointilaitteen SITRANS Probe LU:n Desimaalipiste1
näyttöä kohti ja painamalla painikkeita
(Yksityiskohtaiset ohjeet ovat Negatiivinen arvo
seuraavalla sivulla).
Arvon TYHJENTÄMINEN
käsiohjelmointilaite Parametrin yksikköarvojen VAIHTAMINEN
prosenteiksi ja päinvastoin
OHJELMOINTITILAN sulkeminen ja
näyttö KÄYTTÖTILAAN siirtyminen
Kaiun laatuparametrien päivitys
enint. 600 mm Parametrien vieritys ylöspäin
Parametrien vieritys alaspäin
Parametrien avaaminen NÄYTÖSSÄ
Näytetyn arvon SYÖTTÄMINEN
1. Paina ja sen jälkeen sen parametrin kolmenumero-

inen koodi, jonka haluat näyttää apunäytöllä.
Suomi
mmmmm

Alhaisen lämpötilan vaikutukset RUN- ja PROGRAM-tiloihin
Jos laitteen sisäinen lämpötila laskee -30 oC:seen tai sen alle, sekä RUN- että PROGRAM-tilat
häiriintyvät.
RUN -tila toimii tavanomaisesti seuraavin poikkeuksin:
• käsiohjelmointilaite ei ole käytössä
• näytössä näkyy ainoastaan minimitiedot: pylväskaavio ja luotettavan/epäluotettavan
kaiun ilmaisin.
PROGRAM -tila:
• käsiohjelmointilaite ei ole käytössä
Suojaus: (P000: Lukitus)

Arvo Kuvaus
P069-parametrin arvo * Lukitus pois käytöstä: laitetta voi ohjelmoida
muu Lukitus käytössä: muutoksia ei saa tehdä
* P069-parametrin tehdasasetus on 1954: kun syötät ja hyväksyt uuden arvon, siitä tulee
oletusarvo.
SITRANS Probe LU:n aktivointi

Kytke laitteeseen virta. SITRANS Probe LU käynnistyy RUN-tilassa.
Huomautukset:
• Pidä infrapunalaitteet, kuten kannettavat tietokoneet, matkapuhelimet ja taskutieturit
poissa SITRANS Probe LU:n läheisyydestä, jottei sen toiminta häiriinny.
• Seuraavat ohjeet koskevat käsiohjelmointilaitetta.
• Älä käytä käsiohjelmointilaitetta samanaikaisesti SIMATIC PDM -taskutieturin kanssa,
jottei laitteen toiminta häiriinny.
• Paina ensin PROGRAM ja sitten DISPLAY , jolloin siirryt PROGRAM -
ohjelmointitilaan. Voit palata RUN -käyttötilaan painamalla PROGRAM uudelleen.
• Alkunollia ei tarvitse näppäillä parametrinumeroihin: esimerkiksi P005-parametrin voi
näppäillä painamalla vain 5
Suomi
mmmmm

Parametrin haku
1. Paina ensin PROGRAM ja sitten DISPLAY , PROGRAM-
jolloin PROGRAM-tila aktivoituu. kuvake
2. Siirry parametrien välillä NUOLINÄPPÄIMILLÄ Parametrinumero

Parametriarvo
tai
3. Avaa parametrinumerokenttä painamalla DISPLAY
Nykyinen arvo
4. Näppäile haluamasi parametrinumero ja paina sitten
ENTER
5. Esimerkki: paina ja sitten .
6. Nestekidenäyttöön tulee uusi parametrinumero ja -
arvo.
Parametriarvon muuttaminen
Huomautukset:
• Ohjelmointi edellyttää suojauksen poistamista käytöstä: muuta P000-parametrin arvoksi
P069-parametrin arvoksi tallennettu lukituksen avausarvo. (Jos P799-parametriarvo sallii,
etäpääkäyttäjä voi muuttaa kokoonpanoa lukituksesta huolimatta).
• Virheellisiä arvoja ei hyväksytä tai ne rajoitetaan.
• Kentän voi tyhjentää painamalla CLEAR .
1. Näppäile uusi arvo.
2. Aseta arvo painamalla ENTER .
Parametrin tehdasasetuksen palauttaminen
1. Siirry vierittämällä parametriin tai kirjoita sen osoite.
2. Paina ensin CLEAR ja sitten ENTER . Oletusarvo otetaan käyttöön.
Kaikkien arvojen palauttaminen (P999)

P999-parametri palauttaa oletusarvot kaikkiin parametreihin parametreja P000 ja P069 lukuun
ottamatta. (Opittu aikavaihtelukynnys ei nollaudu).
1. Paina ensin PROGRAM , ja sitten DISPLAY , jolloin laite siirtyy PROGRAM-
ohjelmointitilaan.
2. Avaa parametrikentät painamalla DISPLAY
3. Näppäile 999.
4. Paina ensin CLEAR ja sitten ENTER , jolloin kaikki arvot
palautuvat oletusarvoiksi. Nestekidenäytössä näkyy C.ALL.
5. Oletusarvojen palautus on valmis. (Arvojen palautus kestää

useita sekunteja).
Suomi
mmmmm

Pika-asetus: vaiheet 1-10
Huomautus: Tehdasasetukset on merkitty taulukkoon tähdellä (*).
1. Valitse kieli (P010: Kieli)

numeerinen/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
ei mitään P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 english
Arvot P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 saksa P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 ranska P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 espanja
2. Aseta P001-parametri: Toimintatila (mittaustila)

Huomautukset:
• P001-parametrin asettaminen nollaa P007-parametrin (ääritason), mikäli sen arvoa ei ole
muutettu.
• P001-parametrin muuttaminen saattaa vaikuttaa P201-parametriin (tulostustila): tämä
koskee vain HART-ohjelmointia.
Pinnan korkeus - palauttaa etäisyyden aineen pintaan suhteessa tyhjä-arvoon

1 * (prosessin perustasoon). Jos tilavuusyksiköiden näyttöasetukset on määritetty
050- ja 055-parametreihin, lukema ilmoitetaan tilavuusyksikköinä.
Arvot
2 Väli - palauttaa etäisyyden pintaan suhteessa ääritasoon (prosessin ylin taso).
Etäisyys - palauttaa etäisyyden pintaan suhteessa viitepisteeseen (anturin
3
pintaan).
Pinnan korkeus-, väli- ja etäisyystoimintojen mA-tulot

Pinnan korkeus Väli Etäisyys
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
anturin pinta 0%
(4 mA)
(20 mA) Ääritaso (4 mA) Ääritaso
Ääritaso 0% Etäisyys
100 %
Väli
P007
P006 Pinnan
korkeus
Tyhjä Tyhjä
Tyhjä 0% 100 % 100 %
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Aseta mittausvastinnopeus (P003)

1 * hidas 0,1 m minuutissa
Arvot 2 keskitaso 1 m minuutissa
Suomi
3 nopea 10 m minuutissa
mmmmm
Aseta P003-parametrin avulla mittausvastinnopeus sellaiseksi, että se on hieman nopeampi kuin

enimmäistäyttönopeus tai enimmäistyhjennysnopeus (sen mukaan kumpi on suurempi).

4. Valitse mittayksikkö (P005)
1 * metri
2 senttimetri
Arvot 3 millimetri
4 jalka
5 tuuma
5. Aseta prosessin perustaso (P006: Tyhjä) Pinnankorkeuden asettaminen
Huomautus: Anturin pinta

• P006- ja P007-parametrit liittyvät toisiinsa:
Ääritaso
katso P007-parametria koskevat 100 %
huomautukset.
P007
0,0000-6,000 m tai
Alue P006
Arvot 0,0000-12,000 m
Oletusarvo Enimmäisalue Pinnan korkeus
Tyhjäarvoksi voi määrittää minkä tahansa Tyhjä 0%

etäisyyden: Sen ei tarvitse olla säiliön pohja.
6. Aseta mittausalue (P007: Ääritaso)1

0,0000-6,000 m tai Ääritasoksi voi määrittää minkä tahansa
Alue
0,0000-12,000 m etäisyyden tyhjää tasoa korkeammalla
Arvot
5,725 m tai tasolla.
Oletusarvo
11,725 m
Huomautukset:
• P006-parametrin asettaminen nollaa ääritason, mikäli sen arvoa ei ole muutettu.
• Ääritason oletusarvo perustuu toimintatilan (P001) ja tyhjän tason (P006) arvoihin.
Ääritasoksi asetetaan tyhjä taso - 110 % toimintatilan arvosta1 paitsi, jos toimintatilaksi
on asetettu etäisyysmittaus (P001=3). Tällöin ääritasoksi asetetaan etäisyys tyhjään
tasoon.
• Varmista, ettei tarkkailtava pinta missään vaiheessa ulotu alle 0,3 metrin päähän anturin
pinnasta. Näin jää vielä 0,05 metrin turvamarginaali, koska 0,25 m on pienin laitteen
havaitsema etäisyys.
7. Minimoi virheelliset heijastukset: Aseta P838 (automaattinen häiriökaiun

vaimennusetäisyys)
Käytä P838- ja P837- Suurin alue:
Alue
parametreja yhdessä. 0,000-6,000 m tai
Arvo (mallista riippuen)
Noudata parametria P837 0,000-12 m
koskevia ohjeita. Oletusarvo 1,000 m
Suomi
mmmmm
1. Toimintatilan tason oletusarvo on 0,25 m

8. Ota automaattinen häiriökaiun vaimennus käyttöön: Aseta P837
(Automaattinen häiriökaiun vaimennus)
0 Ei käytössä
Arvo 1 * Käytä opittua aikavaihtelukynnystä
2 Oppiminen
P837- ja P838-parametrien käyttäminen (suorita nämä toimet pinnan ollessa

alhaalla)
Aikavaihtelukynnyksen avulla asetetaan raja-arvot, jotka poistavat häiriökaiut1. Jos SITRANS
Probe LU näyttää virheellisesti täyttä pinnankorkeutta tai jos näytettävä mittausarvo vaihtelee
virheellisen korkean tason ja todellisen tason välillä, on parametrit P837 and P838 syytä
säätää. Kasvata näillä parametreilla kyseisen mittausalueen aikavaihtelukynnystä ja vaimenna
vastaanottimen herkkyyttä anturin sisäisistä heijastuksista ja suutinkaiuista tai muista säiliön
vääristä kaiuista johtuvalle pohjakohinalle2.
P837- ja P838-parametrien käyttäminen (jatkuu)
Huomautukset:
• Käytä toimintoa vain silloin, kun SITRANS Probe LU sijaitsee vähintään 2 metrin
etäisyydellä aineesta. Toiminto toimii parhaiten silloin, kun säiliö on tyhjä tai melkein
tyhjä.
• Aseta P837- ja P838-parametrit käynnistyksen aikana, jos mahdollista.
• Jos säiliössä on sekoituskone, sen tulee olla käynnissä.
a. Määrittele todellinen etäisyys anturin pinnasta aineen pinnan tasoon.
b. Valitse P838 ja syötä [etäisyys nesteen pintaan - 0,5 m].
c. Valitse P837 ja paina ensin 2 (Oppiminen) ja sitten ENTER . P 837 palaa
automaattisesti tilaan 1 (Opitun aikavaihtelukynnyksen käyttö) muutaman sekunnin
kuluessa.
9. Palaa RUN-käyttötilaan.
Paina PROGRAM , jolloin laite siirtyy RUN-käyttötilaan. Asetus on valmis.
SITRANS Probe LU -laitteen tiedonsiirto: HART

Huomautus: Kohdassa Pinnan korkeus-, väli- ja etäisyystoimintojen mA-tulot sivu 12 on
kuva eri toimintatilojen mA-tuloista.
• Luettelo kaikista käytettävissä olevista parametreista löytyy oppaan laajasta versiosta.
• Jos haluat tietoja HART-laitemäärityksen (Device Description) saatavuudesta SITRANS
Probe LU-laitteeseen, ota yhteyttä paikalliseen edustajaan.
• Suosittelemme käyttämään laitteen ohjelmoinnin yhteydessä SIMATIC Process Device
Manager (PDM) -taskutieturia.
Huolto
SITRANS Probe LU ei tarvitse huoltoa eikä puhdistusta.
Laitteen korjaaminen ja vastuuvapauslauseke
Suomi
Katso lisätietoja takakannen sisäsivulta.

mmmmm
1. Väärät kaiut voivat johtua myös ultraäänikeilaan osuvista esteitä.

2. Lisätietoja vääristä kaiuista johtuvasta pohjakohinasta on oppaan laajassa versiossa.

SITRANS Probe LU Manual för Snabbstart
Denna manual ger en översikt över de viktigaste egenskaperna och funktionerna för SITRANS
Svenska
Probe LU. Vi råder dig på det bestämdaste att du skaffar dig den detaljerade versionen av
mmmmm
manualen så att du kan få ut det mesta av din apparat. Den fullständiga manualen finns tillgänglig
på vår webbplats: www.siemens.com/probelu. Den tryckta manualen finns tillgänglig från din
lokala representant för Siemens.
Frågor angående innehållet i denna manual kan sändas till:
Peterborough, Ontario, Kanada, K9J 7B1
Process Instruments 2013. Ansvarsbegränsning
Med ensamrätt
Vi råder användare att skaffa sig Trots att vi kontrollerat att innehållet i denna
auktoriserade inbundna handböcker, handbok överensstämmer med beskrivet materiel,
eller att konsultera av Siemens kan avvikelser förekomma. Därför kan vi inte
Milltronics Process Instruments garantera full överensstämmelse. Innehållet i
framtagna och utgivna elektroniska denna handbok revideras regelbundet och
versioner. Siemens Milltronics Process ändringar tas med i följande versioner. Vi
Instruments ansvarar inte för innehållet i välkomnar alla förslag till förbättringar.
ofullständiga eller kompletta kopior av
inbundna eller elektroniska versioner. Tekniska data kan komma att ändras.
MILLTRONICS är ett registrerat varumärke för Siemens Milltronics Process Instruments
Riktlinjer för säkerhet1

Varningsnotiser måste efterlevas för att din personliga och andras säkerhet skall kunna säkras
samt för att skydda produkten och ansluten utrustning. Dessa varningsnotiser åtföljs av
anvisningar om den säkerhetsnivå som skall observeras.
VARNING: berör en varningssymbol på produkten. Den innebär att underlåtenhet

att efterfölja de nödvändiga föreskrifterna kan orsaka dödsfall, svår
kroppsskada och/eller stor materiell skada.
VARNING1: innebär att underlåtenhet att efterfölja de nödvändiga föreskrifterna
kan orsaka dödsfall, svår kroppsskada och/eller stor materiell skada.
Anmärkning: innebär viktig information om produkten eller denna del av
användarmanualen
1. Denna varningssymbol används när det inte finns någon motsvarande varningssymbol på produkten.
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MANUAL FÖR SNABBSTART Sida SV-1

Svenska SITRANS Probe LU
VARNING: Ändringar eller modifikationer som inte uttryckligen godkänts av
mmmmm
Siemens skulle kunna upphäva användarens tillstånd att bruka utrustningen.

Anmärkningar:
• SITRANS Probe LU skall endast användas på det sätt som anvisas i denna manual;
i annat fall kan skyddet visa sig otillräckligt.
• Denna produkt är avsedd för användning i industriområden. Drift av denna
utrustning i ett bostadsområde kan förorsaka störningar av flera frekvensbaserade
kommunikationer.
SITRANS Probe LU är en loop-driven monitor kontinuerlig nivå, som använder avancerad

ultraljudsteknik. Instrumentet består av en elektronisk komponent som kopplats till antennen
och processanslutningen.
Transducern finns tillgänglig utförd i ETFE (etylen-tetrafluoroetylen) eller PVDF
(polyvinylidenfluorid), vilket gör att SITRANS Probe LU kan användas i många olika industrier
och tillämpningar där korrosiva kemikalier används.
Den ultrasoniska transducern innehåller en temperatursond som skall kompensera
temperaturvariationer i applikationen.
Kommunikation går mellan HART1 och signaler behandlas med användning av Sonic
Intelligence®.
Specifikationer
För fullständig lista, var god se SITRANS Probe LU Användarmanual. För information om
godkännanden hänvisas du till processapparatens tillverkningsplatta.
Rums- och arbetstemperatur

Anmärkning: Processtemperaturen och tryckkapaciteten beror av informationer som
finns angivna på processapparatens tillverkningsplatta. Referensritningen som anges
på tillverkningsplattan kan nedladdas från Siemens webbplats:
handprogrammerare
produktens namnplåt
rumstemperatur i
omgivningen: flänsadapter
–40 till +80 °C (–40 till +176 °F)
av kunden
anskaffad fläns
processtemperatur:
–40 till +85 °C (–40 till +185 °F)
1. HART® är ett registrerat handelsmärke för HART Communications Foundation.
Sida SV-2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – MANUAL FÖR SNABBSTART A5E32168031

Effekt
Nominell 24 V likström med max. för andra konfigurationer, var god se hela
550 Ohm: manualen.
Svenska
• Maximum 30 V DC
• 4 till 20 mA
Godkännanden
• Allmänt: CSAUS/C, FM, CE
• Riskfylld Fullständigt 
antändningssäker (Europa) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(USA/Kanada) FM/CSA1: (barriär erforderlig)
Klass I, Div. 1, Grupperna A, B, C, D
Klass II, Div. 1, Grupperna E, F, G
Klass III T4
(Internationell) IECEx SIR 13.0008X Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
(Brazil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070 X 
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga 
IP67/IP68 
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Icke-antändlig (US) FM2:
Klass I, Div. 2, Grupperna A, B, C, D T5
• Marin Lloyds Skeppningsregister
ABS Typgodkännande
Anmärkning: Godkända dammtäta och vattentäta kanaltätningar krävs utomhus typ 4X /

NEMA 4X, typ 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 platser.
1. Se FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing på sida 1 i bilaga A, för ritningsnummer 23650516, eller
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing på sida 2 i bilaga A, för ritningsnummer 23650517.
2. Se FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing på sida 3 i bilaga A, för ritningsnummer 23650583.

Installation
Varningar:
Svenska
mmmmm
• Konstruktionsmaterial väljs på basis av deras kemiska kompatibilitet (eller låga

reaktivitetsbenägenhet) för allmänna ändamål. För exponering mot specifika
omgivningar, kontrollerar du mot kemiska kompatibilitetskort innan du installerar.
• Denna produkt kan endast fungera rätt och säkert om den transporteras, lagras,
installeras, sätts upp, används och underhålls på rätt sätt.
• Användaren är ansvarig för val av material för bultar och packningar som ligger
innanför flänsens gränser och avsedda ändamål och som är lämpliga för de
förhållanden som råder under användningen.
Anmärkning: Installation får endast utföras av kompetent personal och enligt gällande
lokala bestämmelser.
Monteringsplats
Rekommendationer
• Rumstemperatur inom –40 till +80 °C (–40 till +176 °F).
• Lätt tillgänglig för visning av display och programmering via handprogrammeraren.
• Omgivning lämplig för höljets kvalitet och konstruktionsmaterial.
• Håll en ljudväg vinkelrätt mot materialets yta.
Försiktighetsåtgärder:
• Undvik att ha apparaturen i närheten av högspännings- eller strömledningar,
högspännings- eller strömkontakter samt till motorhastighetskontrollerare för variabel
frekvens.
• Undvik interferens med emissionskonen från hinder eller från påfyllningsanordningar.
Fyll
Emissionskonen skall vara:
• vinkelrät mot den
studerade ytan
• fri från skrovliga väggar, rör
fogar, trappsteg eller
trappsteg
andra hinder
• fri från
fogar
påfyllningsanordningar 10°

Instruktioner för montering
Anmärkning: Idealt bör du montera SITRANS Probe LU så att transducerns framsida
befinner sig minst 300 mm (1 ft.) ovanför den högsta förutsedda nivån.
Svenska
mmmmm
SITRANS Probe LU finns tillgänglig i tre gängningstyper: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, eller PF2/G.
1. Innan du sätter in SITRANS Probe LU i sin fattning skall du göra dig säker på att gängorna
är av samma typ så att du undviker att skada dem.
2. Skruva helt enkelt SITRANS Probe LU in i processanslutningen och dra åt med handen.
Kabling
Effektförbrukning1
Varningar:
likströmsterminaler skall försörjas från en SELV1-källa i enlighet med IEC-1010-1
Bilaga H.
All fältkabling måste ha isolering lämpad för den pålagda spänningen.
Hur du ansluter SITRANS Probe LU

Anmärkningar: täckskruvar
• För detaljerad information om
uppsättningar med Egensäkerhet, var god upphängt
läs hela manualen. lock
• Använd skärmad, tvinnad parkabel
(trådklinka AWG 22 till AWG 14 /0.34 mm2
till 2.08 mm2).
• Separata kablar och ledningar kan komma
att behövas för att nå konformitet
gentemot standardmetoder för kabling av
instrumentering eller elektriska koder.
• Icke-metallisk skärmning erbjuder inte gängad vattentät
anslutning gland
kontnuerlig jordledning mellan ledningens
konnektioner: använd bussningar och
jumpers av jordningstyp.
1. Extra låg spänning för säkerhet

1. Strippa kabelisoleringen över ungefär 70 mm
(2.75") från kabelns ända och trä ledningarna terminaler för A
slingström m
genom glanden1.
Svenska
2. Anslut ledningarna till terminalerna så som visas

ovan: polariteten finns angiven på
terminalblocket.
3. Dra åt glanden så att du får god försegling.
4. Lägg på locket och dra åt skruvarna: var god dra
inte åt skruvarna för hårt. Rekommenderat kabel
vridmoment är 1.1 till 1.7 N-m (10 till 15 in-lb).
Kabeldragningar för installationer i farligt område

Kontrollera alltid på apparatens märkskylt och processbricka att värdena är godkända.
1. Egensäker kabeldragning
Apparatens märkskylt (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/C-TICK)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
ATEX-certifikatet kan laddas ner från produktsidan på vår webbplats på:

www.siemens.com/probelu. Gå till Support > Approvals / Certificates (Godkännanden/
Intyg).
IECEx-certifikat listat på märkskylten kan ses på IECEx-webbsidan. Gå till: http://iecex.iec.ch
och klicka på Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity och för sedan in certifikatnumret
IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Apparatens märkskylt (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
FM Egensäker anslutning ritning nummer 23650516, och CSA Egensäker anslutning ritning
nummer 23650517 kan laddas ner från produktsidan på vår webbplats på: www.siemens.com/
probelu. Gå till Support > Installation Drawings (Installationsritningar) > Level Measurement
(Nivåmätning) > Continuous – Ultrasonic (Kontinuerlig – Ultraljud).
• För effektbehov se Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance på sida 4.
• För kabeldragningskrav: följ lokala bestämmelser.
• Godkända dammtäta och vattentäta kanaltätningar krävs utomhus typ 4X /
NEMA 4X, typ 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 platser.
• Se Instruktioner som gäller installation på riskabla platser (Referens: Europeiska
ATEX-direktivet 94/9/EG, Bilaga II, 1/0/6) på sida 7.

2. Icke antändlig kabeldragning (endast FM USA)
Svenska
FM Klass 1, Div 2 anslutningsritning nummer 23650583 kan laddas ner från produktsidan på
vår webbplats på: www.siemens.com/probelu. Gå till Support > Installation Drawings
(Installationsritningar) > Level Measurement (Nivåmätning) > Continuous – Ultrasonic
(Kontinuerlig – Ultraljud).
• För effektbehov se Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance på sida 4 Bilaga A.
Instruktioner som gäller installation på riskabla platser

(Referens: Europeiska ATEX-direktivet 94/9/EG, Bilaga II, 1/0/6)
Följande instruktioner är tillämpliga på SITRANS Probe LU täckt av certifikat nummer SIRA
06ATEX2355X:
1. För all användning och montering skall du konsultera huvudinstruktionerna.
2. Utrustningen har certifikat för användning som utrustning i Kategori 1G.
3. Utrustningen kan användas med eldfarliga gaser och ångor med apparateri i grupperna
IIA, IIB, IIC och temperaturklasser T1, T2, T3 och T4.
4. Utrustningen har certifikat för användning i rumstemperaturer från –40 C till +80 C.
5. Utrustningen har inte beskrivits som avsedd som säkerhetsutrustning (så som
rapporterats av Direktivet 94/9/EG Bilaga II, klausul 1.5).
6. Installation och inspektion av denna utrustning skall utföras av lämpligt utbildad personal
i enlighet med tillämpliga delar av arbetspraxis (EN 60079-14 och EN 60079-17 i Europa).
7. Reparation av denna utrustning av denna utrustning skall utföras av lämpligt utbildad
personal i enlighet med tillämpliga delar av arbetspraxis (t.ex. EN 60079-19 inom Europa).
8. Komponenter som skall inkorporeras i eller användas som reservdelar i utrustningen
skall monteras av lämpligt utbildad personal i enlighet med tillverkarens dokumentation.
9. Det är användarens ansvar att säkerställa att manuellt övertagande är möjligt för att man
skall kunna stänga av utrustningen och skyddssystem som inkorporerats inom ramen för
automatiska processer som avviker från de avsiktliga användningsförhållandena,
förutsatt att detta inte komprometterar säkerheten.
10. ‘X’-suffixet i certifikatnumret hör samman med följande specialförhållanden för säker
användning:
Delar av de omgivande väggarna kan vara isolerande och skulle kunna
generera elektrostatiska laddningar och gnistbildning under vissa extrema
förhållanden. Användaren skall säkerställa att utrustningen inte installeras på
platser där den kan utsättas för yttre förhållanden (såsom ånga under högt
tryck) vilket skulle kunna medföra uppkomst av elektrostatisk laddning på
isolerande ytor.

11. Om utrustningen riskerar komma i kontakt med agressiva ämnen åligger det användaren
att vidtaga lämpliga åtgärder för att förhindra att utrustningen skadas och på detta sätt
säkerställa att skyddstypen inte visar sig otillräcklig.
Aggressiva ämnen: t.ex. syror eller gaser som kan skada metaller eller
Svenska
lösningsmedel som kan angripa polymermaterial.

mmmmm
Lämpliga skyddsåtgärder: t.ex. regelbundna kontroller som del av rutinmässiga

inspektioner eller bekräftelse från materialets
datablad att det motstår vissa kemiska produkter
12. Markering av utrustningen:
Utrustningens markering innehåller minst den information som finns på
tillverkningsplattan som visas på det inre pärmuppslaget i denna manual.
Drift
RUN-läge och PROGRAM-läge
SITRANS Probe LU har två funktionssätt: RUN och PROGRAM.
SITRANS Probe LU startar automatiskt i funktionssättet RUN när strömmen kopplas på och
detekterar materialnivån. Den primära avläsningen visar materialnivån (i meter) räknat från
Tom (processens tomnivå). Detta är standardsättet för start i displayläge.
Systemstatus visas på LCD-displayen eller på en avlägsen kommunikationsterminal.
RUN Mode Display1

Använd handprogrammeraren för kontroll av displayen.
23
Normal operation Felsäker operation
2 3 3
1 1
4 4
6 5 5
m 6 m
1 – Primäravläsning (visar nivå, avstånd eller volym2, antingen i heltalsenheter eller

procentenheter).
2 – Sekundäravläsning (visar Parametertalet för Hjälpavläsning3)
3– Eko statusindikator: Pålitligt Eko eller Opålitligt Eko
4– Enheter eller Procent
5– Aktivt stapeldiagram visar materialnivå
6– Hjälpavläsning (beroende på den valda parametern visar den värdet i milliAmp,
avståndet, eller ekokonfidens, med enheter där detta är tillämpligt.)
1. Om kabel dras genom isolerande tub skall du endast använda godkända hubbar av lämplig storlek för
vattentät tillämpning.
2.
För detaljer i visning av flöde i stället för volym, v.g. se P050 i den fullständiga manualen.
3.
Tryck på för visning av hjälpavläsningsfältet när du befinner dig i arbetssättet RUN.

Om ekokonfidensen faller under tröskelvärdet för ekokonfidensen startar den felsäkra timern.
När timern går ut visas bokstäverna LOE (Förlust av eko) omväxlande med det avlästa värdet
varannan sekund och indikatorn för det Pålitliga Ekoindikatorn byts ut mot den Opålitliga
indikatorn. När en giltig avläsning mottages, återgår den nivåavläsande displayen till normal
Svenska
operation.
mmmmm
Display av funktionssättet PROGRAM
2 3 1– Primäravläsning (Visar parametervärde)
2– Sekundäravläsning (visar parameternummer)
1
3– Programmeringsindikator
4 4– Hjälpavläsning (visar parameternamn för P001 till P010
om ett språk väljs. Den visar indexvärdet för indexerade
parametrar, såsom P054).
Programmering
• Ställ parametrarna så att de passar din specifika applikation.
• Aktivera PROGRAM läget när som helst, för att ändra parametervärdena och ställa in
verkliga användningsförhållanden.
• För lokal programmering använder du Siemens handprogrammerare.
• För programmering från ett visst avstånd använder du antingen en PC som kör
SIMATIC PDM, eller en HART handhållen kommunikator.
Handprogrammerare
Knapp Programmeringsläge
För direkt tillträde till SITRANS Probe LU,
pekar du med programmeraren mot Decimalkomma (/punkt)1
displayen på SITRANS Probe LU och
trycker på knapparna. (För detaljerade Negativt värde
instruktioner, se nästa sida).
RADERA värde
handprogrammerare VÄXLA mellan Enheter och % på
parametervärde
Avsluta PROGRAM-sessionen och öppna för
display RUN -läge
Uppdatera parametrar för ekokvalitet
max. 600 mm Parameter skroll-upp

(2 ft.)
Parameter skroll-ner
DISPLAY öppnar parameterfält
BEKRÄFTA (ENTER) det visade värdet
1. Tryck på plus ett tresiffrigt parameternummer för

inställning av parametern för visning av hjälpdisplay.

Lågtemperatureffekter för arbetssätten RUN/PROGRAM
Om den inre temperaturen faller till –30 oC (–22 oF) eller lägre, kommer detta att påverka bägge
arbetssätten RUN och PROGRAM.
Svenska
RUN arbetssätt kommer att fungera normalt, med följande undantag:

mmmmm
• användningen av Handprogrammeraren är avstängd

• LCD-displayen visar endast begränsad information: stav grafen och den pålitliga/
opålitliga ekoindikatorn
PROGRAM arbetssätt:
• användningen av Handprogrammeraren är avstängd
Säkerhet: (P000: Lås)

Värde Beskrivning
Värde som lagras i P069 * Upplåst: programmering tillåten
annan Lås aktiverat: ändringar ej tillåtna
* Fabriksinställning för P069 är 1954: efter det att ett nytt värde angivits och accepterats blir
detta det nya standardvärdet.
Aktivering av SITRANS Probe LU

Inkoppling av instrumentet på elnätet. SITRANS Probe LU startar i arbetssättet RUN.
Anmärkningar:
• Håll infraröda apparater såsom laptops, celltelefoner och PDA borta från SITRANS Probe
LU för att förhindra oavsiktliga manövrar.
• Följande instruktioner skall tillämpas när du använder Handprogrammeraren.
• Använd inte Handprogrammerare på samma gång som SIMATIC PDM om du vill vara
säker på att ingen felaktig operation skulle kunna hända.
• Tryck på PROGRAM sedan DISPLAY för övergång till PROGRAM -läge och tryck
på PROGRAM för retur till RUN -läge.
• Du behöver inte ange föregående nollor när du anger ett parameternummer: för P005, till
exempel, anger du 5.

Tillträde till en parameter
1. Tryck på PROGRAM därefter DISPLAY , för att PROGRAM -ikon
aktivera PROGRAM -läge.
Svenska
mmmmm
Parameternummer
2. Använd antingen PIL -tangenterna för att Parametervärde
skrolla till en annan parameter eller:
3. Tryck på DISPLAY för att öppna
Parameternummerfältet. Aktuellt värde
4. Ange det önskade parameternumret följt av
BEKRÄFTA (ENTER) .
5. Till exempel: tryck på sedan .
6. LCD-displayen visar det nya parameternumret med
värdet.
Ändring av parametervärde
Anmärkningar:
• Säkerheten måste vara desaktiverad för att möjliggöra programmering: ställ in P000 till
det Olåsta Värdet som finns i P069. (En fjärrstyrd master kan fortfarande byta
configuration om P799 ställs in för att möjliggöra detta).
• Ogiltiga värden avvisas eller begränsas.
• RADERA kan användas för att radera fältet.
1. Ange det nya värdet.

2. Tryck på ENTER för att ställa in värdet.
Parameteråterställning till Standardvärde Fabrik
1. Skrolla till parametern eller ange dess adress.
2. Tryck på RADERA och sedan på BEKRÄFTA (ENTER) . Värdet återgår till
standardvärdet.
Master Reset (P999)

Returnerar alla parametrar utom P000 och P069 till standardinställningar. (Den lärda TVT-
kurvan har inte försvunnit).
1. Tryck på PROGRAM , sedan DISPLAY för att aktivera PROGRAM -läge.
2. Tryck på DISPLAY För att öppna parameterfälten.
3. Ange 999.
4. Tryck på RADERA sedan BEKRÄFTA (ENTER) , to
Radera Alla och utföra återställning. LCD-displayen visar C.ALL.
5. Återställning fullbordad. (Återställning tar flera sekunder att

fullborda).

Snabb Setup: steg 1 till 10
Anmärkning: Fabriksinställningarna markeras med en asterisk (*) i tabellerna.
Svenska
mmmmm
1. Välj språk (P010: Språk)

Numeriskt/ ENGLISH DEUTSCH FRANÇAIS ESPAÑOL
0 *
Inget P000 LOCK VERRIEGELG VERROUIL BLOQUEO
1 Engelska
Värden P003 MEAS RESP REAKTIONSZ TEMPS REP. TIEMPO R.
2 Tyska P004 ANTENNA ANTENNE ANTENNE ANTENA
3 Franska P005 UNITS EINHEIT UNITES UNIDADES
4 Spanska
2. Ställ in P001: Operation (mätningsläge)

Anmärkningar:
• Inställning av P001 återställer Vidd (P007), såvida inte Vidd i förväg satts till ett annat
värde.
• Ändring av P001 kan återställa Outputfunktionen (P201): detta gäller endast HART.
Nivå återställer avståndet till materialnivån med utgångspunkt från Tom

1 * (processens bottennivå). Det avlästa värdet återsänds i volumetriska enheter
Värden om parametrarna 050 till 055 har ställts in för att tillåta detta.
Blank karaktär återsänder avståndet till en materialnivå med utgångspunkt
2
från Vidd (processens fulla nivå).
3 Distans återger distansen till materialnivån från utgångspunkten.
mA Output med Nivå, Rymd och Distansoperation

Nivå Rymd Distans
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transduceryta
0%
(4 mA)
(20 mA) Vidd (4 mA) Vidd
Vidd 100% 0% Distans
Rymd
P007
P006
Nivå
Tom Tom
Tom 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
3. Ställ in Mätningssvar (P003)

1 * långsam 0,1m/minut
Värden 2 medium 1m/minut
3 snabb 10 m/minut
Ställ in P003 till ett mätningssvar för hastighet knappt större än den maximala påfyllnings- eller
tömningshastigheten (den som är störst).

4. Välj mätenheter (P005)
1 * meter
2 centimeter
Svenska
Värden 3 millimeter
mmmmm
4 ft
5 tum
5. Ställ in processens tomnivå (P006: Tom) Nivåuppsättning
Anmärkning: Transduceryta
• P006 och P007 är sammankopplade: se
anmärkningar anslutna till P007. Vidd 100%
0.0000 till 6.000 m (20 ft.) eller

Område P007
Värden 0.0000 till 12.000 m (40 ft.)
P006
Standard Maximal vidd
Nivå
Tomnivån kan ställas in på alla distanser: inte
nödvändigtvis mot botten av tanken. Tom 0%
6. Ställ in mätningsvidden (P007: Vidd)1

0.0000 till 6.000 m (20 ft.) eller
Område
0.0000 till 12.000 m (40 ft.) Vidd kan ställas in på varje distans
Värden
5.725 m (18.78 ft.) eller ovanför Tom nivå.
Standard
11.725 m (38.47 ft.)
.
Anmärkningar:
• Inställning av P006 ändrar på Vidd, om detta inte redan ställts in till ett annat värde.
• Standardvärdet för Vidd är baserat på Operation (P001) och Tom (P006). Vidd ställs in till
Tom minus 110% av Blanking avstånd1, såvida inte Operationen ställts in på avstånd
(P001=3). I detta fall ställs Vidd på Tomavståndet.
• Förhindra alltid att den av monitorn studerade ytan kan komma närmare än 0.3 m (1 ft.)
från transducerytan. Detta ger en säkerhetsmarginal på 0,05 m (2") medan 0.25 m (10") är
den minsta distans som kan detekteras.
7. Minimisera falska reflexioner: Ställ in P838 (Auto Falskt Ekoborttagning

Avstånd)
Använd P838 och P837 Maximal vidd:
Område
tillsammans: följ 0.000 till 6.000 m (20 ft.) eller
instruktionerna för P837. Värde (beroende på modell)
0.000 till 12 m (40 ft.)
Standard 1.000 m (3.28 ft.)
1. Standardinställning för Blanking är 0,25 m (10”)

8. Öppna Falskt-Ekoborttagning: sätt P837 (Auto Falskt-Ekoborttagning)
0 Från
Värde 1 * Använd "inlärd" TVT
Svenska
2 "Lära"
mmmmm
Användning av P837 och P838 (kör denna funktion vid låg nivå i tanken.)
TVT-kurvan (Time Varying Threshold) bestämmer en tröskel som skärmar av falska ekon1. Om
SITRANS Probe LU visar en felaktig full-tanknivå eller om det mätta värdet svävar mellan en
falsk-högnivå och en korrekt nivå, användr du P838 och P837 tillsammans för att höja TVT-
tröskeln (Time Varying Threshold) i denna region och gör mottagaren okänslig för vare form av
‘basbrus’ orsakat av interna antennreflexioner, ekon från munstycken eller andra falska ekon i
kärlet2.
Användning av P837 och P838 (forts.)
Anmärkningar:
• Använd endast denna funktion om det finns ett minimalt avstånd på 2 meter från
SITRANS Probe LU till materialet. Denna funktion arbetar bäst om kärlet är tomt eller
nästan tomt.
• Ställ in P837 och P838 under start-up, om så är möjligt.
• Om kärlet innehåller en omrörare skal denna vara igång.
a. Bestäm det verkliga avståndet från transducerytan till materialnivån.
b. Välj P838 och ange [avstånd till vätskenivå – 0,5 m].
c. Välj P837 och tryck sedan på 2 (Lär in) och BEKRÄFTA (ENTER) . P837 slår automatiskt
om till 1 (använd Inlärd TVT) efter några sekunder.
9. Retur till RUN

Tryck på PROGRAM för retur till RUN -läge: setup är nu utförd.
SITRANS Probe LU Communications: HART

Anmärkning: Läs mA Output med Nivå, Rymd och Distansoperation på sida 12 för en
illustration av mA-utflödet med olika användningssätt.
• Du behöver den detaljerade manualen för att få en lista på tillämpliga parametrar.
• Var god kontakta din lokala återförsäljare beträffande tillgänglighet av HART DD för
SITRANS Probe LU.
• Vi rekommenderar att du använder SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) för att
programmera ditt instrument.
Underhåll
SITRANS Probe LU behöver inget underhåll eller rengöring.
Reparation och Ansvarsavsägelse

För detaljerad information, v.g. se omslagets tredje sida.
1. Falska ekon kan orsakas av hinder i emissionskonen.

2. För mer detaljer om Auto Falskt-Ekoborttagning hänvisar vi dig till den kompletta manualen.

A5E32168031
HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
SAFE AREA APPARATUS

Load
4 – 20 mA
NOTES:
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
1. ANY CSA / FM INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER / POWER SUPPLY, WITH ITS OUTPUT (SEE NOTE 1)
VOLTAGE (Uo) NOT EXCEEDING 30 V AND ITS OUTPUT CURRENT (Io) LIMITED BY
LOAD RESISTANCE (Ro); SUCH THAT Io = Uo / Ro, DOES NOT EXCEED 120 mA
2. APPROVED DUST-TIGHT AND WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT SEALS ARE REQUIRED

at: www.siemens.com/probelu.
FOR CLASS II, DIV.1, Gr. E, F, G AND OUTDOOR NEMA 4X/TYPE 4X LOCATIONS
3. THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF THE NON-INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS

MUST NOT EXCEED 250 V rms.
4. UNDER THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT, THE SITRANS Probe LU HAS THE
FOLLOWING:
Ui = 30 VOLTS D.C. Ii = 120 mA Pi = 0.8 W
Ci = 3.6 nF Li = 0.5 mH
5. SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY.
6. INSTALL PER NEC / CEC
7. USE SUPPLY WIRES RATED FOR 10 ° ABOVE.
8. EXTERNAL BONDING HUBS ARE REQUIRED WHEN BOTH CONDUIT ENTRIES ARE USED.
THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT IS A METHOD USED TO DETERMINE

CHANGE THE Li VALUE TO 0.5 mH APRIL
ACCEPTABLE COMBINATIONS OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS AND 1 PER ECO 79B42578
RPC SN 09/2007
DEC
CONNECTED ASSOCIATED APPARATUS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN 0 FOR APPROVAL RPC SN 17/03
INVESTIGATED IN SUCH COMBINATION.
Product Group
ULTRASONICS
ENTITY CONCEPT DEFINITION: THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS THE INTERCONNECTIONS OF INTRINSICALLY NTS B
SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATIONS. 17 / DEC / 03
FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing
THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT WITH INTRINSICALLY SAFE R. CLYSDALE
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START MANUAL

S. MILLIGAN
SITRANS Probe LU,
APPARATUS CAN RECEIVE AND REMAIN INTRINSICALLY SAFE, CONSIDERING FAULTS, MUST BE EQUAL OR
S. NGUYEN
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
GREATER THAN THE VOLTAGE (Uo) AND CURRENT (Io) LEVELS WHICH CAN BE DELIVERED BY
PETERBOROUGH CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Appendix A: Connection Drawings
THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS, CONSIDERING FAULTS AND APPLICABLE FACTORS. IN ADDITION, THE MAX. FOR INTERNAL
UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND INDUCTANCE (Li) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS, INCL.
INTERCONNECTING WIRING, MUST BE EQUAL OR LESS THAN THE CAPACITANCE AND INDUCTANCE WHICH
USE ONLY 23650516 1
CAN BE SAFELY CONNECTED TO THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS.
2365051601 1:1 1 1
Note: Reference drawing 23650516 is available from the product page of our website
Page A-1
A: Connection Drawings
mmmmm
mmmmm
Page A-2
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
V OC £ V max
I SC £ I max SAFE AREA
APPARATUS
C a ³ C i + C cable
Load
4-20 mA L a ³ Li + L cable
INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER

(SEE NOTES 1 & 2)
Substitution of components
may impair intrinsic safety.
NOTES:
1. ANY CSA CERTIFIED INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER OR ASSOCIATED

APPARATUS WITH A LINEAR OUTPUT.
2. UNDER THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT, THE SITRANS Probe LU

HAS THE FOLLOWING INPUT PARAMETERS :
Vmax = 30 VOLTS I max = 120 mA Ci = 3.6 nF Li = 0.5 mH
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START MANUAL

FEB
1 CHANGE Li VALUE TO 0.5 mH PER ECN 2004-0046 RPC SN 26/2004
DEC
Pmax = 0.8 W OR (Vmax x I max) / 4 = 0.8 W 0 FOR APPROVAL RPC SN 17/03
3. APPROVED DUST-TIGHT AND WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT SEALS ARE REQUIRED Product Group
ULTRASONICS
FOR CLASS II, DIV.1, GROUP G AND OUTDOOR TYPE 4X LOCATIONS NTS B
17 / DEC / 03
R. CLYSDALE
SITRANS Probe LU,
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing
3. THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF THE SAFE LOCATION APPARATUS S. MILLIGAN

MUST NOT EXCEED 250 V rms. CSA INTRINSICALLY SAFE
S. NGUYEN
PETERBOROUGH CONNECTION DRAWING
FOR INTERNAL
4. INSTALLATION TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE PART 1.
.
USE ONLY 23650517 1
2365051701 1:1 1 1
A5E32168031
FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing
mmmmm
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION
(SAFE) CLASS I, DIV.2, GROUPS A, B, C, D
METAL CONDUIT
1/2 “ NPT
24 V
POWER
SUPPLY
SITRANS Probe LU
NOTES:
1
SEPT
0 FOR CONSTRUCTION RPC SN 29/2004
Product Group
ULTRASONICS
29 / SEPT / 2004
NTS A
R. CLYSDALE
S. MILLIGAN
SITRANS Probe LU
CLASS I, Div. 2
S. NGUYEN
CONNECTION DRAWING
PETERBOROUGH
FOR INTERNAL
USE ONLY 23650583 0
2365058300 1:1 1 1
A5E32168031 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START MANUAL Page A-3

A: Connection Drawings Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
Power Supply Requirements

mmmmm
1000
900 (30.0v,845 ohms)
800
L
RL=44.6*VL - 493.4
Loop Resistance - R
700
600
500
400
(17.8v, 300 ohms)
300
RL=272.7*VL - 4554.1 ALLOWABLE OPERATING
200 AREA
100
(16.7v, 0 ohms)
0
10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00
Loop Voltage-VL
(Source voltage)
Page A-4 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – QUICK START MANUAL A5E32168031

All changes and repairs must be done by qualified personnel, and applicable safety regulations must be followed. Please note the
following:
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device.
• All new components must be provided by Siemens.
• Do not re-use faulty components
Reparation af enheden og ansvarsbegrænsning:
Alle ændringer og reparationer skal udføres af kvalificeret personale, og de gældende sikkerhedsbestemmelser skal overholdes.
Bemærk venligst følgende:
• Brugeren er ansvarlig for alle de på apparatet udførte ændringer og reparationer.
• Alle nye komponenter skal være leveret af Siemens.
• Reparér kun defekte komponenter.
• Defekte komponenter må ikke genbruges
Gerätereparatur und Haftungsausschluss:
Alle Änderungen und Reparaturen müssen von qualifiziertem Personal unter Beachtung der jeweiligen Sicherheitsbestimmungen
vorgenommen werden. Bitte beachten Sie:
• Der Benutzer ist für alle Änderungen und Reparaturen am Gerät verantwortlich.
• Alle neuen Bestandteile sind von Siemens bereit zu stellen.
• Reparieren Sie lediglich defekte Bestandteile.
• Defekte Bestandteile dürfen nicht wiederverwendet werden.
Επισκευή μονάδας και αποκλειόμενη ευθύνη:
Όλες οι αλλαγές και οι επισκευές πρέπει να πραγματοποιούνται από εξειδικευμένο προσωπικό, και πρέπει να τηρούνται
όλοι οι σχετικοί κανόνες ασφαλείας. Σημειώστε τα παρακάτω:
• Ο χρήστης είναι υπεύθυνος για όλες τις αλλαγές και επισκευές που γίνονται στη συσκευή.
• Όλα τα καινούργια εξαρτήματα πρέπει να παρέχονται από τη Siemens.
• Περιορίστε τις επισκευές μόνο στα ελαττωματικά εξαρτήματα.
• Μην επαναχρησιμοποιείτε ελαττωματικά εξαρτήματα.
Reparación del dispositivo y límite de responsabilidad:
Las modificaciones y reparaciones deberán ser efectuadas por personal calificado de acuerdo con las normas de
seguridad aplicables. Notas importantes:
• El usuario es el único responsable de las modificaciones y reparaciones del dispositivo.
• Recomendamos utilizar sólo recambios originales Siemens.
• Reparar sólo los componentes defectuosos.
• Los componentes defectuosos no se deben reutilizar.
Réparation de l’unité et limite de responsabilité :
Les modifications et réparations doivent être effectuées par un personnel qualifié en accord avec les consignes de sécurité applicables.
Remarques importantes :
• L’utilisateur est seul responsable des modifications et réparations effectuées sur l’unité.
• Utiliser seulement des composants fournis par Siemens.
• Réparer uniquement les composants défectueux.
• Les composants défectueux ne doivent pas être réutilisés.
Riparazioni dell’apparecchiatura e limiti di responsabilità:
Le modifiche e le riparazioni devono essere effettuate solo da personale qualificato, rispettando le normative sulla sicurezza. Note
importanti:
• L’utente è responsabile delle eventuali modifiche e riparazioni effettuate sull’apparecchiatura.
• Utilizzare solo pezzi di ricambio originali forniti da Siemens.
• Riparare solo i componenti difettosi.
• E’ importante non riutilizzare i componenti difettosi.
Reparatie van apparatuur en uitsluiting van aansprakelijkheid:
Alle modificaties en reparaties moeten worden uitgevoerd door gekwalificeerd personeel en de geldende veiligheidsvoorschriften
moeten worden aangehouden. Let op:
• De gebruiker is verantwoordelijk voor alle modificaties en reparaties die worden uitgevoerd aan het apparaat.
• Alle nieuwe onderdelen moeten zijn geleverd door Siemens.
• Beperk de reparatie uitsluitend tot de defecte componenten.
• Defecte componenten niet opnieuw gebruiken.
Reparação da Unidade e Responsabilidade Excluída
Todas as alterações e reparações devem ser realizadas por pessoal qualificado e devem ser seguidas as regras de segurança
aplicáveis. Por favor, note o seguinte:
• O usuário é responsável por todas as alterações e reparos efetuados no dispositivo.
• Todos os novos componentes devem ser fornecidos pela Siemens.
• Reparo restrito a apenas a componentes danificados.
• Não reutilize componentes danificados.
Yksikön korjaaminen ja vastuuvapaus:
Muutos- ja korjaustyöt saa suorittaa ainoastaan pätevä henkilökunta, ja voimassa olevia turvallisuusmääräyksiä on noudatettava.
Pyydämme ottamaan huomioon seuraavat seikat:
• Käyttäjä on vastuussa kaikista laitteeseen tehdyistä muutoksista ja korjauksista.
• Kaikki uudet osat on hankittava Siemens:ltä.
• Korjaukset on kohdistettava ainoastaan viallisiin osiin.
• Viallisia osia ei saa käyttää uudelleen.
Reparation och ansvarsfrihet:
Alla ändringar och reparationer måste utföras av kompetent personal och under iakttagande av gällande säkerhetsbestämmelser.
Observera att:
• Användaren ansvarar för alla ändringar och reparationer som görs på enheten.
• Alla nya delar måste komma från Siemens.
• Reparara endast med fel behäftade delar.
• Delar behäftade med fel får ej återanvändas.

Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice

Industry Sector A5E32168031 Rev. AB
P.O. Box 4225
Peterborough, ON
Canada K9J 7B1
© Siemens AG 2013
*A5E32168031*
Printed in Canada
email: techpubs.smpi@siemens.com
Ultrasonic Transmitters
SITRANS Probe LU (HART)
Edition 08/2017
Safety Guidelines: Warning notices must be observed to ensure personal safety as well as that of
others, and to protect the product and the connected equipment. These warning notices are
accompanied by a clarification of the level of caution to be observed.
Qualified Personnel: This device/system may only be set up and operated in conjunction with this
manual. Qualified personnel are only authorized to install and operate this equipment in accordance with
established safety practices and standards.
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device by the user or the user’s
agent.
• All new components are to be provided by Siemens.
Warning: Cardboard shipping package provides limited humidity and moisture protection. This product
can only function properly and safely if it is correctly transported, stored, installed, set up, operated, and
maintained.
This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a residential area
may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
Copyright Siemens AG 2017. All Disclaimer of Liability

Rights Reserved
electronic version. We encourage users to purchase manual for agreement with the
authorized bound manuals, or to view electronic instrumentation described, variations remain
versions as designed and authored by Siemens. possible. Thus we cannot guarantee full
Siemens will not be responsible for the contents of agreement. The contents of this manual are
partial or whole reproductions of either bound or regularly reviewed and corrections are
electronic versions. included in subsequent editions. We welcome
all suggestions for improvement.
European Authorized Representative
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
76181 Karlsruhe
Deutschland
• For a selection of Siemens level measurement manuals, go to:

www. siemens.com/processautomation. Select Products & Systems, then under Process
Instrumentation, select Level Measurement. Manual archives can be found on the Support page by
product family.
• For a selection of Siemens weighing manuals, go to:
www. siemens.com/processautomation. Under Products & Systems, select Weighing and
Batching Systems. Manual archives can be found on the Support page by product family.
© Siemens AG 2017
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents .................................................................................................................i
Safety Notes ..................................................................................................................1
Safety marking symbols ..............................................................................................................1
The Manual ...............................................................................................................................................1
Application Examples ...................................................................................................................2
Abbreviations and Identifications .............................................................................................2
SITRANS Probe LU (Ultrasonic) ....................................................................................... 4
Applications ....................................................................................................................................4
Level, volume or flow ................................................................................................................. 4
SITRANS Probe LU System Implementation ..........................................................................5
Programming ..................................................................................................................................5
SITRANS Probe LU Approvals and Certificates ....................................................................5
Specifications ...................................................................................................................... 7
SITRANS Probe LU ............................................................................................................................... 7
Power............................................................................................................................................. 7
Performance................................................................................................................................. 7
Interface ........................................................................................................................................ 8
Programmer (infrared keypad) ................................................................................................ 8
Mechanical................................................................................................................................... 8
Environmental .............................................................................................................................. 9
Process.......................................................................................................................................... 9
Approvals (verify against device nameplate)..................................................................... 10
Installation ......................................................................................................................... 11
Mounting Instructions ..........................................................................................................................12
SITRANS Probe LU Dimensions ..............................................................................................13
Flange Adaptor (optional) ..........................................................................................................13
Wiring .................................................................................................................................. 15
Power .............................................................................................................................................15
Connecting the SITRANS Probe LU ......................................................................................15
Operating the SITRANS Probe LU .................................................................................. 17
RUN Mode ..............................................................................................................................................17
Display ......................................................................................................................................... 17
PROGRAM Mode ..................................................................................................................................18
Programming ................................................................................................................................18
Display ......................................................................................................................................... 18
i
Low temperature effects on RUN/PROGRAM modes .......................................................19
Security ..........................................................................................................................................20
Starting PROGRAM mode .........................................................................................................20
Table of Contents
Handheld programmer ...............................................................................................................20

Activating SITRANS Probe LU ...........................................................................................................20
Accessing a parameter ..............................................................................................................21
Changing a Parameter Value ....................................................................................................21
Master Reset (P999) ...................................................................................................................22
Using Units or Percent (%) ........................................................................................................22
Setup Steps (outline) ............................................................................................................................22
Setup Instructions .......................................................................................................................23
Additional Settings ................................................................................................................................28
Parameter Reference ......................................................................................................29
Helpful Hints ............................................................................................................................... 29
To access a parameter and change a value (primary index): ....................................... 29
To access a secondary index and change a value: ......................................................... 30
Quick Start (P001 to P010)................................................................................................................. 31
Volume (or Flow) P050 to P055 ........................................................................................................ 34
Lock (P069)............................................................................................................................................ 42
Failsafe (P070 to P073) ....................................................................................................................... 42
mA Output (P201 to P215).................................................................................................................. 43
Installation Records (P300 to P346) ................................................................................................ 46
Range Calibration (P650 to P654) .................................................................................................... 48
Temperature Compensation (P660 to P664) ................................................................................. 51
Rate (P700 and P701).......................................................................................................................... 52
Measurement Verification (P709 to P713)..................................................................................... 53
P752 HART address............................................................................................................................ 55
Communications (P799) ..................................................................................................................... 56
Echo Processing (P800 to P825) ...................................................................................................... 56
Algorithm (P820) .................................................................................................................................. 59
TVT (Time Varying Threshold) Adjustment Parameters (P830 to P839) ................................ 60
Diagnostic Tests (P900 to P924) ...................................................................................................... 63
Measurement ...................................................................................................................................... 64
Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter List ....................................................................67
Appendix B: Programming Chart ...................................................................................71
Appendix C: HART Communications .............................................................................75
HART Electronic Device Description (EDD) ...................................................................................75
HART Communicator 275/375: ..................................................................................................76
SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM): ....................................................................................79
Maintenance settings (accessible via PDM only) ..............................................................79
HART Version .........................................................................................................................................80
Burst mode ....................................................................................................................................80
Multidrop Configuration ............................................................................................................80
Appendix D: Troubleshooting .........................................................................................81
ii
Communication Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................81
Generally: .......................................................................................................................................81
Specifically: ...................................................................................................................................81
Table of Contents
General Fault Code ...............................................................................................................................82
Operation Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................85
Appendix E: Maintenance ...............................................................................................87
Unit Repair and Excluded Liability ....................................................................................................87
Appendix F: Technical References ................................................................................89
Principles of operation .........................................................................................................................89
Blanking Distance .................................................................................................................................89
TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves ..............................................................................................89
Auto False-Echo Suppression ..................................................................................................89
Open Channel Monitoring (OCM) ......................................................................................................91
Failsafe .....................................................................................................................................................91
Chemical compatibility .........................................................................................................................92
Startup Behavior ...................................................................................................................................92
Appendix G: Hazardous area installations ..................................................................93
Wiring Details .........................................................................................................................................93
Intrinsically Safe Model .............................................................................................................93
FM/CSA ..........................................................................................................................................94
EU Equivalency .......................................................................................................................... 94
Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance ...................................................................................95
IS Safety Barrier Selection .......................................................................................................95
How to select a passive barrier for SITRANS Probe LU ................................................. 95
PLC Input Modules.................................................................................................................... 96
Passive Shunt Diode Barriers ............................................................................................... 96
Active barriers (repeating barriers)...................................................................................... 96
FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing .......................................................................................99
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing ................................................................................. 100
................................................................................................................................................................. 100
FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing ..........................................................................................101
Appendix H: Firmware Revision History .................................................................... 103
Glossary ............................................................................................................................ 105
Index .................................................................................................................................. 109
iii
Table of Contents
iv
Safety Notes1
Special attention must be paid to warnings and notes highlighted from the rest of the text
by grey boxes.
WARNING: relates to a caution symbol on the product, and means

that failure to observe the necessary precautions can result in death,
serious injury, and/or considerable material damage.
WARNING1: means that failure to observe the necessary
precautions can result in death, serious injury, and/or considerable
material damage
Note: means important information about the product or that part of the operating
SITRANS Probe LU
manual.
Safety marking symbols

In manual: On product: Description
(Label on product: yellow background.) WARNING: refer
to accompanying documents (manual) for details.
The Manual
Notes:
• Please follow the installation and operating procedures for a quick, trouble-free
installation and to ensure the maximum accuracy and reliability of your
SITRANS Probe LU.
• This product is intended for use in industrial areas. Operation of this equipment in a
residential area may cause interference to several frequency based communications.
• This manual applies to the SITRANS Probe LU (HART) only.
This manual will help you set up your SITRANS Probe LU for optimum performance. We
always welcome suggestions and comments about manual content, design, and
For other Siemens level measurement manuals, go to:
www.siemens.com/level and look under Level Measurement..
1.
This warning symbol is used when there is no corresponding caution symbol on the
product.
A5E32337695 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Page 1

Application Examples
The application examples used in this manual illustrate typical installations using
SITRANS Probe LU. Because there is often a range of ways to approach an application,
other configurations may also apply.
In all examples, substitute your own application details. If the examples do not apply to
your application, check the applicable parameter reference for the available options.
If you require more information, please contact your Siemens representative. For a complete list
of Siemens representatives, please go to:
www.siemens.com/processautomation.
Abbreviations and Identifications

SITRANS Probe LU
Short
Long Form Description Units
form
Conformitè Europèene /
CE / FM /
Factory Mutual / Canadian safety approval
CSA
Standards Association
Ci Internal capacitance
D/A Digital to analog
ETFE Ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene
Highway Addressable
HART
Remote Transducer
Ii Input current mA
Io Output current mA
IS Intrinsically Safe safety approval
Li Internal inductance mH
LRV Lower Range Value value for process empty level 4 mA1
below which no PV is
LSL Lower Sensor Limit
anticipated
μs microsecond 10-6 Second
PBT Polybutylene Terephthalate
Pressure Equipment
PED safety approval
Directive
PVDF Polyvinylidene fluoride
Page 2 SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A5E32337695

Short
Long Form Description Units
form
ppm parts per million
PV Primary Variable measured value
SELV Safety extra low voltage
SV Secondary Variable equivalent value
TVT Time Varying Threshold sensitivity threshold
Ui Input voltage V
Uo Output voltage V
20 mA1
SITRANS Probe LU
URV Upper Range Value value for process full level
above which no PV is
USL Upper Sensor Limit
anticipated
1. 100% is most commonly set to 20 mA, and 0% to 4 mA: however, the settings
can be reversed.

SITRANS Probe LU (Ultrasonic)
SITRANS Probe LU is a 2-wire loop-powered ultrasonic transmitter for level, volume, and
flow monitoring of liquids in storage vessels and simple process vessels, as well as in
open channels.
The transducer is available as ETFE (ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene) or PVDF
(polyvinylidene fluoride) to suit the chemical conditions of your application. For
applications with varying material and process temperatures, the Probe LU incorporates
an internal temperature sensor to compensate for temperature changes.
SITRANS Probe LU uses field-proven Sonic Intelligence ® signal processing.
SITRANS Probe LU
Applications
Level, volume or flow
SITRANS Probe LU is designed to measure levels of liquids in a variety of applications:
• storage type vessels
• simple process vessels with some surface agitation
• liquids
• slurries
• open channels
Volume
By using the volume parameters (P050 to P055) you can obtain the measurement as
volume instead of level.
Flow
If you have an open channel system (a Parshall flume, v-notch weir or other open channel
device), you can obtain flow values instead of level. By using the universal linear function
of parameter P051, and entering values for Head and Flow in the breakpoint parameters
P054 and 055, you can use SITRANS Probe LU to convert head levels into flow rates.

SITRANS Probe LU System Implementation
SITRANS Probe LU supports the HART communications protocol and SIMATIC® PDM
software.1 2
Typical PLC/mA configuration with HART
active PLC
SITRANS Probe LU
power supply1 R2 = 250 Ω
handheld programmer
HART modem
SITRANS
Probe LU HART
communicator
Programming
SITRANS Probe LU carries out its level measurement function according to the set of
built-in parameters. Parameter changes can be made via the handheld programmer, via a
PC using SIMATIC PDM, or via a HART Handheld Communicator.
SITRANS Probe LU Approvals and Certificates

Note: Please see Approvals on page 10 for an approvals listing.
1.
Depending on the system design, the power supply may be separate from the PLC, or
integral to it.
2. A 250 Ohm resistor may be required if the loop resistance is less than 250 Ohms.

Notes
SITRANS Probe LU

Specifications
Note: Siemens makes every attempt to ensure the accuracy of these specifications
but reserves the right to change them at any time.
SITRANS Probe LU
Power
Nominal 24 V DC at For other configurations, see the chart Loop Voltage
max. 550 Ohm. versus Loop Resistance on page 95.
• Maximum 30 V DC
• 4 to 20 mA
• Max startup current see Startup Behavior on page 92
Performance1
Reference operating conditions according to IEC 60770-1
• ambient temperature +15 to +25 oC
• humidity 45 to 75% relative humidity
Specifications
• ambient pressure 860 to 1060 mbar
Measurement Accuracy (measured in accordance with IEC 60770-1)

• non-linearity (accuracy) greater of 6 mm (.24”) or 0.15% of span (including
hysteresis and non-repeatability)2
• non-repeatability 3 mm (0.19”) [included in non-linearity specification]
• deadband (resolution) 3 mm (0.19”) [included in non-linearity specification]
• hysteresis error 0 mm
Analog Output Accuracy (measured in accordance with IEC 60770-1)

• non-linearity (accuracy) 0.125% of span (including hysteresis and repeatability)
• non-repeatability 0.025% of span (included in non-linearity specification)
• deadband (resolution) 0.0375% of span [included in non-linearity
specification]
• hysteresis error 0%
Frequency 54 KHz
Measurement range3 6 m (20 ft) model: 0.25 m to 6 m (10" to 20 ft) liquid
12 m (40 ft) model: 0.25 m to 12 m (10" to 40 ft) liquid
1. Reference conditions.
2. Non-linearity (accuracy) for marine approved products under severe radiated EMI
conditions is the greater of 12 mm or 0.15% of span (including hysteresis and non-
repeatability).
3. Reference point for measurement is the transducer face.

Blanking distance3 0.25 m (0.82 ft)
Update time at 4mA ≤5s
Beam angle 10o at –3 dB boundary
Temperature compensation built in to compensate over temperature range
Memory non-volatile EEPROM,
no battery required
Interface
• HART standard, integral to analog output
• configuration Siemens SIMATIC PDM (PC), or HART handheld
communicator, or Siemens infrared handheld
programmer
• analog output 4–20 mA ± 0.02 mA accuracy
• display (local) multi-segment alphanumeric liquid crystal with Bar
graph (representing level)
Programmer (infrared keypad)

Siemens Infrared IS (Intrinsically Safe) Handheld Programmer: for all locations, including
hazardous.
• approval ATEX II 1GD, Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex iaD 20 T135 °C,

SIRA 01ATEX2147
Specifications
IECEx SIR 09.0073 Ex ia IIC T4 Ga, Ex iaD 20 T135 °C

FM/CSA Class I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D
INMETRO DNV 12.0075
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
Ex ia IIIC T135 °C Da
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008 e IEC 61241-11:2005
• ambient temperature −20 to +50 °C (−5 to +122 °F)
• interface proprietary infrared pulse signal
• power 3V lithium battery (non-replaceable)
• weight 150 g (0.3 lb)
• color black
Mechanical
Process Connections
• threaded connection 2” NPT, BSP, or G (EN ISO 228-1) / PF2 (JIS B 0202)
• flange connections 3" (80 mm) universal flange
• other connections FMS 200 mounting bracket, or customer-supplied
mount
Transducer (2 options)
• ETFE (ethylene-tetrafluoroethylene), or
• PVDF (polyvinylidene fluoride)

Enclosure
• body construction PBT (polybutylene terephthalate)
• lid construction hard-coated PEI (polyether imide)
• cable inlet 2 x M20x1.5 conduit gland, or 2 x 1/2" NPT thread
• ingress protection Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 (see
note below)
Notes:
• Please check the ambient and operating temperatures under Environmental on page
9, and Process on page 9; also check Approvals (verify against device nameplate) on
page 10, for the specific configuration you are about to use or install.
Weight
Standard model 2.1 kg (4.6 lb.)
Environmental
• location indoor/outdoor
• altitude 5000 m (16,404 ft) max.
• ambient temperature −40 to +80 °C (−40 to +176 °F)
• relative humidity suitable for outdoor
(Type 4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68
Specifications
enclosure)
• installation category I
• pollution degree 4
• pressure rating 0.5 bar g/7.25 psi g
Process
• temperature
(at flange or threads) −40 to +85 °C (−40 to +185 °F)
• pressure (vessel) 0.5 bar g/7.25 psi g

Approvals (verify against device nameplate)
• General CSAUS/C, FM, CE, RCM
• Hazardous Intrinsically Safe: (Europe) ATEX II 1 G Ex ia IIC T4 Ga

(US/Canada) FM/CSA: (barrier required)1
Class III T4
(Brazil) INMETRO DNV 12.0070X

Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
IP67/IP68
-40 ºC ≤ Ta ≤ +80 ºC
DNV #OCP 0017
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-0:2008
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-11:2009 e
ABNT NBR IEC 60079-26:2008
Non-incendive (US) FM2:

Class I, Div. 2, Groups A,B, C, D T5

Specifications
ABS Type Approval
Note: Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor Type
4X / NEMA 4X, Type 6 / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
1. See FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing on page 99 or CSA Intrinsically Safe

connection drawing on page 100.
2. See FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing on page 101.

Installation
WARNINGS:
• SITRANS Probe LU is to be used only in the manner outlined in this
manual, otherwise protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired.
• Installation shall only be performed by qualified personnel and in
accordance with local governing regulations.
Notes:
• Refer to the device nameplate for information on approvals.
• This product is susceptible to electrostatic shock. Follow proper grounding
procedures.
• Ideally, mount SITRANS Probe LU so that the face of the transducer is at least 300
mm (1 ft) above the highest anticipated level.
Mounting Location
Recommendations:
• Ambient temperature within –40 to 80 oC (–40 to 176 oF).

• Easy access for viewing the display and programming via the handheld programmer.
• An environment suitable to the housing rating and materials of construction.
• Keep the sound path perpendicular to the material surface.
.
ambient temperature
surrounding enclosure
–40 to 80 oC (–40 to 176 oF) flange adaptor (option)
Installation
customer-supplied
flange
process temperature
–40 to 85 oC (–40 to 185oF)

Precautions:
• Avoid proximity to high voltage or current wiring, high voltage or current contacts,
and to variable frequency motor speed controllers.
• Avoid interference to the sound path from obstructions or from the fill path
Fill
The sound path should be:

pipe
• perpendicular to the
monitored surface
• clear of rough walls, rungs
seams, rungs, or
other obstructions. seams
10°
• clear of the fill path
Mounting Instructions
Note:
• Ideally, mount SITRANS Probe LU so that the face of the transducer is at least 300
mm (1 ft) above the highest anticipated level.
• More than one Probe LU can be installed in a vessel. However, best practice would
be to place the two units as far apart as possible to avoid interference.
SITRANS Probe LU is available in three thread types: 2" NPT, 2" BSP, or PF2/G.
1. Before inserting SITRANS Probe LU into its mounting connection, ensure that the
threads are of the same type to avoid damaging them.
2. Simply screw SITRANS Probe LU into the process connection and hand tighten or
using a strap wrench to seat gasket if required (1/4 turn past hand tight is
recommended).
Installation

SITRANS Probe LU Dimensions
.
139.7 mm
(5.50")
130.1 mm hinged lid

(5.12")
198.9 mm
(7.83") electronics
mounting
21 mm thread
(0.83") transducer
51.1 mm (2.01")
54.0 mm (2.13")
Flange Adaptor (optional)

SITRANS Probe LU can be fitted with the optional 3" (80 mm) flange adaptor for mating to
3" ANSI, DIN 65PN10 and JIS 10K3B flanges.
SITRANS Probe LU
Installation
"A" "A"
Optional flange
adaptor
VIEW "A"-"A"

Installation

Wiring
Power1
WARNINGS:
DC terminals shall be supplied from an SELV1 source in
accordance with IEC-1010-1 Annex H.
All field wiring must have insulation suitable for rated voltages.
Connecting the SITRANS Probe LU

Notes:
• Use shielded, twisted pair cable (wire gauge AWG 22 to AWG 14/ 0.34 mm2 to
2.08 mm2).
• Separate cables and conduits may be required to conform to standard
instrumentation wiring practices, or electrical codes.
• The non-metallic enclosure does not provide a continuous ground path between
conduit connections: use grounding-type bushings and jumpers.
• For Intrinsically Safe setups, see page 93 for detailed information.
• For a Class 1, Div. 2 (FM) configuration, see the connection drawing on page 100.
cover screws
terminals for loop
current
cable
watertight
gland
threaded
connection
1. Strip the cable jacket for approximately 70 mm (2.75") from the end of the cable, and
thread the wires through the gland2.
Wiring
mmmmm
1.
Safety Extra Low Voltage
2.
If cable is routed through conduit, use only approved suitable-size hubs for
waterproof applications.

2. Connect the wires to the terminals as shown below: the polarity is identified on the
terminal block.
3. Tighten the gland to form a good seal.

4. Close the cover and tighten screws: please do not overtighten screws.
Recommended torque is 1.1 to 1.7 N-m (10 to 15 in-lb).
Note: If the lid gasket is noticeably dry, applying a silicone grease can improve the
sealing function.
Wirng
mmmmm

Operating the SITRANS Probe LU
SITRANS Probe LU has two modes of operation: RUN and PROGRAM.
Operation
RUN Mode
SITRANS Probe LU automatically starts in RUN mode when power is applied, and detects
the material level. The primary reading displays the material level (in meters) referenced
from Empty (process empty level). This is the default start-up display mode.
System status is displayed on the LCD, or on a remote communications terminal.
Display
Normal operation Fail-safe operation
2 3 3
1
1 4
4
6 5
m 5 6 m
1 – Primary Reading (displays level, distance, or volume (or flow1), in either units or
percent)
2 – Secondary Reading (displays Parameter number for Auxiliary Reading2)
3 – Echo status indicator: Reliable Echo or Unreliable Echo
4 – Units or Percent
5 – Active bar graph represents material level
6 – Auxiliary Reading (depending on the parameter selected, it displays milliAmp value,
distance or confidence, with units where applicable)
If the echo confidence drops below the echo confidence threshold3, the failsafe timer
starts running. When the timer expires, the letters LOE alternate with the reading every
two seconds, and the Reliable Echo indicator is replaced by the Unreliable Echo indicator.
When a valid reading is received, the level reading display returns to normal operation.
1.
See P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape on page 35, for details on displaying flow instead of
volume.
2.
Press to display the auxiliary reading field when in RUN mode.
3. See P804 Confidence Threshold on page 57 for more detail.

Handheld Programmer: function keys in RUN mode
Certain functions can be accessed directly from RUN mode by using specific keys.
Key Run Mode

Operation
mA output value displayed in auxiliary reading field

Internal enclosure temperature displayed in auxiliary reading field (P343).
Parameter for auxiliary readings1

Displays the value representing Echo Confidence (P805).
Toggle between Units and % on reading display
Initiate and complete PROGRAM mode access
Measurement key displays distance in auxiliary reading field.
1.
Press plus three-digit parameter number, sets parameter to show in the auxiliary display.
PROGRAM Mode
Programming
Note: See Accessing a parameter, on page 21, for detailed instructions.
• Set parameters to suit your specific application.

• Activate PROGRAM mode at any time, to change parameter values and set
operating conditions.
• For local programming, use the Siemens handheld programmer.
• For programming from a distance, use either a PC running SIMATIC PDM, or a HART
handheld communicator.
Display
2 3 1 – Primary Reading (displays parameter value)
1 2 – Secondary Reading (displays parameter

number)
3 – Programming indicator
4 4 – Auxiliary Reading (displays parameter names

for parameters P001 to P010, if a language is
selected. It displays the index value for indexed
parameters, such as P054.)

Handheld Programmer: function keys in PROGRAM mode
Key Programming Mode
to Values
Operation
Decimal point
Negative value
CLEAR value
TOGGLE between Units and % on parameter value
End PROGRAM session and enable RUN mode
Update echo quality parameters
Parameter scroll-up
Parameter scroll-down
DISPLAY opens parameter fields
ENTER the displayed value
Low temperature effects on RUN/PROGRAM modes

If the internal temperature falls to –30 oC (–22 oF) or below, it will affect both RUN and
PROGRAM modes.
RUN mode will operate normally, with the following exceptions:
• handheld programmer operation is disabled
• the LCD displays only limited information: the bar graph and the reliable/
unreliable echo indicator
PROGRAM mode:
• handheld programmer operation is disabled

Security
The Lock parameter, P000, secures SITRANS Probe LU against changes via the handheld
programmer. To enable programming, set P000 to the Unlocked Value stored in P069. To
Operation
disable programming, enter a different value.
Note:
• A remote master can still change configuration, if P799 is set to allow this.
Starting PROGRAM mode

The handheld programmer gives you direct access to SITRANS Probe LU.
Handheld programmer
Note: For detailed instructions on using the handheld programmer, see the next page.
For direct access to SITRANS Probe LU, point the handheld programmer at the display
from a maximum distance of 600 mm (2 ft), and press the keys.
handheld programmer
display
Numeric and
600 mm
Auxiliary keys (2 ft)
Function
Keys
Activating SITRANS Probe LU

Note: Keep infrared devices such as laptops, cell phones, and PDAs, away from
SITRANS Probe LU to prevent inadvertent operation.
Power up the instrument. SITRANS Probe LU starts in RUN mode, and detects the
material level, displayed in meters, referenced from Empty (process empty level).

Accessing a parameter
Note:
• The following instructions apply when using the Handheld Programmer.
Operation
• Do not use the Handheld Programmer at the same time as SIMATIC PDM, or erratic
operation may result.
• You do not need to key in initial zeros when entering a parameter number: for
example, for P005, key in 5.
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to

PROGRAM Icon
activate PROGRAM mode.
Parameter Number
Parameter Value
2. Either use the ARROW keys to scroll to
a different parameter, or
3. Press DISPLAY to open the Parameter
current value
Number field.
4. Key in the desired parameter number followed by
ENTER .
For example: press .
The LCD displays the new parameter number and
value.
Changing a Parameter Value

Notes:
• Security must be disabled to enable programming: set P000 to the Unlocked Value
stored in P069. (For more details, see P069 Unlocked value on page 42.)
• Invalid entries will be rejected or limited.
• CLEAR can be used to clear the field
1. Use the ARROW keys to scroll to the parameter number, or press

DISPLAY and key in the parameter number followed by ENTER .
3. Press ENTER to set the value.
Parameter Reset to Factory Default

1. Scroll to the parameter or enter its address.
2. Press CLEAR then ENTER . The value returns to the default setting.

Master Reset (P999)
Note: Following a Master Reset, complete programming is required.
Operation
Resets all parameters to their factory settings, with the following exceptions:
• P000 and P069 are not reset.
• The learned TVT curve is not lost.
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to activate PROGRAM mode.
2. Press DISPLAY to open parameter fields.
3. Key in 999.
Press CLEAR then ENTER , to Clear All
and initiate reset. The LCD displays C.ALL.
4. Reset complete. (Reset takes several seconds

to complete.)
Using Units or Percent (%)

Many parameters can be viewed either as a percentage, or in measurement units (P005).
View the parameter, then press MODE to toggle between units and percentage.
Setup Steps (outline)

Set the Quick Start parameters between P001 and P010 (the main settings that apply to all
applications and make the system operational). Then set P837 and 838 to ignore false
echoes, and return to RUN mode.
1. Select a language option1, or numeric, for the auxiliary reading (P010).

2. Select the measurement mode: level, space, or distance (P001).
3. Set the response time to level changes (P003).
4. Select units of measurement: m, cm, mm, ft, or in. (P005).
5. Set process empty level (Empty: P006).
6. Set the range to be measured (Span: P007).
7. To ignore false echoes before the material echo, set Auto False-Echo Suppression
Distance P838.
8. Enable Auto False-Echo Suppression P837.
9. Return to RUN mode.
1. The language options are English, German, French, or Spanish. The parameter title appears in
the language selected, for the first 10 parameters.

Setup Instructions
Notes:
Operation
• In PROGRAM mode, you can use the ARROW keys to scroll to a
parameter number.
• The default parameter values are indicated by an asterisk (*) in the tables.
Using the handheld programmer, set each parameter value to suit your application. (For
detailed instructions on accessing a parameter and changing the value, see page21.)
1. Select a language (P010: Language)

If a language is selected, parameter titles for parameters P010 to P001 are displayed in
the auxiliary reading field.
0 * Numeric/None
1 English
Values 2 German
3 French
4 Spanish
Parameter Auxiliary reading

P000 LOCK
P001 OPERATION
P002 MATERIAL
P003 MEAS RESP
P005 UNITS
P006 EMPTY
P007 SPAN
P010 LANGUAGE
2. Select the measurement mode required for the application (P001:

Operation)
Level returns material level referenced from Empty (process empty level).
1 * The reading is returned in volumetric units if parameters 050 to 055 are
set to enable this.
Values
2 Space returns material level referenced from Span (process full level).
3 Distance returns material level referenced from the transducer face.
To measure how full the vessel is, select Level: the reading can be returned as level or as
volume (or flow – seeP050 on page 35 for details):
• for a level reading, ensure P050 is set to 0: the reading returns the distance from
process empty level (Empty) to the current level
• for a volume reading, select a vessel shape at P050, and set volume parameters
051 to 055 as required

To measure how much space remains in the vessel, select Space:
• Space returns a reading for the distance between current level and process full
level (Span)
To measure the distance from the transducer face to the current level, select Distance.
Operation

(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 0%
face (4 mA)
(20 mA) (4 mA)
Span 100% Span 0% Distance
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
(4 mA) (20 mA) (20 mA)
Notes:
• Setting P001 resets Span (P007), unless Span has previously been set to a different
value. Span is set to Empty distance minus 110% of Blanking1, unless Operation is set
to distance measurement (P001 = 3). In this case, Span is set to the same value as
Empty (P006).
• Changing P001 may reset Output Function (P201): this applies to HART only.
3. Set response time to maximum filling/emptying rate (P003:

Measurement Response)
Set P003 to a measurement response speed just faster than the maximum filling or
emptying rate (whichever is greater).
1 * slow 0.100 m/minute
Values
2 medium 1.000 m/minute
3 fast 10.000 m/minute
Slower settings provide higher accuracy; faster settings allow for more level fluctuation.
(For more detail on measurement response, see P003 Measurement Response, on
page 32.)
4. Select type of measurement units required (P005: Units)

1 * meters
2 centimeters
4 feet
5 inches
1. Blanking distance is 0.25 m (10"). See Blanking Distance on page 89 for more details.

5. Set process empty level (P006: Empty)
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or

(depends on mode)l 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Operation
Values
maximum range:
Default
6.000 m (20 ft), or 12.000 m (40 ft)
Enter the distance from the transducer face to Level Setup

process empty level (Empty) using units sets in transducer
P005. Empty can be set to any distance: not face
necessarily the bottom of the vessel.
Span 100%
Note: P006 and P007 are interlinked: see
notes attached to P007.
P007
P006
Level
6. Set the range to be measured
Empty 0%
(P007: Span)
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or

Values (depends on model 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Default 5.725 m (18.78 ft), or 11.725 m (38.47 ft)
Enter the distance between Empty (process empty level) and Span (process full level), in
the units set in P005. Span can be set at any distance above the empty level.1
Notes:
• Setting P006 resets Span, if it has not previously been set to a different value.
• The default setting for Span is based on Operation (P001) and Empty (P006). Span is
set to Empty minus 110% of blanking distance1, unless Operation is set to distance
(P001 = 3). In this case, Span is set to Empty distance.
transducer face. This provides a 0.05 m (2") safety margin, as the minimum detectable
distance is 0.25 m (10").

7. Minimize false reflections (P838: Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance)
If SITRANS Probe LU displays an incorrect full level, or if the reading fluctuates between
a false high level and a correct level, you can use the TVT (Time Varying Threshold)
shaper parameters P838 and P837 together to prevent false-echo1 detection. P837 and
Operation
P838 elevate the TVT in this region and de-sensitize the receiver from any ’base noise’
caused by internal transducer reflections, nozzle echoes, or other vessel false echoes.
Notes:
• This function works best when the vessel is empty or nearly empty: use it only if
there is a minimum distance of 2 meters from the transducer face to the material.
Parameter Values
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or
P838 (depends on model 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Use P838 in combination with P837. Determine the actual distance from the transducer
face to the material surface. Subtract 0.5 m from this distance and enter the result,
following the Setup Instructions for P837.
Display before Auto False Echo Suppression

(or when P837 = 0)
default TVT
true P839
echo Hover Level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
1. False echoes can be caused by obstructions within the beam path. For more detail, see TVT
adjustment parameters, page 60, and TVT curves, page 89.

8. Enable False-Echo Suppression (P837: Auto False-Echo Suppression1)
Use this feature to ignore false echoes before the material echo. Use P838 to set the Auto
TVT distance first.
Operation
Parameter Values Description
0 * Off
P837 1 Use "learned" TVT
2 "Learn"
Setup Auto False-Echo Suppression:

a. Perform this function when the vessel is empty or nearly empty.
b. Determine actual distance from transducer face to material level.
c. Press PROGRAM , then DISPLAY .
d. Select P838 and key in [distance to material level minus 0.5 m].
e. Press ENTER .
f. Select P837.
g. Press 2 and then press ENTER . P 837 will automatically revert to 1 (use
Learned TVT) after a few seconds.
Display after Auto False Echo Suppression
TVT curve
material
(learned)
level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
9. Press PROGRAM to return to RUN mode.
1. False echoes can be caused by obstructions within the beam path. For more detail, see TVT
adjustment parameters, page 60, and TVT curves, page 89.

Additional Settings
• Convert readings to volume or flow (P050 to P055)
• Store unlocked value (P069)
Operation
• Set Failsafe timer conditions (P070 TO P073)

• Control Analog Output (P201 to P215 and P911)
• Check installation records (P300 to P346)
• Calibrate transducer for unusual conditions (P650 to P654)
• Temperature Compensation (P660 to P664)
• Limit rate of change of reading (P700 and P701)
• Verify measurements (P709 to P713)
• Configure communications (P799)
• Control echo processing (P800 to P825)
• TVT curve adjustments - Auto False Echo Suppression (P830 to P839)
• Software diagnostic tests (P900 and P901)
• Adjust measurements (P911 to P924)
For a full list of available parameters, see Parameter Reference, starting on page 29.

Parameter Reference
Notes:
• Keep infrared devices such as laptops, cell phones, and PDAs, away from
SITRANS Probe LU to prevent inadvertent operation.
• Do not use the Handheld Programmer at the same time as SIMATIC PDM, or erratic
operation may result.
• Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to access PROGRAM mode, and press
PROGRAM to return to RUN mode.
• CLEAR can be used to clear the field
• Default values (Factory settings) are indicated by an asterisk (*) in the parameter
Parameters
tables, unless explicitly described.
SITRANS Probe LU is configured through its parameters, and the application determines
the parameter values which are entered into the instrument.
Please check your value entries carefully before operating SITRANS Probe LU, to ensure
optimum performance.
Helpful Hints
• Primary index is an address: for example, P054.
• Secondary index is a sub-address that allows for multiple values on an indexed
point, and allows indexed values from more than one parameter to be linked, for
example, the breakpoints in P054 and P055. (See pages 37 and 40 for more details.)
To access a parameter and change a value (primary index):

Note: Initial zeros in a parameter number do not have to be entered: for example, for
P001, key in 1.
1. Press PROGRAM then DISPLAY to activate PROGRAM Mode.

2. Either use the ARROW keys to scroll to each parameter number, or
press DISPLAY again to access the parameter number field, and key in the
parameter number followed by ENTER .
4. Press ENTER .

To access a secondary index and change a value:
Notes:
• In a parameter with a secondary index, the ARROW keys control
whichever index was most recently changed.
• When you first access a parameter, the ARROW keys control the primary
index (parameter number).
• After the secondary index is changed, the ARROW keys control the secondary
index.
• When the primary index is changed, the ARROW keys revert to the primary index.
1. Select the parameter number, for example P054: the secondary index is displayed in
the auxiliary reading.
Parameters
2. Press DISPLAY twice1 (the auxiliary reading field goes blank).

3. Key in the address of the desired index, or use the ARROW keys to scroll to
the desired secondary index number, then press ENTER .
4. Key in the new index value and press ENTER .
5. Press DISPLAY twice, and use the ARROW keys or enter the parameter number
to select a different parameter.
P000 Lock
Notes:
• This lock only applies to the handheld programmer: it does not lock access through
communications.
• A remote master can change configuration if P799 is set to allow this.
Secures SITRANS Probe LU from parameter changes via the handheld programmer.
Unlocked Value (P069) * Unlocked: programming permitted1

Value
other Locked: programming not permitted
1.
The factory setting for P069 is 1954: after a new Unlocked value is entered and
accepted, the new value becomes the default setting.
To enable the programming lock:

1. Select P000.
2. Key in any value other than the Unlocked Value (P069).
3. Press ENTER to set the value: PROGRAM mode is now active for viewing only.
To disable the programming lock:
1. Select P000.
2. Key in the Unlocked Value (P069).
3. Press ENTER to set the value: PROGRAM mode is now active for programming.
1. This focusses control on the secondary index.

Quick Start (P001 to P010)
P001 Operation
Note: Default values are indicated with an asterisk (*) in the parameter tables, unless
explicitly described.
Sets the type of measurement required for the application. (This affects the local LCD
only: the primary variable for HART is controlled by P201.)
To measure how full the vessel is, select Level. The reading can be returned as level or as
volume:
• for a level reading, ensure P050 is set to 0: the reading returns the distance from
Parameters
process empty level (Empty) to the current level
• for a volume reading, select a vessel shape at P050, and set volume parameters
051 to 055 as required
To measure how much space remains in the vessel, select Space:
• Space returns a reading for the distance between current level and process full
level (Span)
To measure the distance from the transducer face to the current level, select Distance.
0 Instrument out of service.
Level returns material level referenced from Empty (process empty level). The
1 * reading is returned in volumetric units if parameters 050 to 055 are set to enable
Values this.
2 Space returns material level referenced from Span (process full level).
3 Distance returns material level referenced from the transducer face.

(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 4 mA
face 0%
20 mA Span 4 mA
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty 100% Empty 100%
Empty 0%
4 mA 20 mA 20 mA

1
Notes:
• Setting P001 resets Span (P007), unless Span has previously been set to a different
value. Span is set to Empty distance minus 110% of Blanking1 unless P001 is set to 3
(distance measurement). In this case Span is set to the same value as Empty (P006).
• Changing P001 may reset Output Function (P201).
P002 Material to be monitored

Note: For use only by Siemens service personnel.
P003 Measurement Response

Sets the rate of response to level changes.
Parameters
Related Failsafe Max.

Damping Echo
Para- Timer Measurement
P003 Filter Verification
meters P070 Response
P709 P711
(minutes) P700/P701
1 * slow 100.00 0.100 m/minute 10.000 s 2
Values 2 medium 10.00 1.000 m/minute 10.000 s 2
3 fast 1.00 10.000 m/minute 1.000 s 2
Note: Changing P003 resets the following parameters: P070, P700, P701, P709, and
P711.
Use a setting just faster than the maximum filling or emptying rate (whichever is greater).
Slower settings provide higher accuracy: faster settings allow for more level fluctuation.
• Echo Verification (P711): discriminates between agitator blades in motion (spurious
noise) and the target surface (true echo).
• Failsafe timer (P070): establishes the period from the time a loss of echo (LOE) starts
until the Failsafe default (P071) is triggered. P070 takes precedence over P003.

P005 Units
Specifies measurement units used for dimensional values.
1 * meters
2 centimeters
4 feet
5 inches
P006 Empty (process empty level)

Sets the distance from the transducer face to the process empty level, in units selected at
P005.
Parameters
Range 0.0000 to 6.10 m (20.01 ft) Level Setup
(depends or transducer
on model 0.0000 to 12.20 m (40.02 ft) face
Values
Max. range:
Default 6.10 m (20.01 ft) or Span 100%
12.20 m (40.02 ft)
Enter the distance from the transducer face

to Empty (process empty level), using units P007
P006
set in P005. Empty can be set to any Level
distance: not necessarily the bottom of the
vessel Empty 0%
Notes:
• Default setting is maximum range.
• P006 and P007 are interlinked: see note
attached to P007.
P007 Span (process full level)

Sets the range to be measured (referenced from Empty) in units selected at P005.
Range 0.0000 to 6.00 m (20 ft) or

(depends on model) 0.0000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Values 5.725 m (18.78 ft) or
Default 11.725 m (38.47 ft)
See note on next page for more details.
Enter the distance between Empty (process empty level) and Span (process full level), in
units set in P005. Span can be set at any distance above Empty level.1

Notes:
• Setting P006 will reset Span, if it has not previously been set to a different value.
• The default setting for Span is based on Operation (P001) and Empty (P006). Span is
set to Empty minus 110% of Blanking1 distance, unless Operation is set to Distance
(P001 = 3). In this case, Span is set to Empty distance.
transducer face. This provides a 0.05 m (2") safety margin, as the minimum
detectable distance is 0.25 m (10").
P010 Language
Selects the language used for the auxiliary reading on the display.
0 * Numeric / None
Parameters
1 English
Values 2 German
3 French
4 Spanish
If a language is selected, parameter titles for the Quick Start parameters are displayed.
(See the table on page 23 for the titles displayed.)
Volume (or Flow) P050 to P055

Set SITRANS Probe LU to calculate readings based on reservoir volume instead of level:
see P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape on page 35 for details on displaying flowrate.
1. Operation must be set to Level (P001 = 1).

2. Select a vessel shape matching the monitored vessel (P050).
3. If required, add dimensions A or L (as shown in the chart on page 36), using P052
and P053,
or, if vessel shape 9 is selected, add level and volume breakpoints in P054 and P055.
4. Enter the value for the maximum vessel volume in P051.
5. Return to RUN mode: readings are now displayed in volumetric units. To select
PERCENT, press : the displayed volume reading will be a percentage of
Maximum Volume.
1. Blanking distance is 0.25 m (10").

P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape
Defines the vessel (or open channel) shape (see chart on next page) and allows
SITRANS Probe LU to calculate volume or flow instead of level. The default setting for
P050 is 0 (volume calculation not required).
Enter the value for the vessel shape matching the monitored vessel or reservoir (see
chart on page 36).
P051 Maximum Volume

For readings in volumetric units instead of percentage values, enter the vessel volume
corresponding to Span (P007). Any volumetric units can be chosen, because the volume
calculation is based on the maximum volume, and scaled according to the Vessel Shape
Parameters
(P050) value. If no value is entered, the default is 100, and the reading will be a
percentage value.
Range 0.0000 to 99999

Values
Default 100.0
P006 Empty
Related Parameters P007 Span
Enter the vessel volume corresponding to Span (P007).

1. Key in the value. (For example, if maximum volume = 3650 m3, key in 3650.)
2. Press ENTER .
If the value is too large for the LCD display, enter larger units.
Example:
If maximum volume = 267,500 gallons, key in 267.5 (thousands of gallons).).

P050 Value Vessel Shape Description Also required
0 * ---- no volume calculation required N/A
1 flat bottom P051
2 conical or pyramidal bottom P051, P052

A
Parameters
3 parabolic bottom P051, P052

A
4 spherical bottom P051, P052

A
5 angled bottom P051, P052

A
6 flat end cylinder P051
7 parabolic end cylinder P051, P052, P053

A L
P051
8 sphere
universal linear
9 P051, P054, P055
level/volume/flow breakpoints

P052 Vessel Dimension A
Dimension A as used for P050 Vessel Shapes 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7, in the chart on page 36.
Range 0.0000 to 99999 in units (P005)

Values Default 0.0
---- Display when P050 = 0
Related Parameters P050 Vessel Shape
Enter one of the following, using the units selected in P005:

• height of the vessel bottom if P050 = 2, 3, 4, or 5
• length of one end-section of the vessel if P050 = 7
P053 Vessel Dimension L
Parameters
Dimension L as used in P050 Vessel Shape 7, in the chart on page 36.

Values Default 0.0
---- Display when P050 = 0
Related Parameters P050 Vessel Shape
Enter the vessel length L (excluding both end sections) if P050 = 7. Use the units selected
in P005.
P054 Level or Head Breakpoints

P054 and 055 can be used to calculate either level and volume in a vessel, or head level
and flow rate in an open channel device. (For more information on Open Channel
Monitoring, please see Open Channel Monitoring (OCM) on page 91).
Level Breakpoints
When the vessel shape is too complex for any of the preconfigured shapes, you can
define the shape as a series of segments. In P054 you assign a level value to each
breakpoint. In P055 you assign a corresponding volume value to each breakpoint.
Primary Index P054

Secondary Index Breakpoint number
Values
Default 0.000
Related Parameters P055 Volume or Flow Breakpoints

Enter up to 32 level breakpoints, where the corresponding volume is known. The 100%
and 0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or the
reverse.
1. First set P050 to 9.
2. Select P054. breakpoint
value field
3. The default breakpoint value appears, with
breakpoint
the breakpoint number in the auxiliary number
reading.
4. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index1 (the auxiliary
reading field goes blank).
5. Key in 1 and press ENTER .
6. Key in the level value for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER . (Use units defined in
Parameters
P005.)
7. Press the UP ARROW key to display 02 in the auxiliary reading.
8. Key in the level value for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until level values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
10. Press DISPLAY twice and use the UP ARROW key to go to P055.
Example:
Breakpoints Level value Breakpoint Level breakpoint Volume breakpoint
number (P054) (P055)
4 8m
1 0 0
2 1 200
3 2m
3 2 1200
2 1m
1 4 8 3200
0m
Note: Illustrated values for P054 and P055 are for example purposes only.
1. For more details on secondary index operation, see page 30.

Head Breakpoints
When measuring flow in an open channel device, you can define the cross-section of the
channel as a series of segments. In P054 you assign a head value to each breakpoint. In
P055 you assign a corresponding flow value to each breakpoint.
Primary Index P054

Values
Default 0.000
Related Parameters P055 Flow Breakpoints
Enter up to 32 head breakpoints, where the corresponding flow is known. The 100% and
0% levels must be entered. The breakpoints can be ordered from top to bottom, or the
Parameters
reverse.
1. First set P050 to 9.
2. Select P054. breakpoint
value field
3. The default breakpoint value appears, with
breakpoint
the breakpoint number in the auxiliary number
reading.
6. Key in the head value for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER . (Use units defined in
P005.)
8. Key in the head value for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until head values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
10. Press DISPLAY twice and use the UP ARROW key to go to P055.
Example: v-notch weir:

flow characterization
Breakpoints Break Head Flow 4
4 -point (P054) (P055)
3
2 4 0.4 m 113.5 3
flow
1
3 0.3 m 55.3
2
2 0.2 m 20.07 1
1 2 3 4
1 0m 0 head
Note: Illustrated values for P054 and P055 are for example purposes only.

P055 Volume or Flow Breakpoints
If you are measuring level and volume, follow the Volume Breakpoints instructions below.
If you are measuring head and flow, follow the Flow Breakpoints instructions on page 41.
Volume breakpoints
Each segment defined by the level breakpoints (P054) requires a corresponding volume,
so that SITRANS Probe LU can make the level-to-volume calculations.
Primary Index P055

Range 0.0000 to 99999 in units
Values
Default 0.0000
Parameters
Related Parameters P054 Level Breakpoints
Typical volume calculations:

Cone Cylinder
V = (1/3)πr2h V = πr2h
Enter a volume for each breakpoint defined in P054. (See illustrated example for P054 on
the previous page.)
1. P050 must be set to 9.
2. Select P055.
3. The empty breakpoint value field appears, with the breakpoint number in the
auxiliary reading field.
6. Key in the volume for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER . (Any volumetric units can
be used: see note to P051.)
8. Key in the volume for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until volume values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
10. Press DISPLAY twice and use the ARROW keys or enter the value for the next
desired parameter.

Flow breakpoints
Each segment defined by the head breakpoints (P054) requires a corresponding flow
value, so that SITRANS Probe LU can make the head-to-flow calculations.
Primary Index P055

Range 0.0000 to 99999 in units
Values
Default 0.0000
Related Parameters P054 Head Breakpoints
Use the Flow Tables associated with your open channel device (Parshall flume, v-notch
weir, or other measuring device) to calculate the flow rate for each head breakpoint.
Parameters
Enter a flow value for each breakpoint defined in P054. (See illustrated example for Head
Breakpoints on page 39.)
1. P050 must be set to 9.
2. Select P055.
3. The empty breakpoint value field appears, with the breakpoint number in the
auxiliary reading field.
6. Key in the flow value for breakpoint 1, and press ENTER .
8. Key in the flow value for breakpoint 2, and press ENTER .
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until flow values have been entered for all the required
breakpoints.
desired parameter.

Lock (P069)
P069 Unlocked value
Stores the value to enter in Lock (P000) to unlock programming. If P000 is locked, P069
will not display the Unlocked value.
Range 1 to 9999
Values Default 1954
---- Display when P000 is locked
Notes:
• Default setting for P000 is unlocked.
Parameters
• After a new value has been stored at P069, that value will be recalled after a master
reset (P999).
• Consult your Siemens representative, if you have forgotten the unlocked value.
Failsafe (P070 to P073)

P070 Failsafe Timer
Sets the time to elapse in minutes since the last valid reading, before Failsafe State
activates.
Range 0.0000 to720.00 min.

Values
Default 100.00 (based on P003)
Note: The last valid reading is maintained until the Failsafe timer expires. After the
timer expires, the reading is set based on P071.
P071 Failsafe Material Level

Allows you to select the material level to be reported when the Failsafe Timer expires.
(For more detail, see Failsafe on page 91.)
1 Use Maximum mA Limit (P213) as material level

2 Use Minimum mA Limit (P212) as material level
Values
3 * Level remains at last reading
4 User-selected value (defined in P073)
1. Enter the value corresponding to the level you want reported when the Failsafe
Timer expires.
2. Press ENTER .

P073 Failsafe level
Defines a user-defined level to report when the Failsafe timer expires.
Range 3.6000 mA to 22.600 mA

Values
Default 22.600 mA
Note: P071 must be set to User-selected value (4) to use this value.
mA Output (P201 to P215)

P201 mA Output Function
Parameters
Alters the mA output/measurement relationship, and allows the output to be set
independently from P001. If a HART master is connected, only the master can change the
value.
0 manual
1 * level
Values 2 space
3 distance
volume (only available if a tank shape has been selected at P050)
4 or flow (only available if 9 is selected at P050, and head level and flow
breakpoints are set at P054 and P055)
Notes:
• P201 is set independently from P001: set P001 first, as changing P001 will reset P201
to the same setting.
• P201 controls the primary value and the loop current for the HART common module
and should not be changed if using HART.
• Selection also affects the secondary, tertiary, and quaternary variables for HART.
• P201 must be set to 0 (manual) before you can modify P911. Remember to restore the
previous setting after using P911.
Independent mA Setpoint Parameters (P210 and P211)

P210 and P211 allow you to explicitly define the normal operating range. Use these
features to reference the minimum and/or maximum mA output to any point in the
measurement range.
For HART, 4 mA and 20 mA represent the upper and lower range limits for the primary
variable.

P201 (mA Function) Settings Response for P210 and P211
Key in the material level in Units (P005) or percent1 of Span
Level, Space, or Distance
(P007) as referenced from Empty (P006).
Key in the volume in Maximum Volume (P051) units or as a
Volume percent1 of Maximum Volume.
1. Ensure the % symbol is displayed before entering a % value.
P210 4 mA Setpoint (low output)
Note: P210 is used to set the 4 mA loop current for the HART common module.
Sets the process level corresponding to the 4 mA value. 4 mA always defaults to 0, and
P201 determines whether this is a Level, Space, Distance, or Volume (or flow)1
Parameters
measurement. Level and Space are measured as a percentage of Span; Distance is

measured as a percentage of Empty.
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 4 mA
face 0%
20 mA Span 4 mA
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
4 mA 20 mA 20 mA
Range –99999 to 99999.

Values 0.000 m (set to 0% as defined by
Default
P201: mA Output Function)
Related Parameters P201: mA Output Function
Enter the reading that is to correspond to a 4 mA output. Use percent or units, depending
on the setting for P051.
1.
To display flowrate instead of volume, see P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape on
page 35.

P211 20 mA Setpoint (high output)
Sets the process level corresponding to the 20 mA value. 20 mA always defaults to 100%,
and P201 determines whether this is a Level, Space, or Distance measurement. Level and
Space are measured as a percentage of Span: Distance is measured as a percentage of
Empty.
Range –99999 to 99999.

5.725 m (18.78 ft) or
Values Default
11.725 m (38.47 ft); set to 100% as
(depends on model)
defined by P201: mA Output Function.
Related Parameters P201: mA Output Function
Enter the reading that is to correspond to a 20 mA output, Use percent or units, depending
Parameters
on the setting for P051.
Note: P211 is used to set the 20 mA loop current for the HART common module.
mA Output Limit Parameters (P212 and P213)

P212 and P213 allow you to explicitly set a failsafe current outside the normal operating
range.
P212 Minimum mA limit

Prevents the mA output from dropping below this minimum level for a measurement
value. This does not restrict the Failsafe or manual settings.
Range 3.800 to 20.500 (mA)

Values
Default 3.800 (mA)
P213 Maximum mA limit

Prevents the mA output from rising above this maximum level for a measurement value.
This does not restrict the Failsafe or manual settings.
Range 3.800 to 20.500 (mA)

Values
Default 20.500 (mA)

P214 4 mA Output Trim
Note: This parameter is for use only by Siemens service personnel.
Calibrates the 4 mA output.
P215 20 mA Output Trim

Note: This parameter is for use only by Siemens service personnel.
Calibrates the 20 mA output.
Installation Records (P300 to P346)

Parameters
P300 Temperature, transducer maximum

Shows the highest temperature encountered (in degrees C), as measured by the
temperature sensor in the transducer (if applicable).
Primary Index Transducer

Range –50 to 150 oC (view only)
Values (view only)
Default –50 (oC)
Press CLEAR then ENTER , to reset the log after a short circuit on the transducer
wiring.
P341 RUN Time

Displays the number of uninterrupted 24 hour periods that the device has been operating.
Range 0 to 99999 (days)

Values (view only)
Default: 0
Related P342: Power-on Resets
P341 is updated once a day.

• If power is cycled before 24 hours have passed, the run time will not be updated.
• If an instrument is powered down on a regular basis, P341 will not have an
accurate value.

P342 Power-On Resets
The number of times power has been applied since the date of manufacture.
Display 0.0 to 99999

Values (view only)
Default: 0
Related P341 RUN Time
This parameter is updated every time the instrument is reset or is powered up.
P343 Internal Temperature
Parameters
WARNING: Internal temperature must not exceed 80 oC (176 oF).
Displays (in degrees C) either the current temperature on the circuit board, or the
maximum or minimum temperature recorded by the internal sensor. The high and low
values are maintained over a power cycle.
Primary Index P343

Value (view only) Range –50 oC to 150 oC
1 * Current temperature
Secondary Index 2 Maximum temperature
3 Minimum temperature
1. Select P343.
2. The primary reading displays a temperature, and the secondary index number is
visible in the auxiliary reading field.
3. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index.
4. Key in the index number required, and press ENTER .
5. The temperature value associated with the new secondary index appears.
desired parameter.

P346 Serial Number
Displays the serial number of the instrument. The numbers stored in Index 2, followed by
the numbers stored in Index 1, give you the complete serial number.
Index 2 Index 1
Values (view only) Range: 00000 to 99999 Range: 00000 to 99999
Example: 1503010 15 03 010
1. Select P346.
2. The primary reading displays one part of the serial number, with the secondary index
number visible in the auxiliary reading field.
3. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index.
Parameters
4. Key in the other index number and press ENTER .

5. The other part of the serial number, associated with the new secondary index,
appears.
desired parameter.
Range Calibration (P650 to P654)

There are two possible types of calibration:
• Offset Adjusts the measurement by a fixed amount

• Sound Velocity Adjusts speed of sound, and changes the measurement
calculations
Do Offset calibration at any steady level, unless a Sound Velocity calibration is also done.
If both calibrations are done, then do Offset at a known high level, and Sound Velocity at
a known low level.

P650 Offset Calibration
Calibrates Empty (P006) if the reported level is consistently high or low by a fixed amount
(stored in P652).
Values Range –99999 to 99999

• P006 Empty
Related • P652 Offset Correction
• P664 Temperature
Before using this feature, verify the following parameters are correct:
• Empty (P006)
• Temperature (P664)
Parameters
Offset Calibration
Begin with a steady level.
1. Press the measurement key to display the calculated reading.

2. Repeat step 1 at least five times, to verify repeatability.
3. Measure the actual reading (use tape measure).
4. Key in the actual value, and press ENTER .
The deviation between the entered Empty (P006) value and the calibrated Empty value is
stored in Offset Correction (P652).
P651 Sound Velocity Calibration

Calibrates the speed of sound constant.

• P653 Velocity
Related
• P654 Velocity at 20 oC
Use P651 under the following conditions:

• The acoustic beam atmosphere is other than air.
• The acoustic beam atmosphere temperature is unknown.
• The reading accuracy is acceptable only at higher material levels.
For best results, calibrate with the level at a known value close to empty.

Using Sound Velocity Calibration
Ensure a steady level at some low value (P653 and P654 adjusted accordingly).
1. Allow sufficient time for the vapor concentration to stabilize.
2. Press the measurement key to display the calculated reading.
3. Repeat step 2 at least five times to verify repeatability.
4. Measure the actual reading (use tape measure).
5. Enter the actual value.
6. Repeat this procedure if the atmosphere type, concentration, or temperature
conditions are different from when the last sound velocity calibration was
performed.
Note: In gases other than air, the temperature variation may not correspond with the
speed of sound variation. Use P660 and P661 to select a temperature source, and use a
Parameters
fixed temperature.
P652 Offset Correction

Stores the fixed offset value determined when an Offset Calibration is performed.

Related • P650 Offset Calibration
Alternatively, if the amount of Offset Correction required is known, enter the amount to be
added to the Reading before display.
P653 Velocity
Notes:
• P653 can only be accessed by entering the parameter number.
• The user cannot change the value of P653 directly, but can affect it via P654 or by
P660/P661.
Displays the value adjusted based on the Sound Velocity at 20 oC (P654) versus
Temperature (P664) characteristics of air.
Values (view only) Range 50.01 to 2001 m/s (164.1 to 6563 ft/s)
• P651 Sound Velocity Calibration
Related • P654 Sound Velocity at 20 oC
• P660/P661 Temperature setting
The units used depend on the setting for P005:

• m/s if P005 = 1, 2, or 3
• ft/s if P005 = 4 or 5.

P654 Sound Velocity at 20 oC
This value is used to automatically calculate Sound Velocity (P653).
Values Range 50.01 to 2001 m/s (164.1 to 6563 ft/s)

• P005 Units
Related • P651 Sound Velocity Calibration
• P653 Velocity
After performing a sound Velocity Calibration, check this value to verify the acoustic
beam atmosphere in air (344.1 m/s or 1129 ft/s).
Temperature Compensation (P660 to P664)
Parameters
P660 Temperature source
Determines the source of the temperature reading used for calculating speed of sound.
1 * Transducer (P664)
Values
2 Fixed temperature (P661)
Note: Maximum Temperature (P300) always uses the transducer as source: it is not
affected by P660.
P661 Temperature fixed

Defines the fixed temperature (in oC) used for calculating speed of sound if P660 is set to
2 (fixed temperature).
Range –40 to 85 oC
Values
Default 20 (oC)
Use this function when you want to manually override the temperature sensor with a
fixed temperature value.
• Set P660 to 2.
• Enter the fixed temperature value you want to use in place of the sensor
temperature.

P664 Temperature
Displays the temperature (in oC) read from the transducer.
Values Range –40 to 85 (oC)
Rate (P700 and P701)

These parameters determine how material level changes are reported.
P700 Maximum Fill Rate

Allows you to further adjust the SITRANS Probe LU response to increases in the actual
Parameters
material level (or an advance to a higher Failsafe Material Level, P071). P700 is
automatically updated whenever Measurement Response (P003) is altered.
Range 0.0000 to 99999 m / min.

Values
Default 0.100
Altered by P003 Measurement Response
P005 Units
Related
P007 Span
Enter a value slightly greater than the maximum vessel-filling rate, in Units (P005) or
percent of Span (P007) per minute.
P003 Value Meters/Minute

1 0.100
2 1.0000
3 10.000
P701 Maximum Empty Rate

Adjusts the SITRANS Probe LU response to decreases in the actual material level (or an
advance to a lower Failsafe Material Level, P071). P701 is automatically updated
whenever Measurement Response (P003) is altered.
Range 0.0000 to 99999 m / min.

Values
Default 0.100 (m)
P005 Units
Related P007 Span

Enter a value slightly greater than the vessel’s maximum emptying rate, in Units (P005) or
percent of Span (P007) per minute.
P003 Value Meters/Minute

1 0.100
2 1.0000
3 10.000
Measurement Verification (P709 to P713)

P709 Damping Filter
Stabilizes the reported level within the Echo Lock Window (P713) in the event of level
Parameters
fluctuations (for example, a rippling or splashing liquid surface). The value is in seconds,
and depends on the number of seconds it takes the device to reach 63% of a step value
change in reading.
Range 0 to 100.00 seconds (0 = off)

Values
Default 10.000 seconds
P007 Span
Related P713 Echo Lock Window
The value is automatically altered when Measurement Response Speed (P003) changes.
The higher the value entered, the greater the range of stabilized fluctuation.
P711 Echo Lock

Use this feature to select the measurement verification process.
0 Off
1 Maximum Verification
Values
2 * Material Agitator
3 Total Lock
P700 Maximum Fill Rate
P701 Maximum Empty Rate
Related P712 Echo Lock Sampling
P713 Echo Lock Window
P820 Algorithm

If a material agitator or mixer is used in the monitored vessel, set Echo Lock for Maximum
Verification or Material Agitator, to avoid agitator blade detection.
Note: Ensure the agitator is always running while SITRANS Probe LU is monitoring the
vessel, to avoid stationary blade detection.
• When Maximum Verification or Material Agitator is selected, a new measurement

outside the Echo Lock Window (P713) must meet the sampling criterion (P712).
• When Total Lock is selected, Echo Lock Window (P713) is pre-set to 0.
SITRANS Probe LU continuously searches for the best echo according to the algorithm
chosen (P820). If the selected echo is within the window, the window is then centered
about the echo. If not, the window widens with each successive shot until the selected
echo is within the window. The window then returns to its normal width.
When Echo Lock is Off, SITRANS Probe LU responds immediately to a new measurement,
Parameters
as restricted by the Maximum Fill / Empty Rate (P700 / P701). However, measurement
reliability is affected.
P712 Echo Lock Sampling

The sampling criterion sets the number of consecutive echoes that must appear above or
below the echo currently locked onto, before the measurements are validated as the new
reading. (Echo Lock P711 must be set to 1 or 2.)
Range 1:1 to 50:50

Format: x:y
Values
x = the number of above echoes
y = the number of below echoes
Related P711 Echo Lock
P711 default value Description P712 pre-set value

1 maximum verification 5: 5
2 * material agitator 5: 2
Example:
• Set P711 to 2 (material agitator)
• The preset values for P712 in this case are 5:2
• Result: a new reading will not be validated unless 5 consecutive measurements
higher or 2 consecutive measurements lower than the current reading occur.
Note: Resetting P711 returns P712 to the respective pre-set values.

P713 Echo Lock Window
Adjusts the size of the Echo Lock Window. This value is automatically altered when
Measurement Response (P003), Maximum Fill Rate (P700), or Maximum Empty Rate
(P701), are altered.
Range 0.000 to 9999

Values
Default 0.000
P005 Units
Related Parameters P711 Echo Lock
The Echo Lock Window is a ’distance window1, centered on the echo used to derive the
reading. When a new measurement falls within the window, the window is re-centered
Parameters
and the new reading calculated. Otherwise, the new measurement is verified by Echo
Lock (P711) before the reading is updated. The distance value of this parameter is given
for a temperature of 20 oC (68 oF).
When the value is 0, the window is automatically calculated after each measurement.
The value is fixed at 0 if Echo Lock (P711) is set to 3.
• For slower Measurement Response values (P003), the window is narrow.
• For faster P003 values the window becomes progressively wider.
Note: The echo lock window is stored as standard samples, but displayed in units
based on P005. Any value entered for P713 will be rounded to the nearest sample.
P752 HART address

Note: Accessible via the handheld programmer only by keying in P752.
Sets the device address or poll ID on a HART network. Any address other than 0 will
cause the output current to be a fixed value, and the current will not indicate the reading.
Values Range 0 to 15
1. Units are those set in P005.

Communications (P799)
P799 Communications Control
Enables the read/write access to parameters via remote communications.
0 Read only
Values 1 * Read/write
2 Restricted access – read only except for P799 which is read/write
Notes:
• P799 controls the access if you are using a HART master.
• P000 controls the lock access if you are using the Siemens handheld programmer.
Parameters
Echo Processing (P800 to P825)

The following parameters are for authorized Siemens Service personnel or technicians
familiar with Siemens echo processing techniques. View the echo profile first, before
attempting to modify these parameters.
P800 Near Blanking 1

Defines the distance from the transducer face to be ignored by the transmitter/receiver.
0.000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or

Range
0.000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Values (depends on model)
(units selected in P005)
Default 0.250 m (0.820 ft)
P006 Empty
Related P007 Span
P838 Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance
To extend the blanking beyond the minimum default, enter a value in the units selected in
P005.
1. For more details, see Blanking Distance on page 89.

P801 Range Extension
Note: SITRANS Probe LU has an absolute maximum range of 7.2 m (23.6 ft). or 14.4 m
(47.24 ft), depending on the model.
Allows the material level to drop below Empty (process empty level), without generating
an LOE state.
Range 0 to 25 (% or units)
Values
Default 20.000 (% of Span)
P006 Empty
Related P007 Span
Parameters
Use this feature if the surface monitored can drop below Empty level (P006) in normal
operation. The value for P801 is added to Empty, and the sum can be greater than the
range of the transducer. Range Extension can be increased (in Units or percent of Span)
to a point where Empty plus Range Extension is greater than the distance from the
transducer face to the furthest surface to be monitored. (The distance below empty is not
blanked.)
• Enter the value as a percentage of P006.
• For vessels with conical or parabolic bottoms, increase the value for P801 to ensure
that an empty vessel reads Empty.
P804 Confidence Threshold

Determines which echoes are evaluated by software.
x:y
Format x = short (range 0 to 99)
Values y = long (range 0 to 99)
Default 10:5
Related Parameters P070 Failsafe Timer
P804 sets the minimum echo confidence that the echo must meet in order to prevent a
Loss of Echo condition and the expiration of the Failsafe timer (P070).
The short and long shot Confidence Thresholds are preset to 10 and 5 respectively. When
Echo Confidence (P805) exceeds the Confidence Threshold, the echo is evaluated by
Sonic Intelligence.
• Key in the value for the short shot, then press (decimal point).
• Key in the value for the long shot, then press ENTER .

P805 Echo Confidence
Measures echo reliability. It displays the echo confidence of the measurement echo from
the last shot. P804 defines the minimum criterion for echo confidence.
x:y
Format x = short (range 0 to 99)
Values (view only) y = long (range 0 to 99)
---- (Shot not used)
P804 Confidence Threshold
Related Parameters P830 TVT Type
Press the measurement key to get a new reading that will update confidence
values.
Parameters
Both short and long shot Echo Confidence values are displayed.
Display Description
x : -- short shot confidence value, (long shot not used)
-- : y long shot confidence value, (short shot not used)
x:y short and long shot confidence values (both used)
E transducer cable is open or short circuited
-- : -- no shots were processed for Sonic Intelligence evaluation
P806 Echo Strength

Displays the absolute strength (in dB above 1 μV rms) of the echo selected as the
measurement echo.
Values (view only) Display –20 to 112
Press the measurement key to get a new reading that will update echo strength.

P807 Noise
Displays the average and peak ambient noise of a noise profile (in dB above 1 μV rms)
as x.y. Noise level is a combination of transducer acoustic noise and receiving circuitry
noise.
x:y
Values (view only) Format x = average (range: –20 to 99)
y = peak (range: –20 to 99)
After a measurement, the values from the previous noise shot will be displayed. Press the
measurement key to get a new reading that will update the noise profile.
Algorithm (P820)
Parameters
P820 Algorithm
Selects the algorithm to be applied to the echo profile to extract the true echo.
3 Largest echo (L)

4 First echo (F)
Values
8 * best of Largest or First echo (bLF)
12 true First echo (tF)
For more clarification on the different options, please contact your local representative.
P825 Echo marker

The point on the primary echo on which the measured value is based. The value is
entered in percent of echo height, which allows the Echo Lock Window to be set so that it
intersects the Echo Profile at the sharpest rising portion of the Echo Profile.
Range 5 to 95%
Values
Default 50 (%)

TVT (Time Varying Threshold) Adjustment Parameters
(P830 to P839)
First SITRANS Probe LU learns the echo profile. Then the learned profile, or part of the
learned profile, is used to screen out false echoes.1
The following parameters are for authorized Siemens Service personnel or technicians
familiar with Siemens echo processing techniques. View the echo profile first, before
attempting to modify these parameters.
P830 TVT Type

Selects the TVT Curve used.
Parameters
1 * TVT Short Curved
2 TVT Short Flat
3 TVT Long Flat

Values
4 TVT Long Smooth Front
5 TVT Long Smooth
6 TVT Slopes
Altered By • P002 Material
Related • P805 Echo Confidence
Select the TVT type which gives the highest confidence (P805) under all level conditions.
Use this parameter with caution, and do not use TVT Slopes with the F (First) or bLF (best
of Largest or First echo) Algorithm (P820).
P831 TVT Shaper

Note: This parameter is for use by Siemens Service personnel.
Turns the TVT Shaper ON or OFF.
1. For more detail, see TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves on page 89.

P832 TVT Shaper Adjust
Note: This parameter is for use by Siemens Service personnel.
Allows manual adjustment of the TVT curve.
P837 Auto False-Echo Suppression

Use P837 and P838 together, to set SITRANS Probe LU to ignore false echoes1. Use P838
to set the Auto TVT distance first.
Notes:
• This function works best when the vessel is empty or nearly empty: use it only if
there is a minimum distance of 2 meters from the transducer face to the material.
Parameters
If SITRANS Probe LU displays a full level, or if the reading fluctuates between a false high
level and a correct level, set P837 to elevate the TVT in this region and to de-sensitize the
receiver from any ‘base noise’ caused by internal transducer reflections, nozzle echoes,
or other vessel false echoes. Set P838 and then P837 (detailed instructions follow P838).
0 * Off
Use ’learned’ TVT. (See ’learned TVT curve’ in Display
Values 1
after Auto False Echo Suppression on page 62.)
2 Learn

(or when P837 = 0)
default TVT
true P839
echo Hover Level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
1. For more detail, see TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves on page 89.

Defines the range of Auto False-Echo Suppression (P837) to use for ignoring false
echoes. (Units are defined in P005.)
Maximum range:
Range
0.000 to 6.000 m (20 ft) or
Values (depends on model)
0.000 to 12 m (40 ft)
Determine the actual distance from the transducer face to the material surface. Subtract
0.5 m from this distance, and enter the result.
Set Up:
Parameters
1. Perform this function when the vessel is empty or nearly empty.

2. Determine actual distance from transducer face to material level.
3. Select P838 and key in [distance to material level minus 0.5 m].
4. Press ENTER .
5. Select P837.
6. Press 2 and then press ENTER . P837 will revert to 1 (use Learned TVT)
automatically after a few seconds.
TVT curve
material
(learned)
level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)

P839 TVT Hover Level
Defines (in percent) how high the TVT curve is placed above the profile, relative to the
largest echo. When SITRANS Probe LU is located in the center of the vessel, lower this
parameter to prevent multiple echo detections.
Range 0 to 100%
Values
Default 33 (%)
Diagnostic Tests (P900 to P924)

P900 Software Revision Number
Parameters
Displays the software revision level.
Values (view only) Range 0.00 to 99.99

1 Main code revision
2 Primary boot revision
Secondary index 3 Alternative boot revision
4 Hardware stack revision
Default Determined by the software revisions installed
1. Select P900.
2. The secondary index number is visible in the auxiliary reading field.
3. Press DISPLAY twice to focus control on the secondary index (the auxiliary
4. Key in the index number required, and press ENTER .
5. The software revision level associated with the new secondary index appears.
desired parameter.

P901 Memory Test
Press ENTER to activate the test.
IdLE Normal operation
PASS Memory test successful
Values (view only) F1 Fail RAM
F2 Fail EEPROM
F3 Fail FLASH
Measurement
P911 mA Output Value
Parameters
Access this parameter to display the current value of the mA output.
Range 3.6 to 22.6 (mA)

Values (HART)
Default 4 mA in HART fixed current mode
1. Set P201 to 0 (manual).

2. Enter a test value.
Note: P201 must be set to 0 to enable the test value to be entered at P911: be sure to
restore P201 to the previous setting after the test!
P912 Temperature
Displays the temperature in oC (as monitored by the connected transducer). This value is
not affected by Temperature Source (P660).
Values (view only) Range –40 to 85 (oC)

P920 Reading Measurement
P920 corresponds to the final reading after all programming is applied. It is a copy of one
of P921 to P924, depending on the setting for Operation (P001).
Operation P001 Source Parameter for P920

0 Off ––––
Related
1 Level P921 if P050 = 0, otherwise P924
parameters
2 Space P922
3 Distance P923
P920 Values –99999 to 99999 (dimensional units, if volume
Range:
(view only) has not been selected)
Parameters
(P001 = 1) (P001 = 2) (P001 = 3)
transducer 4 mA
face 0%
20 mA Span 4 mA
Space
P007
P006
Level
Empty Empty
Empty 0% 100% 100%
4 mA 20 mA 20 mA
P921 Material Measurement

Displays the distance between Empty /process empty level (P006) and the monitored
surface, in Units (P005) or percent of Span (P007).
Values (view only) Range –99999 to 99999
P922 Space Measurement

Displays the distance between the monitored surface and Span / process full level (P007).

P923 Distance Measurement
Displays the distance between the monitored surface and the transducer face.
P924 Volume (or Flow) Measurement

The calculated vessel capacity in Maximum Volume (P051) or percent of Maximum
Volume (volume calculation must be enabled at P050).
Range : –99999 to 99999

Values (view only) Display when volume calculation is not
----
enabled at P050 (P050 = 0)
Parameters
P051 Maximum Volume

Related Parameters
P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape
P999 Master Reset

Note: Following a Master Reset, complete reprogramming is required.
Resets all parameters to their factory settings, with the following exceptions:
• P000 and P069 are not reset.
• The learned TVT curve is not lost.
Use this feature after upgrading software:
1. Select P999.
2. Press CLEAR then ENTER to Clear All and initiate reset.
3. Reset complete.
(Note: Reset takes several
seconds to complete.)

Appendix A: Alphabetical Parameter
List
A: Parameter List
Parameter Name Parameter Number Page Number
20 mA Output Trim 215 46
20 mA Setpoint (high output) 211 45
4 mA Output Trim 214 46
4 mA Setpoint (low output) 210 44
Algorithm 820 59
Auto False Echo Suppression 837 61
Auto False Echo Suppression Distance 838 62
Communications Control 799 56
Confidence Threshold 804 57
Damping Filter 709 53
Distance Measurement 923 66
Echo Confidence 805 58
Echo Lock 711 53
Echo Lock Sampling 712 54
Echo Lock Window 713 55
Echo Marker Trigger 825 59
Echo Strength 806 58
Empty (process empty level) 006 33
Failsafe Level 073 43
Fail-Safe Material Level 071 42
Fail-Safe Timer 070 42
Internal Temperature 343 47
Language 010 34
Level (or Head) Breakpoints 054 37
Lock 000 30
mA Output Function 201 43
Maximum mA Limit 213 45
Minimum mA Limit 212 45

mA Output Value 911 64
A: Parameter List
Master Reset 999 66

Material 002 32
Material Measurement 921 65
Maximum Empty Rate 701 52
Maximum Fill Rate 700 52
Maximum Volume 051 35
Measurement Response 003 32
Memory Test 901 64
Near Blanking 800 56
Noise 807 59
Offset Calibration 650 49
Offset Correction 652 49
Operation 001 31
Power-On Resets 342 47
Range Extension 801 57
Reading Measurement 920 64
RUN Time 341 46
Serial Number 346 48
Software Revision Number 900 63
Sound Velocity at 20 oC 654 51
Sound Velocity Calibration 651 49
Space Measurement 922 65
Span (process full level) 007 33
Temperature 664 52
Temperature 912 64
Temperature fixed 661 51
Temperature source 660 51
Temperature, transducer maximum 300 46

TVT Hover Level 839 63
A: Parameter List
TVT Shaper 831 60
TVT Shaper Adjust 832 61
TVT Type 830 60
Units 005 33
Unlocked value 069 42
Velocity 653 50
Vessel Dimension ‘A’ 052 37
Vessel Dimension ‘L’ 053 37
Vessel Shape 050 35
Volume (or Flow) Breakpoints 055 40
Volume (or Flow) Measurement 924 66

A: Parameter List

Appendix B: Programming Chart
Number Parameter Name Value
000 P000 Lock
001 P001 Operation
002 P002 Material to be monitored
003 P003 Measurement Response
005 P005 Units
006 P006 Empty (process empty level)
B: Programming Chart
007 P007 Span (process full level)
010 P010 Language
050 P050 Vessel (or Channel) Shape
051 P051 Maximum Volume
052 P052 Vessel Dimension A
053 P053 Vessel Dimension L
054 P054 Level or Head Breakpoints
055 P055 Volume or Flow Breakpoints
069 P069 Unlocked value
070 P070 Failsafe Timer
071 P071 Failsafe Material Level
073 P073 Failsafe level
201 P201 mA Output Function
210 P210 4 mA Setpoint (low output)
211 P211 20 mA Setpoint (high output)
212 P212 Minimum mA limit
213 P213 Maximum mA limit
214 P214 4 mA Output Trim
215 P215 20 mA Output Trim
300 P300 Temperature, transducer maximum
341 P341 RUN Time
342 P342 Power-On Resets
343 P343 Internal Temperature
650 P650 Offset Calibration
651 P651 Sound Velocity Calibration
652 P652 Offset Correction

653 P653 Velocity
654 P654 Sound Velocity at 20 oC
660 P660 Temperature source
661 P661 Temperature fixed
664 P664 Temperature
700 P700 Maximum Fill Rate
701 P701 Maximum Empty Rate
709 P709 Damping Filter
711 P711 Echo Lock

712 P712 Echo Lock Sampling
713 P713 Echo Lock Window
799 P799 Communications Control
800 P800 Near Blanking
801 P801 Range Extension
804 P804 Confidence Threshold
805 P805 Echo Confidence
806 P806 Echo Strength
807 P807 Noise
820 P820 Algorithm
825 P825 Echo marker
830 P830 TVT Type
831 P831 TVT Shaper
832 P832 TVT Shaper Adjust
837 P837 Auto False-Echo Suppression
838 P838 Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance
839 P839 TVT Hover Level
900 P900 Software Revision Number
901 P901 Memory Test
911 P911 mA Output Value
912 P912 Temperature
920 P920 Reading Measurement
921 P921 Material Measurement
922 P922 Space Measurement

923 P923 Distance Measurement
924 P924 Volume (or Flow) Measurement
999 P999 Master Reset


Appendix C: HART Communications
Highway Addressable Remote Transducer, HART, is an industrial protocol that rides on
top of a 4-20 mA signal. It is an open standard, and full details about HART can be
obtained from the HART Communication Foundation at www.hartcomm.org
SITRANS Probe LU can be configured over the HART network using either the HART
Communicator, or a software package. There are a number of different software
packages available, and the SITRANS Probe LU should work well with any of them. The
recommended software package is the SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) by
Siemens.
HART Electronic Device Description (EDD)

Note: SITRANS Probe LU (HART) cannot be configured using a generic EDD.
In order to configure a HART device, the configurator must have the HART Electronic
Device Description for the device in question. HART EDD’s are controlled by the HART
Communication Foundation.
C: HART Communications
Please contact your local Siemens representative concerning the availability of the HART
EDD for SITRANS Probe LU. Older versions of the library will have to be updated in order
to use all the features in the SITRANS Probe LU.

HART Communicator 275/375:
Chart 1
On Line PV
1. PV 1. PV is Level
2. Level 2. SV is Space
3. % Range 3. TV is Distance
4. AO 4. 4V is Volume
5. Device Setup
6. Refresh
Device Setup Quick Setup

1. Master Reset 1. Units
2. Quick Setup 2. Empty Wear Sensor Status
3. Display 3. Span 1. Run Time 1. Hardw/Firmw fail
4. Diagnostics 4. Language 2. number resets 2. Diagnostic warn
5. PV Exchange 5. Operation 3. Max Temp 3. Reading question
6. Device Data 6. Material 4. Int Temp 4. Simulation mode
7. Rate 7. Response
8. Review Status
Electronics Status
Display 1. Sensor status
1. RAM error
1. Level 2. Electronics status
2. ROM error
2. Space 3. Software status
3. FLASH error
3. Distance 4. Application status
4. Stack overflow
4. Volume
5. Error signal Self Test
1. Self Test Software Status
Diagnostics 1. Calib error
1. Wear 2. Temp out of range
2. Status Range Calibration
3. Self Test 1. Offset Application Status
4. Range Calibration 2. Velocity at 20 1. Loss of echo
5. trim analog output 3. Offset Calib 2. Failsafe

6. Simulate AO 4. Snd Vel Calib
PV Exchange Trim Analog Output

1. Read Analog Out 1. D/A trim
2. Select Analog Out 2. Scaled D/A trim
Simulate AO
1. 4 mA
2. 20 mA
3. Other
4. End
Device Data Units
1. Units 1. Units
2. Basic Setup
3. Detailed Setup
Basic Setup (See Chart 2 )
4. Output param
5. Device information
6. HART information Detailed setup (See Chart 3)
Rate
1. Max Fill Output param (See Chart 4)
2. Max Empty
Device information
1. Tag
Review 2. Descriptor
(all parameters)
3. Message
4. Final asmbly num
Manufacturer data
5. Last config
6. Manufacturer data 1. Serial No
2. Revision
HART information
1. Manufacturer
2. Model
3. HART Dev ID
4. Universal rev
5. Fld dev rev
6. Software rev
7. Hardware rev

Chart 2
Standard Setup
Basic Setup
1. URV
1. Master Reset 2. LRV
2. Standard Setup 3. Damping
3. Quick Setup
4. Sensor Temp Quick Setup
5. Volume 1. Units
6. Failsafe 2. Empty
3. Span
4. Language
5. Operation
6. Material
7. Response
Sensor Temp
1. Temp Source
2. Temp Fixed
3. Sensor Temp
4. Sensor Temp
Volume Shape
1. Shape no volume
2. Max Vol calculation
3. Dim A no volume calculation
4. Dim L flat level bottom
5. Bk LevVol Gr cone/pyramid bottom
parabol bottom
half sphere bottom
Failsafe flat sloped bottom
1. mA Function cylinder flat ends
2. FS Timer cylinder parabol end
sphere
3. FS default measure
4. FS Advance universal linear
5. FS level val
Bk LevVol Gr
Bk LevVol 1_32

Chart 3
Echo Lock Echo Lock
Detailed Setup Shaper V1_10
1. Echo Lock mat agitator
2. Sampling Up off 1. TVT breakpoint 1
1. Echo Lock max verific
3. Sampling Down 2. TVT breakpoint 2
2. Echo Select mat agitator
4. Window 3. TVT breakpoint 3
3. TVT Setup total lock
4. Echo Quality 4. TVT breakpoint 4
Echo Select algorithm 5. TVT breakpoint 5
1. Algorithm bLF 6. TVT breakpoint 6
2. Blanking L 7. TVT breakpoint 7
3. Rng Ext F 8. TVT breakpoint 8
4. Marker bLF
tF 9. TVT breakpoint 9
TVT breakpoint 10
Auto TVT
Shaper V1_20
off
TVT Setup off 1. TVT breakpoint 11
on 2. TVT breakpoint 12
1. Auto TVT learn
2. Range 3. TVT breakpoint 13
3. Hover P831-Mode 4. TVT breakpoint 14
4. P831-Mode off 5. TVT breakpoint 15
5. TVT Type off 6. TVT breakpoint 16
on 7. TVT breakpoint 17
6. Shaper Val
TVT type 8. TVT breakpoint 18
short curved 9. TVT breakpoint 19
Echo Quality short flat TVT breakpoint 20
long flat
1. Confidence short long smooth flat Shaper V21_30
2. Confidence long slopes
3. Strength Shaper Val 1. TVT breakpoint 21
4. Noise Average 2. TVT breakpoint 22
1. Shaper V1_10
5. Noise Peak 3. TVT breakpoint 23
2. Shaper V1_20
6. Threshold short 4. TVT breakpoint 24
3. Shaper V21_30
7. Threshold long 5. TVT breakpoint 25
4. Shaper V31_40
6. TVT breakpoint 26
TVT breakpoint 30
Shaper V31_40
TVT breakpoint 40

Chart 4
Output param Analog Output
1. Analog output 1. Read Analog Out FS default measurement

2. Apply values Apply values 2. mA Function
3. Local Display 1. 4 mA 3. FS default measure hold
4. HART output 2. 20 mA 4. Min mA hold
3. Exit 5. Max mA high
6. Low Setpoint low
7. High Setpoint select
Local Display
1. Write protect
2. Lock
3. Write Protect
4. unlock value
HART Output
1. Poll addr
2. Num req preams
3. Num resp preams
SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM):

This software package is designed to permit easy configuration, monitoring and
troubleshooting of HART devices. The HART DD for the SITRANS Probe LU was written
with SIMATIC PDM in mind and has been extensively tested with this software.
The Device Description for SIMATIC PDM may be downloaded from the product page of
our website at: https://pia.khe.siemens.com/index.asp?Nr=11157, under Downloads.
All parameters accessible via the HART Communicator are also accessible via PDM. In
addition, the Maintenance parameters listed below are accessible via PDM only.
Maintenance settings (accessible via PDM only)

Device Lifetime
Total Device Operating Time
Remaining Device Lifetime
Maintenance Required Limit
Maintenance Demanded Limit
Maintenance Alert Activation
Total Expected Device Life
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge

Sensor Lifetime
Total Sensor Operating Time
Remaining Sensor Lifetime
Total Expected Sensor Life
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge
Service Interval
Time Elapsed Since Last Service
Total Service Interval
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge
Calibration Interval
Time Elapsed Since Last Calibration

Total Calibration Interval
Units
Maintenance Status
Acknowledge Status
Acknowledge
HART Version
The SITRANS Probe LU (HART) conforms to HART rev. 5.
Burst mode
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) does not support burst mode.
Multidrop Configuration
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) does not support multidrop configuration.

Appendix D: Troubleshooting
Communication Troubleshooting
Generally:
1. Check the following:
• There is power at the unit
• The LCD shows the relevant data
• The device can be programmed using the handheld programmer
2. Verify that the wiring connections are correct.
Specifically:
If you try to set a SITRANS Probe LU parameter via remote communications, but the
parameter remains unchanged:
• Some parameters can only be changed when the device is not scanning. Try putting
the device in program mode using the operating mode function.
• Try setting the parameter from the keypad. (First make sure that the lock parameter
[P000] is set to the value stored in P069.)
• The communications control parameter P799 must be set to 1 to be able to write
parameters to SITRANS Probe LU.
D: Troubleshooting
mmmmm

General Fault Code
Note: Some faults cause the device to go to Failsafe mode (Fault 52). These are indicated
with an asterisk (*).
Code Meaning Corrective Action

S:0 * The device was unable to get a measurement Ensure installation details are
within the Failsafe Timer period. Possible correct. Ensure no antenna buildup.
causes: faulty installation, antenna buildup, Adjust process conditions to
foaming/other adverse process conditions, minimize foam or other adverse
invalid calibration range. conditions. Correct range
calibration. If fault persists, contact
your local Siemens representative.
S:2 * The device is operating in a low power Correct the power supply
condition that is outside its operating range. (resistance or voltage).
As a result, a valid measurement has not been
taken for the failsafe timer period, and the
device will be put into failsafe mode.
S:3 Device is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Required Limit.
S:4 Device is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Demanded Limit.
S:6 Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Required Limit.
S:7 Sensor is nearing its lifetime limit according to Replacement is recommended.

the value set in Maintenance Demanded Limit.
S:8 Service interval as defined in Maintenance Perform service.

Required Limit has expired.
D: Troubleshooting
S:9 Service interval as defined in Maintenance Perform service.

Demanded Limit has expired.
mmmmm
S:11 Internal temperature sensor failure. Repair required: contact your local

Code Meaning Corrective Action (cont’d)
S:12 Internal temperature of device has exceeded Relocate device and/or lower
specifications: it is operating outside its process temperature enough to
temperature range. cool device. Inspect for heat-
related damage and contact your
local Siemens representative if
repair is required.
S:17 Calibration interval as defined in Maintenance Perform calibration.

Required Limit has expired.
S:18 Calibration interval as defined in Maintenance Perform calibration.

Demanded Limit has expired.
S:28 * Internal device failure caused by a RAM Repair required: contact your local
memory error. Siemens representative.
S:29 * EEPROM damaged. Repair required: contact your local

S:31 * Flash error. Repair required: contact your local

S:33 * Factory calibration for the internal Repair required: contact your local
temperature sensor has been lost. Siemens representative.
S:34 * Factory calibration for the device has been Repair required: contact your local
lost. Siemens representative.
S:35 * Factory calibration for the device has been Repair required: contact your local
lost. Siemens representative.
S:36 * Unable to start microwave module. Reset power. If error persists,

contact your local Siemens
representative.
D: Troubleshooting
S:37 * Measurement hardware problem. Reset power. If error persists,

mmmmm
representative.
S:38 * Failure in the device electronics. Reset power. If fault persists,

representative: repair required.

S:39 * Transducer temperature sensor failure.. Reset power. If fault persists,
representative: repair required.
S:40 Transducer temperature too high. Relocate device and/or lower

process temperature enough to
cool device. Inspect for heat-
related damage and contact your
local Siemens representative if
repair is required.
S:41 Transducer temperature too low. Relocate device and/or raise

process temperature enough to
warm device. Inspect for damage
and contact your local Siemens
representative if repair is required.
S:42 Factory calibration for the transducer Repair required: contact your local
temperature sensor has been lost. Siemens representative.
S:43 * Factory calibration for the radar receiver has Repair required: contact your local
been lost. Siemens representative.
S:44 * Factory calibration for the echo slope has Repair required: contact your local
been lost. Siemens representative.
S:45 * No valid boot program detected: firmware Repair required: contact your local
corrupt. Siemens representative.
S:48 * User configuration is invalid. One or more of Reconfigure the unit. Ensure Span
parameters: Span, Volume breakpoints, and/or (P007) is not set to 0; check the
Auto False-Echo Suppression, are set to breakpoints (only required if P050 is
invalid values. set to 9); do a P999 reset.
D: Troubleshooting
S:49 * EEPROM corrupt. Repair required: contact your local

mmmmm


S:52 Failsafe is activated. Possible causes: 1) For 3) and 4) Correct configuration;

hardware failure; 2) memory failure; 3)Fault 48; ensure installation is correct; no
4) failsafe timer expired– possible causes: antenna buildup; adjust process
faulty installation, antenna buildup, foaming/ conditions to minimize foaming/
other adverse process conditions, invalid other adverse conditions; correct
calibration range. calibration range. If fault persists,
or for 1) and 2), contact your local
S:53 * Configuration lost: one or more parameter Restore user parameters using
settings have been lost. This may occur after SIMATIC PDM.
a firmware upgrade causes user parameters
to be reset.
Operation Troubleshooting
Operating symptoms and probable causes.1
Symptom Meaning Probable cause
• material or object in contact with transducer face
status symbol
• transducer face is too close to the fill point
flashes • transducer face is not perpendicular to the liquid
surface
Failsafe timer starts
• change in level too fast
running.
• measurement out of range
• foam on liquid surface
• high level of vibration in the mounting structure
• level inside the blanking zone
D: Troubleshooting
status symbol
does not flash,
and LOE
mmmmm
alternates The `Waiting' period

has expired.
with reading
Refer to P003 Measurement Response on page 32, or P070 Failsafe Timer on page 42, for
duration of `Waiting' periods.
1. For details on blanking, see Blanking Distance on page 89.

D: Troubleshooting
mmmmm

Appendix E: Maintenance
SITRANS Probe LU requires no maintenance or cleaning.

All changes and repairs must be done by qualified personnel, and applicable safety
regulations must be followed. Please note the following:
• The user is responsible for all changes and repairs made to the device.
• All new components must be provided by Siemens Process Instruments Inc.
• Do not re-use faulty components.
E: Maintenance

E: Maintenance

Appendix F: Technical References
F: Technical References
Principles of operation
The transducer emits a series of ultrasonic pulses: each pulse is reflected as an echo
from the material and sensed by the transducer. The echo is processed by
SITRANS Probe LU, using Siemens ’ proven Sonic Intelligence techniques. Filtering is
applied to help discriminate between the true echo from the material, and false echoes
from acoustic and electrical noises and agitator blades in motion.
The time for the pulse to travel to the material and back is temperature compensated and
then converted into distance for display and mA output.
Blanking Distance
The crystal which produces the transmit pulse has to stop vibrating before it can receive
an echo. The blanking1 distance is the space in front of the transducer face where level
measurement is not possible, because within that distance, the echo would return before
the vibration had ceased.
The reference point for measuring blanking distance is the transducer face. The minimum
recommended blanking value is 0.25 m (10"), but this can be increased in order to extend
the blanking.
TVT (Time Varying Threshold) curves

A TVT curve describes a threshold below which any echoes will be ignored. The default
TVT curve is used, until P837 and P838 are used to create a new ’learned TVT curve’.
Auto False-Echo Suppression

False echoes can be caused by an obstruction in the beam path (pipes, ladders, chains,
and such). Such false echoes may rise above the default TVT curve.
P838 allows you to set a distance, and P837 then instructs the Probe LU to ’learn’ where
the obstructions/false echoes are within that distance. The new TVT curve is set above
the false echoes, screening them out.
1. Also referred to as "Near Blanking".

(or when P837 = 0)
default TVT
true P839
echo Hover Level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)
TVT curve
material
(learned)
level
Level (db)
false
echo
Distance (meters)

Open Channel Monitoring (OCM)
OCM converts a level reading (head) into a flow value using a linear algorithm.
SITRANS Probe LU can convert a head level measurement into a flow rate, using a thirty-
two breakpoint head-versus-flow characteristic curve. This chart is usually available
from the manufacturer of the v-notch weir, Parshall flume, or other open channel device.
Parameter P050 must be set to 9 (universal linear function), and breakpoints must be set
for head levels and corresponding flowrates at parameters P054 and P055. Once these
parameters are set, the mA output is scaled to represent the flowrate, and the RUN mode
display will show the flowrate
Example: Flow Characterization.
11
10
9
flow (P055)
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
head (P054)
The maximum and minimum points on the curve must be defined. Then program the
remaining breakpoints to closely match the flow curve of your open channel device.
Failsafe
The Failsafe function can be activated either if there is not a valid measurement, or by
one of the faults marked by an asterisk in the table General Fault Code on page 82. In
Failsafe mode, the device will output one of the four options determined by P071 (Failsafe
Material Level).
Failsafe Mode P071

1 = HI Use Maximum mA Limit (P213) as material level
2 = LO Use Minimum mA Limit (P212) as material level
3 = HOLd Level remains at last reading
4 = SEL User-selected value (defined in P073)

If an invalid measurement is generated by the application (for example, material level
outside threshold settings), the Failsafe timer (P070) will control the speed of the Failsafe
response. When the Failsafe timer expires, the device outputs the value selected in P071.
If a valid measurement is received before the timer expires, the timer will be reset.
If Failsafe mode is activated by a fault (see General Fault Code on page 82), the
instrument will go into Failsafe mode without delay.
Chemical compatibility
The plastic materials used in the construction of SITRANS Probe LU (ETFE, PBT, and
PVDF) are resistant to attack from most chemicals. For exposure to specific
environments, check with chemical compatibility charts before installing and operating
SITRANS Probe LU in your application.
Startup Behavior
Notes:
• SITRANS Probe LU (HART) is designed to start reliably with a power supply
capable of delivering at least 25 mA.
• When connected to a power supply with a current limit of < 25 mA, the Probe LU
may not start reliably.
Typical Startup Current
35
Loop Power Supply
30
without Current Limit
25
Current (mA)
20
Loop Power Supply with
15 25 mA Current Limit
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Time (seconds)
No
withcurrent
currentlimit
limited power supply Current-limited
without current power
limited power supply

Appendix G: Hazardous area
installations
• Wiring details
• Instructions specific to hazardous area installations
Wiring Details
Intrinsically Safe Model
G: Hazardous Installation
FM (reference drawing 23650516: see page 99)
CSA (reference drawing 23650517: see page 100)
Under the entity evaluation concept, SITRANS Probe LU has the following
characteristics:
(input voltage) Ui = 30 V DC (max.)

(input current) Ii = 120 mA DC (max.)
(input power) Pi = 0.8 W
Definition:
The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus to associated
apparatus not specifically examined in such combination. The criteria for interconnection
is that the voltage and current which intrinsically safe apparatus can receive and remain
intrinsically safe, considering faults, must be equal to or greater than the output voltage
(Uo) and output current (Io) levels which can be delivered by the associated apparatus,
considering faults and applicable factors. In addition, the maximum unprotected
capacitance (Ci) and Inductance (Li) of the intrinsically safe apparatus, including
interconnecting wiring, must be equal to or less than the capacitance and inductance
which can be safely connected to associated apparatus.

FM/CSA
• Approved dust-tight and water-tight conduit seals are required for outdoor
NEMA 4X / type 4X / NEMA 6, IP67, IP68 locations.
• The maximum voltage of the non-intrinsically safe apparatus must not exceed 250 V rms.
• Recommended intrinsically safe barriers are listed on page 95.
Hazardous Area Non-hazardous Area
load EEx ia
4 – 20
Certified Barrier
mA
2
PLC (active)
Zone 0, 1, or 2
HART handheld
Communicator
EU Equivalency
Any zener diode safety barrier, certified by an EU approved certification body to
[ EEx ia ] IIC, its output voltage (Uo) not exceeding 30 V and its output current (Io) limited
by load resistance (Ro); such that Io = Uo / Ro, does not exceed 120 mA.

Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance
Power Supply Requirements
1000
900 (30.0v,845 ohms)
800
L
RL=44.6*VL - 493.4
Loop Resistance - R
700
600
500
400
(17.8v, 300 ohms)
300
RL=272.7*VL - 4554.1 ALLOWABLE OPERATING
200 AREA
100
(16.7v, 0 ohms)
0
10.00 15.00 20.00 25.00 30.00
Loop Voltage-VL
(Source voltage)
IS Safety Barrier Selection

Selecting a suitable barrier or power supply requires knowledge about Intrinsic Safety
and the application. It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure that the intrinsically
safe installation complies with both the apparatus approval requirements and the
relevant national code of practice.
How to select a passive barrier for SITRANS Probe LU

1. Make sure that the barrier safety description is suitable for the SITRANS Probe LU
Intrinsically Safe (IS) input parameters.
2. Determine the maximum end-to-end resistance of the barrier (Re-e) from the data
sheet.
3. Determine other loop resistance (Rloop): for example, sense resistance, displays,
and/or PLC inputs.
4. Calculate Rworking = Re-e + Rloop.

5. Determine any non-linear voltage drops due to the barrier (Vbarrier) from the barrier
data sheet (for example, voltage drops due to diodes).
6. Calculate Vworking = Vsupply – Vbarrier.
7. Using Vworking and Rworking, confirm that operation is within the shaded area of
the graph Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance on page 95.
Notes:
• The following list is not complete: there are many safety barriers on the market,
which will work with the SITRANS Probe LU.
• The barriers listed below have all been tested and are functionally compatible with
the SITRANS Probe LU.
• The barriers listed below are all HART compatible.
PLC Input Modules

Manufacturer Part Number
Siemens SM331 PCS7 HART Input Module
Passive Shunt Diode Barriers

Note: A well regulated supply voltage is required.

MTL 7787P+ (Dual channel)
Stahl 9001/01-280-100-10 (Single channel)
Stahl 9002/01-280-110-10 (Dual channel)
Active barriers (repeating barriers)

Siemens 7NG4122-1AA10
MTL 706
MTL 7206
Stahl 9001/51-280-110-14

Wiring setups for hazardous area installations
Always check the device nameplate and process device tag to verify the approval rating.
1. Intrinsically Safe wiring
Device nameplate (ATEX/IECEX/INMETRO/RCM)
KCC-REM-S49
PROBELU
Ex ia IIC T4 Ga
DNV 12.0070 X
Ui = 30 V
The ATEX certificate can be downloaded from the product

page of our website at: www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Approvals /
Certificates.
The IECEx certificate listed on the nameplate can be viewed on the IECEx website. Go to:
http://iecex.iec.ch and click on Ex Equipment Certificates of Conformity then enter the
certificate number IECEx SIR 13.0008X.
Device nameplate (FM/CSA)

SITRANS Probe LU
FM Intrinsically Safe connection drawing number 23650516, and CSA Intrinsically Safe
connection drawing number 23650517 can be downloaded from the product page of our
website at: www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level
• For power demands see “Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance” on page 95.
• For wiring requirements: follow local regulations.
• Refer to “Instructions specific to hazardous area installations (Reference European
ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU, Annex II, 1/0/6)” on page 98.
2. Non-incendive wiring (FM US only)

FM Class 1, Div 2 connection drawing

number 23650583 can be downloaded from the product page of our website at:
www.siemens.com/probelu. Go to Support > Installation Drawings > Level Measurement >
Continuous - Ultrasonic.
• For power demands, see “Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance” on page 95 of
Appendix A.

(Reference European ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU, Annex II, 1/0/6)
The following instructions apply to the SITRANS Probe LU covered by certificate number SIRA
06ATEX2355X:
2. The equipment is certified for use as Category 1G equipment.
3. The equipment may be used with flammable gases and vapors with apparatus groups IIA,
IIB, and IIC, and temperature classes T1, T2, T3, and T4.
4. The equipment is certified for use in an ambient temperature range of –40 °C to +80 °C.
Directive 2014/34/EU Annex II, clause 1.5).

personnel in accordance with the applicable code of practice (EN 60079-14 and EN 60079-
17 in Europe).
7. Repair of this equipment shall be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance
with the applicable code of practice (e.g. EN 60079-19 within Europe).
8. Components to be incorporated into or used as replacements in the equipment shall be
fitted by suitably trained personnel in accordance with the manufacturer’s
documentation.
9. It is the responsibility of the user to ensure that manual override is possible in order to
shut down the equipment and protective systems incorporated within automatic
processes which deviate from the intended operating conditions, provided that this does
not compromise safety.
10. The ‘X’ suffix to the certificate number relates to the following special conditions for safe
use:
Parts of the enclosure may be non-conducting and may generate an ignition-
capable level of electrostatic charge under certain extreme conditions. The
user should ensure that the equipment is not installed in a location where it
may be subjected to external conditions (such as high-pressure steam) which
might cause a build-up of electrostatic charge on non-conducting surfaces.
11. If the equipment is likely to come into contact with aggressive substances, then it is the
Aggressive substances:e.g. acidic liquids or gases that may attack metals, or
solvents that may affect polymeric materials.
Suitable precautions: e.g. regular checks as part of routine inspections or
establishing from the material’s data sheet that it is
resistant to specific chemicals.
12. Equipment Marking:
The equipment marking contains at least the information on the product nameplate, shown on
page 97.

A5E32337695
HAZARDOUS AREA NON-HAZARDOUS AREA
SAFE AREA APPARATUS

Load
4 – 20 mA
NOTES:
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
1. ANY CSA / FM INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER / POWER SUPPLY, WITH ITS OUTPUT (SEE NOTE 1)
VOLTAGE (Uo) NOT EXCEEDING 30 V AND ITS OUTPUT CURRENT (Io) LIMITED BY
LOAD RESISTANCE (Ro); SUCH THAT Io = Uo / Ro, DOES NOT EXCEED 120 mA
2. APPROVED DUST-TIGHT AND WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT SEALS ARE REQUIRED

FOR CLASS II, DIV.1, Gr. E, F, G AND OUTDOOR NEMA 4X/TYPE 4X LOCATIONS
3. THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF THE NON-INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS

MUST NOT EXCEED 250 V rms.
4. UNDER THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT, THE SITRANS Probe LU HAS THE
FOLLOWING:
Ui = 30 VOLTS D.C. Ii = 120 mA Pi = 0.8 W
Ci = 3.6 nF Li = 0.5 mH
5. SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR INTRINSIC SAFETY.
6. INSTALL PER NEC / CEC
7. USE SUPPLY WIRES RATED FOR 10 ° ABOVE.
8. EXTERNAL BONDING HUBS ARE REQUIRED WHEN BOTH CONDUIT ENTRIES ARE USED.
THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT IS A METHOD USED TO DETERMINE

CHANGE THE Li VALUE TO 0.5 mH APRIL
ACCEPTABLE COMBINATIONS OF INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS AND 1 PER ECO 79B42578
RPC SN 09/2007
DEC
CONNECTED ASSOCIATED APPARATUS THAT HAVE NOT BEEN 0 FOR APPROVAL RPC SN 17/03
INVESTIGATED IN SUCH COMBINATION.
Product Group
ULTRASONICS
ENTITY CONCEPT DEFINITION: THE ENTITY CONCEPT ALLOWS THE INTERCONNECTIONS OF INTRINSICALLY NTS B
SAFE APPARATUS TO ASSOCIATED APPARATUS NOT SPECIFICALLY EXAMINED IN SUCH COMBINATIONS. 17 / DEC / 03
FM Intrinsically safe connection drawing
THE CRITERIA FOR INTERCONNECTION IS THAT THE VOLTAGE AND CURRENT WITH INTRINSICALLY SAFE R. CLYSDALE
S. MILLIGAN
SITRANS Probe LU,
APPARATUS CAN RECEIVE AND REMAIN INTRINSICALLY SAFE, CONSIDERING FAULTS, MUST BE EQUAL OR
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

S. NGUYEN
INTRINSICALLY SAFE
GREATER THAN THE VOLTAGE (Uo) AND CURRENT (Io) LEVELS WHICH CAN BE DELIVERED BY
THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS, CONSIDERING FAULTS AND APPLICABLE FACTORS. IN ADDITION, THE MAX. PETERBOROUGH CONNECTION DIAGRAM
FOR INTERNAL
UNPROTECTED CAPACITANCE (Ci) AND INDUCTANCE (Li) OF THE INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPARATUS, INCL.
INTERCONNECTING WIRING, MUST BE EQUAL OR LESS THAN THE CAPACITANCE AND INDUCTANCE WHICH
USE ONLY 23650516 1
CAN BE SAFELY CONNECTED TO THE ASSOCIATED APPARATUS.
2365051601 1:1 1 1
Page 99
Page 100
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
V OC £ V max
I SC £ I max SAFE AREA
APPARATUS
C a ³ C i + C cable
Load
4-20 mA L a ³ L i + L cable
INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER

(SEE NOTES 1 & 2)
Substitution of components
may impair intrinsic safety.
NOTES:
1. ANY CSA CERTIFIED INTRINSICALLY SAFE BARRIER OR ASSOCIATED

APPARATUS WITH A LINEAR OUTPUT.
2. UNDER THE ENTITY EVALUATION CONCEPT, THE SITRANS Probe LU

HAS THE FOLLOWING INPUT PARAMETERS :
Vmax = 30 VOLTS I max = 120 mA Ci = 3.6 nF Li = 0.5 mH

FEB
1 CHANGE Li VALUE TO 0.5 mH PER ECN 2004-0046 RPC SN 26/2004
DEC
Pmax = 0.8 W OR (Vmax x I max) / 4 = 0.8 W 0 FOR APPROVAL RPC SN 17/03
SITRANS Probe LU (HART) – OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3. APPROVED DUST-TIGHT AND WATER-TIGHT CONDUIT SEALS ARE REQUIRED Product Group
ULTRASONICS
FOR CLASS II, DIV.1, GROUP G AND OUTDOOR TYPE 4X LOCATIONS NTS B
17 / DEC / 03
R. CLYSDALE
SITRANS Probe LU,
CSA Intrinsically Safe connection drawing
3. THE MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF THE SAFE LOCATION APPARATUS S. MILLIGAN

MUST NOT EXCEED 250 V rms. CSA INTRINSICALLY SAFE
S. NGUYEN
PETERBOROUGH CONNECTION DRAWING
FOR INTERNAL
4. INSTALLATION TO BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE CANADIAN ELECTRICAL CODE PART 1.
.
USE ONLY 23650517 1
2365051701 1:1 1 1
A5E32337695
FM Class 1, Div. 2 connection drawing
NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION

(SAFE) CLASS I, DIV.2, GROUPS A, B, C, D
METAL CONDUIT
1/2 “ NPT
24 V
POWER
SUPPLY
SITRANS Probe LU
NOTES:
1
SEPT
0 FOR CONSTRUCTION RPC SN 29/2004
Product Group
ULTRASONICS
29 / SEPT / 2004
NTS A
R. CLYSDALE
S. MILLIGAN
SITRANS Probe LU
CLASS I, Div. 2
S. NGUYEN
CONNECTION DRAWING
FOR INTERNAL PETERBOROUGH
USE ONLY 23650583 0

2365058300 1:1 1 1


Appendix H: Firmware Revision History
Firmware
DD Rev. Date Changes
Rev.
1.00 1.00 04 Jun 2004
2.01 2.01.01 23 Sept 2005 • Increased breakpoints to 32.

• MP&F parameters added to product.
• Fault system upgraded to use S# fault codes.
2.02 2.01.06 4 May 2008 • Maintenance release
2.03 2.01.06 9 Sept 2008 • Internal release
2.04 2.01.06 25 May 2013 • Maintenance release
H: Firmware revision

H: Firmware revision

Glossary
acoustic noise: any undesired audible sound.
accuracy: degree of conformity of a measure to a standard or a true value.
agitator: mechanical apparatus for mixing or aerating. A device for creating turbulence.
algorithm: a prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for the solution of a problem in a
finite number of steps.
ambient temperature: the temperature of the surrounding air that comes in contact with the
enclosure of the device.
attenuation: a term used to denote a decrease in signal magnitude in transmission from one
point to another. Attenuation may be expressed as a scalar ratio of the input magnitude to
the output magnitude or in decibels.
Auto False-Echo Suppression: a technique used to adjust the level of a TVT curve to avoid the
reading of false echoes. (See TVT.)
Auto False-Echo Suppression Distance: defines the endpoint of the TVT distance. (See TVT.)
This is used in conjunction with auto false echo suppression.
beam angle: the angle diametrically subtended by the one-half power limits (-3 dB) of the
sound beam.
beam spreading: the divergence of a beam as it travels through a medium.
blanking: the distance in front of the transducer face where level measurement is not possible.
capacitance: the property of a system of conductors and dielectrics that permits the storage of
electricity when potential differences exist between the conductors. Its value is
expressed as the ratio of a quantity of electricity to a potential difference, and the unit is a
Farad.
confidence: describes the quality of an echo. Higher values represent higher quality.
Glossary
Confidence threshold defines the minimum value.
damping: term applied to the performance of an instrument to denote the manner in which the
measurement settles to its steady indication after a change in the value of the level.
dB (decibel): a unit used to measure the amplitude of signals.

derating: to decrease a rating suitable for normal conditions according to guidelines specified
for different conditions.
dielectric: a nonconductor of direct electric current.
echo: a signal that has been reflected with sufficient magnitude and delay to be perceived in
some manner as a signal distinct from that directly transmitted. Echoes are frequently
measured in decibels relative to the directly transmitted signal.
echo confidence: the recognition of the validity of the echo. A measure of echo reliability.
Echo Lock Window: a window centered on an echo in order to locate and display the echo’s
position and true reading. Echoes outside the window are not immediately processed.
Echo Marker: a marker that points to the processed echo.
Echo Processing: the process by which the device determines echoes.
Echo Strength: describes the strength of the selected echo in dB above 1 μV rms.
Echo Profile: a graphical display of a processed echo.
electrical noise: unwanted electrical signals that produce undesirable effects in the circuits of
the control systems in which they occur.
false echo: any echo which is not the echo from the desired target. Generally, false echoes are
created by vessel obstructions.
frequency: the number of periods occurring per unit time. Frequency may be stated in cycles
per second.
hertz (Hz): unit of frequency, one cycle per second. 1 kilohertz (kHz) is equal to 103 Hz.
HART: Highway Addressable Remote Transducer. An open communication protocol used to

address field instruments.
inductance: the property of an electric circuit by virtue of which a varying current induces an
electromotive force in that circuit or in a neighboring circuit. The unit is a Henry.
multiple echoes: secondary echoes that appear as double, triple, or quadruple echoes in the
Glossary
distance from the target echo.
Near Blanking: see Blanking
nozzle: a length of pipe mounted onto a vessel that supports the flange.
parameters: in programming, variables that are given constant values for specific purposes or
processes.

pulse: a wave that departs from an initial level for a limited duration of time, and returns to the
initial level.
range: distance between a transmitter and a target.
range extension: the distance below the zero percent or empty point in a vessel.
repeatability: the closeness of agreement among repeated measurements of the same

variable under the same conditions.
shot: one transmit pulse or measurement.
stillpipe: a pipe that is mounted inside a vessel parallel to the vessel wall, and is open to the
vessel at the bottom.
stilling-well: see stillpipe.
TVT (time varying threshold): a time-varying curve that determines the threshold level above
which echoes are determined to be valid.
ultrasonic: having a frequency above the human ear’s audibility limit: about 20,000 hertz.
Glossary

Notes
Glossary

Index
A H
Abbreviations and Identifications hand programmer
list 2 access to SITRANS Probe LU 20
accuracy 7 detailed instructions 21
agitator blade detection hazardous area installations
avoiding 54 wiring requirements 97
agitators 54 I
algorithm Identifications and Abbreviations
select for true echo 59 list 2
Approvals 10 installation
ARROW keys hazardous area requirements 97
primary/secondary index function 30 L
Auto False-Echo Suppression language
instructions 61 selection 23
B level measurement 31
blanking 89 lock value 42
extending 56 Loop Voltage versus Loop Resistance 95
breakpoints loop voltage vs. loop resistance
level 37 power supply requirements 97
volume 40 M
C maintenance 87
changing parameter values 23 master reset 22, 66
D material mixers 54
damping 53 measurement mode 23
default values multidrop configuration 80
factory settings 29 N
dimensions 13 near blanking
distance measurement 31 extending 56
E see also blanking 89
echo confidence Noise parameter 59
display 18 O
set threshold 57 operation
echo confidence reading 58 measurement modes 31
echo strength P
update 58 parameter
echo verification 32 accessing 21
F changing value 21
factory settings 29 parameter reset
default values 29 factory default 21
Failsafe parameters 42 master reset 22
false echo suppression PDM 79
instructions 61 percent or units 22
Index
false-echo suppression power supply requirements

setting 61 loop voltage vs. loop resistance 95, 97
function keys (RUN) specifications 7
display echo confidence 18 primary index 29

accessing 29
changing a value 29
principles of operation 89
programming chart 71
Q
quick start programming
instructions 23
setup steps 22
R
range extension 57
repair 87
reset parameters
factory default 21
master reset 22
resistance
loop voltage vs. loop resistance 95
S
safety barrier selection 95
secondary index 29
accessing 30
changing value 30
security
lock value 42
unlock value 42
setup instructions
quick start programming 23
SIMATIC Process Device Manager 75
SIMATIC Process Device Manager (PDM) 79
software revision number 63
space measurement 31
T
temperature specification
Ambient/Operating 11
U
units or percent 22
unlock value 42
V
vessel shape
conical bottoms 57
parabolic bottoms 57
selection 36
voltage
loop voltage vs. loop resistance 95
volume measurement 31
volume parameters 34
W
Index
wire gauge 15
Z
zener diode safety barriers 94

Siemens Canada Limited

1954 Technology Drive Printed in Canada
P.O. Box 4225 Subject to change without prior notice
Peterborough, ON A5E32337695 Rev. AC
Canada K9J 7B1 © Siemens AG 2017

Operating Instructions SITRANS Probe LU (HART) 08/2017 Edition Ultrasonic Transmitters

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Operating Instructions SITRANS Probe LU (HART) 08/2017 Edition Ultrasonic Transmitters

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SUPPORT DOCUMENTATION

Sepro Contact Details: Sepro Mineral Systems Corp.

Sepro Mineral Systems Corp.

Service and maintenance 6

Electromagnetic sensor type SITRANS F M MAG

Siemens AG order number: A5E03063678 Copyright © Siemens AG 2010.

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

8 Technical data ......................................................................................................................................... 37

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

1.1 Items supplied

 SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

1.3 Further Information

Product information on the Internet

Worldwide contact person

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

2.1 Laws and directives

Instrument safety standards

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

Compliance with PED directive

Flange mm PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 150 lb 300 lb

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

1000 LVD PED* N/A N/A PED

PED Product covered by PED and only available as fully PED-conforming

2.2 Installation in hazardous area

Hazardous area approvals

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

3.1 System components

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

MAG 5100W compact MAG 5100W compact

3.2 Theory of operation

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

Ui = When an electrical conductor of length L is moved at velocity v, perpendicular to the

Sensorprom memory unit

USM II "Plug & Play" add-on communication modules

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

4.1 Installation safety precautions

4.2 Determining a location

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

Figure 4-1 Correct installation in U-tube

● Avoid the following installations

Figure 4-2 Correct installation with filled pipes

Figure 4-3 Correct installation at low point in system before outlet

Inlet and outlet conditions

Figure 4-4 Inlet and outlet conditions

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

Installation in large pipes

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

4.3 Orienting the sensor

Figure 4-5 Vertical orientation, upwards flow

● Horizontal installation, terminal box upwards or downwards

Figure 4-6 Horizontal installation, various terminal box positions

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

Figure 4-7 Correct installation with gaskets

Figure 4-8 Avoid vibrations

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

Figure 4-9 Torques values

Table 4- 1 Maximum allowable torques

DN PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 AWWA

SITRANS F M MAG 5100 W

DN PN 10 PN 16 PN 40 Class 150 AWWA

4.5 Potential equalization